HomeMy WebLinkAboutContract ' Award Date: November 1, 2010 CAG-10-120
Awarded to: Kamins Construction
19315 Ross Road
' Bothell, WA 98011
Award Amount: $293,060.11
1
1 Bidding Requirements, City of Renton
Forms, Contract Forms, Conditions of the
' Contract, Plans and Specifications
1
Construction of:
1
Lake Washington Beach lift Station
Replacement
p cement
1
PROJECT NO.
WWP-27-3557
' September 2010
1 City of Renton
1055 South Grady Way
1 Renton, WA 98057
Project Manager: Michael Benoit,(425)430-7206
1
City of F ,
' CITY OF RENTON
RENTON, WASHINGTON
' CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
forthe
Lake Washington Beach Lift Station Replacement
g ep acement
PROJECT NO.
WWP-27-3557
' September, 2010
' BIDDING REQUIREMENTS
' CONTRACT FORMS
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
SPECIFICATIONS
PLANS
' C
�.� M. v°y n o
OF S9ASI �C� ��0Y WASh
�` o � Fe• o
�O �FOISTFg�� 46679 O
F, l?F' �o� E�tSTERF
SSIONAL ESC �SSfflhAL *
-N CO-
i
M
1
KAMINC*928LD
19315 Ross Road
Bothell,WA 98011
Phone 206-396-9115 Fax 877-710-9005
Contact List:
Responsible Officer,
Chad Kamins
206-396-9115 24 hrs.
Job Foreman,
Tom Anderson
206-396-8917 24 hrs.
Insurance Agent,
Bell Anderson Insurance
Carmen Meyers
425-458-2301
Bonding Agent,
CB &MS of Washington
Chris Fix
206-361-9693
1
ADDENDUM NO. 1 October 5,2010
WWP-27-3557 Page 1 of 3
ii
I
CITY OF RENTON
Lake Washington Reach Lift Station Replacement
ADDENDUM NO. 1 .
Date issued: October 5,2010 Date of Bid Opening: October 12,2010
i
4
i
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF RECEIPT OF ADDENDA
SIGNED:
TITLE: � t
NAME OF COMPANY: f`XM4 r S co r%S:f-ryc-4'0 a.
Page 1 Addendum#1
Provided to Builders Exchange of WA,Inc.For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com-Always Verify Scale
1
ADDENDUM NO.1 October 5,2010
WWP-27-3557 Page 2 of 3
NOTICE TO ALL PLAN HOLDERS
The Bid Documents for the project are modified as described below. Bidders shall incorporate this
Addendum into the Bid Documents. Failure to do so may subject the bidder to disqualification of his bid.
THE BID DOCUMENTS ARE MODIFIED AS FOLLOWS:
1. Revise the language in Section 1-05.4 Conformity With and Deviation from Plans and Stakes at
the end of the first paragraph:All costs for this survey Work shall be included in GGAtFaetor
Supplied .the lump sum bid price for"Lake Washington Beach Lift
Station Replacement"
2. Delete the language in Sub-Section 10.16052, Paragraph 1.01.6.1f:Sub Seetieti 10.46159 WiFe
E9^iiez
3. Delete the language In Sub-Section 10.16052, Paragraph 3.03.1-113:Wiring cenneetions to Fnete
leads shall be Via FiRg type teFFRiRS'eanneetion on both the mlester leadis aRell peweF leads as
speeifled in Sub Section 19.3 fil 50
4•E vent as required to allow 5 feet from
4. Add language to Key Note 10 on Drawing C-0 Extend q �
vent discharge and new pump control panel.Support with stainless steel strut,clamps and
hardware as required to prevent any flexibility in vent pipe.
S. Add Key Mote 5 with a leader pointing below the control panel in Detail C,Power Panel Elev/Detail
on Drawing E-01,to read: Expanded metal enclosure not shown for clarity.
6. Add Key Note 6 with a leader pointing to the trench cover below the control panel in Detail C,Power
Panel Elev/Detail on Drawing E-01 to read:Notch trench cover to avoid conflict with expanded
' metal enclosure above.
i
7. Remove existing Standard Plan EM230, Electrical Equipment Support Structure and replace with
revised Standard Plan EM230,Electrical Equipment Support Structure.
lI
I
i
i
I
i
1 .
i
r
I
1 '
Page 2
'Provided to Builders Exchange of WA,Inc.For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxvm.com-Always Verify Scale
ADDENDUM NO. 1 October 5, 2010
WWP-27-3557 Page 3 of 3
This Addendum No. 1,pages 1 through 3 and the attached standard plan,shall become part of the
~� Contract and all provisions of the Contract shall apply thereto.
- The time provided for completion of the Contract is not changed.
Bidders shall acknowledge receipt of all Addenda by number.
f
Attachments:
Standard Plan EM230 Electrical Equipment Support Structure
i
1
CAROLLO ENGINEERS,P.C.
i
r i
i
Brian M.Casey
PE NO.46632
ri
' Michael A. Benoit,Project Manager,Wastewater Utilities Phone:425-430-7206
S
I
. i
s
Page 3 ^
I
CITY OF RENTON
WWP-27-3557
' Lake Washington Beach Lift Station Replacement
CONTRACT DOCUMENT TABLE OF CONTENTS
Summary of Fair Practices Policy
Summary of Americans with Disability Act Policy
Scope of Work
t Vicinity Map
Instructions to Bidders
Call for Bids
*Proposal &Combined Affidavit&Certificate Form:
Non-Collusion
' Anti-Trust Claims
Minimum Wage Form
*Dept. of Labor and Industies Certificate of Registration
*Bid Bond Form
*Schedule of Prices
❖Bond to the City of Renton
' ❖Fair Practices Policy Affidavit of Compliance
❖Contract Agreement(Contracts other than Federal-Aid FHWA)
*:•City of Renton Insurance Information Form
' *City of Renton Standard Endorsement Form
Prevailing Minimum Hourly Wage Rates
Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages
Affidavit of Prevailing Wages Paid
Special Provisions
Standard Plans
Documents marked as follows must be submitted at the time noted and must be executed by the
Contractor, President and Vice President or Secretary if corporation by-laws permit. All pages must
be signed. In the event another person has been duly authorized to execute contracts, a copy of the
corporation minutes establishing this authority must be attached to the bid document.
* Submit with Bid
*:* Submit at Notice of Award
CITY OF RENTON
' Planning/Building/Public Works Department
1055 South Grady Way
Renton, Washington 98057
CITY OF RENTON
SUMMARY OF FAIR PRACTICES POLICY
ADOPTED BY RESOLUTION NO. 3229
' It is the policy of the City of Renton to promote and provide equal treatment and service to all
citizens and to ensure equal employment opportunity to all persons without regard to race, color,
national origin, ethnic background,gender, marital status, religion, age or disability,when the City
of Renton can reasonably accommodate the disability, of employees and applicants for
employment and fair, non-discriminatory treatment to all citizens. All departments of the City of
Renton shall adhere to the following guidelines:
(1) EMPLOYMENT PRACTICES-The City of Renton will ensure all employment related
activities included recruitment, selection, promotion, demotion, training,
retention and separation are conducted in a manner which is based on job-
related criteria which does not discriminate against women, minorities and other
protected classes. Human resources decisions will be in accordance with
individual performance, staffing requirements, governing civil service rules, and
labor contract agreements.
(2) COOPERATION WITH HUMAN RIGHTS ORGANIZATIONS - The City of Renton will
I cooperate fully with all organizations and commissions organized to promote fair
practices and equal opportunity in employment.
(3) AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PLAN - The City of Renton Affirmative Action Plan and
Equal Employment Program will be maintained and administered to facilitate
equitable representation with the City work force and to assure equal
employment opportunity to all. It shall be the responsibility of elected officials,
the Mayor, the Affirmative Action Officer, department administrators, managers,
supervisors, Contract Compliance Officers and, all employees to carry out the
policies, guidelines and corrective measures set forth in the Affirmative Action
Plan and Equal Employment Program.
(4) CONTRACTORS' OBLIGATIONS - Contractors, sub-contractors, consultants and
suppliers conducting business with the City of Renton shall affirm and subscribe
to the Fair Practices and Non-discrimination policies set forth by the law and in
the City's Affirmative Action Plan and Equal Employment Program.
1 Copies of this policy shall be distributed to all City employees, shall appear in all operational
documentation
of the City, including bid calls, and shall be prominently displayed in appropriate city facilities.
rCONCURRED IN by the City Council of the City of RENTON, Washington,this 7thday of October, 1996.
CITY OF RENTON: RENTON CITY COUNCIL:
iMayor Council President
Attest: `
City Cler
CITY OF RENTON
SU R JARYOFAM ERICANSWITHDISABILITIESACTPOLICY
ADOPTED BY RESOL UTIONNO. 3007
The policy of the City of Renton is to promote and afford equal treatment and service to all citizens and to assure
employment opportunity to persons with disabilities, when the City of Renton can reasonably accommodate the
disability. This policy shall be based on the principles of equal employment opportunity, the Americans With
Disabilities Act and other applicable guidelines as set forth in federal, state and local laws. All departments of the City
of Renton shall adhere to the following guidelines:
(1) EMPLOYMENT PRACTICES - All activities relating to employment such as
recruitment, selection, promotion,termination and training shall be conducted in a non-
discriminatory manner. Personnel decisions will be based on individual performance,
staffing requirements, and in accordance with the Americans With Disabilities Act and
other applicable laws and regulations.
(Z) COOPERATION WITH HUMAN RIGHTS ORGANIZATIONS - The City of
Renton will cooperate fully with all organizations and commissions organized to
promote fair practices and equal opportunity for persons with disabilities in
employment and receipt of City services, activities and programs.
(3) AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT POLICY -The City of Renton Americans
With Disabilities Act Policy will be maintained to facilitate equitable representation
within the City work force and to assure equal employment opportunity and equal
access to City services, activities and programs to all people with disabilities. It shall
be the responsibility and the duty of all City officials and employees to carry out the
policies and guidelines as set forth in this policy
(4) CONTRACTORS' OBLIGATION - Contractors, subcontractors, consultants and
suppliers conducting business with the City of Renton shall abide by the requirements
of the Americans With Disabilities Act and promote access to services, activities and
programs for people with disabilities.
Copies of this policy shall be distributed to all City employees, shall appear in all operational documentation of the City,
uiclud ng bid calls, and shall be prominently displayed in appropriate City facilities.
t .CONCURRED 1N by the City Council of the City of Renton, Washington,
j
this 4th day of October 1993.
CITY,'QF RENTON RENTON CITY COUNCIL: r
j
Mayor
Council President
Attest: j
i
City Clerk
I
I
CITY OF RENTON
WWP-27-3557
Lake Washington Beach Lift Station Replacement
SCOPE OF WORK
I The work involved under the terms of this contract document shall be full and complete installation of
the facilities, as shown on the plans and as described in the construction specifications, to include but
not be limited to:
The construction of the Lake Washington Beach Lift Station, including below-grade wet well and valve
vault, inlet gravity sanitary sewer pipeline, and above-grade control panel, antenna, backflow
preventer, fencing, and entrance gates. The Work also consists of decommission and partial demolition
of the existing Lake Washington Beach Lift Station, demolition of landscaped area, pavement
rehabilitation, parking lot surface slurry sealing, parking lot restriping, and electrical conduit extension
and service modifications.
Any contractor connected with this project shall comply with all Federal, State, County, and City codes
and regulations applicable to such work and perform the work in accordance with the plans and
specifications of this contract document. A total of 100 working days will be allowed for the completion
of this project from anticipated date of commencement(Notice to Proceed), November 29, 2010.
i
1
t '
I LL
NTS
Ez
t __
ko
0
-ip- I-LH
-A
IAXE
-WASHINGTON
L
OULON
PARK
IOJEC��
LO AT",
DE
VICINITY MAP
LAKE WASHINGTON BEACH
LIFT STATION REPLACEMENT
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1. Sealed bids for this proposal will be received b the City of Renton at the office of the Renton City
Y Y y
Clerk, Renton City Hall, until the time and date specified in the Call for Bids.
At this time the bids will be publicly opened and read, after which the bids will be considered and
the award made as early as.practicable.
No proposal may be changed or withdrawn after the time set for receiving bids. Proposals shall be
submitted on the forms attached hereto.
2 Any omissions, discrepancies or need for interpretation should be brought, in writing, to the
attention of the Project Engineer. Written addenda to clarify questions that arise may then be
1 issued.
No oral statements by Owner, Engineer, or other representative of the owner shall, in any way,
modify the contract documents, whether made before or after letting the contract.
t3 The work to be done is shown in the plans and / or specifications. Quantities are understood to
be only approximate. Final payment will be based on actual quantities and at the unit price bid.
The City reserves the right to add or to eliminate portions of that work as deemed necessary.
4. Plans may be examined and copies obtained at the Public Works Department Office. Bidders shall
satisfy themselves as to the local conditions by inspection of the site.
5. The bid price for any item must include the performance of all work necessary for completion of
that item as described in the specifications.
6. The bid price shall be stated in terms of the units indicated and as to a total amount. In the event
of errors,the unit price bid will govern. Illegible figures will invalidate the bid.
7. The right is reserved to reject any and/or all bids and to waive informalities if it is deemed
advantageous to the City to do so.
8. A certified check or satisfactory bid bond made payable without reservation to the Director of
Finance of the City of Renton in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid shall
accompany each bid proposal. Checks will be returned to unsuccessful bidders immediately
following the decision as to award of contract. The check of the successful bidder will be returned
provided he enters into a contract and furnishes a satisfactory performance bond covering the full
amount of the work within ten days after receipt of notice of intention to award contract. Should
he fail, or refuse to do so, the check shall be forfeited to the City of Renton as liquidated damage
for such failure.
9. All bids must be self-explanatory. No opportunity will be offered for oral explanation except as
the City may request further information on particular points.
10. The bidder shall, upon request, furnish information to the City as to his financial and practical
ability to satisfactorily perform the work.
11. Payment for this work will be made in Cash Warrants.
12. The contractor shall obtain such construction insurance (e.g. fire and extended coverage, worker's
compensation, public liability, and property damage as indicated on forms enclosed under
Attachment A herein and as identified within Specification Section 1-07.18.
13. The contractor, prior to the start of construction, shall provide the City of Renton a detailed bar
chart type construction schedule for the project.
14 Before starting work under this contract, the Contractor is required to supply information to the
City of Renton on all chemical hazards Contractor is bringing into the work place and potentially
exposing City of Renton Employees.
' 15. Payment of retainage shall be done in accordance with Section 1-09.9(1) "Retainage.
16. Basis For Approval
The construction contract will be awarded by the City of Renton to the lowest, responsible,
responsive bidder. The bidder shall bid on all bid.schedules items of all schedules set forth in the
bid forms to be considered responsive for award. The total price of all schedules will be used to
determine the successful low responsive bidder.
Partial bids will not be accepted. The owner reserves the right to award any or all schedules of the
Bid to meet the needs of the City. The intent is to award to only one BIDDER.
17. Trench Excavation Safety Systems
As required by RCW 39.04.180, on public works projects in which trench excavation will exceed a
depth of four feet, any contract therefor shall require adequate safety systems for the trench
excavation that meet the requirements of the Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act,
Chapter 49.17 RCW. These requirements shall be included in the Bid Schedule as a separate item.
The costs of trench safety systems shall not be considered as incidental to any other contract item
and any attempt to include the trench safety systems as an incidental cost is prohibited.
18. Payment of Prevailing Wages
In accordance with Revised Code of Washington Chapters 39.12 and 49.28 as amended or
supplemented herein, there shall be paid to all laborers, workmen or mechanics employed on this
contract the prevailing rate of wage for an hour's work in the same trade or occupation in the area
of work regardless of any contractual relationship which may exist, or be alleged to exist, between
the CONTRACTOR and any laborers,workmen, mechanics or subconsultants.
The most recent issue of the prevailing wage rates are included within these specifications under
section titled "Prevailing Minimum Hourly Wage Rates". The Contractor is Responsible for
obtaining updated issues of the prevailing wage rate forms as they become available during the
duration of the contract. The wage rates shall be included as part of any subcontracts the
Contractor may enter into for work on this project.
19. Pollution Control Requirements
Work under this contract shall meet all local, state and federal requirements for the prevention of
environmental pollution and the preservation of public natural resources. The CONTRACTOR shall
conduct the work in accordance with all applicable pollution control laws. The CONTRACTOR shall
comply with and be liable for all penalties, damages, and violations under Chapter 90.48 RCW, in
performance of the work. The CONTRACTOR shall also comply with Article 4 in the Puget Sound
Air Pollution Control Agency Regulation III regarding removal and encapsulation of asbestos
materials.
1
20. Standard Specifications
All work under this contract shall be performed in accordance with the followin g standard
specifications except as may be exempted or modified by the City of Renton Supplemental
Specifications, Special Provisions other sections of these contract documents. These standard
specifications are hereby made a part of this contract and shall control and guide all activities
within this project whether referred to directly, paragraph by paragraph, or not.
1. WSDOT/APWA"2008 Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction"
and "Division 1 APWA Supplement" hereinafter referred to by the abbreviated title
"Standard Specifications."
A. Any reference to "State," "State of Washington," "Department of Transportation,"
"WSDOT," or any combination thereof in the WSDOT/APWA standards shall be
modified to read "City of Renton," unless specifically referring to a standard
specification or test method.
B. All references to measurement and payment in the WSDOT/APWA standards shall be
detected and the measurement and payment provisions of Section 1-09.14,
Measurement and Payment(added herein) shall govern.
21. A preliminary geotechnical engineering report has been completed based on subsurface
explorations approximately 200 feet from the new lift station site and is available for
imformational purposes only. A copy may be obtained on-line through Builders Exchange of
Washington, Inc., at http://www.bxwa.com. Click on "bxwa.com"; "Posted Projects", "Public
Works", "City of Renton" , "Projects Bidding". The Bidders shall familiarize themselves adequately
with the project site and existing subsurface conditions as needed to submit their bid. Upon
approval of the City, the Bidder may make such subsurface explorations and investigations as they
see fit. The Bidder shall be responsible for protection of all existing facilities, utilities and other
buried or surface improvements and shall restore the site to the satisfaction of the City.
22 Bidder's Checklist
❑ It is the responsibility of each bidder to ascertain if all the documents listed on the attached
index are included in their copy of the bid specifications. If documents are missing, it is the
sole responsibility of the bidder to contact the City of Renton to obtain the missing documents
prior to bid opening time.
❑ Have you submitted, as part of your bid, all documents marked in the index as "Submit With
Bid"?
❑ Has bid bond or certified check been enclosed?
❑ Is the amount of the bid guaranty at least 5 percent of the total amount of bid including sales
tax?
❑ Has the proposal been signed?
❑ Have you bid on ALL ITEMS and ALL SCHEDULES?
❑ Have you submitted the Subcontractors List(If required)
❑ Have you reviewed the Prevailing Wage Requirements?
❑ Have you certified receipt of addenda, if any?
❑ Have you submitted the Dept. of Labor & Industries Certificate of Registration form?
i
' CAG-10-120
CITY OF RENTON
CALL FOR BIDS
' Lake Washington Beach Lift Station Replacement
tWWP-27-3557
Sealed bids will be received until 2:30 p.m.,Tuesday, October 12, 2010, at the City Clerk's office,
t 7`h floor, and will be opened and publicly read in the Council Conference Room 720 on the
seventh floor, Renton City Hall, 1055 South Grady Way for the Lake Washington Beach Lift
Station Replacement project.
' The work to be performed within 100 working days from the date of commencement under this
contract shall include, but not be limited to:
' The construction of the Lake Washington Beach Lift Station, including below-grade wet well and
valve vault, inlet gravity sanitary sewer pipeline, and above-grade control panel, antenna,
backflow preventer, fencing, and entrance gates. The Work also consists of decommission and
' partial demolition of the existing Lake Washington Beach Lift Station, demolition of landscaped
area, pavement rehabilitation, parking lot surface slurry sealing, parking lot restriping, and
electrical conduit extension and service modifications.
' The City reserves the right to reject any and/or all bids and to waive any and/or all informalities.
Bid documents will be available September 28, 2010. Plans, specifications, addenda, and the
' plan holders list for this project are available on-line through Builders Exchange of Washington,
Inc., at http://www.bxwa.com. Click on "bxwa.com"; "Posted Projects", "Public Works", "City of
Renton" , "Projects Bidding". (Note: Bidders are encouraged to "Register as a Bidder," in order
' to receive automatic email notification of future addenda and to be placed on the " Bidders
List.")
If a bidder has any questions regarding the project, please contact the Project Manager, Mike
Benoit at 1055 South Grady Way, Renton,WA 98057 or(425)430-7206.
A certified check or bid bond in the amount of five percent (5%) of the total of each bid must
' accompany each bid.
The City's Fair Practices, Non-Discrimination, and Americans with Disability Act Policies shall
' aPPIY•
mxt-�J• W�
' Bonnie I.Walton,City Clerk
Published:
' Daily Journal of Commerce September 28, 2010
Daily Journal of Commerce October 5, 2010
' CITY OF RENTON
' WW P-27-3557
Lake Washington Beach Lift Station Replacement
tPROPOSAL
TO THE CITY OF RENTON
RENTON,WASHINGTON
' Ladies and/or Gentlemen:
The undersigned hereby certify that the bidder has examined the site of the proposed work and have
read and thoroughly understand the plans,specifications and contract governing the work embraced in
this improvement, and the method by which payment will be made for said work, and hereby propose
' to undertake and complete the work embraced in this improvement, or as much thereof as can be
completed with the money available, in accordance with the said plans, specifications and contract and
the following schedule of rates and prices:
(Note: Unit prices for all items, all extensions, and
total amount of bid should be shown. Show unit
prices both in writing and in figures.)
The undersigned certifies and agrees to the following provisions:
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
' Being duly sworn, deposes and says, that he is the identical person who submitted the foregoing
proposal or bid, and that such bid is genuine and not sham or collusive or made in the interest or on
behalf of any person not therein named, and further, that the deponent has not directly induced or
solicited any other Bidder on the foregoing work or equipment to put in a sham bid,or any other person
or corporation to refrain from bidding,and that deponent has not in any manner sought by collusion to
secure to himself or to any other person any advantage over other Bidder or Bidders.
' AND
CERTIFICATION RE: ASSIGNMENT OF
' ANTI-TRUST CLAIMS TO PURCHASER
Vendor and purchaser recognize that in actual economic practice overcharges resulting from anti-trust
violations are in fact usually borne by the purchaser. Therefore,vendor hereby assigns to purchaser any
' and all claims for such over-charges as to goods and materials purchased in connection with this order
or contract, except as to overcharges resulting from anti-trust violations commencing after the date of
the bid, quotation, or other event establishing the price under this order or contract. In addition,
' vendor warrants and represents that such of his suppliers and subcontractors shall assign any and all
such claims to purchaser,subject to the aforementioned exception..
AND
'Page 12 Proposal
' MINIMUM WAGE AFFIDAVIT FORM
I, the undersigned, having been duly sworn, deposed, say and certify that in connection with the
performance of the work of this project, I will pay each classification of laborer, workman,or mechanic
employed in the performance of such work; not less than the prevailing rate of wage or not less than
the minimum rate of wages as specified in the principal contract: that I have read the above and
foregoing statement and certificate,know the contents thereof and the substance as set forth therein is
' true to my knowledge and belief.
FOR: PROPOSAL, NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT,ASSIGNMENT OF ANTI-TRUST CLAIMS TO PURCHASER
' AND MINIMUM WAGE AFFIDAVIT
1
�fA irs r�s��c9c c,r,
' Name of Bidder's Firm
Printed Name lINO-k Y_Icx_�hS
Signature h
' Address: I�1`3�S 12oss a
' Names of Members of Partnership:
OR
I
Name of President of Corporation
Name of Secretary of Corporation
' Corporation Organized under the laws of
' With Main Office in State of Washington at
Subscribed and sworn to before me on this day of 20/0
1
ve0o �+A�r Notary Public in and for the State of Washington
' =OTgq` 9n
Notary(Print) Vic I t I ion
My appointment expires:
I � as / 1I
�
�wAS8
Page 13 Minimum Wage Affidavit Form
' Provided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com-Always Verify Scale
' Department of Labor and Industries
Certificate of Registration
A4Name on Registration: 0.rn+�\rS ATV % V\
Registration Number: VA I O C cfag �---
' Expiration Date: t
I
' Note:A copy of the certificate will be requested as part of contract execution when project is awarded.
I
1
I
Pa$le 14 Department of Labor and Industries Certificate of Registration
' Provided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc.For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com-Always Verify Scale
Bond No. T-076
' BID BOND FORM
' Herewith find deposit in the form of a certified check, cashier's check, cash, or bid bond in the amount
of$ 5% of bid which.amount is not less than five percent of the total bid.
By
' Signature
' Know All Men by These Presents:
That we, Kamins Construction as Principal, and
Gisualty and y Omp3ry of Arecica as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Renton, as
Obligee, in the penal sumo Five percent of the total amountlars, for the payment of
which the Principal and the Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors
and assigns,jointly and severally,by these presents.
The condition of this obligation is such that if the Obligee shall make any award to.the Principal for L-*e Vbsbirrjbcn
yh Lift Station RSP�zt-G G-l0-120 according to the terms of the proposal or bid made by the Principal
therefore, and the Principal shall duly make and enter into a contract with the Obligee in accordance
with the terms of said proposal or bid and award and shall give pond for the faithful performance
thereof, with Surety or Sureties approved by the Obligee;or if the Principal shall, in case of failure to do
' so, pay and forfeit to the Obligee the penal amount of the deposit specified in the call for bids,then this
obligation shall be null and void; otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and effect and the Surety
shall forthwith pay and forfeit to the Obligee, as penalty and liquidated damages, the amount of this
' bond.
' SIGNED,SEALED AND DATED THIS 12th DAY OF October , 20 10 ,
Kamins Construction By:
Principal
Travelers Casualty and Surety By.
' Company of America
Surety R.A. Fix, Attorney-in-Fact
tReceived return of deposit in the sum of$
'Provided to Builders Exchange of WA, Inc. For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com-Always Verify Scale
WARNING:THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER
POWER OF ATTORNEY
TRAVELERSJ� Farmington Casualty Company St.Paul Mercury Insurance Company
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters,Inc. Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America
St.Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company
St.Paul Guardian Insurance Company
Attorney-In Fact No. 221140 Certificate No. 003722217
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:That St.Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company,St.Paul Guardian Insurance Company and St.Paul Mercury Insurance
Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Minnesota,that Farmington Casualty Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company,and
Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut,that United States Fidelity and Guaranty
Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Maryland,that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under
the laws of the State of Iowa,and that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters,Inc.,is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin
(herein collectively called the"Companies"),and that the Companies do hereby make,constitute and appoint
Christine V.Felicetty,N.B.Fix, R.A.Fix,Myung S.Fix,and Chris A.Fix
of the City of Seattle State of Washington their true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact,
each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above,to sign,execute,seal and acknowledge any and all bonds,recognizances,conditional undertakings and
other writings obligatory in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in their business of,guaranteeing the fidelity of persons,guaranteeing the performance of
contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions orproceedings allowed by law.
,+ 14th
IN WITN S WHEREOF,the Comp e ave caused this instrument to be signed ned and their co orate seals to be hereto affixed this
Fi P h g
June �b�U �� .� �,.�,�,,� rP
day of
Farmington Casualty Company t,i St.Paul Mercury Insurance Company
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company,�4 Travelers Casualty and Surety Company
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters,Inc. Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America
St.Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company
Si.Paul Guardian Insurance Company
RSU FlREw4x I �` 1Y q �
..............
.NSUg
toJ: .q•.. p G •lq tqS
1tt) N �$ �t m W r CO f, � •- I
5 D 9n g 185 - �`:SEALi�o? i,SEAL:;D of
S� M� l� otir� �"GO d'•....... .a 1 ..........
'0
State of Connecticut By:
City of Hartford ss. Georg Thompson, enior ice President
14th June 2010
On this the day of ,before me personally appeared George W.Thompson,who acknowledged
himself to be the Senior Vice President of Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company,Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters,
' Inc., St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety
Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America,and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company,and that he,as such,being authorized so to do,
executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing on behalf of the corporations by himself as a duly authorized officer.
fo�))
,
' In Witness Whereof,I hereunto set my hand and official seal.My Commission expires the 30th day of June,2011. Mane C.Tetreault,Notary Public
t 58440-4-09 Printed in U.S.A.
WARNING:THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER
WARNING:THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER
This Power of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of Farmington Casualty Company,Fidelity
and Guaranty Insurance Company,Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters,Inc.,St.Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company,St.Paul Guardian Insurance
Company,St.Paul Mercury Insurance Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America,and United States
Fidelity and Guaranty Company,which resolutions are now in full force and effect,reading as follows:
RESOLVED,that the Chairman,the President,any Vice Chairman,any Executive Vice President,any Senior Vice President,any Vice President,any Second Vice
President,the Treasurer,any Assistant Treasurer,the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary may appoint Attomeys-in-Fact and Agents to act for and on behalf
of the Company and may give such appointee such authority as his or her certificate of authority may prescribe to sign with the Company's name and seal with the
Company's seal bonds,recognizances,contracts of indemnity,and other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond,recognizance,or conditional undertaking,and any
of said officers or the Board of Directors at any time may remove any such appointee and revoke the power given him or her;and it is
FURTHER RESOLVED,that the Chairman,the President,any Vice Chairman,any Executive Vice President,any Senior Vice President or any Vice President may
delegate all or any part of the foregoing authority to one or more officers or employees of this Company,provided that each such delegation is in writing and a copy
thereof is filed in the office of the Secretary;and it is
FURTHER RESOLVED,that any bond,recognizance,contract of indemnity,or writing obligatory in the nature of a bond,recognizance,or conditional undertaking
shall be valid and binding upon the Company when(a)signed by the President,any Vice Chairman,any Executive Vice President,any Senior Vice President or any Vice
President,any Second Vice President,the Treasurer,any Assistant Treasurer,the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary and duly attested and sealed with the
Company's seal by a Secretary or Assistant Secretary;or(b)duly executed(under seal,if required)by one or more Attorneys-in-Fact and Agents pursuant to the power
prescribed in his or her certificate or their certificates of authority or by one or more Company officers pursuant to a written delegation of authority; and it is
FURTHER RESOLVED,that the signature of each of the following officers:President,any Executive Vice President,any Senior Vice President,any Vice President,
any Assistant Vice President,any Secretary,any Assistant Secretary,and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any
certificate relating thereto appointing Resident Vice Presidents,Resident Assistant Secretaries or Attorneys-in-Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds
and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof,and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal
shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding on
the Company in the future with respect to any bond or understanding to which it is attached.
I,Kori M.Johanson,the undersigned,Assistant Secretary,of Farmington Casualty Company,Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company,Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance
Underwriters,Inc.,St.Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company,St.Paul Guardian Insurance Company,St.Paul Mercury Insurance Company,Travelers Casualty and
Surety Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America,and United:States Fidelity and Guaranty Company do hereby certify that the above and foregoing
.`_ t -9.i 41,7p
is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies;.which-is in full force and effect and has not been revoked.
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF,I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies this /O' day of 20 /0
Kori M.Johans Assistant Secretary
0�6.pORPORg33 1�IP1 AtN
To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney,call 1-800-421-3880 or contact us at www.travelersbond.com.Please refer to the Attomey-In-Fact number,the I'
above-named individuals and the details of the bond to which the power is attached.
WARNING:THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER
' CITY OF RENTON
WWP-27-3557
Lake Washington Beach Lift Station Replacement
SCHEDULE OF PRICES
' (Note: The bid price shall be stated,in figures only,in terms of the units indicated and as to a total amount. In the event of errors or where
conflict occurs,the unit price bid will govern. illegible figures will invalidate the bid.)
' SEE SECTION 1-09.14 OF THE SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR INFORMATION ON RID ITEMS.
ITEM APPROX. UNIT PRICE TOTAL AMOUNT
' NO. QUANTITY ITEM Dollars Cts. Dollars Cts.
1 1 Trench and Excavation
' Lump Sum Safety Systems $ pO $ Q SRO '0 a
per Lump um
' 2 1 Lake Washington Beach Lift pp
Lump Sum Station Replacement $ �j y . $ 711 B
per Lump m
' Subtotal $ 6) 3 L)
9.5%Sales Tax $ C?� J
Total Schedule 3
t
1
Page 16 Schedule of Prices
' Provided to Builders Exchange of WA,Inc.For usage Conditions Agreement see www.bxwa.com-Always Verify Scale
' CONTRACTS OTHER THAN FEDERAL-AID FHWA
THIS AGREEMENT, made -and entered into this 1 q* day of by and
between THE CITY OF RENTON, Washi'$gton, a municipal corporation of the State of Washington,
hereinafter referred to as "CITY" and 1�aM i)(S CO)15ff k C-0Dh , hereinafter referred-to
as "CONTRACTOR."
WTTNESSETH:
' 1) The Contractor shall within the time stipulated, (to-wit: within One Hundred(100)working days
from date of commencement hereof as required by the Contract, of which this agreement is a
component part) perform all the work and services required to be performed, and provide and
' furnish all of the labor, materials, appliances, machines, tools, equipment, utility and
transportation services necessary to perform the Contract, and shall complete the construction
and installation work in a workmanlike manner, in connection with the City's Project(identified
' as No. CAG-10-120 for improvement by construction and installation of:
Work for the Lake Washington Beach Lift Station Replacement Project, per the
' "Scope of Work"included herein.
All the foregoing shall be timely performed, furnished, constructed, installed and completed in
strict conformity with the plans and specifications, including any and all addenda issued by the
' City and all other documents hereinafter enumerated, and in full compliance with all applicable
codes, ordinances and regulations of the City of Renton and any other governmental authority
having jurisdiction thereover. It is further agreed and stipulated that all of said labor, materials,
' appliances, machines, tools, equipment and services shall be furnished and the construction
installation performed and completed to the satisfaction and the approval of the City's Public
Works Director as being in such conformity with the plans, specifications and all requirements
1 of or arising under the Contract. The Contractor agrees to use recycled materials whenever
practicable.
2) The aforesaid Contract, entered into by the acceptance of the Contractor's bid and signing of this
agreement, consists of the following documents, all of which are component parts of said
Contract and as fully a part thereof as if herein set out in full, and if not attached, as if hereto
' attached.
a) This Agreement
' b) Instruction to Bidders
c) Bid Proposal
d) Specifications
e) Maps and Plans
' f) Bid
g) Advertisement for Bids
h) Special Provisions,if any
' i) Technical Specifications, if any
1
Cl-2009
r
' 3) If the Contractor refuses or fails to prosecute the work or any part thereof, with such diligence
as will insure its completion within the time specified in this Contract, or any extension in
writing thereof, or fails to complete said work with such time, or if the Contractor shall be
' adjudged a bankrupt, or if he should make a general assignment for the benefit of his creditors,
or if a receiver shall be appointed on account of the Contractor's insolvency, or if he or any of
his subcontractors should violate any of the provisions of this Contract, the City may then serve
' written notice upon him and his surety of its intention to terminate the Contract, and unless
within ten (10) days after the serving of such notice, such violation or non-compliance of any
provision of the Contract shall cease and satisfactory arrangement for the correction thereof be
' made, this Contract, shall, upon the expiration of said ten (10) day period, cease and terminate
in every respect. In the event of any such termination, the City shall immediately serve written
notice thereof upon the surety and the Contractor and the surety shall have the right to take over
and perform the Contract, provided, however, that if the surety within fifteen (15) days after the
serving upon it of such notice of termination does not perform the Contract or does not
commence performance thereof, the City itself may take over the work under the Contract and
prosecute the same to completion by Contract or by any other method it may deem advisable, for
the account and at the expense of the Contractor, and his surety shall be liable to the City for
any excess cost or other damages occasioned the City thereby. In such event, the City, if it so
' elects, may, without liability for so doing, take possession of and utilize in completing said
Contract such materials, machinery, appliances, equipment, plants and. other properties
belonging to the Contractor as may be on site of the project and useful therein.
t4) The foregoing provisions are in addition to and not in limitation of any other rights or remedies
available to the City.
' 5) Contractor agrees and covenants to hold and save the City, its officers, agents, representatives .
and employees harmless and to promptly indemnify same from and against any and all claims,
actions, damages, liability of every type and nature including all costs and legal expenses
incurred by reason of any work arising under or in connection with the Contract to be performed
hereunder, including loss of life, personal injury and/or damage to property arising from or out
of any occurrence, omission or activity upon, on or about the premises worked upon or in any
' way relating to this Contract. This hold harmless and indemnification provision shall likewise
apply for or on account of any patented or unpatented invention, process, article or appliance
manufactured for use in the performance of the Contract, including its use by the City, unless
' otherwise specifically provided for in this Contract.
The Contractor agrees to name the City as an additional insured on a noncontributory primary
' basis. In the event the City shall, without fault on its part, be made a party to any litigation
commenced by or against Contractor, then Contractor shall proceed and hold the City harmless
and he shall pay all costs,expenses and reasonable attorney's fees incurred or paid by the City in
' connection with such litigation. Furthermore, Contractor agrees to pay all costs, expenses and
reasonable attorney's fees that may be incurred or paid by City in the enforcement of any of the
covenants,provisions and agreements hereunder.
' Nothing herein shall require the Contractor to indemnify the City against and hold harmless the
City, from claims, demands or suits based solely upon the conduct of the City, its officers or
employees and provided further that if claims or suits are caused by or result from the
' concurrent negligence of (a) the Contractor's agents or employees and (b) the City, its agents,
officers and employees, and involves those actions covered by RCW 4.24.115, this indemnity
provision with respect to claims or suits based upon such concurrent negligence shall be valid
' and enforceable only to the extent of the Contractor's negligence or the negligence of the
Contractor's agents or employees.
2 Cl-2009
' Should a court of competent jurisdiction determine that this agreement is subject to RCW
4.24.115, then, in the event of liability for damages arising out of bodily injury to persons or
damages to property caused by or resulting from the concurrent negligence of the contractor and
' the city, its officers, officials, employees and volunteers, the contractor's liability hereunder
shall be only to the extent of the contractor's negligence. It is further specifically and expressly
understood that the indemnification provided herein constitute the contractor's waiver of
' immunity under the Industrial Insurance Act, Title 51 RCW, solely for the purposes of this
indemnification. This waiver has been mutually negotiated by the parties. The provisions of
this section shall survive the expiration or termination of this agreement.
6) Any notice from one party to the other party under the Contract shall be in writing and shall be
dated and signed by the party giving such notice or by its duly authorized representative of such
' party. Any such notice as heretofore specified shall be given by personal delivery thereof or by
depositing same in the United States mail,postage prepaid,certified or registered mail.
' 7) The Contractor shall commence performance of the Contract no later than 10 calendar days after
Contract final execution, and shall complete the full performance of the Contract not later than
One Hundred (100) working days from the date of commencement. For each and every
' working day of delay after the established day of completion, it is hereby stipulated and agreed
that the damages to the City occasioned by said delay will be the sum of per Section 1-08.9 of
Standard Specifications as liquidated damages (and not as a penalty) for each such day, which
' shall,be paid by the Contractor to the City.
8) Neither the final certificate of payment not any provision in the Contract nor partial or entire use
of any installation provided for by this Contract shall relieve the Contractor of liability in
' respect to any warranties or responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship. The Contractor
shall be under the duty to remedy any defects in the work and pay for any damage to other work
resulting therefrom which shall appear within the period of one (1) year from the date of final
acceptance of the work, unless a longer period is specified. The City will give notice of
observed defects as heretofore specified with reasonable promptness after discovery thereof, and
Contractor shall be obligated to take immediate steps to correct and remedy any such defect,
' fault or breach at the sole cost and expense of Contractor.
Defective or Unauthorized Work. The City reserves its right to withhold payment from
' Contractor for any defective or unauthorized work. Defective or unauthorized work includes,
without limitation: work and materials that do not conform to the requirements of this
Agreement; and extra work and materials furnished without the City's written approval. If
' Contractor is unable, for any reason, to satisfactorily complete any portion of the work, the City
may complete the work by contract or otherwise, and Contractor shall be liable to the City for
any additional costs incurred by the City. "Additional costs" shall mean all reasonable costs,
' including legal costs and attorney fees, incurred by the City beyond the maximum Contract price
specified above. The City further reserves its right to deduct the cost to complete the Contract
work, including any Additional Costs, from any and all amounts due or to become due the
Contractor.
3 Cl-2009
' The Contractor agrees the above one year limitation shall not exclude or diminish the City's
rights under any law to obtain damages and recover costs resulting from defective and
unauthorized work discovered after one year but prior to the expiration of the legal time period
' set forth in RCW 4.16.040 limiting actions upon a contract in writing, or liability expressed or
implied arising out of a written agreement.
' Final Payment: Waiver of Claims. THE CONTRACTOR'S ACCEPTANCE OF FINAL
PAYMENT (EXCLUDING WITHHELD RETAINAGE) SHALL CONSTITUTE A WAIVER
OF CONTRACTOR'S CLAIMS, EXCEPT THOSE PREVIOUSLY AND PROPERLY MADE
t AND IDENTIFIED BY CONTRACTOR AS UNSETTLED AT THE TIME FINAL PAYMENT
IS MADE AND ACCEPTED.
' 9) The Contractor and each subcontractor, if any, shall submit to the City such schedules of
quantities and costs, progress schedules, payrolls, reports, estimates, records and miscellaneous
data pertaining to the Contract as may be requested by the City from time to time.
' 10) The Contractor shall furnish a surety bond or bonds as security for the faithful performance of
the Contract, including the payment of all persons and firms performing labor on the
' construction project under this Contract or furnishing materials in connection with this Contract;
said bond to be in the full amount of the Contract price as specified in Paragraph 12. The surety
or sureties on such bond or bonds must be duly licensed as a surety in the State of Washington.
' 11) The Contractor shall verify, when submitting first payment invoice and annually thereafter,
possession of a current City of Renton business license while conducting work for the City. The
Contractor shall require, and provide verification upon request, that all subcontractors
' participating in a City project possess a current City of Renton business license. The Contractor
shall provide, and obtain City approval of, a traffic control plan prior to conducting work in City
right-of-way.
12) The total amount of this contract is the sum of $293,060.11
o
Two-Hundred-Ninty-Three-Thousand-Sixty and 11/100 Dollars
including Washington State Sales Tax. Payments will be made to Contractor as specified in the
"Special Provisions" of this Contract.
' 13) INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR. The parties intend that an Independent Contractor-
Employer Relationship will be created by this Agreement and that the Contractor has the ability
' to control and direct the performance and details of its work, the City being interested only in
the results obtained under this Agreement.
' 14) LIMITATION OF ACTIONS. CONTRACTOR MUST, IN ANY EVENT, FILE ANY
LAWSUIT ARISING FROM OR CONNECTED WITH THIS AGREEMENT WITHIN 120
CALENDAR DAYS FROM THE DATE THE CONTRACT WORK IS COMPLETE OR
' CONTRACTOR'S ABILITY TO FILE THAT CLAIM OR SUIT SHALL BE FOREVER
BARRED. THIS SECTION FURTHER LIMITS ANY APPLICABLE STATUTORY
LIMITATIONS PERIOD.
' 15) Non-Waiver of Breach. The failure of the City to insist upon strict performance of any of the
covenants and agreements contained in this Agreement, or to exercise any option
4 CI-2009
' conferred by this Agreement in one or more instances shall not be construed to be a waiver or
relinquishment of those covenants,agreements or options, and the same shall be and remain in
full force and effect.
' 16) Written Notice. All communications regarding this Agreement shall be sent to the parties at the
addresses listed on the signature page of the Agreement, unless notified to the contrary. Any
written notice hereunder shall become effective three (3) business days after the date of mailing
by registered or certified mail, and shall be deemed sufficiently given if sent to the addressee at
the address stated in this Agreement or such other address as may be hereafter specified in
' writing.
17) Assignment. Any assignment of this Agreement by either party without the written consent of
the non-assigning party shall be void. If the non-assigning party gives its consent to any
assignment, the terms of this Agreement shall continue in full force and effect and no further
assignment shall be made without additional written consent.
18) Modification. No waiver, alteration, or modification of any of the provisions of this Agreement
shall be binding unless in writing and signed by a duly authorized representative of the city and
Contractor.
19) Compliance with Laws. The Contractor agrees to comply with all federal, state, and municipal
' laws, rules, and regulations that are now effective or in the future become applicable to
Contractor's business, equipment, and personnel engaged in operations covered by this
Agreement or accruing out of the performance of those operations.
20) Counterparts. This Agreement may be executed in any number of counterparts, each of which
shall constitute an original, and all of which will together constitute this one Agreement.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the City has caused these presents to be signed by its Mayor and attested
by its City Clerk and the Contractor has hereunto set his hand and seal the day and year first above-
written.
tCONTRACTOR CTI Y OF NTON
President/Partner/Owner Ma or
' ATTEST
' Secretary City Clerk
dba k VAS LV1Cj6 —;-�.VN
Firm Name
�A �.
check one
Individual ❑ Partnership ❑ Corporation Incorporated in
T
5 CI-2009
I
Attention:
If business is a CORPORATION, name of the corporation should be listed in full and both President
' and Secretary must sign the contract, OR if one signature is permitted by corporation by-laws, a copy
of the by-laws shall be furnished to the City and made a part of the contract document.
If business is a PARTNERSHIP, full name of each partner should be listed followed by d/b/a (doing
business as) and firm or trade name; any one partner may sign the contract.
' If business is an INDIVIDUAL PROPRIETORSHIP,the name of the owner should appear followed
by d/b/a and name of the company.
i
1
1
1
1
6 CI-2009
I
AM
I"MINC*928LD
' 19315 Ross Road
Bothell,WA 98011
Phone 206-396-9115 Fax 877-710-9005
November 9, 2010
' To Whom It May Concern:
Chad Kamins is the only Kamins Construction Employee that has the authority to sign
any contract documents.
Thank you,
1
' Chad Kamins
Owner
1
Bond Y1o. 105 513 992
BOND TO THE CITY OF RENTON
KNOW ALL MEN'BY THESE PRESENTS:
That we,the undersigned 'Kamins Construction
Travelers Casualt and Sure an of America
as principal, and as a
�I corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Connecticut
surety corporation, and qualified under the laws of the State of Washington to become surety upon
bonds of contractors with municipal corporations, as surety are jointly and severally held and firmly
bound to the City of Renton in the penal sum of $293,060.11 for the payment of which sum on
demand we bind ourselves and our successors, heirs, administrators or person representatives, as the
case may be.
This obligation is entered into in pursuance of the statutes of the State of Washington,the Ordinance of
the City of Renton.
Dated at
Washington,this /9I,4 day of 2010.
Nevertheless,the conditions of the above obligation are such that:
(� WHEREAS, under and pursuant to Public Works Constructi( ding for
construction of Lake Washinton Beach Lift Station Replacen yy
(project name)
the principal is required to furnish a bond for the faithful perforr
! ago(O[ orm the
WHEREAS, the principal has accepted, or is about to accept, the
work therein provided for in the manner and within the time set forth;
I
NOW, THEREFORE, if th e principal shall faithfully perform all of the provisions of said contract in the
_ p p
manner and within the time therein set forth, or within such extensions of time as may be granted
under said contract, and shall pay all laborers, mechanics, subcontractors and materialmen, and all
persons who shall supply said principal or subcontractors with provisions and supplies for the carrying
on of said work, and shall hold said City of Renton harmless from any loss or damage occasioned to any
Iperson or property by reason of any carelessness or negligence on the part of said principal, or any
subcontractor in the performance of said work, and shall indemnify and hold the City of Renton
harmless from any damage or expense by reason of failure of performance as specified in the contract
' or from defects appearing or developing in the material or workmanship provider~ or performed under
the contract within a period of one year after its acceptance thereof by the City of Renton, then and in
that event this obligation shall be void; but otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and effect.
' Travelers Casualty and Surety
Karin Construction Cwpany of America
Principal Surety
Signature
• Signature Q-iris A. F?�.
Owner Attorney-irrFact _��__
Title Title
WARNING:THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER
POWER OF ATTORNEY
RAVELERSJ� Farmington Casualty Company St.Paul Mercury Insurance Company
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters,Inc. Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America
St.Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company
St.Paul Guardian Insurance Company
Attorney-In Fact No. 221140 Certificate No. 003722267
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:That St.Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company,St.Paul Guardian Insurance Company and St.Paul Mercury Insurance
Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Minnesota,that Farmington Casualty Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company,and
Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut,that United States Fidelity and Guaranty
Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Maryland,that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under
the laws of the State of Iowa,and that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters,Inc.,is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin
(herein collectively called the"Companies"),and that the Companies do hereby make,constitute and appoint
Christine V.Felicetty,N.B.Fix, R.A.Fix, Myung S.Fix,and Chris A. Fix
of the City of Seattle ,State of Washington their true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact,
each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above,to sign,execute,seal and acknowledge any and all bonds,recognizances,conditional undertakings and
other writings obligatory in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in their business of,guaranteeing the fidelity of persons,guaranteeing the performance of
contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or.proceedings allowed by law.
INN
V"-' '_' 1�1 �_j
IN WITNESS WHEREOF,the Companies have caused this instrument o be signed their coorate seals to be hereto affixed,this 14th
.- June 2010 q
day of
Farmington Casualty Company � j St.Paul Mercury Insurance Company
Fidelity and Guaranty`Insnrance`Company. `I y
- � Travelers Casualty and Surety Company
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underw ters,Inc. Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America
St.Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company
St.Paul Guardian Insurance Company
CER-1 u8pry�0�
State of Connecticut By:
City of Hartford ss. Georg Thompson, enior ice President
' On this the 14th day of June 2010 before me personally appeared George W.Thompson,who acknowledged
himself to be the Senior Vice President of Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company,Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters,
' Inc., St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety
Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America,and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company,and that he,as such,being authorized so to do,
executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing on behalf of the corporations by himself as a duly authorized officer.
t p.TET
In Witness Whereof,I hereunto set my hand and official seal.
My Commission expires the 30th day of June,2011. �OiIBU� * Marie C.Tetreault,Notary Public
t 58440-4-09 Printed in U.S.A.
WARNING:THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER
WARNING:THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER
This Power of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of Farmington Casualty Company,Fidelit�
and Guaranty Insurance Company,Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters,Inc.,St.Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company,St.Paul Guardian Insuranc
Company,St.Paul Mercury Insurance Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America,and United Stated
Fidelity and Guaranty Company,which resolutions are now in full force and effect,reading as follows:
RESOLVED,that the Chairman,the President,any Vice Chairman,any Executive Vice President,any Senior Vice President,any Vice President,any Second Vice
President,the Treasurer,any Assistant Treasurer,the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary may appoint Attorneys-in-Fact and Agents to act for and on behalf
of the Company and may give such appointee such authority as his or her certificate of authority may prescribe to sign with the Company's name and seal with the
Company's seal bonds,recognizances,contracts of indemnity,and other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond,recognizance,or conditional undertaking,and any
of said officers or the Board of Directors at any time may remove any such appointee and revoke the power given him or her;and it is
FURTHER RESOLVED,that the Chairman,the President,any Vice Chairman,any Executive Vice President,any Senior Vice President or any Vice President may
delegate all or any part of the foregoing authority to one or more officers or employees of this Company,provided that each such delegation is in writing and a copy
thereof is filed in the office of the Secretary;and it is
FURTHER RESOLVED,that any bond,recognizance,contract of indemnity,or writing obligatory in the nature of a bond,recognizance,or conditional undertaking
shall be valid and binding upon the Company when(a)signed by the President,any Vice Chairman,any Executive Vice President,any Senior Vice President or any Vice
President,any Second Vice President,the Treasurer,any Assistant Treasurer,the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary and duly attested and sealed with the
Company's seal by a Secretary or Assistant Secretary;or(b)duly executed(under seal,if required)by one or more Attorneys-in-Fact and Agents pursuant to the power
prescribed in his or her certificate or their certificates of authority or by one or more Company officers pursuant to a written delegation of authority; and it is
FURTHER RESOLVED,that the signature of each of the following officers:President,any Executive Vice President,any Senior Vice President,any Vice President,
any Assistant Vice President,any Secretary,any Assistant Secretary,and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any
certificate relating thereto appointing Resident Vice Presidents,Resident Assistant Secretaries or Attorneys-in-Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds
and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof,and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal
shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding on
the Company in the future with respect to any bond or understanding to which it is attached.
I,Kori M.Johanson,the undersigned,Assistant Secretary,of Farmington Casualty Company,Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company,Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance
Underwriters,Inc.,St.Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company,St.Paul Guardian Insurance Company,St.Paul Mercury Insurance Company,Travelers Casualty and
Surety Company,Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America,and United;States Fidelity-and Guaranty Company do hereby certify that the above and foregoing
is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies,,which is in full force,and effect and has not been revoked.
Al
T�g
4 s k'aR
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF,I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the-seals of said:6 pm anies this 8t1 day of November 2010
Kori M.Johans Assistant Secretary
G�SUA( yF1PE ��N_�NgG INS,
�0?b�rOy 1 R 9 p��8 fS 2�J�+)L a O $< 197�7 Yp� RIC1O9APo5ItA1 t ED K�4+a ti J mm�E b Go�P�"' c��v f r i Ot a k pS!:S R E P.,O,A,RA NAL�.�.ta9;y•'�;o"y m f d �`/I��Q u,��°i;+rJ.1'Cp S.O5 R.B.P....O..A.R....A....L 1 D a t°O•'s_*'- W'm�p�g°J H'i r AICRSOTY FNAONNR.p Da ps,Gs e y o� 0a7r
O
'
To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney,call 1-800-421-3880 or contact us at www.travelersbond.com.Please refer to the Attorney-In-Fact number,the '
above-named individuals and the details of the bond to which the power is attached.
WARNING:THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER '
CITY OF RENTON
+ FAIR PRACTICES POLICY
AFFIDAVIT OF COMPLIANCE
V\Ovn\ n S V)5A—r0 C�kC>/\ hereby confirms and declares that
(Name of contractor/subcontractor/consultant)
I. It is the policy of V0.w&N C-0,,SlyCj 0✓\ to offer equal
' (Name of contractor/subcontractor/consultant)
opportunity to all qualified employees and applicants for employment without
' regard to the race, creed, color, sex, national origin,age, disability or veteran status.
II. Y,txw %V%F* CV\5\-l%)CA-(001 complies with all applicable
' (Name of contractor/subcontractor/consultant)
federal, state and local laws governing non-discrimination in employment.
' II. When applicable, )F CLVkAN '^S C-C)V\G+,ruC,�(VV\ will seek out and
(Name of contractor/subcontractor/consultant)
' negotiate with minority and women contractors for the award of subcontracts.
' ��GCX �hUV�IhS
Print Agent/Representative's Name
Print Agent/Representative's Title
A
' Agent/Representative's Signature
' I ( PS- ho
Date Signed
Instructions: This document MUST be completed by each contractor, subcontractor and consultant.
' Include or attach this documents)with the contract.
' Client#:57239 KAMICON
ACORD. CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE x;;612 0
PRODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION
' Bell-Anderson Insurance ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE
P.O.Box 887 HOLDER.THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND,EXTEND OR
ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.
724 West Smith St.
' Kent,WA 98035-0887 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC#
INSURED INSURERA: West American Insurance Company
Kamins Construction INSURER B: The Ohio Casualty Insurance Co.
Chad Kamins INSURER C:
' 19315 Ross Rd
INSURER D:
Bothell,WA 98011
INSURER E:
COVERAGES
' THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED,NOTWITHSTANDING
ANY REQUIREMENT,TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR
MAY PERTAIN,THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS,EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH
POLICIES.AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.
POLICY POLICY p T1
R TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER MIAEE(� YY LIMITS
' A GENERAL LIABILITY BLW53745556 0610412010 0610412011 EACH OCCURRENCE $1.000.000
X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY DAMAGE TO RENTED $100,000
CLAIMS MADE X OCCUR MED EXP(Any one person) $10,000
' X PD Ded:$250 PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $1,000,000
GENERAL AGGREGATE $Z 000 000
GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG s2,000,000
POLICY 51 jT LOC
' B AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY BA053745556 06/0412010 0610412011 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT ,000
(
X ANYAUTO $1000
ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY
SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per person) $
' X HIRED AUTOS -
BODILY INJURY $
X NON-OWNED AUTOS (Per accident)
PROPERTY DAMAGE $
' (Per accident)
GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY-EAACCIDENT $
ANY AUTO OTHER THAN EA ACC $
AUTO ONLY: AGG $
B EXCESS/UMBRELLA LIABILITY US053745556 06/0412010 06/0412011 EACH OCCURRENCE _ $4,000,000
X-1 OCCUR D CLAIMS MADE AGGREGATE $4,000,000
' H DEDUCTIBLE $
X RETENTION $$10,000 $
B WORKERS COMPENSATION AND CT063745556 0610412010 06/04/2011 1 WC STATU-I JOTH-
EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY ER
ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE (WA Stop Gap) E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $1,000,000
' FFl EMBER EXCLUDED?
( ndatory in NH) N E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE $1,000,000
K describe under
SPECIAL PROVISIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $1,000,000
OTHER
' DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS/VEHICLES/EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT/SPECIAL PROVISIONS
RE:Ongoing Operations of the Named Insured Only.
The City of Renton,and its officers,officials,agents,employees and volunteers are additional insured
' for general liability,but only if required by written contract or written agreement per General
Liability Master Pak Blanket Additional Insured provision CG83301203.
' CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION 10 Days for Non-Payment
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION
City of Renton DATE THEREOF,THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL AS DAYS WRITTEN
' Attn:Michael Benoit NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT,BUT FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL
1055 South Grady Way IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER,ITS AGENTS OR
Renton,WA 98057 REPRESENTATIVES.
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE
' ACORD 25 2009101 O 1988-2009 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
( )1 of 2 #5290230/M279759 GSS $
The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD
i
IMPORTANT
' If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED,the policy(ies)must be endorsed. A statement
on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s).
If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy,certain policies may
' require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate
holder in lieu of such endorsement(s).
DISCLAIMER
' The Certificate of Insurance does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s),authorized
representative or producer,and the certificate holder,nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend,
extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon.
t
1
I
' ACORD 25(2009101) 2 of 2 #S290230/M279759
FF C
•� � mfg � � ��� � $ �' Sys �
g in �
c.61g
1 105 : ay gp1
C C Vyy 'tq pj G `� p G yC xp�M
W W yy
W C
•p C C L '00
6� 'a
'��- m to
dp S� °Ln = C 5 b �y � �� o .° �d ' � g �i° Q�o' 3c� *§ EQQ
� .E a 4 •� $ o��Q CFi��
R Y4
a>.6 �'. �' 3�zE � d.�• � cc
$ � g `R o d +H � 6 Aga u', c x $8' 8 r`- Ha
lov
41 Lo
W o
1 G S C y 2
0 c n rx 01 iJ Fes- y c vs
_` o H'v
C a
1 �
m Cs
9
10 co
N M a a b Yf N V �O h t- ee ae
cc
co
�:3
W
W
U
u�i z g
ad U >° €
L
W
O U
1 a
a ° �g
1 �g aWi o y
z �
Lo
IL
'8 a
vOi
1 LLI a IU
E to gg ¢ � o S � '
CL
Wa C� fWL' j a pJ
c O �l O � z W 0
1 �
0 0 a M '7 z a� m z y a ¢ ¢ a O a m 3E U
iL ,y a0
� ° mm gi $ ° m
$ $c gg
> > ESQ � w 4) 3 CD m
;E a o ° oo o� Q �E � e a
C5 g
bp e,
Saw
c a
m ° L C w
cCy {{yo�QQJb 3TT r. Y�2 m c p�p �
0 6 toT�
Eg$�
v 2g- 9 m a � o
G E m a y 7t m T o d =3
5S °c eo B e a �9�E o mrn$ w !� P-;s 3
i.c v E 13 bT �
} Usr O m �N
tE 1 � c EV8s - ` v " g-- E
c0 E o C
C
W e mew mF �g.4)
i o
� m S. ii-t s ' � g $t� i an � E
o c E o 6gp�j o N � a m �E a �� w oe d
°o � 0 fwd
��-' o E = G EEgo � �iE ' w �m $
} r o m G vv�c 'Q '$ov �' E.y a - •� •'a
h` �' w O me V = m� m
N � .tX�QavNT � ' � E
pW m m E Qr �i �i i1 C�i E gC E is a E
K �37d� vee cLi� fi n . e�.... � cg'a ' ° 3 �
LM
O o �
m oaa oc � a g m �
Sry �jm yL`� m� �( '2 Q �' y97w$ i
Z S G J r. •r N Cf Z 'gyp•� a 7 6 O W f" w{�(9 ..1 n C V-0 L �O M
a °
J 4 0 R
- 8 m fi
X68 �y� o d
M
y m
m ai V
° w co
3 e Z, SN �
�' •�' c R S g `�Q c
N Q O G W 0 m 0 m L}�
S-a w N 5 1g�=7 c E q}�1 55QQ �sQq w U �Qcj
E (D �3 D C O y C
a
a��a � q B �m
CL
va,' , e Q o O N &
F a OC m %, ° m N m n.Y! G
= ' gQ 81
e
; y o {L tj O y a'N O� Zo Q ¢ y_ F c�
Lo d 7 w
> `o R w gd a
r. rL cc
N o C c G c E o v c S c'S 2 �` 3 w L $
CL CD 2 1 PL a Z �Y 2nE U c c b c° O Y1I p :3
' o o0 0 oo a.e n as
4 V .90)
e� yyak �a W� � �y
kp a D Ci je Z 4�� tl 3` m A C C 6 °
L°°w o c
L N �e ` g
M
M
co I
N 10 14 V
fi
t
t � �
...........
q(
iE
tf
t
0.1 X N v
-
�i
Ol
CD
jv
P4 0 rn q
21 w W rn
70 Q 7 ° Q
o 3 b
o �, 3
u � a xow y U,6
W U �0 0.'i wU v) '
P wx
I
WO Uw � O
rxU u. W 04 U W m
}t:
E};
ep
rr
1
i
Business License
An n u a I D City of �Y �} Expiration Date
�.
o :; 01/31/2012
' 1055 South Grady Way Renton, WA 98057 (425)430-6851
Business Location
19315 ROSS RD Issued Date: License#
' BOTHELL, WA 98011-1707 11/16/2010 BL.031954
Licensee has applied for a City of Renton business
' license in accordance with Renton Municipal Code (the
KAMINS CONSTRUCTION Code), Title V Business, Chapter 5 Business Licenses.
19315 ROSS RD The Licensee agrees to comply with all requirements of
BOTHELL, WA 98011-1707
t the Code, as well as State laws and regulations
applicable to the business activity licensed.
t --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1
t
t
t
� PREVAILING MINIMUM
i HOURLY WAGE RATES
1
1
' 1
1
i
1
1
1
1
State of Washington
Department of Labor & Industries
Prevailing Wage Section- Telephone 360-902-5335
PO Box 44540, Olympia, WA 98504-4540
Washington State Prevailing
g Wage
The PREVAILING WAGES listed here include both the hourly wage rate and the hourly rate of fringe
benefits. On public works projects, worker's wage and benefit rates must add to not less than this
total. A brief description of overtime calculation requirements are provided on the Benefit Code Key.
Journey Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
Cownty. Trade . Job Classification Wave Holiday Overtime Note
King Asbestos Abatement Workers Journey evel
y $40.03 5D 1H
King Boilermakers Journey Level $56.81 5N 1C
King Brick Mason Brick And Block finisher $39.86 5A 1M
King Brick Mason Journey Level $46.72 5A 1M
King Building Service Employees Janitor $18.91 5S 2F
King, Building Service Employees Traveling Waxer/shampooer $19.32 5S 2F
King Building Service Employees Window Cleaner(non-scaffold) $22.65 5S 2F
' King Cabinet Makers(In Shop) Journey Level $22.74 1
King Carpenters Acoustical Worker $48.60 SD 1M
King Carpenters Bridge, Dock And Wharf Carpenters $48.47 5A 1M
King Carpenters Carpenter $48.47 5D 1M
King Carpenters Creosoted Material $48.57 5D 1M
King Carpenters Floor Finisher
.$48.60 5D 1_M
i
King Carpenters Floor Layer $48.60 5D 1M
King Carpenters Floor Sander $48.60 5D 1M
King Carpenters Sawfiler
$48.60 5D 1M
' King Carpenters Shingler $48.60 5D I 1M
Journey Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010 ,
King . Carpenters Stationary Power Saw Operator $48.60 5D 1M
King Carpenters Stationary Woodworking Tools $48.60 5D 1M ,
King Cement Masons Journey Level $49.15 5D 1M
King Divers&Tenders Diver $100.28 5D 1M 8A
King Divers&Tenders Diver On Standby $56.68 5D 1M ,
King Divers&Tenders Diver Tender $52.23 5D 1M
King Divers&Tenders Surface Rcv&Rov Operator $52.23 5D 1M
King Divers&Tenders Surface Rcv&Rov Operator Tender $48.85 5A 1B
King Dredge Workers Assistant Engineer $49.57 5D IT 8L
King Dredge Workers Assistant Mate(deckhand) $49.06 5D IT 8L
King Dredge Workers Engineer Welder $49.62 5D IT 8L
King Dredge Workers Leverman, Hydraulic $51.19 5D IT 8L '
King Dredge Workers Maintenance $49.06 5D IT 8L
King Dredge Workers Mates And Boatmen $49.57 5D 1T 81 r
King Dredge Workers Oiler $49.19 5D IT 8L ,
King Drywall Applicator Journey Level $48.47. 5_D 1M
King Drywall Tapers Journey Level $48.79 5P 1E '
King Electrical Fixture Maintenance Journey Level $25.34 5L 1E
Workers
King Electricians-Inside Cable Splicer $61.95 5L 2W
King Electricians-Inside Cable Splicer(tunnel) $66.57 5L 2W.
King Electricians-Inside Certified Welder $59.85 5L 2W
King Electricians-Inside Certified Welder(tunnel) $64.25 5L 2W
King Electricians-Inside Construction Stock Person $31.83 5L 2W
King Electricians-Inside Journey Level $57.74 5L 2W '
King Electricians-Inside Journey Level(tunnel) $61.95 5L 2W
2
Journey Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
King Electricians-Motor Shop Craftsman $15.37 1
King Electricians-Motor Shop Journey Level $14.69 1
King Electricians-Powerline .Cable Splicer $61.08 5A 4A
Construction
King Electricians-Powerline Certified Line Welder $55.81 5A 4A
Construction
King Electricians-Powerline Groundperson $39.83 5A 4A
' Construction
King Electricians-Powerline Head Groundperson $42.02 5A 4A
Construction
King Electricians-Powerline Heavy Line Equipment Operator $55.81 5A 4A
Construction
King Electricians-Powerline Jackhammer Operator $42.02 5A 4A
Construction
King '.' Electricians-Powerline Journey Level Lineperson $55.81 5A 4A.
Construction
King Electricians-Powerline Line Equipment Operator $47.20 5A 4A
Construction
King Electricians-Powerline Pole Sprayer $55.81 5A 4A
Construction
King Electricians-Powerline Powderperson $42.02 5A 4A
Construction
King Electronic Technicians Journey Level $31.00 1
King Elevator Constructors Mechanic $67.91 6g 4A
King Elevator Constructors Mechanic In Charge $73:87 4A
King Fabricated Precast Concrete All Classifications $13.60 5B 2K
Products
King Fence Erectors Fence Erector 15.18
$ 1
King Flaggers Journey Level $33.93 5D 1H
King...:: Glaziers Journey Level $48.61 5G 1Y
King Heat&Frost Insulators And journeyman Y $53.44 5.1 1S
Asbestos Workers
3
Journey Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010 '
King Heating Equipment Mechanics Journey Level $63.27 6L 1E
King Hod Carriers&Mason Tenders . Journey Level $41.28 5D 1H t
King Industrial Engine And Machine Journey Level $15.65 1
Mechanics
King Industrial Power Vacuum Cleaner Journey Level $9.24 1
King Inland Boatmen Boat Operator $50.72 5B 1K
King Inland Boatmen Cook $47.54 5B 1K '
King Inland Boatmen Deckhand $47.54 5B 1K
r
King Inland Boatmen Deckhand Engineer $48.48 5B 1K
King Inland Boatmen Launch Operator $49.63 5B 1K i
King Inland Boatmen Mate $49.63 5B 1K
King Inspection/Cleaning/Sealing Of Cleaner Operator,.Foamer Operator $31.49 1
Sewer&Water Systems By Remote
Control
King Inspection/Cleaning/Sealing Of Grout Truck Operator $11.48 1
Sewer&Water Systems By Remote ,
Control
King Inspection/Cleaning/Sealing Of Head Operator $24.91 1
Sewer&Water Systems By Remote
Control
King Inspection/Cleaning/Sealing Of Technician $19.33 1 i
Sewer&Water Systems By Remote
Control
King Inspection/Cleaning/Sealing Of Tv Truck Operator $20.45 1
Sewer&Water Systems By Remote
Control
King Insulation Applicators Journey Level $48.47 5D 1M
King Ironworkers Journeyman $57.52 5A 10
King Laborers Air,Gas Or Electric Vibrating Screed $40.03 5D 1H
King Laborers Airtrac Drill Operator $41.28 5D 1H
Kin Laborers
King Ballast Regular Machine $40.03 5D 1H
King Laborers Batch Weighman $33.93 5D 1H
4
Journey Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
King Laborers Brick Pavers $40.03 5D 1H
King Laborers Brush Cutter $40.03 5D 1H
King Laborers Brush Hog Feeder $40.03 5D 1H
King Laborers Burner $40.03 5D 1H
King Laborers Caisson Worker $41.28 5D 1H
King Laborers Carpenter Tender $40.03 5D 1H
King Laborers Caulker $40.03 5D 1H
King Laborers Cement Dumper-paving $40.77 5D 1H
King Laborers Cement Finisher Tender $40.03 5D 1H
King Laborers Change House Or Dry Shack $40.03 5D 1H
King Laborers Chipping Gun (under 30 Lbs.) $40.03 5D 1H
I
King Laborers Chipping Gun(30 Lbs.And Over) $40.77 5D 1H
1
King Laborers Choker
Setter $40.03 5D 1H
King Laborers Chuck Tender $40.03 5D 1H
King Laborers Clary Power Spreader $40.77 5D 1H
Kin Laborers Clean Laborer King up abo er $40.03 5D. 1H
King Laborers Concrete Dumper/chute Operator $40.77 5D 1H
King Laborers Concrete Form Stripper $40.03 5D 1H
King Laborers Concrete Placement Crew $40.77 5D 1H
King Laborers Concrete Saw Operator/core Driller $40.77 5D 1H.
King Laborers Crusher Feeder $33.93 5D 1H
King Laborers Curing Laborer $40.03 5D 1H
King Laborers Demolition:Wrecking&Moving(incl. $40.03 5D 1H
Charred Material)
King Laborers Ditch Digger $40.03 5D 1H
King Laborers Diver $41.28 5D 1H
' 5
I
Journey Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
King Laborers Drill Operator(hydraulic,diamond) $40.77 5D 1H
King Laborers Dry Stack Walls $40.03 5D 1H ,
King Laborers Dump Person $40.03 5D 1H.
- - i
King Laborers Epoxy Technician $40.03 5D 1H
King Laborers Erosion Control Worker $40.03 5D 1H
King Laborers Faller& Bucker Chain Saw $40.77 5D 1H
King Laborers Fine Graders $40.03 5D 1H
King Laborers Firewatch $33.93 5D 1H ,
King. Laborers Form. Setter $40.;03 5D 1H
King Laborers Gabian Basket Builders $40.03 5D 1H
King Laborers General Laborer $40.03 50 1H
King Laborers Grade Checker&Transit Person $41.28 5D 1H
King Laborers Grinders $40.03 5D 1H
King Laborers Grout Machine Tender $40.03 5D 1H '
King . Laborers Groutmen (pressure)including Post Tension $40.77 5D 1H
Beams
King Laborers Guardrail Erector $40.03 5D 1H
King Laborers. Hazardous Waste Worker(level A) $41,28 5D 1H
King Laborers Hazardous Waste Worker(level B) $40.77 5D 1H
King Laborers Hazardous Waste Worker(level C) $40.03 5D 1H
King Laborers High Scaler $41.28 5D 1H
King Laborers Jackhammer $40.77 5D 1H
—
— t
King Laborers Laserbeam Operator $40.77 SID 1H
King Laborers Maintenance Person $40.03 5D 1H
King Laborers Manhole Builder-mudman $40.77 5D 1H
King Laborers Material Yard Person $40.03 5D 1H
6
' Journey Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
King Laborers Miner $41.28 5D 1H
King Laborers Mortarman&Hodcarrier
$40.77 5D 1_H
King Laborers Motorman-dinky Locomotive $40.77 5D 1H
King Laborers Nozzleman(concrete Pump,Green Cutter $40.77 5D 1H
When Using Combination Of High Pressure
Air&Water On Concrete&Rock,Sandblast,
Gunite,Shotcrete,Water Bla
King Laborers Pavement Breaker $40.77 5D 1H
King Laborers Pilot Car $33.93 5D 1H
King Laborers Pipe Layer Lead $41.28 5D 1H
King Laborers Pipe Layer/tailor $40.77 5D 1H
King Laborers Pipe Pot Tender $40.77 5D 1H
King Laborers Piper Reliner
$40.77 5D 1H
King Laborers Pipe Wrapper
$40.77 5D 1H
King Laborers Pot Tender $40.03 5D 1H
King Laborers Powderman
$41.28 5D 1H
King Laborers Powderman's Helper $40.03 5D 1H
King Laborers Power Jacks _ _
$40.77 D 5 1H
King Laborers Railroad.Spike,Puller-Power $40.77 5D 1H
King Laborers Raker-Asphalt $41.28 5D 1H .
King Laborers Re-timberman $41.28 5D 1H
King Laborers Remote Equipment O Operator p $40.77 5D 1H
King Laborers Rigger/signal Person $40.77 5D 1H
King Laborers Rip Rap Person $40.03 5D 1H
King Laborers Rivet Buster $40.77 5D 1H
King Laborers Rodder $40.77 5D 1H
King Laborers Scaffold Erector $40.03 5D 1H
7
Journey Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010 ,
King Laborers Scale Person $40.03 5D 1H
King Laborers Sloper(over 20") $40.77 5D 1H
King Laborers Sloper Sprayer $40.03 5D 1H
Kin Laborers
King Spreader(concrete) $40.77 5D 1_Fi
King Laborers Stake Hopper $40.03 5D 1H
King Laborers Stock Piler $40.03 5D 1H '
King Laborers Tamper&Similar Electric,Air&Gas $40.77 5D 1H
Operated Tools
King Laborers Tamper(multiple&Self-propelled) 40.77 5D 1H
P ( p $ — —
King Laborers Timber Person-Sewer(lagger,Shorer&
$40.77 5D 1H
Cribber)
King Laborers Toolroom Person (at Jobsite) $40.03 5D 1H"
King Laborers Topper $40.03 5D 1H
Kin Laborers Track Laborer '
King $40.03. 5D 1H
King Laborers Track Liner(power) $40.77 5D 1H
King Laborers Truck Spotter $40.03 5D 1H.
King Laborers Tugger Operator $40.77 5D 1H
King Laborers Vibrator $40.77 5D 1H
King Laborers Vinyl Seamer $40.03 5D 1H
King Laborers Watchman $30.84 5D 1H
King Laborers Welder $40.77 5D 1H
King Laborers Well Point Laborer $40.77 5D 1H
Kin Laborers Window Washer cleaner '
King / $30.84 5D 1H
King Laborers-Underground Sewer& General Laborer&Topman $40.03 5D 1H
Water
King Laborers-Underground Sewer& Pipe Layer $40.77 5D 1H
Water
King Landscape Construction Irrigation Or Lawn Sprinkler Installers $13.56 1 I _j
I T 8
Journey Level Prevailing!!Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
King Landscape Construction Landscape Equipment Operators Or Truck $28.17 1
Drivers
King Landscape Construction Landscaping or Planting Laborers $17.87 1
King Lathers Journey Level $48.74 5D 1H
King. Marble Setters Journey Level $46.72 5A 1M
King Metal Fabrication In Sho p) Fitter $15.86 1
King Metal Fabrication In Shop) Laborer $9.78 1
King Metal Fabrication(In Shop) Machine Operator $13.04 1
King Metal Fabrication (In Shop) Painter $11.10 1
King Metal Fabrication(In Shop) Welder $15.48 1
King Millwright Journey Level $49.47 5D 1_M
King Modular Buildings Cabinet Assembly $11.56 1
King Modular Buildings Electrician $11.56 1
King Modular Buildings Equipment Maintenance $11.56 1
King Modular;Buildings Plumber $11.56 1
King Modular Buildings Production Worker $9.40 1
King Modular Buildings Tool Maintenance $11.56 1
King Modular Buildiu s Utility Y Person $11.56 1
King Modular Buildings Welder $11.56 1
i
King Painters Journey Level $34.87 6Z 2B
Kin Pile Driver
King Journey Level $48.67 5A 1M
King Plasterers Journey Level $46.63 5B 1R
King Playground&Park Equipment Journey Level $8.55 1
lInstallers
King Plumbers&Pipefitters Journey Level $69.39 5A 1G
King Power Equipment Operators Asphalt Plant Operators $50.39 5D 1T
8P
King Power Equipment Operators Assistant Engineer $47.12 5D 1T 8P
9
Journey Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
King Power Equipment Operators Barrier Machine(zipper) $49.90 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Batch Plant Operator,Concrete $49.90 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Bobcat $47.12 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Brokk-Remote Demolition Equipment $47.12 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Brooms $47.12 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Bump Cutter $49.90 5D IT 8P '
King Power Equipment Operators Cableways $50.39 5D IT 813
King Power Equipment Operators Chipper $49.90 5D IT 8P j
King Power Equipment Operators Compressor $47.12 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Concrete Finish Machine-laser Screed $47.12 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Concrete Pump-Mounted Or Trailer.High $49.48 5D IT 8P
Pressure Line Pump,Pump High Pressure.
King Power Equipment Operators Concrete Pump:Truck Mount With Boom $49.90 5D IT 8P ,
Attachment Up To 42m
King Power Equipment Operators Conveyors $49.48 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Cranes:20 Tons Through 44 Tons With $49.90 5D IT 8P
Attachments
King Power Equipment Operators Cranes: 100 Tons Through 199 Tons,Or 150' $50.94 5D IT 8P
Of Boom(including Jib With
King Power Equipment Operators Cranes:200 Tons To 300 Tons,Or 250'Of $51.51 5D IT 8P
Boom (including Jib With Attachments)
King Power Equipment Operators Cranes:45 Tons Through.99 Tons, Under 150' $50.39 5D IT 8P
Of Boom(including Jib With Attachments)
King Power Equipment Operators Cranes:A-frame-10 Tons And Under $47.12 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Cranes: Friction 100 Tons Through 199 Tons 1 $51.51 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Cranes: Friction Over 200 Tons $52.07 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Cranes:Over 300 Tons Or 300'Of Boom $52.07 5D IT 8P
(including Jib With Attachments)
King Power Equipment Operators Cranes:Through 19 Tons With Attachments $49.48 5D IT 8P
A-frame Over 10 Tons
10
Journey Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
King Power Equipment Operators Crusher $49.90 5D IT 8P
jKing Power Equipment Operators Deck Engineer/deck Winches(power) $49.90 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Derricks,On Building Work $50.39 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Dozers D-9&Under $49.48 5D 1T 8P
King .:Power Equipment Operators Drill Oilers:Auger Type,Truck Or Crane $49.48 5D IT 8P
Mount
King Power Equipment Operators Drilling Machine $49.90 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Elevator And Man-lift:Permanent And Shaft $47.12 5D IT 8P
Type
King Power Equipment Operators Finishing Machine, Bidwell And Gamaco& $49.90 5D IT 8P
Similar Equipment
King Power Equipment Operators Forklift:3000 Lbs And?Over With $49.48 5D IT 8P
Attachments
King Power Equipment Operators Forklifts: Under 3000 Lbs.With Attachments $47.12 5D IT 8P
King Power.Equipment Operators Grade Engineer: Using Blue Prints,Cut $49.90 5D IT 8P
Sheets, Etc
King Power Equipment Operators Gradechecker/stakeman 5D 47.12
$ — IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Guardrail Punch $49.90 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Hard Tail End Dump Articulating Off-Road $50.39 5D 1T 8P
Equipment 45 Yards.&Over
King Power Equipment Operators Hard Tail End Dump Articulating Off road
$49:90 5D 1T 8?
Equipment Under 45 Yards
King Power Equipment Operators Horizontal/directional Drill Locator $49.48 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Horizontal/directional Drill Operator $49.90 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Hydralifts/boom Trucks Over 10 Tons $49.48 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Hydralifts/boom Trucks, 10 Tons And Under $47.12 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Loader,Overhead 8 Yards.&Over $50.94 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Loader,Overhead,6 Yards. But Not Including $50.39 5D IT 8F
j 8 Yards
King Power Equipment Operators Loaders,Overhead Under 6 Yards $49.90 5D 1T 8P
' ll
Journey Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
King Power Equipment Operators Loaders, Plant Feed $49.90 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Loaders: Elevating Type Belt $49.48 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Locomotives,All $49.90 5D IT 8P ,
King Power Equipment Operators Material Transfer Device $49.90 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Mechanics,All (leadmen-$0.50 Per Hour $50.94 5D IT 8P
Over Mechanic)
King Power Equipment Operators Motor Patrol Grader-Non-finishing $49.48 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Motor Patrol Graders, Finishing $50.39 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Mucking Machine, Mole,.Tunnel Drill, Boring, $50.39 5D IT 8P
Road Header And/or Shield
King Power Equipment Operators Oil Distributors, Blower Distribution&Mulch $47.12 5D IT 8P
Seeding Operator
King Power Equipment Operators Outside Hoists(elevators And Manlifts),Air $49.48 5D IT 8P
Tuggers,strato
King Power Equipment Operators Overhead, Bridge Type Crane: 20 Tons. $49.90 5D IT 8P
Through 44 Tons
King Power Equipment Operators Overhead Bridge Type: 100 Tons And Over 50.94 5D IT 8P
g YP $ _ _
King Power Equipment Operators Overhead, Bridge Type:45 Tons Through 99 $50.39 5D IT 8P
Tons
King Power Equipment Operators Pavement Breaker $47.12 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Pile Driver(other Than Crane Mount) $49.90 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Plant Oiler-Asphalt,Crusher $49.48 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Posthole Digger, Mechanical $47.12 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Power Plant $47.12 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Pumps-Water $47.12 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Quad 9, Hd 41, D10 And Over $50.39 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Quick Tower-No Cab,Under 100 Feet In $47.12 5D IT 8P
Height Based To BOOM
King Power Equipment Operators Remote Control Operator On Rubber Tired $50.39 5D IT 8P
Earth Moving Equipment
12
Journey Level Prevailing Wage !fates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
King Power Equipment Operators Rigger And Bellman $47.12 5D 1T 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Rollagon $50.39 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Roller,Other Than Plant Mix $47.12 5D 1T 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Roller, Plant Mix Or Multi-lift Materials $49.48 5D IT 8P
IKing Power Equipment Operators Roto-mill, Roto-grinder $49.90 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Saws-Concrete $49.48 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Scraper,Self Propelled Under 45 Yards $49.90 5D IT 8P
1 King Power Equipment Operators Scrapers-Concrete&Carry All $49.48 5D IT 8P
King. Power Equipment Operators Scrapers,Self-propelled.45 Yards And Over $50.39 5D IT 8P
Kin Power Equipment
g Operators Service Engineers-Equipment $49.48 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Shotcrete/gunite Equipment $4712 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Shovel, Excavator, Backhoe,Tractors Under $49.48 51) IT 8P
15 Metric Tons.
King Power Equipment Operators Shovel, Excavator,Backhoe:Over 30 Metric $50:39. 5D IT 8P
Tons To 50 Metric Tons
King Power Equipment Operators Shovel, Excavator, Backhoes,Tractors: 15 To $49.90 5D IT 8P
30 Metric Tons
King Power Equipment Operators Shovel, Excavator,Backhoes:Over 50 Metric $50.:94 5D IT 8P
Tons To 90 Metric Tons
King Power Equipment Operators Shovel, Excavator, Backhoes:Over 90 Metric $51.51 5D IT 8P
Tons
King Power Equipment Operators Slipform Pavers $50.39 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Spreader,Topsider&Screedman $50.39 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Subgrad.er Trimmer $49.90 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Tower Bucket Elevators $49.48 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Tower Crane Over 175'in Height, Base To $51.51 5D
IT 8P
Boom — — —
King Power Equipment Operators Tower Crane Up To 175'In Height Base To $50.94 5D IT 8P
Boom
13
Journey Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
King Power Equipment Operators Transporters,All Track Or Truck Type $50.39 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Trenching Machines $49.48 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Truck Crane Oiler/driver-100 Tons And Over $49..90 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Truck Crane Oiler/driver Under 100 Tons $49.48 5D IT -8P
King Power Equipment Operators Truck Mount Portable Conveyor $49.90 5D. IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Welder $50.39 5D IT 8P
King Power Eauipment Operators Wheel Tractors,Farmall Type $47.12 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment Operators Yo Yo Pay Dozer $49.90 5D IT 8P
King Power Equipment O erators- Asphalt Plant Operators 50.39
5D
1T..:: 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Assistant Engineer $47.12 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Barrier Machine(zipper): $49.90 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Batch Plant Operator,Concrete $49.90 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Bobcat $47.12 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Brokk-Remote Demolition Equipment $47.12 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Brooms $47:12 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Bump Cutter $49.90 5D IT 8P
Underground
Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Cableways $50.39 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Chipper $49.90 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Compressor $47.12 5D IT 8—P
Underground Sewer&Water
Ki ng Power Equipment O erators- Concr ete Finish Machine-laser Screed $47.12 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
14
Journey Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
King Power Equipment Operators- Concrete Pump-Mounted Or Trailer High $49.48 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water Pressure Line Pump, Pump High Pressure.
King Power Equipment O erators- Concrete Pump:Truck Mount With Boom $49.90 —5D _1T 8P
Underground Sewer&Water Attachment Up To 42m
King Power Equipment Operators- Conveyors $49.48 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Cranes:20 Tons Through 44 Tons With 49.90 5D IT 8P
g $ — — —
Underground Sewer&Water Attachments
�. King. Power Equipment Operators- Cranes: 100 Tons Through 199 Tons,Or 150' $50.94 5_D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water Of Boom(including Jib With
1 King Power Equipment Operators- Cranes:200 Tons To 300 Tons,Or 250'Of $51.51 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water Boom(including Jib With Attachments)
King Power Equipment Operators- Cranes:45 Tons Through 99 Tons, Under 150' $50.39 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water Of Boom(including Jib With Attachments)
King Power Equipment Operators- Cranes:A-frame-10 Tons And Under $47.12 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Cranes: Friction 100 Tons Through 199 Tons $51.51 5D IT 8P
Underground.Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Cranes: Friction Over 200 Tons $52.07 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Cranes:Over 300 Tons Or 300'Of Boom $52:07 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water (including Jib With Attachments)
King Power Equipment Operators- Cranes:Through 19 Tons With Attachments $49.48 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water A-frame Over 10 Tons
King Power Equipment Operators- Crusher $49.90 5D .1T 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Deck Engineer/deck Winches(power) $49.90 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Derricks,On Building Work $50.39 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Dozers D-9&Under $49.48 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Drill Oilers:Auger Type,Truck Or Crane $49.48 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water Mount
King Power Equipment Operators- Drilling Machine $49.90 5D IT 8P
15
Journey Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Elevator And Man-lift: Permanent And Shaft $47:12 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water Type
King Power Equipment Operators- Finishing Machine, Bidwell And Gamaco& $49.90 5D IT 8P f
Underground Sewer&Water Similar Equipment
King Power Equipment Operators- Forklift:3000 Lbs And Over With $49.48 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water Attachments
King Power Equipment Operators- Forklifts: Under 3000 Lbs.With Attachments $47.12 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Grade Engineer: Using Blue Prints,Cut $49.90 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water Sheets, Etc
King Power Equipment Operators- Gradechecker/stakeman $47.12 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Guardrail.Punch $49,90 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Hard Tail End Dump Articulating Off-Road $50.39 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water Equipment 45 Yards.&Over
King Power Equipment Operators- Hard Tail End Dump Articulating Off-road $49.90 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water Equipment Under 45 Yards
King Power Equipment Operators- Horizontal/directional Drill Locator $49.48 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Horizontal/directional Drill Operator $49.90 5_1) IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Hydralifts/boom Trucks Over 10 Tons $49.48 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Hydralifts/boom Trucks, 10 Tons And Under $47.12 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Loader,Overhead 8 Yards.&Over $50.94 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Loader,Overhead,6 Yards.But Not Including $50.39 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water 8 Yards
King Power Equipment Operators- Loaders,Overhead Under 6 Yards $49.90 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Loaders, Plant Feed $49.90 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
16 i
Journey Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
King Power Equipment Operators- Loaders: Elevating Type Belt $49.48 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power.Equipment O Operators- Locomotives All 49.90 5D IT P
p $ _ _ $
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment O erators- Material Transfer Device $49.90 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Mechanics,All(leadmen-$0.50 Per Hour $50.94 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water Over Mechanic)
King Power Equipment Operators- Motor Patrol Grader-Non-finishing $49.48 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Motor Patrol Graders, Finishing $50.39 5D IT `' 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Mucking Machine, Mole,Tunnel Drill, Boring, $50.39 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water Road Header And/or Shield
King Power Equipment Operators- Oil Distributors, Blower Distribution&Mulch .$47.12 5_D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water Seeding Operator
King Power Equipment Operators- Outside Hoists(elevators And Manlifts),Air $49.48 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water Tuggers,strato
King Power Equipment Operators- Overhead, Bridge Type Crane:20 Tons $49:90 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water Through 44 Tons
King Power Equipment Operators- Overhead, Bridge Type: 100 Tons And Over $50.94 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Overhead, Bridge Type:45 Tons Through 99 $50.39 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water Tons
King Power Equipment Operators- Pavement Breaker $47.12 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Pile Driver(other Than Crane Mount) $49.90 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Plant Oiler-Asphalt, Crusher $49.48 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Posthole Digger, Mechanical $47.12 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer.&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Power Plant $47.12 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Pumps-Water $47.12 5D IT 8P
17
Journey Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Quad 9, Hd 41, D10 And Over $50.39 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Quick Tower-No Cab, Under 100 Feet In $47.12 5D IT 8P j
Underground Sewer&Water Height Based To Boom
King Power Equipment Operators- Remote Control Operator On Rubber Tired $50.39 51) 1T 8P
Underground Sewer&Water Earth Moving Equipment
King Power Equipment Operators- Rigger And Bellman $47.12 51) IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Rollagon $50.39 51) IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Roller,Other Than Plant Mix $47.12 51) 1T SP
Underground Sewer'&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Roller, Plant Mix Or Multi-lift Materials $49.48 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Roto-mill, Roto-grinder $49.90 .SD. IT 8P
Underground Sewer&:Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Saws-Concrete $49.48 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water ,
King Power Equipment Operators- Scraper,Self Propelled Under 45 Yards $49.90 5D IT 8P
Underground.Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Scrapers-Concrete&Carry All $49.48 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Scrapers,Self-propelled:45 Yards And Over $50.39 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Service Engineers-Equipment $49.48 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Shotcrete/gunite Equipment $47.12: 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Shovel, Excavator, Backhoe,Tractors Under $49.48 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water 15 Metric Tons.
King Power Equipment Operators- Shovel, Excavator, Backhoe:Over 30 Metric $50.39 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water Tons To 50 Metric Tons
King Power Equipment Operators- Shovel, Excavator, Backhoes,Tractors: 15 To $49.90 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water 30 Metric Tons
18
Journey Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
King Power Equipment Operators- Shovel, Excavator, Backhoes:Over 50 Metric $50.94 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water Tons To 90 Metric Tons
King Power Equipment O erators- Shovel Excavator Backhoes:Over 90 Metric $51.51 5D 1T 8P
Underground Sewer&Water Tons
King Power Equipment Operators- Slipform Pavers $50.39 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Spreader,Topsider&Screedman $50.39 5D IT 813
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Subgrader Trimmer $49.90 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Tower Bucket Elevators $49.48 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
I
King Power Equipment Operators- Tower Crane Over 175'in Height, Base To $51.51 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water Boom
King Power Equipment Operators- Tower Crane Up To 175' In Height Base To $50.94 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water Boom
King Power Equipment Operators- Transporters,All Track Or Truck Type .$50.39. 5D 1T 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
I
. King Power Equipment Operators- Trenching Machines $49.48 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Truck Crane Oiler/driver-100 Tons And Over $49.90 5D 1T 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Truck Crane Oiler/driver Under 100 Tons $49.48 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Truck Mount Portable Conveyor. $49.90 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Welder $50.39 5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Wheel Tractors,Farmall Type $47.12 5D 1T 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Equipment Operators- Yo Yo Pay Dozer $49.90 .5D IT 8P
Underground Sewer&Water
King Power Line Clearance Tree Journey Level In Charge $40.79 5A 4A
Trimmers
King Power Line Clearance Tree Spray Person $38.73 5A 4A
19
Journey Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
Trimmers
King Power Line Clearance Tree Tree Equipment Operator $40.79 5A 4A
Trimmers
King Power Line Clearance Tree Tree Trimmer $36.50 5A 4A
Trimmers
King Power Line Clearance Tree Tree Trimmer Groundperson. $27.55 5A 4A
Trimmers
King Refrigeration &Air Conditioning Journey Level $64.56 5A 1G
Mechanics
King Residential Brick Mason Journey Level $46.72 5A IM
King Residential Carpenters Journey Level $28.20 1
King Residential Cement Masons Journey Level $22.64 1
King Residential Drywall Applicators Journey Level $38.08 5D 1M
King Residential Drywall Tapers Journey Level $48.79 5P 1E
King Residential Electricians Journey Level $30.33 1
King Residential Glaziers Journey Level $34.54 5G 1H._
King Residential Insulation Applicators Journey Level $26.28 1
King Residential Laborers Journey Level $23,.03 1
King Residential Marble Setters Journey Level $24.09 1
King Residential Painters Journey Level $24.46 1
King Residential Plumbers&Pipefitters Journey Level $34.69 1
King _Residential Refrigeration&Air Journey Level $64.56 5A 1G
Conditioning Mechanics
King Residential Sheet Metal Workers Journey Level $37.35 6L 1R
King Residential Soft Floor Lavers Journey Level $40.96 5A 2X
King Residential Sprinkler Fitters(Fire Journey Level $38.81 5C 2R j
Protection)
King Residential Stone Masons Journey Level $46.72 5A 1_M
King Residential Terrazzo Workers Journey Level $46.88 5A 1—m-
20
Journey Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
King Residential Terrazzo/Tile Finishers Journey Level $21.46 1
King Residential Tile Setters Journey Level $25.17 1
King Roofers Journey Level $41.90 5A 1R
King Roofers Using Irritable Bituminous Materials $44.90 5A 1R
King Sheet Metal Workers Journey Level $63.27 6L 1E
King Shipbuilding&Ship Repair Boilermaker $32.56 6W 1H
King Shipbuilding&Ship Repair Carpenter
$35:06 6X 1B
King Shipbuilding&Ship Repair Electrician $34.92 6X 1B
King Shipbuilding&Ship Repair Heat&Frost Insulator $53.44 5.1 1S
King Shipbuilding&Shi p Repair air Laborer
$34.54 6X 16
King Shipbuilding&Ship Repair Machinist $34.75 6X 1B
King Shipbuilding&Ship Repair Operator $37.08 6X 16
King Shipbuilding p p&Ship Repair Painter
$34.67 6X 16
King Shipbuilding&Ship Repair Pipefitter $34.66 6X 1B
King Shipbuilding&Ship Repair Rigger $34.67 6X 1B
King Shipbuilding&Shi p Repair air Sandblaster
$33.63 6X 16
King Shipbu.ilding.&Ship Repair Sheet Metal $34.66 6X 1B
King Shipbuilding&Ship Repair Shipfitter $34.67 6X 1B
King Shipbuilding&Shi p Repair air Trucker
$34.50 6X 1B
King Shipbuilding&Ship Repair Warehouse $34.65 6X 1B
King Shipbuilding&Ship Repair Welder/burner $34.67 6X 1B
King Sign Makers& Installers(Electrical) Sign Installer $22.92 1
King Sign Makers&Installers(Electrical) Sign Maker $21.36 1
King Sin Makers&Installers(Non- Sign Installer $27.28 1
Electrical
King Sin Makers&Installers(Non- Sign Maker $33.25 1
Electrical
21
Journey Level Prevailing Wage Rates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
King Soft Floor Lavers Journey Level $40.96 5A 2X
King Solar Controls For Windows Journey Level $12.44 1 .
King Sprinkler Fitters(Fire Protection) Journey Level $66.54 5C 1X
King Stage Rigging Mechanics(Non Journey Level $13.23 1
Structural
King Stone Masons Journey Level $46.72 5A 1M
King Street And Parking Lot Sweeper Journey Level $19.09 1
Workers
King Surveyors Chain Person
$9.35 1
King Surveyors Instrument Person $11.40 1
King Surveyors Party Chief $13.40 1
King Telecommunication Technicians Journey Level $22.76 1
King Telephone Line Construction- Cable Splicer $32.27 5A 2B
Outside
King Telephone Line Construction- Hole Digger/Ground Person $18.10 5A 2B
Outside
I
King Telephone Line Construction- Installer(Repairer) $30.94 5A 2B
Outside
King Telephone Line Construction- Special Aparatus Installer 1 $32.27 5A 2B
Outside
King Telephone Line Construction- Special Apparatus Installer II $31.62 5A 2B
Outside
King Telephone Line Construction- Telephone Equipment Operator(Heavy) $32.27 5A 2B
Outside
King Telephone Line Construction- Telephone Equipment Operator(Light) $30.02 5A 2B
Outside
King Telephone Line Construction- Telephone Lineperson $30.02 5A 2B
Outside
King Telephone Line Construction- Television Groundperson $17.18 5A 2B
Outside
King Telephone Line Construction- Television Lineperson/Installer $22.73 5A 2B
Outside
22
Journey Level Prevailing Wage hates for the Effective Date: 9/1/2010
King Telephone Line Construction- Television System Technician $27.09 5A 2B
Outside
' Kin Telephone Line Construction- Television Technician
King $24.35 5A 2B
Outside
King T elephone Line Construction-
Tree Trimmer $30.02 5A 26
Outside
King Terrazzo Workers Journey Level $46.88 5A 1M
King Tile Setters Journey Level $21.65 1
King Tile:Marble&Terrazzo Finishers Finisher $40.71 5A 1B
King Traffic Control Stripers Journey Level $38.90 5A 1K
King Truck Drivers Asphalt Mix Over 16 Yards(W._WA-Joint $46.47 5D IT 8L
Council 28)
King Truck Drivers Asphalt Mix To 16 Yards(W.WA-Joint Council $45.63 5D IT 8L
28)
King Truck Drivers Dump Truck&Trailer $46.47 ` 5D IT 8L
King Truck Drivers Dump Truck(W.WA-Joint Council 28) $45.63 5D IT 8L
King Truck Drivers Other Trucks(W.WA-Joint Council 28) $46.47 5D IT 8L
King Truck Drivers Transit Mixer $23.45 1
King Well Drillers& Irrigation Pump Irrigation Pump Installer $17.71 1
Installers
King Well Drillers&Irrigation Pump Oiler $12.97 1
Installers
King Well Drillers&Irrigation Pump Well Driller $18.00 1
Installers
23
t
t
Department of Labor and Industries
Prevailing Wage STATEMENT OF INTENT TO
R�q,szerc�.
ww-,v.lni.wa.gov//TradesLicensing/PrevailingWage 902-5335 _T PAY PREVAILING WAGES
wwnv.lni.wa.govl/TradesLicensing/PrevailingWage
Public Works Contract
$25.00 Filing Fee Required
• This form must be typed or printed in ink. Project Name Contract#
• Large,bold numbers match instructions on back of form.
• Please allow a minimum of 10 working days for processing. Contract Awarding Agency(public agency-not federal or private)
• Once approved your form will be posted online at the above webstte j
a Address
APPRO'V'ED FURIY, WILL$I'+`'�'IAILED TO<.THIS AllDI2ESS �,��'.
Contractor,company or agency name,address,city,state&ZIP+4
City State 7- ;4
Awarding Agency Project Contact Person Phone#
County where work was performed City where work was performed
Bid due date (mm/dd/yy) Date contract awarded (mm/dd/yy)
Will all work be subcontracted? Do you intend to use subcontractors?
❑ Yes ❑ No ❑ Yes ❑ No
Prime contractor(has contract with the public agency) Contractor Registration# Expected job start date(mm/dd/yy) Do you intend to use apprentices?
I' ❑ Yes ❑ No
Craft/trade/occupation(Do NOT list apprentices) Estimated no. Rate of Rate of hourly fringe
Indicate number of owners expected to perform work. of workers hourly pay benefits
Company name Indicate total dollar amount of your contract
or time and materials if applicable.
Address I hereby certify that the above information is correct and that all
workers I employ on this Public Works Project will be paid no less
City State ZIPt4 than the Prevailing Wage Rate(s) as determined by the Industrial
Statistician of the Department of Labor and Industries
Contractor Registration No. UBI Title Signature
Industrial Insurance Account Number
Email address Phone number i K �p 'f 'sTbr)&IsUsa Difty t t r�-
Check Number: ❑ $25 or $
s _. r (Tor l&IUSe Oil t y r 4 --
a_��:
Issued By:
APPROVED: Department of Labor and Industries
i
BY
Industrial Statistician j
i
F700-029-000 statement of intent to pay prevailing wages 12-04 After APPROVAL,send white copy to Awarding Agency.
Canary copy—L&I
Department ofLabor and Industries
Prevailing Wage AFFIDAVIT' OF WAGES PAID
�,arar`
(360)902-5335 T Public Works Contract
http://www.Iiii.wa.gov/TradesLicensin&revailingWage �� ceaa°yo $2S.00 Filing Fee Required
• This form must be typed or printed in ink. Project name Contract#
• Fill in all blanks or form will be returned for correction(see back).
• Please allow a minimum of 10 working days for processing. Contract Awarding Agency(public agency-not federal or private)
• Once a roved,your form will be posted online at the website above.
AP__P$QD)ya�211 ' L.BMI�ILEI)r0;! .,_ 1R17.S .. Address
Contractor,company or agency name address city,state&ZIP+4
City State ZIP+4 i
Awarding Agency Project Contact Person Phone#
County where work was performed City where work was performed
Bid due date(mm/dd/yy) Date contract awarded (mm/dd/yy)
Date work completed (mm/dd/yy) Date Intent filed (mnJdd/yy)
was all work subcontracted? Did you intend to use subcontractors?
Prime contractor(has contract with the public agency) Contractor Registration No. ❑ ❑ Yes ❑ No
Yes ❑ No
Job start date(mmIdd/yy)
Craft/trade/occupation and apprentices(For apprentices,give name,registration#, Number Total it of hours Rate of Rate of Hourly
trade,dates of work on project,stage of progression,wage and fringe) of workers worked—ea.trade Hourly Pay Fringe Benefits
Indicate number of owners that performed work.
I
Company name Indicate total dollar amount of your contract $
or time and materials if applicable.
Address I hereby certify that the above information is correct and that all
workers I employ on this Public Works Project will be paid no less
City ZIP+4 than the Prevailing Wage Rate(s) as determined by the Industrial
Statistician of the Department of Labor and Industries
Contractor Registration No. UBI Title Signature
Industrial Insurance Account Number j
Email address Phone numberorT BcTI §e On1�'rc „^ 4r
Check Number: ❑ $25 or $
s a T ufr &IS�tdnl} r ` l '
Issued By:
APPROVED: Department of Labor and Industries
By
Industrial Statistician
F700-007-000 affidavit of wages 12-04 After APPROVAL,send white cony to Awardine Agency.
Canary copy—L&I
i
1
1
1
1
� SPECIAL PROVISIONS
� (PART I )
i
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
i
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
i
9/13/210
i
SPECIAL PROVISIONS...»....»»»»»..................»..................»......»..........»..........»..................
11
1-01 DEFINITIONS AND TERMS.»»....»........»»...»......................»....»...........»»..................
Il
1-01.1 General_.w
1-01.3 Definitions..»»............»»»»»»..»............».»...............»....................»»..................».......11
' 1-02 BID PROCEDURES AND CONDITIONS................»»......»......».........»»»»»......»..... 13
1-02.1 Prequalification of bidders»..»»..............»»...........»..»....................»»»....»................. 13
1-02.2 Plans and Specifications...»....»»..»......»»......»..........»......»»...»»»........»»»......»»......13
1-02.5 Proposal Forms........»....»....»..»..»....»......»............................»..»......»».................»... 14
1-02.6 Preparation of Proposal........»»..»..»......»...............»..........»....»»»..........»».............». 14
1-02.6(1) Proprietary Information»..»....»»......»....................................»»»....»..»»...............14
1-02.7 Bid Deposit».»............»..»»......»........»....»....»..........»..............»....»....»....»........--»---.. 15
1-02.9 Delivery of Proposal.........»»»»»....
1-02.12 Public Opening of Proposals»»»......»....»................................»..........»»................... 15
1-02.13 Irregular Proposals.»......»....»»..»»»»».....».......»............»........»»..»»»»»»........».....15
1-02.14 Disqualification of Bidders.»»....»....»..»......»............................ .................»...15
1-02.15 Pre Award Information»...........»..»......»»..»................................»»»»».»»................16
1-03 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF CONTRACT........».................................»................ 16
' 1-03.1 Consideration of bids»....»..»..»:.»....»»»..»......»..............»..................»»»»..»........»... 16
1-03.2 Award of Contract.......»......»......»..........»....»..............................»»»....»..»........»».....16
1-03.3 Execution of Contract....»»»...»»»....»»....................»............»..».........»»»..........».....17
1-03.4 Contract Bond.......»»..»»»»»»»......»»....»..........»..»..»......»..»......»......»..»..»......»..».17
' 1-03.7 Judicial Review......»»»....»......»»»»..»»»»........»......»......»............»...»_»»»»--------=-----18
1-04 SCOPE OF WORK..»........»..»:.»......»»..»............»........................»»»....... ...18
1-04.2 Coordination of Contract Documents.......................»................»»»»......»...............18
1-04.3 Contractor-Discovered Discrepancies...............»............................»»»».................... 18
1-04.4 Changes»..»......»..............»»»..»..»..................»....................»......»»..........»»............».18
1-04.8 Progress Estimates and Payments.»»».......................... .................18
1-04.11 Final Cleanap.............»........»»......»»»»»»»..............»..:.....»........» ..»»........».....19
' 1-05 CONTROL OF WORK...................»...... .......19
1-05.3 Plans and Working Drawings.»..............»»..................»»....»....»..»»..........................19
1-05.4 Conformity With and Deviation from Plans and Stakes............................».............19
1-05.4(3) Contractor Supplied Surveying.»»»....................»»......»........»»»....»»»................20
1-05.4(4) Contractor Provided As-Built Information.......................»..»..»»....»......»......»....Z1
1-05.7 Removal of Defective and Unauthorized Work.....».....................»»»»»....»»....:.».....21
1
9/13/2010
1-05.10 22
1-0.5.11 Final Inspection 22
1-05.11(1) Substantial Completion 22
1-05.11(2) Final Inspection and Physical Completion B
1-05.11(3) Operational Testing 23
1
-05.12 Final Acceptance...................... ......
1-05.13 Superintendents,Labor and Equipment of 24
1-05.14 Cooperation with Other 24
1-05.16 Water and Power._............- ...................».».....»»..»....»»».
1-05.17 Oral Agreements.................... .............
1-05.18 Contractor's Daily Diary 25
1-06 CONTROL .........
1-06.1 Approval of Materials Prior to 26
1-06.2(1) Samples and Tests for 26
1-06.2(2) Statistical Evaluation of Materials for Acceptance-_.......__..................»»...26
1-07 LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES TO THE PUBLIC-_.....-__26
1-07.1 Laws to he Observed................. 26
1-07.2 State Sales Tax........... 27
1-07.2(1) 27
1-07.2(2) State Sales Tax-Rule 171....I------ 28
1-07.2(3) State Sales Tax-Rule ..........................»»»»....»»..
1-07.2(4) Services .............-.28
1-07.6 Permits and Licenses............. 28
1-07.9 29
1-07.9(5) Required Documents._......- 29
1-07.11 Requirements for ................».29
1-07.11(11) City of Renton Affidavit of Compliance__..........................»».............»»».29
1-07.12 Federal Agency Inspection ........................................29
1-07.13 Contractor's Responsibility for Work..__...._ 29
1-07.13(1) General ig
1-07.15 Temporary Water Pollution/Erosion 29
1-07.16 Protection and Restoration of Property-____.....».........»»..................... -.30
1-07.16(1) Private/Public Property...... --------- 30
1-07.17 Utilities and Similar Facilities_ ...........__31
1-07.17(1) Interruption of Services......»»»»»»»....».»..........»»»»»............»....»»»...........-.32
2
9113/2010
1-07.18 Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance.......„..„..„...................„.
1-0.7.18(1) General„---••---„..„„....„„................. 32
1-07.18(2) Coverages............... 33
1-07.18(3) 34
1-07.18(4) Evidence of Insurance: 35
1-07.22 Use of Explosives...„„..„ .................. 35
1-07.23 Public Convenience and Safety.........„...................................................35
1-07.23(1) Construction Under ..............
1-07.23(2) Construction and Maintenance of 37
1-07.24 Rights of ...............37
1-08 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS 38
1-08.0 Preliminary Matters..„........„.............. 38
1-08.0(1) Preconstruction Conference......... 38
1-08.0(2) Hours of Work 39
1-08.0(3) Reimbursement for Overtime Work of Contracting Agency Employees......__39
1-08.1 Subcontracting---------—-------------------- 39
1-08.2 40
.1-08.3 Progress Schedule.-_................... 40
1-08.4 Notice to Proceed and Prosecution of the 41
1-08.5 Time For 41
1-08.6 Suspension of Work._—............................... 43
1-08.7 Maintenance During 43
1-08.9 Liquidated 43
1-08.11 Contractor's Plant and Equipment......... ..............43
1-08.12 Attention to 44
1-09 MEASUREMENT AND 44
1-09.1 Measurement of ................44
1-09-3 Scope of Payment............................ ................
1-09.6 Force Account.__....................... .. ....——-----------------...............45
1-09.7 Mobilization.____—-----------------------------—-------------------------
1-09.9 Payments 46
1-099(1) 47
1-09.9(2) Contracting Agency's Right to Withhold and Disburse Certain Amounts__...47
1-09.9(3) Final Payment........................ ..............48
1-09.11 Disputes and 49
3
9/13/2010
1-09.11(2) Claims 49
1-09.11(3) Tine Limitations and
1-09.13 Claims and Resolutions....... ................... 49
1-09-13(3) Claims$250,000 or 49
1-09.13(3)A Administration of 49
1-09.13(3)B Procedures to Pursue ......49
1-09.14 Payment Schedule 50
1-09.14(1) Scope---------..---..-
......50
1-09.14(2) Bid Items 50
1-09.14(2) Bid Items------------- 51
1-10 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL-_-----
-.51
1-10.1 -51
1-10.2(1)B Traffic Control ____.52
1-10.2(2) Traffic Control Plans....... 52
1-10.3 Flagging,Signs,and An Other Traffic Control Devices-..---.-.-..-----.53
1-10.3(3) Construction Signs------- 53
1-10.4 Measurement .......--------__53
1-10.5 53
1-11 RENTON SURVEYING 53
1-11.1(1) Responsibility for surveys 53
1-111(2) Survey Datum and Precision----»»»--»........_...------»».. 53-
1-11.1(3) Subdivision Information-....___»»»-......»»_------ » 54
1-11.1(4) Field ----------- 54
1-11.1(5) Corners:and Monuments 54
1-11.1(6) Control or Base Line Survey-------- .............. 54
1-11.1(7) Precision 55
1-11.1(8) Radial and Station-Offset 55
1-11.1(9) Radial 55
1-11.1(10) Station-Offset 55
1-11.1(11) As-Built 56
1-11.1(12) Monument Setting and Referencing._--------------
1-11.12 Materials------------------ 56
1-11.12(1) Property/Lot Corners...---- 56
1-11.12(2) Monuments 57
1-11.12(3) Monument Case and 57
4
9/13/2010
2-01 CLEARINGS GRUBBINQ AND ROADSIDE CLEANUP.--......—................57
2-01.1 Description__—----------------------- 57
2-01.2 Disposal of Usable Material and Debris----------- 57
2-01.5 57
2-02 REMOVAL OF STRUCTURE AND OBSTRUCTIONS 57
2-02.3(3) Removal of Pavement,Sidewalks,and Curbs------ 57
2-02.4 Measurement..... 58
2-02.5 58
2-03 ROADWAY EXCAVATION AND 58
2-03.3 Construction 58
2-03.4 Measurement----------- 59
2-03.5 ......59
2-04 HAUL ——------ 60
2-04.5 60
2-06 SU BGRADE PREPARATION............ —----- 60
2-065 Measurement and 60
2-09 STRUCTURE EXCAVAT ION............. —----- 60
2-09.1 .................60
2-0.93(1)D Disposal of Excavated 60
2-09.4 Measurement._._..................... 60
2-09.5 ...................60
5-03 SLURRY SEAL SURFACE TREATMENT 61
5-03.1 ..................61
5-03.1(1) Applicable Specifications---•--.....»......»»»»..»»»»»»».»»..........»»»»» 61
5-03.2 Materials ......62
5-03.2(1) Emulsified 62
5-03.2(2) ---------------.....................62
5-03.2(3) 62
5-03.2(4) Laboratory Testing..................... ....................63
5-03.2(5) Stockpiling of Aggregates............... 63
5-03.2(6) Storage 63
5-03.2(7) .................63
5-03.2(8) Verification 63
5-03.3 Construction Requirements 63
5-03-3(1) 63
5
9/13/2010
5-03.3(1)A Slurry Mixing Equipment...»»......»»»»»»....»»»»»»........»»»»»»»»»»»»....»».....64
5-03.3(1)B Slurry Spreading Equipment......»»»»»»....»»»..........». .......».....64
5-03.3(1)C Cleaning Equipment»..........»»»»»»»»....»..»»»......»..»..»......»»....»..»..........».....64
5-03.3(1)D Auxiliary Equipment..........».....»»....»..»..»»»»»..»..»»..»..»»»»»»»»..»......»»...64
5-03.3(1)E Calibration»»»»».:........»»».......... »»....»»......»......»» »»»....»»»».64 ,
5-03.3(2) Surface Preparation.»..»....»»»..»..........»......»:..».»..»»..»»»».....»»»»»...........».....64
5-03.3(3) Composition and Rate of Application of the Slurry Mix...---- 64
5-03.3(4) Weather Linutations.»......»»»»..»»»»»»»..»»..»..»..........»»....»»»»»»..»»»..........».65
5-03.3(5) Traffic Control»»»»............»..............»»»..»..»..»»..............»» »»»......»..»»...65
5-03.3(6) Application of Slurry Surfaces..»»»......».......».....»»»......»»»»»»......»................».65
5-03.3(6)A General»....»»»»....»»....»....»:.»......»........»»»..»»............»»..............»»..........».....65
5-03.3(6)B Joints»..»..»»»»»»»»»»»...»»»..»........»....»........»».........:»»»»..»»»»»..................65
5-03.3(6)C Hand Work.»..........».......---»»»....».»».»»»»»»..»......»:...»»..»»»»»»»»..»........»».65
5-03.3(6)D Curing...»..»»»..»»:---»»....»»»....»»»»»....»»»»»..»....»......»................»»..»...........65
5-03.3(6)E Protection of Existing Monuments and Utility Covers..:.»...... ......66
5-03.4 Payment.»»...»....»»..»»»»»»»..»»»..»»»..»»»......»»»......»..»..»»»»........»»»....»...:..». 66
5-04 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT. »»......»..»»»..».....» »»........»»..»»..66
5-04.2 Materials,...»..»»»»»»»»»....»....»..»»»....»»»»....»»»..»..»......»».»....»»»»»...»»....».....66
». 66
5-04.3 Construction Requirements»»».»»........»»»»» »..»»..»»»»»»»»»»»..».»....»» ».
5-04.3(5) Conditioning the Existing Surface
5-04.3(5)A Preparation of Existing Surface.»»»»»..»»»»................»..»»»»»......»............»».67
5-04.3(7)A Mix Design»..»»»..»......»..»»»»............»»»»..»....»»......»»»......»»»»..»»»....»»..».68
5-04.3(8)A Acceptance Sampling and Testing HMA Mixture-------
»»»»»....»...»»......».68
5-04.3(10)B Control.»..»»»»»»»»...»»..»....»»»..........»..»»..»»»..»»......»»........................».....68
5-04.5 Payment.»»»».»»»»»....»»............»»»»»»»»»»..»»».».»..»»»..»»» »»»»»»......».
5-04.5(1)A Price Adjustments for Quality of HMA Mixture»......»....»»»»»»»..».........»......68
5-04.5(1)B Price Adjustments for Quality of HMA Compaction..............».........................69 i
5-06 TEMPORARY RESTORATION IN PAVEMENT AREAS.....»:.»»»».»»».....»...:.»....69
5-06.1 Description...»»»»»»»»..»»»....»....»»»....»»»»»..»»........»........»»......»......»»........».....69 '
5-06.2 Materials»....»..»..»»»..»»»»....»»»....»»»........»......»....»»».:»......»...»»»».......»»..».....70
5-06.3 Construction Requirements..»....».»»..»»»»»»»»»»..»»»»»»».. ..»....»...»........»..70
7-01 DRAINS..»......»»»..»»»....»»»....»....................»»»»»..»»..»»................»»....»....»....»»...70
7-01.2 Materials»........»»..»»»..»»............»..»..»»»»»..»»......»..»....»»....»»».......»».......»....».70
7-01.3 Construction Requirements..»».......»..........»»»....»»»..»....»».. .........................70
7-01.4. Measurement.»»......»»»............»»»..»»»»»»..»»..»..................»......»»»»..».................71
6
9/13/2010
7-02 CULVERTS 71
7-02.2 71
7-04 STORM 71
7-04.2 71
7-04.4 ................».71
7-04.5 Payment__............................---------------------------------------.....................71
7-05 MANHOLES,INLETS,AND CATCH 72
7-05.3 Construction Requirements 72
7-05.3(1) Adjusting Manholes and Catch Basins to Grade..............»»»....»»............»..»..... 72
7-05.3(2) Abandon Existing Manholes..................................»......»».---....».»»......»....»»»...73
7-05.3(2)A Abandon Existing Sanitary Sewer Pipes...... 73
7-05-3(3) Connections to Existing 73
7-05-3(5) Manhole 74
7-05.4 74
7-05.5 74
7-08 GENERAL PIPE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS.......»»»»....»»»................... 75
7-08.3 Construction Requirements ............................. .....................75
7-083(1)C Bedding the Pipe-.__.-- 75
7-08.3(1)D Pipe Foundation.____-——-------------.................»..»»»»»..»»...------».».75
7-08.3(2)A Survey Line and Grade.......................................................................75
7-083(2)B Pipe Laying- 75
7-08.3(2)E Rubber Gasketed Joints»........»......»..»........»»----------- 76
7-083(2)H Sewer Line Connections.._.__-----------------------------------.......................76
7-08-3(2)J Placing PVC Pipe--- 76
7-08.3(3)A Backfilling Sanitary Sewer 76
7-08.4 77
7-08.5 Payment... ................................................................................................77
7-09 PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR WATER 77
7-09.3(15)A Ductile Iron Pipe»»....»..»........»....»............»»..............»»............»..»»........».....78
7-093(15)B Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC)Pipe(4 inches and Over)....................................78
7-093(17) Laying Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings with Polyethylene 78
7-09.3(19)A Connections to Existing Mains.»»»»........»..»»......»........»»»....»»».............-...78
7-09-3(21) Concrete Thrust Blocking and Dead-Man Block-......__.........................79
7-09.3(23) Hydrostatic Pressure 79
7-093(24)A Flushing and»»»»..»»...........................................................................-...80
7
9/13/2010
7-09.3(24)D Dry Calcium HypocWorite»»»..........»»....»...:..........»...... ............»......».....80
7-09.3(24)K Retention Period»........»»»»..»»....»..........»»....»........»»»»» ..»............».....80
7-09.3(24)N Final Flushing and Testing»..................»......»......»..»....» .........................80
7-09.3(25) Joint Restraint Systems............»............»»..............»...... ..........»....:.»..»».....80
7-09.4 Measurement...» ...... ....»»»......»..»..........»»................»»....».........................82
7-09.5 Payment................»»»...............».....»..»»..»».............----.......»..»»..................»..»»».....82
7-12 VALVES FOR WATER MAINS.»»......»»..»»..»....»»..»......»...... .........................83
7-12.3(1) Installation of Valve Marker Post.....»»......»....»..............................»....»........».....83
7-12.3(2) Adjust Existing Valve Boa to Grade........»»»»......»....»»....».........:..»»»............»...83
7-12.4 Measurement.....»»......»..»»»»»»»..»......»»»»......»»..:....
7-12.5 Payment--------....»»............»»....»»»......»............»»........»»»......»....»........»...............84
7-14 HYDRANTS..»....»».....»»»»......»..................»............................»....»....»............»»....».84
7-14.3(1) Setting Hydrants...............»»»........»»......»......»»......»..........:.....»........»..........».....84
7-14.3(3) Resetting Existing Hydrants..»»....»................»»..»:.........»»..»........»»....»......».....85 t
7-14.3(4) Moving Existing Hydrants...»_................»»......»....»»..»»»»»»........»....»......»»»...85
7-14.5 Payment.»»...»..»»......»»..»....»....»»..»»»..»»»»..»»..........»»........................»........»»:..85
7-15 SERVICE CONECTIONS»....»»»»......»»........»..............»»»»».... »»..........».......85
7-15.3 Construction Details......»............»»»»..........»»»....»»»........» ........»......».....85
7-15.5 Payment..........»»»..........»..»......»»........ .........86
7-17 SANITARY SEWERS»....»»....»»......................»..»»»..»...:....».... ..........»»......».....86
7-17.2 Materials......»....................»»»..»»............»..........»».............................»»»..».......».....86
7-17.3 Construction Requirements..»»...»..........»»»»»............»..»........»......»».........»»»......86.
7-17.3(1) Protection of Existing Sewerage Facilities.....»....»................ ...»........»..»....86
7-17.3(2)H Television Inspection.........»»»»..»»»..»»»»».................. ...................»»........86
7-17.4 Measurement.»....»........»....................».... ..»».....:...... ....»..........»......»»».87 t
7-17.5 Payment.»»......»».....»»....»......»......»..»......»......»........................»»»»»........»»....».....87
8-09 RAISED
8-09.5 Payment.................»...»»..........»..»..»........»..»»»»......»......»......»»....»......»..........»..».87
8-13 MONUMENT CASES.....»»......»..............»»»»..»»..........»»..»»:...»..»..»»..». ....88
8-13.1 Description.......»»»....»».,....»..»..»......»....»....»»»....»..................»»»»...........----.......».88
8-13.3 Construction Requirements»» 88
8-13.4 Measurement...:...»..»......»..»....»»..»».........._»....»»»........»....»»»....»»»..........»...._88
8-13.5 Payment...........».......»»:.»»..........»»»............»»»»................»»..»»»»....................».....88
8-14 CEMENT CONCRETE SH)EWALKS.....»..»»».....»....»........»»............»»............».....88
8-14.3(4) Curing...»........»»»»»....»».........»»..................»»..............»......»»»»»»..............»»...88
8
9/13/2010
8-14.4 —----------------------------—»..»..---.».....89
8-14.5 89
8-17 IMPACT ATTENUATOR SYSTEMS..»....:.....»....»»..........»........»»»»»»......».»..»......89
8-17.5 Payment..................................... 89
8-20 ILLUMINATION,TRAFFIC SIGNAL SYSTEMS,AND ELECTRICAL____89
8-20.2(1) Equipment List and Drawings ———------------------------ 89
8-22 PAVEMENT 90
8-22.1 ——------..............»........»..»».
8-22-3(5) Installation ................................90
8-22.5 .............................91
8-23 TEMPORARY PAVEMENT MARKINGS.............................»....»»»»..»»».........91
8-23.5 Payment..... 91
9-03.8(7) RMA Tolerances and
9-05 DRAINAGE STRUCTURES,CULVERTS,AND CONDUITS.—____-_.....92
9-05.4 Steel Culvert Pipe and Pipe Arch(RC) 92
9-05.7(2) Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewer Pipe(RC)............................................92
9-05.7(2)A Basis for Acceptance -..-..-.92
9-05.7(3) Concrete Storm Sewer Pipe Joints 92
9-05.7(4) Testing Concrete Storm Sewer Pipe Joints(RC).................. 92
9-059 Steel Spiral Rib Storm Sewer Pipe(RC) 93
9-05.12 Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC) ..................... 93
9-05.12(3) CPEP Sewer —-----.».....-»....»»......»».»-...»..»......93
9-05.14 ABS Composite Sewer Pipe.......... 93
9-05.17 Aluminum Spiral Rib Storm Sewer Pipe--_--- 94
9-05.22 High Density Polyethylene
9-08 PAIINTS... ....................95
9-08.8 Manhole Coating System Products»....»..»»»»»»»»..............................».:».............»..95
9=08.8(1) Coating Systems ................95
9-23 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS AND ADMIXTURES......__.....................96
9-23.9 Fly Ash(RC)
9-30 WATER DISTRIBUTION MATERIALS 96
9-30.3(1) Gate Valves(3inches to 12 96
9-30-3(3) Butterfly Valves................................. 97
9-30.3(5) Valve Marker Posts........................................................ 97
9-30-3(7) Combination Air Release/Air Vacuum 97
9
9/13/2010
9-30.3(8) Tapping Sleeve and Valve Assembly..»..»..»»»»:.....»........»»....»»..»»..........»»».....97
9-30.3(9) Blow-Off Assembly.».........»»».............».. »».....................»»..»..........»....»»..98
9-30.3(10) Reduced Pressure Double Backflow Preventer...»..........»».................................98 '
9-30.5 Hydrants»..»..»..»»»»....»»....»....»»»..»........»»....»...........»......»»»....................»».....98
9-30.5(1) End Connections(RC).»»» »..»»»....» »..»»»......»» 98 '
9-30.5(2) Hydrant Dimensions...»....»»»»»................»....»»»»..........»....»».»»»»................»..98
9-30.6(3)B Polyethylene Pipe.»..»»....»»»....»..........»»....»»..............»....»»»»....»......»...»»---.99 '
9-30.6(4) Service Fit6ngs»»»..»......»»»»....»..»..»..........»»»....»........»........»..»»..»....»....»»».99
9-30.6(5) Meter Setters.»......»»»..»»»»»»»»»........»..»»»»»........»....»»» ....................»-99
10
9/13/210
jSPECIAL PROVISIONS
1-01 DEFINITIONS AND TERMS
1-01.1 General
Section 1-0 1.1 is supplemented with:
Whenever reference is made to the State,-State of Washington, Commission, Department of
Transportation,.Secretary of Transportation,Owner,Contracting Agency or Engineer, such reference
shall be deemed to mean the City of Renton acting through its City Council, employees, and duly
authorized representatives for all contracts administered by the City of Renton.
i All references to "State Materials Laboratory" shall be revised to read "Contrasting Agency
designated location".
1-01.3 Definitions
Section 1-013 is revised and supplemented by the following:
Act of God
"Act of God" means.an earthquake, flood, cyclone, or other cataclysmic phenomenon of nature. A
rain,windstorm, high water or other natural phenomenon of unusual intensity for the specific locality
of the Work, which might reasonably have been anticipated from historical records of the general
locality of the Work,shall not be construed as an act of god.
Consulting Engineer
The Contracting Agency's design consultant, who may or may not administer the construction
program for the Contracting Agency.
Contract Documents
iSee definition for"Contract".
■ Contract Price
Either the unit price,the unit prices,or lump sum price or prices named in the proposal,or in properly
executed change orders.
Contract Time
The period of time established by the terms and conditions of the Contract within which the Work
must be physically completed.
Dates
Bid Opening Date:The date on which the Contracting Agency publicly opens and reads the
bids.
Award Date: The date of the formal decision of the Contracting Agency to accept the lowest
responsible and responsive Bidder for the Work.
Contract Execution Date: The date the Contracting Agency officially binds the agency to
the Contract.
Notice to Proceed Date:The date stated in the Notice to Proceed on which the Contract Time
begins,also referred to as the date of commencement.
Substantial Completion Date:The day the Engineer determines the Contracting Agency has
M and unrestricted use and benefit of the facilities, both from the operational and safety
standpoint,and only minor incidental Work,replacement of temporary substitute facilities, or
correction or repair remains for the physical completion of the total contract.
11
9/13/2010
Contract Completion Date: The date b which the Work i
p y e o s contractually required to be
physically completed. The Contract Completion Date will be stated in the Notice to Proceed.
Revisions of this date will be authorized in writing by the Engineer whenever there is an
extension to the Contract time.
Completion Date: The day all the Work specified in the Contract is completed and all the
obligations of the Contractor under the Contract are fulfilled by the Contractor.
Final Acceptance Date:The date the Contracting Agency accepts the Work as complete per
the Contract requirements.
Day
Unless otherwise designated, day(s)as used in the Contract Documents,shall be understood to mean
working days.
Engineer
The City Engineer or duly authorized representative,or an authorized member of a licensed
consulting firm retained by the Owner for the construction engineering of a specific public works
project.
Inspector
The Owner's authorized representative assigned to make necessary observations of the Work
performed or being performed,or of materials famished or being furnished by the Contractor.
Notice of Award:The written notice from the Contracting Agency to the successful bidder signifying
the Contracting Agency's acceptance of the bid.
Notice to Proceed:The written notice from the Contracting Agency or the Engineer to the Contractor
authorizing and directing the Contractor to proceed with Work and establishing the date on which the
Contract time begins,also referred to as the date of commencement.
Or Equal
Where the term "or equal' is used herein, the Contracting Agency, or the Contracting Agency on
recommendation of the Engineer,shall be the sole judge of the quality and suitability of the proposed
substitution. The responsibility and cost of furnishing necessary evidence, demonstrations, or other
information required to obtain the approval of alternative materials or processes by the Owner shall
be entirely borne by the Contractor.
Owner
The City of Renton or its authorized representative also referred to as Contracting Agency.
Performance and Payment Bond
Same as"Contract Bond"defined in the Standard Specifications.
Plans
The Contract Plans and/or Standard Plans which show location, character, and dimensions of
prescribed Work including layouts,profiles,cross-sections,and other details. Drawings may either be
bound in the same book as the balance of the Contract Documents or bound in separate sets, and are a
part of the Contract Documents,regardless of the method of binding.The terms "Standard Drawings"
or "Standard Details" generally used in Specifications refers to drawings bound either with the
specification documents or included with the Plans or the City of Renton Standard Plans.
Points
Wherever reference is made to the Engineer's points,this shall mean all marks,bench marks,
reference points,stakes,hubs,tack,etc_,established by the Engineer for maintaining horizontal and
vertical control of the Work.
12
t
t9/13/2010
Provide
Means"furnish and install"as specified and shown in the Plans.
Secretary,Secretary of Transportation
The chief executive officer of the Department and other authorized representatives. The chief
executive officer to the Department shall also refer to the Department of Public Works Administrator.
Shop Drawings
Same as"Working Drawings"defined in the Standard Specifications.
Special Provisions
Modifications to the Standard Specifications and their amendments that apply to an individual
project. The special provisions may describe Work the Specifications do not cover. Such Work shall
comply first with the Special Provisions and then with any Specifications that apply. The Contractor
shall include all costs of doing this Work within the bid prices.
State
The state of Washington acting through its representatives. The State shall also refer to The City of
Renton and its authorized representatives where applicable.
Supplemental Drawings and Instructions
Additional instructions by the Engineer at request of the Contractor by means of drawings or
documents necessary,in the opinion of the Engineer,for the proper execution of the Work. Such
drawings and instructions are consistent with the Contract Documents.
Traffic
Both vehicular and non-vehicular traffic,such as pedestrians,bicyclists,wheelchairs,and equestrian
traffic.
Utility
Public or private fixed improvement for the transportation of fluids,gases,power,signals,or
communications and shall be understood to include tracks,overhead and underground wires,cables,
pipelines,conduits,ducts,sewers,or storm drains.
1-02 BID PROCEDURES AND CONDITIONS
1-02.1 Prequalification of Bidders
Delete this Section and replace it with the following:
Bidders shall be qualified by experience, financing, equipment, and organization to do the Work
called for in the Contract Documents. The Contracting Agency reserves the right to take whatever
action it deems necessary to ascertain the ability of the bidder to perform the Work satisfactorily-
1-02.2 Plans and Specifications
Delete this Section and replace it with the following:
Information as to where Bid Documents can be obtained or reviewed will be found in the Cali for
Bids(Advertisement for Bids)for the Work
i
13
9/1Y2010 j
After award of the Contract, Plans and Specifications will be issued to the Contractor at no cost as ,
detailed below:
To Prime Contractor No.of Sets Basis of Distribution
Reduced Plans (11"x 17")and 4 Furnished automatically
contract provisions upon award
Large Plans(22"x 34") 4 Furnished only upon
request
Additional Plans and Contract Provisions may be purchased by the Contractor by payment of the cost
stated in the Call for Bids.
1-02.5 Proposal Forms
Delete this Section and replace it with the following:
At the request of the bidder, the Contracting Agency will provide a proposal form for any project on
which the bidder is eligible to bid
The proposal form will identify the project and its location and describe the Work. It will also list
estimated quantities,units of measurement,the items of Work, and the materials to be furnished at the
unit bid prices. The bidder shall complete spaces on the proposal form that call for, but are not
limited to,unit bid prices;extensions; summations;the total bid amount;signatures; date;and,where
applicable, retail sales taxes and acknowledgement of addenda;the bidder's name, address,telephone
number, and signature; and a State of Washington Contractor's Registration Number. Bids shall be
completed by typing or shall be printed in ink by hand, preferably in black ink. The required
certifications are included as part of the proposal form.
The Contracting Agency reserves the right to arrange the proposal forms with alternates and additives,
if such be to the advantage of the Contracting Agency The bidder shall bid on all alternates and
additives set forth in the proposal forms unless otherwise specified.
Any correction to a bid made by interlineations,alteration, or erasure, shall be initialed by the signer
of the bid. The bidder shall make no stipulation on the Bid Form,nor qualify the bid in any manner.
A bid by a corporation shall be executed in the corporate name, by the president or a vice president
(Or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign).
A bid by a partnership shall be executed in the partnership name, and signed by a partner. A copy of
the partnership agreement shall be submitted with the Bid Form if any D/M/WBE requirements are to
be satisfied through such an agreement.
A bid by a joint venture shall be executed in the joint venture name and signed by a member of the
joint venture. A copy of the joint venture agreement shall be submitted with the Bid Form if any
D/W/N BE requirements are to be satisfied through such an agreement.
1-02.6 Preparation of Proposal
The second paragraph is revised as follows:
All prices shall be in legible figures written in ink or typed.The proposal shall include:
1. A unit price for each item (omitting digits more than four places to the right of the decimal
point).In the event of errors or where conflict occurs,the unit price bid will govern.
1-02.6(1) Proprietary Information
1-02.6(1)is a new Section.
Vendors should,in the bid proposal,identify clearly any material(s),which constitute"(valuable)
formula, designs drawings,and research data" so as to be exempt from public disclosure,RCW
42.17.310, or any materials otherwise claimed to be exempt,along with a Statement of the basis
14
9/13/2010
for such claim of exemption. The Department (or State) will give notice to the vendor of any
request for disclosure of such information received within 5 (five) years from the date of
submission. Failure to so label such materials or failure to timely respond after notice of request
for public disclosure has been given shall be deemed a waiver by the submitting vendor of any
claim that such materials are,in fact,so exempt.
1-02.7 Bid Deposit
Section 1-02.7 is supplemented with the following:
Bid Bonds shall contain the following:
1. Number assigned to the project by the Contracting Agency;
2. Name of the project;
3. The Contracting Agency named as obligee;
4. The amount of the bid bond stated either as a dollar figure or as a percentage which
represents five percent of the maximum bid amount that could be awarded;
5. Signature of the bidder's officer empowered to sign official statements. The signature of the
person authorized to submit the bid should agree with the signature on the bond,and the title
of the person must accompany said signature;
6. The signature of the surety's officer empowered to sign the bond form included in the
Contract Provision.
1-02.9 Delivery of Proposal
Revise the first paragraph to read:
Each proposal shall be submitted in a sealed envelope, with Project Name and Proiect Number as
stated in the Advertisement for Bids, clearly marked on the outside of the envelope Or as otherwise
stated in the Bid Documents,to ensure proper handling and delivery.
1-02.12 Public Opening of Proposals
Section 1-02.12 is supplemented with the following:
(******)
The Contracting Agency reserves the right to postpone the date and time for bid opening.
Notification to bidder will be by addenda.
1-02.13 Irregular Proposals
Revise item I to read:
I. A proposal will be considered irregular and will be rejected if
a. The bidder is not prequalified when so required;
b. The authorized proposal form furnished by the Contracting Agency is not used or is
altered,
C. The complete proposal form contains any unauthorized additions, deletions, alternate
bids,or conditions;
d. The bidder adds provisions reserving the right to reject or accept the award, or enter
into the Contract;
e. A price per unit cannot be determined from the bid proposal;
f. The proposal form is not properly executed;
g. The bidder fails to submit or properly complete a subcontractor list, if applicable, as
required in Section 1-2.6
h. The bidder fails to submit or properly complete a Disadvantaged, Minority or
Women's Business Enterprise Certification, if applicable, as required in Section 1-
02.6;or
i. The.bid proposal does not constitute a definite and unqualified offer to meet the
material terms of the bid invitation.
1-02.14 Disqualification of Bidders
Revise this section to read
15
9/13/2010
( )
1. A bidder will be deemed not responsible and the proposal rejected if the bidder does not meet
the responsibility criteria in RCW 39.04.
2. A bidder may be deemed not responsible and the proposal rejected if
a. More than one proposal is submitted for the same project from a bidder under the same or
different names;
b.• Evidence of collusion exists with any other bidder or potential bidder. Participants in
collusion will be restricted from submitting further bids;
c. The bidder, in the opinion of the Contracting Agency, is not qualified for the Work or to
the full extent of the bid, or to the extent that the bid exceeds the authorized
prequalification amount as may have been determined by a prcgqualification of the bidder.
d. An unsatisfactory performance record exists based on past or current Contracting Agency
Work or for Work done for others,as judged from the standpoint of conduct of the Work;
workmanship; progress; affirmative action; equal employment opportunity practices; or
Disadvantaged Enterprise, Minority Enterprise, or Women's Business Enterprise
utilization.
e. There is uncompleted Work (Contracting Agency or otherwise) which might hinder or
prevent the prompt completion of the Work bid upon;
f. The bidder failed to settle bills for labor or materials on past or current contracts;
g. The bidder has failed to complete a written public contract or has been convicted of a
crime arising from a previous public contract;
h. The bidder is unable,financially or otherwise,to perform the Work;
L A bidder is not authorized to do business in the State of Washington (not registered in
accordance with RCW 18.27)
j. There are any other reasons deemed proper by the Contracting Agency.
1-02.15 Pre Award Information
Revise this section to read:
(#*****)
Before awarding any contract, the Contracting Agency may require one or more of these items or
actions of:
1. A complete statement of the origin, composition, and manufacture of any or all materials to
be used;
2. Samples of these materials for quality and fitness tests;
3. A progress schedule (in a form the Contracting Agency requires) showing the order of time
required for the various phases of Work,
4. A breakdown of costs assigned to any bid item;
5. Attending at a conference with the Engineer or representatives of the Engineer,
6. Obtain, and furnish a copy of a business license to do business in the city and/or county
where the Work is located;
7. A eoQy of State of Washington Contractor's Registration; or
8. Any other information or action taken that is deemed necessary to ensure that the bidder is
the lowest responsible bidder.
1-03 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF CONTRACT
1-03.1 Consideration of bids t
Section 1-03.1 is supplemented with the following:
All bids will be based on total sum of all schedules of prices. No partial bids will be accepted unless
so stated in the call for bids or special provisions.The City reserves the right however to award all or
any schedule of a bid to the lowest bidder at its discretion.
1-03.2 Award of Contract
Section 1-03.2 is supplemented with the following:
16
9/13/2010
The Contract,bond form, and all other forms requiring execution, together with a list of all other
forms or documents required to be submitted by the successful bidder, will be forwarded to the
successful bidder within 10 days of the award. The number of copies to be executed by the
Contractor shall be determined by the Contracting Agency-
1-03.3 Execution of Contract
Section 1-03.3 is revised and supplemented as follows:
Within 10 calendar days after receipt from the City of the forms and documents required to be
completed by the Contractor, the successful bidder shall return the signed Contracting Agency-
prepared contract,an insurance certification as required by Section 1-07.18,and.a satisfactory bond as
required by law and Section 1-03.4.Before execution of the Contract by the Contracting Agency,the
successful bidder shall provide any pre-award information the Contracting Agency may require under
Section 1-02.15.
iUntil the Contracting Agency executes a contract,no proposal shall bind the Contracting Agency nor
shall any Work begin within the project limits or within Contracting Agency-furnished sites. The
Contractor shall bear all risks for any Work begun outside such areas and for any materials ordered
before the Contract is executed by the Contracting Agency.
If the bidder experiences circumstances beyond their control that prevents return of the Contract
documents within 10 calendar days after the award date, the Contracting Agency may grant up to a
maximum of 10 additional calendar days for return of the documents, provided the Contracting
Agency deems the circumstances warrant it.
The Contracting. Agency is prohibited by RCW 39.06.010 from executing a contract with a
Contractor who is not registered or licensed as required by the laws of the state. In addition, the
Contracting Agency requires persons doing business with the Contracting Agency to possess a valid
City of Renton business license prior to award.
When the Bid Form provides spaces for a business license number, a Washington State Contractors
registration number, or both the Bidder shall insert such information in the spaces provided. The
Contracting Agency requires legible copies of the Contractor's Registration and business license he
submitted to the Engineer as part of the Contracting Agency's post-award information and evaluation
activities.
1-03.4 Contract Bond
Revise the first paragraph to read:
The successful bidder shall provide an executed contract bond for the full contract amount. This
contract bond shall:
1. Be on the Contracting Agency-frunished form;
2. Be signed by an approved surety.(or sureties)that:
a. Is registered with the Washington State Insurance Commissioner,and
b. Appears on the current Authorized Insurance List in the State of Washington published by
the Office of the Insurance Commissioner,
3. Be conditioned upon the faithful performance of the Contract by the Contractor within the
prescribed time;
4. Guarantee that the surety shall indemnify,defend,and protect the Contracting Agency against
any claim of direct or indirect loss resulting from the failure:
a. Of the.Contractor(or any of the employees, subcontractors, or lower tier subcontractors
of the Contractor)to faithfully perform the Contract,or
b. Of the Contractor(subcontractors, or lower tier subcontractors of the Contractor) to pay
all laborers, mechanics, subcontractors, lower tie subcontractors, material person, or any
other person who provides supplies or provisions for carrying out Work;
5. Be accompanied by a power of.attorney for the Surety's officer empowered to sign the bond;
and
17
9/13/2010
6. Be signed by an officer of the Contractor empowered to sign official statements (sole i
proprietor or partner). If the Contractor is a corporation, the bond must be signed by the
president or vice-president, unless accompanied by a written proof of the authority of the
individual signing the bond to bind the corporation (i.e., corporate resolution, power of
attorney or a letter to such effect by the president or vice-president).
1-03.7 Judicial Review
Revise the last sentence to read:
The venue of all causes of action arising from the advertisement,award,execution,and performance
of the Contract shall be in the Superior Court of the County where the Contracting Agency's
headquarters are located-
1-04 SCOPE OF WORK
t
1-04.2 Coordination of Contract Documents,Plans,Special Provisions Specifications,
and Addenda
Revise the second paragraph to read:
Any inconsistency in the parts of the Contract shall be resolved by following this order of precedence
(e.g., I presiding over 2,2 over 3,3 over 4,and so forth):
I. Addenda
2. Proposal Form
3. Special Provisions(Section 10)
4. Special Provisions(Sections 1 —9)
5. Contract Plans
6. Contracting Agency's Standard Plans(if any)
7. Amendments to the Standard Specifications
8. WSDOT/APWA Standard Specifications for Road,Bridge and Municipal Construction
9. WSDOT/APWA Standard Plans for Road,Bridge and Municipal Construction
1-04.3 Contractor-Discovered Discrepancies
Section 1-04.3 is a new section:
Upon receipt of award of contract, the Contractor shall carefully study and compare all the
components of the Contract Documents and other instructions, and check and verify all field
measurements.The Contractor shall,prior to ordering material or performing Work,report in writing
to the Engineer any error, inconsistency, or omission in respect to design or mode of construction,
which is discovered. If the Contractor, in the course of this study or in the accomplishment of the
Work, finds any discrepancy between the Plans and the physical condition of the locality as
represented in the Plans,or any such errors or omissions in respect to design or mode of construction
in the Plans or in the layout as given by points and instructions, it shall be the Contractor's duty to
inform the Engineer immediately in writing, and the Engineer will promptly check the same. Any
Work done after such discovery, until correction of Plans or authorization of extra Work is given, if
the Engineer finds that extra Work is involved,will be done at the Contractor's risk. If extra Work is
involved,the procedure shall be as provided in Section 1-04.4 of the Standard Specifications.'
1-04.4 Changes
The last two paragraphs are replaced with the following:
Renton does not have a formal policy or guidelines on cost reduction alternatives, but will evaluate
such proposals by the Contractor on a case-by-case basis.
1-04.8 Progress Estimates and Payments
Section 1-04.8 is supplemented as follows:
The Contractor is encouraged to provide to the Engineer prior to progress payments an estimate of
18
9/13/2010
t "Lump Sum"Work accomplished to date. The Engineer's calculations and decisions shall be final in
regard to the actual percentage of any lump sum pay item accomplished and eligible for payment
unless another specific method of calculating lump sum payments is provided elsewhere in the
Specifications.
1-04.11 Final Cleanup
Section 1-04.11 is supplemented as follows:
All salvage material as noted on the Plans and taken from any of the discarded facilities shall, at the
Engineer's discretion, be carefully salvaged and delivered to the City shops. Any cost incurred in
salvaging and delivering such items shall be considered incidental to the project and no compensation
will be made.
The Contract price for "Finish and Cleanup, Lump Sum," shall be fill compensation for all Work,
equipment and materials required to perform final cleanup. If this pay item does not appear in the
Contract Documents then final cleanup shall be considered incidental to the Contract and to other pay
item and no further compensation shall be made.
1-05 CONTROL OF WORK
1-05.3 Plans and Working Drawings
Section 1-05.3 is supplemented with the following:
Five(5)hardcopies of each submittal shall be provided.
Submittals: Submittals are samples,product data,working drawings,and others that demonstrate how
CONTRACTOR intends to conform with the Contract Documents.
Product data shall include the following:
Catalog cuts.
Bulletins.
Brochures.
Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance:signed by product manufacturer along
with supporting reference data,affidavits,and tests,as appropriate.
Manufacturer's printed recommendations for installation of equipment.
Quality photocopies of applicable pages from manufacturer's documents.
1-05.4 Conformity With and Deviation from Plans and Stakes
Section 1-05.4 is supplemented with the following:
If the project calls for the Contractor supplied surveying, the Contractor shall provide all required
survey Work, including such Work as mentioned in Sections 1-05, 1-11 and elsewhere in these
Specifications as being provided by the Engineer.All costs for this survey Work shall be included in
"Contractor Supplied Surveying,"per lump sum.
The Engineer or the Contractor supplied surveyor will provide construction stakes and marks
establishing lines,slopes,and grades as stipulated in Sections 1-05.4 and will perform such Work per
Section 1-11. The Contractor shall assume fidl responsibility for detailed dimensions,elevations, and
excavation slopes measured from the Engineer or the Contractor supplied surveyor furnished stakes
and marks.
The Contractor shall provide a work site, which has been prepared to permit construction staking to
proceed in a safe and orderly manner. The Contractor shall keep the Engineer or the Contractor
supplied surveyor informed of staking requirements and provide at least 48 hours notice to allow the
Engineer or the Contractor supplied surveyor adequate time for setting stakes.
The Contractor shall carefully preserve stakes,marks, and other reference points, including existing
monumentation, set by Contracting Agency forces. The Contractor will be charged for the costs of
19
9/13/2010
replacing stakes, markers and monumentation that were not to be disturbed but were destroyed or '
damaged by the Contractor's operations. This charge will be deducted from monies due or to become
due to the Contractor.
Any claim by the Contractor for extra compensation by reason of alterations or reconstruction Work '
allegedly due to error in the Engineer's line and grade,will not be allowed unless the original control
points set by the Engineer still exist,or unless other satisfactory substantiating evidence to prove the
error was furnished by the Engineer. Three consecutive points set on line or grade shall be the
minimum points used to determine any variation from a straight line or grade. Any such variation
shall,upon discovery, be reported to the Engineer. In the absence of such report the Contractor shall
be liable for any error in alignment or grade.
The Contractor shall provide all surveys required other than those to be performed by the Engineer.
All survey Work shall be.done in accordance with Section 1-11 SURVEYING STANDARDS of
these Specifications.
The Contractor shall keep updated survey field notes in a standard field book and in a format set by
the Engineer,per Section 1-11.1(4). These field notes shall include all survey Work performed by the
Contractor's surveyor in establishing line,grade and slopes for the construction Work Copies of these j
field notes shall be provided the Engineer upon request and upon completion of the Contract Work
the field book or books shall be submitted to the Engineer and become the property.of the Contracting
Agency.
If the survey Work provided by the Contractor does not meet the standards of the Engineer, then the
Contractor shall, upon the Engineer's written request, remove the individual or individuals doing the
survey Work and the survey Work will be completed by the Engineer at the Contractor's expense.
Costs for completing the survey Work required by the Engineer will be deducted from monies due or
to become due the Contractor.
All costs for survey Work required to be performed by the Contractor shall be included in the prices
bid for the various items which comprise the improvement or be included in the bid item for
"Contractor Supplied Surveying"per lump sum if that item is included in the contracts.
1-05.4(3) Contractor Supplied Surveying
Section 1-05.4(3)is a new section_
When the Contract provides for Contractor Supplied Surveying, the Contractor shall supply the
survey Work required for the project. The Contractor shall retain as a part of the Contractor
Organization an experienced team of surveyors under the direct supervision of a professional land
surveyor licensed by the State of Washington. All survey Work shall be done in accordance with
Sections 1-05.4 and 1-11.
The Contractor and/or the Surveyor shall inform the Engineer in writing of any errors,discrepancies,
and omissions to the Plans that prevent the Contractor and/or the Surveyor from constructing the
project in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. All errors, discrepancies, and omissions must be.
corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer before the survey Work may be continued
The Contractor shall coordinate his Work with the Surveyor and perform his operations in a manner
to protect all survey stakes from harm. The Contractor shall inform the Surveyor of the Contractor's
intent to remove any survey stakes and/or points before physically removing them.
The Surveyor shall be responsible for maintaining As-Built records for the project. The Contractor
shall coordinate his operations and assist the Surveyor in maintaining accurate As-Built records for
the project.
If the Contractor and the Surveyor fail to provide,as directed by the Engineer and/or these Plans and t
Specifications,accurate As-Built records and other Work the Engineer deems necessary,the Engineer
may elect to provide at Contractor expense,a surveyor to provide all As-Built records and other Work
20
9/13/2010
as directed by the Engineer. The Engineer shall deduct expenses incurred by the Engineer-supplied
surveying from monies owed to the Contractor.
Payment per Section 1-04.1 for all Work and materials required.for the full and complete survey
Work required to complete the project and As-Built drawings shall be included in the lump sum price
for Construction Surveying,Staking,and As-Builts.
1-05.4(4) Contractor Provided As-Built Information
Section I-05.4(4)is anew section:
It shall be the Contractors responsibility to record the location prior to the backfilling of the trenches,
by centerline station, offset, and depth below pavement, of all existing utilities uncovered or crossed
during his Work as covered under this project.
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to have his Surveyor locate by centerline station, offset and
elevation each major item of Work done under this contract per the survey standard of Section I-11.
Major items of Work shall include but not be limited to:Manholes,Catch basins and Inlets, Valves,
vertical and Horizontal Bends, Junction boxes, Cleanouts, Side Sewers, Street Lights & Standards,
Hydrants,Major Changes in Design Grade,Vaults,Culverts,Signal Poles,and Electrical Cabinets.
After the completion of the Work covered by this contract,the Contractor's Surveyor shall provide to
the City the hard covered field book(s)containing the as-built notes and one set of white prints of the
project drawings upon which he has plotted the notes of the Contractor locating existing utilities, and
one set of white prints of the project drawings upon which he has plotted the as-built location of the
new Work as he recorded in the field book(s). This drawing shall bear the Surveyor's seal and
signature certifying its accuracy.
All costs for as-built Work shall be included in the Contract item "Construction Surveying, Staking,
and As-Builts",lump sum.
1-05.7 Removal of Defective and/or Unauthorized Work
Section 1-05.7 is supplemented as follows:
Upon written notice from the Engineer,the Contractor shall promptly replace and re-execute Work by
Contractor forces, in accordance with the intent of the Contract and without expense to the Owner,
and shall bear the expense of making good all Work of other contractors destroyed or damaged by
such removal or replacement.
If the Contractor does not remove such condemned Work and materials and commence re-execution
of the Work within 7 calendar days of written notice from the Engineer,or fails to perform any part of
the Work required by the Contract Documents,the Owner may correct and remedy such Work as may
be identified in the written notice, with Contracting Agency forces or by such other means as the
Contracting Agency may deem necessary. In that case,the Owner may store removed material.
Direct or indirect costs incurred by the Contracting Agency attributable to correcting and remedying
defective or unauthorized Work,or Work the Contractor failed or refused to perform, shall be paid by
the Contractor. Payment will be deducted by the Engineer from monies due, or to become due, the
Contractor. Such direct and indirect costs shall include in particular, but without limitation,
compensation for additional professional services required, and costs for repair and replacement of
Work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of the Contractor's
unauthorized Work.
If sufficient funds do not remain in the Contract and the Contractor does not pay the cost of such
removal and storage within 10 calendar days from the date of the notice to the Contractor of the fact
of such removal, the Owner may, upon an additional 10 calendar days written notice, sell such
materials at public or private sale, and deduct all costs and expenses incurred from monies due to the
Contractor,including costs of sale,and accounting to Contractor for the net proceeds remaining. The
21
9/13/2010 ,
Owner may bid at any such sale. The Contractor shall be liable to the Owner for the amount of any
deficiency from any fiords otherwise due the Contractor.
If the Contractor fails to comply with a written order to remedy what the Engineer determines to be
an emergency situation,the Engineer may have the defective and unauthorized Work corrected
immediately,have the rejected Work removed and replaced,or have Work the Contractor refuses to
perform completed by using Contracting Agency or other forces. An emergency situation is any
situation when,in the opinion of the Engineer,a delay in its remedy could be potentially unsafe,or
might cause serious risk of loss or damage to the public,the Property Owner and the Property
Owner's property.
No adjustment in contract time or compensation will be allowed because of the delay in the
performance of the Work attributable to the exercise of the Contracting Agency's rights provided by
this section.
The rights exercised under the provisions of this section shall not diminish the Contracting Agency's
right to pursue any other avenue for additional remedy or damages with.respect to the Contractor's
failure to perform the Work as required-
1-05.10 Guarantees
Section 1-05.10 is supplemented as follows:
If within one year after the Acceptance Date of the Work by the Contracting Agency,defective and/or
unauthorized Work is discovered, the Contractor shall promptly, upon written order by the
Contracting Agency, return and in accordance with the Engineer's instructions, either correct such
Work, or if such Work has been rejected by the Engineer,remove it from the project site and replace it
with non-defective and authorized Work,all without cost to the Contracting Agency. If the Contractor
does not promptly comply with the written order to correct defective and/or unauthorized Work, or if
an emergency exists,the Contracting Agency reserves the right to have defective and/or unauthorized
Work corrected or removed and replaced pursuant to Section 1-05.7 "Removal of Defective and/or
Unauthorized Work."
The Contractor agrees the above one year limitation shall not exclude or diminish the Contracting
Agency's rights under any law to obtain damages and recover costs resulting from defective and/or
unauthorized Work discovered after one year but prior to the expiration of the legal time period set
forth in RCW 4.16.040 limiting actions upon a contract in writing,or liability expressed of implied
arising out of a written agreement.
The Contractor shall warrant good title to all materials, supplies, and equipment purchased for, or
incorporated in the Wow Nothing contained in this paragraph, however, shall defeat or impair the
right of persons furnishing materials or labor, to recover under any bond given by the Contractor for
their protection, or any rights under any law permitting such persons to look to funds due the
Contractor in the hands of the Contracting Agency.
The provisions of this paragraph shall be inserted in all subcontracts and material contracts, and
notice of its provisions shall be given to all persons furnishing materials for the Work when no formal
contract is entered into for such materials.
1-05.11 Final Inspection
1-05.11(1) Substantial Completion Date
Section 1-05.11(1)is anew section:
When the Contractor considers the Work to be substantially complete,the Contractor shall so notify
the Engineer and request the Engineer establish the Substantial Completion Date. The Engineer will
schedule an inspection of the Work with the Contractor to determine the status of completion.
22
9/13/210
To be considered substantially complete the following conditions must be met:
1. The Contracting Agency must have full and unrestricted use and benefit of the facilities
both from the operational and safety standpoint.
2. Only minor incidental Work,replacement of temporary substitute facilities,or
correction of repair Work remains to reach physical completion of the Work.
The Contractor's request shall list the specific items of Work in subparagraph two above that remains
to be completed in order to reach physical completion. The Engineer may also establish the
Substantial Completion Date unilaterally.
If after this inspection,the Engineer concurs with the Contractor that the Work is substantially
complete and ready for its intended use,the Engineer,by written notice to the Contractor,will set the.
Substantial Completion Date.If,after this inspection the Engineer does not consider the Work
substantially complete and ready for its intended use,the Engineer will,by written notice,so notify
the Contractor giving the reasons therefore.
Upon receipt of written notice concurring in or denying substantial completion,whichever is
applicable,the Contractor shall pursue vigorously,diligently and without unauthorized interruption,
the Work necessary to reach Substantial and Physical Completion.The Contractor shall provide the
Engineer with a revised schedule indicating when the Contractor expects to reach substantial and
physical completion of the Work.
The above process shall be repeated until the Engineer establishes the Substantial Completion Date
and the Contractor considers the Work physically complete and ready for Final Inspection.
1-05.11(2) Final Inspection and Physical Completion Date
Section 1-05.11(2)is a new Section:
When the Contractor considers the Work physically complete and ready for Final Inspection, the
Contractor,by Written Notice,shall request the Engineer to schedule a final inspection.The Engineer
will set a date for Final Inspection.The Engineer and the Contractor will then make a final inspection
and the Engineer will notify the Contractor in writing of all particulars in which the Final Inspection
reveals the Work incomplete or unacceptable,The Contractor shall immediately take such corrective
measures as arc necessary to remedy the listed deficiencies. Corrective Work shall be pursued
vigorously, diligently, and without interruption until.physical completion of the listed deficiencies.
This process will continue until the Engineer is satisfied the listed deficiencies have been corrected.
If action to correct the listed deficiencies is not initiated within 7 days after receipt of the Written
Notice listing the deficiencies,the Engineer may,upon Written Notice to the Contractor,take
whatever steps are necessary to correct those deficiencies pursuant to Section 1-05.8. The Contractor
will not be allowed an extension of contract time because of a delay in the performance of the Work
attributable to the exercise of the Engineer's right hereunder.
Upon correction of.all deficiencies, the Engineer will notify the Contractor and the Contracting
Agency, in writing, of the date upon which the Work was considered physically complete, that date
shall constitute the Physical Completion Date of the Contract, but shall not imply all the obligations
of the Contractor under the Contract have been fulfilled.
1-05.11(3) Operational Testing
1 Section 1-05.11(3)is anew section:
Unless otherwise noted in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall give the Engineer a minimum
of 3 working days' notice of the time for each test and inspection. If the inspection is by another
authority than the Engineer, the Contractor shall give the Engineer a minimum of 3 working days'
notice of the date fixed for such inspection.Required certificates of inspection by other authority than
the Engineer shall be secured by the Contractor.
23
9/13/2010
It is the intent of the Contracting Agency to have at the Physical Completion Date a complete and ,
operable system. Therefore,when the Work involves the installation of machinery or other
mechanical equipment;street lighting,electrical distribution or signal systems;irrigation systems;
buildings; or other similar Work,it may be desirable for the Engineer to have the Contractor operate
and test the Work for a period of time,after final inspection but prior to the physical completion date.
Whenever items of Work are listed in the Contract Provisions for operational testing they shall be
fully tested under operating conditions for the time period specified to ensure their acceptability prior
to the Physical Completion Date. During and following the test period,the Contractor shall correct
any items of workmanship,materials,or equipment which prove faulty,or that are not in first class
operating condition. Equipment,electrical controls,meters,or other devices and equipment to be
tested during this period shall be tested under the observation of the Engineer,so that the Engineer
may determine their suitability for the purpose for which they were installed The Physical
Completion Date cannot be established until testing and corrections have been completed to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
Th e costs f o r power,gas,labor,mate ri al,supplies,and everything mg el se n eeded to successfl 1 y
complete operational testing,shall be included in the unit contract prices related to the system being
tested unless specifically set forth otherwise m the proposal.
Pce Y P Po
Operational and test periods,when required by the Engineer,shall not affect a manufacturers
guaranties or warranties furnished under the terms of the Contract.
1-05.12 Final Acceptance
The third and fourth sentences in paragraph I are deleted and replaced with:
The Final Acceptance date shall be that date in which the Renton City Council formally approves
acceptance of the Contract.
1-05.13 Superintendents,Labor and Equipment of Contractor
Revise the seventh paragraph to read-
Whenever the Contracting Agency evaluates the Contractor's qualifications pursuant to Section 1-
02.1,the Contracting Agency will take these performance reports into account.
1-05.14 Cooperation with Other Contractors
Section 1-05.14 is supplemented as follows:
The Contractor shall afford the Owner and other contractors working in the area reasonable
opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and the execution of their respective
Work,and shall properly connect and coordinate the Contractor's Work with theirs.
Other utilities,districts,agencies,and contractors who may be working within the project area are:
1. Puget Sound Energy(gas and electric)
2. . AT&T Broadband
3. Qwest Communications
4. City of Renton(water,sewer,transportation)
5. Soos Creek Sewer and Water District
6. Cedar River Sewer and Water District
7. Skyway Sewer and Water District
8. Private contractors employed by adjacent property owners
The Contractor shall coordinate with City of Renton on tying into any existing electrical service
cabinet.
24
t9/13/2010
1-05.16 Water and Power
Section 1-05.16 is a new Section:
The Contractor shall make necessary arrangements,and shall bear the costs for power and water
necessary for the performance of the Work,unless the Contract includes power and water as a pay
item-
1-05.17 Oral Agreements
Section 1-05.17 is a new section:
No oral agreement or conversation with any officer,agent,or employee of the Contracting Agency,
either before or after execution of the Contract,shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations
contained in any of the documents comprising the Contract. Such oral agreement or conversation
shall be considered as unofficial information and in no way binding upon the Contracting Agency,
unless subsequently put in writing and signed by the Contracting Agency.
1-05.18 Contractor's Dail y Diary
Section 1-05.18 is a new section:
The Contractor and subcontractors shall maintain and provide to the Engineer,a Daily Diary Record
of this Work. This diary will be created by pen entries in a hardbound diary book of the type that is
commonly available through commercial outlets. The diary must contain the Project and Number, if
the diary is in loose-leaf form, this information must appear on every page. The diary must be kept
and maintained by the Contractor's designated project superintendent(s). .Entries must be made on a
daily basis and must accurately represent all of the project activities on each day.
At a minimum,the diary shall show on a daily basis:
1. The day and date_
2. The weather conditions,including changes throughout the day.
3. A complete description of Work accomplished during the day with adequate references to
the Plans and Contract Provisions, so that the reader can easily and accurately identify said
Work in the Plans. Identify location/description of photographs or videos taken that day.
4. An entry for each and every changed condition, dispute or potential dispute, incident,
accident, or occurrence of any nature whatsoever which might affect the Contractor, the
Owner,or any third party in any manner.
�. 5. Listing of any materials received and stored on- or ofd site by the Contractor for future
installation,to include the manner of storage and protection of the same.
6. Listing of materials installed during each day.
7. List of all subcontractors working on-site during each day_
�. 8. Listing of the number of the Contractor's employees working during each day by category
of employment.
9. Listing of the Contractor's equipment working on the site during each day. Idle equipment
on the site shall be listed and designated as idle.
10. Notations to explain inspections, testing, stake-out, and all other services furnished by the
Owner or other party during each day.
11. Entries to verify the daily(including non-Work days)inspection and maintenance of traffic
control devices and condition of the traveled-roadway surfaces. The Contractor shall not
allow any conditions to develop that would be hazardous to the public.
12. Any other information that serves to give an accurate and complete record of the nature,
quantity,and quality of Contractor's progress on each day_
13. Plan markups showing locations and dimensions of constructed features to be used by the
Engineer to produce record drawings.
14. All pages of the diary must be numbered consecutively with no omissions in page numbers.
15. Each page must be signed and dated by the Contractor's official representative on the
project.
25
9/13/2010 j
The Contractor may use additional sheets separate from the diary book if necessary to provide a
complete diary record,but they must be signed,dated,and labeled with project name and number.
It is expressly agreed between the Contractor and the Owner that the Daily Diary maintained
by the Contractor shall be the"Contractor's Book of Original Entry"for the documentation of
any potential claims or disputes that might arise during this contract. Failure of the Contractor
to maintain this diary in the manner described above will constitute a waiver of any such claims
or disputes by the Contractor.
The Engineer or other Owner's representative on the job site will also complete a Daily Construction
Report.
1-06 CONTROL OF MATERIAL
1-06.1 Approval of Materials Prior to Use
Section 1-06.1 is supplemented as follows:
The materials and equipment lists submitted to the Engineer at the Preconstnrction Conference shall
include the quantity,manufacturer,and model number,if applicable,of materials and equipment to be
installed under the Contract. This list will be checked by the Engineer as to conformity with the
Contract Documents. The Engineer will review the lists within 10 working days, noting required
corrections. The Contractor shall make required corrections and file 2 corrected copies with the
Engineer within one week after receipt of required corrections. The Engineer's review and acceptance
of the lists shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for suitability for the intended purpose,
nor for deviations from the Contract Documents.
1-06.2(1) Samples and Tests for Acceptance
Section 1-06.2(1)is supplemented a follows:
The finished Work shall be in accordance with approved samples. Approval of samples by the
Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for performance of the Work in accordance
with the Contract Documents.
1-06.2(2) Statistical Evaluation of Materials for Acceptance
Section 1-06.02(2)is supplemented by adding the following:
Unless stated otherwise in the special provisions, statistical evaluation will not be used by the City of
Renton.
1-07 LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES TO THE PUBLIC
1-07.1 Laws to be Observed
Section 1-07.1 is supplemented as follows:
(******)
The Contractor shall erect and properly maintain, at all times, as required by the conditions and
progress of the Work, all necessary safeguards for protection of workers and the public; shall post
danger signs warning against known or unusual hazards; and shall designate as Safety Supervisor, a
responsible employee on the construction site whose duty shall be the enforcement of safety. The
name and position of such person so designated shall be reported in writing to the Engineer by the
Contractor.
The Contractor shall,at all times, enforce strict discipline and good order among all employees and
shall not employ any person unfit or not skilled in the Work assigned to him/her.
Necessary sanitation conveniences for the use of the workers on the job, properly secluded from
public observation,shall be provided and maintained by the Contractor;
26
9/13/2010
In cases of conflict between different safe ty re gul ations the more stringent r e
gulahon shall apply.
The Washington State Department of Labor and Industries shall be the sole and paramount
administrative agency responsible for the administration of the provisions of the Washington
Industrial Safety and Health Act of 1973(WISHA).
The Contractor shall maintain at the project site office,or other well-known place at the project site,
all articles necessary for providing first aid to the injured The Contractor shall establish,publish,and
make known to all employees,procedures for ensuring immediate removal to a hospital or doctor's
care,and persons,including employees,who may have been injured on the project site. Employees
should not be permitted to Work on the project site before the Contractor has established and made
known procedures for removal of injured persons to a hospital or a doctor's care.
The Contractor shall have sole responsibility for the safety,efficiency,and adequacy of the
Contractor's plant,appliances,and methods,and for any damage or injury resulting from their failure,
or improper maintenance,use,or operation. The Contractor shall be solely and completely
responsible for the conditions of the project site,including safety for all persons and property in the
performance of the Work. This requirement shall apply continuously,and not be limited to normal
working hours. The required or implied duty of the Engineer to conduct construction review of the
Contractor's performance does not,and shall not,be intended to include review and adequacy of the
Contractor's safety measures,in,on,or near the project site.
1-07.2 State Sales Tax
Delete this section,including its sub-sections,in its entirety and replace it with the following:
1-07.2(1) General
The Washington State Department of Revenue has issued special rules on the state sales tax. Sections
1-07.2(1)through 1-07.2(4)are meant to clarify those rules. The Contractor should contact the
Washington State Department of Revenue for answers to questions in this area. The Contracting
Agency will not adjust its payment if the Contractor bases a bid on a misunderstood tax liability.
The Contractor shall include all Contractor-paid taxes in the unit bid prices or other contract amounts.
In some cases,however,state retail sales tax will not be included. Section 1-07.2(3)describes this
exception.
The Contracting Agency will pay the retained percentage only if the Contractor has obtained from the
Washington State Department of Revenue a certificate showing that all contract-related taxes have
been paid(RCW 60.28.050). The Contracting Agency may deduct from its payments to the
Contractor any amount the Contractor may owe the Washington State Department of Revenue,
whether the amount owed relates to this contract or not. Any amount so deducted will be paid into
the proper state fund.
27
9/13/2910
1-07.2(2) State Sales Tax—Rule 171
WAC 458-20-171,and its related Hiles,apply to building,repairing,or improving streets,roads,etc.,
which are owned by a municipal corporation,or political subdivision of the state,or by the United
States,and which are used primarily for foot or vehicular traffic. This includes storm or combined
sewer systems within and included as part of the street or road drainage system,and power lines when
such are part of the roadway lighting system. For Work performed in such cases,the Contractor shall
include Washington State Retail Sales Taxes in the various unit bid item prices,or other contract
amounts,including those that the Contractor pays on the purchase of the materials,equipment, or
supplies used or consumed in doing the Work.
1-07.2(3) State Sales Tax—Rule 170
WAC 458-20-170,and its related rules,applies to the constructing and repairing of new or existing
buildings,or other structures,upon real property. This includes,but is not limited to;the construction
of streets,roads,highways,etc.,owned by the state of Washington;water mains and their
appurtenances;sanitary sewers and sewage disposal systems unless such sewers and disposal systems
are within,and a part of a street or road drainage system;telephone,telegraph,electrical power
distribution lines,or other conduits or lines in or above streets or roads,unless such power lines
become a part of a street or road lighting system;and installing or attaching of any article of tangible
personal property in or to real property,whether or not such personal property becomes a part of the
realty by virtue of installation.
For Work performed in such cases,the Contractor shall collect from the Contracting Agency,retail
sales tax on the full contract price. The Contracting Agency will automatically add this sales tax to
each payment to the Contractor. For this reason,the Contractor shall not include the retail sales tax in
the unit bid item prices,or in any other contract amount subject to Rule 170,with the following
exception.
Exception:The Contracting Agency will not add in sales tax for a payment the Contractor or a
subcontractor makes on the purchase or rental of tools,machinery,equipment,or consumable
supplies not integrated into the project. Such sales taxes shall be included in the unit bid item prices
or in any other contract amount-
1-07.2(4) Services
The Contractor shall not collect retail sales tax from the Contracting Agency on any contract wholly
for professional or other services(as defined in Washington State Department of Revenue Rules 138
and 244).
1-07.6 Permits and Licenses
Section 1-07.6 is supplemented as follows:
The permits, easements, and right of entry documents that have been acquired are available for
inspection and review.
The Contractor shall be required to-comply with all conditions of the permits, easements, and rights
of entry,at no additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor is required to indemnify the Owner from
claims on all easements and rights of entry.
All other permits, licenses, etc., shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall
comply with the special provisions and requirements of each.
28
9/13/2010
Permits, permission under franchises, licenses and bonds of a temporary nature necessary for and
during the prosecution of the Work,and inspection fees in connection therewith shall be secured and
paid for by the Contractor. If the Owner is required to secure such permits, permission under
franchises, licenses and bonds, and pay the fees, the costs incurred by the Owner thereby shall be
charged against the Contractor and deducted from any funds otherwise due the Contractor.
1-079 Wages
1-079(5) Required Documents
Delete the first sentence of the third paragraph,and replace it with the following
The Contractor must submit weekly-certified payrolls for the Contractor and all subcontractors and
lower tier subcontractors,regardless of project's funding source.
j1-07.11 Requirements for Non-Discrimination
1-07.11(11) City of Renton Affidavit of Compliance
Section 1-07.11(11)is new:
Each Contractor, Subcontractor,Consultant, and or Supplier shall complete and submit a copy,of the
"City of Renton Fair Practices Policy Affidavit of Compliance". A copy of this document will be
bound in the bid documents.
1-0712 Federal Agency Inspection
Section 1-07.12 is supplemented with the following.
Required Federal Aid Provisions
The Required Contract Provisions Federal Aid Construction Contracts (FHWA 1273) and the
amendments thereto supersede any conflicting provisions of the Standard Specifications and are made
a part of this contract;provided,however, that if any of the provisions of FHWA 1273, as amended,
are less restrictive than Washington State Law,then the Washington State Law shall prevail.
The provisions of FHWA 1273, as amended, included in this contract require that the Contractor
insert the FHWA 1273 and amendments thereto in each subcontract, together with the wage rates
which are part of the FHWA 1273, as amended Also,a clause shall be included in each subcontract
requiring the subcontractors to insert the FHWA 1273 and amendments thereto in any lower tier
subcontracts, together with the wage rates. The Contractor shall also ensure that this Section,
REQUIRED FEDERAL AID PROVISIONS, is inserted in each subcontract for subcontractors and
lower tier subcontractors. For this purpose,upon request to the Project Engineer,the Contractor will
be provided with extra copies of the FHWA 1273,the amendments thereto,the applicable wage rates,
and this Special Provision.
1-07.13 Contractor's Responsibility for Work
1-07.13(1) General
Section 1-07.13(1)is supplemented as follows:
During unfavorable weather and other conditions, the Contractor shall pursue only such portions of
the Work as shall not be damaged thereby.
No portion of the Work whose satisfactory quality or efficiency will be affected by unfavorable
conditions shall be constructed while these conditions exist, unless the Contractor shall be able to
overcome said unfavorable conditions by special means or precautions acceptable to the Engineer,.
1-07.15 Temporary Water Pollution/Erosion Control
Delete the first paragraph,and replace it with the following.
In an effort to prevent, control, and stop water pollution and erosion within the project, thereby
29
9/13/2010
protecting the Work,nearby land,streams,and other bodies of water,the Contractor shall perform all
Work in strict accordance with all Federal, State,and local laws and regulations governing waters of
the State,as well as permits acquired for the project.
1-07.16 Protection and Restoration of Property
1-07.16(1) Private/Public Property
Section 1-07.16(1)is supplemented by adding the following:
The Contracting Agency will obtain all easements and franchises required for the .project. The
Contractor shall limit his operation to the areas obtained and shall not trespass on private property.
The Contracting Agency may provide certain lands, as indicated in connection with the Work under
the Contract together with the right of access to such lands. The Contractor shall not unreasonably
encumber the premises with his equipment or materials.
The Contractor shall provide, with no liability to the Contracting Agency, any additional land and
access thereto not shown or described that may be required for temporary construction facilities or
storage of materials. He shall construct all access roads, detour roads, or other temporary Work as
required by his operations. The Contractor shall confine his equipment, storage of material, and
operation of his workers to those areas shown and described and such additional areas as he may
provide.
A. General. All construction Work under this contract on easements, right-of-way, over
private property or franchise, shall be confined to the limits of such easements, right-of-way or
franchise. All Work shall be accomplished so as to cause the least amount of disturbance and a
minimum amount of damage. The Contractor shall schedule his Work so that trenches across
easements shall not be left open during weekends or holidays and trenches shall not be open for more
than 48 hours.
B. Structures. The Contractor shall remove such existing structures as may be necessary for
the performance of the Work and,if required, shall rebuild the structures thus removed in as good a
condition as found. He shall also repair all existing structures that may be damaged as a result of the
Work under this contract_
C. Easements,cultivated areas and other surface improvements. All cultivated areas,either
agricultural or lawns,and other surface improvements which are damaged by actions of the
Contractor shall be restored as nearly as possible to their original condition.
Prior to excavation on an easement or private right-of-way,the Contractor shall strip topsoil from the
trench or construction area and stockpile it in such a manner that it may be replaced by him,upon
completion of construction. Ornamental trees and shrubbery shall be carefully removed with the
earth surrounding their roots wrapped in burlap and replanted in their original positions within 48
hours.
All shrubbery or trees destroyed or damaged,shall be replaced by the Contractor with material of
equal quality at no additional cost to the Contracting Agency. In the event that it is necessary to
trench through any lawn area,the sod shall be carefully cut and rolled and replaced after the trenches
have been backfilled. The lawn area shall be cleaned by sweeping or other means,of all earth and
debris.
The Contractor shall use rubber wheel equipment similar to the small tractor-type backhoes used by
side sewer contractors for all Work,including excavation and backfill,on easements or rights-of-way,
which have lawn areas. All fences,markers,mailboxes,or other temporary obstacles shall be
removed by the Contractor and immediately replace,after the trench is bacldilled,in their original
position. The Contractor shall notify the Contracting Agency and Property Owner at least 24 hours in
advance of any Work done on easements or rights-of-way.
Damage to existing structures outside of easement areas that may result from dewatering and/or other
30
9/13/2010
y construction activity under this contract shall be restored to.their original condition or better. The
original condition shall be established by photographs taken and/or inspection made prior to
construction. All such Work shall be done to the satisfaction of the Property Owners and the
Contracting Agency at the expense of the Contractor.
D. Streets. The Contractor will assume all responsibility of restoration of the surface of all
_ streets(traveled ways)used by him if damaged.
In the event the Contractor does not have labor or material immediately available to make necessary
repairs, the Contractor shall so inform the Contracting Agency. The Contracting Agency will make
the necessary repairs and the cost of such repairs shall be paid by the Contractor.
The Contractor is responsible for identifying and documenting any damage that is pre-existing or
caused by others. Restoration of excavation in City streets shall be done in accordance with the City
of Renton Trench Restoration Requirements, which is available at the Public Works Department
Customer Services counter on the 6th floor,Renton City Hall, 1055 South Grady Way.
1-07.17 Utilities and Similar Facilities
Section 1-07.17 is supplemented by adding:
Existing utilities indicated in the Plans have been plotted from the best information available to the
Engineer. Information and data shown or indicated in the Contact Documents with respect to
existing underground utilities or services at or contiguous to the project site are based on information
and data furnished to the Owner and the Engineer by owners of such underground facilities or others,
and the Owner and the Engineer do not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness
thereof. It is to be understood that other aboveground or underground facilities not shown in the
Plans may be encountered during the course of the Work
All utility valves,manholes,vaults,or pull boxes which are buried shall be conspicuously marked in a
fashion acceptable to the Owner and the Engineer by the Contractor to allow their location to be
1 determined by the Engineer or utility personnel under adverse conditions, (inclement weather or
darkness).
Where underground main distribution conduits, such as water, gas, sewer, electric power, or
telephone, are shown on the Plans,the Contractor, for the purpose of preparing his bid,shall assume
that every property parcel will be served by a service connection for each type of utility.
The Contractor shall check with the utility companies concerning any possible conflict prior to
commencing excavation in any area The Contractor shall resolve all crossing and clearance
problems with the utility company concerned No excavation shall begin until all known facilities,in
the vicinity of the excavation area,have been located and marked.
In addition to the Contractor having all utilities field marked before starting Work, the Contractor
shall have all utilities field marked after they are relocated in conjunction with this project.
Call Before You Dig
The 48-Hour Locators
1-800-424-5555
At least.2 and not more than 10 working days prior to commencing any excavations for utility
potholing or for any other purpose under this Contract, the Contractor shall notify the Underground
Utilities Location Center by telephone of the planned excavation and progress schedule. The
Contractor is also warned that there may be utilities on the project that are not part of the One Call
system. They must be contacted directly by the Contractor for locations.
The Contractor shall make arrangements 48 hours in advance with respective utility owners to have a
representative present when their utility is exposed or modified,if the utility chooses to do so.
j
31
�1
L
i
9/13/2010
Agency's expense. The Contractor shall perform the following:
1. Remove or repair any condition resulting from the Work that might impede traffic or create a
hazard.
2. Keep existing traffic signal and highway lighting systems in operation as the Work proceeds.
(The Contracting Agency will continue the route maintenance on such system)
3. Maintain the striping on the roadway at the Contracting Agency's expense. The Contractor shall
be responsible for scheduling when to renew striping, subject to the approval of the Engineer.
When the scope of the project does not require Work on the roadway, the Contracting Agency
will be responsible for maintaining the striping.
4. Maintain existing permanent signing. Repair of signs will be at the Contracting Agency's
expense,except those damaged due to the Contractor's operations.
5. Keep drainage structures clean to allow for free flow of water. Cleaning of existing drainage
structures will be at the Contracting Agency's expense when approved by the Engineer, except --
when flow is impaired due to the Contractor's operations.
Section 1-07.23(1)is supplemented by adding the following:
The Contractor shall be responsible for controlling dust and mud within the project limits and on any
street, which is utilized by his equipment for the duration of the project. The Contractor shall be
prepared to use watering trucks,power sweepers,and other pieces of equipment as deemed necessary
by the Engineer,to avoid creating a nuisance_
Dust and mud control shall be considered as incidental to the project, and no compensation will be -%
made for this section.
Complaints of dust, mud, or unsafe practices and/or property damage to private ownership will be
transmitted to the Contractor and prompt action in correcting them will be required by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall maintain the roads during construction in a suitable condition to minimize
affects to vehicular and pedestrian traffic. All cost to maintain the roads shall be borne by the
Contractor.
At least one-way traffic shall be maintained on all cross-streets within the project limits during
working hours. One lane shall be provided in each direction for all streets during non-working hours.
The Contractor shall provide one drivable roadway lane and maintain convenient access for local and
commuter traffic to driveways, businesses, and buildings along the line of Work throughout the
course of the project. Such access shall be maintained as near as possible to that which existed prior
to the commencement of construction. This restriction shall not apply to the paving portion of the
construction process.
The Contractor shall notify and coordinate with all property owners and tenants of street closures, or
other restrictions which may interfere with their access at least 24 hours in advance for single-family
residential property, and at least 48 hours in advance for apartments, offices, and commercial
property. The Contractor shall give a copy of all notices to the Engineer.
When the abutting owners'access across the right-of-way line is to be eliminated and replaced under
the Contract by other access, the existing access shall not be closed until the replacement access l�
facility is available.
36
9/13/210
All unattended excavations shall be properly barricaded and covered at all times. The Contractor
shall not open any trenches that cannot be completed and refilled that same day. Trenches shall be
patched or covered by a temporary steel plate,at the Contractor's expense, except in areas where the
roadway remains closed to public traffic. Steel plates must be anchored-
1-07.23(2) Construction and Maintenance of Detours
Revise the first paragraph to read:
Unless otherwise approved, the Contractor shall maintain two-way traffic during construction. The
Contractor shall build,maintain in a safe condition,keep open to traffic,and remove when no longer
needed:
1. Detours and detour bridges that will accommodate traffic diverted from the roadway, bridge,
�J sidewalk,driveway,or path during construction,
2. Detour crossings of intersecting highway,and
3. Temporary approaches.
1-07.24 Rights-of-Way
Delete this section in its entirety,and replace it with the following:
Street right-of-way lines, limits of easements, and limits of construction permits are indicated on the
Drawings. The Contractor's construction activities shall be confined within these limits unless
arrangements for use of private property are made.
Generally, the Contracting Agency will have obtained, prior to bid opening, all rights-of-way and
easements, both permanent and temporary, necessary for carrying out the completion of the Work
Exceptions to this are noted in the Contract Documents or brought to the Contractor's attention by a
duly issued addendum-
Whenever any of the Work is accomplished on or through property other than public right-of-way,the
Contractor shall meet and fulfill all covenants and stipulations of any easement agreement obtained
by the Contracting Agency from the owner of the private property. Copies of the easement
agreements are included in the Contract Provisions or made available to the Contractor as soon as
practical after they have been obtained by the Engineer.
Whenever easements or rights-of-entry have not been acquired prior to advertising,these areas are so
noted on the Drawings.The Contractor shall not proceed with any portion of the Work in areas where
right-of-way, easements, or rights-of-entry have not been acquired until the Engineer certifies to the
Contractor that the right-of-way or easement is available or that the right-of-entry had been received.
If the Contractor is delayed due to acts of omission on the part of the Contracting Agency in obtaining
easements,rights of entry of right-of-way,the Contractor will be entitled to an extension of time.The
Contractor agrees that such delay shall not be a breach of contract.
Each property owner shall be given 48 hours notice prior to entry by the Contactor. This includes
entry onto easements and private property where private improvements must be adjusted.
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing, without expense or liability of the Contracting
Agency, any additional land and access thereto that the Contractor may desire for temporary
construction facilities, storage of materials, or other Contractor needs. However, before using any
private property, whether adjoining the Work or not, the Contractor shall file with the Engineer a
written permission of the private property owner, and,upon vacating the premises, a written release
from the property owner of each property disturbed or otherwise interfered with by reasons of
construction pursued under this Contract. The statement shall be signed by the private property
owner, or proper authority acting for the owner of the private property affected, stating that
permission has been granted to use the property and all necessary permits have been obtained or, in
the case of a release, that the restoration of the property has been satisfactorily accomplished. The
37
9/13/2010
statement shall include the parcel number, address and date of signature. Written releases must be
filed with the Engineer before the Completion Date will be established.
1-08 -PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS
1-08.0 Preliminary Matters
Section 1-08.0 is a new section with subsection-
1-08.0(1) Preconstruction Conference
Section 1-08.0(1)is a new subsection:
The Engineer will furnish the Contractor with copies of the Contract Documents per Section 1-02.2
"Plans and Specifications". Additional documents may be furnished upon request at the cost of
reproduction. Prior to undertaking each part of the Work the Contractor shall carefully study and
compare the Contract Documents, and check and verify pertinent figures shown therein and all
applicable field measurements. The Contractor shall promptly report in writing to the Engineer any
conflict, error or discrepancy,which the Contractor may discover.
After the Contract has been executed, but prior to the Contractor beginning the Work, a
preconstruction conference will be held between the Contractor, the Engineer and such other
interested parties as may be invited.
The Contractor shall prepare and submit at the preconstruction meeting:
4 Contractor's plan of operation and progress schedule(3+copies)
Approval of qualified subcontractors (bring list of subcontractors if different from list
submitted with bid)
4 List of materials fabricated or manufactured off the project
4 Material sources on the project
4 Names ofprincipal suppliers
4 Detailed equipment list, including "Rental Rate Blue. Book" hourly costs (both
working and standby rates)
Weighted wage rates for all employee classifications anticipated to be used on Project
4 Cost percentage breakdown for lump sum bid item(s)
4 Shop Drawings(bring preliminary list)
4 Traffic Control Plans(3+copies)
4 Temporary Water Pollution/Erosion Control Plan
In addition,the Contractor shall be prepared to address:
Bonds and insurance
Project meetings—schedule and responsibilities
Provision for inspection for materials firm outside sources
Responsibility for locating utilities
Responsibility for damage
Time schedule for relocations,if by other than the Contractor !,
Compliance with Contract Documents
Acceptance and approval of Work
Labor compliance,payrolls,and certifications
Safety regulations for the Contractors'and the Owner's employees and representatives
Suspension of Work,time extensions
Change order procedures
Progress estimates,procedures for payment
Special requirements of funding agencies
Construction engineering,advance notice of special Work
Any interpretation of the Contract Documents requested by the Contractor
Any conflicts or omissions in Contract Documents
Any other problems or questions concerning the Work
Processing and administration of public complaints
38
9/13/2010
Easements and rights-of-entry
Other n
co tracts
The franchise utilities maybe present at the preconstruction conference,and the Contractor should be
prepared for their review and discussion of progress schedule and coordination.
1-08.0(2) Hours of Work
Section 1-08.0(2)is a new subsection:
Except in the case of emergency or unless otherwise approved by the Contracting Agency,the normal
itraight time working hours for the Contract shall be any consecutive 8-hour period between 7:00
a.m. and 6:00 p.m. of a working day with a maximum 1-hour lunch break and a 5-day Work week.
The normal straight time 8-hour working period for the Contract shall be established at the
preconstruction conference or prior to the Contractor commencing the Work.
If a Contractor desires to perform Work on holidays,Saturdays,Sundays,or before 7:00 a.m. or after
6:00 p.m. on any day, the Contractor shall apply in writing to the Engineer for permission to Work
such times. Permission to Work longer than an 8-hour period between 7:00 am. an 6:00 p.m. is not
required. Such requests shall be submitted to the Engineer no later than noon on the_working day
prior to the day for which the Contractor is requesting permission to Work.
Permission to Work between the hours of 10:00 p.m.and 7:00 a.m. during weekdays and between the
hours of 10:00 p.m. and 7:00 a.m. on weekends or holidays may also be subject to noise control
requirements. Approval to continue Work during these hours may be revoked at any time the
Contractor exceeds the Contracting Agency's noise control regulations or complaints are received
from the public or adjoining property owners regarding the noise from the Contractor's operations.
The Contractor shall have no claim for damages or delays should such permission be revoked for
these reasons.
Permission to Work Saturdays, Sundays, holidays or other than the agreed upon normal straight time
working hours Monday through Friday may be given subject to certain other conditions set forth by
the Contracting Agency or the Engineer_ These conditions may include but are not limited to:
requiring the Engineer or such assistants as the Engineer may deem necessary to be present during the
Work; requiring the Contractor to reimburse the Contracting Agency for the cost of engineering
salaries paid Contracting Agency employees who worked during such times; considering the Work
performed on Saturdays, Sundays, and holidays as working days with regards to the Contract Time;
and considering multiple Work shifts as multiple working days with respect to Contract Time even
though the multiple shifts occur in a single 24-hour period Assistants may include,but are not limited
to, survey crews;personnel from the material testing labs; inspectors; and other Contracting Agency
employees when in the opinion of the Engineer such Work necessitates their presence.
1-08.0(3)Reimbursement for Overtime Work of Contracting Agency Employees
Section 1-08.0(3)is a new subsection:
Where the Contractor elects to Work on a Saturday,Sunday,holiday,or longer than an 8-hour Work
shift on a regular working day,as defined in the Standard Specifications,such Work shall be
considered as overtime Work.On all such overtime Work an inspector will be present,and a survey
crew may be required at the discretion of the Engineer.The Contractor shall reimburse the
Contracting Agency for the full amount of the straight time plus overtime costs for employees and
representative(s)of the Contracting Agency required to Work overtime hours.
The Contractor by these Specifications does hereby authorize the Engineer to deduct such costs from
the amount due or to become due the Contractor.
1-08.1 Subcontracting
Revise the second paragraph to read:
39
I
9/13/2010
The Contractor shall not subcontract Work unless the Engineer approves in writing. Each request to
subcontract shall be on the form the Engineer provides. If the Engineer requests,the Contractor shall
provide proof that subcontractor has the experience, ability, and equipment the Work requires. The
Contractor shall require each subcontractor to comply with Section 1-07.9 and to furnish all
certificates and statements required by the Contract. The Contractor shall require each subcontractor
of every tier to meet the responsibility criteria stated in RCW 3906 and shall include these
requirements in every subcontract of every tier.
Section.1-08.1 is supplemented as follows:
Written requests for change in subcontractors shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer at
least 7 calendar days prior to start of a subcontractor's Work.
The Contractor agrees that he/she is fully responsible to the Owner for the acts and omissions of all
subcontractors and lower-tier subcontractors, and persons either directly or indirectly employed by
the subcontractors, as well as for the acts and omissions of persons directly employed by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall be required to give personal attention to the Work that is sublet.
Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relation between any
subcontractor and the Owner. ,
The Contractor shall be responsible for making sure all subcontractors submit all required
documentation,forms,etc.
1-08.2 Assignment
The second paragraph of Section 1-082 is modified as follows:
The Contractor shall not assign any moneys due or to become due to the Contractor hereunder
without the prior written consent of the Owner. The assignment, if approved, shall be subject to all
setoffs,o s withholdin gs,and deductions required by law and the Contract.
1-08.3 Progress Schedule
Section 1-08.3 is supplemented as follows:
The progress schedule for the entire project shall be submitted 7 calendar days prior to the
Preconstruction Conference. The schedule shall be prepared using the critical path method (CPM),
preferably using Microsoft Project or equivalent software Th
P ly g e schedule shall contain this
�N
information,at a minimum:
1. Construction activities, in sufficient detail that all activities necessary to construct a complete
and functional project are considered. Any activity that has a scheduled duration exceeding 30
calendar days shall be subdivided until no sub-element has a duration exceeding 30 calendar
days.
The schedule shall clearly indicate the activities that comprise the critical path. For each activity
not on the critical path,the schedule shall show the float,or slack,time.
2. Procurement of material and equipment.
3. Submittals requiring review by the Engineer. Submittal by the Contractor and review by the
Engineer shall be shown as separate activities.
4. Work to be performed by a subcontractor,agent,or any third party.
5. Allowances for delays that could result from normal inclement weather(time extensions due to
inclement weather will not be allowed).
6. Allowances for the time required by utilities(Owner's and others)to locate, monitor, and adjust
their facilities as required.
The Engineer may request the Contractor to alter the progress schedule when deemed necessary in the
opinion of the Engineer,in the interest of public safety and welfare of the Owner, or for coordination
with any other activity of other contractors,the availability of all or portions of the job site,or special
provisions of this Contract,or to reasonably meet the completion date of the project. The Contractor
shall provide such revised schedule within 10 days of request.
40
I
9/13/2010
If, at any time, in the opinion of the Engineer, the progress of construction falls significantly behind
schedule, the Contractor may be required to submit a plan for regaining progress and a revised
schedule indicating how the remaining Work items will be completed within the authorized contract
time.
The Contractor shall promptly report to the Engineer any conditions that the Contractor feels will
require revision of the schedule and shall promptly submit proposed revisions in the progress
schedule for acceptance by the Engineer. When such changes are accepted by the Engineer, the
revised schedule shall be followed by the Contractor.
Weekly Schedule. The Contractor-shall submit a weekly progress schedule to the Engineer which sets
forth specific Work to be performed the following week, and a tentative schedule for the second
week-
Failure to Maintain Progress Schedule. The Engineer will check actual progress of the Work
against the progress schedule a minimum of two times per month Failure, without just cause, to
maintain progress in accordance with the approved schedule shall constitute a breach of Contract. If,
through no fault of the Contractor, the proposed construction schedule cannot be met, the Engineer
will require the Contractor to submit a revised schedule to the Engineer for acceptance. The approved
revisions will thereafter,in all respects,apply in lieu of the original schedule.
Failure of the Contractor to follow the progress schedule submitted and accepted,including revisions
thereof, shall relieve the Owner of any and all responsibility for furnishing and making available all
or any portion of the job site, and will relieve the Owner of any responsibility for delays to the
Contractor in the performance of the Work.
The cost of preparing the progress schedule, any supplementary progress schedules, and weekly
schedules shall be considered incidental to the Contract and no other compensation shall be made.
1-08.4 Notice to Proceed and Prosecution of the Work
Section 1-08.4 is replaced with the following:
Notice to Proceed will be given after the Contract has been executed and the Contract bond and
evidence of insurances have been approved and filed by the Owner. The Contractor shall not
commence the Work until the Notice to Proceed has been given by the Engineer.The Contractor shall
commence construction activities on the project site within ten days of the Notice to Proceed date.
The Work thereafter shall be prosecuted diligently, vigorously,and without unauthorized interruption
until physical completion of the Work There shall be no voluntary shutdowns or slowing of
operations by the Contractor without prior approval of the Engineer. Such approval shall not relieve
the Contractor from the contractual obligation to complete the Work within the prescribed Contract
Time.
1-08.5 Time For Completion
The first five paragraphs of Section 1-08.5 are deleted and replaced with the following:
The Work shall be physically completed in its entirety within the time specified in the Contract
Documents or as extended by the Engineer.The Contract Time will be stated in"working days", shall
begin on the Notice To Proceed date, or the date identified in the Notice to Proceed as "the first
working day",and shall end on the Contract Completion date.
A non-working day is defined as a Saturday, a Sunday, a day on which the Contract specifically
suspends Work, or one of these holidays: January 1, third Monday of January,Memorial Day,July 4,
Labor Day, November 11, Thanksgiving Day, the day after Thanksgiving, and Christmas Day. The
day before Christmas shall be a holiday when Christmas Day occurs on a Tuesday or Friday. The day
after Christmas shall be a holiday when Christmas Day occurs on a Monday,Wednesday,or Thursday.
When Christmas Day occurs on a Saturday, the two preceding working days shall be observed as
holidays. When Christmas day occurs on a Sunday, the two working days following shall be
observed as holidays. When holidays other than Christmas fall on a Saturday, the preceding Friday
41
1
9/13/2010
will be counted as a non-working day and when they fall on a Sunday the following Monday will be
counted as a non-working day.The Contract Time has been established to allow for periods of normal
inclement weather that from historical records, is to be expected during the Contract Time, and
during which periods,Work is anticipated to be performed. Each successive working day, beginning
with the Notice to Proceed date and ending with the Physical Completion date,shall be charged to the
Contract Time as it occurs except a day,or part of a day,which is designated a non-working day or an
Engineer determined unworkable day.
Because the City will be closed and the employees furloughed, the following dates shall also be
considered non-working days; Friday, May 22, 2009; Friday, September 4, 2009; Monday, October
12,2009;and Wednesday,November 25,2009.
The Engineer will furnish the Contractor a weekly report showing (I) the number of working days
charged against the Contract Time for the preceding week;(2)the Contract Time in working days;(3)
the number of working days remaining in the Contract Time; (4) the number of non-working days;
and(5) any partial or whole days the Engineer declared unworkable the previous week. This weekly
report will be correlated with the Contractor's current approved progress schedule. If the Contractor
elects to work 10 hours a day and 4 days a week(a 4-10 schedule),and the fifth day of the week in
which a 4-10 shift is worked would ordinarily be charged as a working day,then the fifth day of that I
week will be charged as a working day whether or not the Contractor works on that day.
The Contractor will be allowed 10 calendar days from the date of each report in which to file a
written protest of an alleged discrepancy in the Contract Time as reported: Otherwise,the report will
be deemed to have been accepted by the Contractor as correct.
The requirements for scheduling the Final Inspection and establishing the Substantial Completion,
Physical Completion,and Completion Dates are specified in Sections 1-05.11 and 1.05.12.
Revise the seventh paragraph to read:
(******)
The Engineer will give the Contractor written notice of the completion date of the Contract after all
the Contractor's obligations under the Contract have been performed by the Contractor. The
following events must occur before the Completion Date can be established:
1. The physical Work on the project must be complete;and
2. The Contractor must furnish all documentation required by the Contract and required by law, to
allow the Contracting Agency to process final acceptance of the Contract. The following
documents must be received by the Project Engineer prior to establishing a completion date:
a. Certified Payrolls(Federal-aid Projects)
b. Material Acceptance Certification Documents
c. Annual Report of Amounts Paid as MBE/WBE Participants or Quarterly Report of
Amounts Credited as DBE Participation,as required by the Contract Provisions.
d. FHWA 47(Federal-aid Projects)
e. Final Contract Voucher Certification
£ Property owner releases per Section 1-07.24
Section 1-08.5 is supplemented as follows:
Within 10 calendar days after execution of the Contract by the Contracting Agency, the Contractor
shall provide the Contracting Agency with copies of purchase orders for all equipment items deemed
critical by the Contracting Agency, including but not limited to signal controller materials, lighting
standards, and signal standards required for the physical completion of the Contract. Such purchase
orders shall disclose the estimated delivery dates for the equipment.
42
9/13/2010
All items of Work that can be performed without delivery of the critical items shall start and be
completed as soon as possible. At that time,the Engineer may suspend the Work upon request of the
Contractor until the critical items are delivered to the Contractor,if the Contracting Agency received a
purchase order within,10 calendar days after execution of the Contract by the Contracting Agency.
The Contractor will be entitled to only one such suspension of time during the performance of the
Work and during such suspension shall not perform any additional Work on the project Upon
delivery of the critical items,contract time will resume and continue to be charged in accordance with
Section 1-08.
1-08.6 Suspension of Work
Section 1-08.6 is supplemented as follows:
Owner may at any time suspend the Work, or any part thereof; by giving notice to the-Contractor in
writing. The Work shall be resumed by the Contractor within 14 calendar days after the date fixed in
the written notice from the Owner to the Contractor to do so.
The Contractor shall not suspend Work under the Contract without the written order of the Owner.
If it has been determined that the Contractor is entitled to an extension of time, the amount of such
extension shall be only to compensate for direct delays, and shall be based upon the Contractor's
diligently pursuing the Work at a rate not less than that which would have been necessary to complete
the original Contract Work on time.
1-08.7 Maintenance During Suspension
Revise the second paragraph to read:
At no expense to the Contracting_Agency,the Contractor shall provide through the construction area a
safe, smooth, and unobstructed roadway, sidewak driveway, and path for public use during
suspension(as required in Section 1-07.23 or the Special Provisions). This may include a temporary
road or detour.
1-08.9 Liquidated Damages
Section 1-08.9 is supplemented as follows:
(******)
In addition, the Contractor shall compensate the Owner for actual engineering inspection and
supervision costs and any other expenses and legal fees incurred by the Owner as a result of such
delay. Such labor costs will be billed to the Contractor at actual costs, including administrative
overhead costs.
In the event that the Owner is required to commence any lawsuit in order to enforce any provision of
this Contract or to seek redress for any breach thereof;the Owner shall be entitled to recover its costs,
including reasonable attorneys fees,from the ContractoL
1-08.11 Contractor's Plant and Equipment
Section 1-08.11 is anew Section:
The Contractor alone shall at all times be responsible for the adequacy, efficiency, and sufficiency of
his and his subcontractor's plant and equipment. The Owner shall have the right to make use of the
Contractor's plant and equipment in the performance of any Work on the site of the Work-
The use by the Owner of such plant and equipment shall be considered as extra Work and paid for
accordingly.
Neither the Owner nor the Engineer assumes any responsibility, at any time, for the security of the
site from the time the Contractor's operations have commenced until final acceptance of the Work by
the Engineer and the Owner. ,The Contractor shall employ such measures as additional fencing,
barricades, and watchmen service, as he deems necessary for the public safety and for the protection
43
9(13/2010
of the site and his plant and equipment. The Owner will be provided keys for all fenced, secured
areas..
1-08.12 Attention to Work
Section 1-08.12 is a new section:
The Contractor shall give his personal attention to and shall supervise the Work to the end that it shall
be prosecuted faithfiilly,and when he is not personally present on the Work site,he shall at all times
be represented by a competent superintendent who shall have full authority to execute the same, and
to supply materials, tools, and labor without delay, and who shall be the legal representative of the
Contractor. The Contractor shall be liable for the faithful observance of any instructions delivered to
him or to his authorized representative.
1-09 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
1-09.1 Measurement of Quantities
Section 1-09.1 is supplemented by adding the following:
Lump Sum. The percentage of lump sum Work completed, and payment will be based on the cost
percentage breakdown of the lump sum bid price(s)submitted at the preconstruction conference.
The Contractor shall submit a breakdown of costs for each lump sum bid item. The breakdown shall
list the items included in the lump sum together with a unit price of labor, materials, and equipment
for each item. The summation of the detailed unit prices for each item shall add up to the lump sum
bid. The unit price values may be used as a guideline for determining progress payments or
deductions or additions in payment for ordered Work changes.
Cubic Yard Quantities. The Contractor shall provide truck trip tickets for progress payments only in
the following manner. Where items are specified to be paid by the cubic yard, the following tally
system shall be used
All trucks to be employed on this Work will be measured to determine the volume of each truck.
Each truck shall be clearly numbered, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and there shall be no
duplication of numbers.
Duplicate tally tickets shall be prepared to accompany each truckload of material delivered on the
protect. All tickets received that do not contain the following information will not be processed for
payment:
1 Truck number
2 Quantity and type of material delivered in cubic yards
3 Drivers name,date and time of delivery
4 Location of delivery,by street and stationing on each street
5 Place for the Engineer to acknowledge receipt
6 Pay item number
7 Contract number and/or name
It will be the Contractoes responsibility to see that a ticket is given to the Engineer on the project for
each truckload of material delivered. Pay quantities will be prepared on the basis of said tally tickets.
Loads will be checked by the Engineer to verify quantity shown on ticket.
Quantities by Ton. It will be the Contractor's responsibility to see that a certified weight ticket is
given to the Inspector on the project at the time of delivery of materials for each truckload delivered.
Pay quantities will be prepared on the basis.of said tally tickets, delivered to Inspector at time of
delivery of materials. Tickets not receipted by Inspector will not be honored for payment.
Each truck shall be clearly numbered to the satisfaction of the Engineer and there shall be no
44
I�
9/13/2010
duplication of numbers.
Duplicate tickets shall be prepared to accompany each truckload of material delivered to the project.
All tickets received that do not contain the following information will not be processed for payment:
1. Truck number
2. Truck tare weight(stamped at source)
3. Gross truckload weight in tons(stamped at source)
4. Net load weight(stamped at source)
5. Driver's name,date,and time of delivery
6. Location for delivery by street and stationing on each street
7. Place for the Engineer to acknowledge receipt
8. Pay item number
9. Contract number and/or name
1-09.3 Scope of Payment
Section 1-09.3 is supplemented by adding the following-
The bid items listed in Section 1-09.14 will be the only items for which compensation will be made
for the Work described in.each section of the Standard Specifications when the Contractor performs
the specified Work. Should a bid item be listed in a"Payment"clause but not in the Proposal Form,
r and Work for that item is performed by the Contractor and the Work is not stated as included in or
incidental to a pay item in the Contract and is not Work that would be required to complete the intent
of the Contract per Section 1-04.1, then payment for that Work will be made as for Extra Work
pursuant to a Change Order.
The words ".Bid Item," "Contract Item," and "Pay Item," and similar terms used throughout the
Contract Documents are synonymous.
If the"payment"clause in the Specifications relating to any unit bid item price in the Proposal Form
requires that said unit bid item price cover and be considered compensation for certain Work or
material essential to the item, then the.Work or material will not be measured or paid for under any
other unit bid item which may appear elsewhere in the Proposal Form or Specifications.
Pluralized unit bid items appearing in these Specifications are changed to singular form.
Payment for bid items listed or referenced in the "Payment" clause of any particular section of the
Specifications shall be considered as including all of the Work required,specified,or described in that
particular section. Payment items will generally be listed generically in the Specifications, and
specifically in the bid form When items are to be"furnished"under one payment item and"installed"
under another payment item, such items shall be furnished FOB project site, or, if specified in the
Special Provisions, delivered to a designated site. Materials to be "furnished," or "furnished and
installed"under these conditions, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor with regard to storage
until such items are incorporated into the Work or, if such items are not to be incorporated into the
Work, delivered to the applicable Contracting Agency storage site when provided for in the
Specifications. Payment for material "famished," but not yet incorporated into the Work, may be
made on monthly estimates to the extent allowed-
1-09.6 Force Account
Section e)-09.6 is supplemented as follows:
Owner has estimated and included in the proposal,dollar amounts for all items to be paid per force
account, only to provide a common proposal for Bidders. All such dollar amounts are to become a
part of the Contractor's total bid However, the Owner does not warrant expressly or by implication
that the actual amount of Work will correspond with those estimates. Payment will be made on the
basis of the amount of Work actually authorized by the Engineer.
1-09.7 Mobilization
Section 1-09.7 is supplemented as follows:
45
9/13/2010
Mobilization shall also include, but not be limited to, the following items: the movement of
Contractor's personnel, equipment,supplies, and incidentals to the project site; the establishment of
an office, buildings, and other facilities necessary for Work on the project; providing sanitary
facilities for the Contractor's personnel; and obtaining permits or licenses required to complete the
project not furnished by the Owner.
This item shall also include providing the Engineer and the Inspectors with access to telephone,
facsimile machine,and copy machine during all hours the Contractor is working on the jobsite; and a
table and chair for their use when needed-
Payment will be made for the following bid item(s):
"Mobilization&Demobilization,"Lump Sum.
1-09.9 Payments
Delete the third paragraph and replace it with the following.
Progress payments for completed Work and material on hand will be based upon progress estimates
prepared by the Engineer. A progress estimate cutoff date will be established at the preconstruction
meeting.
The initial progress estimate will be made not later than 30 days after the Contractor commences the
Work, and successive progress estimates will be made every month thereafter until the Completion
Date. Progress estimates made during progress of the Work are tentative, and made only for the
purpose of determining progress payment. The progress estimates are subject to change at any time
prior to the calculation of the final payment.
The value of the progress estimate will be the sum of the following.
1. Unit Price Items in the Bid Form — the approximate quantity of acceptable units of Work
completed multiplied by the unit price.
2. Lump Sum Items in the Bid Form — the estimated percentage complete multiplied by the Bid
Forms amount for each lump sum item,or per the schedule of values for that item.
3. Materials on Hand—100 percent of invoiced cost of material delivered to job site or other storage
area approved by the Engineer.
4. Change Orders—entitlement for approved extra cost or completed extra Work as determined by
the Engineer.
Progress payments will be made in accordance with the progress estimate less:
1. Retainage per Section 1-09.9(1);
2. The amount of Progress Payments previously made;and
3. Funds withheld by the Contracting Agency for disbursement in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
Progress payments for Work performed shall not be evidence of acceptable performance or an
admission by the Contracting Agency that any Work has been satisfactorily completed
Payments will be made by check or electronic transfer, issued by the Contracting Agency's fiscal
officer, against the appropriate fund source for the project. Payments received on account of Work
performed by a subcontractor are subject to the provisions of RCW 39.04.250.
46
i
9/13/2010
Section 1-09.9 is supplemented as follows:
Applications for payment shall be itemized and supported to the extent required by the Engineer by
receipts or other vouchers showing payment for materials and labor,payments to subcontractors, and
other such evidence of the Contractor's right to payment as the Engineer may direct.
The Contractor shall submit a progress report with each monthly request for a progress payment. The
progress report shall indicate the estimated percent complete for each activity listed on the progress
schedule(see Section 1-08.3).
' 1-09.9(1) Retainage
Section 1-09.9(1)is supplemented as follows:
The retained amount shall be released as stated in the Standard Specifications if no claims have been
' filed against such fiords as provided by law, and if the Owner has no unsatisfied.claims against the
Contractor. In the event claims are filed,the Owner shall withhold, until such claims are satisfied, a
sum sufficient to satisfy all claims and to pay attorney's fees. In addition, the Owner shall withhold
such amount as is required to satisfy any claims by the Owner against the Contractor, until such
claims have been finally settled.
Neither the final payment nor any part of the retained percentage shall become due until the
' Contractor, if requested, delivers to the Owner a complete release of all liens arising out of this
Contract,or receipts in full in lieu thereof,and,if required in either case,an affidavit that so far as the
Contractor has Imowledge or information, the release and receipts include all labor and materials for
which a lien could be filed but the Contractor may,if any subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or
' receipt in full, furnish a bond satisfactorily to the Engineer to indemnify the Owner against the lien.
If any lien remains unsatisfied after all payments are made, the Contractor shall reimburse to the
Owner all monies that the latter may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien,including all costs
and reasonable engineer's and attorney's fees.
1-09.9(2) Contracting Agency's Right to Withhold and Disburse Certain Amounts
Section 1-09.9(2)is a new section:
' In addition to monies retained pursuant to RCW 60.28 and subject to RCW 39.04.250, RCW 39.12
and RCW 39.76,the Contractor authorizes the Engineer to withhold progress payments due or deduct
an amount from any payment or payments due the Contractor which, in the Engineer's opinion, may
be necessary to cover the Contracting Agency's costs for or to remedy the following situations:
1. Damage to another contractor when there is evidence thereof and a claim has been filed.
2. Where the Contractor has not paid fees or charges to public authorities of municipalities,
which the Contractor is obligated to pay.
3. Utilizing material tested and inspected by the Engineer,for purposes not connected with the
Work(Section 1-05.6).
4. Landscape damage assessments per Section 1-07.16.
' 5. For overtime Work performed by City personnel per Section 1-08.1(4).
6. Anticipated or actual failure of the Contractor to complete the Work on time:
a. Per Section 1-08.9 Liquidated Damages;or
b. Lack of construction progress based upon the Engineer's review of the Contractor's
' approved progress schedule,which indicates the Work will not be complete within the
contract time.When calculating an anticipated time overrun,the Engineer will make
allowances for weather delays,approved unavoidable delays,and suspensions of the
' Work The amount withheld under this subparagraph will be based upon the liquidated
damages amount per day set forth in Contract Documents multiplied by the number of
days the Contractor's approved progress schedule,in the opinion of the Engineer,
indicates the Contract may exceed the Contract Time.
' 7. Failure of the Contractor to perform any of the Contractor's other obligations under the
Contract,including but not limited to:
a. Failure of the Contractor to provide the Engineer with a field office when required by the
Contract Provisions.
47
9/13/2010 '
b. Failure of the Contractor to protect survey stakes,markers,etc.,or to provide adequate ,
survey Work as required by Section 1-05.5.
c. Failure of the Contractor to correct defective or unauthorized Work(Section 1-05.8).
d. Failure of the Contractor to firrnish a Manufacture's Certificate of Compliance in lieu of ,
material testing and inspection as required by Section 1-06.3.
e. Failure to submit weekly payrolls,Intent to Pay Prevailing Wage forms,or correct
underpayment to employees of the Contractor or subcontractor of an tier as required b
�Ym Y requir y
Section 1-07.9. '
f. Failure of the Contractor to pay worker's benefits(Title 50 and Title 51 RCW)as
required by Section 1-07.10.
g. Failure of the Contractor to submit and obtain approval of a progress schedule per '
Section 1-08.3.
The Contractor authorizes the Engineer to act as agent for the Contractor disbursing such funds as
have been withheld pursuant to this Section to a party or parties who are entitled to payment.
Disbursement of such funds,if the Engineer elects to do so will be made only after giving the 1
Contractor 15 calendar days prior written notice of the Contracting Agency's intent to do so,and if
prior to the expiration of the 15-calendar day period,
1. No legal action has commenced to resolve the validity of the claims,and
2. The Contractor has not protested such disbursement. '
A proper accounting of all funds disbursed on behalf of the Contractor in accordance with this Section
will be made. A payment made pursuant to this section shall be considered as payment made under
the terms and conditions of the Contract. The Contracting Agency shall not be liable to the
Contractor for such payment made in good faith.
1-09.9(3) Final Payment '
Section 1-09.9(2)is a new section:
Upon Acceptance of the Work by the Contracting Agency, the final amount to be paid the Contactor
will be calculated based upon a Final Progress Estimate made by the Engineer. Acceptance by the
Contractor of the final payment shall be and shall operate as a release:
1. To the Contracting Agency of all claims and all liabilities of the Contractor,other than claims
in stated amounts as may be specifically excepted in writing by the Contractor; ,
2. For all things done or furnished in connection with the Work;
3. For every act and neglect by the Contracting Agency;and
4. For all other claims and liability relating to or arising out of the Work.
A payment (monthly, final, retainage, or otherwise) shall not release the Contractor or the
Contractor's Surety from any obligation required under the terms of the Contract Documents or the
Contract Bond; nor shall such payment constitute a waiver of the Contracting Agency's ability to
investigate and act upon findings of non-compliance with the WMBE requirements of the Contract; '
nor shall such payment preclude the Contracting Agency from recovering damages, setting penalties,
or obtaining such other remedies as may be permitted by law.
Before the Work will be accepted by the Contracting Agency,the Contractor shall submit an affidavit, '
on the form provided by the Engineer, of amounts paid to certified disadvantaged (DB), minority
(MBE) or women business enterprises(WBE)participating in the Work Such affidavit shall certify
the amounts paid to the DB,MBE or WBE subcontractors regardless of tier. '
On federally funded projects the Contractor may also be required to execute and furnish the
Contracting Agency an affidavit certifying that the Contractor has not extended any loans, gratuity or
gift and money pursuant to Section 1-07.19 of these Specifications.
If the Contractor fails,refuses,or is unable to sign and return the Final Progress Estimate or any other ,
documents required for the final acceptance of the Contract,the Contracting Agency reserves the right
to establish a completion date and unilaterally accept the Contract. Unilateral acceptance will occur
only after the Contractor has been provided the opportunity,by written request from the Engineer, to '
voluntarily submit such documents. If voluntary compliance is not achieved, formal notification of
the impending unilateral acceptance will be provided by certified letter from the Engineer to the
Contractor that will provide 30 calendar days for the Contractor to submit the necessary documents.
48
' 9/13/2010
i
' The 30-calendar day deadline shall begin on the date of the postmark of the certified letter from the
Engineer requesting the necessary documents. This reservation by the Contracting Agency to
unilaterally accept the Contract will apply to contracts that are completed in accordance with Section
' 1-08.5 for contracts that are terminated in accordance with Section 1-08.10..Unilateral acceptance of
the Contract by the Contracting Agency does not in any way relieve the Contractor of the provisions
under contract or of the responsibility to comply with all laws, ordinances, and federal, state, and
local regulations that affect the Contract. The date the Contracting Agency unilaterally signs the Final
Progress Estimate constitutes the final acceptance date(Section 1-05.12).
1-09.11 Disputes and Claims
1-09.11(2) Claims
Paragraph 5 is revised as follows:
' Failure to submit with the Final Application for Payment such information and details as described in
this section for any claim shall operate as a waiver of the claims by the Contractor as provided in
Section 1-09.9.
' 1-09.11(3) Time Limitations and Jurisdiction
Paragraph 1,Sentence 1 is revised as follows:
' ...such claims or causes of action shall be brought in the Superior Court of the county where the
Work is performed.
1-09.13 Claims and Resolutions
' 1-09.13(3) Claims$250,000 or Less
Delete this Section and replace it with the following:
' The Contractor and the Contracting Agency mutually agree that those claims that total $250,000 or
less, submitted in accordance with Section 1-09.11 and not resolved by nonbonding ADR processes,
shall be resolved through litigation,unless the parties mutually agree in writing to resolve the claim
through binding arbitration.
1-09.13(3)A Administration of Arbitration
Revise the third paragraph to read:
The Contracting Agency and the Contractor mutually agree to be bound by the decision of the
arbitrator, and judgment upon the award rendered by the arbitrator may be entered in the Superior
Court of the county in which the Contracting Aency's headquarters are located. The decision of the
' arbitrator and the specific basis for the decision shall be in writing. The arbitrator shall use the
Contract as a basis for decisions.
' 1-09.13(3)B Procedures to Pursue Arbitration .
Section 1-09.13(3)B is supplemented by adding:
The findings and decision of the board of arbitrators shall be final and binding on the parties, unless
the aggrieved party, within 10 days, challenges the findings and decision by serving and filing a
petition for review by the superior court of King County, Washington. The grounds for the petition
for review are limited to showing that the findings and decision:
1. Are not responsive to the questions submitted,
' 2. Is contrary to the terms of the contract or any component thereof-
3. Is arbitrary and/or is not based upon the applicable facts and the law controlling the issues
submitted to arbitration. The board of arbitrators shall support its decision by setting forth in writing
' their findings and conclusions based on the evidence adduced at any such hearing.
The arbitration shall be conducted in accordance with the statutes of the State of Washington and
court decisions governing such procedure.
49
9/13/2010 '
The costs of such arbitration shall be borne equally b the City and the Contractor unless it is the '
� Y Y tY
board's majority opinion that the Contractor's filing of the protest or action is capricious or without
reasonable foundation. In the latter case,all costs shall be borne by the Contractor. ,
1-09.14 Payment Schedule
Measurement and Payment Schedule for Bid Items in This Project Proposal
Section 1-09.14 is a new section: '
GENERAL
1-09.14(1) Scope ,
Section 1-09.14(1)is a new section:
A. Payment for the various items of the bid sheets,as further specified herein,.shall include all ,
compensation to be received by the Contractor for furnishing all tools,equipment,supplies,
and manufactured articles,and for all labor,operations,and incidentals appurtenant to the
items of Work being described,as necessary to complete the various items of the Work all in ,
accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents,including all appurtenances
thereto,and including all costs of compliance with the regulations of public agencies having
jurisdiction,including Safety and Health Administration of the U.S.Department of Labor ,
(OSHA). No separate payment will be made for any item that is not specifically set forth in
the Bid Schedules,and all costs therefore shall be included in the prices named in the Bid
Schedules for the various appurtenant items of Work. ,
B. The Owner shall not pay for material quantities,which exceed the actual measured amount
used and approved by the Engineer.
C. It is the intention of these Specifications that the performance of all Work under the bid for ,
each item shall result in the complete construction,in an accepted operating condition,of
each item. ,
Work and material not specifically listed in the proposal but required in the Plans,
Specifications,and general construction practice,shall be included in the bid price. No
separate payment will be made for these incidental items. ,
1-09.14(2) Trench and Excavation Safety Systems(Bid Item 001)
Measurement shall be lump sump for "Trench and Excavation Safety Systems" and per the cost '
breakdown percentage requirements specified in Section 1-09.1 of the Standard Specifications as
supplemented in these Special Provisions.
The lump sum bid price for `°Trench and Excavation Safety Systems" shall include all shoring ,
activities associated with the excavation of the wet well, valve vault, and yard piping. The shoring
system shall maintain a vertical excavation that is free of excessive movement and of the size needed
to construct the required facilities. Work shall consist of designing, constructing, maintaining,
operating, and removing shoring, sheeting, cribbing, backfill and compaction; and other work
required for compliance with WISHA, Chapter 49.17 RCW. This bid item shall also include all
excavation, backfill, compaction and dewatering required when excavation beyond a vertical '
excavation is used in lieu of shoring and cribbing for compliance with WISHA,Chapter 49.17 RCW.
Contractor shall obtain written approval from Owner if Contractor wants to leave any shoring in place
as permanent shoring.All costs associated with obtaining said approval and leaving shoring in place
shall be the Contractor's responsibility. Costs for WISHA compliance for excavation of the valve '
vault and yard piping shall not be incidental to any other bid items.
This item shall include all shoring and trench safety measures necessary to comply with the
50
9/13/2010
' retirements of the permits and permitting agencies.
Contractor shall pay for all special inspections as required for the installation of tie-backs and lagging
' utilized in shoring wall construction.
1-09.14(2) Lake Washington Beach Lift Station Replacement(Bid Item 002)
Measurement shall be lump sump for"Lake Washington Beach Lift Station Replacement"and per the
cost breakdown percentage requirements specified in Section 1-09.1 of the Standard Specifications as
supplemented in these Special Provisions.
The lump sum bid price for"Lake Washington Beach Lift Station Replacement"shall include all
project items not included in the above Bid Item(s).The lump sum bid price shall constitute full
compensation for all Work,labor,materials,and equipment necessary for construction,testing, and
completion of the Lake Washington Beach Lift Station Replacement as indicated in the Contract
Specifications and Drawings.
1-10 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL
' 1-10.1 General
Revise the first paragraph to read:
The Contractor shall provide flaggers,signs, and other traffic control devices not otherwise specified
as being furnished by the Contracting Agency. The Contractor shall erect and maintain all
construction signs; warning signs, detour signs, and other traffic control devices necessary to wam
and protect the public at all times from injury or damage as a result of the Contractor's operations
which may occur on highways, roads, streets, sidewalks, or paths. No Work shall be done on or
adjacent to any traveled way until all necessary signs and traffic control devices are in place.
Section 1-10.1 is supplemented by adding the following:
When the bid proposal includes an item for`°Traffic Control,"the Work required for this item shall be
all items described in Section 1-10,including,but not limited to:
' 1. Furnishing and maintaining barricades, flashers, construction signing, and other
channelization devices,unless a pay item is in the bid proposal for any specific device and
the Special Provisions specify fiimishing,maintaining, and payment in a different manner
for that device;
2. Furnishing traffic control labor,equipment,and supervisory personnel for all traffic control
labor,
3. Furnishing any necessary vehicle(s) to set up and remove the Class B construction signs
and other traffic control devices;
4. Furnishing labor and vehicles for patrolling and maintaining in position all of the
construction signs and the traffic control devices,unless a pay item is in the bid proposal to
specifically pay for this Work;and
5 Furnishing labor, material, and equipment necessary for cleaning up, removing, and
replacing of the construction signs and the traffic control devices destroyed or damaged
during the life of the project.
6. Removing existing signs as specified or as directed by the Engineer and delivering to the
City Shops,or storing and reinstalling as directed by the Engineer_
7. Preparing a traffic control plan for the project and designating the person responsible for
traffic control at the Work site. The traffic control plan shall include descriptions of the
traffic control methods and devices to be used by the prime Contractor,and subcontractors,
shall be submitted at or before the preconstruction conference, and shall be subject to
review and approval of the Engineer_
8. Contacting police,fire,911,and ambulance services to notify them in advance of any Work
51
i
9/13/2010
that will affect and traveled portion of a roadway.
9. Assuring that all traveled portions of roadways are open to traffic during peak traffic
periods, 6:30 a.m. to 8:30 am., and 3:00 p.m. to 6:00 p-m., or as specified in the special
provisions,or as directed by the Engineer.
10. Promptly removing or covering all non-applicable signs during periods when they are not
needed.
If no bid item"Traffic Control"appears in the proposal,then all Work required by these sections will
be considered incidental and their cost shall be included in the other items of Work.
If the Engineer requires the Contractor to furnish additional channelizing devices, pieces of
equipment, or services, which could not be usually anticipated, by a prudent Contractor for the
maintenance and protection of traffic, then a new item or items may be established to pay for such
items. Further limitations for consideration of payment for these items are that they are not covered
by other pay items in the bid proposal,they are.not specified in the Special Provisions as incidental,
and the accumulative cost for the use of each individual channelizing device,piece of equipment, or
service must exceed $200 in total cost for the duration of their.need In the event of disputes, the
Engineer will determine what is usually anticipated by a prudent Contractor. The cost for these items
will be by agreed price, price established by the Engineer, or by force account. Additional items
required as a result of the Contractor's modification to the traffic control plan(s) appearing in the
Contract shall not be covered by the provisions in this paragraph.
If the total cost of all the Work under the Contract increases or decreases by more than 25 percent,an
equitable adjustment will be considered for the item "Traffic Control" to address the increase or
decrease.
Traffic control and maintenance for the safety of the traveling public on this project shall be the sole `
responsibility of the Contractor and all methods and equipment used will be subject to the approval of .
the Owner.
Traffic control devices and their use shall conform to City of Renton standards and the Manual on
Uniform Traffic Control Devices(MUTCD).
The Contractor shall not proceed with any construction until proper traffic control has been provided
to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Any days lost due to improper traffic control will be charged
against the Contractor's allowable contract time,and shall not be the cause for a claim for extra days
to complete the Work.
1-10.2(1)B Traffic Control Supervisor
Paragraphs 1 and 2 are revised as follows:
A Traffic Control Supervisor(TCS)shall be on the project whenever traffic control labor is required
or as authorized by the Engineer.
The TCS shall assure that all the duties of the TCS are performed during the duration of the Contract.
During non-Work periods, the TCS shall be able to be on the job site within a 45-minute time period
after notification by the Engineer.
1-10.2(2) Traffic Control Plans
Section 1-10.2(2)is supplemented as follows:
The Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that traffic control is installed and maintained in
conformance to established standards. The Contractor shall continuously evaluate the operation of
the traffic control plan and take prompt action to correct any problems that become evident during
operation.
52
9/13/2010
1-10.3 Flagging,Signs,and All Other Traffic Control Devices
Section 1-10.3 is supplemented as follows:
At the end of each working day, provisions shall be made for the safe passage of traffic and
pedestrians during non-working hours.
Barricades shall be reflectorized as specified in Part VI of the MUTCD, and shall be 3M-diamond
grade or equivalent approved by the Engineer. Barricades shall also be equipped with flashers.
1-10.3(3) Construction Signs
Section 1-10.3(3)paragraph 4 is supplemented as follows:
No separate pay item will be provided in the bid proposal for Class A or Class B construction signs.
All costs for the Work to provide Class A or Class B construction signs shall be included in the unit
contract price for the various other items of the Work in the bid proposal.
1-10.4 Measurement
Section 1-10.4 is replaced with:
No specific unit of measurement will apply to the lump sum item of"Traffic Control'.
No adjustment in the lump sum bid amount will be made for overtime Work or for use of relief
flaggers.
1-10.5 Payment
Section 1-10.5 is replaced with:
(******)
Payment for all labor,materials,and equipment described in Section 1-10 will be made in accordance
with Section 1-04.1,for the following bid items when included in the proposal:
"Traffic Control,"Lump Sum-
1-11 RENTON SURVEYING STANDARDS
The following is a new section with new subsections:
1-11.1(1) Responsibility for Surveys
All surveys and survey reports shall be prepared under the direct supervision of a person registered to
practice land surveying under the provisions of Chapter 18.43 RCW.
1 All surveys and survey reports shall be prepared in accordance with the requirements established by
the Board of Registration for Professional Engineers and Land Surveyors under the provisions of
Chapter 18.43 RCW.
1-11.1(2) Survey Datum and Precision
The horizontal component of all surveys shall have as its coordinate base: The North American
Datum of 1983/91.
All horizontal control for projects must be referenced to or in conjunction with a minimum of two of
the City of Renton's Survey Control Network monuments. The source of the coordinate values used
will be shown on the survey drawing per RCW 58.09.070.
The horizontal component of all surveys shall meet or exceed the closure requirements of WAC 332-
130-060. The control base lines for all surveys shall meet or exceed the requirements for a Class A
survey revealed in Table 2 of the Minimum Standard Detail Requirements for ALTA/ACSM Land
Title Surveys jointly established and adopted by ALTA and ACSM in 1992 or comparable
classification in future editions of said document. The angular and linear closure and precision ratio
of traverses used for survey control shall be revealed on the face of the survey drawing, as shall the
53
9/13/2010 t
method of adjustment.
The horizontal component of the control system for surveys using global positioning system
methodology shall exhibit at least 1 part in 50,000 precision in line length dependent error analysis at
a 95 percent confidence level and performed pursuant to Federal Geodetic Control Subcommittee
Standards for GPS control surveys as defined in Geometric Geodetic Accuracy Standards &
Specifications for Using GPS Relative Positioning Techni q ues dated A ugus t 1 1989,.or comparable
e
classification
in future editions of said document.
The vertical component of all surveys shall be based on NAVD 1988, the North American Vertical
Datum of 1988,and tied to at least one of the City of Renton Survey Control Network benchmarks. If
there are two such benchmarks within 3000 feet of the project site a tie to both shall be made. The
benchmark(s) used will be shown on the drawing. If a City of Renton benchmark does not exist
within 3000 feet of a project, one must be set on or near the project in a permanent manner that will
remain intact throughout the duration of the project: Source of elevations(benchmark)will be shown
on the drawing,as well as a description of any benchmarks established-
1-11.1(3) Subdivision Information
Those surveys dependent on section subdivision shall reveal the controlling monuments used and the
subdivision of the applicable quarter section.
Those surveys dependent on retracement of a plat or short plat shall reveal the controlling
monuments,measurements,and methodology used in that retracement. 1
1-11.1(4) Field Notes
Field notes shall be kept in conventional format in a standard bound field book with waterproof
pages. In cases where an electronic data collector is used field notes must also be kept with a sketch ,
and a record of control and base line traverses describing station occupations and what measurements
were made at each point.
Every point located or set shall be identified by a number and a description. Point numbers shall be
unique within a complete job. The preferred method of point numbering is field notebook, page and
point set on that page. Example: The first point set or found on page 16 of field book 348 would be
identified as Point No.348.16.01,the second point would be 348.16.02,etc.
Upon completion of a City of Renton project,either the field notebook(s)provided by the City or the
original field notebook(s) used by the Surveyor will be given to the City. For all other Work,
Surveyors will provide a copy of the notes to the City upon request. In those cases where an
electronic data collector is used,a hard copy print out in ASCII text format will accompany the field
notes.
1-11.1(5) Corners and Monuments
Comer.A point on a land boundary, at the juncture of two or more boundary lines. A monument is,
usually set at such points to physically reference a comer's location on the ground.
Monument:Any physical object or structure of record,which marks or accurately references:
• A comer or other survey point established by or under the supervision of an individual per
Section 1-11.1(1)and any comer or monument established by the General Land Office and its
successor the Bureau of Land Management including section subdivision comers down to
and including one-sixteenth comers;and
• Any permanently monumented boundary, right-of-way alignment, or horizontal and vertical
control points established by any governmental agency or private surveyor including street
intersections but excluding dependent interior lot comers.
1-11.1(6) Control or Base Line Survey
Control or Base Line Surveys shall be established for all construction projects that will create
permanent structures such as roads,sidewalks, bridges,utility lines or appurtenances, signal or light
54
t9/13/2010
poles,or any non-single family building: Control or Base Line Surveys shall consist of such number
of permanent monuments as are required such that every structure may be observed for staking or"as-
builting" while occupying one such monument and sighting another such monument. A minimum of
two of these permanent monuments shall be existing monuments,recognized and on record with the
City of Renton. The Control or Base Line Survey shall occupy each monument in turn, and shall
satisfy all applicable requirements of Section 1-11.1 herein.
The drawing depicting the survey shall be neat; legible, and drawn to an appropriate scale. North
orientation should be clearly presented and the scale shown graphically as well as noted. The
drawing must be of such quality that a reduction thereof to one-half original scale remains legible.
If recording of the survey with the King County Recorder is required, it will be prepared on 18 inch
by 24 inch mylar and will comply with all provisions of Chapter 58.09 RCW. A photographic mylar
of the drawing will be submitted to the City of Renton and,upon their review and acceptance per the
specific requirements of the project,the original will be recorded with the King County Recorder.
If recording is not required, the survey drawing shall be prepared on 22 inch by 34 inch mylar, and
the original or a photographic mylar thereof will be submitted to the City of Renton.
tThe survey drawings shall meet or exceed the requirements of WAC 332-130-050 and shall conform
to the City of Renton's Drafting Standards. American Public Works Association symbols shall be
' used whenever possible, and a legend shall identify all symbols used if each point marked by a
symbol is not described at each use.
An electronic listing of all principal points shown on the drawing shall be submitted with each
drawing. The listing should include.the point number designation (corresponding with that in the
field notes),a brief description of the point,and northing,easting,and elevation(if applicable)values,
all in ASCII format,on IBM PC compatible media.
1-11.1(7) Precision Levels
Vertical Surveys for the establishment of benchmarks shall satisfy all applicable requirements of
Sections 1-05 and 1-11.1.
Vertical surveys for the establishment of benchmarks shall meet or exceed the standards,
Specifications and procedures of third order elevation accuracy established by the Federal Geodetic
Control Committee.
Benchmarks must possess both permanence and vertical stability. Descriptions of benchmarks must
be complete to insure both recoverability and positive identification on recovery.
1-11.1(8) Radial and Station—Offset Topography
Topographic surveys shall satisfy all applicable requirements of Section IA 1.1 herein.
All points occupied or back sighted in developing radial topography or establishing baselines for
station-offset topography shall meet the requirements of Section I-11.1 herein.
The drawing and electronic listing requirements set forth in Section 1-11.1 herein shall be observed
for all topographic surveys.
1-11.1(9) Radial Topography
Elevations for the points occupied or back sighted in a radial topographic survey shall be determined
either by, 1) spirit leveling with misclosure not to exceed 0.1 feet or Federal Geodetic Control
Committee third order elevation accuracy'Specifications,OR 2)trigonometric leveling with elevation
differences determined in at least two directions for each point and with misclosure of the circuit not
to exceed 0.1 feet.
1-11.1(10) Station—Offset Topography
Elevations of the baseline and topographic points shall be determined by spirit leveling and shall
55
9113/2010 ,
satisfy Federal Geodetic Control Committee Specifications as to the turn points and shall not exceed ,
0.1 foot's error as to side shots.
1-11.1(11) As-Built Survey
All improvements required to. be "as-built" (post construction survey) per City of Renton Codes,
TITLE 4 Building Regulations and TITLE 9 Public Ways and Property, must be located both
horizontally and vertically by a Radial survey or by a Station offset survey. The "as-built" survey
must be based on the same base line or control survey used for the construction staking survey for the
improvements being "as-built". The "as-built" survey for all subsurface improvements should occur
prior to backfilling. Close cooperation between the installing Contractor and the "as-builting"
surveyor is therefore required
All as built surveys shall satisfythe requirements of Section 1-11.1(1) herein, and shall be based
upon control or base line surveys made in conformance with these Specifications.
The field notes for "as-built" shall meet the requirements of Section 1-11.1(4)herein, and submitted ,
with stamped and signed "as-built" drawings which includes a statement certifying the accuracy of
the"as-built".
The drawing and electronic listing requirements set forth in Section 1-11.1(6) herein shall be
observed for all"as-built"surveys.
1-11.1(12) Monument Setting and Referencing ,
All property or lot comers, as defined in 1-11.1(5), established or reestablished on a plat or other
recorded survey shall be referenced by a permanent marker at the comer point per 1-11.2(1). In
situations where such markers arc impractical or in danger of being destroyed,e.g., the front corners
of lots, a witness marker shall be set. In most cases,this will be the extension of the lot line to a tack
in lead in the curb. The relationship between the witness monuments and their respective comers
shall be shown or described on the face of the plat or survey of record, e.g., "Tacks in lead on the
extension of the lot side lines have been set in the curbs on the extension of said line with the curb."
In all other cases the comer shall meet the requirements of Section 1-11.2(1)herein.
All non-comer monuments, as defined in 1-11.1(5), shall meet the requirements of Section 1-11.2(2)
herein. If the monument falls within a paved portion of a right-of-way or other area, the monument
shall be set below the ground surface and contained within a lidded case kept separate from the
monument and flush with the pavement surface,per Section 1-11.2(3).
In the case of right-of-way centerline monuments all points of curvature (PC), points of tangency ,
(PT), street intersections, center points of cul-de-sacs shall be set. If the point of intersection(PI)for
the tangents of a curve fall within the paved portion of the right-of-way,a monument can be set at the
PI instead of the PC and PT of the curve.
For all non comer monuments set while under contract to the City of Renton or as part of a City of
Renton approved subdivision of property, a City of Renton Monument Card(furnished by the city)
identifying the monument;point of intersection(PI),point of tangency (PT),point of curvature (PC),
one-sixteenth comer, Plat monument, street intersection, etc., complete with a description of the
monument,a minimum of two reference points and NAD 83/91 coordinates,and NAVD 88 elevation
shall be filled out and filed with the city.
1-11.2 Materials
1-11.2(1) Propert3&ot Corners
Comers per 1-1I.1(5) shall be marked in a permanent manner such as 1/2 inch diameter rebar.24
inches in length, durable metal plugs or caps, tack in lead, etc., and permanently marked or tagged
with the surveyor's identification number. The specific nature of the marker used can be determined '
by the surveyor at the time of installation.
56
9/13/2010
1-11.2(2) Monuments
Monuments per 1-11.1(5) shall meet the requirements as set forth in City of Renton Standard Plans
page H031 and permanently marked or tagged with the surveyor's identification number.
' 1-11.2(3) Monument Case and Cover
Materials shall meet the requirements of Section 9-22 and City of Renton Standard Plans page H031.
2-01 CLEARING,GRUBBING,AND ROADSIDE CLEANUP
2-01.1 Description
Section 2-0 1.1 is supplemented as follows:
The limits of clearing and grubbing(construction limits) shall be defined as being the construction
limit lines as shown in the Plans. Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, any trees abutting or
adjacent to the limits of clearing and grubbing are damaged and require removal,the Contractor shall
remove such trees. Any trees flagged by the Engineer to remain within the clearing and grubbing
limits shall be left undamaged by the Contractor's operations. Any flagged trees,which are damaged,
shall be replaced in kind at the Contractor's expense.
Existing landscaping outside the construction limits, including but not limited to; sod, rockeries,
i or l- t, b shah' tom, t
beauty bark,decorative gi aver.,�rc:,�,bushes,and shrub�ery s„� �,�,protected from damage.
The property owners shall be responsible for removing and/or relocating irrigation equipment, trees,
shrubs, curbing, ornamental plants, and any other decorative landscaping materials within the
construction limits that they wish to save. The Contractor shall give property owners 10 days'
written notice prior to removing landscaping materials. All landscaping materials that remain in
the construction limits after that time period shall be removed and disposed of,by the Contractor, in
accordance with Section 2-01 of the Standard Specifications,these Special Provisions,and the Plans.
The Contractor shall receive approval from the Engineer prior to removal-
2-01*2 Disposal of Usable Material and Debris
Sectin 2-01.2 is supplemented as follows:
The Contractor shall dispose of all debris by Disposal Method No.2—Waste Site.
' 2-01.5 Payment
Section 2-01.5 is supplemented as follows:
The lump sum price for"Clearing and Grubbing" shall be full compensation for all Work described
herein and shown in the Plans,including removing trees and shrubbery where shown in the Plans and
directed by the Engineer.
2-02 REMOVAL OF STRUCTURE AND OBSTRUCTIONS
2-02.3(3) Removal of Pavement,Sidewalks,and Curbs
Section 2-02.3(3)is revised and supplemented as follows:
Item"1"is revised as follows:
In removing pavement, sidewalks, driveways, and curbs, the Contractor shall haul broken-up pieces
Ito some off-project site.
The section is supplemented as follows:
When an area where pavement, sidewalk, or driveway has been removed is to be opened to traffic
before pavement patching has been completed, temporary mix asphalt concrete patch shall be
required. Temporary patching shall be placed to a minimum depth of 2 inches immediately after
backfilling and compaction are complete, and before the road is opened to traffic. MC cold mix or
57
i
9/13/2010
MC hot mix shall be used at the discretion of the Engineer.
2-02.4 Measurement
.Section 2-02.4 replaces the existing vacant section: ,
Sawcutting existing cement and asphalt concrete pavements shall be measured by the linear foot
along the sawcut,full depth. Wheel cutting of pavement will not be measured.for separate payment,
but shall be included in other items of Work
2-02.5 Payment
Section 2-02.5 is supplemented by adding:
(******)
"Saw Cutting",per lineal foot.
"Remove Sidewalk",per square yard.
"Remove Curb and Gutter",per lineal foot.
"Cold Mix",per ton
"Remove Asphalt Concrete Pavement,"per square yard-
"Remove Cement Concrete pavement,"per square yard-
'Remove existing ,"per
All costs related to the removal and disposal of structures and obstructions including saw cutting,
excavation,backf111ing,and temporary asphalt shall be considered incidental to and included in other ,
items unless designated as specific bid items in the proposal. If pavements, sidewalks, or curbs lie
within.an excavation area and are not mentioned as separate pay items, their removal will be paid for
as part of the quantity removed in excavation_ If they are mentioned as a separate item.in the
proposal, they will be measured and paid for as provided under Section 2-02.5, and will not be
included in the quantity calculated for excavation.
2-03 ROADWAY EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT
2-033 Construction Requirements
Section 2-03.3 is supplemented by adding the following:
Roadway excavation shall include the removal of all materials excavated from within the limits
shown on the Plans. Suitable excavated material shall be used for embankments, while surplus
excavated material or unsuitable material shall be disposed of by the Contractor.
Earthwork quantities and changes will be computed, either manually or by means of electronic data
processing equipment,by use of the average end area method. Any changes to the proposed Work as
directed by the Engineer that would alter these quantities shall be calculated by the Engineer and
submitted to the Contractor for his review and verification.
Any excavation or embankment beyond the limits indicated in the Plans, unless ordered by the
Engineer, shall not be paid for. All Work and material required to return these areas to their original
conditions,as directed by the Engineer,shall be provided by the Contractor at his sole expense_
All areas shall be excavated, filled, and/or backfilled as necessary to comply with the grades shown
on the Plans. In filled and backfilled areas, fine grading shall begin during the placement and the
compaction of the final layer. In cut sections,fine grading shall begin within the final six(6) inches .
of cut. Final grading shall produce a surface, which is smooth and even, without abrupt changes in
grade.
Excavation for curbs and gutters shall be accomplished by cutting accurately to the cross sections,
grades and elevations shown. Care shall be taken not to excavate below the specified grades. The
Contractor shall maintain all excavations free from detrimental quantities of leaves, brush, sticks,
trash,and other debris until final acceptance of the Work_
Following removal of topsoil or excavation to grade,and before placement of fills or base course,the
58
9/13/2010
subgrade under the roadway shall be proof-rolled to identify any soft or loose areas which may
warrant additional compaction or excavation and replacement.
The Contractor shall provide temporary drainage or protection to keep the subgrade flee from
standing water.
Acceptable excavated native soils shall be used for fill in the area requiring fills. Care shall be taken
to place excavated material at the optimum moisture content to achieve the specified compaction.
Any native material used for fill shall be free of organics and debris, and have a maximum particle
size of 6 inches.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to prevent the native materials from becoming saturated
with water. The measures may include sloping to drain, compacting the native materials, and
diverting runoff away from the materials. If the Contractor fails to take such preventative measures,
any costs or delay related to drying the materials shall be at his own expense.
If the native materials become saturated, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to dry the
materials, to the optimum moisture content. If sufficient acceptable native soils are not available to
complete construction of the roadway embankment,Gravel Borrow shall be used-
If subgrade trimmer is not required on the project,all portions of Section 2-03 shall apply as though a
subgrade trimmer were specified-
If sufficient acceptable native soils, as determined by the Engineer, are not available to complete
construction of the roadway embankment, Gravel Borrow meeting the requirements of Section 9-
03.14 of the Standard Specifications,shall be used
2-03.4 Measurement
Section 2-03.4 is supplemented by adding the following:
At the discretion of the Engineer,roadway excavation,borrow excavation,and unsuitable foundation
excavation-by the cubic yard(adjusted for swell)may be measured by truck in the hauling vehicle at
the point of loading. The Contractor shall provide truck tickets for each load removed. Each ticket
shall have the truck number,time and date,and be approved by the Engineer.
2-03.5 Payment
Section 2-03.5 is revised as follows:
Payment for embankment compaction will not be made as a separate item.All costs for embankment
compaction shall be included in other bid items involved Payment will be made for the following bid
items when they are included in the proposal:
"Roadway Excavation Including Haul,"per cubic yard
"Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Foundation Material,"per ton
"Gravel Borrow Including Haul,"per ton
"Roadway Excavation Including Haul" shall be considered incidental and part. of the bid itcm(s)
provided for the installation of the utility mains and appurtenances. When the Engineer orders
excavation below subgrade, then payment will be in accordance with the item "Removal and
Replacement of Unsuitable Foundation Material'. In this case,all items of Work other than roadway
excavation shall be paid at unit contract prices.
I The unit contract price per cubic yard for"Roadway Excavation Including Haul"shall be full pay for
excavating,loading,placing,or otherwise disposing of the material.
The unit contract price per ton for"Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Foundation Material'
shall be full pay for excavating,loading,and disposing of the material.
Payment for embankment compaction will not be made as a separate item.All costs for embankment
59
9/13/2010 t
compaction shall be included in other bid items involved
2-04 HAUL
2-04.5 Payment
Section 2-04.5 is revised and supplemented as follows:
All costs for the hauling of material to,from, or on the job site shall be considered incidental to and
included in the unit price of other units of Work.
2-06 SUBGRADE PREPARATION '
2-065 Measurement and Payment
Section 2-06.5 is supplemented by adding the following.
Subgrade preparation and maintenance including watering shall be considered as incidental to the
construction and all costs thereof shall be included in the appropriate unit or lump sum contract bid
prices.
2-09 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION '
2-09.1 Description
Section 2-09.1 is supplemented by adding the following:
This Work also includes the excavation,haul, and disposal of all unsuitable materials such as peat,
muck,swampy or unsuitable materials,including buried logs and stumps.
2-0 9.3(1)D Disposal of Excavated Material
Section 2-09.3(1)D is revised as follows:
The second paragraph is replaced with:
All costs for disposing of excavated material within or external to the project limits shall be included
in the unit contract price for structure excavation,Class A or B.
The third paragraph is replaced with:
If the Contract includes structure excavation,Class A or B,including haul,the unit contract price shall
include all costs for loading and hauling the material the full required distance, otherwise all such
disposal costs shall be considered incidental to the Work
2-09.4 Measurement
Section 2-09.4 is revised and supplemented as follows:
Gravel backfill. Gravel backfill, except when used as bedding for culvert, storm sewer, sanitary
sewer, manholes, and catch basins, will be measured by the cubic yard in place determined by the
neat lines required by the Plans or by the ton as measured in conformance with Section 1-09.2.
2-09.5 Payment
Section 2-09.5 is revised and supplemented as follows:
Payment will be made for the following bid items when they are included in the proposal:
"Structure Excavation Class A",per cubic yard-
"Structure Excavation Class B",per cubic yard
"Structure Excavation Class A Incl.Haul",per cubic yard-
"Structure Excavation Class B Incl.Haul",per cubic yard-
60
9/13/2010
Payment for reconstruction of surfacing and paving, the limits of structur e excavation, will be
at the applicable unit prices for the items involved-
If the Engineer orders the Contractor to excavate below the elevations shown in the Plans, the unit
contract price per cubic yard for "Structure Excavation Class A or B" will apply. But if the
Contractor excavates deeper than the Plans or the Engineer requires,the Contracting Agency will not
pay for material removed from below the required elevations. In this case, the Contractor, at no
expense to the Contracting Agency, shall replace such material with concrete or other material the
Engineer approves.The emit contract price per cubic yard for the bid items listed as 1 through 4 above
shall be full pay for all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and pumping, or.shall be included in the
unit bid price of other items of Work if"Structure Excavation" or "Structure Excavation Incl Haul'
are not listed as pay items in the Contract.
"Shoring or Extra Excavation Class B",per square foot.
The unit contract price per square foot shall be full pay for all excavation, backfill, compaction, and
other Work required when extra excavation is used in lieu of constructing shoring. If select backfill
material is required for backfilling within the limits of the structure excavation, it shall also be
required as backfill material for the extra excavation at the Contractor's expense. Any excavation or
backfill material being paid by unit price shall be calculated by the Engineer only for the neat line
measurement of the excavation and shall not include the extra excavation beyond the neat line.
If there is no bid item for shoring or extra excavation Class B on a square foot basis and the nature of
the excavation is such that shoring or extra excavation is required as determined by the Engineer,then
shoring or extra excavation shall be considered incidental to the Work involved and no further
compensation shall be made.
"Gravel Backfill(Kind)for(Type of Excavation)",.per cubic yard or per ton.
"Controlled Density hill",per cubic yard-
When gravel backfill is paid by the ton,the Contractor shall take care to.assure to the satisfaction of
the Engineer that such per ton backfill is only being used for the specified purpose and not for
purposes where backfill is incidental or being paid by cubic yard Evidence that per ton gravel
backfill is not being used for its designated purpose shall be grounds for the Engineer to deny
payment for such load tickets.
5-03 SLURRY SEAL SURFACE TREATMENT
Section 5-03 replaces the existing vacant section and is a New Section:
■ 5-03.1 Description
This work consists of applying an emulsified asphalt slurry seal to prepared designated street surfaces
in complete and strict accordance with these Special Provisions.
The slurry seal surface shall consist of a mixture of emulsified asphalt,mineral aggregate, and water,
properly proportioned,mixed, and spread evenly on the surface as specified in this document and as
directed by the Engineer. The slurry seal shall be applied as a homogeneous mat, fill all cracks,
adhere firmly to the prepared surface,and have a skid resistant texture-
5-03.1(1) Appficable Specifications
The following specifications and methods are referenced as part of these Special Provisions.
AASHTO_ American Association of State Highway Testing Officials;
61
9/13/2010 j
ASTM_ American Society for Testing and Materials; t
ISSA_ International Slurry Seal Association-
5-03.2 Materials
5-03.2(1) Emulsified Asphalt
The emulsified asphalt, and emulsified asphalt residue, shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M
140 or ASTM D 977 for SS-1 or SS-lh. For CSS-1, CSS-1h, or CQS-1h, it shall meet the
requirements of AASHTO M 208 or ASTM D 2397. Each load of emulsified asphalt shall be
accompanied with a Certificate of Analysis/Compliance to indicate that the emulsion meets the
specifications.
5-03.2(2) Aggregate t
The mineral aggregate shall consist of natural or manufactured sand,slag,crusher fines,and others or
a combination thereof. Smooth-textured sand of less than 1.25% water absorption shall not exceed
50% of the total combined aggregate. The aggregate shall be clean and free of vegetable matter and
other deleterious substances. When tested by AASHTO T176 or ASTM D2419, the aggregate blend
shall have a sand equivalent of not less than 45. When tested according to AASHTO T104 or ASTM ,
C88 the aggregate shall show a loss of not more than 15%. When tested according to AASHTO T-96
or ASTM C131 the aggregate shall show a loss of not more than 35. Mineral fillers such as Portland
Cement,limestone dust,fly ash,and others shall be considered part of the blended aggregate and shall
be used in minimum required amounts and must meet the gradation requirements of ASTM D242.
Mineral fillers shall only be used if needed to improve the workability of the mix or gradation of the
aggregate.
The combined mineral aggregate shall conform to the following:
Sieve Size Percent Passing Stockpile Theoretical
(Type 1) Tolerance from Asphalt Content
the Mix Design %Dry
Gradation
3/8 inch-(9.5 mm) 100 -- —
No.4 4.75 mm 100 ±5% —
No.8 2.36 mm 90-100 f5% —
No. 16 1.18 mm 65-90 f5% —
No. 30 600 um 40-65 f5% —
No. 50 300 um 25-42 f4% --
No. 100 150 um 15-30 f3% —
No.200 75 um 1020 t2% —
Aggregate -- I -- 10-16
The gradation of the aggregate stockpile shall not vary by more than the stockpile tolerance from the
mix design gradation (indicated in the table above) while also remaining within the specification
gradation band. The percentage of aggregate passing any two successive sieves shall not change from
one end of the specified range to the other end.
5-03.2(3) Water
- t
62
i
9/13/2010
All water used with the slurry mixture shall be potable and free from harmful soluble salts and
contaminants.
5-03.2(4) Laboratory Testing
Sources for all materials shall be selected before to the time the materials are required for use on the
project. All samples must be taken according to previously mentioned procedures. All materials shall
be pretested in a qualified laboratory to determine.their suitability for use in slurry theoretical
asphalt content shall be determined. The laboratory shall also determine if mineral filler is required,
1 and if so,how much should be used. Test samples shall be made and tested on a Wet Track Abrasion
Machine.
The Contractor must submit the complete laboratory analysis and test report with abraded. and
unabraded slurry test samples,to the Engineer before application of the slurry seal can begin.
5-03.2(5) Stockpiling of Aggregates
Precautions shall be taken to insure that stockpiles do not become contaminated with th oversrzed rock,
clay, silt, or excessive amounts of moisture. The stockpile shall be kept in areas.that drain readily.
Segregation of the aggregate will not be permitted-
5-03.2(6) Storage
The Contractor shall provide suitable storage facilities for the asphalt emulsion. The container shall
be equipped to prevent water from entering the emulsion. Suitable heat shall be provided, if
necessary,to prevent freezing.
5-03.2(7) Sampling
The Contractor shall famish samples of materials and of the finished slurry surface during progress of
the work. The Contractor may be requested to supply test reports as additional materials arrive.
5-03.2(8) Verification
Each machine will make test strips after calibration and before construction. Test strips shall be a
portion of the project. Samples of the Slurry Seal will be taken and verification made as to mix
consistency and proportioning. Verification of the rate of application will also be made. If any of the
tests fail to meet minimum standards, additional test strips will be required until the Engineer
approves each unit. These additional test strips will be performed at no additional cost to the City.
Any unit failing to pass the tests after the third trial will not be permitted to work on the project. Test
strips must be accepted or rejected within 24 hours after application.
j5-03.3 Construction Requirements
5-03.3(1) Equipment
All equipment, tools and machines
used to perform this work shall be maintained in satisfactory
working condition at all times. Descriptive information on the slurry mixing and application
equipment shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval not less than 5 days before the work starts.
63
I
9/13/2010
5-03.3(1)A Slurry Mixing Equipment
The slurry-mixing machine shall be a continuous flow-mixing unit and shall be capable of accurately
delivering a predetermined proportion of.aggregate, water, and asphalt emulsion to the mixing
chamber and to discharge the thoroughly mixed product on a continuous basis. The aggregate shall
be prewetted immediately before mixing with the emulsion. The mixing unit of the mixing chamber
shall be capable of thoroughly blending all ingredients. No violent mixing is permitted. The mixing j
machine shall be equipped with an approved fines feeder that provides an accurate metering device or
method to introduce a predetermined proportion of mineral filler into the mixer at the same time and
location as the aggregate. The fines feeder shall be used whenever added mineral filler is a part of the
aggregate blend.
5-03.3(1)B Slurry Spreading Equipment
A mechanical type squeegee distributor shall be attached to the mixing machine. It shall be equipped
with flexible material in contact with the pavement and shall be maintained to prevent loss of slurry
from the distributor. It shall also be adjustable to ensure uniform spread. There shall be a steering
device and a flexible strike-off. The spreader box shall have an adjustable width. The box shall be
kept clean, and build-up of asphalt and aggregate on the box will not be permitted. The Engineer
shall approve the use of burlap drags or other drags. ,
5-03.3(1)C Cleaning Equipment
Power brooms,power blowers, air compressors,water flushing equipment,and hand brooms shall be
suitable for cleaning the surface and cracks of the old surface.
5-03.3(1)D Auxiliary Equipment
The Contractor shall provide suitable surface preparation equipment,traffic control equipment,hand
tools,and other support and safety equipment necessary to perform the work.
5-03.3(1)E Calibration
Each slurry-mixing unit used to perform the work shall be calibrated in the presence of the Engineer,
before construction. Documentation of previous calibration that covers the exact materials being used
may be an acceptable substitute provided they were made during the same calendar year. The
documentation shall include an individual calibration of each material at various settings that can be
related to the machine's metering device(s). No machine will be allowed to work on the project until
calibration has been completed and accepted-
5-03.3(2) Surface Preparation
Immediately before applying the slurry,the surface shall be cleaned of all loose material, silt spots, i
vegetation,and other objectionable material. Any standard cleaning method to clean pavements is
acceptable,except water flushing which is not permitted in areas where there are numerous cracks
present in the pavement surface. The Engineer shall give final approval of the surface preparation.
5-03.3(3) Composition and Rate of Application of the Slurry Mix
The amount of halt emulsion to be blended with the aggregate shall be as determined b the
asphalt Y
laboratory report after final adjustment in the field. A minimum amount of water shall be added as
64
I
i9/13/2010
necessary to obtain a fluid and homogeneous mixture. The rate of application shall be at least 8
pounds per square yard but not greater than 12 pounds per square yard.
Adjustment may be required during construction based on field conditions. The Engineer will give
final approval for all such adjustments.
5-03.3(4) Weather Limitations
The slurry seal surface shall not be applied if either the pavement or air temperatures are 55 degrees F
or below and falling,but may be applied when both the air and pavement temperatures are 45 degrees
F or above and rising. No slurry seal shall be applied when there is the possibility of freezing
temperatures at the project location within 24 hours after application. The mixture should not be
applied if high relative humidity prolongs curing beyond a reasonable time.
5-03.3(5) Traffic Control
tThe Contractor is responsible for all Traffic Control. Suitable methods such as barricades, flaggers,
pilot cars, etc., shall be used to protect the uncured slurry surface from all types of traffic. Any
damage to the uncured slurry will be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Engineer shall give
final approval to the traffic control methods used.
5-03.3(6) Application of Slurry Surfaces
j5-03.3(6)A General
The surface may be prewetted by fogging ahead of the slung box if required by local conditions.
Water used in prewetting the surface shall be applied at a rate so that the entire surface is damp with
no apparent flowing water in front of the slurry box_ The slurry mixture shall be of the desired
consistency when deposited on the surface and no additional elements shall be added. Total time of
mixing shall not exceed 4 minutes. A sufficient amount of slurry shall be carried in all parts of the
spreader at all times so that complete coverage is obtained No lumping, balling or unmixed
aggregate shall be permitted If the coarse aggregate settles to the bottom of the mix, the slurry will
be removed from the pavement. No excessive breaking of the emulsion will be allowed in the
spreader box. No streaks, such as those caused by oversized aggregate, will be left in the finished
pavement.
5-03.3(6)B Joints
Neither excessive build-up nor unsightly appearance shall be permitted on longitudinal or transverse
joints.
5-03.3(6)C Hand Work
Approved squeegees shall be used to spread slurry in areas not accessible to the slurry mixer. If
necessary,the area to be handworked shall be lightly dampened prior to mix placement. Care shall be
exercised so that no unsightly appearance results from handwork.
5-03.3(6)D Curing
ITreated areas will be allowed to cure until the Engineer gmee permits their opening to traffic.
65
i
9/13/2010
The cured surface should be rolled by a five-ton roller_ The paved area should be subjected to a ,
minimum of five coverages. If a pneumatic roller is used, it should be operated at a tire pressure of
50.pounds per square inch.
5-03.3(6)E Protection of Existing Monuments and Utility Covers
The Contractor shall protect all existing survey monuments and utility covers during the resurfacing
operation by placing a paper plate or similar material over them. Following the resurfacing operation,
paper plates or similar materials shall then be removed to leave the monuments clean and exposed.
5-03A Payment
"Slurry Seal Surface Treatment" shall be included in the lump sum bid price and shall include full
compensation for all Work described herein and shown in the Plans.
5-04 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
5-04.2 Materials
Section 5-04.2 is revised and supplemented as follows:
Delete the second and fourth paragraphs of this section.
The base course shall be untreated crushed surfacing.
Asphalt concrete shall meet the grading requirements for the specified mix.
Temporary patch shall be cold or hot mix-
5-04.3 Construction Requirements l
Section 5-04.3 is supplemented as follows:
Shoulder Restoration j
The existing surfacing of disturbed asphalt shoulders shall be removed to a minimum depth of 6
inches below original street grade to provide for placement of the new subgrade and paving. The
subgrade shall be constructed of I%inch minus crushed surfacing base course placed to a compacted
thickness of 2y2 inches,followed by 5/8-inch minus crushed surfacing top course placed to a
compacted thickness of 1'/2 inches. BMA Class %2"shall then be placed and compacted in 2-inch lifts
up to a maximum 4-mch thickness to match existing pavement thickness. Minimum thickness shall
be 2 inches. The shoulder shall be replaced to the existing fog line in areas where the existing asphalt
shoulder is seriously disturbed,or at the Engineer's discretion.
Asphalt Concrete Patching and Overlay
The Contractor shall maintain temporary hot mix asphalt patches daily during construction to the
satisfaction of the governing road agency and the Engineer until said patch is replaced with a
permanent hot patch. The permanent hot mix asphalt patch shall be placed and sealed with paving
grade asphalt within 30 calendar days.
Private Driveways
Where a private driveway is damaged by either construction of the project or by the Contractor's use
and activity on the road,it shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the property owner,the City,and to
its original condition or better. Damaged asphalt-concrete driveways shall be replaced by saw cutting
to a straight line and replacing a full width section. Damaged cement-concrete driveways shall be
removed to the nearest joint(real or dummy)and replaced with a full width section. Damaged gravel
66
r
9/13/2010
driveways shall have crushed surfacing placed and compacted to a minimum depth of 4 inches.
Curbs,Gutters and Sidewalks
tExisting curbs,gutters,and sidewalks damaged by construction of the project or the Contractor's use
and activity,shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the property owner,the City,and to its original
condition or better.
5-04.3(5) Conditioning the Existing Surface
Section 5-04.3(5)is supplemented as follows:
The Contractor shall maintain existing surface contour during patching,unless otherwise instructed
by the City Engineer or Inspector.
j5-04.3(5)A Preparation of Existing Surface
Section 5-04.3(5)A is supplemented as follows:
The Contractor shall provide his own mechanical sweeping equipment. The sweeper will be on the
project prior to the start of paving,to insure the streets to be paved are clean before the tack coat is
applied. The sweeper will keep the streets clean ahead of the paving machine and clean the streets
behind the empty trucks that have dumped their loads into the paving machine. The sweeper must
sweep all streets made dirty by the Contractor's equipment. If the paving machine is"walked"from
one site to another,the sweeper must sweep up behind paving machine. The sweeper shall not leave
the overlay site until given permission by the City's inspector.
All utilities shall be painted with a biodegradable"soap"to prevent the tack and ACP from sticking to
the.lids. Diesel will not be used_ After the application of soap,catch basins must be covered to
prevent tack and ACP from getting into catch basins.
Preparation of existing surface shall be done as outlined in this Section and a tack coat shall be
applied at the rate of 0.02 to 0.08 gallons per square yard. Payment for preparation of the surface and
application of the tack coat shall be considered incidental to the paving and no separate payment shall
be made.
The Contractor shall locate all utilities for access immediately after any paving and mark the location
by means of painting a circle around the location and scooping a portion of asphalt 4"-6"in diameter
and the depth of the overlay from the center of the utility location.
The Contractor shall locate and completely expose gas and water valves for access immediately after
final rolling.
The day following the start of application ofACP,utility adjustments must begin. The Contractor
shall have an adjustment crew adjusting utilities every workable working day until adjustments are
complete.
During the adjustment of any utility,existing concrete bricks or grouting material that has been
broken or cracked shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense.
Utility adjustments must be completed within 15 working days after overlay is complete,and within
the specified working days.
Payment for utility adjustments includes all labor,materials,tools,and equipment necessary to
67
1
9/13/2010
complete the adjustments and is incidental to pay items for Asphalt Patch and Asphalt Overlay.
5-04.3(7)A Mix Design
Item 2 is deleted and replaced with:
2. Nonstatistical HMA Evaluation. The Contractor shall submit a certification that the mix
design submitted meets the requirements of Sections 9-03.8(2)and 9-03.8(6). The
Contractor must submit the mix design using DOT Form.350-042 ER Verification of the
mix design by the Contracting Agency is not needed. The Project Engineer will determine
anti-strip requirements for the HMA.
The mix design will be the initial job mix formula(JMF)for the class of mix. Any additional
adjustments to the JMF will require the approval of the Project Engineer and may be made
per Section 9-03.8(7).
5-04.3(8)A Acceptance Sampling and Testing—HMA Mixture
Item 1 is deleted and replaced with:
(*****)
1. General. Acceptance of HMA shall be as provided under nonstatistical or commercial
evaluation.
Nonstatistical evaluation will be used for the acceptance of HMA.
Commercial evaluation will be used for Commercial HMA,and for other classes of HMA in
the following applications:sidewalks,road approaches,ditches,slopes,paths,trails,gores,
prelevel,and pavement repair. Other nonstructural applications as approved by the Project
Engineer_Sampling and testing of HMA accepted by commercial evaluation will be at the
option of the Engineer. The proposal quantity of HMA that is accepted by commercial
evaluation will be excluded from the quantities used in the determination of nonstatistical
evaluation.
Item 7 is deleted
5-04.3(10)B Control
Replace Section 5-04.3(10)B with the following:
(*****)
Sub-base shall be compacted to 95%of the maximum density by the Modified Proctor Test Method,
ASTM D 1557. Compact asphalt concrete patch and paving to 95%of maximum compaction.
5-04.5 Payment
5-04.5(1)A Price Adjustments for Quality of HMA Mixture
Section 1s deleted and replaced with:
(*****)
Statistical analysis of quality of gradation and asphalt content will be performed based on
Section 1-06.2 using the following price adjustment factors:
Table of Price Adjustment Factors
Constituent Factor"f"
All aggregate passing: I %2", 1",3/4", %Z",3/8"and No.4 sieves 2
All aggregate passing No.8,No 16,No.30,No.50,No. 100 3
68
9/13/2010
All aggregate passing No.200 sieve 20
Asphalt binder 52
A pay factor will be calculated for sieves listed in Section 9-03.8(7)for the class of HMA and for the
asphalt binder.
1, Nonstatistical Evaluation. Each lot of HMA produced under Nonstatistical Evaluation and
having all constituents falling within the tolerance limits of the job mix formula shall be
accepted at the unit contract price with no further evaluation. When one or more constituents
fall outside the nonstatistical acceptance tolerance limits in Section 9-03.8(7),the lot shall be
evaluated in accordance with Section 1-06.2 to determine the appropriate CPF. The
nonstatistical tolerance limits will be used in the calculation of the CPF and the maximum
CPF shall be 1.00. When less than three sublots exist,backup samples of the existing sublots
or samples from the street shall be tested to provide a minimum of three sets of results for
evaluation.
2. Commercial Evaluation. If sampled and tested,HMA produced under Commercial
Evaluation and having all constituents falling within the tolerance limits of the job mix
formula shall be accepted at the unit contract price with no further evaluation. When one or
more constituents fall outside the commercial acceptance tolerance limits in Section 9-
03.8('7),the lot shall be evaluated to determine the appropriate CPF The commercial
tolerance limits will be used in the calculation of the CPF and the maximum CPF shall be
1.00. When less than three sublots exist,backup samples of the existing sublots or samples
from the street shall be tested to provide a minimum of three sets of results for evaluation.
For each lot of HMA produced under Nonstatistical or Commercial Evaluation when the
calculated CPF is less than 1.00, a Nonconforming Mix factor(NCFM) will be determined.
THE NCFM equals the algebraic difference of CPF minus 1.00 multiplied by 60 percent.
The Job Mix Compliance Price Adjustment will be calculated as the product of the NCMF,
the quantity of HMA in the lot in tons,and the unit contract price per ton of the mix.
If a constituent is not measured in accordance with these Specifications,its individual pay factor will
be considered 1.00 in calculating the composite pay factor.
5-04.5(1)H Price Adjustments for Quatity of HMA Compaction
Section is deleted and replaced with:
The maximum CPF of a compaction lot is 1.00
For each compaction lot of HMA when the CPF is less than 1.00,a Nonconforming Compaction
Factor(NCCF)will be determined. THE NCCF equals the algebraic difference of CPF minus 1.00
multiplied by 40 percent The Compaction Price Adjustment will be calculated as the product of the
NCFF,the quantity of HMA in the lot in tons and the unit contract price per ton of the mix.
5-06 TEMPORARY RESTORATION IN PAVEMENT AREA
Section 5-06 is new Section with subsections:
5-06.1 Description
Pavement areas that have been removed by construction activities must be restored by the Contractor
prior to the end of each working period,prior to use by vehicular traffic. Within paved streets,the
I
69
9/13/2010
Contractor may use temporary pavement to allow vehicular traffic to travel over the construction j
areas. Temporary pavement shall be placed around trench plates or others devices used to cover
construction activities in a manner that provides a smooth and safe transition between surfaces.
5-06.2 Materials
The asphalt payement for temporary patches shall be 2"of a hot mix asphalt composition determined
by the Contractor to provide a product suitable for the intended application. The Contractor shall not
use materials that are a safety or health hazard.
Temporary pavement material that does not form a consolidated surface after compaction shall be
considered unsuitable and shall be removed from the site. Unsuitable temporary pavement shall be
disposed of offsite.
5-06.3 Construction Requirements
The Contractor shall maintain temporary hot mix asphalt patches daily during to the satisfaction of
the governing road agency and the Engineer until said patch is replaced with permanent hot patch.
The completed pavement shall be free from ridges,ruts,bumps,depressions,objectionable marks,or.
other irregularities. The permanent hot mix asphalt patch shall be placed and sealed with a paving
asphalt within 30 calendar days.
The Contractor shall immediately repair,patch,or remove any temporary pavement that does not
provide a flat transition between existing pavement areas.
All temporary asphalt pavement shall be removed from the site by the end of the project and shall not
be used as permanent asphalt pavement or subgrade material.
7-01 DRAINS
7-01.2 Materials
The second paragraph of Section 7-012 is revised as follows:
Drain pipes may be concrete, zinc.coated (galvanized) corrugated iron with Asphalt Treatment 1,
aluminum coated (aluminized) corrugated iron with Asphalt Treatment 1, zinc coated (galvanized)
steel with Asphalt Treatment 1, corrugated aluminum alloy,polyvinyl chloride (PVC), or corrugated
polyethylene(PE)at the option of the Contractor unless the Plans specify the type to be used-
7-01.3 Construction Requirements
Section 7-01.3 is revised as follows:
The second paragraph is revised as follows:
PVC drainpipe shall be jointed with a bell and spigot joint using a flexible elastomeric seal as
described in Section 9-04.8. The bell shall be laid upstream PE or ABS drainpipe shall be jointed
with snap-on, screw-on, or wraparound coupling bands as recommended by the manufacturer of the
tubing.
The sixth paragraph is revised as follows:
PVC under drain pipe shall be jointed using either the flexible elastomeric seal as described in
Section 9-04.8 or solvent cement as described in Section 9-04.9,at the option of the Contractor unless
otherwise specified in the Plans. The bell shall be laid upstream. PE or ABS drainage tubing under
drain pipe shall be jointed with snap-on, screw-on, or wraparound coupling bands, as recommended
by the manufacturer of the tubing.
70
9113/2010
i7-01.4 Measurement
Section 7 701.4 is supplemented adding the following:
When the Contract does not include"Structure Excavation Class B" or"Structure Excavation Class B
Including Haul" as a pay item all costs associated with these items shall be included in other contract
pay items.
7-02 CULVERTS
7-02.2 Materials
The second paragraph of Section 7-02.2 is revised and supplemented as follows:
Where steel or aluminum are referred to in this section in regard to a kind of culvert pipe, pipe arch,
or end sections, it shall be understood that steel is zinc coated(galvanized) with Asphalt Treatment I
or aluminum coated (aluminized) corrugated iron or steel, and aluminum is corrugated aluminum
alloy as specified in Sections 9-05.4 and 9-05.5. Where plain or reinforced concrete, steel, or
aluminum are referred to in Section 7-02 it shall be understood that reference is also made to PVC.
7-04 STORM SEWERS
7-04.2 Materials
The second paragraph of Section 7-042 is revised as follows:
Where steel or aluminum are referred to in this section in regard to a kind of storm sewer pipe,it shall
be understood that steel is zinc coated (galvanized),Asphalt Treatment I Coated, corrugated iron or
steel and aluminum is corrugated aluminum alloy as specified in Sections 9-05.4 and 9-05.5.
The Contractor shall require pipe suppliers to famish certificates signed by their authorized
representative, stating the Specifications to which the materials or products were manufactured. The
Contractor shall provide 2 copies of these certifications to the Engineer for approval. Certificates
showing nonconformance with the Contract shall be sufficient evidence for rejection.
Approval of certificates shall be considered only tentative acceptance of the materials an
Y ep d
products, and such action by the Engineer will not relieve the Contractor of his/her responslbility to
perform field tests and to replace or repair faulty materials, equipment, and/or workmanship and the
Contractor's own expense.
7-04.4 Measurement
i The first paragraph of Section 7-04.4 is revised as follows:
The length of storm sewer pipe will be the number of linear feet of completed installation measured
along the invert and will include the length through elbows, tees, and fittings. The number of linear
feet will be measured from the center of manhole or from the center of catch basin to center of catch
basins and similar type structures.
7-04.5 Payment
The second and third paragraphs of Section 7-04.5 are revised as follows:
The unit contract price per linear foot for storm sewer pipe of the kind and size specified shall be full
pay for all Work to.complete the installation, including adjustment of inverts to manholes. When no
bid item "Gravel Backfill for Pipe Bedding" is included in the Schedule of Prices, pipe bedding, as
shown in the Standard Plans, shall be considered incidental to the pipe and no additional payment
shall be made.
Testing of storm sewer pipe, if required by the Engineer, shall be considered incidental to and
included in the unit contract prices for other items.
71
9/13/2010 t
Cost of connecting to structures shall be included in the various unit contract prices for storm
i
gPPe
. . P
sewer pipe,and no additional compensation will be allowed.
Abandonment and plugging of pipe shall be included in the lump sum contract price for"Removal of
Structure and Obstruction". No separate payment will be made.
7-05 MANHOLES,INLETS,AND CATCH BASINS j
7-05.3 Construction Requirements
Section 7-05.3 is supplemented by adding the following.
All manholes shall have eccentric cones and shall have ladders.
Sanitary sewer pipe to manhole connections shall be"Kor-n-Seal"boot or approved equal.
7-05.3(1) Adjusting Manholes and Catch Basins to Grade
Section 7-05.3(1)is replaced with:
Where shown in the Plans or where directed by the Engineer,the existing manholes, catch basins, or
inlets shall be adjusted to the grade as staked or otherwise designated by the Engineer.
The existing cast iron ring and cover on manholes and the catch basin frame and grate shall first be
removed and thoroughly cleaned for reinstalling at the new elevation. From that point, the existing
structure shall be raised or lowered to the required elevation.
The Contractor shall construct manholes so as to provide adjustment space for setting cover and
casting to a finished grade as shown on the Construction Plans. Manhole ring and covers shall be
adjusted to the finished elevations per standard detail 400.1, prior to final acceptance of the Work.
Manholes in unimproved areas shall be adjusted.to 6"above grade.
In unpaved streets:manholes,catch basins,and similar structures in areas to be surfaced with crushed
rock or gravel shall be constructed to a point approximately eight inches below the subgrade and
covered with a temporary wood cover. Existing manholes shall be cut off and covered in a similar
manner. The Contractor shall carefully reference each manhole so that they may be easily found upon
completion of the street Work After placing the gravel or crushed stone surfacing,the manholes and
manhole castings shall be constructed to the finished grade of the roadway surface. Excavation
necessary for bringing manholes to grade shall center about the manhole and be held to the minimum
area necessary. At the completion of the manhole adjustment, the void around the manhole shall be
backfilled with materials which result in the section required on the typical roadway section, and be
thoroughly compacted-
In cement concrete pavement:manholes,catch basins,and similar structures shall be constructed and
adjusted in the same manner as outlined above except that the final adjustment shall be made and cast
iron frame be set after forms have been placed and checked In placing the concrete pavement,
extreme care shall be taken not to alter the position of the casting in'any way.
In asphalt concrete pavement: manholes shall not be adjusted until the pavement is completed, at
which time the center of each manhole shall be carefully relocated from references previously
established by the Contractor. The pavement shall be cut in a restricted area and base material be
removed to permit removal of the cover. The manhole shall then be brought to proper grade utilizing
the same methods of construction as for the manhole itself. The cast iron frame shall be placed on the
concrete blocks and wedged up to the desired grade.The asphalt concrete pavement shall be cut and
removed to a neat circle,the diameter of which shall be equal to the outside diameter of the cast iron
frame plus two feet. The base materials and crushed rock shall be removed and Class 3000 or
Commercial Portland Cement Concrete shall be placed so that the entire volume of the excavation is
replaced up to but not to exceed 2 inches of the finished pavement surface. On the day following
. 72
9113/2010
placement of the concrete, the edge of the asphalt concrete pavement, and the outer edge of the
casting shall be painted with hot asphalt cement.Asphalt Class G concrete shall then be placed and
compacted with hand tampers and a patching roller. The complete patch shall match the existing
paved surface for texture, density, and uniformity of grade. The joint between the patch and the
existing pavement shall then be carefully painted with hot asphalt cement or asphalt emulsion and
shall be immediately covered with dry paving sand before the asphalt cement solidifies. The inside
throat of the manhole shall be thoroughly mortared and plastered.
Adjustment of inlets: The final alignment and grade of cast iron frames for new and old inlets to be
adjusted to grade will be established from the forms or adjacent pavement surfaces. The final
adjustment of the top of the inlet will be performed in similar.manner to the above for manholes. On
j asphalt concrete paving projects using curb and gutter section, that portion of the cast iron frame not
embedded in the gutter section shall be solidly embedded in concrete also. The concrete shall extend
a minimum of six inches beyond the edge of the casting and shall be left 2 inches below the top of the
frame so that the wearing course of asphalt concrete pavement will butt the cast iron frame. The
existing concrete pavement and edge of the casting shall be painted with hot asphalt cement.
Adjustments in the inlet structure shall be constructed in the same manner and of the same material as
that required for new inlets.The inside of the inlets shall be mortared and plastered.
Monuments and cast iron frame and cover: monuments and monument castings shall be adjusted to
grade in the same manner as for manholes.
Valve box castings: adjustments of valve box castings shall be made in the same manner as for
manholes.
7-05.3(2) Abandon Existing Manholes
Section 7-05.3(2)is revised as follows:
(******)
Where it is required that an existing manhole be abandoned, the structure shall be broken down to a
depth of at least 4 feet below the revised surface elevation,all connections plugged,the manhole base
shall be fractured to prevent standing water, and the manhole filled with sand and compacted to
90 percent density as specified in Section 2-03.3(14)C. Debris resulting from breaking the upper part
of the manhole may be mixed with the sand subject to the approval of the Engineer. The ring and
cover shall be salvaged and all other surplus material disposed of
7-05.3(2)A Abandon Existing Sanitary Sewer Pipes
Section 7-05.3(2)A is a new section_
Where it is required that an existing sanitary sewer pipe be abandoned(or portions of pipe installed as
part of this project which are to be abandoned as shown on the Plans),both ends of the abandoned
pipe and all lateral connections to the pipe shall be plugged with 3,000 psi cement concrete and the
pipe shall be filled with cement-based grout.
A cement-based grout shall be used to fill the void of the abandoned sewer pipe. The grouting
material must have a strength of at least 100 psi and shall have flow characteristics appropriate for
filling a sanitary sewer. The grout mix designed and method of installation shall be approved by the
1 Engineer prior to beginning the operation(See Section 9-03.22).
7-05.3(3) Connections to Existing Manholes
Section 7-05.3(3)is supplemented by adding the following:
Where shown on the Plans, new drain pipes shall be connected to existing line, catch basin, curb
inlets and/or manholes. The Contractor shall be required to core drill into the structure, shape the new
pipe to fit and re-grout the opening in a workmanlike manner. Where directed by the Engineer or
where shown on the Plans,additional structure channeling will be required.
Connections to existing sanitary sewer manholes shall be core drilled. Couplings shall be equal to
73
9/13/2010
"Kor-n-Seal"boots. Existing sanitary sewer manholes shall be cleaned,repaired,and re-channeled as
necessary to match the new pipe configuration and as shown on the Construction Plans.
A "connection to existing" item will be allowed at any connection of a new line to an existing
structure, or the connection of a new structure to a existing line. No"connection to existing" will be
accepted at the location of new installation,relocation and adjustment of line manholes, catch basins,
or curb inlets. .
Any damage to existing pipe or structure that is to remain in place resulting from the Contractor's
operations shall be repaired or replaced at her/his own expense.
The unit bid price per each shall be full compensation for all labor,materials and equipment required. t
- 7-05.3(5) Manhole Coatings
Section 7-05.5 is an added new section:
All new sanitary sewer manholes shall be coated as specified below. The following coating system
Specifications shall be used for coating (sealing) all interior concrete surfaces of sanitary sewer
manholes.
Coating Material: High Solids Urethane
Surfaces: Concrete
Surface Preparation: In accordance with SSPC SP-7
(Sweep of brush off blast)
Application: Shop/Field
The drying time between coats shall not exceed 24 hours in any case
System Thickness: 6.0 mils dry film
Coatings: Primer. One coat of Wasser MC-Aroshield(2.0 mils DFT)
Finish:Two or more coats of Wasser MC-Aroshield(min.4.0 mils DFT)
Color: White
7-05A Measurement
Section 7-05.4 is revised and supplemented as follows:
Manholes will be measured per each. Measurement of manhole heights for payment purposes will be
the distance from finished rim elevation to the invert of the lowest outlet pipe.
Adjustments of new structures and miscellaneous items such as valve boxes shall be considered
incidental to the unit contract price of the new item and no further compensation shall be made.
Connection to existing pipes and structures shall be measured per each.
7-05.5 Payment .
Section 7-05.5 is supplemented as follows:
"Adjust Existing ,"per each.
The unit contract price per each for"Adjust Existing shall be fill pay for all costs necessary to
make the adjustment including restoration of adjacent areas in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
If no bid item for Structure Excavation Class A or Structure Excavation Class B is included in the
schedule of prices then the Work will be considered incidental and its cost should be included in the
cost of the pipe.
"Connect to Existing Catch Basin,"per each-
"Connect Structure to existing pipe,"per each.
74
9/13/2010
7-08 GENERAL PIPE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
7-08.3 Construction Requirements
7-08.3(1)C Bedding the Pipe
Section 7-08.3(1)C is supplemented by adding the following:
(******)
Pipe bedding for PVC sewer pipe shall.consist of clean,granular pea gravel consistent with Section 9-
03.12(3). It shall be placed to a depth of 6"over and 6"under the exterior walls of the pipe.
Hand compaction of the bedding materials under the pipe haunches will be required. Hand
i compaction shall be accomplished by using a suitable tamping tool to firmly tamp bedding material
under the haunches of the pipe. Care shall be taken to avoid displacement of the pipe during the
compaction effort-
Pip e bedding shall be considered incidental to the pipe and no fiuther compensation shall be made.
7-08.3(1)D Pipe Foundation
Section 7-08.3(1)D is a new section:
(******)
Pipe foundation in poor soil: When soft or unstable material is encountered at the subgrade which,in
the opinion of the Engineer,will not uniformly support the pipe,such material shall be excavated to
an additional depth as required by the Engineer and backfilled with foundation gravel material placed
in maximum 12-inch lifts. Foundation gravel shall be ballast and conform to the requirements of
Section 9-03.9(1)of the Standard Specifications.
Corrections faulty grade: Excess excavation below grade shall be backfilled with foundation gravel
as specified above and thoroughly compacted to the required grade line.
7-08.3(2)A Survey Line and Grade
Section 7-08.3(2)A is replaced with:
Survey line and grade control shall be provided in accordance with Sections 1-05.4, 1-05.5 and 1-11
in a manner consistent with accepted practices.
The Contractor shall transfer line and grade into the trench where they shall be carved by means of a
laser beam Any other procedure shall have the written approval of the Engineer.
7-08.3(2)B Pipe Laying—General
Section 7-08.3(2)B is supplemented by adding the following:
Checking of the invert elevation of the pipe may be made by calculations from measurements on the
top of the pipe,or by looking for ponding of 1/2"or less,which indicates a satisfactory condition. At
manholes, when the downstream pipe(s) is of a larger size, pipe(s) shall be laid by matching the
(eight-tenths)flow elevation,unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
All pipe, fittings, etc. shall be carefully handled and protected against damage, impact shocks, and
free fall. All pipe handling equipment shall be acceptable to the Engineer. Pipe shall not be placed
directly on rough ground but shall be supported in a manner,which will protect the pipe against injury
whenever stored at the trench site or elsewhere. No pipe shall be installed where the lining or coating
show defects that may be harmful as determined by the Engineer. Such damaged lining or coating
shall be repaired,or a new undamaged pipe shall be furnished and installed.
The Contractor shall inspect each pipe and fitting prior to installation to insure that there are not
damaged portions of the pipe. Any defective,damaged,or unsound pipe shall be repaired or replaced.
All foreign matter or dirt shall be removed from the interior of the pipe before lowering into position
in the trench. Pipe shall be kept clean during and after laying. All openings in the pipeline shall be
75
9/13/2010
closed with watertight expandable type sewer plugs at the end of each day's operation, or whenever
the pipe openings are left unattended. The use of burlap,wood,or other similar temporary plugs will
not be permitted-
Where necessary to raise or lower the pipe due to unforeseen obstructions or other causes, the
Engineer may change the alignment and/or the grades. Except for short runs,which may be permitted
by the Engineer,pipes shall be laid uphill on grades that exceed 10 percent. Pipe,which is laid on a
downhill grade, shall be blocked and held in place until sufficient support is furnished by the
following pipe to prevent movement.
Unless otherwise required, all pipe shall be laid straight between the changes in alignment, and at
uniform grade between changes in grade. For concrete pipes with elliptical reinforcement, the pipe
shall be placed with the minor axis of the reinforcement in a vertical position.
Immediately after the pipe joints have been made, proper gasket placement shall be checked with a
feeler gage as approved by the pipe manufacturer to verify proper gasket placement.
7-08.3(2)E Rubber Gasketed Joints
Section 7-08.3(2)E is supplemented as follows:
Care shall be taken by the Contractor to avoid over pushing the pipe and damaging the pipe or joint
system. Any damaged pipe shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense..
7-08.3(2)H Sewer Line Connections
Section 7-08.3(2)H is supplemented by adding the following:
All connections not occurring at a manhole or catch basin shall be done utilizing pre-manufactured
tee connectors or pipe sections approved by the Engineer. Any other method or materials proposed
for use in making connections shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, all connections of lateral sewers to existing mains shall
be made through a cast iron saddle secured to the sewer main with stainless steel bands. When the
existing main is constructed of PVC, plain or reinforced concrete, cast or ductile iron pipe, the
existing main shall be core drilled. When the existing main is constructed of vitrified clay, the main
shall be re-sectioned with flexible couplings,Fernco or approved equal.
Connections (unless booted connections have been provided for)to existing concrete manholes shall
be per Section 7-05.3(3).
7-08.3(2)) Placing PVC Pipe
Section 7-08.3(2))is an added new section:
In the trench,prepared as specified in Section 7-02.3(1)PVC pipe shall be laid beginning at the lower
end, with the bell end upgrade. Pea gravel will be used as the bedding material and extend from 6"
below the bottom of the pipe to 6" above the top of the pipe. When it is necessary to connect to a
structure with a mudded joint a rubber gasketed concrete adapter-collar will be used at the point of
connection.
7-08.3(3)A Backfilling Sanitary Sewer Trenches
Section 7-08.3(3)A is a new section supplementing 7-08.3(3)
To the maximum extent available,suitable material obtained from trench excavation shall be used for
trench backfill. All material placed as trench backfill shall be free from rocks or stones larger than 6
inches in their greatest dimension,brush,stumps,logs,roots,debris,and organic or other deleterious
materials. No stones or rock shall be placed in the upper three feet of trench backfilL. Rock or stones
within the allowable size limit incorporated in the remainder of fills shall be distributed so that they
do not congregate or interfere with proper compaction.
76
9/13/2010
If the native material i n
s considered by the Engineer as unsuitable for backfill,or where unsuitable
material is requested by the Engineer to be removed or over-excavated from trench excavations,then
Bank Run Gravel for Trench Backfill Sewer material conforming to the requirements of Section 9-
03.19 shall be used All native or imported backfill material shall be compacted to 95%of maximum
dry density per ASTM D 1557 unless otherwise specified herein or on the Plans.
Backfill within paved areas shall be compacted to at least 95 percent of maximum drY density as ,
determined by the modified proctor compaction test,ASTM D1557. This includes the foundation,
backfill,and base course materials. Maximum lift thickness of backfill shall not exceed 24 inches
between the top of the bedding and 4 feet below grade and 12 inches from 4 feet below grade to the
base of the subgrade. The Engineer may be on-site to collect soil samples and to test compaction_
The Contractor shall provide site access at all times for compaction testing and sample collection.
Areas of the trench which fail to meet the compaction requirements shall be removed and replace and
re-compacted at the Contractor's expense.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any settlement of backfill,sub-base,and pavement that may
occur during the period stipulated in the Contract conditions. All repairs necessary due to settlement
shall be made by the Contractor at his expense.
Backfill in unimproved areas shall be compacted to at least 90 percent of maximum density as
Pe �'Y tY
determined by the modified proctor compaction test, ASTM D 1557.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the disposal of any excess excavated material.
7-08.4 Measurement
i The first paragraph of Section 7-08.4 is revised as follows:
Gravel backfill for foundations, or gravel backfill for pipe zone bedding when used for foundations,
shall be measured by the cubic yard,including haul,as specified in 2-09,or by the ton.
7-08.5 Payment
Section 7-08.5 is replaced with:
Payment will be made in accordance with Section 1-04.1 for each of the following bid items that are
included in the proposal:
"Gravel Backfill for Foundations Class ",per cubic yard or ton.
"Gravel Backfill for Pipe Zone Bedding",per cubic yard or ton.
All costs associated with furnishing and installing bedding and backfill material within the pipe zone
in the installation of culvert, storm sewer, and sanitary sewer pipes shall be included in the unit
contract price for the type and size of pipe'installed-
"Plugging Existing Pipe",per each.
"Commercial Concrete",per cubic yard.
"Structure Excavation Class B",per cubic yard
"Structure Excavation Class B Incl.Haul",per cubic yard.
Unless specifically identified and provided as separate items, structure excavation, dewatering and
backfilling shall be incidental to pipe installation and no finther compensation shall be made.
All costs in jointing dissimilar pipe with a coupling or concrete collar shall be included in the unit
contract price per foot for the size and type of pipe being jointed
"Shoring or Extra Excavation Class B",per square foot.
If this pay item is not in the Contract,then it shall be incidental.
7-09 PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR WATER MAINS
77
9/13/2010
7-09.3(15)A Ductile Iron Pipe
The first paragraph of Section 7-09.3(15)A is revised as follows:
Long radius(,500 feet or more)curves,either horizontal or vertical,may be laid with standard pipe by
deflecting the joints. If the pipe is shown curved in the Plans and no special fittings are shown, the
Contractor can assume that the curves can be made by deflecting the points with standard lengths of
pipe. If shorter lengths are required, the Plans will indicate maximum lengths that can be used. The
amount of deflection at each pipe joint when pipe is laid on a horizontal or vertical curve shall not
exceed one half of the manufacturer's printed recommended deflections.
7-09.3(15)B Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC) Pipe(4 inches and Over)
Section 7-09.3(15)B is supplemented as follows:
Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC)Pipe shall not be used for water mains and appurtenances.
7-09.3(17) Laying Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings with Polyethylene Encasement
The title and text of section 7-093(17)has been revised as follows:
The Contractor shall lay ductile iron pipe with a polyethylene encasement. Pipe and polyethylene
encasement shall be installed in accordance with AW WA C 105. The polyethylene encasement shall
also be installed on all appurtenances,such as pipe laterals,couplings, fittings,and valves,with 8-mil
polyethylene plastic in accordance with Section 4-5 of ANSI 21.5 or AWWA C 105_
The polyethylene wrap shall be tube type and black color. Any damage that occurs to the wrap shall
be repaired in accordance with ANSUAWWA C105/A21.5-93.
Installation of the polyethylene encasement shall be considered incidental to the installation of the
pipe and no additional payment shall be allowed.
7-09.3(19)A Connections to Existing Mains
Section 7-093(19)A is revised and supplemented as follows:
The Contractor may be required to perform the connection during times other than normal working
hours. The Contractor shall not operate any valves on the existing system. Water system personnel
will operate all valves on the existing system for the Contractor when r equ it e
d.
No Work shall be performed on the connections unless a representative of the water department is
present to inspect the Work.
When not stated otherwise in the special provisions or on the plans, all connections to existing water
mains will be done by City forces as provided below:
City Installed Connections:
Connections to existing piping and tie-ins are indicated on the drawings. The Contractor must verify
all existing piping,dimensions,and elevations to assure proper fit.
Connections to the existing water main shall not be made without first making the necessary
arrangements with the Engineer in advance.
A two-week advance notice shall be required for each connection which requires a cutting of the
existing water mains or a shut-down of the existing water mains. The City reserves the right to re-
schedule the connection if the Work area is not ready at the scheduled time for the connection.
Work shall not be started until all the materials, equipment and labor necessary to properly complete
the Work are assembled on site.
The Contractor shall provide all saw-cutting,removal and disposal of existing surface improvements,
excavation, haul and disposal of unsuitable materials, shoring, de-watering, foundation material, at
78
9/13/2010
the connection areas before the scheduled time for the connection by the City. The Contractor shall
provide all materials necessary to install all connections as indicated on the construction plans,
including but not limited to the required fittings,couplings,pipe spools,shackle materials to complete
the connections. The Contractor shall provide and install concrete blocking, polywrap the piping at
the connections, backfill and surface restoration at the locations shown on the plans for the
connections to the existing water mains.
The City will cut the existing main and assemble all materials.
7-09.3(21) Concrete Thrust Blocking and Dead-Man Block
Section 7-09.3(21)has been supplemented by adding the following:
Provide concrete blocking at all hydrants, fittings and horizontal or vertical angle points. Conform to
the City of Renton Standard Details for general blocking,and vertical blocks herein. All fittings to be
blocked shall be wrapped with 8-mil polyethylene plastic. Concrete blocking shall be properly
formed with plywood or other acceptable forming materials and shall not be.poured around joints.
The forms shall be stripped prior to backfilling. Joint restraint(shackle rods), where required, shall
be installed in accordance with Section 7-11.3(15).
Provide concrete dead-man blocks at locations shown on the plans_ The dead-man block shall include
reinforcing steels,shackle rods,installation and removal of formwork.
Blocking shall be commercial concrete(hand-mixed concrete is not allowed)and poured in place.
7-09.3(23) Hydrostatic Pressure Test
Section 7-09.3(23)is supplemented and revised as follows:
A hydrant meter and a backflow prevention device will be used when drawing water from the City
system These may be obtained from the City..by completing the required forms and making the
required security deposits. There will be a charge for the water used. Before applying the specified
test pressure, air shall be expelled completely from the pipe, valves and hydrants. if permanent air
vents are not located at all high points,the contractor shall install corporation cocks at such points so
that the air can be expelled as the line is filled with water. After all the air has been expelled, the
corporation cocks shall be closed and the test pressure applied. At the conclusion of the pressure test,
the corporation cocks shall be removed and plugged
The quantity of water required to restore the pressure shall be accurately determined by either 1)
pumping from an open container of suitable size such that accurate volume measurements can be
made by the Owner or,2)by pumping through a positive displacement water meter with a sweep unit
hand registering 1 gallon per revolution.The meter shall be approved by the Engineer.
Acceptability of the test will be determined by two factors,as follows:
1. The quantity of water lost from the main shall not exceed the number of gallons per hour as
listed in the following table.
2. The loss in pressure shall not exceed 5 psi during the 2 hour test period.
All water used to perform hydrostatic pressure shall be charged a usage fee.
Allowable leakage per 1000 ft.of pipeline* in GPH
Nominal Pipe Diameter in inches
PSI 6" 8" 10" 12" 16" 20" 24"
450 0.95 1.27 1.59 1.91 2.55 3.18 3.82
400 0.90 120 1.50 1.80 2.40 3.00 3.60
350 0.84 1.12 1.40 1.69 2.25 2.81 3.37
275 0.75 1.00 1.24 1.49 1.99 2.49 2.99
250 0.71 0.95 1.19 1.42 1.90 - 2.37 2.85
225 0.68 0.90 1.13 1.35 1.80 225 2.70
200 0.64 0.85 1.06 1.28 1.70 2.12 2.55
79
9/13nolo
*If the pipeline under test contains sections of various diameters, the allowable leakage will be
the sum of the computed leakage for each size. For those diameters or pressures not listed, the
formula below shall be used:
The quantity of water lost from the main shall not exceed the number of gallons per hour as
determined by the formula
L--NWP
in which: 7400
L= Allowable leakage,gallons/hour
N= No.of joints in the length of pipeline tested
D= Nominal.diameter of the pipe in inches
P= Average test pressure during the leakage test,psi
The paragraph stating that"There shall not be an appreciable or abrupt loss in pressure during
the 15 minute test perod."Is deleted.
7-09.3(24)A Flushing and"Poly-pigging
Section 7-09.3(24)A shall be revised and supplemented as follows:
Sections of pipe to be disinfected shall first be poly-pigged to remove any solids or contaminated
material that may have become lodged in the pipe. if the main cannot be "poly-pigged", then a tap
shall be provided large enough to develop a velocity of at least 2.5 fps in the main.
The "Poly-pig" shall be equal to Girard Industries Aqua-Swab-AS, 2lb/cu-ft density foam with 90A
durometer urethane rubber coating on the rear of the "Poly pig" only. The "Poly-pig" shall be
cylinder shaped with bullet nose or squared end.
The paragraph stating: "Where dry calcium hypochlorite is used for disinfection of the pipe, flushing
shall be done after disinfection."is deleted.
Dechlorination of all water used for disinfection shall be accomplished in accordance with the City of
Renton Standard Details. Water containing chlorine residual in excess of that carried in the existing
water system,shall not be disposed into the storm drainage system or any water way.
7-09.3(24)D Dry Calcium Hypochlorite
Section 7-09.3(24)D has been replaced with:
(******)
Dry calcium hypochlorite shall not be placed in the pipe as laid.
7-09.3(24)K Retention Period
Section 7-09.3(24)K has been revised as follows:
Treated water shall be retained in the pipe at least 24 hours but no longer than 48 hours. After this
period, the chlorine residual at pipe extremities and at other representative points shall be at least
25 mg/l,
7-09.3(24)N Final Flushing and Testing
Section 7-09.3(24)N has been revised as follows:
Before placing the lines into service, a satisfactory report shall be received from the local or State
health department or an approved testing lab on samples collected from representative points in the
new system. Samples will be collected and bacteriological tests obtained by the Engineer.
7-09.3(25) Joint Restraint Systems
Section 7-09.3(25)is a new additional section:
(******)
General:
80
9/13/2010
Where shown on the plans or in the specifications or required by the Engineer,joint restraint system
(shackle rods) shall be used. All joint restraint materials used shall be those manufactured by Star
National Products, 1323 Holly Avenue,PO Box 258,Columbus Ohio 43216,unless an equal alternate
is approved in writing by the Engineer.
Materials:
Steel types used shall be:
High strength low-alloy steel(cor-ten),ASTM A242,heat-treated,superstar"SST" series.
High strength low-alloy steel(cor-ten),ASTM A242,superstar"SS"series.
Items to be galvanized are to meet the following requirements:
ASTM A153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware.
ASTM A123 for galvanizing rolled,pressed and forged steel shapes.
Joint restrainer system components:
Tiebolt: ASTM A242, type 2, zinc plated or hot-dip galvanized. SST 7:5/8" for 2" and 3"
mechanical joints, 3/4" for 4" to 12" mechanical joints, ASTM A325, type 3D, except tensile
strength of full-body threaded section shall be increased to 40,000 lbs. minimum for 5/8" and
60,000 lbs. minimum for 3/4" by heat treating (quenching and tempering) to manufacturer's
reheat and hardness specifications. SST 753: 3/4" for 14"to 24"mechanical joints. same ASTM
specification as SST 7. SST 77: 3/4" same as SST 7, except I" eye for 7/8" rod. same ASTM
specification as SST 7.
Tienut: heavy hex nut for each tiebolt: SS8: 5/8" and 3/4", ASTM A563, grade C3, or zinc
plated. S8: 5/8"and 3/4",ASTM A563,grade A,zinc plated or hot-dip galvanized.
Tiecoupling: used to extend continuous threaded rods and are provided with a center stop to aid
installation, zinc plated or hot-dip galvanized. SS10: for 5/8" and 3/4" tierods, ASTM A563,
grade C3. S 10:for 5/8"and 3/4"tierods,ASTM A563,grade A.
Tierod: continuous threaded rod for cutting to desired lengths,zinc plated or hot-dip galvanized.
j SS 12: 5/8" and 3/4" diameter,ASTM A242, type 2; ANSI B 1.1. S12: 5/8" and 3/4" diameter,
ASTM A36,A307.
Tiewasher: round flat washers, zinc plated or hot-dip galvanized. SS 17: ASTM A242, F436.
S17:ANSI B18.22.1.
Installation:
Install the joint restraint system in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions so all joints
are mechanically locked together to prevent joint separation. Tiebolts shall be installed to pull
against the mechanical joint body and not the MJ follower. Torque nuts at 75-90 foot pounds for
3/4" nuts. Install tiecouplings with both rods threaded equal distance into tiecouplings. Arrange
tierods symmetrically around the pipe.
81
9/13/2010
Pipe Diameter Number of 3/4"
Tie Rods Required
4" ..............••.•.........................•2
611..................................•.•.......2
811............................................3
......................................4
12"...................................•.......6
14"....... 8
16".......:.....•-•...........................8.
18"...........................................8
20"................•.......................... 10
24"...............................•........... 14
30"...........................................(16-7/8-rods)
36"..............................••...........(24-7/8-rods)
Where a manufacturer's mechanical joint valve or fitting is supplied with slots for"T"bolts instead of
holes,a flanged valve with a flange by mechanical joint adapter shall be used instead,so as to provide
adequate space for locating the tiebolts.
Where a continuous run of pipe is required to be restrained,no run of restrained pipe shall be greater
than 60 feet in length between fittings. Insert long body solid sleeves as required on longer runs to
keep tierod lengths to the 60 foot maximum. Pipe used in continuously restrained runs shall be
mechanical joint pipe and tiebolts shall be installed as rod guides at each joint.
Where poly wrapping is required all tiebolts, tienuts, tiecouplings, tierods, and tiewashers, shall be
galvanized- All disturbed sections will be painted,. to the Inspector's satisfaction, with koppers
bitomastic no.300-ni,or approved equal.
Where poly wrapping is not required all tiebolts,tienuts,tiecouplings,tierods and tiewashers may be
galvanized as specified in the preceding paragraph or plain and painted in the entirety with koppers
bitumastic no. 800-m,or approved equal-
Tiebolts, tienuts, tiecouplings, tierods,and tiewashers shall be considered incidental to installation of
the pipe and no additional payment shall be made.
7-09.4 Measurement
Measurement and Payment Schedule for 'installation of water mains and appurtenances is shown in
Section 1-09.14
Section 7-09.4 is revised as follows:
Measurement of bank run gravel for trench backfill will be by the cubic yard measured by the
calculation of neat lines based on maximum trench width per Section 2-09.4 or by the ton, in
accordance with Section 1-09.
Measurement for payment of concrete theist blocking and dead-man blocks will be per cubic-yard
when these items are included as separate pay items. If not included as separate pay items in the
contract,then thrust blocking and dead-man blocks shall be considered incidental to the installation of
the water main and no further compensation shall be made.
Measurement for payment for connections to existing water mains will be per each for each
connection to existing water main(s)as shown on the Plans.
7-09.5 Payment
Measurement and Payment Schedule f an or installation of water mains d appurtenances is shown in
Section 1-09.14
82
9/13/2010
Section 7-09.5 is revised and supplemented as follows:
"Furnish and Install Ductile Iron Water Main&Fittings",per lineal foot.
The unit contract price per linear foot for each size and kind of"Furnish and Install Ductile Iron
Water Main&Fittings" shall be full pay for the bid item as described in Section 1-09.14.
"Concrete Thrust Blocking and Dead-Man Anchor Blocks",per cubic yard.
The unit contract price per cubic yard for"Concrete Concrete Thrust Blocking and Dead-Man Anchor
Blocks"shall be full pay for the bid item as described in Section 1-09.14.
"Connection to Existing Water Mains",per each_
The unit contract price per each for"Connection to Existing Water Mains"shall be full pay for the bid
item as described in Section 1-09.14.
"Select Imported Trench Backfill",per cubic yard or ton.
The unit contract price per cubic yard or ton for"Select Imported Trench Backfill" shall be full pay
for the bid item as described in Section 1-09.14.
"Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Foundation Material",per ton or cubic yard.
The unit contract price per cubic yard or ton for 'Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable
Foundation Material"shall be full pay for the bid item as described in Section 1-09.14.
7-12 VALVES FOR WATER MAINS
7-12.3(1) Installation of Valve Marker Post
Section 7-12.3(1)has been revised as follows:
Where required, a valve marker post shall be furnished and installed with each valve. Valve marker
posts shall be placed at the edge of the right-of-way opposite the valve and be set with 18 inches of
the post exposed above grade.
The rest of this section is deleted.
7-12.3(2) Adjust Existing Valve Box to Grade
Section 7-12.3(2)is a new section:
Valve boxes shall be adjusted to grade in the same manner as for manholes, as detailed in Section 7-
05.3(1) of the City of Renton Standard Details. Valve box adjustments shall include, but not be
limited to,the locations shown on the Plans.
Existing roadway valve boxes shall be adjusted to conform to final finished grades. The final
installation shall be made in accordance with the applicable portions of Section 7-12.
In the event that the existing valve box is plugged or blocked with debris, the Contractor shall use
whatever means necessary to remove such debris, leaving the valve installation in a fully operable
condition.
The valve box shall be set to an elevation tolerance of one-fourth inch(1/4") to one-half inch (1/2")
below finished grade.
7-12.4 Measurement
Measurement and Payment Schedule for installation of water mains and appurtenances is shown in
Section 1-09.14
83
9/132010
Section 7-12.4 is supplemented by adding the following:
Adjustment of existing valve boxes to grade shall be measured per each,if included as a separate pay
item in the Contract; if not a separate pay item but required to complete the Work, then value box
adjustment shall be considered incidental.
Hydrant auxiliary gate valve will be included in the measurement for hydrant assembly and will not
be included in this measurement item.
7-12.5 Payment
Measurement and Payment Schedule for installation of water mains and appurtenances is shown in
Section 1-09.14
Section 7-12.5 is replaced with the following:
"Furnish and Install -Inch Gate Valve Assembly",per each.
The unit contract price per each for"Furnish and Install -Inch Gate Valve Assembly"shall be full
pay for the bid item as described in Section 1-09.14.
"Air-Release/Air-Vacuum Valve Assembly,"per each.
The unit contract price per for air-release/air-vacuum valve assembly shall be for all,labor,equipment
and material to complete the installation of the assembly including but not limited to, excavating,
tapping the main, laying and jointing the pipe and fittings and appurtenances, backfilling, testing,
flushing, and disinfection, meter box and cover, at location shown on the plans, and per the City of
Renton Standard Details,latest revision.
"Adjust Existing Valve Box to Grade(RC),"per each.
The contract bid price for"Adjust Existing Valve Box to Grade".above shall be full compensation for
all labor,material,tools and equipment necessary to satisfactorily complete the Work as defined in the
Contract Documents, including all incidental Work If not included as a separate pay item in the
Contract,but required to complete other Work in the Contract, then adjustment of valve boxes shall
be considered incidental to other items of Work and no hither compensation shall be made.
7-14 HYDRANTS
7-14.3(x) Setting Hydrants _
Paragraph four and five of Section 7-14.3(1)is revised and the section is supplemented as follows:
After all installation and testing is complete, the exposed portion of the hydrant shall be painted with
two field coats.The type and color of paint will be designated by the Engineer.
Any hydrant not in service shall be identified by covering with a burlap or plastic bag approved by
the Engineer.
Hydrants shall be installed in accordance with AWWA specifications C600-93, Sections 3.7 and 3.8.1
and the City of Renton Standard Details. Hydrant and guard posts shall be painted in accordance with
the standard details. Upon completion of the project, all fire hydrants shall be painted to the City of
Renton specifications and guard posts painted with two coats of preservative paint NO.43-655 Safety
Yellow or approved equal. Fire hydrants shall be of such length as to be suitable for installation with
connections to 6", 8"AND 10"piping in trenches 3 - 1/2 feet deep unless otherwise specified_ The
hydrant shall be designed for a 4-1/2 foot burial where 12" and larger pipe is shown unless otherwise
noted on the plan.
Fire hydrant assembly shall include: cast-iron or ductile iron tee(MJ x FL), 6"gate valve (FL x MJ),
84
9n3nolo
6" DI spool (PE x PE), 5-1/4" MVO fire hydrant (MJ connection), 4" x 5" Stortz adapter, cast iron
valve box and cover,3/4"shackle rods and accessories,concrete blocks and two concrete guard posts
(only if hydrants are outside of right-of-way).
Joint restraint(Shackle Rods)shall be installed in accordance with Section 7-11.3(15).
7-14.3(3) Resetting Existing Hydrants
Section 7-14.3(3)is supplemented by adding the following:
All hydrants shall be rebuilt to the approval of the City(or replaced with a new hydrant). All rubber
gaskets shall be replaced with new gaskets of the type required for a new installation of the same
type.
7-14.3(4) Moving Existing Hydrants
Section 7-14.3(4)is supplemented by adding the following:
(******)
All hydrants shall be rebuilt to the approval of the City(or replaced with a new hydrant). All rubber
gaskets shall be replaced with new gaskets of the type required for a new installation of the same
type
7-145 Payment
Measurement and Payment Schedule for installation of water mains and appurtumances is shown in
Section 1-09.14
Section 7-14.5 is revised as follows:
(******)
Payment will be made in accordance with Section 1-04.1,for each of the following bid items that are
included in the proposal:
"Furnish and Install Hydrant Assembly",per each.
The unit contract price per each for"Furnish and Install Hydrant Assembly",shall be full pay for the
bid item as described in Section 1-09.14.
"Resetting Existing Hydrants",per each.
The unit contract price per each for "Resetting Existing Hydrant" shall be full pay for all Work to
reset the existing hydrant, including rebuilding (or replacement with a new hydrant), shackling,
blocking, painting, and guard posts and reconnecting to the main. The new pipe connecting the
hydrant to the main shall be considered incidental and no additional payment shall be made. Guard
posts,shown on the Plans shall be incidental to the contract.
"Moving Existing Hydrants",per each.
The unit contract price per each for"Moving Existing Hydrant"shall be full pay for all Work to move
the existing hydrant, including new tee, rebuilding (or replacement with a new hydrant), shackling,
blocking, painting; and guard posts and reconnecting to the main. The new pipe connecting the
hydrant to the main shall be considered incidental and no additional payment shall be made. Guard
posts,shown on the.Plans shall be incidental to the contract.
7-15 SERVICE CONECTIONS
7-15.3 Construction Details
Section 7-15.3 is supplemented as follows:
Pipe materials used to extend or replace existing water service lines shall be copper
85
9/13/2010
Where installation is in existing paved streets, the service lines shall be installed by a trenchless
percussion and impact method(hoe-hogging). If the trenchless percussion and impact method fails, .
regular open trench methods may be used
.7-15.5 Payment
Measurement and Payment Schedule for installation of water mains and appurtenances is shown in
Section 1-09.14
Section 7-15.5 is revised as follows:
Payment will be made in accordance with Section 1-04.1, for the following bid item when it is
included in the proposal:
"Furnish and Install In.Water Service Connection",per each.
The unit contract price per each for"Furnish and Install In.Water Service Connection",shall be �.
full pay for the bid item as described in Section 1-09.14.
7-17 SANITARY SEWERS
7-17.2 Materials
Section 7-17.2 is replaced with the following:
Pipe
Gravity sewer pipe shall be as specified herein and as shown on the Plans. The Contractor shall
provide two copies of the pipe manufacturer's technical literature and tables of dimensional
tolerances to the Engineer. Any pipe found to have dimensional tolerances in excess of those
prescribed or having defects,which prevent adequate joint seal or any other damage,shall be rejected.
If requested by the Engineer,not less than three nor more than five lengths of pipe for each size,
selected from stock by the Engineer,shall be tested as specified for maximum dimensional tolerance
of the respective pipe.
Material for PVC sewer pipe shall meet the requirements of Section 9-05.12.
All pipe shall be clearly marked with type,class,and thickness.Lettering shall be legible and
permanent under normal conditions of handling and storage.
7-17.3 Construction Requirements
7-17.3(1) Protection of Existing Sewerage Facilities
Section 7-17.3(1)is supplemented by adding the following:
When extending an existing sewer, the downstream system shall be protected from construction
debris by placing a screen or trap in the first existing manhole downstream of the connection. It shall
be the Contractor's responsibility to maintain this screen or trap until the new system is placed in
service and then to remove it. Any construction debris,which enters the existing downstream system,
shall be removed by the Contractor at his expense, and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. When the
first manhole is set,its outlet shall.be plugged until acceptance by the Engineer.
7-17.3(2)H Television Inspection
Section 7-17.3(2)H is supplemented by adding the following:
Once the television inspection has been completed the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the
written reports of the inspection plus the videotapes. Said videotapes are to be in color and compatible
with the City's viewing and recording systems.
86
9/13/2010
The City system accepts 1/2" wide high density VHS Tapes.The will be run at standard
tapes speed .
SP(15/16 I.PS.). The City will also accept video submittals on DVD viewable on a standard player
or a CD or DVD compatible with Cues DataCAP 4.0.
7-17.4 Measurement
Section 7-17.4 is supplemented as follows:
Measurement of"Bank Run Gravel for Trench Backfill Sewer"will be determined by the cubic yard
in place,measured by the neat line dimensions shown in the Plans,or by the ton on truck tickets.
7-17.5 Payment
Measurement and Payment Schedule for installation of sanitary sewer mains and appurtenances is
shown in Section 1-09.14
Section 7-17.5 is revised and supplemented as follows:
Payment will be made in accordance with Section 1-04..1,for each of the following bid items that are
included in the proposal:.
"Furnish and Install Im sewer pipe",per linear foot.
The unit contract price per each for " Furnish and Install In. sewer pipe",shall be full pay
for the bid item as described in Section 1-09.14.
"Furnish and Install In. side sewer pipe",per linear foot.
The unit contract price per each for Furnish and Install In. side sewer pipe",shall be full
pay for the bid item as described in Section 1-09.14.
"Testing Sewer Pipe",per linear foot.
The unit contract price per linear foot for"Testing Sewer Pipe"shall be full pay for all labor, material
and equipment required to conduct the leakage tests required in Section 7-17.3(2). If no unit price for
"Testing Sewer Pipe"is included it shall be considered incidental to the pipe items.
"Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Material",per cubic yard or ton.
The unit contract price per cubic yard or ton for"Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Material'
shall be full pay for all Work to remove unsuitable material and replace and compact suitable material
as specified in Section 7-08.3(1)A.
"Bank Run Gravel for Trench Backfill Sewer",per cubic yard or ton.
The unit contract price per cubic yard or ton for"Bank Run Gravel for Trench Backfill Sewer" shall
be full pay for all Work to famish,place,and compact material in the trench.
"Television Inspection",per linear foot.
8-09 RAISED PAVEMENT MARKERS
8-09.5 Payment
Section 8-09.5 has been revised as follows:
Payment will be made for each of the following bid items that are included in the proposal:
"Raised Pavement Marker Type 1",per each.
"Raised Pavement Marker Type 2",per each.
"Raised Pavement Marker Type 3- In.",per each.
"Recessed Pavement Marker",per each.
The unit contract price per each for "Raised Pavement Marker Type I", "Raised Pavement Marker
87
9/13/2010 t
Type 2", and "Raised Pavement Marker Type 3- In."and "Recessed Pavement Marker" shall ,
be full pay for all labor, materials,and equipment necessary for furnishing and installing the markers
in accordance with these Specifications, including all cost involved with traffic control unless traffic
control is listed in the Contract as a separate pay item.
8-13 MONUMENT CASES-
8-13.1 Description
Section 8-13.1 is revised and supplemented as follows:
This Work shall consist of furnishing and placing monument cases and covers,in accordance with the
Standard Plans and these Specifications,in conformity with the lines and locations shown in the Plans
or as staked by the Engineer or by the Contractor supplied Surveyor.
8-13.3 Construction Requirements
Paragraphs 2 and 3 of Section 8-13.3 is revised and supplemented as follows:
The monument will be furnished and set by the Engineer or by the Contractor supplied Surveyor.
When existing monuments will be impacted by a project, the Contractor shall be responsible for
assuring that a registered surveyor references the existing monuments prior to construction_ After
construction is complete, the monuments shall.be re-established by the Surveyor in accordance with
RCW58.09.130.
8-13.4 Measurement
Section 8-13.4 is supplemented by adding the following:
All costs for surveying and resetting existing monuments impacted by construction shall be
considered incidental to the Contract unless specifically called out to be paid as a bid item.
8-13.5 Payment
Section 8-13.5 is supplemented by adding the following:
"Reset Existing Monument"per each.
Resetting an existing monument impacted by construction shall be incidental unless included as a pay
item in the Schedule of Prices-
8-14 CEMENT CONCRETE SIDEWALKS
8-14.3(4) Curing
Section 8-14.3(4)is replaced with:
The curing materials and procedures outlined in Section 5-05.3(13) of the Standard Specifications
shall prevail, except that white pigmented curing compound shall not be used on sidewalks. The
curing agent shall be applied immediately after brushing and be maintained for a period of 5 days.
The Contractor shall have readily available sufficient protective covering,such as waterproof paper or
plastic membrane,to cover the pour of an entire day in the event of rain or other unsuitable weather.
During the curing period, all traffic, both pedestrian and vehicular, shall be excluded. Vehicular
traffic shall be excluded for such additional time as the Engineer may specify.
The Contractor shall be responsible f o r barricading, patro llin g, o r otherwise protecting the newly
placed concrete to prevent damage. Damaged,vandalized,discolored, stained, or unsightly concrete
88
9/13/2010
shall be removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor.
8-14.4 Measurement
Section 8-14.4 is supplemented by adding the following:
When the Contract contains a pay item for "Curb Ramp, Cement Concrete," the per each
measurement shall include all costs for the complete installation per the Plans and standard details
including expansion joint material, curb and gutter and ramped sidewalk section. Sawcutting,
removal and disposal of excavated materials including existing pavement and sidewalk, crushed
surfacing base materials and all other Work,materials and equipment required per Section 8-14, shall
be included in the per each price for"Curb Ramp,Cement Concrete" unless any of these other items
are listed and specified to be paid as separate pay items.
If the Contract does not provide a pay item for"Curb Ramp,Cement Concrete,"but the Plans call for
such installation,then quantities shall be measured with and paid for under the bid items for Curb and
Gutter and for Cement Concrete Sidewalk. When curb ramps are to be constructed of asphalt
concrete, the payment shall be included in the pay item for"Miscellaneous and/or Driveway Asphalt
�1 Concrete."
! 8-145 Payment
Section 8-14.5 is supplemented by adding the following:
"Curb Ramp,Cement Concrete,"per each.
Payment for excavation of material not related to the construction of the sidewalk but n cxssary
before the sidewalk can be placed,when and if shown in the Plans,will be made in accordance with
the provisions of Section 2-03. Otherwise, the Contractor shall make all excavations including haul
and disposal, regardless of the depth required for constructing the sidewalk to the lines and grades
shown, and shall include all costs thereof in the unit contract price per square yard for "Cement
Concrete Sidewalk"and the per each contract price for"Curb Ramp,Cement Concrete."
8-17 IMPACT ATTENUATOR SYSTEMS
8-17.5 Payment
Section 8-17.5 is supplemented by the following:
If no pay item is included for temporary impact attenuators then all costs to provide and install shall
be considered a part of the pay item for"Traffic Control."
8-20 ILLUNIINATION,TRAFFIC SIGNAL SYSTEMS,AND ELECTRICAL
8-201(1) Equipment List and Drawings
Paragraph four of Section 8-202(l)is revised and supplemented with the following:
The Contractor shall submit for approval six sets of shop drawings for each of the following types of
standards called for on this project:
1. Light standards with or without pre-approved Plans.
2. Signal standards with or without pre-approved Plans.
3. Combination Signal and lighting standards.
4. Metal Strain Poles.
Paragraph five of Section 8-20.2(1)is deleted.
Paragraph six of Section 8-202(1)is deleted.
Section 8-20.2(l)is supplemented as follows:
89
9/13/2010
The Contractor also shall submit either on the signal standard shop drawings or attached to the signal t
standard shop drawings all dimensions to clearly show the specific mast arm mounting height and
signal tenon locations for each signal pole to be installed
8-22 PAVEMENT MARKING j
8-22.1 Description
The following item in Section 8-22.1 is revised as follows:
Crosswalk Stripe
A SOLID WHrM line, 8 inches wide and 10-feet long,installed parallel to another crosswalk stripe
and parallel to the direction of traffic flow and centered in pairs on lane lines and the center of lanes.
See detail sheet.
Skip Center Line(Replacement)
A BROKEN YELLOW line 4 inches wide. The broken or"skip"pattern shall be based on a 24-foot
unit consisting of 9-foot line and a 15-foot gap. Skip center strip is used as centerline delineation on
two-lane or three-lane,two-way highways.
Double Yellow Center Line(Replacement)
Two SOLID YELLOW lines,each 4 inches wide, separated by a 4-inch.space- Double yellow center
stripe is used as centerline delineation on multilane,two-way highways and for channelization.
Approach Line(New)
A SOLID WHITE line, 8 inches wide, used to separate left and right turning movements from
through movements,to separate high occupancy vehicle lanes from general-purpose lanes,for islands,
hash marks, and other applications.Hash mark stripes shall be placed on 45-degree angle and 10 feet
apart.
Lane Line(Replacement)
A BROKEN WHITE line, 4 inches wide, used to delineate adjacent lanes traveling in the same
direction.The broken or"skip"pattern shall be based on a 24-foot unit consisting of a 9-foot line and
a 15-foot gap.
Two Way Left Turn Line(Replacement)
A SOLID YELLOW line, 4 inches wide, with a BROKEN YELLOW line, 4 inches wide, separated
by a 4-inch space.The broken or"skip"pattern shall be based on a 24-foot unit consisting of a 9-foot
line and a 15-foot space.The solid line shall be installed to the right of the broken line in the direction
of travel.
Crosswalk Line(Replacement)
A SOLID WHITE line, 8 inches wide and 10 feet long, installed parallel to another crosswalk stripe
and parallel to the direction of traffic flow and centered in pairs on lane lines and the center of lanes.
See detail sheet.
Stop Line(Replacement)
A SOLID WHITE line 12, 18,or 24 inches wide as noted on the Contract Plans.
8-22.3(5) Installation Instructions
Section 8-22.3(5)is revised as follows:
A manufacturer's technical representative need not be present at the initial material installation to
approve the installation procedure.
90
9/13/2010
8-22.5 Payment
Section 8-22.5 is supplemented as follows:
(******)
"Approach Stripe,"per linear foot.
"Remove Paint Line....."wide,"per linear foot.*
"Remove Plastic Line.......Wide,"per linear foot.*
"Remove existing traffic markings, "per Lump Sum.*
*The linear foot contract price for"Remove Paint Line"and"Remove Plastic Line" and the lump sum
contract price for "Remove existing traffic markings" shall be full compensation for furnishing all
labor, tools, material, and equipment necessary for removal of existing traffic markings as per the
Plans, Specifications and detail sheets. If these pay items do not appear in the contract schedule of
prices,then the removal of old or conflicting traffic markings required to complete the channelization
of the project as shown on the Plans or detail sheets shall be considered incidental to other items in
the Contract and no further compensation shall be made.
8-23 TEMPORARY PAVEMENT MARKINGS
8-23.5 Payment
Section 8-23.5 is supplemented with the following:
(******)
If no pay item is included in the Contract for installation, or for removal of temporary pavement
markings, then all costs associated with these items are considered incidental to other items in the
Contract or included under"Traffic Control,"if that item is included as a bid item.
9-03.8(7) HMA Tolerances and Adjustments
Item I is deleted and replaced with:
(******)
1. Job Mix Formula Tolerances. After the RvIF is determined as required in 5-04.3(7)A, the
constituents of the mixture at the time of acceptance shall conform to the following tolerances:
Nonstatistical Commercial
Evaluation Evaluation
Aggregate,percent passing
11%3/", '/z",and 3/8"sieves ±6% ±8%
U.S.No.4 sieve ±6% ±80/0
U.S.No.-8 sieve ±6% ±8%
U.S.No. 16 sieve ±4% ±6%
U.S.No.30 sieve ±4% ±6%
U.S.No. 50 sieve ±4% ±6%
U.S.No. 100 sieve ±3% ±5%
U.S.No.200 sieve ±2.0% ±3.0%
Asphalt Binder ±0.5% ±0.7%
VMA 1.5%below minimum value in 9-03.8(2)
VIA minimum and maximum as listed in 9-03.8(2)
Va 2.5%minimum and 5.5%maximum
These tolerance limits constitute the allowable limits as described in Section 1-06.2. The tolerance
limit for aggregate shall not exceed the limits of the control point's section,except the tolerance limits
for sieves designated as 100%passing will be 99-100.
91
9/13/2010
9-03.20 Drain Rock
Section 9-03.20 is a new section.
Durability: Percentage of wear not greater than 40 percent when tested in accordance with
ASTM C 131. Consist of hard, durable particles of stone or gravel, screened or crushed to specified
size and gradation. Free from organic matter, .lumps or balls of clay, or other deleterious matter.
Crush or waste coarse material and waste fine material as required to meet gradation requirements.
Conform to size and grade within the limits as follows when tested in accordance with ASTM C 117
and C 136:
Sieve Size Percent By Weight
(Square Openings) Passing Sieve
2 inch 100
1-1/2 inch 95-100
3/4 inch 50-100
3/8 inch 15-55
I Number 200 I 0-2
9-05 DRAINAGE STRUCTURES,CULVERTS,AND CONDUITS
9-05.4 Steel Culvert (RC)
A
Pipe Pipe and
P P � )
Section 9-05.4 is revised as follows:
Steel culvert pipe and pipe arch shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 36,Type I and Type H.
Welded seam aluminum coated (aluminized) corrugated steel pipe and pipe arch with metallized
coating applied inside and out following welding is acceptable and shall be asphalt treatment coated.
9-05.7(2) Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewer Pipe(RC)
Section 9-05.7(2)is replaced by the following:
Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewer pipe shall conform to the requirements ofASTM C-76 and shall be
Class IV.Cement used in the manufacture of reinforced concrete pipe shall be Type II in conformance
with ASTM C 150. No admixture shall be used unless otherwise specified.
9-05.7(2)A Basis for Acceptance(RC)
Section 9-05.7(2)A is supplemented by the following:
All pipe shall be subject to(1)a three-edge-bearing strength (D-load) test in accordance with ASTM
C76; and (2) a hydrostatic test of rubber gasket joints in accordance with ASTM C361 or AWWA
C302 except test pressure shall be 5 psi-
9-05.7(3) Concrete Storm Sewer Pipe Joints (RC)
Section 9-05.7(3)is replaced by the following:
Joint assembly design shall be reinforced concrete bell and spigot type incorporating a fully retained
single rubber gasket in accordance with ASTM C361 or AWWA C302. Rubber gasket material shall
be neoprene.
9-05.7(4) Testing Concrete Storm Sewer Pipe Joints(RC)
Section 9-05.7(4)is supplemented by the following:
92
9/13/2010
Hydrostatic testing of rubber gasket joints shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C361 or
AWWA C302 except test pressure shall be 5 psi.
9-05.9 Steel Spiral Rib Storm Sewer Pipe(RC)
Section 9-05.9 is replaced with:
The manufacturer of spiral rib storm sewer pipe shall furnish the Engineer a Manufacturer's
Certificate of Compliance stating that the materials furnished comply in all respects with these
Specifications. The Engineer may require additional information or tests to be performed by the
Contractor at no expense to the City.
Unless otherwise specified, spiral rib storm sewer pipe shall be furnished with pipe ends cut
perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the pipe. Pipe ends shall be cut evenly. Spiral rib pipe shall
be fabricated either by using a continuous helical lock seam or a continuous helical welded seam
paralleling the rib.
Steel spiral rib storm sewer pipe shall be manufactured of metallic coated(aluminized or galvanized)
corrugated steel and inspected in conformance with Section 9-05.4. The size,coating, and metal shall
be as shown in the Plans or in the Specifications.
For spiral rib storm sewer pipe, helical nibs shall project outwardly from the smooth pipe wall and
shall be fabricated from.a single thickness of material. The ribs shall be essentially rectangular and
shall be 3/4 inch plus two times the wall thickness (2t) plus or minus 1/8 inch(measured outside to
outside) and a minimum of 0.95 inch high (measured as the minimum vertical distance from the
outside of pipe wall immediately adjacent to the lockseam or stiffener to the top surface of rib). The
maximum spacing of the ribs shall be 11.75 inches center to center(measured normal to the direction
of the ribs). The radius of bend of the metal at the comers of the ribs shall be a minimum of 0.10 inch
and a maximum of 0.17 inch. If the sheet.between adjacent ribs does not contain a lockseam, a
stiffener shall be included midway between ribs,having a nominal radius of 0.25 inch and a minimum
height of 0.20 inch toward the outside of the pipe. Pipe shall be fabricated with ends that can be
effectively jointed with coupling bands.
When required, spiral rib or narrow pitch spiral rib pipe shalt be bituminous treated or paved. .The
bituminous treatment for spiral rib pipe shall conform to the requirements of Sections 9-05:4(3) and
9-05.4(4).
For narrow pitch spiral rib sewer pipe, the helical ribs shall project outwardly from the smooth pipe
wall and shall be fabricated from a single thickness of material. The ribs shall be .375 inch+ 1/8 inch
wide (measured outside to outside) and a minimum of.4375 inch high (measured as the minimum
vertical distance of ribs shall be 4.80 inches center to center(measured normal to the direction of the
ribs). The radius of bend of the metal at the corners of the nibs shall be 0.0625 inch with an allowable
tolerance of+ 10 percent.
9-05.12 Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC)Pipe
Section 9-05.12(3)is a new additional section:
9-05.12(3) CPEP Sewer Pipe
Section 9-05.12(3)is a new additional section:
(******)
CPEP- Smooth interior pipe and fittings shall be manufactured from high density polyethylene resin
which shall meet or exceed the requirements of Type 111,Category 4 or 5,Grade P33 or P34, Class C
per ASTM D1248. In addition, the pipe shall comply with all material and stiffness requirements of
AASHTO M294.
9-05.14 ABS Composite Sewer Pipe
Section 9-05.14 is deleted
(******)
93
9/.13/2010
9-05.17 Aluminum Spiral Rib Storm Sewer Pipe
Section 9-05.17 is replaced with:
Unless otherwise specified, spiral rib storm sewer pipe shall be furnished with pipe ends cut
perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the pipe. Pipe ends shall be cut evenly. Spiral rib pipe shall
be fabricated by using a continuous helical lock seam with a seam gasket.
For spiral rib storm sewer pipe, helical ribs shall project outwardly from the smooth pipe wall and
shall be fabricated from a single thickness of material. The nibs shall be 3/4 inch wide by 3/4 inch
deep with a nominal spacing of 7-1/2 inches center to center. Pipe shall be fabricated with ends that
can be effectively jointed with coupling bands.
For narrow pitch spiral rib storm sewer pipe,helical ribs shall.project outwardly from the smooth pipe
wall and shall be fabricated from a single thickness of material. The ribs shall be 0.375 inch+ 1/8
inch wide(measured outside to outside)and a minimum spacing of ribs shall be 4.80 inches center to
center(measured normal to the direction of the ribs). The radius of bend of the metal at the comers of
the ribs shall be 0.0625 inch with an allowable tolerance of+10 percent.
For wide pitch spiral rib storm sewer pipe,helical ribs shall project outwardly from the smooth pipe
wall and shall be fabricated from a single thickness of material. The ribs shall be 3/4 inch+ 1/8 inch
wide (measured outside to outside) and a minimum of 0.95 inch high (measured as the minimum
vertical distance from the outside of pipe wall to top surface of the rib). The maximum spacing of
ribs shall be 11.75 inches center to center(measured normal to the direction of the ribs). The radius
of bend of the metal at the comers of the ribs shall be 0.0625 inch with an allowable tolerance of_+ 10
percent.
9-05.22 High Density Polyethylene Piping
Section 9-05.22 is a new section:
DRISCOPLEXTm 4100 High-density Polyethylene Piping
1 General Terms and Conditions
1.1 Scope-This Specification covers requirements for DriscoPlexT'M 4100 PE 3408 high-density
polyethylene piping. All Work shall be performed in accordance with these Specifications.
1.2 Engineered and Approved Plans-Construction shall be performed in accordance with Engineered
Construction Plans for the Work prepared under the direction of a Professional Engineer.
1.3 Referenced Standards-Where all or part of a federal,ASTM,ANSI,AWWA, etc.,Standard
Specification is incorporated by reference in these Specifications, the reference standard shall be the
latest edition and revision.
1.4 Licenses and Permits—The Contractor shall be licensed and bonded.
1.5 Inspections-All Work shall be inspected by an Authorized Representative of the City who shall
have the authority to halt construction it in his opinion,these Specifications or standard construction
practices are not being followed. Whenever any portion of these Specifications is violated,the
Engineer shall,by written notice,order further construction to cease until all deficiencies are
corrected.
2 Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings
94
9/13/2010
2.1 Qualifications of Manufacturers-The manufacturer shall have manufacturing and quality
assurance facilities capable of producing and assuring the quality of the pipe and fittings required by
these Specifications. The manufacturer's production facilities shall be open for inspection by the City
or his Authorized Representative. The Project Engineer shall approve qualified manufacturers.
2.2 Materials-Black PE materials used for the manufacture of polyethylene pipe and fittings shall be
PE 3408 high density polyethylene,meeting ASTM D 3350 cell classification 345464C and shall be
listed in the name of the pipe and fitting manufacturer in PPI(Plastics Pipe Institute)TR4,with a
standard grade HDB rating of 1600 psi at 73°F. Color material,when used,shall be the same except
for meeting ASTM D 3350 cell classification 345464E. The material shall be listed and approved for
potable water in accordance with NSF Standard 61. When requested on the order,the manufacturer
shall certify that the materials used to manufacture pipe and fittings meet these requirements.
23 Interchangeability of Pipe and Fittings-The same qualified and approved manufacturer shall
produce polyethylene pipe and fittings. Products such as fittings or flange adapters made by sub-
contractors or distributors are prohibited.
2.4 Polyethylene Fittings&Custom Fabrications-Polyethylene fittings and custom fabrications shall
be molded or fabricated by the approved pipe manufacturer. All fittings and custom fabrications shall
,be pressure rated for the same internal pressure rating as the mating pipe.
�1 2.5 Molded Fittings-Molded fittings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with ASTM D
3261 and shall be so marked Molded fittings shall be tested in accordance with AWWA C906.
2.6 Fabricated Fittings-Fabricated fittings shall be made by heat fusion joining specially machined
shapes cut from pipe,polyethylene sheet stock or molded fittings. Fabricated fittings shall be rated
for internal pressure service at least equal to the full service pressure rating of the mating pipe.
Fabricated fittings shall be tested in accordance with AWWA C906.
2.7 Polyethylene Flange Adapters-Flange adapters shall be made with sufficient through-bore length
to be clamped in a butt fusion joining machine without the use of a stub-end holder. The sealing
surface of the flange adapter shall be machined with a series of small v-shaped grooves(serrations)to
promote gaskedess sealing,or restrain the gasket against blowout.
2.8 Back-up Rings&Flange Bolts-Flange adapters shall be fitted with back-up rings that are
pressure rated equal to or greater than the mating pipe. The back-up ring bore shall be chamfered or
radiused to provide clearance to the flange adapter radius. Flange bolts and nuts shall be Grade 3 or
higher.
9-08 PAIN'T'S
9-08.8 Manhole Coatin g System Products
Y
Section 9-08.8 is a new section and subsections:
9-08.8(1) Coating Systems Specification
1� A. High Solids Urethane
Coating System: Cl
Coating Material: High Solids Urethane
95
L
9/13/2010
Surfaces: Concrete
Surface In accordance with SSPC
Preparation: SP-7(Sweep or brush off
blast)
Application: Shop/Field:The drying
time between coats shall
not exceed 24 hours in
any case
System Thickness: 6.0 mils dry film
Coatings: Primer.One coat of
Wasser MC-Aroshield
high solids urethane(2.0
DFT)Finish:Two or
more coats of Wasser
MC-Aroshield(min.4.0
DFT)
Color:
White
9-23 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS AND ADMIXTURES
9-23.9 Fly Ash(RC)
Section 9-23.9 is revised as follows:
Fly ash shall not be used around water lines.
9-30 WATER DISTRIBUTION MATERIALS
9-30.1(1) Ductile Iron Pipe(RC)
Section 9-30.1(1)is revised as follows:
Ductile iron pipe shall be centrifugally cast and meet the requirements of AWWA C 151. Ductile iron
pipe shall have a cement-mortar lining meeting the requirements of AWWA C104. All other ductile
iron pipe shall be Standard Thickness Class 52 or the thickness class as shown in the Plans.
9-30.3(1) Gate Valves(3 inches to 12 inches)
Section 9-30.3(l)is replaced with: .
Valves shall be designed for a minimum water operating pressure of 200 PSI_ Gate valves shall be
Iowa List 14,Mueller Company No.A2380,Kennedy,or M&H.
Approval of valves other than models specified shall be obtained prior to bid opening.
All gate valves less than 12" in diameter shall include an 8" x_24" cast iron gate valve box and
extensions, as required. All 12" diameter and larger gate valves shall be installed in a vault. See the
City of Renton Standard Details for 12"gate valve assembly vault and 1"bypass installation.
Gate valves shall conform to AWWA C500 and shall be iron body,bronze-mounted, double disc with
bronze wedging device and O-ring stuffing box.
Resilient Seated Gate Valves:
Resilient seated gate valves shall be manufactured to meet or exceed the requirements of AWWA
Standard C509 latest revisions.
All external and internal ferrous metal surfaces of the gate valve shall be coated for corrosion
protection with fusion bonded epoxy. The epoxy coating shall be factory applied to all valve parts
96
9/13/2010
prior to valve assembly and shall meet or exceed the requirements of AWWA Standard C-550 latest
revision. Valves shall be provided with two (2) internal O-ring stems seals. The valves shall be
equipped with one(1)anti-friction washer. The resilient gate valve shall have rubber sealing surfaces
to permit bi-directional flow. The stem shall be independent of the stem nut or integrally cast.
Manufacturers of Resilient Seated Gate Valves shall provide the City on request that the valve
materials meet the City specifications.
Valves shall be designed for a minimum water operating pressure of 200 psi.
End connections shall be mechanical joints, flanged joints or mechanical by flanged joints as shown
on the project plans.
Resilient Seated Gate Valves shall be U.S. Metroseal 250, Clow, M&H Style 3067, Mueller Series
2370,Kennedy.
Approval of valves other than model specified shall be obtained prior to bid opening. All to valves
PP � P � g �
less than 12 inches in diameter shall include an 8"x24" cast iron gate valve box and extensions, as
required-
Valve operator:Provide standard AWWA 2-inch operating nut,matching valve key,and valve box for
operating stem A1112 inch diameter and larger res Bent seated gate valves shall have a 1 inch by-pass
assembly and shall be installed in a concrete vault per City of Renton Standard Details, latest
revision.
9-30.3(3) Butterfly Valves
Section 9-30.3(3)is'supplemented by adding the following:
Butterfly valves shall be Dresser 450 or Pratt Groundhog.
9-30.3(5) Valve Marker Posts
Section 9-30.3(5)has been deleted and replaced with the following:
The valve markers shall be fabricated and installed in conformance with the Standard Drawings_
Valve markers shall be carsonite composite utility marker.375"x 6-0"or approved equal with blue
label"water."
9-30.3(7) Combination Air Release/Air Vacuum Valves
Section 9-30.3(7)has been supplemented as follows:
Air and vacuum release valves shall be APCO-Valve and Primer Corp,"Heavy-Duty," combination
air release valve,or equal.
Installation shall be per the City of Renton Standard Details,latest revision.
Piping and fitting shall be copper or brass. Location of the air release valve as show on the plans is
approximate. The installation shall be set at the high point of the line.
9-30.3(8) Tapping Sleeve and Valve Assembly
Section 9-30.3(8)is revised as follows:
Tapping sleeves shall be cast iron,ductile iron epoxy-coated steel,or other approved material.
97
I
9/13/2010
9-30.3(9) Blow-Off Assembly
Section 9-30.3(9)is a new section:
Permanent blow-off assembly shall be#78 Kupferle Foundry Co.or approved equal. Installation of
blow-off permanent blow-off assembly shall be per City of Renton Standard Details,latest revision.
Pipe and fittings shall be galvanized. Blow-off assembly shall be installed at location(s)shown on the
plans. Temporary blow-off assembly on new dead-end water main shall be installed at location
shown on the plans.
Temporary blow-off assemblies for testing and flushing of the new water mains will not be included
under this item and shall be considered incidental to the contract and no additional payment shall be
made.
9-30.3(10) Reduced Pressure Double Backflow Preventer
Section 9-30.3(10)is a new section:
Reduced pressure chamber type in accordance with AWWA C511.Provide with full-port,quarter
turn,resilient seated ball valves at each end of backflow preventer with properly located test cocks.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.Install with a minimum clearance of 12 inches
and with maximum clearance of 30 inches between the relief port and the floor or finished grade.
Install with sufficient side clearance for access for testing and maintenance.
Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
Febco:
Model 825Y for 1/2-inch through 2-inch.
Zurn/Wilkins:
Model 975XL for 1/2-inch through 2-inch.
9-30.5 Hydrants
Section 9-30.5 is supplemented by adding the following:
Fire hydrants shall be Iowa,Corey Type (opening with the pressure)or approved equal conforming to
AWWA C-502-85. Approval must be obtained prior to bid opening.
Compression type fire hydrants (opening against pressure) shall be Clow Medallion, M&H 929,
Mueller Super Centurion 200,conforming to AWWA C-502-85.
9-30.5(1) End Connections(RC)
Section 9-30.5(1)is supplemented by adding the following:
Hydrants shall be constructed with mechanical joint connection unless otherwise specified in bid
proposal description.
9-30.5(2) Hydrant Dimensions
Section 9-30.5(2)is replaced with the following:
Fire hydrants shall be Corey type(opening with the pressure)or compression type(opening against
pressure)conforming to AWWA C-502-85 with a 6 inch mechanical joint inlet and a main valve
opening(M.V.O.)of 5 1/4 inches,two 2 1/2 inch hose nozzles with National Standard Threads 7 1/2
threads per inch and one 4 inch pumper nozzles with the new Seattle Pattern 6 threads per inch,60
degrees V.Threads,outside diameter of male tread 4.875 and root diameter 4.6263. Hydrants shall
have a 1-1/4"pentagon operating nut opened by turning counter clockwise(left).
98
T9/13/2010
The two 2-1/2"hose nozzles shall be fitted with cast iron threaded caps with operating nut of the
same design and proportions as the hydrant stem nut.Caps shall be fitted with suitable neoprene
gaskets for positive water tightness under test pressures.
The 4"pumper nozzle shall be fitted with a Stortz adapter,4"Seattle Thread x 5" Stortz. Stortz
adapter shall be forged and/or extruded 6061-T6 aluminum alloy,hardcoat anodized. Threaded end
portion shall have no lugs and 2 set screws 180 degrees apart. Stortz face to be metal,no gasket to
weather. Stortz cap to have synthetic molded rubber gasket,and shall be attached to hydrant adapter
with 1/8"coated stainless steel aircraft cable.
Fire hydrants shall be installed per City of Renton Standard Details for fire hydrants,latest revisions.
9-30.6(3)B Polyethylene Pipe
Section 9-30.6(3)B has been modified as follows:
Polyethylene pipe shall not be used.
9-30.6(4) Service Fittings
Section 9-30.6(4)has been revised as follows:
(******)
Fittings used for copper tubing shall be compression type with gripper ring_
9-30.60 Meter Setters
Section 9-30.6(5)has been supplemented as follows:
I Meter setters shall be installed per the City of Renton Standard Details for water meters, latest
revision.
99
� i
� '
i
t .
� I
t
t
T
i
t
I
I
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
� (PART II )
I
1
L
t
1
1
i
I
1
1
� 1 I�
t �
t
i
1
i
i
i
i
I
1
1
SUB-SECTION 10.00000
INTRODUCTION
' Sub-Section 10.00000 describes the numbering format used with Division 10 of the Special Provisions
(Part 11). Division 10 is in CSI format and some modifications have been made to the typical numbering
system used in CSI. A"10." has been added to all of the CSI numbering in Division 10 in order to
separate items in this Section from the rest of the WSDOT Division numbering in the Special Provisions
' (Part 1). Furthermore, a DIVISION in CSI is equivalent to a SECTION in the Special Provisions (Part II) and
the 5-digit CSI Section number now becomes a Sub-Section.The following table illustrates the typical CSI
numbering on the left and the new numbering on the right:
CSI Standard Numbering Format Special Provisions(Part II) Numbering Format
(No CSI Standard) DIVISION 10
' DIVISION 1 SECTION 10.1
01410 Regulatory Requirements 10.01410 Regulatory Requirements
' DIVISION 2 SECTION 10.2
' 02222 Building Demolition 10.02222 Building Demolition
END OF SUB-SECTION
pw:\\Documents\Client\WA\Renton\8235810\Specifications\Div 10 Coding.dou
t
CITY OF RENTON
' LAKE WASHINGTON BEACH LIFT STATION REPLACEMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 10 -SPECIAL PROVISIONS PART II
' SECTION 10.01 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
' SUB-SECTION TITLE
NO.
10.01110 SUMMARY OF WORK
' 10.01140 WORK RESTRICTIONS
10.01410 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
10.01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
10.01610 PROJECT DESIGN CRITERIA
10:01612 SEISMIC DESIGN CRITERIA
' 10.01614 WIND DESIGN CRITERIA
10.01732 CUTTING AND PATCHING
' 10.01738 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
10.01756 TESTING, TRAINING,AND FACILITY START-UP
10.01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
10.01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
SECTION 10.02 -SITEWORK
10.02084 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES
10.02240 DEWATERING
10.02260 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
10.02490 PRECAST CONCRETE VAULTS
10.02820 FENCES AND GATES
SECTION 10.03—CONCRETE
10.03055 EPDXY BONDING ALL THREAD RODS IN CONCRETE
10.03071 EPDXIES
10.03072 EPDXY RESIN/PORTLAND CEMENT BONDING AGENT
10.03102 CONCRETE FORMWORK
10.03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
10.03600 GROUTS
SECTION 10.04—MASONRY
September 10, 2010 - FINAL TOC-1 8235B10
' pw:l\oco-pw-app:CarollolDocumentslClientlWAlRenton18235B10 ISpecificatlons\Special Provisions Part 11 TOC.doc
1
NOT USED
SECTION 10.05-METALS ,
10.05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL
i
SECTION 10.06-WOOD AND PLASTICS ,
NOT USED
SECTION 10.07-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
NOT USED.'
SECTION 10.08-DOORS AND WINDOWS ,
10.08320 ACCESS HATCHES
SECTION 10.09-FINISHES
10.09960A COATINGS
SECTION 10.10-SPECIALTIES
NOT USED
SECTION 10.11 -EQUIPMENT
10.11310 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS
10.11311 CHOPPER CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS AND ACCESSORIES '
SECTION 10.12-FURNISHINGS
NOT USED
SECTION 10.13-SPECIAL CONSTRUCTIONS '
NOT USED
SECTION 10.14-CONVEYING SYSTEMS
NOT USED '
SECTION 10.15-MECHANICAL
10.15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS '
10.15052 BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS '
10.15061 PIPE SUPPORTS
SECTION 10.15-MECHANICAL
September 10, 2010 - FINAL TOC-2 8235610
pw:Iloco-pw-app:CarollolDocumentsl Clientl WAlRenton18235B101SpecificatonslSpecial Provisions Part 11 TOC.doc
10.15062 PREFORMED CHANNEL PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEM
10.15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
10.15110 VALVES
' 10.15114 CHECK VALVES
10.15116 PLUG VALVES
10.15121 PIPE COUPLINGS
10.15251 DUCTILE IRON AWWA C151 PIPE
10.15265 PLASTIC PIPING AND TUBING
10.15281 SEAMLESS ASTM B 88 COPPER WATER TUBE
10.15956 PIPING SYSTEMS TESTING
10.15958 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT TESTING
' SECTION 10.16 - ELECTRICAL
10.16050 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
10.16052 HAZARDOUS CLASSIFIED AREA CONSTRUCTION
' 10.16070 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
10.16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
10.16123 600 VOLT OR LESS WIRES AND CABLES
10.16130 CONDUITS
10.16133 DUCT BANKS
10.16134 BOXES
10.16140 WIRING DEVICES
10.16210 UTILITY COORDINATION
10.16422 MOTOR STARTERS
' 10.16950 FIELD ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS
SECTION 10.17 -INSTRUMENTATION
10.17050 PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS
10.17201 LEVEL MEASUREMENT-SWITCHES
10.17404 PRESSURENACUUM MEASUREMENT- GAUGES
10.17407 PRESSURE MEASUREMENT-SUBMERSIBLE
10.17710 CONTROL SYSTEMS - PANELS, ENCLOSURES, AND PANEL COMPONENTS
September 10, 2010 - FINAL TOC-3 82351310
' pw:kloco-pw-app:CarollolDocument slClientlWAlRenton18235B101SpecificationslSpecial Provisions Part 11 TOC.doc
" 1
1
1
1
- 11
i
1
i
i
i
1
September 10, 2010 - FINAL TOC-4 82351310
pw:lloco-pw-app:CarollolDocumentslClientlWAlRenton18235B101SpecificationslSpecial Provisions Part 11 TOC.doc 1
t
SUB-SECTION 10.01110
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART GENERAL
' 1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Identification and summary description of the Project, the
Work, location, OWNER-furnished products, activities by others, coordination, and
early occupancy by OWNER.
1.02 THE WORK
A. The Work consists of construction of the Lake Washington Beach Lift Station,
including below-grade wet well and valve vault, inlet gravity sanitary sewer pipeline,
and above-grade control panel, antenna, backflow preventer, fencing, and entrance
gates. The Work also consists of decommission and partial demolition of the
existing Lake Washington Beach Lift Station, demolition of landscaped area,
' pavement rehabilitation, parking lot surface slurry sealing, parking lot restriping, and
electrical conduit extension and service modifications.
' B. Except as specifically noted otherwise, provide and pay for:
1. Insurance and bonds.
2. Labor, materials, and equipment.
3. Tools, equipment, and machinery required for construction.
4. Utilities required for construction.
5. Temporary facilities including sheeting and shoring.
6. Traffic control and dust control measures.
7. Other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of
the Work.
C. Secure and pay for all permits including OSHA excavation permits, Department of
Transportation permits, government fees, and licenses.
D. Comply with codes, ordinances, regulations, orders, and other legal requirements of
public authorities having bearing on the performance of the Work.
1.03 LOCATION OF PROJECT
A. The Work is located at Gene Coulon Memorial Beach Park off Lake Washington
Boulevard N in Renton, Washington.
1.04 OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT
A. OWNER will furnish the following products:
1. Rugid 9 telemetry unit.
2. Water service and meter as indicated on the Drawings.
,
September 10 2010 - FINAL 10.01110-1 82351310
p
p w:llcarollol Documentslc lien,WIIRenton18235B1 o/Spec cations/10.0111 o.dou
B. OWNER will:
1. Arrange for and deliver necessary shop drawings, product data, and samples
to CONTRACTOR.
2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site in accordance with construction
schedule.
3. Deliver supplier's bill of materials to CONTRACTOR. '
4. Inspect deliveries jointly with CONTRACTOR.
5. Submit claims for transportation damage.
6. Arrange for replacement of damaged, defective, or missing items.
7. Arrange for manufacturer's warranties, bonds, service, and inspections.
C. CONTRACTOR's responsibility for OWNER-furnished products:
1. Designating delivery date for each OWNER-furnished product.
2. Reviewing shop drawings, product data, and samples.
3._ Submitting notification of discrepancies or anticipated problems.
4. Receiving and unloading products at site.
5. Promptly inspecting products jointly with OWNER and recording shortages,
and damaged or defective items. '
6. Handling products at site, including uncrating and storage.
7. Protecting products from damage.
8. Installing, including assembly, connections, adjustments, tests, and finish ,
products in accordance with Contract Documents.
9. Providing operating oils, lubricants, and incidental materials required for
complete installation. '
10. Repairing or replacing items damaged after receipt until date of Substantial
Completion of the Work by OWNER.
D. When OWNER fails to deliver products in accordance with approved Construction ,
Schedule, adjustments will be made to Contract Times and Contract Price as
stipulated in General Conditions.
1.05 ACTIVITIES BY OTHERS
A. OWNER, utilities, and others may perform activities within Project area while the
Work is in progress.
1. CONTRACTOR to schedule the Work with OWNER, utilities, and others to
minimize mutual interference.
B. Activities by others which may affect performance of work include:
1. . Installation of Waterline and Service Meter: CONTRACTOR to provide ,
OWNER with a three (3) day window to install water service and meter.
CONTRACTOR to provide OWNER with fourteen days notice of window.
Installation of water service and meter shall occur after Phase 1 Demolition
indicated on the Drawings. ,
C. CONTRACTOR to cooperate with others to minimize interference and delays.
1. When cooperation fails, CONTRACTOR to submit recommendations and
perform Work in coordination with work of others.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.01110-2 8235B10
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.01110.docx
D. When the Work depends for proper execution or results upon work performed by
others, CONTRACTOR to inspect and promptly report apparent discrepancies or
defects in work performed by others.
1. CONTRACTOR to assume responsibility for work performed by others, except
for defects reported as specified in this paragraph and defects which may
become apparent in work performed by others after execution of the Work.
1.06 COORDINATION OF WORK
A. CONTRACTOR to maintain overall coordination of the Work.
B. CONTRACTOR to obtain construction schedules from each subcontractor, and
require each subcontractor to maintain schedules and coordinate modifications.
1.07 EARLY OCCUPANCY OF PORTIONS OF WORK
A. OWNER's partial utilization of portions of Work prior to final acceptance of the
' completed Work will not be made.
B. OWNER to issue Certificates of Substantial Completion for each designated portion
of Work prior to OWNER occupancy.
1. Such certificate of Substantial Completion will describe the portion of the Work
to be occupied by OWNER, items that may be incomplete or defective, date of
occupancy by OWNER, and other information required by OWNER and
CONTRACTOR.
C. After OWNER occupancy, allow access for OWNER's personnel, access for others
authorized by OWNER, and OWNER operation of equipment and systems.
D. Following occupancy, OWNER will:
1. Provide power to operate equipment and systems.
2. Repair damage caused by OWNER's occupancy.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 ' EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
i
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.01110-3 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl OlSpecifications/10.01110.docx
1
e
1
i
i
1
i .
September 10,.2010 - FINAL 10.01110-4 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235610/Specificadons/10.01110.docx
SUB-SECTION 10.01140
WORK RESTRICTIONS
PART GENERAL
t1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Requirements for sequencing and scheduling the Work affected
' by existing site and facility, work restrictions, and coordination between construction
operations and lift station operations:
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
a. Sub-Section 10.01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.
1.02 GENERAL CONSTRAINTS ON SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING OF WORK
A. Construction Period:
1. Construction shall be completed within the allowed number of working days
from the Notice to Proceed date as described in the Contract Documents.
2. Contractor shall be responsible for liquidated damages as calculated and
specified in the WSDOT Standard Specifications for overrun of allotted
construction period.
B. Work sequence and constraints:
1. Utilize description of critical events in work sequence in this Sub-Section as a
guideline for scheduling and undertaking the Work.
2. Work sequence and constraints presented do not include all items affecting
completion of the Work, but are intended to describe critical events necessary
to minimize disruption of the existing facilities.
1.03 INTERRUPTION OF PROCESSES
A. Indicate required shutdowns of existing facilities or interruptions of existing
operations on Progress Schedule.
B. Submit notification of required shutdowns of existing facilities at least 7 days prior to
the planned date of shutdown.
C. Do not begin alterations until ENGINEER's written permission has been received.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.01140-1 8235610
pw:l/Carollo/Documents lClienYWAlRemon/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.01140.docx
t
D. Minimize shutdown times by thorough advanced planning. Have required
equipment, materials, and labor on hand at time of shutdown.
E. Where required to minimize lift station interruptions while complying with specified
sequencing constraints, provide temporary pumping, power, lighting, controls,
instrumentation, and safety devices.
1.04 REQUIREMENTS FOR OPERATION OF EXISTING LIFT STATION ,
A. Do not remove or demolish existing facilities required to keep the existing lift station
operational at the capacities specified until the existing facilities are replaced by
temporary, new, or upgraded facilities or equipment, unless otherwise indicated.
The replacement facilities shall have been tested and demonstrated to be
operational prior to removing or demolishing existing facilities, unless otherwise
indicated.
1.05 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE ACCESS
A. Provide safe, continuous access to lift station control equipment for lift station
maintenance personnel.
1.06 UTILITIES
A. Maintain electrical, telephone, water, gas, sanitary facilities, and other utilities within
existing facilities in service. Provide temporary utilities when necessary.
1.07 COORDINATION OF WORK
A. Maintain overall coordination of the Work.
B. Obtain construction schedules from subcontractors and suppliers, and assume
responsibility for correctness. t
C. Incorporate schedules from subcontractors and suppliers into Progress Schedule to
plan for and comply with sequencing constraints. . ,
1.08 WORK BY OTHERS
A. Where proper execution of the Work depends upon work by others, inspect and
promptly report discrepancies and defects.
1.09 WORK SEQUENCE t
A. This possible construction sequence is included for informational purposes only:
1. Demolish components indicated in the Drawings that do not affect operation of
the existing lift station.
2. Allow OWNER to install water service and meter as indicated on the Drawings.
3. Construct wet well and valve vault and install piping, conduit and other
appurtenances. Coordinate with City to close restroom facilities in the Park,
limiting sewer flow to inflow and infiltration flows only. Install point of
connection as indicated on the Drawings. Minimize shutdown of existing lift
station.
4. Pressure test new piping and test new lift station with temporary power.
t
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.01140-2 8235B10
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton1 8235Bl0/Specifications/10.01140.docx
t
5. Construction site improvements in location of new lift station.
6. Coordinate with City to close restroom facilities in the Park, limiting sewer flow
to inflow and infiltration flows only. Temporarily plug influent sewer at existing
wet well and decommission and demolish items pertaining to operation of the
existing lift station.
7. Convert existing wet well to flow-thru manhole and make final connections for
operation of new lift station. Connect to utility power. Remove temporary plug.
Minimize shutdown of existing lift station.
8. Substantial completion of new lift station.
9. Construct site improvements.
10. Commence lift station operation of new lift station.
1.10 TEMPORARY SERVICES, MATERIALS, AND EQUIPMENT
A. As specified in Sub-Section 10.01500.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SUB-SECTION
1
1
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.01140-3 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.01140.docx
l
i
t
i
t
1 .
t
I
t .
t
. I
t .
I
t
i
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.01140-4 8235610
pw:HCarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specificabons/10.01140.docx
SUB-SECTION 10.01410
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Regulatory requirements:
1. , Building code.
2. Electrical code.
3. Energy code.
4. Fire code.
5. Mechanical code.
6. Plumbing code.
t1.02 REFERENCES
A. International Code Council (ICC):
1. 2006 International Building Code (IBC).
2. 2006 International Energy Conservation Code (IECC).
3. 2006 International Fire Code (IFC).
4. 2006 International Mechanical Code (IMC).
5. 2006 International Plumbing Code (IPC).
i B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
j 1. 2008 NFPA 70 National Electric Code.
2. 2009 NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.
C. State Building Codes Council:
1. Washington State Building Code (SBC).,
' 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design requirements:
1. Building code:
a. Washington State Building Code.
2. Electrical code:
a. 2008 National Electric Code.
b. 2009 Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.
3. Energy conservation code:
a. 2006 International Energy Conservation Code.
4. Fire code:
a. 2006 International Fire Code.
5. Mechanical code:
a. 2006 International Mechanical Code.
6. Plumbing code:
a. 2006 International Plumbing Code.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.01410-1 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235 B10/Specifications/10.01410.doc
t
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 EXECUTION j
Not used.
END OF SUB-SECTION
September 10 2010 - FINA L 10.01410-2 8235810 t
pw://Ca rollo/Documents/ClientNVA/Renton/8235 B10/Specifications/10.01410.doc
t
SUB-SECTION 10.01500
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART1 GENERAL
t1.01 SUMMARY
A. . Sub-Section includes:
1. Furnishing, maintaining, and removing construction facilities and temporary
controls, including temporary utilities, construction aids, barriers and
enclosures, security, access roads, temporary controls, project sign, field
offices and sheds, and removal after construction.
B. Related Sections/Sub-Sections:
1 1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sections/Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this
Sub-Section. This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided for
convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty
of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
with the Contract Documents.
4. Section 1-05 - Control of Work.
5. Sub-Section 10.15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
1.02 REFERENCE
A. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
t1.03 SUBMITTALS
1 A. In accordance with Section 1-05.
B. Product data. .
1.04 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A. Temporary electrical power:
1. Arrange with local utility to provide adequate temporary electrical service.
2. Provide and maintain adequate jobsite power distribution facilities conforming
to applicable Laws and Regulations.
3. Provide, maintain, and pay for electric power for performance of the Work:
a. When using permanent facilities, provide separate meter and reimburse
OWNER for power used in connection with performance of the Work.
tB. Temporary electrical lighting:
1. In work areas, provide temporary lighting sufficient to maintain lighting levels
during working hours not less than lighting levels required by Occupational
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.01500-1 8235610
pw:ll Carollo/Docu menl,lClien t/WAl Renl on18235B10/1pecilcalons110.01500.1oc
Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) and state agency which administers
OSHA regulations where Project is located.
2. When available, permanent lighting facilities may be used in lieu of temporary
facilities:
a. Prior to final acceptance of the Work, replace bulbs, lamps, or tubes used
by CONTRACTOR for lighting.
C. Temporary heating, cooling, and ventilating:
1. Heat and ventilate work areas to protect the Work from damage by freezing,
high temperatures, weather, and to provide safe environment for workers.
2. Permanent heating system may be utilized when sufficiently completed to
allow safe operation.
D. Temporary water:
1. Pay for and construct facilities necessary to furnish potable water for human
consumption and non-potable water for use during construction.
2. Remove temporary piping and connections and restore affected portions of the
facility to original condition before Substantial Completion. 1
3. Pay for water used for construction prior to Substantial Completion.
4. Development of potable water supply:
a. Potable water is not available at construction site.
b. Provide potable water for human consumption during construction period.
c. Furnish potable water that meets requirements of Laws and Regulations.
5. Development of non-potable water supply:
a. Post ample signs throughout the work area warning that water is not
potable.
b. Non-potable water is available from hydrants at the site. Coordinate with
City for connection and requirements of non-potable water supply.
c. Provide temporary ramps on both sides of hose where located in parking
lot, outside of Limits of Contractor Operations.
E. Temporary sanitary facilities:
1. Provide suitable and adequate sanitary facilities that are in compliance with
applicable Laws and Regulations.
2. At completion of the Work, remove sanitary facilities and leave site in neat and
sanitary condition.
F. Temporary fire protection: Provide sufficient number of fire extinguishers of type and
capacity required to protect the Work and ancillary facilities.
G. First aid: Post first aid facilities and information posters conforming to requirements
of OSHA and other applicable Laws and Regulations in readily accessible locations.
H. Maintain utilities in existing facilities in service. Provide temporary utilities when
necessary.
1.05 CONSTRUCTION AIDS
A. Provide railings, kick plates, enclosures, safety devices, and controls required by
Laws and Regulations and as required for adequate protection of life and property.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.01500-2 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documentsi Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl O/Specifications/10.01500.doc
B. Use construction hoists,elevators, scaffolds, stages, shoring, and similar temporary
facilities of ample size and capacity to adequately support and move loads.
C. Design temporary supports with adequate safety factor to assure adequate load
bearing capability:
1. When requested, submit design calculations by professional registered
engineer prior to application of loads.
2. Submitted design calculations are for information and record purposes only.
D. Accident prevention:
1. Exercise precautions throughout construction for protection of persons and
property.
2. Observe safety provisions of applicable Laws and Regulations.
3. Guard machinery and equipment, and eliminate other hazards.
4. Make reports required by authorities having jurisdiction, and permit safety
inspections of the Work.
5. Before commencing construction work, take necessary action to comply with
provisions for safety and accident prevention.
E. Barricades:
1. Place barriers at ends of excavations and along excavations to warn
pedestrian and vehicular traffic of excavations.
2. Provide barriers with flashing lights after dark.
3. Keep barriers in place until excavations are entirely backfilled and compacted.
4. Barricade excavations to prevent persons from entering excavated areas in
streets, roadways, parking lots, treatment plants, or other public or private
areas.
F. Warning devices and barricades: Adequately identify and guard hazardous areas
and conditions by visual warning devices and, where necessary, physical barriers:
1. Devices shall conform to minimum requirements of OSHA and State agency
which administers OSHA regulations where Project is located.
G. Hazards in public right-of-way:
1. Mark at reasonable intervals, trenches and other continuous excavations in
public right-of-way, running parallel to general flow of traffic, with traffic cones,
barricades, or other suitable visual markers during daylight hours:
a. During hours of darkness, provide markers with torches, flashers, or other
adequate lights.
2. At intersections or for pits and similar excavations, where traffic may
reasonably be expected to approach head on, protect excavations by
continuous barricades:
a. During hours of darkness, provide warning lights at close intervals.
H. Hazards in protected areas: Mark or guard excavations in areas from which public is
excluded, in manner appropriate for hazard.
I. Above grade protection: On multi-level structures, provide safety protection that
meets requirements of OSHA and State agency which administers OSHA
regulations where Project is located.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.01500-3 8235810
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235 B10/Specifications/10.01500.doc
J. Protect existing structures, trees, shrubs, and other items to be preserved on
Project site from injury, damage or destruction by vehicles, equipment, worker or '
other agents with substantial barricades or other devices ces commensurate with
hazards.
K. Fences:
1. Enclose site of the Work with fence adequate to protect the Work against acts
of theft, violence and vandalism.
2. When entire or part of site is to be permanently fenced, permanent fence may
be built to serve for both permanent and temporary protection of the work site,
provided that damaged or defaced fencing is replaced prior to final
acceptance.
3. Protect temporary and permanent openings and close openings in existing
fences to prevent intrusion by unauthorized persons. Bear responsibility for
protection of plant and material on site of the Work when openings in existing
fences are not closed.
4. During night hours, weekends, holidays, and other times when no work is
performed at site, provide temporary closures or enlist services of security
guards to protect temporary openings.
5. Fence temporary openings when openings are no longer necessary.
1.06 SECURITY
A. Make adequate provision for protection of the work area against fire, theft, and
vandalism, and for protection of public against exposure to injury. j
1.07 TEMPORARY CONTROLS
A. Dust control:
1. Prevent dust nuisance caused by operations, unpaved roads, excavation,
backfilling, demolition, or other activities.
2. Control dust by sprinkling with water, use of dust palliatives, modification of
operations, or other means acceptable to agencies having jurisdiction.
B. Noise control:
1. In inhabited areas, particularly residential, perform operations in manner to
minimize noise.
2. In residential areas, take special measures to suppress noise during night
hours.
C. Mud control:
o trot:
1. Prevent mud nuisance caused by construction operations, unpaved roads,
excavation, backfilling, demolition, or other activities.
1.08 REMOVAL
A. Remove temporary buildings and furnishings before inspection final acceptance or
when directed.
B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.01500-4 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.01500.doc
C. Remove underground installations to minimum depth of 24 inches and grade to
match surrounding conditions.
D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to specified or original condition.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SUB-SECTION
i
1
!
t
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.01500-5 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.01500.doc
t
t
t �
t
t
t
t
t
t
t.
t
t
1
t
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.01500-6 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClientMA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.01500.doc
t
SUB-SECTION 10.01610
PROJECT DESIGN CRITERIA
PART GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Project design criteria such as temperature and site
elevation.
1.02 PROJECT DESIGN CRITERIA
A. All equipment and materials for the project are to be suitable for performance in a
submersible wastewater lift station environment and under following conditions:
1. Design temperatures are:
a. Outdoor temperatures: 0 to 110 degrees Fahrenheit.
b. Indoor temperatures for the following structures:
1) Wet well and valve vault: 40 to 100 degrees Fahrenheit.
2. Moisture conditions: Defined in individual equipment sections.
3. Site elevation: Approximately 27 feet above mean sea level.
PART2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SUB-SECTION
I
1
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.01610-1 8235810
pw:1 1ar oflo1Doc uments1ClieWMA/Renton18235B1 o/1pecifications/10.01811.1ou
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t.
t
t
�I
t
i
t
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.01610-2 82351310
t
pw://Carollo/DocumentstClient[WA/Renton1 8235B10/Specifications/10.0161 O.docx
t
SUB-SECTION 10.01612
SEISMIC DESIGN CRITERIA
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Seismic design criteria for the following:
9
1. Anchorage of mechanical and electrical equipment.
2. Seismic design and design of anchorage for small tanks fabricated off site and
shipped to the Project site.
3. Other structures or items as specified or indicated on the Drawings.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
�. 3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty'of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
a. Sub-Section 10.01410 - Regulatory Requirements.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):
1. 7-05 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design requirements.
1. Design in accordance with the requirements of the building code as specified
in Sub-Section 10.01410:
a. Design spectral acceleration at short period, SpS: 0.965.
b. Component amplification factor, ap: In accordance with ASCE 7-05,
Tables 13.5-1 and 13.6-1.
c. Component response modification factor, RP: In accordance with ASCE
7-05, Tables 13.5-1 and 13.6-1.
d. Component importance factor, Ip: Per ASCE 7.
2. Do not use friction to resist sliding due to seismic forces.
3. Use anchor bolts, bolts, or welded studs for anchors for resisting seismic
forces. Anchor bolts used to resist seismic forces shall have a standard hex
bolt head. Do not use anchor bolts fabricated from rod stock with an L or
J-shape.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.01612-1 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClientfWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.01612.doc
l
4. Do not use chemical anchors, concrete anchors, flush shells, p owder actuated
fasteners, sleeve anchors, or other types of anchors unless indicated on the
Drawings or accepted in writing by the ENGINEER.
5. Seismic forces must be resisted by direct bearing on the fasteners used to
resist seismic forces. Do not use connections that use friction to resist seismic
forces.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings and calculations: Complete shop drawings and seismic calculations.
B. Calculations shall be signed and stamped by a civil or structural engineer licensed
in the state where the Project is located.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SUB-SECTION
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.01612-2 82351310
pw:#Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.01612.doc
SUB-SECTION 10.01614
WIND DESIGN CRITERIA
I
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Wind design criteria.
B. Related Sub-Section:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
' is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
a. Sub-Section 10.01410 -Regulatory Requirements.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design requirements:
1. Building code criteria: Design for wind in accordance with building code as
specified in Sub-Section 10.01410:
a. Occupancy category: III.
f b. Basic wind speed: 85 miles per hour.
c. Exposure category: C.
d. Topographic factor, Kt: 1.0.
e. Wind importance factor, I,: 1.00.
2. Use anchor bolts, bolts, or welded studs for anchors for resisting wind forces.
Anchor bolts used to resist wind forces shall have a standard hex bolt head.
Do not use anchor bolts fabricated from rod stock with an L or J shape:
a. Do not use concrete anchors, sleeve anchors, flush shells, chemical
anchors, powder actuated fasteners, or other types of anchor unless
I indicated on the Drawings or accepted in writing by the ENGINEER.
b. Wind forces must be resisted by direct bearing on the anchors used to
resist wind forces. Do not use connections which use friction to resist wind
forces.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
jA. Shop drawings and calculations: Complete shop drawings and wind design
calculations.
B. Calculations shall be signed and stamped by a civil or structural engineer licensed
in the state where the Project is located.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.01614-1 82351310
pw://Carollo/Document s/Client[WA/Renton/8235810/Specificafions/10.01614.docx
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SUB-SECTION
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.01614-2 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/I0.01614.docx
j
SUB-SECTION 10.01732
CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Cutting and patching existing and new construction.
B. . Related Sections/Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sections/Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this
Sub-Section. This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided for
convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty
of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 1-05 - Control of Work.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 1-05.
B. Cutting and patching plan:
1. Submit details of proposed construction before cutting and patching
construction commences affecting:
a. Work of OWNER or of others.
b. Structural integrity of element of Project.
2. Cutting and patching plan shall include the following:
a. Identification of Work.
b. Description of affected construction.
c. Necessity for cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation.
d. Description of proposed construction.
e. Scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation.
i
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Comply with specifications and standards for products involved.
September 1 - -
p 0, 2010 FINAL 10.01732 1 8235610
pw:HCarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.01732.docx
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to ensure structural integrity of
affected portion of Work.
B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage and
persons from injury.
C. Provide protection from elements for that portion of Project which may be exposed
by cutting and patching, and maintain excavations free from water.
3.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, fit, and patch when required to:
1. Make its several parts fit together properly.
2. Remove and replace construction not conforming to Contract Documents.
3. Remove samples of installed construction as specified for testing.
4. Provide routine penetrations of nonstructural surfaces for installation of piping
and electrical conduit.
B. Execute cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage and will
provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs.
C. Openings in existing concrete:
1. Create openings by:
a. Saw cutting completely through concrete.
b. Scoring edges of opening with saw to at least 1-inch depth on both
surfaces (when accessible) and removing concrete by chipping.
2. Do not allow saw cuts to extend beyond limits of opening.
3. Make corners square and true by combination of core drilling and grinding or
chipping.
4. Prevent debris from falling into adjacent tanks or channels in service or from
damaging existing equipment and other facilities.
D. Sizing of openings in existing concrete:
1. Make openings sufficiently large to permit final alignment of pipe and fittings
without deflections.
2. Allow adequate space for packing around pipes and conduit to ensure water
tightness.
E. Grouting pipes in place:
1. Sandblast concrete surfaces and thoroughly clean sand and other foreign
material from surfaces prior to placing grout.
2. Grout pipes, sleeves, castings, and conduits in place by pouring grout under a
head of at least 4 inches. Vibrate grout into place. Completely fill the spaces
occupied by pipes, sleeves, castings, and conduits.
3. Water cure the grout.
F. Connections to existing pipes:
1. Cut existing pipe square.
2. Properly prepare the ends for the connection indicated on the Drawings.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.01732-2 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifica6ons/10.01732.docx
l
3. Repair any damage to existing lining and coating.
G. Rehabilitate all areas affected by removal of existing equipment, equipment pads
and bases, piping, supports, electrical panels, electric devices, and conduits such
that little or no evidence of the previous installation remains:
1. Fill areas in existing floors, walls, and ceilings from removed piping, conduit
and fasteners with non-shrink grout and finish smooth.
2. Remove concrete bases for equipment and supports by:
a. Saw cutting clean, straight lines with a depth equal to the concrete cover
over reinforcement minus 1/2 inch below finished surface. Do not cut
existing reinforcement on floors.
b. Chip concrete within scored lines,and cut exposed reinforcing steel and
anchor bolts.
c. Patch with non-shrink grout to match adjacent grade and finish.
3. Terminate abandoned piping and conduits with blind flanges, caps, or plugs.
H. Treat existing concrete reinforcement as follows:
>� 1. Where existing reinforcement is to remain, protect, clean, and extend into new
concrete.
2. Where existing reinforcement is not to be retained, cut off as follows:
a. Where new concrete joins existing concrete at the removal line, cut
reinforcement flush with concrete surface at the removal line.
b. Where concrete surface at the removal line is the finished surface, cut
reinforcement 2 inches below the surface, paint ends with epoxy, and
patch holes with dry pack mortar.
END OF SUB-SECTION
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.01732-3 8235B10
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specificabons/10.01732.docx
i
t
,1
t
t
t
l
t
t
t
t
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.01732-4 8235610
pw:/ICarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton18235 B10/Specifications/10.01732.docx
SUB-SECTION 10.01738
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Demolition of structures or portions of structures.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals for information only:
1. Permits and notices authorizing demolition.
2. Certificates of severance of utility services.
3. Permit for transport and disposal of debris.
4. Demolition procedures and operational sequence.
B. Project record documents: Include locations of service lines and capped utilities.
1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Dispose of debris in accordance with governing regulatory agencies.
B. Comply with applicable air pollution control regulations.
C. Conform to existing environmental requirements and regulations regarding noise,
dust, and vibration.
D. Obtain permits for building demolition, transportation of debris to disposal site and
dust control.
1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not interfere with use of adjacent buildings. Maintain free and safe passage to
and from.
B. Prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of structures adjacent services,
landscaping, curbing and trees. Provide and place bracing or shoring. Assume
liability for movement, settlement, or collapse. Promptly repair damage.
C. Cease operations and notify ENGINEER immediately when safety of structure
appears to be endangered. Take precautions to properly support structure. Do not
resume operations until safety is restored.
D. Provide erect and maintain barricades, lighting, guardrails, and protective devices
as required to protect building occupants, general public, workers, and adjoining
property.
l
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.01738-1 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client ANA/Renton/8235B10/Specificatlons/l0.01738.docx
1.05 EXISTING SERVICES
A. Arrange and pay for capping and plugging utility services. Disconnect and stub off.
Notify affected utility company in advance and obtain approval before starting
demolition.
B. Place markers to indicate location of disconnected services.
1.06 MAINTAINING TRAFFIC j
A. Do not close or obstruct roadways without permits.
B. Conduct operations with minimum interference to public or private roadways.
1.07 MATERIALS
A. Materials and equipment to be retained by OWNER:
1. Embedded relics and antiques such as cornerstones, cornerstone contents,
commemorative plaques and tablets.
2. As indicated on the Drawings.
B. Materials and equipment to be reinstalled:
1. Remove and relocate existing 9 Ya i antenna.
2. As indicated on the Drawings.
C., CONTRACTOR shall furnish all materials, tools, equipment, devices,
appurtenances, facilities, and services required for performing selective demolition
work,indicated on the Drawings and described within this Sub-Section.
D. Erect weatherproof closures for exterior openings. Maintain exit requirements.
E. Erect and maintain dustproof partitions as required to prevent spread of dust,
fumes, and smoke to other parts of building. On completion, remove partitions and
repair damaged surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.
F. Provide and maintain protective devices to prevent injury from falling objects.
G. Locate guardrails in stairwells and around open shafts to protect workers. Post
clearly visible warning signs.
H. Cause as little inconvenience to adjacent occupied building areas as possible.
I. Protect landscaping, benchmarks and existing construction to remain from damage
or displacement.
J. Carefully remove designated materials and equipment to be retained by OWNER or
reinstalled. Deliver materials and equipment when and where directed by
ENGINEER. Store and protect materials and equipment to be reinstalled.
1.08 DEMOLITION
A. Demolish designated structures of portions of structures and appurtenances in
orderly and careful manner.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.01738-2 82351310
pw://CarollolDocumen is/ClientfWA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.01738.docx
1
B. Assume possession of demolished materials, unless specified otherwise. Remove
demolished materials from site at least bi-weekly.
C. Prevent airborne dust. Use water or dust palliative when necessary. Provide and
maintain hoses and connections to water main or hydrant.
D. Do not burn materials on site.
E. Immediately upon discovery, remove and dispose of contaminated, vermin-infested,
or dangerous materials by safe means so as not to endanger health of workers and
public.
F. Rough grade areas affected by demolition.
G. Remove demolished materials, tools, and equipment upon completion of demolition.
1.09 REPAIR
A. Repair damage caused by demolition.
PART PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions pertaining to demolition work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Utilities:
1. Disconnect any remaining utility services.
2. Plug or cap cut pipes and conduits with removable plugs or caps acceptable to
ENGINEER.
B. Protection:
1. Use saw cutting and other methods acceptable to ENGINEER to protect
adjacent facilities.
2. Provide berms and other means acceptable to ENGINEER to keep drainage
from demolition areas.
3.03
DEMOLITION
A. Completely remove from project site structures specified or indicated on the
Drawings to be demolished.
1. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, demolition includes
removal of slabs, footings, and foundations, piping, conduits, and
appurtenances and backfilling of resulting voids with suitable excavated or
imported material, compacted to 95 percent relative density.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.01738-3 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.01738.docx
I
END OF SUB-SECTION
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.01738-4 8235610
pw:HCarollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235B10/Specificatons/10.01738.docx
i
SUB-SECTION 10.01756
TESTING, TRAINING, AND FACILITY START-UP
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Requirements for equipment and system testing and facility
start-up, including the following:
1. Start-up plan.
2. Performance testing.
3. General start-up and testing procedures.
4. Functional testing.
5. Operational testing.
6. Certificate of proper installation.
7. Services of manufacturer's representatives.
8. Training of OWNER's personnel.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
a. Sub-Section 10.15050 - Basic Mechanical Material and Methods'.
b. Sub-Section 10.15958 - Mechanical Equipment Testing.
c. Sub-Section 10.16950 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests.
d. Sub-Section 10.17950 -Testing, Calibration, and Commissioning.
1.02 GENERAL TESTING, TRAINING, AND START-UP REQUIREMENTS
A. Contract requirements: Testing, training, and start-up are requisite to the
satisfactory completion of the Contract.
B. Complete testing, training, and start-up within the Contract Times.
C. Allow realistic durations in the Progress Schedule for testing, training, and start-up
activities.
D. Furnish labor, power, chemicals, tools, equipment, instruments, and services
required for and incidental to completing functional testing, performance testing, and
operational testing.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.01756-1 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235 Bl0/Specifications/I0.01756.doc
E. Provide competent, experienced technical representatives of equipment
manufacturers for assembly, installation and testing guidance, and operator training.
1.03 START-UP PLAN
A. Submit start-up plan for each piece of equipment and each system not less than
3 weeks prior to planned initial start-up of equipment or system.
B. Provide detailed sub-network of Progress Schedule with the following activities
identified:
1. Manufacturer's services.
2. Installation certifications.
3. Operator training.
4. Submission of Operation and Maintenance Manual.
5. Functional testing.
6. Performance testing.
7. Operational testing.
C. Provide testing plan with test logs for each item of equipment and each system
when specified. Include testing of alarms, control circuits, capacities, speeds, flows,
pressures, vibrations, sound levels, and other parameters.
D. Provide summary of shutdown requirements for existing systems which are
necessary to complete start-up of new equipment and systems.
E. Revise and update start-up plan based upon review comments, actual progress, or
to accommodate changes in the sequence of activities.
F. ENGINEER to make sole determination as to whether CONTRACTOR is not ready
for start-up. Should the initial start-up have to be rescheduled, CONTRACTOR to
provide minimum 7 days notification for rescheduled start-up and pay OWNER
$1,000 to cover ENGINEER travel expenses.
1.04 PERFORMANCE TESTING
A. Test equipment for proper performance at point of manufacture or assembly when
specified.
B. When source quality control testing is specified:
1. Demonstrate equipment meets specified performance requirements.
2. Provide certified copies of test results.
3. Do not ship equipment until certified copies have received written acceptance
from ENGINEER. Written acceptance does not constitute final acceptance.
4. Perform testing as specified in the equipment Sub-Sections.
1.05 GENERAL START-UP AND TESTING PROCEDURES
A. Mechanical systems: As specified in the individual equipment Sub-Sections and
Sub-Sections 10.15050 and 10.15958:
1. Remove rust preventatives and oils applied to protect equipment during
construction.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.01756-2 8235610
pw:HCarollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235 Bl O/Specifications/10.01756.doc
i
2. Flush lubrication systems and dispose of flushing oils. Recharge lubrication
system with lubricant recommended by manufacturer.
3. Flush fuel system and provide fuel for testing and start-up.
4. Install and adjust packing, mechanical seals, O-rings, and other seals.
Replace defective seals.
5. Remove temporary supports, bracing, or other foreign objects installed to
prevent damage during shipment, storage, and erection.
6. Check rotating machinery for correct direction of rotation and for freedom of
moving parts before connecting driver.
7. Perform cold alignment and hot alignment to manufacturer's tolerances.
8. Adjust V-belt tension and variable pitch sheaves.
9. Inspect hand and motorized valves for proper adjustment. Tighten packing
glands to insure no leakage, but permit valve stems to rotate without galling.
Verify valve seats are positioned for proper flow direction.
10. Tighten leaking flanges or replace flange gasket. Inspect screwed joints for
leakage.
i11. Install gratings, safety chains, handrails, shaft guards, and sidewalks prior to
operational testing.
B. Electrical systems: As specified in Sub-Section 10.16950 and the individual
equipment Sub-Sections:
1. Perform insulation resistance tests on wiring except 120 volt lighting, wiring,
and control wiring inside electrical panels.
2. Perform continuity tests on grounding systems.
3. Test and set switchgear and circuit breaker relays for proper operation.
4. Perform direct current high potential tests on all cables that will operate at
more than 2,000 volts. Obtain services of independent testing lab to perform
tests.
5. Check motors for actual full load amperage draw. Compare to nameplate
value.
C. Instrumentation systems: As specified in Sub-Section 10.17950 and the individual
equipment Sub-Sections:
1. Bench or field calibrate instruments and make required adjustments and
control point settings.
2. Leak test pneumatic controls and instrument air piping.
L' 3. Energize transmitting and control signal systems, verify proper operation,
ranges, and settings.
1.06 FUNCTIONAL TESTING
A. Perform checkout and performance testing as specified in the individual equipment
Sub-Sections.
B. Functionally test mechanical and electrical equipment, and instrumentation and
controls systems for proper operation after general start-up and testing tasks have
been completed.
C. Demonstrate proper rotation, alignment, speed, flow, pressure, vibration, sound
level, adjustments, and calibration. Perform initial checks in the presence of and
with the assistance of the manufacturer's representative.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.01756-3 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235B10/Specificabons/10.01756.doc
D. Demonstrate proper operation of each instrument loop function including alarms,
local and remote controls, instrumentation, and other equipment functions.
Generate signals with test equipment to simulate operating conditions in each
control mode.
E. Conduct continuous 4-hour test under full load conditions. Replace parts which
. operate improperly.
1.07 OPERATIONAL TESTING
A. After completion of operator training, conduct operational test of the entire facility.
Demonstrate satisfactory operation of equipment and systems in actual operation.
B. Conduct operational test for continuous 2-day period.
C. OWNER will provide operations personnel, power, fuel, and other consumables for
duration of test.
D. Immediately correct defects in material, workmanship, or equipment which became
evident during operational test.
E. Repeat operational test when malfunctions or deficiencies cause shutdown or
partial operation of the facility or results in performance that is less than specified.
1.08 CERTIFICATE OF PROPER INSTALLATION
A. At completion of Functional Testing, furnish written report prepared and signed by
manufacturer's authorized representative, certifying equipment:
1. Has been properly installed, adjusted, aligned, and lubricated.
2. Is free of any stresses imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts.
3. Is suitable for satisfactory full-time operation under full load conditions.
4. Operates within the allowable limits for vibration.
5. Controls, protective devices, instrumentation, and control panels furnished as
part of the equipment package are properly installed, calibrated, and
functioning.
6. Control logic for start-up, shutdown, sequencing, interlocks, and emergency
shutdown have been tested and are properly functioning.
B. Furnish written report prepared and signed by the electrical and/or instrumentation
subcontractor certifying:
1. Motor control logic that resides in motor control centers, control panels, and
circuit boards furnished by the electrical and/or instrumentation subcontractor
has been calibrated and tested and is properly operating.
2. Control logic for equipment start-up, shutdown, sequencing, interlocks, and
emergency shutdown has been tested and is properly operating.
3. Co-sign the reports along with the manufacturer's representative and
subcontractors.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.01756-4 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235 B10/Specifications/10.01756.doc.
1.09 TRAINING OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
A. Provide operations and maintenance training for items of mechanical, electrical, and
instrumentation equipment. Utilize manufacturer's representatives to conduct
training sessions.
B. Coordinate training sessions to prevent overlapping sessions. Arrange sessions so
that individual operators and maintenance technicians do not attend more than
2 sessions per week.
C. Provide Operation and Maintenance Manual for specific pieces of equipment or
systems 1 month prior to training session for that piece of equipment or system.
D. Satisfactorily complete functional testing before beginning operator training.
E. Training sessions: Provide training sessions for equipment as specified in the
individual equipment Sub-Sections.
F. The CONTRACTOR shall videotape all training sessions and provide a copy for the
OWNER.
G. The CONTRACTOR shall designate and provide 1 or more persons to be
responsible for coordinating and expediting his/her training duties. The person or
persons so designated shall be present at all training coordination meetings with the
OWNER.
H. The CONTRACTOR's coordinator shall coordinate the training periods with
OWNER personnel and manufacturer's representatives, and shall submit a training
schedule for each piece of equipment or system for which training is to be provided.
Such training schedule shall be submitted not less than 21 calendar days prior to
the time that the associated training is to be provided and shall be based on the
current plan of operation.
f 1.10 RECORD KEEPING
A. Maintain and submit following records generated during start-up and testing phase
�,. of Project:
1. Daily logs of equipment testing identifying all tests conducted and outcome.
�. 2. Logs of time spent by manufacturer's representatives performing services on
the job site.
3. Equipment lubrication records.
,yT 4. Electrical phase, voltage, and amperage measurements.
5. Insulation resistance measurements.
6. Data sheets of control loop testing including testing and calibration of
instrumentation devices and setpoints.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.01756-5 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Spec cations/I0.01756.doc
i
H. Clean grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, paint, blemishes,
sealants, plaster, concrete, and other foreign materials from sight-exposed
surfaces, and fixtures and equipment.
I. Remove non-permanent protection and labels.
J. Polish waxed woodwork and finish hardware.
K. Wax and buff hard floors, as applicable.
L. Wash and polish glass, inside and outside.
M. Polish glossy surfaces to clear shine.
N. Clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters when heating, ventilation, and
air conditioning units were operated during construction.
O. Clean ducts, blowers and coils when units were operated without filters during
construction.
P. Clean light fixtures and replace burned-out or dim lamps.
1.04 WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Arrange for and dispose of surplus materials, waste products, and debris off-site:
1. Prior to making disposal on private property, obtain written permission from
OWNER of such property.
B. Do not create unsightly or unsanitary nuisances during disposal operations. ,
C. Maintain disposal site in safe condition and good appearance.
D. Complete leveling and cleanup prior to final acceptance of the Work.
1.05 TOUCH-UP AND REPAIR
A. Touch-up or repair finished surfaces on structures, equipment, fixtures, and
installations that have been damaged prior to inspection for Substantial Completion.
B. Refinish or replace entire surfaces which cannot be touched-up or repaired
satisfactorily.
1.06 CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS
A. Submit following Closeout Submittals upon Substantial Completion and at least
7 days prior to submitting Application for Final Payment:
1. Evidence of Compliance with Requirements of Governing Authorities.
2. Project Record Documents.
3. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
4. Warranties and Bonds.
5. Keys and Keying Schedule. !
6. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens as outlined in Conditions of the
Contract.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.01770-2 82351310
pw:/ICarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235BI0/Specifications/10.01770.docx
7. Release of claims as outlined in Conditions of the Contract.
8. As-Built Information as specified in Section 1-05.4(4).
9. Certificate of Final Completion.
1.07 EVIDENCE OF COMPLIANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS OF GOVERNING
AUTHORITIES
A. Submit the following:
1. Certificate of Occupancy.
2. Certificates of Inspection:
a. Mechanical:
1) As specified in individual equipment Sub-Sections.
b. Electrical:
1) As specified in individual equipment Sub-Sections.
1.08 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain at Project site, available to OWNER and ENGINEER, 1 copy of the
Contract Documents, shop drawings, and other submittals in good order:
1. Mark and record field changes and detailed information contained in submittals
and change orders.
2. Record actual depths, horizontal and vertical location.of underground pipes,
duct banks, and other buried utilities. Reference dimensions to permanent
surface features.
3. Identify specific details of pipe connections, location of existing buried features
located during excavation, and the final locations of piping, equipment,
electrical conduits, manholes, and pull boxes.
4. Identify location of spare conduits including beginning, ending, and routing
through pull boxes and manholes. Record spare conductors, including number
and size, within spare conduits and filled conduits.
5. Provide schedules, lists, layout drawings, and wiring diagrams.
6. Make annotations with erasable colored pencil conforming to the following
color code:
Additions: Red
Deletions: Green
Comments Blue
Dimensions: I Graphite
B. Maintain documents separate from those used for construction:
1. Label documents "RECORD DOCUMENTS."
C. Keep documents current:
1. Record required information at the time the material and equipment is installed
and before permanently concealing.
D. Deliver record documents with transmittal letter containing date, Project title,
CONTRACTOR's name and address, list of documents, and signature of
CONTRACTOR.
E. During progress meetings, record documents will be reviewed to ascertain that
changes have been recorded.
September 1 -
p 0, 2 010 - FINAL 10.01770 3 82351310
pw:HCarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.01770.docx
1.09 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
A. Provide executed Warranty or Guaranty Form if required by Contract Documents. .
B. Provide specified additional warranties, guarantees, and bonds from manufacturers
and suppliers.
1.10 CERTIFICATE OF FINAL COMPLETION
A. When operational test has been successfully completed, ENGINEER will certify that
new facilities are operationally complete. ENGINEER will submit a list of known
items (punch list) still to be completed or corrected prior to contract completion.
B. List of items to be completed or corrected will be amended as items are resolved by
CONTRACTOR.
C. When all items have been completed or corrected, submit written certification that
the entire work is complete in accordance with the Contract Documents and request
Final Inspection per Section 1-05.11(2).
D. Upon completion of final inspection, ENGINEER will either prepare a written
acceptance of the entire work or advise CONTRACTOR of work not complete. If
necessary, inspection procedures will be repeated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SUB-SECTION
j
I
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.01770-4 82351310
pw:#Carollo/Documen is/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.01770.docx
SUB-SECTION 10.01782
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Preparation and submittal of Operation and Maintenance
Manuals.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals before field quality control testing and
before training of each piece of equipment or system.
B. Submit 3 hardcopy manuals for each piece of equipment or system.
C. Submit 2 electronic copy manuals for each piece of equipment or system.
D. Make manuals available at project site for use by construction personnel and
ENGINEER.
E. Make additions and revisions to the manuals in accordance with ENGINEER's
review comments.
1.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Preparation:
1. Provide hardcopy Operations and Maintenance Manuals in 3-ring binders with
rigid covers. Utilize tab sheets to organize information.
2. Provide electronic copy Operations and Maintenance Manuals in PDF Format.
B. Contents of Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. Cover page: Equipment name, equipment tag number, project name,
OWNER's name, appropriate date.
2. Table of Contents: General description of information provided within each tab
section.
3. Lubrication information: Required lubricants and lubrication schedules.
4. Control diagrams:
a. Internal and connection wiring, including logic diagrams, wiring diagrams
for control panels, ladder logic for computer based systems, and
connections between existing systems and new additions, and
adjustments such as calibrations and set points for relays, and control or
alarm contact settings.
5. Start-up procedures: Recommendations for installation, adjustment,
calibration, and troubleshooting.
6. Operating procedures:
September 10 2010 - FINAL 1 -
P 0 01782 1 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/i 0.01782.doc
i
a. Step-by-step procedures for starting, operating, and stopping equipment
under specified modes of operation.
b. Include safety precautions and emergency operating shutdown
instructions.
7. Preventative maintenance procedures: Recommended steps and schedules
for maintaining equipment.
8. Overhaul instructions: Directions for disassembly, inspection, repair and
reassembly of the equipment; safety precautions; and recommended
tolerances, critical bolt torques, and special tools that are required.
9. Parts list: Generic title and identification number of each component part of
equipment; include bearing manufacturer, model and ball or roller pass
frequencies for every bearing.
10. Spare parts list: Recommended number of parts to be stored at the site and
special storage precautions.
11. Drawings: Exploded view or plan and section views with detailed callouts.
12. Provide electrical and instrumentation schematic record drawings.
13. Source (factory) quality control test results: Provide copies of factory test
reports as specified in Sub-Sections 10.15958 or the equipment Sub-Section.
14. Field quality control test results: After field-testing is completed, insert field test
reports as specified in Sub-Sections 10.15958 or the equipment Sub-Section.
15. Equipment Summary Form: Completed form in the format attached at the end
of this Sub-Section. Insert Equipment Summary Form after the tab sheet of
each equipment Sub-Section. The manufacturer's standard form will not be
acceptable.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SUB-SECTION
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.01782-2 . 8235B10
pw:HCarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Rent on1 8235B10/Specifications/10.01782.doc
EQUIPMENT SUMMARY FORM
1. EQUIPMENT ITEM
2. MANUFACTURER
3. EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(S)
(maps equipment number)
4. LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT
5. WEIGHT OF INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS (OVER 100 POUNDS
j
NAMEPLATE DATA-
Horsepower
Amperage
Voltage
Service Factor (S.F.)
Speed
ENC Type
Capacity
Other
7. MANUFACTURER'S LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE
Name
Address
Telephone Number
8. MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
9. LUBRICANT LIST
10. SPARE PARTS (recommendations)
11. COMMENTS
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.01782-3 8235B10
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235 Bl0/Specificadons/10.01782.doc
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.01782-4 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienttWA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.01782,doc
SUB-SECTION 10.02084
PRECAST CONCRETE WET WELL
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes:
1. Precast concrete wet well.
B. Related Sections/Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other'individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sections/Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this
Sub-Section. This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided for
convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty
of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 2-09 - Structure Excavation.
b. Sub-Section 10.03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
c. Sub-Section 10.08320 -Access Hatches.
d. Sub-Section 10.09960A- Coatings.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):
1. M 198 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and
Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants.
B. ASTM International ASTM :
1. C 478 - Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole
Sections.
2. C 857 - Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for
Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures.
3. C 990— Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and
Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants.
4. D4263 - Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the
Plastic Sheet Method.
C. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):
1. SP-13 — Surface Preparation of Concrete.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance requirements:
1. Wet well and appurtenances shall be watertight and free from infiltration or
exfiltration.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.02084-1 8235B10
pw:l/CarollolDocumentslClientfWAl Renton1 8235B10/Specificatlons/10.02084.docx
L
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings:
1. Show dimensions, locations, lifting inserts, reinforcement, and joints.
B. Manufacturer's Certification for Precast Wet Well: Written certification that the wet
well complies with the requirements of this Sub-Section.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Inspection:
1. After installation, the CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate that wet well has been
properly installed, level, with tight joints, at the correct elevations and
orientations, and that the backfilling has been carried out in accordance with
the Contract Documents. -
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Precast concrete wet well:
1. Construct precast concrete wet well in accordance with design, size, shape,
form, details, and at locations indicated on the Drawings and specified.
2. Construct wet well of precast eccentric or concentric units in accordance with
the requirements indicated on the Drawings and specified.
3. Provide precast, cylinder units, taper sections, and eccentric flat top sections
meeting strength requirements in accordance with ASTM C 478.
4. Base design and manufacture to A-16 (HS 20-44) loading in accordance with
ASTM C 857.
5. Where joints are designed in pre-cast concrete wet well, such joints shall be
interlocking to secure proper alignment between members and prevent
migration of soil through the joint. Structural sections at joints shall be sized
sufficiently to reinforce the section against localized distress during
transportation and handling and against excess contact bearing pressures
through the joint. Coordinate joints with penetrations and anchorage indicated
on the Drawings such that there are no penetrations and anchors within 12
inches of a joint.
6. Where openings for access to the wet well are required, the full clear space
opening indicated shall be provided, without obstructions from brackets or
supports. For large openings where brackets or supports are designed to
p rotrude into the opening for support of re q u it e
d covers,
such brackets or
supports shall be designed to be easily removed and replaced with a minimum
of effort and without cutting or welding.
7. Wet well shall be solid wall construction (i.e. no thin walled, knockout
sections). Where penetrations of the pre-cast concrete wet well are required
for piping, conduit, or ducts, such penetrations shall be accommodated
through pre-cast or core drilled openings. All openings for penetrations shall
be smooth and free of surface irregularities and without exposed steel
reinforcing. Wet well need not be designed to resist thrust from piping passing
through the wet well wall. Coordinate pipe penetration locations and sizes with
piping arrangement and connection details shown on the Drawings.
8. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.02084-2 8235B10
pw:l/car olio/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B1 o/Speci,cations110.02084.docx
a. Hanson Pipe and Precast.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Precast concrete wet well:
1. Joint sealant:
a. Preformed, cold-applied, ready-to-use, flexible joint sealant in accordance
with ASTM C990 and AASHTO M 198.
b. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal.
1) Henry Corporation, Ram-Nek.
2) Concrete Sealants Division, ConSeal.
2. Floor access hatches as shown on the Drawings shall be integrally cast into
the flat top concrete section and as specified in Sub-Section 10.08320.
3. Extended Base: Size as indicated on the Drawings.
4. Piping penetrations through cylinder units:
a. Arrange base sections and risers such that no pipes pass through the wet
well joint.
b. Piping connections to the wet well shall be as indicated on the Drawings.
2.03 COATINGS
A. Interior coating of wet well:
1. Surface Preparation: Allow new concrete to cure for 28 days or until passing
the ASTM D4263 Plastic Mat test. Prepare all surfaces to be coated SSPC SP
13 to meet ICRI CSP5 surface profile. Surface shall be clean, dry, and free of
contaminants.
2. Surfacer/Filler: Tnemec Series 218 Mortar Clad applied at 1/32" minimum, fill
surface voids flush to plain, to ensure finish is monolithic and pinhole free.
3. Primer: Tnemec Series 435 Perma-Glaze applied at 20.0 to 25.0 mils dry film
thickness.
4. Finish: Tnemec Series 435 Perma-Glaze applied at 20.0 to 25.0 mils dry film
thickness.
5. Note: Upon full cure, the installed lining system shall be checked by high
voltage spark detection in accordance with NACE RP0188-90 to verify pinhole-
free surface.
6. Field apply interior coating after formation of the sloped wet well bottom.
Interior coating shall be field applied in accordance with Sub-Section
10.09960A, unless otherwise indicated in this Sub-Section.
B. Exterior coating of wet well:
1. . Surface Preparation: Allow new concrete to cure for 28 days or until passing
the ASTM D4263 Plastic Mat test. Prepare all surfaces to be coated SSPC SP
13 to meet ICRI CSP5 surface profile. Surface shall be clean, dry, and free of
contaminants.
2. Finish: Tnemec Series 141 PotaPox applied at 16.0 mils dry film thickness.
C. Repair damaged coating surfaces in field in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.02084-3 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienttWA/Renton/6235610/Specifcatlons/10.02084.docx
I
r
al
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Pre-cast concrete sections shall be transported and handled with care in
accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations. Where lifting devices
are provided in pre-cast sections, such lifting devices shall be used as intended.
Where no lifting devices are provided, the CONTRACTOR shall follow the rn
manufacturer's recommendations for lifting.procedures to provide proper support
during lifting.
B. Buried pre-cast concrete wet well shall be assembled and placed in excavations on
properly compacted soil foundations as indicated. Pre-cast concrete wet well shall
be set to grade and oriented to provide the required dimensions and clearances
from pipes and other structures.
C. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and Sub-Section
10.09960A where indicated.
D. Precast Concrete wet well:
1. Excavation and backfill: As indicated on the Drawings and specified in Section
2-09.
2. Precast concrete wet well:
a. Wet well base:
1) Place as indicated on the Drawings.
b.. Wet well sections:
1) Set each wet well section plumb.
2) Use sections of various heights and adjustment rings to bring top of
wet well cover to required elevation.
c. Joints:
1) Seal joints with precast concrete joint sealant as specified in this
Sub-Section unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
2) Clean joints with brush and prime.
3) Apply precast concrete joint sealant as follows, except where
instructions differ from manufacturer's printed instructions. Where
these instructions differ from manufacturer's instructions, install
precast concrete joint sealant in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions:
a) Remove silicon treated protective paper from one side of
preformed rope and lay preformed rope, paper side up, on
cleaned point surface. Press surface firmly end-to-end around
entire joint, making minimum 1-inch laps where necessary.
b) Remove protective paper from preformed rope and lower next
section into place.
4) Seal joints watertight. t11
d. ' Wet well hatch:
1). Install wet well hatch at the location and elevation indicated on the
Drawings.
2) Hatch shall be flush with surrounding surfaces.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.02084-4 82351310
pw:H Carollo/Documents/ClientfWA/Renton/8235610/Specificabons/10.02084.docx
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests:
1. Precast concrete wet well: Water exfiltration test. Use the following exfiltration
test procedures and requirements:
a. After installation of all pipe penetrations/connections to the wet well but
prior to backfilling and grade installation, seal all openings/penetrations in
the wet well with plugs or blind flanges. Temporarily restrain piping during
the test where not restrained.
b. If a coating or lining is to be applied to the interior of the wet well, the
water exfiltration test must not be performed until the coating or lining has
been cured according to the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Procedure for testing shall be as follows:
1. Labor, equipment, supplies and water required for the test shall be furnished
by the CONTRACTOR. The ENGINEER shall witness and approve all leakage
tests. In the event that the CONTRACTOR performs any test without witness
by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR will be required to test the wet well
again at no cost to the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER shall
sign all test reports.
2. The wet well shall be filled with water to one foot below grade elevation. The
test level shall be clearly marked in the wet well. The wet well shall be filled
and maintained full of water for a period of at least 24 hours prior to the start of
the test. If the water level in the wet well drops during this 24 hour period, the
level shall be raised to the test level mark prior to start of the test.
3. The test shall last a minimum of 24 hours. Once the test begins, the wet well
lid shall only be removed in the presence of the ENGINEER. Exfiltration will be
determined by measuring the amount of water required to raise the water level
back to the marked level at the end of the test period.
4. The wet well shall be considered to pass the water exfiltration test if the there
is no measurable drop in level from the marked level.
5. If the wet well fails the water exfiltration test, the wet well shall be repaired with
a non-shrinkable grout or other material approved by the ENGINEER.
Damaged lining and coating shall be repaired per the manufacturer's
recommendations. The water exfiltration test shall then be repeated until a
satisfactory test is obtained.
6. All observed leaks shall be corrected even if exfiltration is within the allowable
limits.
a. All temporary plugs shall be removed after each test.
b. Patch as required and retest wet well if fail the test.
c. Repair wet well that does not meet the leakage test, or are unsatisfactory
from visual inspection.
1) Retest after repair is completed.
7. Remove all temporary restraints and plugs after successful wet well exfiltration
test.
END OF SUB-SECTION
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.02084-5 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.02084.docx
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.02084-6 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specification/10.02084.docx
SUB-SECTION 10.02240
DEWATERING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes:
1. Installation and maintenance of dewatering systems.
2. Disposal of water entering excavation or other parts of the work.
1 B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
' 2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
' Documents.
a. Sub-Section 10.03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
b. Sub-Section 10.03600 - Grouting.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design requirements:
1. Keep excavations reasonably free from water. Draw down the static water
level to a minimum of 3 feet below the bottom of excavations.
2. Analysis includes the following: Evaluation of the anticipated subsurface
conditions, required well spacing, diameter of wells, depth screen interval,
backfill and filter pack, pump size, drawdown duration, drawdown and steady
state flow rates, desilting tank, and settlements.
3. Include water drawdown curves in dewatering calculations.
4. Coordinate dewatering design with excavation and shoring design. Recognize
the changes in groundwater conditions and earth pressures in the shoring and
excavation design.
5. Do not place concrete or masonry foundations or floors in water, nor allow
water to rise over them until concrete or mortar has set at least 24 hours.
6. Maintain operation of the dewatering system until the complete structure
including walls, slabs, beams, struts, and all other structural elements have
been constructed and the concrete has attained specified strength, and backfill
has been completed to finish grade.
7. Provide standby power to ensure continuous dewatering in case of power
failure.
B. Recharge groundwater behind shoring to minimize settlement due to dewatering.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.02240-1 8235610
pw:\lCarollol DocumentslClient\WA\Renton18235 B101Specifications 110.02240.docx
C. Secure written permission from the ENGINEER before locating wells, well points, or
drain lines for purposes of dewatering within limits of structure foundation.
D. Locate dewatering facilities where they will not interfere with utilities and
construction work to be performed by others.
E. Dewatering Discharge Location: Existing sanitary sewer manhole indicated on the
Drawings. Shall conform to the following:
1. The discharge location shall be secured by a fence or cover with lock to
prevent outsider entry and sealed watertight.
2. Acceptable means of sedimentation extraction and disposal approved by
ENGINEER shall be used prior to discharge.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Dewatering plan:
1. Arrangement, location, depths of system components.
2. Type and sizes of filters. a
3. Required permits.
B. Well construction logs which include:
1. Descriptions of actual materials encountered in accordance with Unified Soil
Classification System.
2. Construction details.
3. Well development procedures and results.
4. Deviations from original design.
C. Laboratory test results.
D. Identify the proposed alignment of the influent sewer pipe and method for the pipe
to enter the wet well. Provide details of the pipe entering the wet well.
E. Qualifications:
1. Dewatering contractor.
2. Dewatering design engineer.
3. Testing laboratory.
F. Control points and schedule of measurements:
1. Location and details of control points and method and schedule of
measurements.
. 2. Within 24 hours of constructing control points and making measurements at
such control points, submit copy of field notes with such measurements.
3. Deliver submittal with control point measurements within 24 hours of
collection.
a. Show the current measurement and the change in measurement from the
first measurement taken.
b. Show a graphical plot with movements.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of a dewatering design engineer: i
1. Dewatering plan and dewatering system analysis:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.02240-2 82351310
pw:llCarollolDocumentslClientlWAlRenton 18235B1 Opecifications110.02240.docx ,
a. Prepared by a registered Civil Engineer, registered in the state where the
Project is located. The Civil Engineer must have at least 8 years of .
experience in designing similar systems.
b. Submit qualifications of the dewatering contractor, the Dewatering Design
' Engineer, sampling service, and testing laboratory.
PART PRODUCTS
' Not used.
' PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Provide and maintain during construction: Ample means and devices with which to
' promptly remove and properly dispose of water entering excavation or other parts of
the work, whether water is surface water or underground water.
B. Install at least 1 groundwater level monitoring well. If more than 4 dewatering wells
or well points are installed, install 1 additional monitoring well for every 4 dewatering
wells or well points.
1. Locate monitoring wells within 6 feet of the excavation and located mid way
' between dewatering wells or well points.
2. Monitoring wells: Temporary cap and be not less than 2 inches in diameter.
3. Protect the dewatering wells in place during the excavation.
C. Intercept and divert precipitation and surface water away from excavations through
the use of dikes, curb walls, ditches, pipes, sumps, or other means.
' D. Disposing of water:
1. Dispose of water from the work in suitable manner without damage to adjacent
' property.
2. Do not drain water into work built or under construction.
3. Dispose of water in such manner as not to be menace to public health.
4. Dispose of water in accordance with the design requirements specified in this
' Sub-Section.
E. Wells, well points, and drain lines for dewatering:
1. Locate after receiving ENGINEER's written permission.
2. Fill dewatering wells, pipes, and french drains to be left in place within
structure foundation limits with Class "C" concrete as specified in Sub-
, Section 10.03300 or grout as specified in Sub-Section 10.03600.
3.02 CONSTRUCTION
' A. Interface with other work:
1. Prior to release of groundwater to its static level:
' a. All groundwater pressure relief devices for the structure are fully
operational.
b. Construction of structure is complete and the concrete has reached
specified strength.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.02240-3 8235810
pw:Xaro11olDocumentsl C1 ienAMRentonT235B101Specifications 110.02240.docx
c. Backfill.of structure is complete.
d. Control release of groundwater to its static level to prevent disturbance of a
the natural foundation soils or compacted backfills and fills and to prevent
flotation or movement of structures or pipelines.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Monitoring wells:
1. Record water levels at least once a week. Submit readings to ENGINEER
within 1 week.
END OF SUB-SECTION
a
c�
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.02240-4 8235B10
pw:kkCarollol DocumentslClientl WAlRentonl 8235B101Specifications 110.02240.docx
SUB-SECTION 10.02260
EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
PART1 GENERAL
' 1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Requirements for designing, furnishing and installing,
' maintaining, and removing excavation support and protection.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
, Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
a. Sub-Section 10.01410 - Regulatory Requirements.
1.02 REFERENCES
' A. American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (AISC):
1. Steel Construction Manual.
B. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):
1. Guidelines of Engineering Practice for Braced and Tied-Back Excavations.
' C. Department of the Navy Naval Facilities Engineering Command (NAVFAC):
1. Design Manual 7.2 - Foundations and Earth Structures.
2. Design Manual 7.3 - Soil Dynamics and Special Design Aspects
' D. State of California Department of Transportation (Caltrans):
1. Caltrans California Trenching and Shoring Manual.
E. United States Steel Corporation (USS):
1. Steel Sheet Piling Design Manual.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. General Engineering Design Practice: General engineering design practice in area
of the Project, performed in accordance with recent engineering literature on subject
of shoring and stability of excavations.
B. Shoring: A temporary structural system designed to support vertical faces, or nearly
vertical faces, of soil or rock for purposes of excavation. Shoring includes
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.02260-1 8235610
pw:llCarollo.loc81:Caro 11ol Do cument slClienAWAlRenton16235B101 Specifications110.02260.docx
cantilevered sheet piling, internally braced sheet piling, slurry walls, soldier piles
and lagging, and other similar shoring systems. Sloping of the soil is not shoring.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Where General Engineering Design Practice is specified, provide drawings and '
signed calculations and have design performed by civil or structural engineer
registered in State where the Project is located:
1. Provide design calculations that clearly disclose assumptions made, criteria
followed, and stress values used for the materials being used.
2. Furnish references acceptable to ENGINEER substantiating appropriateness
of design assumptions, criteria, and stress values.
B. Design requirements:
1. General:
a. Design means for safe and stable excavations in accordance with general
engineering design practice:
b. Design steel members in accordance with the building code as specified O
in Sub-Section 10.01410 and the AISC Manual of Steel Design.
c. Design shoring involving materials other than steel in accordance with
building code as specified in Sub-Sections 10.01410.
d. Perform design in accordance with soil characteristics and design
recommendations contained in a written geotechnical report issued and
signed by a geotechnical engineer hired by the CONTRACTOR.
Geotechnical engineer shall be registered in the state where the Project is a
located:
1) Make copy of geotechnical report available at project site for
ENGINEER's review.
2) Retain and pay for geotechnical engineer's services.
3) Obtain report based on soil samples, field and laboratory tests, and
borings performed for the geotechnical report for the design of O
stability of excavations by the geotechnical engineer hired by
CONTRACTOR.
e. When electing to design with material stresses for temporary construction
higher than allowable stresses prescribed in the AISC Steel Construction
Manual and the building code as specified in Sub-Section 10.01410,
increase in such stresses shall not exceed 10 percent of value of
prescribed stresses.
f. Minimum safety factor used for design shall not be less than 1.5.
g. The calculated minimum depth of penetration of shoring below the bottom
of the excavation shall be increased not less than 30 percent if the full
value of passive pressure is used in the design.
h. The maximum height of cantilever shoring above the bottom of excavation
shall not exceed 15 feet.
1) Use braced shoring when the height of shoring above the bottom of
excavation exceeds 15 feet.
i. The location of the point of fixity for shoring shall not be less than half the
calculated minimum embedment depth below the bottom of the
excavation.
j. Generally acceptable references for the design of shoring and
excavations are as follows:
1) Caltrans California Trenching and Shoring Manual.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.02260-2 82351310
pw:Karollo.local:CarollolDocuments\ClienAWA\Renton1 8235B101Specifications110.02260.dou
2) NAVFAC Design Manual 7.2.
3) NAVFAC Design Manual 7.3.
4) USS Steel Sheet Piling Design Manual.
5) ASCE Guidelines of Engineering Practice for Braced and Tied-Back
Excavations.
k. The maximum total deflection at any point on the shoring shall not be
more than 3/4 inch.
' I. The shoring design firm shall obtain errors and omissions insurance for
the Project for an amount of not less than $100,000 dollars.
2. Soldier piles and lagging:
a. Provide lagging over the full face of the excavation. Joints between pieces
of lagging shall be tight to prevent loss of soil.
b. Provide full face lagging all around penetrations through the lagging.
c. If the soldier piles are installed in predrilled holes, the predrilled holes
shall be filled with control density backfill after the soldiers piles are
installed.
d. The effective width of driven soldier piles for passive soil resistance shall
' not exceed 2 times the width of the pile.
1) The effective width of concrete encased soldier piles for passive soil
resistance shall not exceed 2 times the width of the concrete
encasement.
e. Fill voids behind lagging with gravel or other material acceptable to the
ENGINEER.
f. Apply loads from tie back soil, rock, or deadman anchors concentrically to
soldier piles or wales spanning between soldier piles.
1) Wales shall be back-to-back double channels or other members
acceptable to the ENGINEER.
2) Eccentrically loaded with section soldier piles or wales are not
acceptable.
g. Design soldier piles for downward loads including vertical loads from tie
back anchors.
3. Soil anchors, rock anchors, and deadmen anchors:
a. Design tie back anchors for a safety factor of not less than 2 times the
calculated load from the shoring.
b. Proof load all production anchors to not less than 150 percent of the
calculated load from the shoring.
' 1) Lock off anchors at the calculated anchor load.
c. The length of soil anchors used to calculate resistance to load from the
shoring shall not include any length within the potential active pressure
soil failure zone behind the face of shoring.
d. Design tie rods for anchors for 130 percent of the calculated load from the
shoring.
e. Design tie rods for anchors for 150 percent of the calculated load from the
shoring when tie rod couplers are used and for other conditions where
stress concentrations can develop.
' C. Performance requirements:
1. General:
a. Support faces of excavations and protect structures and improvements in
vicinity of excavations from damage and loss of function due to settlement
or movement of soils, alterations in ground water level caused by such
excavations, and related operations.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.02260-3 82351310
pw:I\Carollo.local:Carollo\Documents\ClientlWA\Renton1 8235B106pecifications 110.02260.docx
b. Specified provisions:
1) Complement, but do not substitute or diminish, obligations of
CONTRACTOR for the furnishing of a safe place of work pursuant to
provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 and its
subsequent amendments and regulations and for protection of the Q
Work, structures, and other improvements.
2) Represent minimum requirement for:
a) Number and types of means needed to maintain soil stability.
b) Strength of such required means.
c Methods and frequency of maintenance and observation of
means used for maintaining soil stability.
2. Provide safe and stable excavations by means of sheeting, shoring, bracing,
sloping, and other means and procedures, such as draining and recharging
groundwater and routing and disposing of surface runoff, required to maintain
the stability of soils and rock.
3. Provide support for trench excavations for protection of workers from hazard of
caving ground.
4. Provide shoring:
a. Where, as result of excavation work and analysis performed pursuant to
general engineering design practice, as defined in this Sub-Section:
1) Excavated face or surrounding soil mass may be subject to slides,
caving, or other types of failures.
2) Stability and integrity of structures and other improvements may be
compromised by settlement or movement of soils, or changes in soil
load on structures and other improvements.
b. For trenches 4 feet and deeper.
c. For trenches less than 4 feet in depth, when there is a potential for cave-in. rM
d. Where indicated on the Drawings.
5. For safe and stable excavations, use appropriate design and procedures for
construction and maintenance to minimize settlement of supported ground and
to prevent damage to structures and other improvements, including:
a. Using stiff support systems.
b. Following appropriate construction sequence.
c. Preventing soil loss through or under support system: oil
1) Provide support system that is tight enough to prevent loss of soil tE
and extend deep enough to prevent heave or flow of soils from
supported soil mass into the excavation.
d. Providing urface runoff routing and discharge away from excavations.
9 9 9 Y
e. Where dewatering is necessary, recharge groundwater as necessary to
prevent settlement in area surrounding excavation.
f. Where sheet piling is used, use interlocking type sheets.
1) The sheet piles shall.be continuous and driven in interlock.
2) If the bottom of the excavation is located below the water table, use
"thumb and finger" type interlock.
g. Not applying shoring loads to existing structures and other improvements.
h. Not changing existing soil loading on existing structures and other
improvements.
i. Provide welded steel packing between soil retaining members such as
sheet piles and wales and similar members when the gap exceeds
1/4 inch before the wales are loaded.
i
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.02260-4 82351310
pw:\\Carollo.local:CarollolDocumentslClientlWAIRenton18235B101Specifications 110.02260.docx
i
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings s and calculations:
1. For trench excavations 4 feet or more in depth and for trenches less than
4 feet in depth when there is potential for cave-in. Submit in advance of
excavation work, detailed drawings showing means for safe and stable
excavations:
2. Perform design pursuant to general engineering design practice.
3. For excavations other than trenches, submit, in advance of excavation work,
design calculations as performed pursuant to general engineering design
practice, as specified in this Sub-Section, and detail drawing showing means
for safe and stable excavations. In design calculations and detail drawing,
cover, as a minimum:
a. Excavations adjacent to structures and other improvements, and
b. Excavations 4 feet or more in depth, or less than 4 feet in depth when
there is potential for cave-in, at other locations.
4. Submit following:
a. Provide calculations for the different load, support, and other conditions
that occur during the sequence of installation of shoring, construction of
facilities protected by the shoring, and sequence of removal of shoring.
b. Provide sketches showing the condition at various stages of installation
and removal of shoring.
c. Show structures, pipelines, and other improvements located near the
shoring, and the shoring on a plan.
d. When utilities penetrate the shoring, submit an elevation of all sides of the
shoring showing the locations of the penetrations.
1) Submit details on ground support and sealing around utility
penetrations.
B. Written geotechnical report on soil characteristics and design recommendations, as
specified in this Sub-Section.
C. Control points and schedule of measurements:
1. Submit location and details of control points and method and schedule of
measurements in accordance with requirements of this Sub-Section.
2. Promptly upon constructing control points and making measurements at such
control points, as specified in this Sub-Section, submit copy of field notes with
such measurements.
a. The field notes shall show the current measurement and the change in
measurement from the first measurement taken.
D. Detailed sequence of installation and removal of shoring:
1. Consider effects of ground settlement in the sequence of installation and
removal of shoring.
2. Provide sketches showing the conditions at various stages in the sequence of
installation and removal of shoring.
E. Submit submittals for stability of excavations as a complete package and include all
items required in this Sub-Section.
' 1. Incomplete submittals will not be reviewed and will be returned for resubmittal
as a complete package.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.02260-5 8235810
pw:\\Carollo.local:Carollo\DocumentslCllentlWA\Renton18235B1 Mpecifications110.02260.docx
1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Do not begin work on excavations, trenches, and means for providing stability of
excavation and trenches until submittals have been accepted by ENGINEER and
until materials necessary for installation are on site. '
B. Submit submittals a minimum of 20 days prior to the scheduled date to begin
excavation work.
C. Do not begin construction of any shoring or excavation operations until:
1. Control points as specified in this Sub-Section and as indicated on the
Drawings on existing structures and other improvements have been
established and surveyed to document initial elevations and locations.
PART PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL
A. Install means for providing safe and stable excavations as indicated in the
submittals.
B. Except for concrete encased soldier piles, slurry walls, and similar shoring systems,
remove shoring by completion of the Work.
1. Select shoring system and method of removal, which will minimize soil that
sticks to shoring from creating large voids and causing settlement.
2. To prevent settlement caused by pulling shoring, fill voids with sand, pea
gravel, or pressure injected grout.
3. The methods used shall prevent settlement.
4. Pressure preservative treated wood lagging may be left in place when
acceptable to the ENGINEER.
3.02 MAINTENANCE
A. Where loss of soil occurs, plug gap in shoring and replace lost soil with fill material
acceptable to ENGINEER.
B. Where measurements and observations indicate possibility of failure or excessive
movement of excavation support, determined in accordance with general
engineering design practice, take appropriate action immediately.
3.03 CONTROL POINTS
A. Establish control points on shoring and on structures and other improvements in �
vicinity of excavation for measurement of horizontal and vertical movement:
1. Set control points on shoring support system:
a. Set points at distances not exceeding 25 feet at each support level.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.02260-6 8235B10
pw:Karollo.local:Ca rolloMocumentsUienAWMentonl B235B101Specifications 110.02260.docx
b. Support levels shall be levels of tie-backs, wales, bottom of excavation,
and other types of supports.
2. Set control points in corners of existing structures and on curbs, manholes,
and other improvements indicated on the Drawings.
1 B. Provide plumb bobs with horizontal targets indicating original position of plumb bobs
in relation to shoring at control points located on shoring.
C. Perform horizontal and vertical survey and measurement of control points at least
once every week.
END OF SUB-SECTION
1
i
1
1
1
r
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.02260-7 82351310
pw:1carollo.local:carollolDowments lclientlWMRenton%235B10 1Specifications110.02260.dou
I
Q
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.02260-8 8235610
pw:lICarollo.local:CarollolDocumentslClientlWA\Renton1 8235B10 1Specifications110.02260.docx
SUB-SECTION 10.02490
PRECAST CONCRETE VAULTS
PART GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Precast concrete vaults.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACT OR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
a. Sub-Section 10.08320 —Access Hatches.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A 48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
2. C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
3. D4263 - Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the
Plastic Sheet Method.
B. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):
1. SP-13 —Surface Preparation of Concrete.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Show dimensions, locations, lifting inserts, reinforcement, and joints.
B. Manufacturer's Certification for Vaults. Written certification that the vault complies
with the requirements of this Sub-Section.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Inspection:
1. After installation, the CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate that vaults have been
properly installed, level, with tight joints, at the correct elevations and
orientations, and that the backfilling has been carried out in accordance with
the Contract Documents.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.02490-1 82351310
pw:llcarollolDo,umemlc,ient/WA/Renlon/8235610/Specifications/10.02490.doc
I
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 VAULTS
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide precast vaults for the size shown on the
Drawings.
B. The minimum structural member thickness for vaults shall be 5-inches. Cement
shall be Type V portland cement as specified in ASTM C 150. The minimum 28-day i
concrete compressive strength shall be 4,000 psi. All reinforcing steel shall be
embedded in the concrete with a minimum clear cover as recommended by
American Concrete Institute (ACI) 318.
C. Design Loading: Vaults shall be designed for H-20 traffic loading.
D. Where joints are designed in pre-cast concrete vaults, such joints shall be
interlocking to secure proper alignment between members and prevent migration of
soil through the joint. Structural sections at joints shall be sized sufficiently to
reinforce the section against localized distress during transportation and handling
and against excess contact bearing pressures through the joint. Coordinate joints
with penetrations and anchorage indicated on the Drawings such that there are no
penetrations and anchors within 12 inches of a joint.
E. Where openings for access to the vault are required, the full clear space opening
indicated shall be provided, without obstructions from brackets or supports. For
large openings where brackets or supports are designed to protrude into the
opening for support of required covers, such brackets or supports shall be designed
to be easily removed and replaced with a minimum of effort and without cutting or
welding.
F. Floor access hatches shall be integrally cast into the vault concrete section and as
specified in Sub-Section 10.08320.
G. Vault shall be solid wall construction (i.e. no thin walled, knockout sections). Where
penetration of the pre-cast concrete vault are required for piping, conduit, or ducts,
such penetrations shall be accommodated through pre-cast or core drilled
openings. All openings for penetrations shall be smooth and free of surface
irregularities and without exposed steel reinforcing. Vaults need not be designed to
resist thrust from piping passing through the vault. Coordinate pipe penetration
locations and sizes with piping arrangement and sleeve details shown on the
Drawings.
H. Slope bottom of vault to Recessed Sump as indicated on the drawings.
I. Vault shall have a thickened base as indicated on the Drawings.
J. Recessed Sump: Inside dimensions as indicated on the Drawings.
1. Provide FRP grating with rebate as indicated on the Drawings. Grating shall be
designed for 300 pounds per square foot load with L/200 maximum deflection.
K. Ladders:
1. General:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.02490-2 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client[WA/Renton/8235 Bl0/Specificafons/10.02490.doc
a. Type: Safety type conforming to local, State, and OSHA standards as
' minimum. Furnish guards for ladder wells.
b. Size: 18 inches wide between side rails of length, size, shape, detail, and
location indicated on the Drawings.
2. Aluminum ladders:
a. Materials: 6063-T5 aluminum alloy.
b. Rungs:
1) 1-inch minimum solid square bar with 1/8-inch grooves in top and
deeply serrated on all sides.
2) Capable of withstanding 1,000 pound load without failure.
c. Side rails: Minimum 4-inch by 1/2-inch flat bars.
d. Fabrication:
1) Welded construction, of size, shape, location, and details indicated
on the Drawings.
e. Designed to permit support of fiberglass reinforced plastic step as
indicated on the Drawings.
L. Vault Manufacturers, or Equal:
1. Utility Vault Company.
2.02 COATINGS
A. Interior coating of vault:
1. Apply to interior structure concrete surfaces: walls, ceilings, floor slabs, and
recessed sump.
2. Surface Preparation: Allow new concrete to cure for 28 days or until passing
the ASTM D4263 Plastic Mat test. Surface shall be clean, dry, and free of
contaminants.
3. Primer: Tnemec Series N69F Hi-Build Epoxiline applied at 4.0 to 6.0 mils dry
film thickness.
4. Finish: Tnemec Series N69F Hi-Build Epoxiline applied at 4.0 to 6.0 mils dry
film thickness. Color shall be white.
B. Exterior coating of vault:
1. Surface Preparation: Allow new concrete to cure for 28 days or until passing
the ASTM D4263 Plastic Mat test. SSPC SP 13 to meet ICRI CSP5 surface
profile all surfaces to be coated. Surface shall be clean, dry, and free of
contaminants.
2. Tnemec Series 141 PotaPox applied at 16.0 mils dry film thickness.
C. Repair damaged coating surfaces in field in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Pre-cast concrete sections shall be transported and handled with care in
accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations. Where lifting devices
are provided in pre-cast sections, such lifting devices shall be used as intended.
Where no lifting devices are provided, the CONTRACTOR shall follow the
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.02490-3 8235810
pw://Carollo/Documen is/ClienYWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.02490.doc
i
manufacturer's recommendations for lifting procedures to provide proper support
during lifting.
B. Buried pre-cast concrete vaults shall be assembled and placed in excavations on
properly compacted soil foundations.as indicated. Pre-cast concrete vaults shall be
set to grade and oriented to provide the required dimensions and clearances from
pipes and other structures.
C. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
I
D. Ladders:
1. Secure to supporting surface with bent plate clips providing minimum 8 inches
between supporting surface and center of rungs.
2. Anchorage by manufacturer, stainless steel materials only.
3. Erect rail straight, level, plumb., and true to position indicated on the Drawings.
Correct deviations from true line or grade which are visible to the eye.
END OF SUB-SECTION
I
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.02490-4 82351310
pw:#Carollo/Documents/CliemlWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.02490.doc
SUB-SECTION 10.02820
FENCES AND GATES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes:
1. Fence, framework, fabric, and accessories.
2. Excavation for post bases and concrete foundation for posts.
3. Manual gates and related hardware.
' 1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A 123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products.
2. A 153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
3. A 385 - Standard Practice for Providing High-Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip).
4. A 392 - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric.
I 5. A 702 - Standard Specification for Steel Fence Posts and Assemblies, Hot-
Wrought.
6. F 626 - Standard Specification for Fence Fittings.
7. F 668 - Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) and Other Organic
Polymer-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric.
8. F 934 - Standard Specification for Standard Colors for Polymer-Coated Chain
Link Fence Materials.
9. F 1043 - Standard Specification for Strength and Protective Coatings on Steel
Industrial Chain Link Fence Framework.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data: Manufacturer's catalog cuts indicating material compliance and
specified options.
B. Shop drawings: Layout of fences and gates with dimensions, details, and finishes of
components, accessories, and post foundations.
C. Samples: Provide for polyvinyl chloride coated fabric and accessories.
D. Quality control submittals:
1. Certificates of compliance: Provide certification that materials conform to
referenced specifications.
2. Qualifications: Provide installer's references and list of local references.
E. Contract closeout submittals:
1. Operation and maintenance manuals.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.02820-1 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.02820.docx
i
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage and handling: Unload, store, and protect materials such that they are not
damaged.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
J
A. Field measurements:
1. Verify actual field distances so that post spacing can be made uniform. i
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Provide Manufacturer's standard limited warranty that Polyolefin Coated Chain Link
Fence is free from color coating flaking and peeling and other defects in material or
workmanship for a period of 15 years from the date of purchase.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Chain link fence and gates: One of the following or equal:
1. Master-Halco.
B. Obtain chain link fences and gates, including accessories, fittings, and fastenings,
from a single source.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Chain link fence:
1. Fabric: .
a. Height:
1) As indicated on the Drawings.
b. Mesh: 1 inch.
c. Size wire: 9 gauge
1) Coating:
a) Zinc coating, ASTM A 392, Class 1.
b) Finish: Polyolefin elastomer coating 10 mils thickness, thermally 1
fused to zinc coated steel core wire per ASTM F 668 Class 2b.
(1) Color: Brown per ASTM F 934.
2) Tensile strength: 80,000 pounds per square inch minimum.
2. Framework: In accordance with ASTM F 1043 Group 1A. Pipe shall be straight
and conform to the following weights:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.02820-2 82351310
pw:/lCarollo/DocumentslClienYWAl Renton/8235 Bl0/SpecficaUons/10.02820.docx
i
Pipe Size .Group IA Group IC
Outside Diameter Weight Weight
Inches Lbs/ft) (Lbs/ft
1-5/8 2.27 1.84
1-7/8 2.72 2.28
2-3/8 3.65 3.12
2-7/8 5.79 4.64
3-1/2 7.58 5.71
4 9.11 6.56
6-5/8 18.97 -
8/5/8 24.70 -
a. Top rail:
1) Size: 1-5/8 inches outside diameter.
2) Tension wire: 7-gauge galvanized coil spring wire.
b. Line posts:
. 1) Size: 1-7/8-inch outside diameter
c. Terminal, corner, and pull posts:
1) Size: 2-7/8-inch outside diameter.
1 d. Coatings:
a) Group IA: External coatings in accordance with ASTM F 1043
Type A; internal coatings in accordance with ASTM F 1043 Type
A.
b) Group IC: External coatings in accordance with ASTM F 1043
Type B; internal coatings in accordance with ASTM F 1043 Type
D.
c) Finish: Thermally fused polyolefin with minimum 10 mils
thickness per ASTM 1043.
(1) Color: Match fabric.
3. Accessories:
a. Fence fittings: In accordance with ASTM F 626.
1) Post top fittings:
a) Provide post caps that fit snugly over posts to exclude moisture.
Provide dome style caps for terminal posts and loop style caps
for line posts.
2) Rail and brace ends: Provide pressed steel or malleable castings that
are cup shaped to receive rail and brace ends.
b. Fabric accessories:
1) Wire clips: Minimum 6 gauge hot-dip galvanized.
2) Tension bars: 1/4 inch by 3/4 inch, galvanized.
3) Steel bands: 11 gauge, 1 inch wide, hot-dip galvanized.
4) Bolts and nuts: 3/8-inch diameter.
5) Hog rings: 11 gauge.
c. Finish:
1) Thermally fused polyolefin coating with minimum 10 mils thickness.
2) Color: Match fabric.
B. Chain link gates:
1. Gate posts and concrete foundations for gate posts: Except where differently
indicated on the Drawings, determine gate posts and concrete foundations for
gate posts in accordance with following schedule:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.02820-3 82351310
pw:l carollo/Doc umentslclientlWAlRenton/8235B10/Specifications/10.02820.docx
i
I
Gate Posts Foundations
Gate Leaf
Widths Post O.D. Diameter Depth
(Feet) ASTM F 1043 Group IA or IC (Inches) (Feet)
(Inches)
0 TO 6 2-7/8 12 4
Over 6 to 13 4 18 3
Over 13 to 18 6-5/8 (Group IA) 18 4
Over 18 to 25 8-5/8 (Group IA) 18 4.5
2. Chain link gates:
a. Fabric: As specified above.
b. F 1-7/8-inch and center e supports: 1 7/8 inch outside diameter galvanized steel
pipe that in accordance with ASTM F 1043 Group IA.
c. Gate accessories:
1) Post top fittings:
a) Provide post caps that fit snugly over posts to exclude moisture.
b) Provide dome style caps for terminal posts and loop style caps
. for line posts.
2) Corner fittings: Heavy pressed steel or malleable castings.
3) Gate tensioning:
a) Cross tensioning rods: 3/8 inch, galvanized.
b) Turnbuckles: Heavy duty.
4) Tension rods for 4-foot gates: 3/8 inch, easily adjustable, galvanized.
5) Gate frame corner fittings: Fitting designed for purpose,
Manufacturer's standard.
6) Hinges: Structurally capable of supporting gate leaf and allow
opening and closing without binding. Utilize 180 degree industrial
hinges and other gate hinge mechanisms to provide the swing
capability for each gate as shown on the Drawings. Number of
hinges per manufacturer's recommendation.
7) Horizontal gate stiffeners: 1-5/8-inch outside diameter galvanized
steel pipe that in accordance with ASTM F .1 043 Group IA.
8) Gate hardware:
a) Materials: Hot dipped galvanized steel or malleable iron shapes
to suit gate size.
b) Latch: Forked type capable of retaining gate in closed position
and have provision for padlock. Latch shall permit operation
from either side of gate.
c) Keeper: Gate keeper shall consist of mechanical device for
securing free end of gate when in full open position.
d) Provide drop rod to hold inactive leaf. Provide gate stop pipe to
engage center drop rod. Provide locking device and padlock
eyes as an integral part of latch, requiring one padlock for
locking both gate leaves.
d. Finish:
1) Thermally fused polyolefin coating with minimum 10 mils thickness.
2) Color: Match color of fabric.
3) Field coat moveable parts with polyolefin touch up paint, provided by
manufacturer. Color to match fabric.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.02820-4 82351310
pw:HCarollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specificat onsil0.02820.docx
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Shop finishing:
1. Galvanizing: For items not fabricated of galvanized materials hot-dip galvanize
products after fabrication in accordance with following as applicable:
a. ASTM A 123.
b. ASTM A 153.
c. ASTM A 385.
2. Mark galvanized products with name of galvanize, applicable ASTM
designation, and weight of zinc coating.
3. Galvanize fabricated items complete, or in largest practicable sections.
4. Provide galvanizing at rate of 2.0 ounces per square foot, minimum.
5. Hardware:
a. Padlocks: Cadmium plated.
b. Chain: Galvanized.
B. Finish schedule:
1. Ferrous metal:
a. Typical: Clean, then hot-dip galvanize in accordance with galvanizing
standards.
C. Field finish touch-up painting:
1. Galvanized repair paint: Apply paint having minimum dry film thickness of 2.0
to 3.5 mils.
D. Pol olefin Coating: Coating shall be applied after swing ate fabrication. Coating
Y 9 9 PP 9 9 9
before fabrication will not be allowed.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of conditions: Verify field conditions prior to construction.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface preparation:
1. Before locating fence posts grade ground to permit grade of fence to remain
constant over any local elevations or depressions in ground line.
L3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Chain link fences and gates:
1. General:
a. Install chain link fence and gates as indicated on the Drawings and
specified in this Sub-Section.
b. Provide fence systems that are plumb, taut, true to line and grade, and
complete in all details.
c. Install fencing to generally follow finish grade of ground and provide pull
posts at points where required to conform to change in grade.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.02820-5 82351310
pw:llca,oll,,IDocumenl,lClient/WA/Renton18235B10 1Specifications110.02820.docx
E
d. Install fencing such that space between bottom of fence and finish ground
line does not exceed 2 inches, unless indicated otherwise on the
Drawings.
2. Concrete foundation for fence posts:
a. Install fence and gate posts prior to asphalt paving shown on the
Drawings.
b. Set fence posts in concrete foundations, that extend at least 3 feet into
ground, and space posts not over 10 feet apart, unless otherwise
indicated on the Drawings. (j
c. Provide concrete foundations having minimum of 10 inches in diameter for
line posts and 12 inches in diameter for corners and gates, unless
otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
d. Provide foundations flush with finish grade that have tops that are shaped
to slope to drain away from posts.
e. Trowel finish tops of footings, and slope or dome to direct water away
, from posts.
f. Set keepers, stops, sleeves, tracks, eye bolts, and other accessories into
concrete as required.
g. Wheel rolling area for sliding gates shall be steel-trowel smooth finish
concrete.
3. Post bracing: n"
a. End corner, pull, and gate posts: Brace with same material as top rail and (�
trussed to line posts with 3/8-inch rods and tighteners.
b. Bracing end, corner, slope, and gate posts:
1) Brace to midpoint of nearest line post or posts with horizontal braces
used as compression members.
2) Then from such line posts truss from brace back to bottom of end,
corner, slope, or gate post with 3/8-inch steel truss rods with
turnbuckles or other suitable tightening devices used as tension
members.
4. Top rail:
a. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, install fencing
with top rail and bottom tension wire.
b. Where top rail is omitted, use top and bottom tension wire.
5. Fabric: tt11!!
a. Place fabric on outward facing side of the posts and install so that top
edge projects over top rail of fence.
b. Stretch fabric taut and securely fasten to posts, top rail, and bottom
tension wire.
c. Install tension wire parallel to line of fabric.
d. Fabric: Connect fabric to:
1) Line posts with wire clips minimum every 14 inches.
2) Terminal, corner, and gate posts with tension bars tied to posts
minimum 14 inches on center and with steel bands and bolts and
nuts.
3) Tension wires with hog rings minimum 24 inches on center.
6. Post top fittings: Provide post tops with extension arms.
7. Swing gates:
a. Provide chain link fencing with swing gates, unless otherwise indicated on
the Drawings or specified in this Sub-Section.
b. Provide swing chain link gates where indicated on the Drawings.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.02820-6 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documentsl Client/WA/Renton1 8235Bl0/Specifications/10.02820.docx
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust gate travel, stops, and operator position to meet field conditions.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean up surplus dirt, concrete, and other waste material and dress grade up upon
completion of the work.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed fences and gates against damage and, if damaged, repair prior to
final acceptance.
END OF SUB-SECTION
1
1
i
t .
1
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.02820-7 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specificationsll0.02820.docx
I
i
Q
Q
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.02820-8 8235610
pw:HCarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235BI0/Specifications/I0.02820.docx
SUB-SECTION 10.03055
EPDXY BONDING ALL THREAD RODS IN CONCRETE
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Bonding all thread rods in concrete using epoxy adhesive.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
a. Sub-Section 10.01410 - Regulatory Requirements.
b. Sub-Section 10.05120 - Structural Steel.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. Standard 8212.15 - Carbide Tipped Masonry Drills and Blanks for Carbide
Tipped Masonry Drills.
B. ASTM international (ASTM):
1. C 881 - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for
Concrete.
C. ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES):
1. AC308 -Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete
Elements.
D. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):
1. Surface Preparation Standards (SP):
a. SP-1 - Solvent Cleaning.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish technical data for epoxy adhesives, including:
1. Installation instructions.
2. Independent laboratory test results.
3. Handling and storage instructions.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03055-1 82351310
pw:llCa,ollo/Documents/ClienlWA/Renton/8235610/Specifications/l0.03011,loc
B. Quality control submittals:
1. Epoxy manufacturer's past project experience data on at least 3 similar
projects supplied with proposed products within the last 3 years.
2. Special inspection: Provide detailed step-by-step instructions for the special
inspection procedure in accordance with the building code as specified in Sub-
Section 10.01410.
3. ICC Evaluation Service, Inc., Evaluation Services Report in compliance with
the AC308-Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in
Concrete Elements.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. . Storage and Protection:
1. Store epoxy components on pallets or shelving in a covered-storage area.
2. Control temperature above 60 degrees Fahrenheit and dispose of product if
shelf life has expired.
3. If stored at temperatures below 60 degrees Fahrenheit, test components prior
to use to determine if they still meet specified requirements.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Seismic design category: D.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Like items of materials: Use end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve
structural compatibility and singular responsibility.
2.02 EPDXY ADHESIVE FOR SELF-CONTAINED CARTRIDGE SYSTEM
A. Epoxy adhesive shall have a current ICC Evaluation Service report documenting
acceptance under AC308 for use with cracked concrete and for the seismic design
categories specified.
B. Materials:
1. In accordance with ASTM C 881, Type IV, Grade 3, Class B or C depending
on site conditions.
2. 2-component, 100 percent solids, insensitive to moisture, and gray in color.
3. Cure temperature, pot life, and workability: Compatible with intended use and
environmental conditions.
C. Packaging:
1. Furnished in side-by-side cartridges with resin and hardener components
isolated until mixing through manufacturer's static mixing nozzle. Nozzle
designed to thoroughly blend the components for injection from the nozzle
directly into prepared hole.
September 10, 2010 FINAL 10.03055-2 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Rentonl 8235Bl0/Specifications/10.03055.doc
2. Container markings: Include manufacturer's name, product name, batch
number, mix ratio by volume, product expiration date, ANSI hazard
classification, and appropriate ANSI handling precautions.
D. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, OK: RE 500-SD.
2. Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc., Pleasanton, CA: SET-XP.
2.03 ALL THREAD RODS
A. Materials: As specified in Sub-Section 10.05120.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Provide Epoxy Adhesive Packaged as Follows:
1. Disposable, self-contained cartridge system capable of dispensing both epoxy
components in the proper mixing ratio, and fit into a manually or pneumatically
operated caulking gun.
2. Dispense components through a mixing nozzle that thoroughly mixes
components.
3.02 HOLE SIZING AND INSTALLATION
A. Drilling holes: ,
1. Determine location of reinforcing bars or other obstructions with a non-
destructive indicator device, and mark locations with construction crayon on
the surface of the concrete.
2. Do not damage or cut existing reinforcing bars, electrical conduits, or other
items embedded in the existing concrete without acceptance by ENGINEER.
B. Hole drilling equipment:
1. Electric or pneumatic rotary impact type with medium or light impact.
2. Drill bits: Carbide-tipped in accordance with ANSI B212-15 unless otherwise
recommended by the manufacturer or required as a "condition of use" in the
ICC Evaluation Report submitted.
3. Hollow drill bits with flushing air systems are preferred. Air supplied to hollow
drill bits shall be free of oil, water, or other contaminants that will reduce bond.
4. Where edge distances are less than 2 inches, use lighter impact equipment to
prevent microcracking and concrete spalling during drilling process.
C. Hole diameter: Reinforcing bar diameter or all thread rod diameter plus 1/8 inch.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03055-3 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235Bl OlSpecifications/10.03055.doc
i
D. Obstructions in drill path:
1. If an existing reinforcing bar or other obstruction is hit while drilling hole, stop
drilling hole and fill the hole with drypack mortar. Relocate the hole to miss the
obstruction and drill another hole. Repeat the above until the hole has been
drilled to the required depth.
2. Avoid drilling an excessive number of holes in an area of a structural member,
which would excessively weaken the structural member and endanger the
stability of the structure. Drypack holes which hit obstructions and allow
drypack to reach strength equal to the existing concrete before drilling
adjacent holes. Epoxy grout may be substituted for drypack when acceptable
to ENGINEER.
3. When existing reinforcing steel is encountered during drilling and when
acceptable to ENGINEER, enlarge the hole by 1/8 inch, core through the
existing reinforcing steel at the larger diameter, and resume drilling at original
hole diameter.
4. Bent bar reinforcing bars: Where edge distances are critical, and striking
reinforcing steel is likely, and if acceptable to ENGINEER, drill hole at
10 degree angle or less from axis of reinforcing bar or all thread rod being
installed.
E. Install all thread rods to depth, spacings, and locations as indicated on the
Drawings.
1. Do not install epoxy bonded all-thread rods in overhead applications.
F. Cleaning holes:
1. Insert long air nozzle into hole and blow out loose dust. Use compressed air
that is free of oil, water, or other contaminants that will reduce bond.
2. Use a stiff bristle brush to vigorously brush hole to dislodge compacted drilling
dust.
3. Repeat step 1.
4. Repeat above steps as required to remove drilling dust or other material that
will reduce bond. The hole shall be clean and dry.
G. Cleaning reinforcing bars and all thread rods:
1. Solvent clean reinforcing bar and all thread rods over the embedment length in
accordance with SSPC SP-1 Solvent Cleaning. Provide an oil and grease free
surface to promote bonding of adhesive to steel.
2. Clean reinforcing bars and all thread rods over embedment length to bare
metal. The reinforcing bars and all thread rods shall be free of oil, grease,
paint, dirt, mill scale, rust, or other coatings that will reduce bond.
H. Filling hole with epoxy:
1. Fill hole with epoxy before inserting the reinforcing bar or all thread rod. Fill
hole with epoxy starting from bottom of hole. Fill hole without creating air
voids.
2. Fill hole with sufficient epoxy so that excess epoxy is extruded out of the hole
when the reinforcing bar or all thread rod is inserted into the hole.
3. Do not install epoxy prior to receiving epoxy manufacturer's onsite training.
I
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03055-4 82351310
pw:H Carollo/Documents/`Client/WA/Renton/8235610/Specifications/10.03055.doc
3.03 MANUFACTURERS' SERVICES
A. Furnish manufacturer's representative to conduct jobsite training for proper
installation, handling, and storage of epoxy, for personnel who will perform actual
installation. ENGINEER may attend training sessions.
END OF SUB-SECTION
t
i
!
I
t
!
t
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03055-5 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.03055.doc
I
II
II
i .
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03055-6 8235610
pw://Carollot Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.03055.doc
SUB-SECTION 10.03071
EPDXIES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section Includes:
1. Epoxy.
2. Epoxy gel.
3. Epoxy bonding agent.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. Sub-Section 10.03072 - Epoxy Resin - Portland Cement Bonding Agent.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. D 638 - Standard Test Method.for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
2. D 695 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics.
3. D 790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and
Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements:
1. Provide epoxy materials that are new and use them within shelf life limitations
set forth by manufacturer.
2. Perform and conduct work of this Sub-Section in neat orderly manner.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data completely describing epoxy materials.
B. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Epoxy: Water-insensitive 2-part type low viscosity epoxy adhesive material
containing 100 percent solids and meeting or exceeding following characteristics
when tested in accordance with standards specified: Manufacturers: One of the
following or equal:
1. BASF, MBT, ConcresiveO Standard LVI.
2. Sika Chemical Corp., Sikadur 35 Hi-Mod LV.
September 10, 2010— FINAL 10.03071-1 8235610
pw:l/Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10,03071.doc
Physical Test Required Results
Characteristic Method
Tensile Strength ASTM D 638 8,000 pounds per square inch minimum
at 14 days and 77 degrees Fahrenheit
cure.
Flexure Strength ASTM D 790 11,000 pounds per square inch minimum
at 14 days and 77 degrees Fahrenheit
cure.
Compressive ASTM D 695 16,000 pounds per square inch minimum
Strength at 24 hours and 77 degrees Fahrenheit
cure.
Bond Strength -- Concrete shall fail before failure of epoxy. j
Gel Time for 5 Mil -- Four hours maximum at 77 degrees
Film Fahrenheit.
Elongation ASTM D 638 1 percent minimum at 14 days and
77 degrees Fahrenheit.
B. Epoxy Gel: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Sika Chemical Corp., Sikadur 31, Hi-Mod Gel.
C. Epoxy Bonding Agent: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. BASF, MBT, Concresive® Liquid LPL.
2. Sika Chemical Corp., Sikadur 32, Hi-Mod LPL.
3. If increased tack time is required for concrete placement, epoxy resin -
portland cement bonding agent as specified in Sub-Section 10.03072 may be
used instead of epoxy bonding agent.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install and cure epoxy materials in accordance with manufacturer's installation
instructions.
B. Epoxy:
1. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
C. Epoxy Gel:
1. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
2. Use for vertical or overhead work, or where high viscosity epoxy is required.
3. Epoxy gel used for vertical or overhead work may be used for horizontal work.
D. Epoxy Bonding Agent:
1. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
2. Bonding agent will not be required for filling form tie holes or for normal
finishing and patching of similar sized small defects.
END OF SUB-SECTION
September 10, 2010— FINAL 10.03071-2 82351310
pw:l/Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications110.03071.doc �,
SUB-SECTION 10.03072
EPDXY RESIN/PORTLAND CEMENT BONDING AGENT
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Epoxy resin/portland cement bonding agent.
i1.02 REFERENCES
A. . ASTM International (ASTM):
1. C 109 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement
Mortars (Using 2-in. or[50-mm] Cube Specimens).
2. C 348 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic-Cement
Mortars.
3. C 496 - Standard Test Method for Splitting Tensile Strength of Cylindrical
Concrete Specimens.
4. C 882 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems
Used With Concrete By Slant Shear.
B. Federal Highway Administration (FHWA):
1. FHWA-RD-86-193 - Highway Concrete Pavement Technology Development
and Testing Volume V: Field Evaluation of SHRP C9206 Test Sites (Bridge
Deck Overlays).
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, New Jersey, Sika Armatec 110.
B. Substitutions: The use of other than the specified product will be considered,
providing the CONTRACTOR requests its use in writing to the ENGINEER. This
request shall be accompanied by:
1. A certificate of compliance from an approved independent testing laboratory
that the proposed substitute product meets or exceeds specified performance
criteria, tested in accordance with the specified test standards.
2. Documented proof that the proposed substitute product has a 1-year proved
record of performance of bonding portland cement mortar/concrete to
hardened portland cement mortar/concrete, confirmed by actual field tests and
5 successful installations that the ENGINEER can investigate.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Epoxy resin/portland cement adhesive:
1. Component "A" shall be an epoxy resin/water emulsion containing suitable
viscosity control agents. It shall not contain butyl glycidyl ether.
2. Component "B" shall be primarily a water solution of a polyamine.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03072-1 82351310
pw:HCarollo/Documentsl ClientfWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.03072.doc
E
3. Component C shall be a blend of selected portland cements and sands.
4. The material shall not contain asbestos. E
2.03 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Properties of the mixed epoxy resin/portland cement adhesive:
1. Pot life: 75 to 105 minutes.
2. Contact time: 24 hours.
3. Color: Dark gray.
B. Properties of the cured epoxy resin/portland cement adhesive:
1. Compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C 109:
a. 1 day: 810 pounds per square-inch minimum.
b. 7 days: 6,000 pounds per square-inch minimum. j
c. 28 days: 8,000 pounds per square-inch minimum. fin
2. Splitting tensile strength in accordance with ASTM C 496: j
a. 28 days: 540 pounds per square-inch minimum.
3. Flexural strength:
a. 1,100 pounds per square-inch minimum.in accordance with ASTM C 348.
4. Bond strength In accordance with ASTM C 882 modified at 14 days:
a. 0 hours open time: 1,900 pounds per square-inch minimum.
b. 24 hours open time: 1,500 pounds per square-inch minimum.
5. The epoxy resin/portland cement adhesive shall not produce a vapor barrier.
6. Material must be proven to prevent corrosion of reinforcing steel when tested
under the procedures as set forth by the FHWA Program Report Number
FHWA/RD86/193. Proof shall be in the form of an independent testing !�!
laboratory corrosion report showing prevention of corrosion of the reinforcing
steel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Mixing the epoxy resin: Shake contents of Component"A" and Component"B."
Empty all of both components into a clean, dry, mixing pail. Mix thoroughly for
30 seconds with a jiffy paddle on a low-speed with 400 to 600 revolutions per
minute drill. Slowly add the entire contents of Component "C" while continuing to
mix for a minimum of 3 minutes and until uniform with no lumps. Mix only that
quantity that can be applied within its pot life.
B. Placement procedure:
1. Apply to prepared surface with stiff-bristle brush, broom, or"hopper type"
spray equipment:
a. For hand applications: Place fresh, plastic concrete/mortar while the
bonding bridge adhesive is wet or dry, up to 24 hours.
b. For machine applications: Allow the bonding bridge adhesive to dry for
12 hours minimum.
C. Adhere to all limitations and cautions for the epoxy resin/portland cement adhesive
in the manufacturer's current printed literature.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03072-2 8235610
pw:HCarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.03072.doc
3.02 CLEANING
A. Leave finished work and work area in a neat, clean condition without evidence of
spillovers onto adjacent areas.
END OF SUB-SECTION
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03072-3 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.03072.doc
i
i
i
I
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03072-4 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl O]Specifications/10.03072.doc
SUB-SECTION 10.03102
CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Concrete formwork.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
a. Sub-Section 10.03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
b. Sub-Section 10.03600 - Grouts.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
1. 117 - Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials
and Commentary.
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A 82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete
Reinforcement.
2. A 153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
3. A 167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium-
Nickel Steel Plant, Sheet, and Strip.
4. A 580 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Wire.
C. NSF International (NSF):
1. 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
�. A. Design requirements:
1. Design of concrete forms, falsework, and shoring in accordance with local,
state, and federal regulations.
2. Design forms and ties to withstand concrete pressures without bulging,
spreading, or lifting of forms.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03102-1 8235B10
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClientlWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specificabons/10.03102.docx
B. Performance requirements:
1. Construct forms so that finished concrete conforms to shapes, lines, grades,
and dimensions indicated on the Drawings.
2. It is intended that surface of concrete after stripping presents smooth, hard,
and dense finish that requires minimum amount of finishing.
3. Provide sufficient number of forms so that the work may be performed rapidly
and present uniform appearance in form patterns and finish.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Information on the CONTRACTOR's proposed forming system: Submit in such
detail as the ENGINEER may require to assure himself that intent of the
Specifications can be complied with by use of proposed system.
B. Alternate combinations of plywood thickness and stud spacing: May be submitted.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of formwork manufacturers: Use only forming systems manufactured
by manufacturers having minimum 5 years experience, except as otherwise
specified, or accepted in writing by the ENGINEER.
B. Regulatory requirements: Install work of this Sub-Section in accordance with local,
state, and federal regulations.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Requirements due to weather condition:
1. Removal of formwork: Do not remove forms from concrete which has been
placed when outside ambient air temperature is below 50 degrees Fahrenheit
until concrete has attained specified strength.as determined by test cylinders
stored in field under equivalent conditions as concrete structure.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Form ties:
1. General:
a. Provide form ties for forming system selected that are manufactured by
recognized manufacturer of concrete forming equipment.
b. Do not use wire ties or wood spreaders of any form.
c. Provide ties of type that accurately tie, lock, and spread forms.
d. Provide form ties of such design that when forms are removed, they
locate no metal or other material within 1-1/2 inches of the surface of the
concrete.
e. Do not allow ho_les in forms for ties to allow leakage during placement of
concrete.
2. Cone-snap ties:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03102-2 82351310
pw:HCarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.03102,docx
a. Cone-snap ties shall form a cone shaped depression in the concrete with
a minimum diameter of 1 inch at the surface of the concrete and
1-1/2 inches deep.
b. Provide neoprene waterseal washer that is located near the center of the
concrete.
3. Taper ties:
a. Neoprene plugs for taper tie holes: Size so that after they are driven,
plugs are located in center third of wall thickeners.
b. Dry-pack mortar for filling taper tie holes:
1) Consist of mix of 1 part of portland cement to 1 part of plaster sand.
2) Amount of water to be added to cement-sand mix is to be such that
mortar can be driven into holes and be properly compacted.
3) Admixtures or additives: Are not to be used in dry-pack mortar.
B. Built-up plywood forms:
1. Built-up plywood forms may be substituted for prefabricated forming system
subject to following minimum requirements:
a. Size and material:
1) Full size 4-by 8-foot plywood sheets, except where smaller pieces
are able to cover entire area.
2) Sheet construction: 5-ply plywood sheets, 3/4-inch nominal, made
with 100 percent waterproof adhesive, and having finish surface that
is coated or overlaid with surface which is impervious to water and
alkaline calcium and sodium hydroxide of cement.
b. Wales: Minimum 2-by 4-inch lumber.
c. Studding and wales: Contain no loose knots and be free of warps, cups,
and bows.
C. Steel or steel framed forms:
1. Steel forms: Provide forms that are:
a. Rigidly constructed and capable of being braced for minimum deflection of
finish surface.
b. Capable of providing finish surfaces that are flat without bows, cups, or
dents.
2. Steel framed plywood forms:
a. Provide forms that are rigidly constructed and capable of being braced.
b. Plywood paneling: 5-ply, 5/8-inch nominal or 3/4-inch nominal, made with
100 percent waterproof adhesive, and having finish surface that is coated
or overlaid with surface which is impervious to water and alkaline calcium
and sodium hydroxide of cement.
D. Incidentals:
1. External angles: '
a. Where not otherwise indicated on the Drawings, provide with 3/4-inch
bevel, formed by utilizing true dimensioned wood or solid plastic chamfer
strip on walkways, slabs, walls, beams, columns, and openings.
b. Provide 1/4-inch bevel formed by utilizing true dimensioned wood or solid
plastic chamfer strip on walkways, walls, and slabs at expansion, and
construction joints.
2. Keyways: Steel, plastic, or lumber treated with form coating, applied according
to label directions.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03102-3 8235B10
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.03102.docx
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Site verification of conditions:
1. Do not place any concrete until all forms have been thoroughly checked for
alignment, level, strength, and to assure accurate location of all mechanical
and electrical inserts or other embedded items.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Forms and accessories:
1. Vertical forms:
.a. Remain in place minimum of 24 hours after concrete is placed.
b. If, after 24 hours, concrete has sufficient strength and hardness to resist
surface or other damage, forms may be removed.
2. Other forms supporting concrete and shoring: Remain in place as follows:
a. Sides of footings: 24 hours minimum.
b. Vertical sides of beams, girders, and similar members: 48 hours minimum.
c. Slabs, beams, and 9 P
irders: Until concrete strength reaches specified
strength f'c.or until shoring is installed. +`
d. Shoring for slabs, beams, and girders: Shore until concrete strength
reaches specified strength.
e. Wall bracing: Brace walls until concrete strength of beams and slabs it
laterally supporting wall reaches specified strength.
3. Green concrete:
a. No heavy loading on green concrete will be permitted.
b. Green concrete is defined as concrete with less than 100 percent of
specified strength f'c.
4. Immediately after forms are removed, carefully examine concrete surfaces,
and repair any irregularities in surfaces and finishes as specified in Sub-
Section 10.03300.
B. Form ties:
1. Cone-snap ties: Tie forms together at not more than 2-foot centers vertically _
and horizontally. After forms are removed from wall, fill tie holes as follows:
a. Remove form ties from surfaces.
b. Roughen cone shaped tie holes by heavy sandblasting before repair.
c. Dry pack cone shaped tie holes with dry-pack mortar as specified in Sub-
Section 10.03600.
2. Taper ties:
a. After forms and taper ties are removed from wall, plug tie holes with
neoprene plug as follows:
1) Heavy sandblast and then clean tie holes.
2) After cleaning, drive neoprene plug into each of taper tie holes with
steel rod. Final location of neoprene plug shall be in center third of
wall thickness. Bond neoprene plug to concrete with epoxy.
3) Locate steel rod in cylindrical recess, made in plug, during driving.
a) At no time are plugs to be driven on flat area outside cylindrical
recess. .
b. Dry-pack of taper tie holes: After installing plugs in tie holes:
y
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03102-4 82351310
pwIlCarollo/Documents/Client/WAlRenton1 8235B10 1Speci6catlons110.03102.docx
f�
1) Coat tie hole surface with epoxy bonding agent and fill with dry-pack
mortar as specified in Sub-Section 10.03600.
a) Dry-pack mortar: Place in holes in layers with thickness not
exceeding tie hole diameter and heavily compact each layer.
b) Dry-pack the outside of the hole no sooner than 7 days after the
inside of the hole has been dry packed.
c) Wall surfaces in area of dry-packed tie holes: On the water side
of water containing structures and the outside of below grade
walls:
(1) Cover with minimum of 10 mils of epoxy gel.
(2) Provide epoxy gel coating on wall surfaces that extend
minimum of 2 inches past dry-pack mortar filled tie holes.
(3) Provide finish surfaces that are free from sand streaks or
other voids.
C. Built-up plywood forms:
1. Studding:
a. Spaced at 16 inches or 24 inches on center.
b. Closer spacing may be required depending upon strength requirements of
the forms, in order to prevent any bulging surfaces on faces of finished
' concrete work.
c. Install studs perpendicular to grain of exterior plys of plywood sheets.
2. Wales: Form wales of double lumber material with minimum size as specified
in this Sub-Section.
3. Number of form reuses: Depends upon durability of surface coating or overlay
used, and ability to maintain forms in condition such that they are capable of
producing flat, smooth, hard, dense finish on concrete when stripped.
D. Steel or steel framed forms:
1. Steel forms:
a. Adequately brace forms for minimum deflection of finish surface.
2. Steel framed plywood forms:
a. Rigidly construct and brace with joints fitting closely and smoothly.
b. Number of form reuses: Depends upon durability of surface coating or
overlay used.
3. Built-up
p p ywood forms: As specified in this Sub-Section may be used in
conjunction with steel forms or steel framed plywood forms for special forming
conditions such as corbels and forming around items which will project through
forms.
E. Bracing and alignment of forms:
1. Line and grade: Limit deviations to tolerances which will permit proper
installation of structural embedded items or mechanical and electrical
equipment and piping.
2. Formwork:
�r a. Securely brace, support, tie down, or otherwise hold in place to prevent
any movement.
b. Make adequate provisions for uplift pressure, lateral pressure on forms,
and deflection of forms.
3. When second lift is placed on hardened concrete: Take special precautions in
k form work at top of old lift and bottom of new lift to prevent:
i
I t.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03102-5 82351310
r1 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235610/Specifications/10.03102.docx
1.1. C 131 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size
Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.
12. C 136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates.
13. C 142 - Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in
Aggregate.
14. C 143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete.
15. C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
16. C 156 - Standard Test Method for Water Loss [from a Mortar Specimen]
Through Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compounds for Concrete.
17. C 157 - Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic- I'
Cement Mortar and Concrete.
18. C 171 - Standard Specifications for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. '
19. C 172 - Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.
20. C 173 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by
the Volumetric Method.
21. C 260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
22. C 289 - Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of
Aggregates (Chemical Method).
23. C 295 - Standard Guide to Petrographic Examination of Aggregates for
Concrete.
24. C 309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for
Curing Concrete.
25. C 311 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Fly Ash or Natural
Pozzolans for Use in Portland-Cement Concrete.
26. C 494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
27. C 618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural - -
Pozzolan for Use in Concrete.
28. D 75 - Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates.
29. D 2103 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Film and Sheeting.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Alkali: Is defined as the sum of sodium oxide and potassium oxide calculated as
sodium oxide.
B. Cementitious materials: Defined as portland cement and pozzolan admixture.
C. Hairline crack: Crack with a crack width of less than 4 thousandths of an inch.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
t
i A. Performance requirements: +
1. General:
a. Except as otherwise specified, provide concrete composed of portland
cement, fly ash, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, and water so
proportioned and mixed as to produce plastic, workable mixture in
accordance with requirements as specified in this Sub-Section and
suitable to specific conditions of placement.
J
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-2 8235610
t pw:HCarollo/Documents/Clientl WAIRenton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.03300.docx
L
b. Proportion materials in a manner such that will secure lowest water-
cement ratio which is consistent with good workability, plastic, cohesive
mixture,.and 1 which is within specified slump range.
c. Proportion fine and coarse aggregates in manner such as not to produce
harshness in placing or honeycombing in structures.
2. It is the intent of this Sub-Section to secure for every part of the Work concrete
and grout of homogeneous structure, which when hardened will have required
strength, watertightness, and durability:
a. It is recognized that some surface hairline cracks and crazing will develop
in the concrete surfaces.
b. Construction and expansion joints have been specified and positioned in
structures as indicated on the Drawings, and curing methods specified, for
purpose of reducing number and size of cracks, due to normal expansion
and contraction expected from specified concrete mixes.
c. Walls or slabs, as specified above, that leak or sweat because of porosity
or cracks too small for successful pressure grouting: Seal on water or
weather side by coatings of surface sealant system, as specified in this
Sub-Section.
d. Grouting and sealing: Continue as specified above until structure is
watertight and remains watertight for not less than 1 year after final
acceptance or date of final repair, whichever occurs later in time.
3. Workmanship and methods: Provide concrete work, including detailing of
reinforcing, conforming with best standard practices and as set forth in
ACI 318, ACI 350, Manuals, and recommended practices.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data: Submit data completely describing products.
B. Information on heating equipment to be used for cold weather concreting: Submit
information on type of equipment to be used for heating materials and/or new
concrete in process of curing during excessively cold weather.
C. For conditions that promote rapid drying of freshly placed concrete such as low
humidity, high temperature, and wind: Submit corrective measures proposed for use
prior to placing concrete.
D. Copies of tests of concrete aggregates: Submit certified copies in triplicate of
commercial laboratory tests not more than 90 days old of all samples of concrete
aggregates:
1. Fine aggregate:
a. Clay lumps.
b. Reactivity.
c. Shale and chert.
d. Soundness.
e. Color.
f. Decantation.
2. Coarse aggregate:
a. Clay lumps and friable particles.
b. Reactivity.
c. Shale and chert.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-3 82351310
pw:ICarollolDocumernslClienUWA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.03300.docx
d. Soundness.
e. Abrasion loss.
f. Coal and lignite.
g. Materials finer than 200 sieve.
E. Sieve analysis: Submit sieve analyses of fine and coarse aggregates being used in
triplicate at least every 3 weeks and at any time there is significant change in
grading of materials.
F. Concrete mixes: Submit full details, including mix design calculations for concrete
mixes proposed for use for each class of concrete: !�
1. Include information on correction of batching for varying moisture contents of
fine aggregate.
2. Submit source quality test records with mix design submittal:
a. Include calculations for fa based on source quality test records.
G.. Trial batch test data:
1. Submit data for each test cylinder.
2. Submit data that identifies mix and slump for each test cylinder.
H. Sequence of concrete placing: Submit proposed sequence of placing concrete
showing proposed beginning and ending of individual placements.
I. Curing compound other than specified compound: Submit complete data on
proposed compound.
J. If either fine or coarse aggregate is batched from more than 1 bin: Submit analyses
for each bin, and composite analysis made up from these, using proportions of
materials to be used in mix.
K. Cement mill tests: Include alkali content, representative of each shipment of cement
for verification of compliance with specified requirements.
L. Pozzolan Certificate of Compliance: Identify source of pozzolan and certify
compliance in accordance with ASTM C 618.
M. Information on mixing equipment.
N. Drying shrinkage test data.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packing and shipping:
1. Deliver, store, and handle concrete materials in manner that prevents damage
and inclusion of foreign substances.
2. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers until ready for use.
3. Deliver aggregate to mixing site and handle in such manner that variations in
moisture content will not interfere with steady production of concrete of
specified degree of uniformity and slump.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-4 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235 B10/Specficatlons/10.03300.docx
B. Acceptance at site Reject material containers or materials showing evidence of
water or other damage.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental requirements:
1. Hot weather concreting:
a. When ambient air temperature is above 90 degrees Fahrenheit: Prior to
placing concrete, cool forms and reinforcing steel by water cooling to
below 90 degrees Fahrenheit.
b. Temperature of concrete mix at time of placement: Keep temperature
below 90 degrees Fahrenheit by methods which do not impair quality of
concrete.
2. Cold weather concreting:
a. Concrete placed below ambient air temperature of 45 degrees Fahrenheit
and falling or below 40 degrees Fahrenheit: Make provision for heating
water.
b. If materials have been exposed to freezing temperatures to degree that
any material is below 35 degrees Fahrenheit: Heat such materials.
c. Heating water, cement, or aggregate materials:
1) Do not heat in excess of 160 degrees Fahrenheit.
d. Protection of concrete in forms:
1) Protect by means of covering with tarpaulins, or other acceptable
covering acceptable to ENGINEER.
2) Provide means for circulating warm moist air around forms in manner
to maintain temperature of 50 degrees Fahrenheit for at least 5 days.
3. For conditions that promote rapid drying of freshly placed concrete such as low
humidity, high temperature, and wind: Take corrective measures to minimize
rapid water loss from concrete:
a. Furnish and use sufficient number of maximum and minimum self-
recording thermometers to adequately measure temperature around
concrete.
1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Schedule placing of concrete in such manner as to complete any single placing
operation to construction or expansion joint.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Admixtures:
1. General:
a. Do not use admixtures of any type, except as specified, unless written
authorization has been obtained from the ENGINEER.
b. Compatible with concrete and other admixtures.
c. Do not use admixtures containing chlorides calculated as chloride ion in
excess of 0.5 percent by weight.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-5 8235610
pw://Ca,ollol Document sl ClienlWAlRenlon/IIIIBI0/S,e,ilcalion,/l1.01100,locx
d. Use in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and add each
admixture to concrete mix separately.
2. Air entraining admixture:
a. Provide all concrete with 5 percent, plus or minus 1 percent, entrained air
of evenly dispersed air bubbles at time of placement.
b. In accordance with ASTM C 260.
3. Pozzolan admixture:
a. Fly ash in accordance with requirements of ASTM C 618, Class F may be
used as admixture in concrete made with Type II portland cement.
b. Maximum of 15 percent by weight of pozzolan admixture to total weight of
cementitious materials.
1) The total weight of cementitious materials shall not be less than
minimum cementitious materials listed in Table A.
c. Do not use pozzolan admixture as an admixture in concrete made with
portland-pozzolan cement.
d. Loss on ignition for pozzolan admixture: Not exceed 4 percent.
4. Water reducing admixture:
a. May be used at the CONTRACTOR's option.
b. In accordance with ASTM C 484, Type A or Type D.
c. Not contain air-entraining agents.
d. Liquid form before adding to the concrete mix.
e. No decrease in cement is permitted as result of use of water reducing
admixture.
5. Superplasticizers: Are not to be used without acceptance by ENGINEER.
B. Aggregate:
1. General:
a. Provide concrete aggregates that are sound, uniformly graded, and free of
deleterious material in excess of allowable amounts specified.
b. Grade aggregate in accordance with ASTM C 136 and D 75.
c. Provide unit weight of fine and coarse aggregate that produces in place
concrete with weight of not less than 140 pounds per cubic foot.
d. Do not use aggregate made from recycled materials such as crushed and
screened hydraulic-cement concrete, brick, and other construction
materials.
2. Fine aggregate:
a. Provide fine aggregate for concrete or mortar consisting of clean, natural
sand or of sand prepared from crushed stone or crushed gravel.
b. Do not provide aggregate having deleterious substances in excess of
following percentages by weight of contaminating substances.
1) In no case shall total exceed percent listed.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-6 8235610 '
pw:ll CarollolDocuments/Client/WA/Renton1 8235B10/Specifications110.03300.docx
Item Test Method Percent
Removed by decantation (dirt, silt, etc.) ASTM C 117 3
Shale or Chert ASTM C 123 1
ASTM C 295" 1
Clay Lumps ASTM C 142 1
* Test Method C 123 is used to identify particles in the sample lighter than 2.40 Specific
Gravity. Test Method C 295 is used to identify which of the lightweight particles are shale
or chert. If the results of Test Method C 123 are less than 1 percent, Test Method C 295 is
not required
c. Except as otherwise specified, grade fine aggregate from coarse to fine in
accordance with requirements of ASTM C 33.
3. Coarse aggregate:
a. General: Provide coarse aggregate consisting of gravel or crushed stone
made up of clean, hard, durable particles free from calcareous coatings,
organic matter, or other foreign substances.
b. Weight: Not exceeding 15 percent, for thin or elongated pieces having
length greater than 5 times average thickness.
c. Deleterious substances: Not in excess of following percentages by weight,
and in no case having total of all deleterious substances exceeding
2 percent.
Item Test Method Percent
Shale or Chert ASTM C 123 1.25
ASTM C 295** 1
Coal and lignite ASTM C 123 1/4
Clay lumps and friable particles ASTM C 142 1/4
Materials finer than Number 200 sieve ASTM C 117 1/2*
* Except when material finer than Number 200 sieve consists of crusher dust, maximum
f amount shall be 1 percent.
** Test Method C 123 is used to identify particles in the sample lighter than 2.40 Specific
Gravity. Test Method C 295 is used to identify which of the lightweight particles are shale,
chert, coal, or lignite. If the results of Test Method C 123 are less than 1.25 percent (the
minimum combined percentage of shale, chert, coal and lignite), Test Method C 295 is not
required.
d. Grading:
1) Aggregate for Class A, B, C, and D concrete: In accordance with
ASTM C 33, Size Number 57, except as otherwise specified or
authorized in writing by the ENGINEER.
2) Aggregate for Class CE concrete for encasement of electrical
conduits:
a) Graded in accordance with ASTM C 33, Size Number 8.
C. Concrete sealer:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. ChemMasters, Madison, OH, Spray-Cure & Seal 25.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-7 82351310
pw:l/Carollo/Documents/ClientlWA/Renton18235Bl0/Specifications/10.03300.docx
b. Tamms Industries, Luster Seal WB-300.
D. Conduit encasement coloring agent:
1. Color: Red color concrete used for encasement of electrical ducts, conduits,
and similar type items. .
2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Davis Company, #100 Utility Red.
b. I. Reiss Company, Inc., equivalent product.
3. Conduit encasement concrete: Mix into each cubic yard of concrete 10 pounds
of coloring agent. n
E. Evaporation retardant:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Master Builders Technologies, Cleveland, Ohio, Confilm.
b. Euclid Chemical Company, Cleveland, Ohio, Eucobar.
F. Keyway material: Steel, plastic, or lumber.
G. Nonslip abrasive:
1. Type: Aluminum oxide abrasive of size 8/16, having structure of hard
aggregate, homogenous, nonglazing, rustproof, and unaffected by freezing,
moisture, or cleaning compounds.
2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Exolon Company, Tonawanda, New York.
b. Abrasive Materials, Incorporated, Hillsdale, Michigan.
H. Portland cement: .
1. General: Conform to specifications and tests in accordance with ASTM C 150,
Types II or III, low alkali, except as specified otherwise.
2. Low alkali portland: Have total alkali containing not more than 0.60 percent.
3. Exposed concrete in any individual structure: Use only one brand of portland
cement.
4. Cement for finishes: Provide cement from same source and of same type as
concrete to be finished. "
I. Plastic membrane curing: Use polyethylene film in accordance with ASTM C 171:
1. Color: White.
2. Thickness: Nominal thickness of polyethylene film shall not be less than
0.0040 inches when measured in accordance with ASTM D 2103. Thickness
of polyethylene film at any point shall not be less than 0.0030 inches.
3. Loss of moisture: Not exceed 0.055 grams per square centimeter of surface
when tested in accordance with ASTM C 156.
J. Sprayed membrane curing compound: Clear type with fugitive dye in accordance
with ASTM C 309, Type 1 D.
K. Surface sealant system: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Radcon Laboratories, Inc., Las Vegas, Nevada, Formula Number 7.
2. IPA Systems, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, Duripal.
L. Water:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-8 8235B10
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClientlWA/Renton/8235B10/Specificabons/10.03300.docx
1. Water for concrete, Washing Aggregate, and Curing Concrete: Clean and free
from oil and deleterious amounts of alkali, acid, organic matter, or other
substances.
2. Chlorides and sulfate ions:
a. Water for conventional reinforced concrete: Use water not containing
more than 1,000 milligrams per liter of chlorides calculated as chloride ion,
nor more than 1,000 milligrams per liter of sulfates calculated as sulfate
ion.
b. Water for prestressed or post-tensioned concrete: Use water not
containing more than 650 milligrams per liter of chlorides calculated as
chloride ion, nor more than 800 milligrams per liter of sulfates calculated
as sulfate ion.
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Mixing concrete:
1. Mixers may be of stationary plant, paver, or truck mixer type.
2. Provide adequate equipment and facilities for accurate measurement and
control of materials and for readily changing proportions of material.
3. Mixing equipment:
a. Capable of combining aggregates, cementitious materials, and water
within specified time into thoroughly mixed and uniform mass and
discharging mixture without segregation.
b. Maintain concrete mixing plant and equipment in good working order and
operated at loads, speeds, and timing recommended by manufacturer or
as specified.
c. Proportion cementitious materials and aggregate by weight.
B. Machine mixing:
1. Batch plant`shall be capable of controlling delivery of all material to mixer
within 1 percent by weight of individual material.
2. If bulk cementitious materials are used, weigh them on separate visible scale
which will accurately register scale load at any stage of weighing operation
from zero to full capacity.
3. Prevent cementitious materials from coming into contact with aggregate or
with water until materials are in mixer ready for complete mixing with all mixing
water.
4. Procedure of mixing cementitious materials with sand or with sand and coarse
aggregate for delivery to project site, for final mixing and addition of mixing
water will not be permitted.
5. Retempering of concrete will not be permitted.
6. Discharge entire batch before recharging.
7. Volume of mixed material per batch: Not exceed manufacturer's rated capacity
of mixer.
8. Mixers:
a. Perform mixing in batch mixers of acceptable type.
b. Equip each mixer with device for accurately measuring and indicating
quantity of water entering concrete, and operating mechanism such that
leakage will not occur when valves are closed.
c. Equip each mixer with device for automatically measuring, indicating, and
controlling time required for mixing:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-9 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClientfWA/Renton/8235BI0/Specifications/I0.03300.docx
1) Interlock device to prevent discharge of concrete from mixer before
expiration of mixing period.
C. Transit-mixed concrete:
1. Mix and deliver in accordance with ASTM C 94.
2. Total elapsed time between addition of water at batch plant and discharging
completed mix:
a. Not to exceed 90 minutes.
b. Elapsed time at project site shall not exceed 30 minutes.
3. Under conditions contributing to quick setting, total elapsed time permitted
may be reduced by the ENGINEER.
4. Equip each truck mixer with device interlocked to prevent discharge of
concrete from drum before required number of turns and furnish such device
that is capable of counting number of revolutions of drum.
5. Continuously revolve drum after it is once started until it has completely
discharged its batch:
a. Do not admit water until drum has started revolving. '
b. Right is reserved to increase required minimum number of revolutions or
to decrease designated maximum number of revolutions alloyed, if
necessary, to obtain satisfactory mixing. The CONTRACTOR will not be
entitled to additional compensation because of such increase or decrease.
D. Other types of mixers: In case of other types of mixers, mixing shall be as follows:
1. Mix concrete until there is uniform distribution of materials, and discharge
mixer completely before recharging.
2. Neither speed nor volume loading of mixer shall exceed manufacturer's
recommendations.
3. Continue mixing for minimum of 1-1/2 minutes after all materials are in drum,
and for batches larger than 1 cubic yard increase minimum mixing time
15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or fraction thereof.
2.03 MIXES
A. Measurements of materials:
1. Measure materials by weighing, except as otherwise specified or where other
methods are specifically authorized in writing by the ENGINEER.
2. Furnish apparatus for weighing aggregates and cementitious materials that is
suitably designed and constructed for this purpose.
3. Accuracy of weighing devices: Furnish devices that have capability of
providing successive quantities of individual material that can be measured to
within 1 percent of desired amount of that material.
4. Measuring or weighing devices: Subject to review by the ENGINEER. Shall
bear valid seal of the Sealer of Weights and Measures having jurisdiction.
5. Weighing cementitious materials:
a. Weigh cementitious materials separately.
b. Cement in unbroken standard packages (sacks): Need not be weighed.
c. Bulk cementitious materials and fractional packages: Weigh such
cementitious materials.
6. Mixing water: Measured by volume or by weight.
B. Concrete proportions and consistency:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-10 82351310
pw:#Carollo/Documents/ClientlWA/Renton1 8235Bl0/Specifiications110.03300.docx
1. Concrete consistency and composition:
a. Provide concrete that can be worked readily into corners and angles of
forms and around reinforcement without excessive vibration and without
permitting materials to segregate or free water to collect on surface.
b. Prevent unnecessary or haphazard changes in consistency of concrete.
2. Ratio of coarse aggregate to fine aggregate: Not less than 1.0 or more than
2.0 for all concrete Classes, with exception of Class CE.
3. Aggregate:
a. Obtain aggregate from source that is capable of providing uniform quality,
moisture content, and grading during any single day's operation.
4. Concrete mix water to cementitious materials ratio, minimum cementitious
materials content, and slump range: Conform to values specified in Table A in
this Sub-Section.
5. Concrete batch weights: Control and adjust to secure maximum yield. At all
times, maintain proportions of concrete mix within specified limits.
6. Mix modification: If required, by the ENGINEER, modify mixture within limits
set forth in this Sub-Section.
C. Concrete mixes:
1. Proportioning of concrete mix: Proportion mixes based on required average on
compressive strength fcr.
2. Mixes:
a. Adjusting of water: After acceptance, do not change mixes without
acceptance by ENGINEER, except that at all times adjust batching of
water to compensate for free moisture content of fine aggregate.
b. Total water content of each concrete class: Not exceed those specified in
Table A in this Sub-Section.
c. Checking moisture content of fine aggregate: Furnish satisfactory means
at batching plant for checking moisture content of fine aggregate.
3. Change in mixes: Submit new mix design and undertake new trial batch and
test program as specified in this Sub-Section.
D. Hand mixed concrete:
1. Hand mix concrete only when acceptable to the ENGINEER.
2. Prepare hand mixed concrete on watertight, level platform in batches not to
exceed 1/3 cubic yard each.
3. Aggregate:
a. First, spread required amount of coarse aggregate on platform in an even
and uniform layer.
1) Then over coarse aggregate, spread proper proportion of fine
aggregate.
b. Depth of combined coarse and fine aggregate layers: Not be greater than
1 foot.
4. Cementitious materials:
a. First, evenly spread required quantity of cementitious materials over fine
aggregate.
b. Then turn entire batch with shovels at least 2 times before adding water.
5. Water:
a. Then uniformly sprinkle or spray proper amount of water over batched
materials.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-11 82351310
pw:/lCarollo/Documentsl Client/WA/Rent on/8235Bl0/Specficabons/10.03300.docx
b. Then turn with shovels not less than 3 times before concrete is removed
from platform.
E. Classes of concrete:
1. Provide concrete consisting of 5 classes: Classes A, B, C, D, and CE. Use
where specified or indicated on the Drawings.
2. Weight of concrete classes: Provide classes of concrete having minimum
weight of 140 pounds per cubic foot.
3. Class B concrete: Class B concrete may be substituted for Class A concrete,
when high-early strength concrete is needed in areas specifically accepted by
the ENGINEER and that do not require sulfate resistant concrete.
4. Class C concrete: Class C concrete may be used for fill for unauthorized
excavation, for thrust blocks and ground anchors for piping, for bedding of
pipe, and where indicated on the Drawings.
5. Class D concrete: Use Class D for precast concrete items.
6. Class CE concrete: Use Class CE for electrical conduit encasements.
7. All other concrete, unless specified or otherwise indicated.on the Drawings: �J
Use Class A concrete.
TABLE A
CONCRETE
WITH AIR ENTRAINMENT
Specified Minimum
Compressive Maximum Cementitious
Strength f, at Water-to- Materials per Cubic Slump
28 Days (Pounds per Cementitious Yard of Concrete by Range
Class Square Inch) Materials Ratio Weight (Pounds) (Inches)
A 4,000 0.45 564 2 to 4
B (Type III 4,000 0.45 564 2 to 4
cement)
C 2,500 0.62 423 3 to 6 '
D 4,500 0.45 658 2 to 4
CE 2,500 0.62 564 .3 to 6
8. Pumped concrete: Provide pumped concrete that complies with all
requirements of this Sub-Section.
9. Do not place concrete with slump outside limits indicated in Table A.
10. Classes:
a. Classes A, C, D, and CE concrete: Make with Type II low alkali portland
cement.
b. Class B concrete: Make with Type III low alkali portland cement.
c. ` Admixtures: Provide admixtures as specified in this Sub-Section.
F. .Air entraining admixture:
1. Add agent to batch in portion of mixing water.
2. Batch solution by means of mechanical batcher capable of accurate
measurement.
I�
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-12 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235 Bl0/Specifications/10.03300,docx
i
2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests:
1. Trial batches:
a. After concrete mix designs have been accepted by ENGINEER, have trial
batches of the accepted Class A, Class B, and Class D concrete mix
designs prepared by testing laboratory acceptable to the ENGINEER.
b. Prepare trial batches using specified cementitious materials and
aggregates proposed to be used for the Work.
c. Prepare trial batches with sufficient quantity to determine slump,
workability, consistency, and finishing characteristics, and to provide
sufficient test cylinders.
d. Test cylinders: Provide cylinders having 6-inch diameter by 12-inch length
' and that are prepared in accordance with ASTM C 31 for tests specified in
this Sub-Section.
e. Determine slump in accordance with ASTM C 143.
f. Test cylinders from trial batch:
1) Test 8 cylinders for compressive strength in accordance with
ASTM C 39:
a) Test 4 cylinders at 7 days and 4 at 28 days.
b) Establish ratio between 7 day and 28 day strength for mix. 7-day
strength may be taken as satisfactory indication of 28-day
strength provided effects on concrete of temperature and
humidity between 7 day and 28 day are taken into account.
2) Average compressive strength of 4 test cylinders tested at 28 days:
Equal to or greater than required average compressive strength fir
on which concrete mix design is based.
g. If trial batch tests do not meet specified requirements for slump, strength,
workability, consistency, drying shrinkage, and finishing, change concrete
mix design proportions and, if necessary, source of aggregate.
1) Make additional trial batches and tests until an acceptable trial batch
is produced that meets requirements of this Sub-Section.
h. Perform test batches and tests required to establish trial batches and
acceptability of materials without change in Contract Price.
i. Do not place concrete until the concrete mix design and trial batch have
been accepted by ENGINEER.
2. Required average compressive strength:
a. Determine required average compressive strength (fir)for selection of
concrete proportions for mix design, for each class of concrete, using
calculated standard deviation and its corresponding specified
compressive strength fc, in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI 350.
b. When test records of at least 30 consecutive tests that span period of not
less than 45 calendar days are available, establish standard deviation as
in accordance with ACI 318 and ACI 350 and as modified in this Sub-
Section.
c. Provide test records from which to calculate standard deviation that
represent materials, quality control procedures, and conditions similar to
materials, quality control procedures, and conditions expected to apply in
preparation of concrete for the Work.
I
i
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-13 8235610
pw:#Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.03300.docx
I,
d. Provide changes in materials and proportions within test records that are
more restricted than those for the Work.
e. Specified compressive strength (f j of concrete used in test records:
Within 1,000 pounds per square inch of that specified for the Work.
f. When lacking adequate test records for calculation of standard deviation
meeting requirements, determine required average compressive strength
f,from following Table B.
TABLE B
Specified Compressive Strength f, Required Average Compressive Strength
(pounds per square inch) fcr (pounds per square inch)
Less than 3,000 f + 1,000
3,000 to 5,000 f + 1,200
Over 5,000 1.1Ofc + 700
3. Pozzolan admixture:
a. Sampling and testing:
1) Sample and test pozzolan admixture in accordance with
ASTM C 311.
4. Aggregate:
a. Testing of concrete aggregate is at CONTRACTOR's expense.
b. If there is change in aggregate source or if there is a significant change in
aggregate quality from same source, submit new set of design mixes
covering each class of concrete and prepare new trial batches.
c. Sieves:
1) Use sieves with square openings for testing grading of aggregates.
2) Sieve analyses: If sieve analyses indicate significant change in
materials, the ENGINEER may require that new mix design and trial
batch be submitted and accepted before further placing of concrete.
d. Sample aggregate in accordance with ASTM C 136 and D 75.
e. Fine aggregate:
1) Provide fine aggregate that does not contain strong alkali nor organic
matter which gives color darker than standard color when tested in
accordance with ASTM C 40.
2) Provide aggregate having soundness in accordance with
requirements of ASTM C 33 when tested in accordance with
ASTM C 88.
3) Provide aggregate complying with reactivity requirements of
ASTM C 33 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 289.
f. Coarse aggregate:
1) Soundness when tested in accordance with ASTM C 88: Have loss
not greater than 10 percent when tested with sodium sulfate.
2) Abrasion Loss: Not exceed 45 percent after 500 revolutions when
tested in accordance with ASTM C 131.
3) Reactivity: Not exceed limits specified in Appendix of ASTM C 33
when tested in accordance with ASTM C 289.
g. Portland cement:
1) Determination alkali content: Determine by method set forth in
ASTM C 114.
September,10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-14 8235610
pw:/ICarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/I0.03300.docx j
i
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Liquid evaporation retardant:
q p a dant.
1. Under conditions which result in rapid evaporation of moisture from the surface
of the concrete, immediately after the concrete has been screeded, coat the
surface of the concrete with a liquid evaporation retardant.
2. Apply the evaporation retardant again after each work operation as necessary
to prevent drying shrinkage cracks.
3. Conditions which result in rapid evaporation of moisture may include one or
more of the following:
a. Low humidity.
b. Windy conditions.
c. High temperature.
B. Surface sealant system:
1. Apply as recommended by manufacturer published instructions.
2. Where concrete continues to sweat or leak, apply additional coats of surface
sealant until the sweating or leaks stop.
C. Joints and bonding:
1. As far as practicable construct concrete work as monolith.
2. Locations of construction, expansion, and other joints are indicated on the
Drawings or as specified in this Sub-Section.
3. Repair of concrete: Where it is necessary to repair concrete by bonding mortar
or new concrete to concrete which has reached its initial set, first coat surface
of set concrete with epoxy bonding agent as specified in Sub-
Section 10.03071.
D. Conveying and placing concrete:
1. Convey concrete from mixer to place of final deposit by methods that prevent
separation or loss of materials.
2. Use equipment for chuting, pumping, and conveying concrete of such size and
design as to ensure practically continuous flow of concrete at delivery end
without separation of materials.
3. Design and use chutes and devices for conveying and depositing concrete that
direct concrete vertically downward when discharged from chute or conveying
device.
4. Keep equipment for conveying concrete thoroughly clean by washing and
scraping upon completion of any day's placement.
E. Placing concrete:
1. Place no concrete without prior authorization of the ENGINEER.
2. Do not place concrete until:
�. a. Reinforcement is secure and properly fastened in its correct position and
loose form ties at construction joints have been retightened.
b. Dowels, bucks, sleeves, hangers, pipes, conduits, anchor bolts, and any
other fixtures required to be embedded in concrete have been placed and
adequately anchored.
c. Forms have been cleaned and oiled as specified.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-15 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.03300.docx
J
3. Placement of concrete in which initial set has occurred, or of retempered
concrete, will not be permitted.
4. Place no concrete during rainstorms or high velocity winds.
5. Protect concrete placed immediately before rain to prevent water from coming
in contact with such concrete or winds causing excessive drying.
6. Keep sufficient protective covering on hand at all times for protection of
concrete.
7. After acceptance, adhere to proposed sequence of placing concrete, except
when specific changes are requested and accepted by the ENGINEER.
8. Notify the ENGINEER in writing of readiness, not just intention, to place
concrete in any portion of the work:
a. Provide this notification in such time in advance of operations, as the
ENGINEER deems necessary to make final inspection of preparations at
location of proposed concrete placing.
b. Place forms, reinforcement, screeds, anchors, ties, and inserts in place
before notification of readiness is given to the ENGINEER.
c. Depositing concrete:
1) Deposit concrete at or near its final position to avoid segregation
caused by rehandling or flouring.
2) Do not deposit concrete in large quantities in one place and work
along forms with vibrator or by other methods.
3) Do not drop concrete freely into place from height greater than 5 feet.
4) Use tremies for placing concrete where drop is over 5 feet.
5) Commence placement of concrete on slopes, at bottom of slope.
9. Place concrete in approximately horizontal layers not to exceed 24 inches in
depth and bring up evenly in all parts of forms.
10. Continue concrete placement without avoidable interruption, in continuous
operation, until end of placement is reached.
11. After placement begins, it should continue without significant interruption.
Precautions should be planned and implemented to prevent any delay,
between layers being placed, from exceeding 20 minutes.
12. If concrete is to be placed over previously placed concrete and more than
20 minutes have elapsed, then spread layer of grout not less than 1/2 inch in
thickness nor more than 1 inch in thickness over surface before placing
additional concrete.
13. Placement of concrete for slabs, beams, or walkways:
a. If cast monolithically with walls or columns, do not commence until
concrete in walls or columns has been allowed to set and shrink.
b. Allow set time of not less than one hour for shrinkage. �.
F. Consolidating concrete:
1. Place concrete with aid of acceptable mechanical vibrators.
2. Thoroughly consolidate concrete around reinforcement, pipes, or other shapes
built into the work.
3. Provide sufficiently intense vibration to cause concrete to flow and settle
readily into place and to visibly affect concrete over radius of at least
18 inches.
4. Vibrators:
a. Keep sufficient vibrators on hand at all times to vibrate concrete as
placed.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-16 8235610
pw:#Carollo/Documents/Client[WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.03300.docx
b. In addition to vibrators in actual use while concrete is being placed, have
on hand minimum 1 spare vibrator in serviceable condition.
c. Place no concrete until it has been ascertained that all vibrating
equipment, including spares, are in serviceable condition.
5. Take special care to place concrete solidly against forms to leave no voids.
' 6. Take every precaution to make concrete solid, compact, and smooth, and if for
any reason surfaces or interiors have voids or are in any way defective, repair
such concrete in manner acceptable to the ENGINEER.
G. Loading concrete:
1. Green concrete:
a. No heavy loading of green concrete will be permitted.
b. Green concrete is defined as concrete with less than 100 percent of the
specified strength.
2. No backfill shall be placed against concrete walls, connecting slabs, or beams
until the concrete has reached the specified strength.
3. Use construction methods, sequencing, and allow time for concrete to reach
adequate strength to prevent overstress of the concrete structure during
construction.
H. Curing concrete:
1. General:
a. Cure concrete by methods specified in this Sub-Section.
b. Cure concrete minimum of 7 days.
c. Cure concrete to be painted with water or plastic membrane.
' d. Do not use curing compound on concrete surfaces that are to receive
paint or upon which any material is to be bonded.
e. Water cure or plastic membrane cure concrete slabs that are specified to
be sealed by concrete sealer.
f. Cure other concrete by water curing or sprayed curing membrane at the
CONTRACTOR's option.
g. Floor slabs may be cured using plastic membrane curing:
2. Water curing:
a. Keep surfaces of concrete being water cured constantly and visibly moist
day and night for period of not less than 7 days.
b. Each day forms remain in place may count as 1 day of water curing.
c. No further curing credit will be allowed for forms in place after contact has
once been broken between concrete surface and forms.
d. Do not loosen form ties during period when concrete is being cured by
leaving forms in place.
e. Flood top of walls with water at least 3 times per day, and keep concrete
' surfaces moist at all times during 7 day curing period.
3. Sprayed membrane curing:
a. Apply curing compound to concrete surface after repairing and patching,
and within 1 hour after forms are removed.
b. If more than 1 hour elapses after removal of forms, do not use membrane-
curing compound, but use water curing for full curing period.
' c. If surface requires repairing or painting, water cure such concrete
surfaces.
d. Curing compound:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-17 8235610
pw:l/ca,ollo/Documents/cl ieht/WII RenlonIII15B1011pecilcavons/10.0nw.d"cx
S
1) Do not remove curing compound from concrete in less than 7 days.
2) Curing compound may be removed only upon written request by the
CONTRACTOR and acceptance by the ENGINEER, stating what
measures are to be performed to adequately cure structures.
3) Take care to apply curing compound in area of construction joints.
a) See that curing compound is placed within construction joint a
silhouette.
4) After curing period is complete, remove curing compound placed
within construction joint silhouette by heavy sandblasting prior to
placing any new concrete.
5) CONTRACTOR's Option: Instead of using curing compound for
curing of construction joints, such joints may be water cured.
6) Apply curing compound by mechanical, power operated sprayer and
mechanical agitator that will uniformly mix all pigment and
compound.
7) Apply compound in at least 2 coats.
8) Apply each coat in direction 90 degrees to preceding coat.
9) Apply curing compound in sufficient quantity so that concrete has
uniform appearance and that natural color is effectively and
completely concealed at time of spraying.
10) Continue to coat and recoat surfaces until specified coverage is
achieved and until coating film remains on concrete surfaces.
11) Thickness and coverage of curing compound: Provide compound
having film thickness that can be scraped from surfaces at any and
all points after drying for at least 24 hours.
12) The CONTRACTOR is cautioned that method of applying curing
compound specified in this Sub-Section may require more compound
than normally suggested by manufacturer of compound and also
more than is customary in the trade.
13) Apply amounts specified in this Sub-Section, regardless of
manufacturer's recommendations or customary practice, if curing
compound is used in place of water curing.
14) If the CONTRACTOR desires to use curing compound other than
specified curing compound, coat sample areas of concrete wall with
proposed curing compound and also similar adjacent area with
specified compound in specified manner for comparison:
a) If proposed sample is not equal or better, in opinion of the
ENGINEER, in all features, proposed substitution will not be
allowed.
15) Prior to final acceptance of the work, remove, by sandblasting or
other acceptable method, any curing compound on surfaces exposed
to view, so that only natural color of finished concrete is visible ,
uniformly over entire surface.
4. Plastic membrane curing:
a. Polyethylene film may be used to cure slabs.
1) Seal joints and edges with small sand berm.
b. Install plastic membrane as soon as concrete is finished and can be
walked on without damage. '
c. Keep concrete moist under plastic membrane.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-18 8235610
pw:/ICarollo/Documents/Clientl WA/Renton1 8235B10/Specifications/10.03300.docx ,
3.02 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. Edges of joints:
1. Provide joints having edges as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Protect wall and slab surfaces at edges against concrete spatter and
' thoroughly clean upon completion of each placement.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing of concrete:
1. During progress of construction, the OWNER will have tests made to
determine whether the concrete, as being produced, complies with
' requirements specified.
2. Tests will be performed in accordance with ASTM C 31, ASTM C 39, and
ASTM C 172.
' 3. The ENGINEER will make and deliver test cylinders to the laboratory and
testing expense will be borne by the OWNER.
4. Required number cylinders:
a. Not less than 3 cylinder specimens, 6-inch diameter by 12 inch long, will
be tested for each 150 cubic yards of each class of concrete with
minimum of 3 specimens for each class of concrete placed and not less
than 3 specimens for each half day's placement.
b. One cylinder will be broken at 7 days and 2 at 28 days.
5. The CONTRACTOR shall:
a. Test slump of concrete using slump cone in accordance with requirements
of ASTM C 143.
b. Furnish test equipment.
c. Do not use concrete that does not meet specification requirements in
regards to slump.
1) Remove such concrete from project site.
d. Test slump at the beginning of each placement, as often as necessary to
' keep slump within the specified range, and when requested to do so by
the ENGINEER.
e. Make provisions for and furnish concrete for test specimens, and provide
manual assistance to the ENGINEER in preparing said specimens.
f. Assume responsibility for care of and providing of curing conditions for
test specimens in accordance with ASTM C 31.
I
B. Air entraining admixture:
1. Test percent of entrained air in concrete at beginning of each placement, as
often as necessary to keep entrained air within specified range, and when
' requested to do so by the ENGINEER.
2. Provide test equipment.
3. Do not use concrete that does not meet Specification requirements for air
entrainment.
a. Remove such concrete from project site.
4. Test air entrainment in concrete in accordance with ASTM C 173.
' 5. The ENGINEER may at any time test percent of entrained air in concrete
received on project site.
C. Enforcement of strength requirement:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-19 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClientlWA/Renton/8235 B10/Specificationstl0.03300.docx
1. Concrete is expected to reach higher compressive strength than that which is
indicated in Table A as specified compressive strength fc.
2. Strength level of concrete: Will be considered acceptable if following
conditions are satisfied:
a. Averages of all sets of 3 consecutive strength test results is greater or
equal to specified compressive strength f,. e
b. No individual strength test (average of 2 cylinders)falls below specified
compressive strength f, by more than 500 pounds per square inch.
c. Whenever one, or both, of 2 conditions stated above is not satisfied,
provide additional curing of affected portion followed by cores taken in
accordance with ASTM C 42, ACI 318, and ACI 350 and comply with
following requirements:
1) If additional curing does not bring average of 3 cores taken in
affected area to at least specified compressive strength f , designate
such concrete in affected area as defective.
2) The ENGINEER may require the CONTRACTOR to strengthen
defective concrete by means of additional concrete, additional
reinforcement, or replacement of defective concrete, all of the
CONTRACTOR's expense.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Repair of defective concrete:
1. Remove and replace.or repair defective work.
2. Correct defective work as specified.
3. Do not patch, repair, or cover defective work without inspection by the
ENGINEER.
4. Provide repairs having strength equal to or greater than specified concrete for
areas involved.
5. Preparation of concrete for repair:
a. Make no repair until ENGINEER has accepted method for preparing
surface for repair.
b. Chip out and key imperfections in the work and make them ready for
repair.
c. Surfaces of set concrete to be repaired: First coat with epoxy bonding
agent as specified in Sub-Section 10.03071.
6. Methods of repair:
a. Dry pack method:.
1) Use for holes having depth nearly equal to or greater than least
surface dimension of hole, for cone-bolt holes, and for narrow slots
cut for repair.
2) Smooth holes: Clean and roughen by heavy sandblasting before ,
repair.
b. Mortar method of replacement:
1) Use for holes too wide to dry pack and too shallow for concrete '
replacement.
2) Comparatively shallow depressions, large or small, which extend no
deeper than nearest surface reinforcement. ,
c. Concrete replacement:
September 1
0, 2010 -
FINAL 10.03300-20 8235610
pw://Carollo/Doc uments/Client/WA/Renton/8235 B 10/Specifications/I0.03300.docx
1) Use when holes extend entirely through concrete section or when
holes are more than 1 square foot in area and extend halfway or
more through the section.
END OF SUB-SECTION
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-21 8235B10
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienUWA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.03300.docx
' O
v i
I
II
II
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03300-22 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specificabons/10.03300.docx
' SUB-SECTION 10.03600
GROUTS
PART GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section Includes:
1. Concrete mortar.
2. Dry-pack mortar.
3. Epoxy grout.
4. Grout.
5. Non-shrink epoxy grout.
' 6. Non-shrink grout.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. Sub-Section 10.03071 - Epoxies.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. C 109 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement
Mortars (using 2-inch or[50-millimeter] cube specimens).
2. C 230 - Standard Specification for Flow Table for Use In Tests of Hydraulic
Cement.
3. C 531 - Standard Test Method for Liner Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal
Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and
Polymer Concretes.
4. C 579 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Chemical-
Resistant Mortars, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concretes.
5. C 939 - Standard Test Method for Flow of Grout for Preplaced-Aggregate
Concrete (Flow Cone Method).
6. C 1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout
' (Non-shrink).
7. C 1181 - Standard Test Methods for Compressive Creep of Chemical-
Resistant Polymer Machinery Grouts.
i1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Non-Shrink Grout: Submit manufacturer's literature and certified test data prior to
installation.
B. Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout: Submit manufacturer's literature and certified test data
prior to installation.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03600-1 82351310
pw:HCarollo/Documents/ClienttWA/Renton1 8235Bl0/Spec cations/10.03600.doc
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. All materials shall be delivered to the jobsite in their original, unopened packages or
containers, clearly labeled with the manufacturer's product identification and printed
instructions.
B. All materials shall be stored in a cool dry place and in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
C. All materials shall be handled in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
1.05 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Refer to manufacturer's literature or contact the manufacturer for any special
physical or environmental limitations that may be required for use of products.
1.06 WARRANTIES
A. Non-Shrink Grout: The manufacturer shall warranty hat the non-shrink rout will a
tY 9
never go below its initial placement volume when tested in accordance with
ASTM C 1107.
B. Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout: The manufacturer shall warranty that non-shrink epoxy
grout will show negligible shrinkage or expansion when tested in accordance with
ASTM C 531.
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Concrete Mortar:
1. General: Consist of concrete mixture with coarse aggregate removed and
water quantity adjusted as required.
2. At Exposed Concrete Surfaces Not to Be Painted or Submerged in Water:
White cement.
B. Dry-Pack Mortar:
1. Consist of mixture of portland cement and sand.
C. Epoxy Grout:
1. Consist of mixture of epoxy and sand.
2. Sand: Clean, bagged, graded, and kiln dried silica sand.
D. Grout:
1. Consist of mixture of portland cement and sand.
E. Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout: ,
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Five Star Products, Inc., Fairfield, CT, Five Star Epoxy Grout. '
b. BASF Construction Chemicals, Shakopee, MN, Masterflow 648 CP Plus.
c. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc., EPOGROUT.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03600-2 8235610
pw:HCarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/i 0.03600.doc
' 2. Non-shrink epoxy grout shall be a 100 percent solid, premeasured,
prepackaged system containing a 2-component thermosetting epoxy resin and
inert aggregate.
3. Consistency: Non-shrink epoxy grout shall maintain a flowable consistency for
at least 45 minutes at 70 degrees Fahrenheit.
4. Dimensional Stability (height change):
a. Non-shrink epoxy grout shall have negligible shrinkage or expansion (less
than 0.0006 inches/inch) when tested in accordance with ASTM C 531.
5. Compressive Strength: Non-shrink epoxy grout shall show a minimum
compressive strength of 10,000 pounds per square inch at 24 hours and
14,000 pounds per square inch at 7 days when tested in accordance with
ASTM C 579, Method B.
6. Compressive Creep: The compressive creep for non-shrink epoxy grout shall
not exceed 0.0027 inches/inch when tested under a 400 pounds per square
inch constant load at 140 degrees Fahrenheit in accordance with
ASTM C 1181.
' 7. Thermal Capability: The coefficient of thermal expansion for non-shrink epoxy
grout shall not exceed 0.000018 inches per inch per degree Fahrenheit when
tested under ASTM C 531, Method B.
fF. Non-Shrink Grout:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Five Star Products, Inc., Fairfield, CT, Five Star Grout.
' b. BASF Construction Chemicals, Shakopee, MN, Masterflow 928.
c. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc., Omaha, NE, CRYSTEX.
2. Preportioned and prepackaged cement-based mixture. It shall contain no
' metallic particles such as aluminum powder and no metallic aggregate such as
iron filings. It shall require only the addition of potable water.
3. Potable Water for Pre-Soaking, Mixing, and Curing: Clean and free of oils,
acids, alkalies, organics, and any other deleterious matter.
4. Bleeding: Free from the emergence of mixing water from within or the
presence of water on its surface.
5. In accordance with ASTM C 1107.
6. Consistency: Remain at a minimum flowable consistency for at least
45-minutes after mixing at 45 degrees Fahrenheit to 90 degrees Fahrenheit
when tested in accordance with ASTM C 230. If at a fluid consistency, it shall
be verified in accordance with ASTM C 939.
7. Dimensional Stability (height change): In accordance with ASTM C 1107,
volume-adjusting Grade B or C at 45 degrees to 90 degrees. It shall show
90 percent or greater bearing area under bases or baseplates.
8. Compressive Strength: Non-shrink grout shall show minimum compressive
strengths at 45 degrees Fahrenheit to 90 degrees Fahrenheit in accordance
with ASTM C 1107 for various periods from the time of placement, including
5,000 pounds per square inch at 28 days when tested in accordance with
ASTM C 109 as modified by ASTM C 1107.
I2.02 MIXES
A. Concrete Mortar Mix:
1. Use water-to-cementitious materials ratio that is no more than that specified
for concrete being repaired.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03600-3 82351310
pw:HCarollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235BI0/Specifications/I0.03600.doc
2. At Exposed Concrete Surfaces Not to Be Painted or Submerged in Water: Use
sufficient white cement to make color of finished patch match that of
surrounding concrete.
B. Dry-Pack Mortar Mix: Use only enough water so that resulting mortar will crumble to O
touch after being formed into ball by hand.
C. Epoxy Grout: e
1.. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
2. Proportioning:
a. For Horizontal Work: Consist of mixture of 1 part epoxy as specified in
Sub-Section 10.03071 with not more than 2 parts sand.
b. For Vertical or Overhead Work: Consist of 1 part epoxy gel as specified in
Sub-Section 10.03071 with not more than 2 parts sand.
D. Grout Mix:
1. For Concrete Repair: Mix in same proportions used for concrete being
repaired,with only sufficient water to give required consistency for spreading.
2. For Spreading over the Surfaces of Construction or Cold Joints: Mix with no
more water used than allowed by water-to-Cementitious materials ratio ,
specified for concrete.
3. For Other Applications: Mix in proportions by weight of 1 part cement to 4 parts
of concrete sand.
E. Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout: Mix in accordance with manufacturer's installation
instructions.
F. Non-Shrink Grout: Mix in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions Ii
such that resulting.mix has flowable consistency and is suitable for placing by
pouring.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect concrete surfaces to receive grout or mortar and verify that they are free of
ice, frost, dirt, grease, oil, curing compounds, paints, impregnations, and all loose
material or foreign matter likely to affect the bond or performance of grout or mortar.
B. Inspect baseplate and anchor systems for rust, oil, and other deleterious t
substances that may affect the bond or performance of grout.
C. Confirm that newly placed concrete has been cured sufficiently to attain its design
strength and limit further shrinkage.
D. Verify that temperature of cementitious or epoxy grout does not exceed
manufacturer's recommendations.
I
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03600-4 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/Cl ienYWA/Renton/8235 B l0/Specifications/10.03600.d oc
l
1. Roughen all concrete surfaces by heavy sandblasting, chipping, or other
mechanical means to assure bond. Loose or broken concrete shall be
removed.
2. All grease, oil, dirt, curing compounds, laitance, and other deleterious
materials that may affect bond that were identified in the inspection process
shall be completely removed from concrete and bottoms of baseplates. All
metal surfaces should have a 2 to 3 mil peak-to-valley profile for epoxy grouts.
3. For cementitious mortars and grouts, concrete shall be saturated surface
damp. Any standing water shall be removed prior to placing grouts.
4. For epoxy grouts, do not wet concrete surfaces with water. Instead, where
required, wet surfaces with epoxy for horizontal work or epoxy gel for vertical
or overhead work prior to placing epoxy grouts.
1 B. Forms and Headboxes for Cementitious or Epoxy Grouts:
1. Forms for grouts shall be built of material with adequate strength to withstand
the placement of grouts.
2. Forms must be rigid and liquid tight. All cracks and joints shall be caulked with
an elastomeric sealant. All forms shall be lined with polyethylene for easy
grout release. Forms carefully waxed with two coats of heavy-duty paste wax
shall also be acceptable.
3. Forms shall be 4 to 6 inches higher than the baseplate on one side of the
baseplate configuration when using head pressure for placement.
4. A sufficient number of headboxes shall be built to facilitate placement of
grouts.
5. Air relief holes a minimum 1/8 inch in diameter shall be provided when
required by a baseplate configuration to avoid entrapping air underneath.
i3.03 APPLICATION
A. Cement Mortar and Grout:
1. For Defective Concrete Repair:
a. Filling: Filling of voids around items through the concrete.
b. Grout Spreading: Spread over construction joints, cold joints, and similar
type items.
2. Concrete Surfaces:
a. Apply epoxy-bonding agent to clean, roughened, and dry surfaces before
1 placing mortar or grout.
3. Placing:
a. Exercise particular care in placing Portland cement mortar or grout since
they are required to furnish structural strength, or impermeable water seal,
or both.
b. Do not use cement mortar or grout that has not been placed within
1 30 minutes after mixing.
B. Epoxy Grout:
1. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
2. Use where specified herein or where indicated on the Drawings.
3.04 PLACEMENT
A. Grout shall only be installed after the final equipment alignment is correct and
accepted by the ENGINEER:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03600-5 82351310
pw:llcarollolDocumenL lc,ientNIA/Renton1 8235B10 6,ecfications/10.03800.doc
i
1. Grouts shall be mixed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
2. Use mortar mixer with moving paddles for mixing grouts. For cementitious
grouts, pre-wet the mixer and empty out excess water before beginning
mixing.
3. Cementitious Grouts:
a. Add non-shrink cementitious grout to a premeasured amount of water that
does not exceed the manufacturer's maximum recommended water Q
content.
b. Mix cementitious grouts per manufacturer's instructions for uniform
consistency.
c. Grouts may be drypacked, flowed, or pumped into place. All baseplate
grouting shall take place from one side of a baseplate to the other to avoid
trapping air. Do not overwork grouts.
d. Do not retemper grout by adding more water after stiffening.
e. Hydrostatic head pressure shall be maintained by keeping the level of the
grout in the headbox above the bottom of the baseplate. The headbox
should be filled to the maximum level and the grout worked down to top of
baseplate.
4. Epoxy Grouts:
a. Epoxy grouts shall be mixed in complete units. Do not vary the ratio of
components or add solvent to change the consistency of the mix.
b. Pour the hardener into the resin and mix for at least 1 minute and until
each mixture is uniform in color. Pour the chemical components into the
mortar mixer.wheelbarrow and add the aggregate. Mix until aggregate is
uniformly wetted. Over mixing will cause air entrapment in the mix.
c. All epoxy grout shall be flowed into place using a headbox. All grouting
shall take place from one side of a baseplate to the other in a continuous
flow to avoid trapping air.
d. Hydrostatic head pressure shall be maintained by keeping the level of
grout in headboxes above the bottom of baseplates. Headboxes shall be
filled to the maximum level and grout worked down to the bottom of
baseplates.
e. Epoxy grouts shall not be cut back after setting. The final level of grout will
be as installed with all chamfer edges built into the formwork.
3.05 CURING
A. Cementitious Grouts:
1. Grouts must be cut back to the lower edge of baseplates after reaching initial
set. Provide a 45 degree angle cut back.
2. Clean equipment and tools as recommended by the grout manufacturer.
3. Cure grouts in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and
recommendations. Keep grout moist for a minimum of 3 days. The method
needed to protect grouts will depend on temperature, humidity, and wind. Wet
burlap, a soaker hose, sun shading, ponding, and, in extreme conditions, a
combination of methods shall be employed.
4. Grouts shall be maintained above 40 degrees Fahrenheit until they have
attained a compressive strength of 3,000 pounds per square inch, or above '
70 degrees Fahrenheit for a minimum of 24 hours to avoid damage from
subsequent freezing.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03600-6 82351310
pw:HCarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/9235B10/Specifications/10.03600.doc
B. Epoxy Grouts:
1. Cure grouts in accordance with manufacturers' specifications and
recommendations. Do not wet cure epoxy grouts.
2. Consult the manufacturer for appropriate cure schedule. In no case should any
surface in contact with epoxy grout be allowed to fall below 50 degrees
Fahrenheit for a minimum of 48 hours after placement.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Non-shrink cementitious grouts shall be tested for 24 hour compressive strength in
accordance with ASTM C 109.
B. Non-shrink grouts shall be tested for 24 hour compressive strength in accordance
with ASTM C 579, Method B.
END OF SUB-SECTION
I
i
i
t
1
1
t
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03600-7 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/ciientAVA/Renton/8235B101Specificatlons/10.03600.doc
1
!
t
t
t
t
t
Q
t
i
Q
i �
!
i
t
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.03600-8 82351310
pw:lCarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Rentonl8235Bl OlSpecificatons/I0.03600.doc
' SUB-SECTION 10.05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub.-Section includes:
1. Structural steel shapes and plate.
2. Fasteners:
1 a. All thread rods.
b. Anchor bolts.
c. Assembly bolts.
d. Concrete anchors.
e. Deformed bar anchors.
f. Eyebolts.
g. High strength bolts.
h. Powder actuated fasteners.
i. Sleeve anchors.
j. Welded studs.
3. Isolation sleeves and washers.
4. Thread coating.
5. Welding.
tB. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
a. Sub-Section 10.03055 - Epoxy Bonding Reinforcing Bars and All Thread
Rods In Concrete.
b. Sub-Section 10.09960A- Coatings.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):
1. Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. B212-15 - Cutting Tools - Carbide-tipped Masonry Drills and Blanks for
Carbide-tipped Masonry Drills.
C. American Welding Society (AWS):
'
September 10 2010 - FINAL 10.051 =9 82351310
pw:llcarollolDocuments/ClientWNRent on18235B10 1specificationsll0.05120.1oc
1. A5.1 - Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc m
Welding.
2. A5.17 - Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged
Arc Welding.
3. A5.20 - Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Flux Cored Arc Welding.
4. D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
5. D10.4 - Recommended Practices for Welding Austenitic Chromium-Nickel
Stainless Steel Piping and Tubing.
D. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A 29 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Hot-Wrought,
General Requirements for.
2. A 36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
3. A 53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,
Zinc-Coated, Welded, and Seamless.
4. A 108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Cold
Finished.
5. A 123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products.
6. A 153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
7. A 240 - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General
Applications.
8. A 276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
9. A 307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI
Tensile Strength.
10. A 325 -Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated,
120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.
11. A 489 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Lifting Eyes.
12. A 490 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated,
150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.
13. A 496 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete
Reinforcement.
14. A 500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed-
Formed Welded and Seamless
Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
15. A 501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing.
1 6 A 992 -
n
Sta dard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes.
17. F 593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Ca Screws and
d
Cap ,
Studs.
18. F 959 - Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension
Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners.
E. International Code Council Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES):
1 AC01 -Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements.
2. AC58 -Acceptance Criteria for Adhesive Anchors in Masonry Elements.
3. AC193 -Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements.
4. •AC308 -Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete
Elements.
.September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.05120-2 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235610/Specifications/10.05120.doc
i
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Quality control submittals:
1. Submit shop drawings of members to be fabricated before starting their
i fabrication.
2. Welder's certificates.
B. Test reports:
1. Certified copies of mill tests and analyses made in accordance with applicable
ASTM standards, or reports from a recognized commercial laboratory,
including chemical and tensile properties of each shipment of structural steel
or part thereof having common properties.
1.04 QUALITI(ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Perform welding of structural metals with welders who have current AWS
certificate for the type of welding to be performed.
2. Steel fabricators shall be certified by the AISC or other certification as
recognized and accepted by the local building official having iurisdiction.
3. Notify ENGINEER 24 hours minimum before starting shop or field welding.
4. ENGINEER may check materials, equipment, and qualifications of welders.
5. Remove welders performing unsatisfactory Work, or require to requalify.
6. ENGINEER may use gamma ray, magnetic particle, dye penetrant,
trepanning, or other aids to visual inspection to examine any part of welds or
all welds.
7. CONTRACTOR shall bear costs of.retests on defective welds.
8. CONTRACTOR shall also bear costs in connection with qualifying welders.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packing and shipping: Deliver structural steel free from mill scale, rust, and pitting.
B. Storage and protection: Until erection and painting, protect from weather items not
galvanized or protected by a shop coat of paint.
tPART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. UnlsSs otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, materials shall conform to
the following:
t
1
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.05120-3 8235B10
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClientAVA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.05120.doc
i
i
Class, Grade, Type, or
Item ASTM Standard Alloy Number
Stainless steel
Plate, sheet, and strip A 240 Type 304* or 316"*
Bars and shapes A 276 Type 304* or 316**
* Use Type 304L if material will be welded.
** Use Type 316L if material will be welded.
B. Where stainless steel is welded, use low-carbon stainless steel.
2.02 FASTENERS
A. General: Furnish threaded fasteners, except high strength bolts, with flat washers,
and self-locking nuts, or lock washers and nuts.
1. Bolt heads and nuts: Hex-type.
2. Bolts, nuts, and washers: Of domestic manufacture.
B. All thread rods:
1. Type 316 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM F 593 for use in wet and
moist locations, including:
a. Water-containing structures:
1) Below and at water level.
2) Above water level:
a) Below top of walls of water-containing structures.
b) Under the roof, slab, be or walkway of enclosed water-
containing structures.
3) Dry side of walls of water-containing structures.
b. Pump bases.
2. Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel in.accordance with ASTM F 593 for
aluminum assemblies.
C. All thread rods bonded in holes drilled in concrete with epoxy: As specified in Sub-
Section 10.03055 and as indicated on the Drawings.
D. Anchor bolts:
1. Anchor bolts, nuts, and washers: Type 316 stainless steel in accordance with
ASTM F 593 for use in wet and moist locations, including:
a. Water-containing structures:
1) Below and at water level.
2) Above water level:
a) Below top of walls of water-containing structures.
b) Under the roof, slab, beam, or walkway of enclosed water-
containing structures.
3) Dry side of walls of water-containing structures.
b. Pump bases.
2. Anchor bolts, nuts, and washers: Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel for
fastening aluminum to concrete or steel.
E. Assembly bolts:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.05120-4 8235610
pw:l/Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B101Specifiications/10.05120.doc
t
1. Bolts, nuts, and washers for wood baffles, collectors, and other field-
assembled construction: Type 316 stainless steel in accordance with
ASTM F 593 for use in wet and moist locations, including:
a. Water-containing structures:
1) Below and at water level.
2) Above water level:
a) Below top of walls of water-containing structures.
b) Under the roof, slab, beam, or walkway of enclosed water-
containing structures.
c) Dry side of walls of water-containing structures.
b. Pump bases.
2. Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM F 593 for
aluminum assemblies.
F. Concrete anchors:
1. Concrete anchors for anchorage to concrete:
a. Concrete anchors shall have current ICC-ES Report that demonstrates
compliance with ICC-ES AC 193 for cracked concrete.
b. Manufacturers: One of the following or approved equal:
1) Hilti Incorporated, Kwik Bolt TZ Expansion Anchor.
2) Simpson Strong Tie, Strong Bolt Wedge Anchor.
2. Concrete anchor's integral threaded stud, wedge, washer, and nut: Type 304
or Type 316 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM F 593. For use in wet
and moist locations, including:
a. Water-containing structures:
1) Below and at water level.
2) Above water level:
a) Below top of walls of water-containing structures.
b) Under the roof, slab, beam, or walkway of enclosed water-
containing structures.
3) Dry side of walls of water-containing structures.
b. Pump bases.
3. Concrete anchor's integral threaded stud, wedge, washer, and nut: Type 304
or 316 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM F 593 for fastening aluminum
to concrete or steel.
4. Do not use slug-in, lead cinch, and similar systems relying on deformation of
lead alloy or similar materials in order to develop holding power.
G. Deformed bar anchors: In accordance with ASTM A 496:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or approved equal:
a. Nelson Stud Welding Company, D2L Deformed Bar Anchors.
b. Stud Welding Products, DBA (Deformed Bar)Anchors.
H. Eyebolts:
1. Welded or forged, when manufactured of materials other than carbon steel.
2. Having geometric and strength characteristics of eyebolts in accordance with
ASTM A 489, Type 1. The strength characteristics include proof load
requirements, breaking strength requirements, tensile strength requirements,
bend test, and impact strength.
I. High strength all thread rods: In Hot-
dip
9 accordance with ASTM A 193, Grade B7. Hot dip
galvanize.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.05120-5 8235810
pw:llCarollolDocumennslClienUWA/Renton/82356101Specilc,3 ions110.05120.tloc
i
J. High strength bolts: High strength bolts, nuts, and hardened flat washers shall be in
accordance with ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490, as indicated on the Drawings.
K. Powder actuated fasteners:
1 For installation in concrete or steel: Zinc coated, heat-treated, alloy steel.
2. Fasteners not sufficiently protected against corrosion from exposure to
corrosive conditions: Coat as necessary to make suitable for such conditions.
3. Pins: Furnish with head or threaded stud capable of transmitting loads to
shank.
4. Pins connected to steel: Furnish with longitudinal serrations around
circumference of shank.
L. Sleeve anchors:
1. Sleeve anchors for anchorage to concrete:
a. Sleeve anchors shall have current ICC-ES Report that demonstrates
compliance with ICC-ES AC193 for cracked concrete.
b. Manufacturers: One of the following or approved equal:
1) Hilti Incorporated, HSL-3 Heavy Duty Sleeve Anchor.
2. Use stainless material for aluminum and stainless attachments.
n wet and m—I locations, Including locations below. Use
or use i, -; , i io y ,
Type 304 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM F 593 for sleeve anchor's
internal bolt, expansion sleeve, extension sleeve, and washer. Use Type 303
stainless steel in accordance with ASTM F 593 for sleeve anchors expansion
cone.
a. Water-containing structures:
1) Below and at water level.
2) Above water level:
a) Below top of walls of water-containing structures. jay
b) Under the roof, slab, beam, or walkway of enclosed water-
containing structures.
3) Dry side of walls of water-containing structures.
b. Pump bases.
4. For fastening aluminum to concrete or steel, use Type 304 stainless steel in
accordance with ASTM F 593 for sleeve anchor's internal bolt, expansion
sleeve, extension sleeve. Use Type 303 stainless steel in accordance with
ASTM F 593 for sleeve anchor's expansion cone.
5. The sleeve anchor shall have a nylon compression ring which compresses to
ensure that the material being fastened is tightly secured against the concrete.
6. . Do not use slug-in, lead cinch, and similar systems relying on deformation of
lead alloy or similar materials in order to develop holding power.
M. Welded studs:
1. ASTM A 108 with 50,000-pounds per square inch minimum yield strength, and
60,000-pounds per square inch minimum tensile strength.
2. Headed studs: Manufacturers: One of the following or approved equal:
a. Nelson Stud Welding Company, SK Shear Connectors or H4L Concrete
Anchors.
b. Stud Welding Products, Headed Concrete Anchors or Shear Connectors.
2.03 ISOLATING SLEEVES AND WASHERS
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or approved equal:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.05120-6 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/lb.05120.doc
1. Central Plastics Company, Shawnee, Oklahoma.
2. Corrosion Control Products, PSI Inc., Gardena, CA.
B. Sleeves: Mylar, 1/32 inch thick, 4,000 volts per mil dielectric strength, of proper size
to fit bolts and extending half way into both steel washers.
1. 1 sleeve required for each bolt.
C. Washers: The inside diameter of all washer shall fit over the isolating sleeve and
both the steel and isolating washers shall have the same inside diameter and
outside diameter.
1. Proper size to fit bolts. Two insulating washers are required for each bolt.
2. Two 1/8-inch thick steel washers for each bolt.
3. G3 Phenolic:
a. Thickness: 1/8 inch.
b. Base material: Glass.
c. Resin: Phenolic.
d. Water absorption: 2 percent.
e. Hardness (Rockwell): 100.
f. Dielectric strength: 450 volts per mil.
g. Compression strength: 50,000 pounds per square inch.
h. Tensile strength: 20,000 pounds per square inch.
i. Maximum operating temperature: 350 degrees Fahrenheit.
2.04 THREAD COATING
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or approved equal:
1. Never Seez Compound Corporation, Never-Seez.
2. Oil Research, Inc., WLR No. 111.
2.05 SUPPLEMENTARY PARTS
A. Furnish as required for complete structural steel erection, whether or not such parts
and Work are specified or indicated on the Drawings.
2.06 FABRICATION
A. Shop assembly:
1. Fabricate structural steel in accordance with AISC "Specification for the
Structural Steel Buildings -Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design,"
unless otherwise specified or modified by applicable regulatory requirements.
2. Where anchors, connections, or other details of structural steel are not
specifically indicated on the Drawings or specified, their material, size and
form shall be equivalent in quality and workmanship to items specified.
3. For Structural members such as W shapes, S shapes, channels, angles, and
similar members not available in quantity, size, and type of stainless steel
specified or indicated on the Drawings:
a. Fabricate by welding together pieces of low carbon stainless steel plate,
such as Type 316L.
b. Make full penetration welds between pieces of plate to attain same or
higher section modulus and moment of inertia as members indicated on
the Drawings.
4. Round off sharp and hazardous projections and grind smooth.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.05120-7 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.05120.doc
I
5. Take measurements necessary to properly fit work in the field. Take
responsibility for and be governed by the measurements and proper working
out of all the details.
6. Take responsibility for correct fitting of all metal work.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of conditions: Examine Work in place to verify that it is satisfactory to
receive the Work of this Sub-Section. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not begin
this Work until such conditions have been corrected.
3.02 ERECTION
A. General:
1. Fabricate structural and foundry items to true dimensions without warp or twist.
2. Form welded closures neatly, and grind off smooth where weld material
interferes with fit or is unsightly.
3. Install structural items accurately and securely, true to level, plumb, in correct
alignment and grade, with all parts bearing or fitting structure or equipment for
which intended.
4. Do not cock out of alignment, redrill, reshape, or force fit fabricated items.
5. Place anchor bolts or other anchoring devices accurately and make surfaceslli
that bear against structural items smooth and level.
6. Rigidly support and brace structural items needing special alignment to
preserve straight, level, even, and smooth lines. Keep structural items braced
until concrete, grout, or dry pack mortar has hardened for 48 hours minimum.
7. Erect structural steel in accordance with AISC "Specification for Structural
Steel Buildings -Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design," unless
otherwise specified or modified by applicable regulatory requirements.
8. Where anchors, connections, and other details of structural steel erection are
not specifically indicated on the Drawings or specified, form, locate, and attach
with equivalent in quality and workmanship to items specified.
9. Round off sharp or hazardous projections and grind smooth.
B. Welding - General:
1. Make welds full penetration type, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
2. Remove backing bars and weld tabs after completion of weld. Repair defective
welds observed after removal of backin g and weld
d tabs.
C. Welding stainless steel:
1. General: Comply in accordance with AWS D1.1.
a. Perform with electrodes and techniques in accordance with AWS D10.4.
D. Interface with other products:
1. Where steel fasteners come in contact with aluminum or other dissimilar
metals, bolt with stainless steel bolts and separate or isolate from dissimilar
metals with isolating sleeves and washers.
a. Prior to installing nuts, coat threads of stainless steel fasteners with thread
coating to prevent galling of threads.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.05120-8 82351310
pw:HCarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.05120.doc
E. Fasteners:
1. General:
a. Install bolts,.including anchor bolts and concrete anchors, to project
2 threads minimum, but 1/2 inch maximum beyond nut.
b. Unless otherwise specified, tighten bolts, including anchor bolts and
concrete anchors, to the "snug-tight" condition, defined as tightness
attained by a few impacts of an impact wrench or the full effort of a man
using an ordinary spud wrench.
2. All thread rods bonded in drilled holes in concrete with epoxy: As specified in
Sub-Section 10.03055 and as indicated on the Drawings.
3. Anchor bolts:
a. Cast-in-place when concrete is placed.
b. Accurately locate anchor bolts embedded in concrete with bolts
perpendicular to surface from which they project.
c. Do not allow anchor bolts to touch reinforcing steel.
d. Where anchor bolts are within 1/4 inch of reinforcing steel, isolate with a
minimum of 4 wraps of 10-mil polyvinyl chloride tape in area adjacent to
reinforcing steel.
e. In anchoring machinery bases subject to heavy vibration, use 2 nuts, with
1 serving as a locknut.
f. Where bolts are indicated on the Drawings for future use, first coat
thoroughly with non-oxidizing wax, then turn nuts down full depth of thread
and neatly wrap exposed thread with waterproof polyvinyl tape.
g. Furnish anchor bolts with standard hex bolt head or an equivalent head
acceptable to ENGINEER unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. "L"
or"J" anchor bolts are not equivalent to an anchor bolt with a hex bolt
head.
h. Minimum anchor bolt embedment: 10-bolt diameters, unless longer
embedment is indicated on the Drawings.
i. Anchor bolts may be cast in concrete in lieu of using concrete anchors.
4. Concrete anchors:
a. Do not use concrete anchors in lieu of anchor bolts.
b. Install anchors in accordance with approved ICC-ES Report. Where
conflict exists between the approved ICC-ES Report and the requirements
in this Sub-Section, the requirements of the Evaluation Service Report
shall control.
c. Accurately locate concrete anchors and set perpendicular to surfaces
from which they project.
d. Minimum embedment lengths:
Diameter Embedment Length
Inches Inches
1/4 2
3/8 2-1/2
1/2 4-1/8
5/8 4-1/2
3/4 6-1/2
e. Drilling holes:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.05120-9 8235610
pw:lCarollo/Document s/ClientMA/Renton/6235B10/Specifications/10.05120.doc
i
I!
1) Do not damage or cut existing reinforcing bars, electrical conduits, or
other items embedded in the existing concrete without acceptance by
ENGINEER.
2) Determine location of reinforcing bars, or other obstructions with a
non-destructive indicator device.
3) Remove dust and debris from hole using compressed air.
f. Hole drilling equipment:
1) Electric or pneumatic rotary type with light or medium impact.
2) Drill bits: Carbide-tipped in accordance with ANSI B212-15.
3) Hollow drills with flushing air systems are preferred.
4) Where edge distances are less than 2 inches, use lighter impact
equipment to prevent microcracking and concrete spalling during
drilling process.
5. Deformed bar anchors:
a. Butt weld with automatic stud welding gun as recommended by
manufacturer.
b. Ensure butt weld develops full strength of the anchor.
6. High strength bolts: 0
a. Consider connections with high strength bolts to be slip critical structural
connections, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
b. Connections with high strength bolts shall conform in accordance with s
AISC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts.
c. Furnish hardened flat washer: M
1) Under element, nut, or bolt head, turned in tightening. '
2) On outer plies for short slotted holes.
d. Verify adequate tightening of bolts by means of tension indicator washers
placed as indicated in ASTM F 959, Figure 1.
7. Powder actuated fasteners: Use powder actuated fasteners only for g
applications indicated on the Drawings or specified.
8. Sleeve anchors:
a. Do not use sleeve anchors in lieu of anchor bolts.
b. Install anchors in accordance with approved ICC-ES Report. Where
conflict exists between the approved ICC-ES Report and the requirements
in this Sub-Section, the requirements of the Evaluation Service Report
shall control.
c. The sleeve anchor bolt shall be removable and the expansion sleeve shall
be flush with the concrete surface when installed. .
d. Accurately locate sleeve anchors and set perpendicular to surfaces from
which they project.
e. Minimum embedment lengths: !s'
Diameter Embedment Length
Inches Inches
1/4 1-3/4
3/8 2-1/2
1/2 3-1/2
5/8 4
3/4 4-1/2
f. Drilling holes:
j.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.05120-10 82351310
pw:/lCarollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235610!Specifications/10.05120.doc
1) Do not damage or cut existing reinforcing bars, electrical conduits, or
other items embedded in the existing concrete without acceptance by
ENGINEER.
2) Determine location of reinforcing bars, or other obstructions with a
non-destructive indicator device.
3) Remove dust and debris from hole using compressed air.
g. Hole drilling equipment:
1) Electric or pneumatic rotary type with light or medium impact.
2) Drill bits: Carbide-tipped in accordance with ANSI B212-15.
3) Hollow drills with flushing air systems are preferred.
4) Where edge distances are less than 2 inches, use lighter impact
equipment to prevent microcracking and concrete spalling during
drilling process.
9. Welded studs:
a. Butt weld with automatic stud welding gun as recommended by the
manufacturer.
b. Ensure butt weld develops full strength of the stud.
END OF SUB-SECTION
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.05120-11 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.05120,doc
r
a
r
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.05120-12 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienVWA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.05120.doc
SUB-SECTION 10.08320
ACCESS HATCHES
PART GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section Includes: Access Hatches.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data.
B. Shop Drawings: Show the following:
1. Access hatch installation recommendations.
2. Locations of access hatches.
3. Hatch size and configuration.
4. Liveload capacity.
5. Materials of construction and finishes provided.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Identify type and size of each floor hatch in way not to damage finish prior to
delivery.
B. Deliver products only after proper facilities are available.
C. Deliver and store packaged products in original containers with seals unbroken and
labels intact until time of use.
D. Handle carefully to prevent damage and store on clean concrete surface or raised
platform in safe, dry area. Do not dump onto ground.
E. Protect floor access hatches during shipment and storage to prevent warping,
bending, and corrosion.
1.04 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer's warranty against defects in material and workmanship for a
period of 5 years.
1.05 MAINTENANCE
B. Deliver 2 keys for each cylinder lock to OWNER.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.08320-1 82351310
pw://Carol to/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235 B10/Specifications/10.08320.doc
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 HEAVY DUTY FLOOR ACCESS HATCHES
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. LW Products Co., Inc., Model HD-SBS (double-leaf).
B. Style: Side by side, double leaf, rolled aluminum, capable of withstanding minimum
AASHTO H-20 wheel load with a maximum deflection of 1/150 of the span, live load
channel frame, with drainage couplings.
C. Size: A
e s indicated on the Drawings.
D. Door Swing Direction: As indicated on the Drawings.
E. Hatch Leaf: Minimum 1/4 inch, diamond pattern plate reinforced with stiffeners as
required to meet specified live load.
F. Frame: 1/4-inch channel with anchor flange around perimeter.
G. Gasket: 3/8-inch neoprene gasket for weather tight seal.
H. Hardware:
1. Hinges: Each leaf equipped with a minimum of two heavy forged brass or
stainless steel hinges with stainless steel pins.
2. Lock: Snap lock with removable handle mounted on hatch leaf.
3. Grip Handle: Provide vinyl grip handle designed to release cover for closing.
4. Operating Mechanism: Spring operators designed for ease of operation and
automatic hold open arm with release handle.
5. Drainage Assembly: Provide 1-1/2 inch aluminum drainage coupling in location
indicated on the Drawings.
I. Accessories:
1. Roll-out safety net: Match hatch sizing.
a. Manufacturer: Safe Approach Model 121.
2.02 FINISHES
A. Floor Access Hatch Finishes:
1. Aluminum: Manufacturer's standard mill finish.
2. Aluminum In Contact With Dissimilar Metals and Concrete: Manufacturer's
standard bituminous coating.
3. Steel: Manufacturer's standard red oxide primer.
B. Hardware Finishes:
1. Provide optional Type 316 stainless steel hardware throughout, including parts
of the latch and lifting mechanism assemblies, hold open arms and all
brackets, hinges, pins, and fasteners.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.08320-2 82351310
pw:gCarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.08320.doc
I
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine construction to receive floor access hatch and verify correctness of
dimensions and other supporting or adjoining conditions.
i, 3.02 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate details with other work supporting, adjoining, or requiring access
hatches.
B. Verify dimensions and profiles for each opening.
C. Verify that location will serve portion of work to which access is required. Where
proposed functional location conflicts with other work, notify the ENGINEER before
installation.
D. Apply coating to aluminum surfaces that will be in contact with dissimilar metals or
concrete when there is none.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install access hatches in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Ensure correct types and adequate sizes at proper locations.
C. Securely attach frames to supporting work and ensure hatches, frames, and
hardware operate smoothly and are free from warp, twist and distortion.
tD. Attach drain pipe to coupling provided. Drainage shall be routed as indicated on the
Drawings.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust hatches, frames and hardware to operate smoothly, freely, and properly,
without binding.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Thoroughly clean surfaces of grease, oil, or other impurities, touch up abraded
prime coat where applicable.
END OF SUB-SECTION
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.08320-3 82351310
pw 1 carom/oocumems/cilent[WA/Remon/B235B10 ispecilcations110.08320.doc
W
II
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.08320-4 8235B10
pw:HCarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specificabons/10.08320.doc
SUB-SECTION 10.09960A
COATINGS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Field applied coatings.
B. Related Sections/Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACT OR's Work.
3. The following Sections/Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this
Sub-Section. This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided for
convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty
of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 1-05 - Control of Work.
b. Sub-Section 10.01770 - Closeout Procedures.
c. Sub-Section 10.03925 - Concrete Repair and Coating.
d. Sub-Section 10.15075 - Mechanical Identification.
e. Sub-Section 10.16075 - Electrical Identification.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. D 16 - Standard.Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and
Applications.
2. D 4541 - Standard Test Method for Pull-off Strength of Coatings Using
Portable Adhesion Testers.
B. NACE International (NACE):
1. SP0178 - Design, Fabrication, and Surface Finish Practices for Tanks and
Vessels to Be Lined for Immersion Service.
2. SP0188-06 - Discontinuity(Holiday) Testing of Protective Coatings.
C. National Association of Pipe Fabricators (NAPF):
1. 500-03 - Surface Preparation Standard for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings
Receiving Special External Coatings and/or Special Internal Linings.
D. NSF International (NSF):
1. 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.09960A-1 8235610
pw:ll Carollo/Documents/CliemMA/Re nton/8235 B 10/Specifications/l0.09960A.doc
i
I
E. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):
1. SP COM - Surface Preparation Commentary for Steel and Concrete
Substrates.
2. SP-1 - Solvent Cleaning.
3. SP-2 - Hand Tool Cleaning.
4. SP-3 - Power Tool Cleaning.
5. SP-5 -White Metal Blast Cleaning.
6. SP-6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning.
7. SP-7 - Brush-Off Blast Cleaning. ; 1
8. SP-10 - Near-White Blast Cleaning.
F. U.S. Environment Protection Agency (EPA): ;
1. Method 24 = Surface Coatings.
1.03 DEFINITIONS j
A. Submerged metal: Steel or iron surfaces below tops of channel or structure walls
which will contain water even when above expected water level.
B. Submerged concrete and masonry surfaces: Surfaces which are or will be:
1. Underwater.
2. In structures which normally contain water.
3. Below tops of walls of water containing structures.
I
C. Exposed surface: Any metal or concrete surface, indoors or outdoors that is
exposed to view.
D. Dry film thickness (DFT): Thickness of fully cured coating, measured in mils.
. 0 1
E. Volatile organic compound (VOC): Content of air polluting hydrocarbons in uncured
coating product measured in units of grams per liter or pounds per gallon, as
determined by EPA Method 24.
F. Ferrous: Cast iron, ductile iron, wrought iron, and all steel alloys except stainless
steel.
G. Where SSPC surface preparation standards are specified or implied for ductile iron
pipe or fittings, the equivalent NAPF surface preparation standard shall be 1
substituted for the SSPC standard.
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS }
A. Coating materials shall be especially adapted for use in wastewater pump stations. W
B. Coating materials used in contact with potable water supply systems shall be
certified to NSF 61.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 1-05.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.09960A-2 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton1 8235B10/Specificadons/10.09960A.doc
B. Shop drawings:
1. Schedule of proposed coating materials.
2. Schedule of surfaces to be coated with each coating material.
C. Product Data: Include description of physical properties of coatings including solids
content and ingredient analysis, VOC content, temperature resistance, typical
exposures and limitations, and manufacturer's standard color chips:
1. Regulatory requirements: Submit data concerning the following:
a. Volatile organic compound limitations.
b. Coatings containing lead compounds and PCBs.
c. Abrasives and abrasive blast cleaning techniques, and disposal.
d. NSF certification of coatings for use in potable water supply systems.
D. Samples: Include 8-inch square drawdowns or brush-outs of topcoat finish when
requested. Identify each sample as to finish, formula, color name and number and
sheen name and gloss units.
F. Certificates: Submit in accordance with requirements for Product Data.
F. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include the following:
1. Special requirements for transportation and storage.
2. Mixing instructions.
3. Shelf life.
4. Pot life of material.
5. Precautions for applications free of defects.
6. Surface preparation.
7. Method of application.
8. Recommended number of coats.
9. Recommended dry film thickness (DFT) of each coat.
10. Recommended total dry film thickness (DFT).
11. Drying time of each coat, including prime coat.
12. Required prime coat.
13. Compatible and non-compatible prime coats.
14. Recommended thinners, when recommended.
15. Limits of ambient conditions during and after application.
16. Time allowed between coats (minimum and maximum).
17. Required protection from sun, wind, and other conditions.
18. Touch-up requirements and limitations.
19. Minimum adhesion of each system submitted in accordance with
ASTM D 4541.
G. Manufacturer's Representative's Field Reports.
H. Operations and Maintenance Data: Submit as specified in Sub-Section 10.01770.
�• 1. Reports on visits to project site to view and approve surface preparation of
structures to be coated.
2. Reports on visits to project site to observe and approve coating application
procedures.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.09960A-3 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.09960A.doc
3. Reports on visits to coating plants to observe and approve surface preparation
and coating application on items that are "shop coated."
I. Quality Assurance Submittals:
1. Quality Assurance plan.
2. Qualifications of coating applicator including List of Similar Projects.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator qualifications:
1. Minimum of 5 years experience applying specified type or types of coatings
under conditions similar to those of the Work:
a. Provide qualifications of applicator and references listing 5 similar projects
completed in the past 2 years.
2. Manufacturer approved applicator when manufacturer has approved applicator j
program. j
3. Approved and licensed by polymorphic polyester resin manufacturer to apply
polymorphic polyester resin coating system.
B. Regulatory requirements: Comply with governing agencies regulations by using
coatings that do not exceed permissible volatile organic compound limits and do not
contain lead.
C. Certification: Certify that applicable pigments are resistant to discoloration or
deterioration when exposed to hydrogen sulfide and other sewage gases and
product data fails to designate coating as "fume resistant."
D. Field samples: Prepare and coat a small area between corners or limits such as
control or construction joints of each system. Approved field sample may be part of
Work.
E. Compatibility of coatings: Use products by same manufacturer for prime coats,
intermediate coats, and finish coats on same surface, unless specified otherwise.
F. Services of coating manufacturers representative: Arrange for coating
9
manufacturers representative to attend pre-installation conferences. Make periodic
visits to the project site to provide consultation and inspection services during
surface preparation and application of coatings, and to make visits to coating plants
to observe and approve surface preparation procedures and coating a pp lication of
items to be "shop primed and coated".
1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Remove unspecified and unapproved paints from Project site immediately.
C. Deliver new unopened containers with labels identifying the manufacturer's name,
brand name, product type, batch number, date of manufacturer, expiration date or
shelf life, color, and mixing and reducing instructions.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.09960A-4 8235610
pw:l/Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton1 8235Bl0/Specifications/10.09960A.doc
i
1. Do not deliver materials aged more than 12 months from manufacturing date.
D. Store coatings in well-ventilated facility that provides protection form the sun
weather, and fire hazards. Maintain ambient storage temperature between 45 and
90 degrees Fahrenheit, unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer.
E. Take precautions to prevent fire and spontaneous combustion.
1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Surface moisture contents: Do not coat surfaces that exceed manufacturer specified
moisture contents, or when not specified by the manufacturer, the following
moisture contents:
1. Masonry, concrete, and concrete block: 12 percent.
2. Concrete floors: 7 percent.
B. Do not apply coatings:
i 1nd do �
1. vi wer dusty vviidi'uvnS or averse environmental conditions, unless renting,
covers, or other such protection is provided for structures to be coated.
2. When light on surfaces measures less than 15 foot-candles.
3. When ambient or surface temperature is less than 55 degrees Fahrenheit
unless manufacturer allows a lower temperature.
4. When relative humidity is higher than 85 percent.
5. When surface temperature is less than 5 degrees Fahrenheit above dew point.
6. When surface temperature exceeds the manufacturer's recommendation.
7. When ambient temperature exceeds 90 degrees Fahrenheit, unless
manufacturer allows a higher temperature.
8. Apply clear finishes at minimum 65 degrees Fahrenheit.
C. Provide fans, heating devices, dehumidifiers, or other means recommended by
coating manufacturer to prevent formation of condensate or dew on surface of
substrate, coating between coats and within curing time following application of last
coat.
D. Provide adequate continuous ventilation and sufficient heating facilities to maintain
minimum 55 degrees Fahrenheit for 24 hours before, during and 48 hours after
application of finishes.
E. Dehumidification and heating for coating of digester interiors, wet wells, and high-
humidity enclosed spaces:
1. Provide dehumidification and heating of digester interior spaces in which
surface preparation, coating application, or curing is in progress according to
the following schedule:
a. October 1 to April 30: Provide continuous dehumidification and heating as
required to maintain the tanks within environmental ranges as specified in
this Sub-Section and as recommended by the coating material
manufacturer. For the purposes of this Sub-Section, "continuous" is
defined as 24 hours per day and 7 days per week.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.09960A-5 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.09960A.doc
b. May 1 to September 30: Provide temporary dehumidification and heating
as may be required to maintain the tanks within the specified
environmental ranges in the event of adverse weather or other temporary
condition. At CONTRACTOR's option and at his sole expense,
CONTRACTOR may suspend work until such time as acceptable n!
environmental conditions are restored, in lieu of temporary
dehumidification and heating. Repair or replace any coating or surface
preparation damaged by suspension of work, at CONTRACTOR's sole
expense.
2. Equipment requirements:
a. Capacity: Provide dehumidification, heating, and air circulation equipment
with minimum capacity to perform the following:
1) Maintain the dew point of the air in the tanks at a temperature at least
5 degrees Fahrenheit less than the temperature of the coldest part of
the structure where work is underway.
2) Reduce dew point temperature of the air in the tanks by at least
10 degrees Fahrenheit in 20 minutes.
3) Maintain air temperature in the tanks at 60 degrees minimum.
b. Systems:
1) Site electrical power: Not available for CONTRACTOR's use.
2) Internal combustion engine generators: May be used;
CONTRACTOR shall obtain all required permits and provide air
pollution and noise control devices on equipment as required by
permitting agencies.
3) Dehumidification: Provide desiccant or refrigeration drying. Desiccant
types shall have a rotary desiccant wheel capable of continuous
operation. No Liquid, granular, or loose lithium chloride drying
systems will be allowed.
4) Heating: Electric, indirect combustion, or steam coil methods may be
used. Direct fired combustion heaters will not be allowed during
abrasive blasting, coating application, or coating cure time.
3. Design and submittals:
a. CONTRACTOR shall prepare dehumidification and heating plan for this
project, including all equipment and operating procedures.
b. Suppliers of services and equipment shall have not less than 3 years
experience in similar applications; Cargocaire Corporation (Munters) or
equal.
c. Submit dehumidification and heating plan for ENGINEER's review.
4. Monitoring and performance:
a. Measure and record relative humidity and temperature of air, and
structure temperature twice daily (beginning and end of work shifts) to
verify that proper humidity and temperature levels are achieved inside the
reservoir after the dehumidification equipment is installed and operational.
Test results shall be made available to the ENGINEER upon request.
b. Interior space of the tank(s) shall be sealed and a slight positive pressure
maintained as recommended by the supplier of the dehumidification
equipment.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.09960A-6 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B70/Specificadons/10.09960A.doc
c. The filtration system used to remove dust from the air shall be designed
so that it does not interfere with the dehumidification equipment's ability to
control the dew point and relative humidity inside the reservoir.
.1) The air from the tank or dust filtration equipment shall not be
recirculated through the dehumidifier during coating application or
when solvent vapors are present.
1.09 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra materials: Deliver asspecified in Sub-Section 10.01770. Include m m inimu
1 gallon of each type and color of coating applied:
1. When manufacturer packages material in gallon cans, deliver unopened
labeled cans as comes from factory.
2. When manufacturer does not package material in gallon cans, deliver material
in new gallon containers, properly sealed and identified with typed labels
indicating brand, type,and color.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Special coatings: One of the following or equal:
1. Carboline: Carboline, St. Louis, MO.
2. Ceilcote: Ceilcote Corrosion Control, Berea, OH.
3. Dampney: The Dampney Company, Everett, MA.
4. Devoe: ICI Devoe Coatings, Louisville, KY.
5. Dudick: Dudick, Inc., Streetsboro, OH.
6. GET: Global Eco Technologies, Pittsburg, CA.
7. Henkel: Henkel North America, Madison Heights MI.
8. IET: Integrated Environmental Technologies, Santa Barbara, CA.
9. PPC: Polymorphic Polymers Corp., N. Miami, FL.
10. PPG Amercoat: PPG Protective & Marine Coatings, Brea, CA.
11. Sanchem: Sanchem, Chicago, IL.
12. Superior: Superior Environmental Products, Inc., Addison, TX.
13. S-W: Sherwin-Williams Co., Cleveland, OH.
14. Tnemec: Tnemec Co., Kansas City, MO.
j15. Wasser: Wasser High Tech Coatings, Kent, WA.
2.02 PREPARATION AND PRETREATMENT MATERIALS
A. Metal pretreatment: As manufactured by one of the following or equal:
1. Henkel: Galvaprep 5.
2. International: AWLGrip Alumiprep 33.
3. S-W: Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure.
4. Tnemec: Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline.
B. Surface cleaner and degreaser: As manufactured by one of the following or equal:
1. Carboline Surface Cleaner No.3.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.09960A-7 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10 1Specifications/10.09960A.doc
I
2. Devoe: Devprep 88.
3. S-W: Clean and Etch.
2.03 COATING MATERIALS
A. High solids epoxy (self priming) not less than 72 percent solids by volume: As
manufactured by one of the following or equal:
1. Carboline: Carboguard 891. �.
2. Devoe: Bar Rust 233H.
3. PPG Amercoat: Amerlock 2.
4. S-W: Macropoxy 646.
5. Tnemec: HS Epoxy Series 104. .�
B. Aliphatic or aliphatic-acrylic polyurethane: As manufactured by one of the following
or equal:
1. Carboline: Carbothane 134 VOC.
2. Devoe: Devthane 379.
3. PPG Amercoat: Amershield VOC.
4. S-W: High Solids Polyurethane [CA].
5. Tnemec: Endura-Shield II Series 1075 (U).
C. Asphalt varnish: AWWA C 500.
D. Waterborne acrylic emulsion: As manufactured by one of the following or equal:
1. S-W: DTM Acrylic B66W1.
2. Tnemec: Tneme-Cryl Series 6.
2.04 MIXES
A. Mix epoxy parts in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from coatings and damage. Repair damage resulting from
inadequate or unsuitable protection:
B. Protect adjacent surfaces not to be coated from spatter and droppings with drop
cloths and other coverings:
1. Mask off surfaces of items not to be coated or remove items from area.
C. Furnish sufficient drop cloths, shields and protective equipment to prevent spray or
droppings from fouling surfaces not being coated and in particular, surfaces within
storage and preparation area.
D. Place cotton waste, cloths and material which may constitute fire hazard in closed
metal containers and remove daily from site.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.09960A-8 8235610
pw://Carollo/DocumentsiClient/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.09960A.doc
i
E. Remove electrical plates, surface hardware, fittings, and fastenings, prior to
application of coating.operations. Carefully store, clean, and replace on completion
of coating in each area. Do not use solvent or degreasers to clean hardware that
may remove permanent lacquer finish.
3.02 GENERAL PREPARATION
A. Prepare surfaces in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions, unless
more stringent requirements are specified in this Sub-Section.
B. Protect following surfaces from abrasive blasting by masking, or other means:
1. Threaded portions of valve and gate stems, grease fittings, and identification
plates.
2. Machined surfaces for sliding contact.
3. Surfaces to be assembled against gaskets.
4. Surfaces of shafting on which sprockets are to fit.
5. Surfaces of shafting on which bearings are to fit.
6. Machined surfaces of bronze trim, including those slide gates.
7. Cadmium-plated items except cadmium-plated, zinc-plated, or sherardized
fasteners used in assembly of equipment requiring abrasive blasting.
8. Galvanized items, unless scheduled to be coated.
C. Protect installed equipment, mechanical drives, and adjacent coated equipment
from abrasive blasting to prevent damage caused by entering sand or dust.
D. Concrete:
1. Allow new concrete to cure for minimum of 28 days before coating.
2. Clean concrete surfaces of dust, mortar, fins, loose concrete particles, form
release materials, oil, and grease. Fill voids so that surface is smooth. Etch or
brush off-blast clean in accordance with SSPC SP-7 to provide surface profile
equal to 40 to 60 grit sandpaper, or as recommended by coating manufacturer.
All concrete surfaces shall be vacuumed clean prior to coating application.
E. Ferrous metal surfaces:
1: Remove grease and oil in accordance with SSPC SP-1.
2. Remove rust, scale, and welding slag and spatter, and prepare surfaces in
accordance with appropriate SSPC standard as specified.
3. Abrasive blast surfaces prior to coating.
4. When abrasive blasted surfaces rust or discolor before coating, abrasive blast
surfaces again to remove rust and discoloration.
5. When metal surfaces are exposed because of coating damage, abrasive blast
surfaces and feather in to a smooth transition before touching-up-
6. All abrasive blast cleaned surfaces shall be blown down with clean dry air and
or vacuumed.
F. Ferrous metal surfaces not to be submerged: Abrasive blast in accordance with
SSPC SP-10, unless blasting may damage adjacent surfaces, prohibited or
specified otherwise. Where not possible to abrasive blast, power tool clean surfaces
in accordance with SSPC SP-3.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.09960A-9 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.09960A.doc
I
G. Ferrous metal surfaces to be submerged: Unless specified otherwise, abrasive blast
in accordance with SSPC SP-5 to clean and provide roughened surface profile of
not less than 2 mils and not more than 4 mils in depth when measured with
Elcometer 123, or as recommended by the coating manufacturer.
H. Ductile iron pipe and fittings to be lined or coated: Abrasive blast clean in
accordance with NAPF 500-03.
I. Sherardized, aluminum, copper, and bronze surfaces: Prepare in accordance with
coating manufacturer's instructions.
J. Galvanized surface:
1. Degrease or solvent clean(SSPC SP-1)to remove oily residue.
2. Power tool or hand tool clean or whip abrasive blast.
3. . Test surface for contaminants using copper sulfate solution.
4. Apply metal pretreatment within 24 hours before coating galvanized surfaces
that cannot be thoroughly abraded physically, such as bolts, nuts, or
preformed channels.
K. Shop primed metal:
1. Certify that primers applied to metal surfaces in the shop are compatible with
coatings to be applied over such primers in the field.
2. Remove shop primer from metal to be submerged by abrasive blasting in
accordance with SSPC SP-10, unless greater degree of surface preparation is
required by coating manufacturer's representative.
3. Correct abraded, scratched or otherwise damaged areas of prime coat by
sanding or abrasive blasting to bare metal in accordance with SSPC SP-2,
SP-3, or SP-6, as directed by the ENGINEER.
4. When entire shop priming fails or has weathered excessively (more than
25 percent of the item), or when recommended by coating manufacturer's
representative, abrasive blast shop prime coat to remove entire coat and
prepare surface in accordance with SSPC SP-10.
5. When incorrect prime coat is applied, remove incorrect prime coat by abrasive
blasting in accordance with SSPC SP-10.
6. When prime coat not authorized by ENGINEER is applied, remove
unauthorized prime coat by abrasive blasting in accordance with SSPC SPA 0.
7. Shop applied bituminous paint or asphalt varnish: Abrasive blast clean shop
applied bituminous paint or asphalt varnish from surfaces scheduled to receive
non-bituminous coatings.
L. Abrasive blast cadmium-plated, zinc-plated, or sherardized fasteners in same
manner as unprotected metal when used in assembly of equipment designated for
abrasive blasting .
M. Abrasive blast components to be attached to surfaces which cannot be abrasive
blasted before components are attached.
N. Grind sharp edges to approximately 1/16-inch radius before abrasive blast cleaning.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.09960A-10 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienWUNRenton/8235B10/Specifications/10.09960A.doc
O. Remove and grind smooth all excessive weld material and weld spatter before blast
cleaning in accordance with NACE SP0178.
P. PVC and FRP Surfaces:
1. Prepare surfaces to be coated by light sanding (de-gloss) and wipe-down with
clean cloths, or by solvent cleaning in strict accordance with coating
manufacturer's instructions.
Q. Cleaning of previously coated surfaces:
1. Utilize cleaning agent to remove soluble salts such as chlorides and sulfates
from concrete and metal surfaces:
a. Cleaning agent: Biodegradable non-flammable and containing no volatile
organic compounds.
b. Manufacturer: The following or equal:
1) Chlor-Rid International, Inc.
2. Steam clean and degrease surfaces to be coated to remove oils and grease.
3. Cleaning of surfaces utilizing the decontamination cleaning agent may be
accomplished in conjunction with abrasive blast cleaning, steam cleaning, high
pressure washing, or hand washing as approved by the coating manufacturer's
representative and the ENGINEER.
4. Test cleaned surfaces in accordance with the cleaning agent manufacturer's
instructions to ensure all soluble salts have been removed. Additional cleaning
shall be carried out as necessary.
5. Final surface preparation prior to application of new coating system shall be
made in strict accordance with coating manufacturer's printed instructions.
3.03 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT PREPARATION
A. Identify equipment, ducting, piping, and conduit asspecified in Sub-Section
10.15075 and Sub-Section 10.16075.
B. Remove grilles, covers, and access panels for mechanical and electrical system
from location and coat separately.
C. Prepare and finish coat-primed equipment with color selected by the ENGINEER.
D. Prepare and prime and coat insulated and bare pipes, conduits, boxes, insulated
and bare ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, except where item_s are
covered with prefinished coating.
E. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when coated
over or spattered.
F. Prepare and coat interior surfaces of air ducts, convector and baseboard heating
cabinets that are visible through grilles and louvers with 1 coat of flat black paint, to
limit of sight line.
G. Prepare and coat dampers exposed immediately behind louvers, grilles, convector
and baseboard cabinets to match face panels.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.09960A-11 82351310
pw:ll carollolDocumen is/cliendWA/Ren[on/8235810/Specficabons/10.09980A.doc
H. Prepare and coat exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished
areas with color and texture to match adjacent surfaces.
I. Prepare and coat both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical
equipment before installing backboards and mounting equipment on them.
J. Color code equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed ductwork and apply color
banding and identification, such as flow arrows, naming and numbering, in
accordance with Contract Documents.
3.04 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Coat metal unless specified otherwise:
1. Aboveground piping to be coated shall be empty of contents during application
of coatings.
C. Verify metal surface preparation immediately before applying coating in accordance
with SSPC SP COM.
D. Allow surfaces to dry, except where coating manufacturer requires surface wetting
before coating.
E. Wash coat and prime sherardized, aluminum, copper, and bronze surfaces, or
prime with manufacturer's recommended special primer.
F. Prime shop primed metal surfaces. Spot prime exposed metal of shop primed
surfaces before applying primer over entire surface.
G. Apply minimum number of specified coats.
H. Apply coats to thicknesses specified, especially at edges and corners.
I. Apply additional coats when necessary to achieve specified thicknesses.
J. Coat surfaces without drops, overspray, dry spray, runs, ridges, waves, holidays,
laps, or brush marks.
K. Remove spatter and droppings after completion of coating.
L. When multiple coats of same material are specified, tint prime coat and intermediate
coats with suitable pigment to distinguish each coat.
M. Dust coatings between coats. Lightly sand and dust surfaces to receive high gloss
finishes, unless instructed otherwise by coating manufacturer.
N. Apply coating by brush, roller, trowel, or spray, unless particular method of
application is required by coating manufacturer's instructions or these
Specifications.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.09960A-12 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.09960A.doc
i
1
O. Plural component application: Drums shall be premixed each day. All gauges shall
be working order prior to the start of application. Ratio checks shall be completed
prior to each application. A spray sample shall be sprayed on plastic sheeting to
insure set time is complete prior to each application. Hardness testing shall be
preformed after each application.
P. Spray application:
1. Stripe coat edges, welds, nuts, bolts, difficult to reach areas by brush before
' beginning spray application, as necessary, to ensure specified coating
thickness along edges.
2. When using spray application, apply coating to thickness not greater than that
recommended in coating manufacturer's instructions for spray application.
3. Use airless spray method, unless air spray method is required by coating
manufacturer's instruction or these Specifications.
' 4. Conduct spray coating under controlled conditions. Protect adjacent
construction and property from coating mist, fumes, or overspray.
' Q. Drying and recoating:
1. Provide fans, heating devices, or other means recommended by coating
manufacturer to prevent formation of condensate or dew on surface of
substrate, coating between coats and within curing time following application
L of last coat.
2. For submerged service the CONTRACTOR shall provide a letter to the
' ENGINEER that the lining system is fully cured and ready to be placed into
service.
3. Limit drying time to that required by these Specifications or coating
manufacturer's instructions.
4. Do not allow excessive drying time or exposure which may impair bond
between coats.
5. Recoat epoxies within time limits recommended by coating manufacturer.
6. When time limits are exceeded, abrasive blast clean and de-gloss clean prior
to applying another coat.
7. When limitation on time between abrasive blasting and coating cannot be met
before attachment of components to surfaces which cannot be abrasive
blasted, coat components before attachment.
8. Ensure primer and intermediate coats of coating are unscarred and completely
integral at time of application of each succeeding coat.
9. Touch up suction spots between coats and apply additional coats where
required to produce finished surface of solid, even color, free of defects.
10. Leave no holidays.
11. Sand and feather in to a smooth transition and recoat and recoat scratched
contaminated, or h
of erwise damaged coating surfaces so damages are
invisible to naked eye.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.09960A-13 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClientfWA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.09960A.doc
a
R. Concrete:
1. Apply first coat (primer) only when surface temperature of concrete is
decreasing in order to eliminate effects of off-gassing on coating.
3.05 HIGH SOLIDS EPDXY SYSTEM
A. Preparation:
1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with general preparation requirements and as
follows:
a. Abrasive blast ferrous metal surfaces to be submerged at jobsite in
accordance with SSPC SP-5 prior to coating. When cleaned surfaces rust
or discolor, abrasive blast surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-10.
II
b. Abrasive blast non-submerged ferrous metal surfaces at jobsite in
accordance with SSPC SP-10, prior to coating. When cleaned surfaces
rust or discolor, abrasive blast surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-6. l
c. Abrasive blast clean ductile iron surfaces at jobsite in accordance with
SSPC SP-7.
9
B. Application:
1. Apply coatings in accordance with general application requirements and as
follows:
a. Apply minimum 2-coat system with minimum total dry film thickness (DFT)
of 12 mils.
b. Recoat or apply pp y succeeding epoxy coats within time limits recommended
by manufacturer. Prepare surfaces for recoatin in accordance with
P 9
manufacturer's instructions.
c. Coat metal to be submerged before installation when necessary, to obtain
acceptable finish and to prevent damage to other surfaces. 1 '
d. Coat entire surface of support brackets, stem guides, pipe clips, fasteners, IJ
and other metal devices bolted to concrete.
e. Coat surface of items to be exposed and adjacent 1 inch to be concealed
when embedded in concrete or masonry.
3.06 HIGH SOLIDS EPDXY AND POLYURETHANE COATING SYSTEM
I
A. Preparation:
1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with general preparation requirements and as
follows:
a. Prepare concrete surfaces in accordance with general preparation
requirements.
b. Touch up shop primed steel and miscellaneous iron.
c. Abrasive blast ferrous metal surfaces at jobsite in accordance with
SSPC SP-6, prior to coating. When cleaned surfaces rust or discolor,
abrasive blast surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-6. i
d. Degrease or solvent clean, whip abrasive blast, power tool, or hand tool
clean galvanized metal surfaces.
e. Lightly sand (de-gloss) fiberglass and poly vinyl chloride (PVC) pipe to be o
coated and wipe clean with dry cloths, or solvent clean in accordance with
coating manufacturer's instructions.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.09960A-14 8235610
pw:#Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.09960A.doc
I
f. Abrasive blast clean ductile iron surfaces.
B. Application:
1. Apply coatings in accordance with general application requirements and as
' follows:
a. Apply 3 coat system consisting of:
1) Primer: 4 to 5 mils dry film thickness high solids epoxy.
' 2) Intermediate coat: 4 to 5 mils dry film thickness high solids epoxy.
3) Topcoat: 2.5 to 3.5 mils dry film thickness aliphatic or aliphatic-acrylic
polyurethane topcoat.
2. Recoat or apply succeeding epoxy coats within 30 days or within time limits
recommended by manufacturer, whichever is shorter. Prepare surfaces for
recoating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
' 3.07 ASPHALT VARNISH
A. Preparation:
' 1. Prepare surfaces In accordance with general preparation requirements.
B. Application:
' 1. Apply coatings in accordance with general application requirements and as
follows:
a. Apply minimum 2 coats.
' 3.08 WATERBORNE ACRYLIC EMULSION
A. Preparation:
' 1. Remove all oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign material by Solvent Cleaning in
accordance with SSPC SP-1.
2. Lightly sand all surfaces and wipe thoroughly with clean cotton cloths before
applying coating.
B. Application:
' 1. Apply 2 or more coats to obtain a minimum dry film thickness (DFT) of 5.0
mils.
3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Each coat will be inspected. Strip and remove defective coats re are surfaces p p es and
recoat. When approved, apply next coat.
B. Control and check dry film thicknesses and integrity of coatings.
' C. Measure dry film thickness with calibrated thickness gauge.
D. Dry film thicknesses on ferrous-based substrates may be checked with Elcometer
Type 1 Magnetic Pull-Off Gage or Positector 6000.
r
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.09960A-15 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/I0.09960A.doc
a
E. Verify coat integrity with low-voltage holiday detector for submerged surface, in
accordance with SP0188 06. Allow ENGINEER to use detector for additional
checking.
F. Check wet film thickness before coal tar epoxy coating cures on concrete or
non-ferrous metal substrates.
G. Arrange for services of coating manufacturer's field representative to provide
periodic field consultation and inspection services to ensure proper surfaced,
preparation of facilities and items to be coated, and to ensure proper application
and curing:
1. Notify ENGINEER 24 hours in advance of each visit by coating manufacturer's
representative.
2. Provide ENGINEER with a written report by coating manufacturer's j
representative within 48 hours following each visit.
3.10 SCHEDULE OF ITEMS NOT REQUIRING COATING
I
A. General: Unless specified otherwise, the following items do not require coating:
1. Items that have received final coat at factory and not listed to receive coating
in field.
2. Aluminum, brass, bronze, copper, plastic (except PVC pipe), rubber, stainless
steel, chrome, Everdur, or lead.
3. Buried or encased piping or conduit.
4. Exterior concrete.
5. Galvanized electrical conduits, galvanized pipe trays, galvanized cable trays,
and other galvanized items:
a. Areas on galvanized items or parts where galvanizing has been damaged
during handling or construction shall be repaired as follows:
1) Clean damaged areas by SSPC SP-1, SP-2, SP-3, or SP-7 as
required. Q
2) Apply 2 coats of a cold galvanizing zinc compound such as ZRC
World Wide Inovatie Zinc Technologies of Mansfield, MA or accepted
equal, in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
6. Grease fittings. e
7. Fiberglass ducting or tanks in concealed locations.
8. Steel to be encased in concrete or masonry.
3.11 SCHEDULE OF SURFACES TO BE COATED IN THE FIELD
A. In general, apply coatings to steel, iron, galvanized surfaces, and wood surfaces
unless specified or otherwise indicated on the Drawings. Coat concrete surfaces 0
and anodized aluminum only when specified or indicated on the Drawings. Color
coat all piping as specified in Sub-Section 10.15075.
B. Following schedule is incomplete. Coat unlisted surfaces with same coating system
as similar listed surfaces. Verify questionable surfaces. l
C. Concrete:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.09960A-16 8235B10
pw:#Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235 B10/Specifications/10.09960A.doc
1. High solids epoxy:
a. Safety markings.
D. Metals:
1. High solids epoxy and polyurethane system: Interior and exterior non-
immersed ferrous metal surfaces including:
a. Pipe, valves, pipe hangers, supports and saddles, conduit, cable tray
' hangers, and supports.
b. Motors and motor accessory equipment.
c. Drive gear, drive housing, coupling housings, and miscellaneous gear
drive equipment.
d. Valve and gate operators and stands.
e. Structural steel including galvanized structural steel.
f. Mechanical equipment supports, drive units, and accessories.
' g. Pumps not submerged.
2. High solids epoxy system:
a. Field priming of ferrous metal surfaces with defective shop prime coat
' where no other prime coat is specified; for non-submerged service.
b. Bell rings, underside of manhole covers and frames.
c. Sump pumps and grit pumps, including underside of base plates and
' submerged suction and discharge piping.
d. Exterior of submerged piping and valves other than stainless steel or PVC
piping.
' e. Submerged pipe supports and hangers.
f. Stem guides.
g. Other submerged iron and steel metal unless specified otherwise.
h. Submerged piping.
' i. Exterior of influent pumps and influent pump submerged discharge piping.
K. Fiberglass and PVC pipe surfaces:
' 1. Waterborne acrylic emulsion.
a. Exterior of fiberglass ducting and fan housings.
b. Fiberglass expose to sunlight.
c. PVC piping exposed to view.
d. ABS piping as determined by ENGINEER.
' END OF SUB-SECTION
II
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.09960A-17 82351310
pw://Ca,ollol DocumentslClienNNA/Renton1 8235Bl0/Specificabons/10.09960A.doc
!1
D
1
D
. 1
1
1
1
1
1 .
1
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.09960A-18 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.09960A.doc
SUB-SECTION 10.11310
SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
' A. Sub-Section includes: Submersible sump pumps.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. , The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not.intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
a. Sub-Section 10.09960A- Coatings.
b. Sub-Section 10.15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
1
C. Sub-Section 10.15958 - Mechanical Equipment Testing.
d. Sub-Section 10.16050 - General Requirements for Electrical Work.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. A 48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
' 1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. As specified in Sub-Section 10.15050.
PART2 PRODUCTS
' 2.01 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Barnes: Series SE411 VF.
B. Bodies: Cast iron, ASTM A-48 Class 30 minimum, with support legs on sump
bottom and clearance for suction entrance.
' C. Impellers: 2-vane; non-clogging; open with pump-out vanes on back side;
dynamically balanced; close coupled to motors.
1. 2-inch spherical solids handling capability.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.11310-1 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WAt Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.11310.doc
D. Level Control: Integral vertical float, PVC, snap action, 15-foot cord with piggy-back
plug.
E. UL-Listed.
F. Automatic operation.
G. Motors: Suitable for use in Class 1 Division 2 locations, Oil filled; enclosed; overload
protection; 115 volt, single phase, 60 hertz; submersible type; able to operate
continuously without exceeding pumps service capacity when immersed in water up
to 77 degrees Fahrenheit temperature with the following:
1. Ball bearings with adequate thrust capacity for pump.
2. Mechanical shaft seal.
3. Expansion diaphragm. n
4. Cable: minimum length vault depth plus 20 feet long, armored, waterproof
cable securely attached to motors with watertight fittings.
H. Accessories:
1. Chains or cables: Stainless steel; attached to balance point of pump; suitable
for lifting pump from sump; long enough to extend from pump to 2 feet above
sump grating.
2. Hooks: Suitable to provide storage of chain or cable at top of sump.
I. Finishes: Air dried enamel base paint primer compatible with top coating for Q
submerged metals as specified in Sub-Section 10.09960A.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install submersible sump pumps as specified in Sub-Sections 10.15050 and
10.16050.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Performance test: Level 1 as specified in Sub-Section 10.15958.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.11310-2 82351310
pw:Il Carollo/Documentsl Client[WWRenton1 8235B10/Specificafons/10.11310.doc
3.03 PUMP SCHEDULE
A. Pump Characteristics:
1. The pump shall have the approximate operational characteristics at a water
temperature of 68 degrees Fahrenheit.
Pump Tag Number
SP -01
Service Vault Drainage
Condition 1
Capacity, gpm 0 gpm
Total Dynamic Head (TDH), Feet 20 feet
Condition 2
Capacity, gpm 65 gpm
Total Dynamic Head (TDH), Feet 5 feet
tCondition 3
Capacity, gpm 78 gpm
Total Dynamic Head (TDH), Feet 1 feet
Motor Horsepower 0.4 hp
tMotor Speed, revolutions per minute 1,750 rpm
END OF SUB-SECTION
I
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.11310-3 82351310
pw://Carollo/Document s/ClienYWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Spec cations/i 0.11310.doc
!
1
!
!
!
D
!
!
1
!
1
. 1
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.11310-4 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClientfWAtRenton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.1131 O.doc
SECTION 10.11311
CHOPPER CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
PART 1 GENERAL
' 1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Pump systems including chopper centrifugal pumps and motor
drives.
B. Related sections:
1. Sub-Section 10.01140 -Work Restrictions.
2. Sub-Section 10.01610 - Project Design Criteria.
3. Sub-Section 10.01756 - Testing, Training, and Facility Start-up.
4. Sub-Section 10.09960A- Coatings.
5. Sub-Section 10.15050 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
6. Sub-Section 10.15958 - Mechanical Equipment Testing.
7. Sub-Section '10.161+22 - Motor Starters.
8. Sub-Section 10.17710 - Control Systems - Panels, Enclosures, and Panel
Components.
9. Sub-Section 10.17201 - Level Measurement-Switches.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA):
1. 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
2. 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
tB. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1. B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250,
and 800.
C. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A 48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
2. A 108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-
Finished.
3. A 148 - Specification for steel castings, high strength, for structural purposes.
4. A 276 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting Steel Bars and
Shapes.
5. A 536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
6. A 582 - Standard Specification for Free-Machining Stainless Steel Bars.
7. E 10 -Test Method for Brinell Hardness of Metallic Materials.
1 D. CSA International (CSA).
E. Hydraulic Institute (HI):
1. 1.1-1.2 - Centrifugal Pumps for Nomenclature and Definitions.
2. 1.3 - Rotodynamic (Centrifugal) Pumps for Design and Application.
3. 1.4 - Centrifugal Pumps for Installation, Operation and Maintenance.
4. 1.6 - Centrifugal Pump Tests.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.11311-1 82351310
pw:/lCarollo/Documentsl Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specificationstl0.1131l.doc
5. 9.1-9.5 - Pumps - General Guidelines for Types, Definitions, Application and
Sound Measurement and Decontamination.
F. Insulated Cable Engineer's Association (ICEA).
G. National Electrical Code (NEC).
H. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
I. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Pump head (total dynamic head, TDH), flow capacity, pump efficiency, net positive
suction head available (NPSHa), and net positive suction head required (NPSHr):
As defined in HI 1.1-1.2, 1.3, 1.6, and 9.1-9.5 and as modified in the Section.
B. Suction head: Gauge pressure available at pump intake flange or bell in feet of fluid
above atmospheric; average when using multiple suction pressure taps, regardless
of variation in individual taps.
C. Tolerances: In accordance with HI 1.1-1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.6, and 9.1-9.5, unless
specified more restrictively.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Chopper centrifugal pumps with components: Pump, driver, motors, electrical cable,
and drive arrangements as specified or as Scheduled with shafts, seals or packing,
couplings, base plates, guards, supports, anchor bolts, necessary valves, gauges,
taps, lifting eyes, stands, and other items as required for a complete and operational
system.
B. Chopping/maceration of materials shall be accomplished by the action of the
cupped and sharpened leading edges of the impeller blades moving across the
cutter box at the intake opening.
C. The pumps shall be capable of continuous operation while pumping domestic
sewage wastewater containing solids with heavy rags, plastics, grease, hair, grit,
and other stringy fibrous material.
1.05 SUBMITTAL
A. Submit as specified in Sub-Section 10.15050.
B. Certifications: Submit Certification of Rockwell C Hardness for cutter bars and
impeller.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As specified in Sub-Section 10.15050.
B. Provide pumps in this Section from same manufacturer.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.11311-2 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClientfWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10:1131 l.doc
C. Require pump manufacturer to furnish and coordinate pump, driver, drive, and
pump components as Scheduled and to provide written installation and check out
requirements.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. As specified in Sub-Section 10.15050.
t1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental requirements: As specified in Sub-Section 10.01610.
1.09 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate work with restrictions as specified in Sub-Section 10.01140.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Sub-Section 10.15050.
1.11 MAINTENANCE
A. Special tools: Provide 1 set of all special tools required for complete assembly q P Y or
disassembly of the pump system components.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
i2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:
1. Vaughan Company, Inc.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. General: Materials in the Pump Schedule shall be the type and grade asspecified in
this Section.
B. Cast iron: ASTM A 48, Class 30 minimum.
C. Ductile iron: ASTM A 536.
D. Cast steel: ASTM A 148, Grade 90 - 60; minimum Rockwell C hardness number as
Scheduled.
E. Steel: ASTM A 108, Grade as Scheduled.
1 F. 316 Stainless: ASTM A 276, Type 316 stainless steel; nickel - chrome- boron
coating as Scheduled.
G. 420F Stainless: ASTM A 582, Type 420 Stainless Steel.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.11311-3 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235810/Specifications/10.11311.doc
2.03 GENERAL PUMP CONSTRUCTION
A. Type: Industrial (heavy) duty chopper centrifugal pumps.
B. Other requirements:
1. Vibration: As specified in Sub-Section 10.15958.
2. Noise: As specified in Sub-Section 10.15958.
2.04 PUMP CASINGS t
A. Material: As Scheduled.
B. Provide a single piece casing with integrally cast discharge flange.
C. Design to withstand a design working pressure not less than 1.10 times the
maximum shutoff total dynamic head with the maximum diameter impeller at the
maximum operating speed plus the maximum suction static head.
D. Design to withstand a 5-minute hydrostatic test pressure not less than 1.5 times the
design working pressure.
E. Provide discharge flanges with ASME 816.1 Class 125 bolt patterns.
F. Minimum 5-inch diameter to permit inspection and cleaning of pump interior; bolted
cover with inner contour that matches contour of suction piece.
2.05 BACK PLATES
A. Material: as Scheduled. g
B. The back pullout plate shall be a separate component part and shall allow removal
of the pump components from above the casing.
C. The back pullout plate shall allow external adjustment of the impeller to cutter bar
clearance.
D. The pump shall include a rear cutting mechanism designed to cut against the pump
out vanes and the impeller hub, reducing and removing stringy materials from the
mechanical seal.
2.06 IMPELLERS
A. Material: As Scheduled.
B. Type: Single-passage, semi-open chopper-centrifugal impeller with smooth water I
passages to reduce clogging by rags, stringy or fibrous materials on impellers or
shafting.
C. Provide static, dynamic, and hydraulic balance of impeller and complete rotating
element.
D. Secure impeller to shaft with cutter nut.
September.10, 2010 - FINAL 10.11311-4 8235610
pw:HCarol to/Documents/Cli ent/WA/Renton/8235 B l0/Specifications/10.1131 l.d oc
i
E. Impeller cutter nut: Same material as impeller.
F. Provide for external adjustment of impeller to cutter bar clearances without pump
disassembly or disturbances of discharge piping.
2.07 PUMP SHAFTS
A. Material:
1. As Scheduled.
2. Hard faced or with hardened sleeve where shafts pass through bearings.
Harden to 550 Brinell hardness number minimum per ASTM E 10.
L3. If mechanical seals are Scheduled and mechanical seals cannot be installed
on hardened shaft, shaft is not to be hardened in the mechanical seal area.
4. If sleeve provided, sleeve to be renewable and key locked in place.
B. Strength: Able to withstand minimum 1.5 times maximum operating torque and
other loads.
C. Resonant frequency: As specified in Sub-Sections 10.15050 and 10.15958.
D. Deflection: Maximum 0.002 inches under operating conditions.
E. Impeller attachment: Secured by a nut locked In place, but readily removable
without use of special tools.
2.08 STUFFING BOXES
A. Type: As Scheduled, and as specified in Sub-Section 10.15050.
B. Materials: As Scheduled.
C. Provide separate stuffing box housing (not integral to the casing) suitable for shaft
seal type Scheduled.
D. Shaft seal type: As Scheduled and as specified in Sub-Section 10.15050.
2.09 BEARINGS AND BEARING FRAME
A. Bearing type: Back-to-back mounted single-row angular contact ball bearing and
radial bearings.
B. Bearing lubrication: Oil lubricated.
C. Bearing life: Minimum L,D life of 100,000 hours at rated design point or 24,000 hours
in accordance with ABMA 9 or 11 at bearing design load imposed by pump shutoff
with maximum sized impeller at rated speed, whichever provides longest bearing
life in intended service.
D. Pump bearing frames:
1. Material: As Scheduled.
2. Provide a 1-piece rigid construction with bearing housing.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.11311-5 82351310
pw:HCarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.1131 l.doc
2.10 ACCESSORIES
A. Guide Rail System: Provide a guide rail system consisting of two stainless steel
guide rails, cast ductile iron pump guide bracket and discharge elbow with mounting
feet and 125 lb. flanges, an upper guide rail mounting bracket and intermediate
guide brackets every 10 feet. The dual rail guide design keeps the pump in proper u
alignment with the stationary discharge piping. These rails shall bolt directly to the
base elbow and to the access hatch frame at the top of the wetwell by an Upper
Guide Bracket.
1. Upper Guide Bracket: The upper guide bracket shall align and support the two
guide rails at the top of the sump. It shall bolt directly to the access hatch frame
and incorporate an expandable rubber grommet for secure rail installation.
B. Lifting Chain: Each pump shall be equipped with.a 2 ft. section of 5/16" 300 series
stainless steel and a 3/8" nylon guide rope. A chain grabbing mechanism shall be
included for use with the pump hoisting system. The chain grabbing mechanism
shall be made of stainless steel and sized to fit the lifting chain. The lifting chain and
the chain grabbing mechanism shall be rated for a minimum working load limit of
500 lbs.
1. The Lifting Chain shall be secured by a stainless steel mechanism and
fasteners at the top of the Guide Rail System such that it can be accessible
from outside the wet well. Q
2.11 SUBMERSIBLE MOTORS AND POWER CABLES
A. Motor Characteristics: As Scheduled.
B. Motors: j
1. Shall be U/L LISTED EXPLOSION PROOF for Class 1, Group D, Division 1
hazardous locations, Class F insulation. Motor shall be equipped with tandem
mechanical seals in oil bath and dual moisture sensing probes. Motor shall
include two normally closed automatic resetting thermostats connected in
series and imbedded in adjoining phases. Motor frame shall be cast iron, and
all hardware and shaft shall be stainless steel.
2. The motor shall be capable of continuous operation under load with the motor
submerged, partially submerged, or exposed, without derating the motor.
3. The motor shall be designed for continuous duty handling pumped media of
40 degrees Celsius and capable of a minimum of 15 evenly spaced starts per
hour.
C. Power cables:
1. Submersible to same water depth as motor casing.
2. Type SPC with Hypalon/Buna N jacket.
3. Insulation rated for 90 degrees Celsius.
4. Non-wicking fillers.
5. Length: Sufficient to connect to surface control panel (without the need of
splices) as indicated on the Drawings.
6. Sized to conform to NEC, ICEA, and CSA specifications.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.11311-6 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235BI0/Specifications/10.1131 Moc
l
2.12 CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Controls: Provide control system with equipment protective devices for safe
operation in a local control panel and with remote inputs and outputs as indicated
on the Drawings to provide the control functions as specified below. Enclosure and
components shall meet the requirements of Sub-Section 10.17710.
B. Vendor control panel:
1. Power supply:
a. As indicated in the Pump Schedule.
2. Enclosure:
a. NEMA 4.
1) With lockable outer door.
b. Provide disconnect receptacles for external connections as indicated on
the Drawings.
c. Provide circuit breakers for loads as listed below and indicated on the
drawings:
1) RTU panel, 120V/20A.
2) Sump Pump, 120V/20A.
3) Hot box heater.
4) Pump Control Panel convenience receptacle.
5) Pump station flood light.
3. Front panel controls:
a. . Electrical components:
1) Main circuit breaker:
a) Flange-mounted operator:
(1) Pad-lockable in the off position.
b) Disconnects all power to the panel.
c) Interlock with the panel door.
d) Defeat mechanism.
4. Motor starter for each pump:
a. In accordance with Sub-Section 10.16422.
b. Motor circuit protector circuit breaker.
c. Full voltage non-reversing magnetic starter.
d. Thermal or electronic overloads.
5. Control components:
a. Pump protection module as specified herein.
b. Terminal strips:
1) Provide terminal.strips for landing all external wiring.
c. Relays, timers, and other components as required to provide the specified
functionality and remote monitoring connections.
d. Intrinsically safe relay for each float switch indicated on the drawings
1) Intrinsically safe relay shall be rated for sue with equipment located
in Class I div 1 areas.
6. Remote monitoring:
a. Provide dry relay contact outputs for the following:
1) Running status for each pump.
2) Winding High Temperature Alarm for each pump.
3) Moisture in Motor Chamber Alarm for each pump.
4) Pump running command for each pump.
7. Remote control:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.11311-7 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.1131l.doc
a. Provide input for accepting dry contact input for additional remote control
from external RTU for the following:
1) Start/Stop Pump 1.
2) Start/Stop Pump 2.
3) Wetwell high high level switch.
4) Wetwell high level switch.
5) Wetwell low level switch.
6) Wetwell low low level switch.
b. Provide 24VDC interposing relay for each remote run signal from the RTU
Panel.
8. Panel heater.
C. Pump protection module:
1. Supply each pump with a self-contained pump protection module.
2. 120 VAC, 1-phase, power supply.
3. Wired directly to the internal pump monitoring devices, including:
a. Stator thermal switches.
b. Moisture detection in motor chamber.
4. Provide the following output contacts:
a. Stator thermal switches.
b. Moisture detection in motor chamber.
D. Level switches:
1. Provide float level switches in accordance with Sub-Section 10.17201.
2. Provide the number of switches indicated on the Drawings and in the
description of operation below.
E. Description of operation:
1. General:
a. With the Hand-Off-Auto selector switch (located in the RTU Panel) in the
HAND position, the pump will run.
b. With the Hand-Off-Auto selector switch in the OFF position, the pump is
prevented from running. .
c. With the Hand-Off-Auto selector switch in the AUTO position,the pump
will run based on RTU or level switch input.
1) Under normal operation the RTU will start and stop the pumps
between the high level and low level switches.
2) If the RTU fails the pump will run on level switches as specified
below.
a) High level alarm is generated by the high level switch (LSH):
(1) Lead pump is called to run when the signal is received.
(a) The pump shall run until the LSL or LSLL signal is
received.
(2) Provide a dry contact for alarming to the RTU panel.
b) High-high level alarm is generated by the high-high level switch
(LSHH):
(1) Lag pump is called to run when the signal is received.
(2) Activated by the high-high level switch (LSHH). l�
(a) The pump shall run until the LSL or LSLL signal is
received.
(3) Provide a dry contact for alarming to the RTU panel.
d. Interlocks:
September 10, 2010-FINAL 10.11311-8 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client[WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.1131l.doc
t
1) Activated by the low level switch (LSL).
a) A hardwired low level interlock will prevent the pump from
operating at or below this level:
b) In the AUTO mode only.
c) Provide a dry contact for alarming to the RTU panel.
2) Activated by the low level switch (LSLL).
a) A hardwired low-low level interlock will prevent the pump from
operating at or below this level:
b) In the AUTO mode only.
c) Provide a dry contact for alarming to the RTU panel.
3) A motor high-temperature interlock will prevent the pump from
running in all modes:
2.13 FINISHES
A. Finishes: Prepare surfaces and apply protective finishes as specified in Sub-
, Section 10.09960A.
2.14 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Witnessing: Source or factory testing sha!l be witnessed by the ENGINEER or
OWNER when Scheduled; provide advanced notice of source testing as specified in
Sub-Section 10.15958.
B. Equipment performance test: Test level as Scheduled; test as specified in
accordance with Sub-Section 10.15958.
C. Vibration test: Test level as Scheduled; test as specified in accordance with Sub-
Section 10.15958.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install roducts in accordance with '
p manufacturer's instructions and as specified in
Sub-Sections 10.15050 and 10.15958.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Witnessing: All field-testing shall be witnessed by the ENGINEER; provide
advanced notice of field-testing as specified in Sub-Section 10.15958.
B. Inspection and checkout: As specified in Sub-Sections 10.15050 and 10.15958.
C. Equipment performance test: Test level as Scheduled; test as specified in
accordance with Sub-Section 10.15958.
D. Vibration test: Test level as Scheduled; test as specified in accordance with Sub-
Section 10.15958.
E. Operational testing: As specified in Sub-Section 10.01756.
t II
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.11311-9 8235810
pw:l/caro11olDocumentslCl lent/wNRenton1 8235B10 1Specifications110.11311.doc
3.03 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Require manufacturer to inspect system before initial start-up and certify that
system has been correctly installed and prepared for start-up as specified in this
section and in Sub-Sections 10.15050 and 10.15958.
B. Training: As specified in Sub-Section 10.15050.
3.04 PUMP SCHEDULE
Tag Numbers PMP- 01, 02
General Characteristics: Q
Service Wastewater
Quantity 2
Manufacturer's Model Number Model SE3G
Max. Noise, dBA at 3 ft 85
Torsional Analysis Not Required
Min. Pumped Fluid degrees Fahrenheit 40
Normal Pumped Fluid degrees Fahrenheit 60
Max. Pumped Fluid degrees Fahrenheit 95 t
Pump Characteristics:
Impeller Semi-open with chopper
Impeller Bearing Lubrication Oil
Shaft Seal Type Mechanical
Speed Control Fixed
Max. Pump rpm 1,750
Min. Pump rpm 1,750
Rated Design Point:
Flow, gpm 125
Head, Ft 24
Min. Efficiency, % 32
Required Condition 2:
Flow, gpm 300
Head Range, Ft 11-14
Min. Efficiency, % 32
Required Condition 3:
Flow, gpm 60
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.11311-10 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Rentonl 8235Bl0/Specifiicafions/10.11311.doc
Tag Numbers PMP- 01, 02
Head Range, Ft 26-29
Min. Efficiency, % 20
Other Conditions:
Min. Pump Operating Level As indicated on the Drawings
Pump Materials:
Pump Casing Ductile Iron
Impeller Cast Steel, 60 Rockwell C
Impeller Cutter Nut Cast Steel, 60 Rockwell C
ICutter Bar Cast Steel, 60 Rockwell C
Shaft Steel, Gr 4140
Shaft Sleeve 316 Stainless, Coated
Stuffing Box Cast Iron
Pump Bearing Frame Cast Iron
Nuts and Bolts 316 Stainless
Motor Characteristics:
Driver Type Yp Motor
Drive Arrangement Submersible
Non-reverse Ratchets None
Min. Driver Hp 5
Max. Driver Speed, rpm 1,750
Service Factor 1.15
Voltage/Phases/Hz 240/3/60
Source Quality Control Testing:Test Witnessing Not Witnessed
Performance Test Level 1
Vibration Test Level 1
Noise Test Level 1
iField Quality Control Testinq:
Performance Test Level 2
Vibration Test Level 2
Noise Test Level 2
END OF SUB-SECTION
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.11311-11 8235B10
pw://Carollo/Documents IClient/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.1131 l.doc
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.11311-12 82351310
pw:gCarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235 B10/Specifications/10.1131 l.doc
SUB-SECTION 10.15050
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Basic design and performance requirements for mechanical
equipment.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
a: Sub-Section 10.09960A- Coatings.
b. Sub-Section 10.15061 - Pipe Supports.
c. Sub-Section 10.15062 - Preformed Channel Pipe Support System.
d. Sub-Section 10.15251 - Ductile Iron AWWA C151 Pipe.
e. Sub-Section 10.15265 - Plastic Piping and Tubing.
f. Sub-Section 10.15956 - Piping Systems Testing.
g. Sub-Section 10.01612 - Seismic Design Criteria.
h. Sub-Section 10.01756 -Testing, Training, and Facility Start-Up.
i. Sub-Section 10.01770 - Closeout Procedures.
j. Sub-Section 10.01782 - Operating and Maintenance Data.
k. Sub-Section 10.03600 - Grouts.
I. Sub-Section 10.05120 - Structural Steel.
m. Sub-Section 10.09960 - Coatings.
n. Sub-Section 10.10400 - Identification Devices.
o. Sub-Section 10.15958 - Mechanical Equipment Testing.
p. Sub-Section 10.16950 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests.
q. Sub-Section 10.17950 - Testing Calibration and Commissioning.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Gear Manufacturer's Association (AGMA) Standards:
1. 2001-B88 - Fundamental Rating Factors and Calculation Methods for Involute
Spur and Helical Gear Teeth.
2. 6000-A88 - Specification for Measurement of Linear Vibration on Gear Units.
3. 6010-E88 - Standard for Spur, Helical, Herringbone, and Bevel Enclosed
Drives.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15050-1 82351310
pw://Carotio/Document s/Client/WA/Renton1 8235Bl0/Spec cations/10.15050.doc.
4. 6019-E89 - Standard for Gear motors using Spur, Helical, Herringbone,
Straight Bevel or Spiral Bevel Gears.
5. 6025--C90 - Sound for Enclosed Helical, Herringbone, and Spiral Bevel Gear
Drives.
B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1. PTC 8.2 - Performance Test Code for Centrifugal Pumps.
2. PTC 10 - Performance Test Code - Compressors and Exhausters.
3. PTC 17 - Performance Test Code - Reciprocating Internal-Combustion
Engines.
4. PTC 11 - Performance Test Code - Measurement of Shaft Horsepower-
Instruments and Apparatus.
C. American Bearing Manufactures Association (ABMA) Standards:
1. 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
2. 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
D. American Petroleum institute (API):
1. 682 - Shaft Sealing Systems for Centrifugal and Rotary Pumps.
E. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A 36 - Standard Specification for Structural Steel.
2. A 48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings.
3. A 125 - Standard Specification for Steel Springs, Helical, Heat-Treated.
4. A 526 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated by the Hot Dip
Process, Commercial Quality.
5. A 536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
6. B 61 - Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings.
7. B 62 - Standard specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal
Castings.
8. B 505 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Continuous Castings.
9. B 584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General
Applications.
F. Hydraulic Institute (HI):
1. 1.1-1.5 - Centrifugal Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions, Application, and
Operation.
2. 1.6 - Centrifugal Pump Tests.
3. 2.1-2.5 -Vertical Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions, Application, and
Operation.
4. 2.6 -Vertical Pump Tests.
5. 3.1-1.5 - Rotary Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions, Application, and
Operation.
6. 3.6 - Rotary Pump Tests.
7. 4.1-4.6 - Sealless Rotary Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions, Application,
Operation, and Test.
8. 5.1-1.6 - Sealless Centrifugal Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions, Application,
Operation, and Test.
9. 6.1-6.5 - Reciprocating Power Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions, Application,
and Operation.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15050-2 8235B10
pw:HCarollo/Documents/ClienYWAIRenton/8235B10/Specifications/10.15050.doc
10. 7.1-7.5 - Controlled Volume Pumps - Nomenclature, Definitions, Application,
and Operation.
11. 9.1-9.5 - Pumps - General Guidelines for Types, Definitions, Application, and
Sound Measurement.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Special tools: Tools that have been specifically made for use on unit of equipment
for assembly, disassembly, repair, or maintenance.
B. Resonant frequency: That frequency at which a small driving force produces an
ever-larger vibration if no dampening exists.
C. Rotational frequency: The revolutions per unit of time usually expressed as
revolutions per minute.
D. Critical frequency: Same as resonant frequency for the rotating elements or the
installed machine and base.
E. Peak vibration velocity: The root mean square average of the peak velocity of the
vibrational movement times the square root of 2 in inches per second.
F. Rotational speed: Same as rotational .fre uenc
q Y
G. Maximum excitation frequency: The excitation frequency with the highest vibration
velocity of several excitation frequencies that are a function of the design of a
particular machine.
H. Critical speed: Same as critical frequency.
I. Free field noise level: Noise measured without any reflective surfaces (an idealized
situation); sound pressure levels at 3 feet from the source unless specified
otherwise.
J. Operating weight: The weight of unit plus weight of fluids or solids normally
contained in unit during operation.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General:
1. Provisions specified under each technical equipment specification prevail over
and supersede conflicting provisions as specified in this Sub-Section.
2. Provide equipment and parts that are suitable for stresses, which may occur
during fabrication, transportation, erection, and operation.
3. Provide equipment that has not been in service prior to delivery, except as
required by tests.
4. Like parts of duplicate units are to be interchangeable.
5. When 2 or more units of equipment for the same purpose are required, provide
products of same manufacturer.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15050-3 82351310
pw:Icarollo/Documents/client/WA/Renlonl 8235 610/1pecificatlonsl101 1050.1oc
j
6. 1 Equipment manufacturer's responsibility extends to selection and mounting of
gear drive units, motors or other prime movers, accessories, and auxiliaries Q
required for proper operation. ■
7. When necessary, modify manufacturer's standard product to conform to
specified requirements or requirements indicated on the Drawings and
contained in Laws and Regulations.
B. Material requirements:
1. Materials: Suitable for superior corrosion resistance and for services under
conditions normally encountered in similar installations.
2. Dissimilar metals: Separate contacting surfaces with dielectric material.
C. Power transmission systems:
1. Power transmission equipment: V-belts, sheaves, shaft couplings, chains,
sprockets, mechanical Variable-speed drives, variable frequency drives, gear
reducers, open and enclosed gearing, clutches, brakes, intermediate shafting,
intermediate bearings, and U joints are to be rated for 24 hour-a-day
continuous service or frequent stops-and-starts intermittent service, whichever
is most severe, and sized with a minimum service factor of 1.5:
a. Apply 1.5 service factor to nameplate horsepower and torque of prime
source of power and not to actual equipment loading.
b. Apply service factors higher than 1.5 when recommended for continuous
24 hour-per-day operation and shock loadings specified in
AGMA 6010-E88, other applicable AGMA standards, or other applicable
referenced standards.
c. When manufacturer recommends service factor greater than 1.5,
manufacturer's recommendation takes precedence.
D. Vibration:
1. Resonant frequency: Ensure there are no natural resonant torsional, radial, or
axial frequencies within 25 percent above or below the operating rotational
frequencies or multiples of the operating rotational frequencies that may be
excited by the equipment design.
2. Design, balance, and align equipment to meet the vibration criteria specified in
Sub-Section 10.15958.
E. Equipment mounting and anchoring:
1. Mount equipment on cast iron or welded steel bases with structural steel
support frames. Utilize continuous welds to seal seams and contact edges
between steel members. Grind welds smooth.
2. Provide bases and supports with machined support pads, dowels for alignment j
of mating of adjacent items, adequate openings to facilitate grouting, and
openings for electrical conduits.
3. Provide jacking screws in bases and supports for equipment weighing over
1,000 pounds.
4. Anchorage of equipment to concrete: Perform calculations and determine
number, size, type, strength, and location of anchor bolts or other connections.
5. Provide bolt sleeves for anchor bolts for heavy equipment. Adjust bolts to final
location and fill sleeve with non-shrink grout.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15050-4 82351310
pw:Y Carollo/Documents/ClienttWA/Ren ton/8235610/Specifications/10.15050.doc
6. Anchorage of equipment to metal supports: Perform calculations and
determine number, size, type, strength, and location of bolts used to connect
equipment to metal supports.
7. Design equipment anchorage, supports, and connections for dead load,
running loads, loads during start-up, seismic load, and other loads as required
for proper operation of equipment.
F. Seismic design:
1. Design equipment anchorage and related details for seismic design criteria as
specified in Sub-Section 10.01612.
2. For equipment with operating weight of 400 pounds or more, provide
calculations for:
a. Determine operating weight and centroid of equipment.
b. Calculate forces and overturning moments.
c. Calculate shear and tension forces in equipment anchorages, supports,
and connections.
d. Design equipment anchorage, supports, and connections based on
calculated shear and tension forces.
G. Equipment units weighing 50 pounds or more: Provide with lifting lugs or eyes to
allow removal with hoist or other lifting device.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data:
1. For each item of equipment:
a. Design features.
b. Load capacities.
c. Efficiency ratings.
d. Material designations by UNS alloy number or ASTM Specification and
Grade.
e. Data needed to verify compliance with the Specifications.
f. Catalog data.
g. Name plate data.
h. Clearly mark submittal information to show specific items, materials, and
accessories or options being furnished.
2. Gear reduction units:
a. Engineering information per applicable AGMA standards.
b. Gear mesh frequencies.
B. Shop drawings:
1. Drawings for equipment:
a. Drawings that include outline drawings, cut-away drawings, parts lists,
material specification lists, and other information required to substantiate
that proposed equipment complies with specified requirements.
2. Outline drawings showing equipment, driver, driven equipment, pumps, seal,
motor(s) or other specified drivers, variable frequency drive, shafting, U joints,
couplings, drive arrangement, gears, baseplate or support dimensions, anchor
bolt sizes and locations, bearings, and other.furnished components.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15050-5 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235B10/Specficabons/10.15050.doc
3. Installation and checkout instructions including leveling and alignment
tolerances, grouting, lubrication requirements, and initial start-up procedures.
4. Wiring, control schematics, control logic diagrams and ladder logic or similar
for computer based controls.
5. Recommended or normal operating parameters such as temperatures and
pressures.
6. Alarm and shutdown set points for all controls furnished.
C. Calculations:
1. Calculations and other information to substantiate equipment base plates,
supports, bolts, anchor bolts, and other connections meet minimum design
strength requirements and seismic design criteria specified in Sub-Section
10.01612.
2. Bearing L,o life calculations in accordance with ABMA 9 or ABMA 11
calculation methods for drivers, pumps, gears, shafts, motors, and other
driveline components with bearings.
3. Calculations and other information to substantiate that operating rotational
frequencies meet the requirements of this Sub-Section.
4. Torsional analysis of power transmission systems: When torsional analysis
specified in the equipment Sub-Sections, provide` .
a. Sketch of system components identifying physical characteristics
including mass, diameter, thickness, and stiffness.
b. Results of analysis including first and second critical frequencies of
system components and complete system.
5. Calculations shall be signed and stamped by a civil or structural engineer
registered to practice in the state where the Project is located.
D. Quality control submittals:
1. Source quality control reports and certified test data as specified in Sub-
section 10.15958.
2. Submit factory test reports before shipment.
3. Certified static and dynamic balancing reports for rotating equipment.
4. Field quality control reports and test data as specified in Sub-
Section 10.15958.
5. Start-up plan: Proposed plan for field-testing equipment as specified in Sub-
Section 10.01756.
6. Certificate of Proper Installation: As specified in Sub-Section 10.01756.
7. Submit material test reports a specified in the equipment Sub-Sections.
E. Operation and maintenance manuals:
1. As specified in Sub-Section 10.01782.
2. Submit prior to training of OWNER's personnel.
3. Make available at project site complete copy of manuals for use by field
personnel and ENGINEER during start-up and testing of equipment.
4. Include manufacturer and model number of every bearing; include calculated
ball pass frequencies of the installed equipment for both the inner and outer
raceways.
5. Include motor rotor bar pass frequencies.
F. Project closeout documents: As specified in Sub-Section 10.01770.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15050-6 - 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specificabons/10.15050.doc
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's field service:
1. Furnish services of authorized representative specially trained in installation of
equipment:
1 a. Visit project site and perform tasks necessary to certify installation.
b. Furnish Certificate of Proper Installation as specified in Sub-
Section 10.01756.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packing and shipping:
1. Equipment: Pack in boxes, crates, or otherwise protect from damage and
moisture, dust, or dirt during shipment, handling, and storage.
2. Bearings: Separately pack or otherwise suitably protect during transport.
3. Spare parts: Deliver in boxes labeled with contents, equipment to which spare
parts belong, and name of CONTRACTOR.
B. Storage:
1. Equipment having bearings: Store in enclosed facilities. Rotate units at least
once per month or more often as recommended by the manufacturer to protect
rotating elements and bearings.
2. Gear boxes: Oil filled or sprayed with rust preventive protective coating.
C. Protection:
1. Equipment: Protect equipment from deleterious exposure.
2. Painted surfaces: Protect against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other
damage.
1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Equipment anchoring: Obtain anchoring material and templates or setting drawings
from equipment manufacturers in adequate time for anchors to be cast-in-place
when concrete is placed.
B. Coordinate details of equipment with other related parts of the Work, including
verification that structures, piping, wiring, and equipment components are
compatible.
C. General start-up and testing of equipment:
1. Perform general start-up and testing procedures after operation and
maintenance manuals for equipment have been received.
2. Conduct functional testing of mechanical or electrical systems when each
system is substantially complete and after general start-up and testing
procedures have been successfully completed.
3. Functional testing requirements as specified in Sub-Sections 10.01756,
10.15958, 10.16950, and 10.17950 and the equipment Sub-Sections.
1.09 MAINTENANCE
A. Special tools:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15050-7 8235B10
pw:l/Carollo/Documen is/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.15050.doc
4
1. When specified, provide special tools required for operation and maintenance.
2. Mark or tag and list such tools in maintenance and operations instructions.
Describe use of each tool.
B. Spare belts:
1. When spare belts are specified, furnish 1 spare belt for every different type Hill
and size of belt-driven unit:
a. Where 2 or more belts are involved, furnish matched sets.
b. Identify as to equipment, design, horsepower, speed, length, sheave size,
and use.
c. Package in boxes labeled with identification of contents.
C. Spare parts:
1. Assume responsibility until turned over to OWNER.
2. Store in enclosed facilities.
3. Furnish itemized list and match identification tag attached to every part. -j
4. List parts by generic title and identification number.
5. Furnish name, address, and 'telephone number of supplier and spare parts
warehouse.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Ferrous materials:
1. Steel for Members used in Fabrication of Assemblies: ASTM A 36.
2. Iron castings: ASTM A 48, tough, close-grained gray iron, free from blowholes,
flaws, and other imperfections. J
3. Ductile iron castings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12, free from flaws and
imperfections.
4. Galvanized steel sheet: ASTM A 526, minimum 0.0635 inch (16 gauge).
5. Expanded metal: ASTM A 36, 13 gauge, 1/2-inch flat pattern expanded metal.
B. Nonferrous materials:
1. Stainless steel: Type 304 or 316 as specified. Provide L grade where welding
required.
2. Bronze in contact with liquid: Composition of not more than 2 percent
aluminum nor more than 6 percent zinc; UNS Alloy C83600, C92200 or
C93700 in accordance with ASTM B 61, B 62, B 505, or B 584, when not
specified.otherwise.
C. Dielectric materials for separation of dissimilar metals:
1. Neoprene, bituminous impregnated felt, heavy bituminous coatings,
nonmetallic separators or washers, or other materials.
D. Anchor bolts: As specified in Sub-Section 10.05120; minimum 0.5 inch diameter.
E. Non-shrink grout: As specified in Sub-Section 10.03600.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15050-8 8235610
pw:llCarollo/Document s7 Client/WAl Rent on/8235B10/Specifiicafions/10.15050.doc
2.02 BEARINGS
A. Type: Oil or grease lubricated, ball or roller antifriction type, of standard
manufacture.
iB. Oil lubricated bearings: Provide either pressure lubricating system or separate oil
reservoir splash type system:
1. Size oil lubrication systems to safely absorb heat energy generated in bearings
when equipment is operating under normal conditions and with the ambient
temperature 15 degree Fahrenheit above the maximum ambient temperature
specified elsewhere in this Sub-Section.
2. Provide an external oil cooler when required to satisfy the specified operating
conditions. Provide air cooled system if a water-cooling source is not indicated
on the Drawings. Equip oil cooler with a filler pipe and external level gauge.
C. Grease lubricated bearings, except those specified to be factory sealed: Fit with
easily accessible grease supply, flush, drain, and relief fittings.
1. Lubrication lines and fittings:
a. Lines: Minimum 1/4-inch diameter stainless steel tubing.
b. Multiple fitting assemblies: Mount fittings together in easily accessible
location.
c. Use standard hydraulic type grease supply fittings:
1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a) Alenite.
b) Zurk.
D. Ratings: Rated in accordance with ABMA 9 or ABMA 11 for Leo rating life of not less
than 50,000 hours:
1. Higher ratings, when specified in other Sub-Sections, supersede preceding
requirement.
2.03 WARNING SIGNS
A. Provide for equipment that starts automatically or remotely.
B. Material and size: Metal as specified in Sub-Section 10.10400.
C. Colors: Black lettering on yellow background.
D. Text: As specified in Sub-Section 10.10400.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Structural steel members: As specified in Sub-Section 10.05120.
B. Nameplates:
1. Engraved or stamped on Type 304 stainless steel and fastened to equipment
at factory in an accessible and visible location.
2. Indicate following information as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's name.
b. Equipment model number and serial number.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15050-9 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClientfWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.15050.doc
c. Maximum and Normal rotating speed.
d. Horsepower.
e. Rated capacity.
f. Service class per applicable standards.
3. Nameplates for pumps: Include:
a. Rated total dynamic head in feet of fluid.
b. Rated flow in gallons per minute.
c. Impeller, gear, screw, diaphragm,or piston size.
4. Gear reduction.units: Include:
a. AGMA Class of service.
b. Service factor.
c. Input and output speeds.
C. Bolt holes in equipment support frames: Do not exceed bolt diameter by more than
25 percent, up to limiting maximum diameter oversize of 1/4 inch.
D. Shop finishing:
1. Provide factory and field coating as specified in Sub-Section 10.09960A. if not
specified in Sub-Section 10.09960A, provide coating as follows:
a. Bases and support frames in contact with concrete or other material: Coat
contacting surfaces with minimum of 2 coats of zinc chromate primer
before installation or grouting.
b. Shop primer for steel and iron surfaces, unless specified otherwise:
1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a) Ameron, Amercoat 185 Universal Primer.
b) Cook, 391-N-167 Barrier Coat.
c) Kop-Coat, Pug Primer.
d) Tnemec, 37-77 Chem-Prime.
e) Valspar, 13-R-28 Chromox Primer.
c. Coat machined, polished, and nonferrous surfaces which are not to be
painted with rust preventive compounds:
1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a) Houghton, Rust Veto 344.
b) Rust-Oleum, R-9.
d. Coating for ferrous metal surfaces, except stainless steel: High solids
polyamine epoxy.
e. Finish painting of motors: Shop finish paint with manufacturer's standard
coating, unless otherwise specified in Sub-Section 10.09960A.
2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. As specified in Sub-Section 10.15958 for testing requirements and the individual
equipment Sub-Sections of the Specifications.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15050-10 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.15050.doc
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect all components for shipping damage, conformance to specifications, and
proper torques and tightness of fasteners.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Metal work embedded in concrete:
1. Accurately place and hold in correct position while concrete is being placed.
2. Clean surface of metal in contact with concrete immediately before concrete is
placed.
B. Concrete surfaces designated to receive non-shrink grout:
1. Heavy sandblast concrete surface in contact with non-shrink grout.
2. Clean concrete surfaces of sandblasting sand, grease, oil, dirt, and other
foreign , ;atei ial that may reduce bond to non-shrink grout.
3. Saturate concrete with water. Concrete shall be saturated surface damp at
time non-shrink grout is placed.
C. Field measurements:
1. Prior to fabrication of equipment, take measurements for installation of
equipment and verify dimensions indicated on the Drawings. Ensure
equipment and ancillary appurtenances fit within available space.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and
recommendations.
iB. Lubrication lines and fittings:
1. Lines from fittings to point of use: Support and protect.
2. Fittings:
a. Bring fittings to outside of equipment in manner such that they are readily
accessible from outside without necessity of removing covers, plates,
housings, or guards.
b. Mount fittings together wherever possible using factory-mounted multiple
fitting assemblies securely mounted, parallel with equipment lines, and
protected from damage.
c. Fittings for underwater bearings: Bring fittings above water surface and
mount on edge of structure above..
C. Grouting equipment bases and baseplates with non-shrink grout:
l 1. Grout with non-shrink grout as specified in Sub-Section 10.03600.
2. Comply with equipment manufacturer's installation instructions for grouting
spaces, and tolerances for level and alignments, both vertical and horizontal.
3. Grout after piping connections are complete and in alignment with no strain
transmitted to equipment.
4. Grout base when equipment is leveled and in alignment.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15050-11 8235610
pw://Caroliol Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.15050.doc
II
5. Place grout, filling voids under equipment bases and other supports including
recesses between anchor bolts and sleeves:
a. Extend grout to edge of equipment bases or baseplates and bevel at
45 degrees around units.
b. Grouts must be cut back to the lower edge of baseplates after reaching
initial set. Provide a 45-degree angle cut back.
c. Finish surfaces with slope that prevents ponding water within grouted
areas.
D. Forms and headboxes for non-shrink grouts or non-shrink epoxy grouts:
1. As specified in Sub-Section 10.03600.
E. Special techniques: Use applicable special tools and equipment, including precision
machinist levels, dial indicators, and gauges as required in equipment installations.
F. Tolerances:
1. Completed equipment installations: Comply with requirements for intended use
and specified vibration and noise tolerances.
G. Warning signs: Mount securely with stainless fasteners at equipment that can be
.started automatically or from remote locations.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test equipment as specified in Sub-Section 10.15958 and the individual equipment
Sub-Section of the Specifications.
B. Perform operational testing as required by Sub-Section 10.01756.
3.05 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE
A. Field checkout: Before field-testing and start-up, provide services of factory-trained
field service representative to certify the equipment has been installed, aligned, and
checked in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and the Specifications.
B. Testing: Provide services of factory trained representative to observe and advise the
CONTRACTOR during field quality control testing.
C. Training: When training is specified, provide services of factory-trained
representative to perform training as specified in Sub-Section 10.01756.
END OF SUB-SECTION
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15050-12 8235B10 t
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton1 8235B10/Specifications/10.15050.doc
SUB-SECTION 10.15052
BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Basic piping materials and methods.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
a. Sub-Section 10.09960A- Coatings.
b. Sub-Section 10.15061 - Pipe Supports.
c. Sub-Section 10.15062 - Preformed Channel Pipe Support System.
d. Sub-Section 10.15251 - Ductile Iron AWWA C151 Pipe.
e. Sub-Section 10.15265 - Plastic Piping and Tubing.
f. Sub-Section 10.15956 - Piping Systems Testing.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1. B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 Through 24.
2. B16.47 - Large Diameter Steel Flanges: NPS 26 Through NPS 60 Metric/Inch
Standard.
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A 193 - Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting
Materials for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special
Purpose Applications.
2. A 194 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for
High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both.
3. A 307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI
Tensile Strength.
4. F 37- Standard Test Methods for Sealability of Gasket Materials.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Buried pipe: Pipe that is buried in the soil, or cast in a concrete P i P e encasement
that is buried in the soil.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15052-1 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClientfWAIRenton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.15052.doc
B. Exposed pipe: Pipe that is located above ground, or pipe that is located inside a
structure, supported by a structure, or cast into a concrete structure.
C. Underground piping: Piping actually buried in soil or cast in concrete that is buried in
soil.
D. Underwater piping: Piping below tops of walls in basins or tanks containing water.
E. Wet wall: Wall with water on at least 1 side.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data:
1. Escutcheons.
2. Flange bolts.
3. Gaskets.
4. Link-type seals.
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Material: Chrome-plated steel plate.
B. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. . Dearborn Brass Company, Model Number 5358.
2. Keeney Manufacturing Company, Model Number 102 or Number 105.
2.02 LINK TYPE SEALS
A. Characteristics:
1: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking neoprene or synthetic
rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe Q
and wall opening. ■
2. Assemble links solely with stainless steel bolts and nuts to form a continuous
rubber belt around the pipe.
3. Provide a nylon polymer pressure plate with Type 316 stainless steel
hardware. Isolate pressure plate from contact with wall sleeve.
B. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Calpico, Incorporated.
2. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc., Link-Seal.
2.03 FLANGE BOLTS
A. All Piping:
1. Bolts and nuts shall be Type 316 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A
193, Grade B8M for bolts and in accordance with ASTM A 194, Grade 8M for
nuts.
2. Provide a washer for each nut. Washer shall be of the same material as the
nut.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15052-2 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.15052.doc
3. Nuts shall be Heavy hex-head, Type 2H.
4. Cut and finish flange bolts to project a maximum of 1/4 inch beyond outside
face of nut after assembly.
5. Tap holes for cap screws or stud bolts when used.
B. Lubricant for stainless steel bolts and nuts:
1. Chloride-free.
2. Manufacturers:One of the following or equal:
a. Huskey FG-1800.
2.04 GASKETS
i.
A. Gaskets for non-steam cleaned ductile iron and steel piping:
1. Suitable for pressures equal to and less than 150 pounds per square inch
gauge, temperatures equal to or less than 250 degrees Fahrenheit, and raw
sewage service.
2. Gasket material:
a. Neoprene elastomer with minimum Shore A hardness value of 70.
b. Reinforcement: Inserted 13-ounce nylon fabric cloth for pipes 20 inch or
larger.
c. Thickness: Minimum 3/32-inch thick for less than 10-inch pipe; minimum
1/8 inch thick for 10-inch and larger pipe.
3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Pipe less than 20 inches in diameter:
1) Garlock, Style 7797.
2) John Crane, similar product.
b. Pipe 20 inches in diameter and larger:
1) Garlock, Style 8798.
2) John Crane, similar product.
B. Gaskets for flanged joints in polyvinyl chloride and polyethylene piping:
1. Suitable for pressures equal to or less than 150 pounds per square inch
gauge, with low flange bolt loadings, temperatures equal and less than 120
degrees Fahrenheit, and polymer, chlorine, caustic solutions, and other
chemicals, except chemicals which liberate free fluorine including
fluorochemicals and gaseous fluorine.
2. Material: 0.125-inch thick Viton rubber.
3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Garlock.
b. John Crane, similar product.
C. Gaskets for flanged joints in ductile iron or steel water piping:
1. Suitable for hot or cold water, pressures equal to or less than 150 pounds per
square inch gauge, and temperatures equal to or less than 160 degrees
Fahrenheit.
2. Material:
a. Neoprene elastomer, compressed, with non-asbestos fiber reinforcement.
3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Garlock, Bluegard 3300.
b. John Crane, similar product.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15052-3 8235610
pw:l/Ca,ollol Documents/ClienttWA/Rentont8lllBl0/S,ecilcations/l0,1 loll.loc
D. Provide gaskets suitable for the specific fluids and pressure and temperature
conditions.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of existing conditions:
1. Locate and expose existing structures, piping, conduits, and other facilities and
obstructions that may affect construction of underground piping before starting
excavation for new underground piping and appurtenances.
2. Verify sizes, elevations, locations, and other relevant features of existing
facilities and obstructions. Determine conflicts for the construction of the new
underground piping and appurtenances.
3. Make piping location and grade adjustments to resolve conflicts between new
piping and existing facilities and obstructions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General`
1. Piping drawings:
a. Except in details, piping is indicated diagrammatically. Not every offset
and fitting, or structural difficulty that may be encountered has been
indicated on the Drawings. Sizes and locations are indicated on the
Drawings.
b. Perform minor modifications to piping alignment where necessary to avoid
structural, mechanical, or other type of obstructions that-cannot be
removed or changed.
1) Modifications are intended to be of minor scope, not involving a
change to the design concept or a change to the Contract Price or
Contract Times.
2. Piping alternatives:
a. Provide piping as specified in this Sub-Section, unless indicated on the
Drawings or specified otherwise.
b. Alternative pipe ratings: Piping with greater pressure rating than specified
may be substituted in lieu of specified piping without changes to the
Contract Price. Piping of different material may not be substituted in lieu of
specified piping.
c. Valves in piping sections: Capable of withstanding specified test
pressures for piping sections and fabricated with ends to fit piping.
d. For flanged joints, where 1 of the joining flanges is raised face type,
provide a matching raised face type flange for the other joining flange.
3. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, piping at pipe joints, fittings,
couplings, and equipment shall be installed without rotation, angular deflection,
vertical offset, or horizontal offset.
B. Wall and slab penetrations:
1. Provide sleeves for piping penetrations through aboveground masonry and
concrete walls, floors, ceilings, roofs, unless specified or otherwise indicated
on the Drawings.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15052-4 82351310
pw://Carollo/Doc uments/Cl ienL/WA/Renton[8235 B10/S pecifications/10.15052.doc
2. For piping 1 inch in nominal diameter and larger, provide sleeves with
minimum inside diameters of 1 inch plus outside diameter of piping. For piping
smaller than 1 inch in nominal diameter, provide sleeve of minimum twice the
outside diameter of piping.
a. Arrange sleeves and adjacent joints so piping can be pulled out of sleeves
and replaced without disturbing the structure.
b. Cut ends of sleeves flush with surfaces of concrete, masonry, or plaster.
c. Conceal ends of sleeves with escutcheons where piping runs through
floors, walls, or ceilings of finished spaces within buildings.
d. Seal spaces between pipes and sleeves with link-type seals when not
otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings.
3. Provide flexibility in piping connecting to structures to accommodate
movement due to soil settlement and earthquakes. Provide flexibility using
details indicated on the Drawings.
C. Exposed piping:
1. Install exposed piping in straight runs parallel to the axes of structures, unless
otherwise indicated on the Drawings:
a. Install piping runs plumb and level, unless otherwise indicated on the
Drawings. Slope plumbing drain piping with a minimum of 1!4 inch per foot
downward in the direction of flow.
2. Install exposed piping after installing equipment and after piping and fitting
locations have been determined.
3. Support piping: As specified in Sub-Sections 10.15061, and 10.15062:
a. Do not transfer pipe loads and strain to equipment.
4. In addition to the joints indicated on the Drawings, provide unions, flexible
couplings, flanged joints, flanged coupling adapters, and other types of joints
or means which are compatible with and suitable for the piping system, and
necessary to allow ready assembly and disassembly of the piping.
5. Assemble piping without distortion or stresses caused by misalignment:
a. Match and properly orient flanges, unions, flexible couplings, and other
connections.
b. Do not subject piping to bending or other undue stresses when fitting
piping. Do not correct defective orientation or alignment by distorting
flanged joints or subjecting flange bolts to bending or other undue
stresses.
c. Flange bolts, union halves, flexible connectors, and other connection
elements shall slip freely into place.
d. Alter piping assembly to fit, when proper fit is not obtained.
e. Install eccentric reducers or increasers with the top horizontal for pump
suction piping.
D. Buried piping:
1. Bury piping with minimum 3-foot cover without air traps, unless otherwise
indicated on the Drawings.
2. Where 2 similar services run parallel to each other, piping for such services
may be laid in the same trench. Lay piping with sufficient room for assembly
and disassembly of joints, for thrust blocks, for other structures, and to meet
separation requirements of public health authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Laying piping:
a. Lay piping in finished trenches free from water or debris. Begin at the
lowest point with bell ends up slope.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15052-5 82351310
pw://Carolloi Documents/ClientlWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.15052.doc
b. Place piping with top or bottom markings with markings in proper position.
c. Lay piping on an unyielding foundation with uniform bearing under the full
length of barrels.
d. Where joints require external grouting, banding, or pointing, provide space
under and immediately in front of the bell end of each section laid with
sufficient shape and size for grouting, banding, or pointing of joints.
e. At the end of each day's construction, plug open ends of piping
temporarily to prevent entrance of debris or animals.
E. Venting piping under pressure:
1. Lay piping under pressure flat or at a continuous slope without air traps, unless
otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
2. Install plug valves as air bleeder cocks at high points in piping. Provide 1-inch
plug valves for water lines, and 2-inch plug valves for sewage and sludge
lines, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
3. Provide additional pipe taps with plug cocks and riser pipes along piping as
required for venting during initial filling, disinfecting, and sampling.
4. Before piping is placed into service, close plug valves and install plugs. Protect
plugs and plug valves from corrosion in as specified in Sub-Section
10.09960A.
F. Restraining piping:
1. Restrain piping at valves and at fittings where piping changes direction,
changes sizes, and at ends:
a. When piping is underground, use concrete thrust block or mechanical
restraints.
b. When piping is aboveground or underwater, use mechanical or structural
restraints.
c. Determine thrust forces by multiplying the nominal cross sectional area of
the piping by design test pressure of the piping.
2. Provide restraints with ample size to withstand thrust forces resulting from test
pressures:
a. During testing, provide suitable temporary restraints where piping does
not require permanent restraints.
3. Place concrete thrust blocks against undisturbed soil. Place concrete so piping
joints, fittings, and other appurtenances are accessible for assembly and
disassembly.
4. Provide underground mechanical restraints where specified in the Piping
Schedule.
G. Connections to existing piping:
1. Expose existing piping to which connections are to be made with sufficient
time to permit, where necessary, field adjustments in line, grade, or fittings:
a. Protect domestic water/potable water supplies from contamination:
1) Make connections between domestic water supply and other water
systems in accordance with requirements of public health authorities.
2) Provide devices approved by OWNER of domestic water supply
system to prevent flow from other sources into the domestic supply
system.
2. Make connections to existing piping and valves after sections of new piping to
be connected have been tested and found satisfactory.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15052-6 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.15052.doc
3. Provide sleeves, flanges, nipples, couplings, adapters, and other fittings
needed to install or attach new fittings to existing piping and to make
connections to existing piping.
4. For flanged connections, provide stainless steel bolts with isolation bushings
and washers, and full-face flange gaskets.
H. Connections to in-service piping:
1. Shutdown in-service piping as specified in Sub-Section 10.01140:
a. Establish procedures and timing in a conference attended by
CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER, and OWNER of the in-service piping.
2. Where operation and maintenance of existing facilities require that a shutdown
be made during hours other than normal working hours, perform the related
work in coordination with the hours of actual shutdown.
3. Additional provisions regarding shutdown of existing facilities are specified in
Sub-Section 10.01140.
I. Connections between ferrous and nonferrous metals:
1. Connect ferrous and nonferrous metal piping, tubing, and fittings with dielectric
couplings especially designed for the prevention of chemical reactions
between dissimilar metals.
2. Nonferrous metals include aluminum, copper, and copper alloys.
J, Flanged connections between dissimilar metals such as ductile iron pipe and steel
pipe:
1. Provide stainless steel bolts with isolation bushings and washers, and full-face
flange gaskets.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Piping cleaning:
1. Upon completion of installation, clean piping interior of foreign matter and
debris. Perform special cleaning when required by the Contract Documents.
3.04 PIPING SCHEDULE
i
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15052-7 8235610
pw://Carollo/Doc umentslClientMV Renton/8235 B10/Specifications/10.15052.doc
i
i
i
i
i
i
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15052-8 8235610
pw://Carollo/DocumentsiClienYWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.15052.doc
w w
w a
S m m m d o
M
z° z0 z w w a �d °
V W Z
N N
C N N C a) �
J Z Z z Z Z
d
v
2 2 2 2
N O _rn _m
L w
ZT �
w Q Q CL Q
� LO Lf) Ln LO O O O
d N N N M CM O O
F r r
N
C
J J
LL U- d O N 4)
>O >O 06 --t -3 N N
06 LL LL w > > m O O
C V) U)
O
L!7 Ln LO r r r r r r
a) ' O
t0 CD l(7 U") LO LC) aD aO
LN LO LO IN LLc) LO LO LO LN
LU V r r r r r r r r
J O.N N O O O O O O O O C)
w
= N L>f
CO) fn
CD w o � �
V o o
a LL dY =
00 OD_ � U) L° Lq o a) CD
a y ~ � � U U N- U r U a s
RU) t CO CO V)
Li c. U) ~ Q Q
NU
w ^>^ ^>^ ^>^ LC 3 •^^� d_ _� d_ _� Q CL CL
Q cl)Il C) m U U
L o7 to
jp d y cn ch L L
m -0 m
O c c Q Q Q o 0) o a) Q Q
N ct) M M
Z N N Cn t7)
2 N
w+ o a) m o L
� L L � C
L N a) .
N
� ` � �� .
0 o Q = 0) 3 6 3 L a � a
V m cn v .� v .� O W m Lli m
a o
E cu ate ° � 1 ° MU-
rn
o � ° a CO w
(L Q m
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15052-9 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.15052.doc
c 0
0 w z
g �
S c c
�
z 2 . .
CD I I &
7 $
R E- -
\ .
& 0 �
c 7 7 (1) .
LL _0 _0
/ d d /
. 0 \
0 CL
\
/
k /2
uj
u co 0
D �� co)a / / k Q
LU _■ k
c $ 03.-
D f .
C ■ ■ _ = e
2 0 f m
L
w =
a § 222 / / f 2
� ° ■ � / J 2
ate ■ ( - w
. /
CL k k 0
m / / / \ �
0 2 I .
c / E _
C 2 ( / § 2
E § �k k 7 / k
2R � f / r_ . &
_ -0 g g y \ _ a) q
r ƒ c _0 # CD »_ � � � /
_ 0 a 2ooe = >
w / � / % : &� - $ \ � _
_ _ __ $ � 0) E m (D m e =
o £ S 7 = 27 @ � /g / . 22 $ 7Nd § 2 /-052
= o • \ om � oo � ae = keg ¥ _ = ; _ o
; x 2 / = te ° � 29) � a = S = 7a » - - 'C: 777 \
e � � e0 >% L0 0CL00 �0
° E 2 = o = = CU = U- 02 = » mo � EE� � U $�9 $ $.
= E = = oo = a � � -aN > �� _ - _
0 _ - � ° ) - - cy (D 0a = cgE � ® � � = - � ° � �
2 k E� � = � � r � m �oG ;= � 77 % % ' e $ » / Q
� o � mo - muo = 5o _ oE = = ��_ 7 = e � >
. 0 =» ± _ � a!2M M0000005Q) o050
§ 00 -jU) � EQCU � oOOI2 = =� � I � mmmm
■ g/ $I =
4) \ o =m IE a -,Co. ow Qol � e
u � > = � ®IIO = 4 � _ C � < um � au / > EQO@3
00 MM 04 / e < ol -j m < coO ± LL o002z = aCL � cl. 12fmmmm
(L 2 g &
September 1¢ 2010 - FINAL
10 15052-10 . 82851310
F�e� o_UU�A� ,ate bmeHmz,
. . .
SUB-SECTION 10.15061
PIPE SUPPORTS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Supports for pipe, fittings, valves, and appurtenances.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
' a. Sub-Section 10.01410 - Regulatory Requirements.
b. Sub-Section 10.05120 - Structural Steel
c. Sub-Section 10.09960A- Coatings.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A 380 - Standard Practice for Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of
Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems.
2. A 967 - Standard Specification for Chemical Passivation Treatments for
Stainless Steel Parts.
B. Manufacturer's Standardization Society (MSS):
1. SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, and Manufacture.
2. SP-69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings: Include schedule, indicating where supports will be installed, and
drawings of pipe support system components.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE SUPPORTS
A. General: All supports shall be constructed of Type 316 stainless steel materials.
B. Eye bolts:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15061-1 8235610
pw://Ca,ollo/Do,umenl,/Client/WA/Ren ton/1215Bl0/Specifications/10.15011.loc
1. Type 316 stainless steel, welded and rated equal to full load capacity of rod.
C. Welded eyebolt rod:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Nibco-Tolco, Figure 101. e
b. FM Stainless Fasteners.
D. Standard U-bolt: MSS SP-69, Type 24: )
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Nibco-Tolco, Figure 110.
b. Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3188. �I
c. FM Stainless Fasteners, Figure 37.
E. Brackets: MSS SP-69, Type 32 with back plate; rated for 1,500 pounds: �I
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. For stainless steel piping:
1) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 30M. �I
2) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3066.
3) FM Stainless Fasteners, Figure 98.
F. Riser clamps: MSS SP-69, Type 8: �)
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure 83373.
b. FM Stainless Fasteners, Figure 61.
G. Pipe clamps: MSS SP-69, Type 4:.
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Nibco-Tolco, Figure 4.
b. Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure 3140.
H. Adjustable offset pipe clamp:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Nibco-Tolco, Figure 4.
b. Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure 83149.
c. FM Stainless Fasteners, Figure 63.
I. Offset pipe clamp:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Nibco-Tolco, Figure 8.
b. Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure 3148.
J. Floor stand or stanchion saddles: MSS SP-69, Type 37. Provided with U=bolt hold
down yokes:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Nibco-Tolco, Figure 318.
b. FM Stainless Fasteners, Figure 59.
K. Welded beam attachment: MSS SP-69, Type 22:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Nibco-Tolco, Figure 304.
b. Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure.3083.
i'
September 10, 2010 -FINAL 10.15061-2 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235610/Specifications/10.15061.doc '
' L. Heavy pipe clamp: MSS SP-69, Type 4:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Nibco-Tolco, Figure 4H.
' M. Anchor bolts, concrete anchors, concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, and
sleeve anchors: As specified in Sub-Section 10.05120.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Pipe supports:
' 1. Stainless steel (Type 316):
a. Use in all locations.
b. Field welding and fabrication of supports is prohibited.
c. Shop-fabricated supports:
1) Finish requirements: Remove free iron, heat tint oxides, weld scale,
and other impurities, and obtain a passive finished surface.
2) At the shop, perform pickling and passivation on all surfaces inside
and out in accordance with ASTM A 380 or A 967.
a) Passivation treatments using citric acid are not allowed.
' 2. Plastic, aluminum, FRP, and other miscellaneous materials: Use where
specifically indicated on the Drawings.
B. Fasteners:
' 1. As specified in Sub-Section 10.05120.
' PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Properly support, suspend, or anchor exposed pipe, fittings, valves, and
appurtenances to prevent sagging, overstressing, or movement of piping; and to
prevent thrusts or loads on or against connected pumps, and other equipment.
B. Field verify support location, orientation, and configuration to eliminate interferences
prior to fabrication of supports.
C. Carefully determine locations of inserts. Anchor to formwork prior to placing
concrete.
' D. Use flush shells only where indicated on the Drawings.
' E. Do not use anchors relying on deformation of lead alloy.
F. Do not use powder-actuated fasteners for securing metallic conduit or steel pipe
larger than 1 inch to concrete, masonry, or wood.
G. Suspend pipe hangers from hanger rods and secure with double nuts.
' H. Install continuously threaded hanger rods only where indicated on the Drawings.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15061-3 8235610
pw:/Icar ollo/DocumentslclienWVA/Renton/8235B10ISpe cilcati'"'l01 5061.doc
I. Use adjustable ring hangers or adjustable clevis hangers, for 4 inch and smaller
diameter pipe.
J. Use adjustable clevis hangers for pipe larger than 4 inches in diameter.
K. Secure pipes with double nutted U-bolts or suspend pipes from hanger rods and e
hangers.
1. For all piping use stainless steel U-bolts.
L. Support spacing:
1. Support 2-inch and smaller piping on horizontal and vertical runs at maximum QI
5 feet on center, unless otherwise specified.
2. Support larger than 2-inch piping on horizontal and vertical runs at maximum
10 feet on center, unless otherwise specified. a
3. Support exposed polyvinyl chloride and other plastic pipes at maximum 5 feet
on center, regardless of size.
4. Support tubing, copper pipe and tubing, fiber-reinforced plastic pipe or duct,
and rubber hose and tubing at intervals close enough to prevent sagging 'I
greater than 1/4 inch between supports.
M. Install supports at: �I
1. Any change in direction.
2. Both sides of flexible pipe connections.
3. Base of risers. a�
4. Floor penetrations.
5. Connections to pumps, blowers, and other equipment.
6. Valves and appurtenances. �I
N. Securely anchor plastic pipe, valves, and headers to prevent movement during
operation of valves.
O. Anchor plastic pipe between expansion loops and direction changes to prevent axial
movement through anchors. �)
P. Provide elbows or tees supported from floors with base fittings where indicated on
the Drawings.
Q. Support base fittings with metal supports or when indicated on the Drawings support O)
on concrete piers.
R. Do not use chains, plumbers' straps, wire, or similar devices for permanently
suspending, supporting, or restraining pipes.
S. Support plumbing drainage and vents in accordance with plumbing code as
specified in Sub-Section 10.01410.
T. Supports, clamps, brackets, and portions of support system bearing against copper 4�
pipe: Copper plated, copper throughout, or isolated with neoprene or polyvinyl
chloride tape.
U. Where pipe is insulated, install over-sized supports and hangers. I�
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15061-4 8235B10
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.15061.doc
' V. Install riser clamps at floor penetrations and where indicated on the Drawings.
W. Coat support system components as specified in Sub-Section 10.09960A.
' END OF SUB-SECTION
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15061-5 82351310
pW.:l/Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10,15061.doc
a�
ai
a�
ei
s�
is
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15061-6 8235610
pw:HCarollo/Documents/ClientiWA/Rentonl8235B10/Specifications/10.15061.doc I�
'I
SUB-SECTION 10.15062
' PREFORMED CHANNEL PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEM
PART GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Preformed channel pipe support system consisting of
preformed channels, fittings, straps, and fasteners engineered to support piping.
B. Related Sections/Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sections/Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this
Section. This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided for
convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty
' of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 1-05— Control of Work.
' b. Sub-Section 10.01612 - Seismic Design Criteria.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC).
B. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI).
C. Manufacturer's Standardization Society (MSS):
1. SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials; Design, and Manufacture.
2. SP-69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design responsibility:
1. The manufacturer of the preformed channel pipe support system is
responsible for the design of the support system.
' 2. Prepare design calculations utilizing the design criteria included in these
Specifications.
3. Prepare detailed shop drawings illustrating the layout of the support system
and identifying the components of the support system.
B. Design criteria:
1. Include live, dead, and seismic loads associated with piping, valves, and
appurtenances. Consider the content of the pipes in load calculations.
2. Minimum gauge thickness: 12-gauge.
3. Allowable stress of channels:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15062-1 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235B10/Specificatlons/10.15062.doc
a. Steel channels: The lesser of 25,000 pounds per square inch, or
0.66 times yield stress of steel.
b. Stainless steel channels: 0.66 times the yield stress of the stainless steel
alloy.
4. Maximum deflection: 1/240 of span.
5. Allowable column loads: As recommended by manufacturer in published
instruction for column's unsupported height and "K" value for calculating
effective column length of not less than 1.0.
6. Future loads:
a. Support systems indicated on the Drawings may include spaces intended
to accommodate future pipes.
b. Assume such spaces are occupied by 6-inch diameter ductile iron pipes.
Only the number of pipes that would physically fit into the space need be
considered.
c. Include the weight of the pipe contents in determining future loads.
Assume pipe contents are water.
7. Seismic design criteria: As specified in Sub-Section 10.01612 as specified for al
mechanical equipment.
8. Spacing of supports: As required to comply with design requirements but not
more than 5 feet.
C. All supports: Use Type 316 stainless steel for support system components. u
1.04 SUBMITTALS �)
A. Submit as specified in Section 1-05, Control of Work.
B. Shop drawings: Include layout of support system including pipe loads, selected �I
channel size, fittings, and appurtenances.
C. Structural design calculations. o�
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design preformed channel pipe support system for loads in accordance with
applicable provisions of:
1. AISC Manual of Steel Construction. �!
2. AISI Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual.
B. Product standards:
1. Pipe support components: In accordance with MSS SP-69.
2. . Pipe support materials: In accordance with MSS SP-58.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS �t
A. Fabricate preformed channel pipe support system using, as a minimum, parts
specified below and meeting the requirements specified under Design Criteria.
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Unistrut, Series P1000 or P1001; P5500 or P5501.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15062-2 8235610
pw:H Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Rentonl 8235610/Specifications/10.15062.doc ��
1
b. Allied Su pp ort Systems, Power Strut Figure PS-200 or PS-200 00 2TS;
PS-150 or PS-150 2TS.
c. B-Line Systems, Inc., Channel Type B22 or 1322A; B12 or 1312A.
f2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Preformed channel concrete inserts: Minimum 12 inches long.
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Unistrut, Series P-3200.
b. Allied Support Systems, Figure 282.
c. B-Line Systems, Series 13321.
B. 90-degree angle fittings:
' 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Unistrut, P1026.
b. Allied Support Systems, Power Strut, P603.
' C. Pipe straps:
1. For pipes 8 inches in diameter and smaller: Use 2-piece universal strap with
1 slotted hex head screw and nUt.
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Unistrut, Series P1109 through P1126.
' 2) Allied Support Systems, PS1100.
3) B-Line Systems, Inc., Series 62000.
2. For stainless steel pipes, or where indicated on the Drawings: Use type of
strap required for the pipe sizes specified above, but use Type 316 stainless
steel materials.
D. Touch-up paint galvanized surfaces:
' 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Galvinox, Galvo-Weld.
E. Touch-up paint for painted surfaces: Same formulation as factory paint.
2.03 FABRICATION
tA. Do not galvanize or paint stainless steel components.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install preformed channel concrete inserts for vertical support, quantity based on
manufacturer's structural design calculations.
' B. Fasten preformed channel pipe supports to existing walls using Z-fittings and
concrete anchors as indicated on the Drawings.
' C. Fasten preformed channel pipe supports to preformed channel concrete inserts
embedded in ceiling using U-shaped fittings.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15062-3 82351310
pw:l/Carollo/Documents/Clier tMA/Renlon/8235110/l,ecMcalons/i 0,11111.1o,
D. Suspend threaded rods from concrete inserts embedded in ceiling. Support
preformed channel pipe supports with threaded rods.
E. Touchup cut or damaged galvanized surfaces. ,
F. Prevent contact between pipes and support components of dissimilar metals. Utilize
rubber coated, plastic coated, or vinyl coated components, stainless steel
components, or wrap pipe with PVC or polyethylene tape.
G. Install support as near as possible to concentrated loads.
H. Install support within 2 feet of horizontal and vertical changes in pipe alignment. '!
I. Adjust supports or install shims to obtain specified slope or elevation.
f
END OF SUB-SECTION
pi
Di
Of
QI
If
lr
1�
�t
II
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15062-4 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.15062.doc
I'
I
t
SUB-SECTION 10.15075
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART1 GENERAL
i1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Mechanical Identification including the following:
1. Equipment nameplates.
2. Pipe identification by color and legend.
3. Special items.
4. Underground warning tape.
5. Identification of equipment and components of systems with paint, brands,
tags, and signboards.
B. Related Sections/Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sections/Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this
Sub-Section. This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided for
convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty
' of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 1-05 - Control of Work.
b. Sub-Section 10.01770 - Closeout Procedures.
c. Sub-Section 10.09960A- Coatings.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1. A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 1-05.
B. Submit following:
1. Product data.
2. Samples.
3. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
' 4. Submit following as specified in Section 01770:
a. Operation and Maintenance Data.
b. Warranty.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15075-1 82351310
pw:l/Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.15075.doc
J
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATESI
A. Material and fabrication:
1. Stainless steel sheet engraved or stamped with text, holes drilled, or punch for a
fasteners.
B. Fasteners: .F
1. Number 4 or larger oval head stainless steel screws or drive pins.
C. Text:
1. Manufacturer's name, equipment model number and serial number, a
identification tag number; and when appropriate, drive speed, motor
horsepower with rated capacity, pump rated total dynamic head, and impeller al
size.
2.02 PIPE iDENTIFICA T ION
A. Manufacturers:
�I
1. One of the following or equal:
a. Seton, Opti Code Pipe Markers. 1
b. Lab Safety Supply.
c. Marking Services, Inc.
B. Materials:
III
1. Pipe markers: Self-adhesive vinyl, suitable for outdoor application from
-40 degrees to 180 degrees Fahrenheit; meet ASME A13.1 requirements. aC
a. Lettering: `
Nominal Pipe Diameter Lettering Size
Less than 1.5 1/2 inch QI
1.5 inches to 2 inches 3/4 inch
2.5 inches to 6 inches 1-1/4 inches
8 inches to 10 inches 2-1/2 inches
Over 10 inches 3-1/2 inches
b. Marker colors:
Service Lettering Background
Flammables, chemicals, toxics Black Yellow
Water, nontoxic solutions or low White Green
hazard liquids
Nonflammable or nontoxic gases White Blue
Fire quenching fluids (foam, fire White Red
water, CO2 Halon)
2. Coating: As_specified in Sub-Section 10.09960A.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15075-2 8235B10
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton1 8235Bl0/Specifications/I0.15075.doc ��
3. Pipe identification tags: Aluminum or stainless steel with stamped-in 1/4 inch
high identifying lettering.
4. Pipe identification tag chains: Aluminum or stainless steel.
5. Snap-on markers: Markers with 3/4 inch high letters for 3/4 to 4 inch pipe or
covering, or 5 inch high letters for 5 inch or larger pipe or cover, as
manufactured by one of following:
a. Brady Bradysnap-On B-915.
b. Seton Setmark.
2.03 SPECIAL ITEMS
A. In addition, special coating of following items will be required:
Item Color
Valve handwheels and levers Red
Hoist hooks and blocks Yellow and black stripes
Steel guard posts In accordance with standard details
B. Paint minimum 2 inches high numbers on or adjacent to accessible valves, pumps,
t flowmeters, and other items of equipment.which are indicated on the Drawings or in
Specifications by number.
2.04 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
A. Manufacturer:
1. One of the following or equal:
a. Seton Name Plate Company, Branford, CT.
B. Material:
1. Metallic detection tape; minimum 4 mil thick by 6 inches wide polyethylene film
with wording, "Caution"with name of service followed by words, "Line Buried
Below" repeated continuously along tape length, with alternate metallic and
color strips. Colors as follows:
a. Water: Blue.
b. Telephone: Orange.
c. Sewer: Green.
d. Gas and other services: Yellow.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify satisfactory conditions of substrate for applying identification.
B. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15075-3 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienUWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.15075.doc
it
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare and coat surfaces as specified in Sub-Section 10.09960A.
B. Prepare surface in accordance with product manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 PIPING IDENTIFICATION �I
A. Identify exposed piping, valves, and accessories, and piping in accessible chases
with lettering or tags designating service of each piping system with flow directional `
arrows and color code.
B. Color code:
1. Paint all piping with colors as selected by OWNER.
C. Lettering and flow direction arrows:
1. Stencil lettering on painted bands or use snap-on markers on pipe to identify
pipe. When stenciling, stencil 3/4 inch high letters on 3/4 through 4-inch pipe
or coverings, or 5-inch high letters on 5-inch and larger pipe or coverings.
2. Provide lettering and flow direction arrows near equipment served, adjacent to
valves, both sides of walls and floors where pipe passes through, at each
branch or tee, and at intervals of not more than 50 feet in straight runs of pipe. a�
D. Where scheduled, space 6-inch wide bands along stainless steel pipe at 10-foot
intervals and other pipe at 5-foot intervals.
E. Label chemical tank fill pipelines at locations which are visible from chemical fill
stations.
F. Metal tags:
1. Where outside diameter of pipe or pipe covering is 5/8 inch or smaller, provide
metal pipe identification tags instead of lettering.
2. Fasten pipe identification tags to pipe with chain.
3. Where tags are used, color code pipe as scheduled.
G. Underground warning tape:
1. Place warning tape in pipe trench, 12 inches above the pipe.
3.04 APPLICATION
A. Identify piping with legend markers, directional arrow markers, and number markers;
use self-adhesive arrow roll tape to secure ends of piping markers and indicate flow
direction.
B. Provide legend markers, directional arrow markers, and number markers where
piping passes through walls or floors, at piping intersections and at maximum
15 foot spacing on piping runs.
C. Provide piping marker letters and colors as scheduled.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15075-4 8235610
pw:#Carollo/Documentsl Client/WA/Remon/8235B10/Specifications/10.15075.doc
D. Place markers on piping so they are visible from operator's position in walkway or
working platform near piping. Locate markers along horizontal centerline of pipe,
unless better visibility is achieved elsewhere.
END OF SUB-SECTION
1 .
i
t
1
t
1
1
i .
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15075-5 82351310
pw:I/Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.15075.doc
�f
�I
I
III
VE
ii
ii
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15075-6 8235610
pw:UCarollo/Documents/Clientl WAl Remonl 8235B10/Specifications110.15075.doc
I
i
1
SUB-SECTION 10.15110
VALVES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: basic requirements for valves.
B. Related Section/Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sections/Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this
Sub-Section. This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided for
convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty
of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 1-05— Control of Work.
b. Sub-Section 10.09960A- Coatings.
c. Sub-Section 10.15251 - Ductile Iron AWWA C151 Pipe.
1.02 REFERENCES
1 A. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
1. C111/A21.11 - Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure
Pipe Fittings.
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
1 1. A 126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Casting for Valves, Flanges, and
Pipe Fittings.
2. A 167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-
Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
3. A 536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
C. NSF International (NSF):
1. 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.
D. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):
1. SP 7 - Brush-Off Blast Cleaning.
2. SP 10 - Near-White Blast Cleaning.
1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Pressure rating:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15110-1 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienMA/Renton/8235610/Specifications/10.15110.doc
i
1. Suitable for service under minimum working
g p essures of 150 pounds per
square inch gauge.
2. When a piping system is specified in the Piping Schedule to be tested at a
-pressure greater than 150 pounds per square inch gauge, provide valves for
that piping system with design working pressure which is sufficient to
withstand the test pressure. a
B. Valve to piping connections, unless otherwise indicated in the equipment Sub-
Sections or on the Drawings:
1. Valves 3 inch nominal size and larger: Flanged ends.
2. Valves less than 3 inch nominal size: Screwed ends.
3. Plastic valves in plastic piping:
a. Up to 2.5 inches: Provide solvent or heat welded unions. �!
b. 3 inches and above: Provide solvent or heat welded flanges.
1.04 SUBMITTALS '!
A. Submit as specified in Section 1-05. I
B. Product data: pC
1. Submit the following information for each valve:
a. Valve type, size, pressure rating, Cv factor. m
b. Coatings. u`
c. Manual valve actuators:
1) Information on valve actuator,including size, manufacturer, model
number. a`
d. Certified drawings with description of component parts, dimensions,
weights, and materials of construction.
e. Certifications of reference standard compliance:
1) Submit certification that the valves and coatings are suitable in
potable water applications in accordance with NSF 61.
f. Clearly mark submittal information to show specific items, materials, and
accessories or options being furnished.
C. Operation and maintenance data.
1. Furnish bound sets of installation, operation, and maintenance instructions for
each type of manual valve 4 inch in nominal size and larger, and all
non-manual valves. Include information on valve operators in operation and
maintenance instruction manual.
.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer qualifications:
1. Valves manufactured by manufacturers whose valves have had successful
operational experience in comparable service.
1.06 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect valves and protective coatings from damage during handling and
installation; repair coating where damaged.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15110-2 8235810
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClientfWA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.l5110.doc ��
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Stainless steel: In accordance with ASTM A 167, Type 316, or Type 304, UNS
Alloy S31600 or S30400.
B. Valve and operator bolts and nuts:
1. Fabricated of stainless steel for the following installation conditions:
t a. Submerged in sewage or water.
b. In an enclosed space above sewage or water.
c. In structures containing sewage or water, below top of walls.
d. At openings in concrete or metal decks.
2. Where dissimilar metals are being bolted, use stainless steel bolts with
isolation bushings and washers.
3. Underground bolts: Low-alloy steel in accordance with AWWA C111/A21.11.
C. Bronze and brass alloys: Use bronze and brass alloys with not more than 6 percent
zinc and not more than 2 percent aluminum in the manufacture of valve parts; UNS
Alloy C83600 or C92200 unless specified otherwise.
D. Valve bodies: Cast iron in accordance with ASTM A 126, Class 30 minimum or
ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 minimum unless
specified otherwise.
2.02 INTERIOR PROTECTIVE LINING
A. When specified in the particular valve specification, provide valves with type of
protective lining specified in the particular valve Specification.
B. Apply protective lining to interior, non-working surfaces, except stainless steel
surfaces.
C. Lining types:
1. Fusion bonded epoxy:
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) 3-M Company, ScotchKote 134; certified to NSF 61 for drinking water
use.
b. Clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 7 or SP 10, as
recommended by epoxy manufacturer.
c. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.
d. Lining thickness: 0.010 to 0.012 inches except that:
1) Lining thickness in grooves for gaskets: 0.005 inches.
2) Do not coat seat grooves in valves with bonded seat.
e. Quality control:
1) Lining thickness: Measured with a non-destructive magnetic type
thickness gauge.
2) Verify lining integrity with a wet sponge-testing unit operating at
approximately 60 volts, or as recommended by the lining
manufacturer.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15110-3 8235610
pw://Carollo/Document s/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specificabons/10.15110.doc
3) Consider tests successful when lining thickness meets specified
requirements and when no pinholes are found.
4) Correct defective,lining disclosed by unsuccessful tests, and repeat
test.
5) Repair pinholes with liquid epoxy recommended by manufacturer of
the epoxy used for lining.
2. High solids epoxy:
a. Product as specified in Sub-Section 10.09960A.
1) Certified in accordance with NSF 61 for drinking water use.
b. Clean surfaces to meet SP-7 or SP-10, or as recommended by coating
manufacturer.
c. Apply coating as specified in Sub-Section 10.09960A and coating
manufacturer's recommendations.
d. Quality control: After coating is cured, check coated surface for porosity
with a holiday detector set at 1,800 volts, or as recommended by coating
manufacturer.
1) Repair holidays and other irregularities and retest coating.
2) Repeat procedure until holidays and other irregularities are
corrected.
2.03 UNDERGROUND VALVES
A. Provide underground valves with flanged, mechanical, or other type of joint required �1
for the type of pipe to which the valve is to be connected.
B. Coating and wrapping: �!
1. After installation, encase valves in 2 layers of polyethylene wrap as specified `
for ductile iron piping in Sub-Section 10.15251.
a. Ascertain that polyethylene wrapping does not affect operation of valve.
2.04 VALVE BOXES
A. Provide cast-iron valve boxes at each buried valve to access valve and valve lli
operators.
B. Do not support boxes on valve, valve operator, or pipe.
C. Boxes:
1. 2-piece, fabricated of cast iron; provide cover, with asphalt varnish or enamel
protective coating.
2. Adjustable to grade, install centered around the upper portions of the valve
and valve operator.
D. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Tyler Pipe Industries, Inc.
2. Neenah Foundry Company.
2.05 VALVE OPERATORS I�
A. Valve operator"Open" direction: Open counterclockwise.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15110-4 8235B10
pw:H Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235610/Specifications/10.15110.doc ��
B. Provide valves located below operating level or deck with extensions for key
operation or floor stands and handwheels.
C. Provide manually operated valves located not more than 6 feet above the operating
level with tee handles, wrenches, or handwheels.
1. Make the valve operator more conveniently accessible by rolling valves,
located more than 5 feet but less than 6 feet above the operating level, toward
the operating side.
2. Secure tee handles and wrenches to the valve head or stem, except where a
handle or wrench so secured constitutes a hazard to personnel; in which case,
stow handle or wrench immediately adjacent to the valve on or in a suitable
hanger, bracket, or receptacle.
D. Fit valves located more than 6 feet above operating level with chain operated
handles or valve wheels.
1. Chains: Sufficient length to reach approximately 4 feet above the operating
level.
2. Where chains constitute a nuisance or hazard to operating personnel, provide
holdbacks or other means for keeping the chains out of the way.
E. Provide an operator shaft extension from valve or valve operator to finished grade
or deck level when buried valves, and other valves located below the operating deck
or level, are specified or indicated on the Drawings to be key operated; provide
2 inch square AWWA operating nut, and box and cover as specified, or a cover
where a box is not required.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Preparation prior to installation:
1. Install valves after the required submittal on installation has been accepted.
2. Determine after flanged valves and flanged check valves are selected, the
face-to-face dimensions of flanged valves and flanged check valves.
B. Fabricate piping to lengths taking into account the dimensions of flanged valves and
flanged check valves.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Provide incidental work and materials necessary for installation of valves including
flange gaskets, flange bolts and nuts, valve boxes and covers, concrete bases,
blocking, and protective coating.
B. Where needed, furnish and install additional valves for proper operation and
maintenance of equipment and plant facilities under the following circumstances:
1. Where such additional valves are required for operation and maintenance of
the particular equipment furnished by CONTRACTOR.
2. Where such additional valves are required as a result of a substitution or
change initiated by CONTRACTOR.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15110-5 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton1 8235B10/Specifications/10.15110.dGc
C. Install valves with their stems in vertical position above the pipe, except as follows:
1. Butterfly valves, gate valves aboveground, globe valves, ball valves, and angle
valves may be installed with their stems in the horizontal position.
2. Install buried plug valves with geared operators with their stems in a horizontal
position.
D. Install valves so that handles clear obstructions when the valves are operated from
fully open to fully closed.
E. Place top of•valve boxes flush with finished grade or as otherwise indicated on the
Drawings.
F. Valves with threaded connections:
1. Install valves by applying wrench on end of valve nearest the joint to prevent
distortion of the valve body.
2. Apply pipe joint compound or Teflon tape on external (male)threads to prevent
forcing compound into valve seat area.
G. Valves with flanged connections:
1. Align flanges and gasket carefully before tightening flange bolts.
2. When flanges are aligned, install bolts and hand tighten.
3. Tighten nuts opposite each other with equal tension before moving to next pair
of nuts. �{
H. Valves with soldered connections:
1. Do not overheat connection to prevent damage to resilient seats and metal
seat rings.
2. Position valves in full open position before starting soldering procedure.
3. Apply heat to piping rather than to valve body.
END OF SUB-SECTION
�f
�C
�C
�l
1[
Of
�I
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15110-6 8235B10
pw:HCarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Reriton/8235B10/Specificafions/10.15110.doc ��
1
i
SUB-SECTION 10.15114
CHECK VALVES
PART GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes:
1. Swing check valves.
2. Plastic ball check valves.
B. Related Sections/Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sections/Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this
Section/Sub-Section. This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided for
convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty
of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 1-05 - Control of Work.
b. Sub-Section 10.15110 -Valves.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
1. C508 - Standard for Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service 2 Inch
Through 24 Inch (50-mm Through 600-mm) NPS.
B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1. B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and
250.
C. ASTM International ASTM :
1. A 126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and
Pipe Fittings.
2. A 276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
3. B 582 - Standard Specification for Nickel-Chromium-Iron-Molybdenum-Copper
Alloy Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
4. B 584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General
Applications.
S eptember 10, 2010 -
FINAL. 10.15114-1 8235810
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client[WA/Rentonl 8235B10/Specifications/10.15114.doc
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design requirements:
1. Check valves: When not otherwise specified as indicated on the Drawings,
provide check valves suitable for service as follows:
a. In either horizontal or vertical position.
b. Under pressures equal and less than 150 pounds per square inch gauge.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following information as specified in Section 1-05 and Sub-Section
10.15110: nl
1. Product data. ll
2. Certificates:
a. General purpose AWWA check valves: Affidavit of compliance attesting
valves provided comply with all provisions in accordance with AWWA
C508.
3. Operation and maintenance data.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: �{
1. APCO, Swing-Check, Series 6000CLW.
B. Valve design:
1. Counter-weighted.
2. Rubber seated and drip tight.
3. Convertible for future mounting of cushioned cylinders. �f
4. All internals shall be replaceable in the field without removing the valve from
the pipeline.
5. Equipped with Honeywell Micro-Switch heavy-duty limit switch.
a. Rated for use in Class 1 Div. 2 location. Ill
b. NEMA 4X.
c. Normally open, normally closed, SPDT.
C. Materials:
1. Valve body and cover: Cast iron, ASTM A 126, Class B.
2. Disc and disc arm: Ductile iron.
3. Shaft: Stainless steel.. 11
4. Seat: Aluminum bronze.
5. Disc seat: Buna-N.
6. Seat pins and lock screws: Stainless steel.
2.02 PLASTIC BALL CHECK VALVES
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Chemtrol Division of Nibco.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15114-2 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienttWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.15114.doc ��
2. R. G. Sloane Company, Inc.
tB. Valves: Ball type:
1. Polyvinyl chloride.
2. Double union-type end connections.
3. Seals: Viton.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install valves as specified in Sub-Section 10.15110 and in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
3.02 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust cushioned swing check valves in the field by means of external adjustment
devices to minimize pressure surges.
B. Adjust weight on swing check valves to affect proper closing action on equipment
shutdown.
END OF SUB-SECTION
I
t
September 10, 2010 FINAL 10.15114-3 8235B10
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235Bl OlSpecifications/10.15114.doc
4
�i
ii
i�
September 10, 2010 -,FINAL 10.15114-4 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documerits/ClienYWA/Renton/8235810/Specifications/10.15114.doc
SUB-SECTION 10.15116
PLUG VALVES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes:
1. Non- lubricated plug valves.
B. Related Sections/Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sections/Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this
Section/Sub-Section. This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided for
' convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty
of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
with the Contract Documents.
4. Section 1-05 - Control of Work.
5. Sub-Section 10.09960A- Coatings.
6. Sub-Section 10.15110 -Valves.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A 126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and
Pipe Fittings.
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and
250.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings: Submit the following information as specified in Section 1-05 and
Sub-Section 10.15110:
1. Product data.
2. Operation and maintenance data.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Valve manufacturer shall demonstrate a minimum of five (5) years experience in the
manufacture of plug valves. When requested, the manufacturer shall provide test
I
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15116-1 8235610
pw:HCarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.15116.doc
i
certificates, dimensional drawings, parts list drawings, and operation and
maintenance manuals.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 NON-LUBRICATED PLUG VALVES
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: �f
1. DeZurik, "PEC".
B. Design:
1. Type: Non-lubricated eccentric type, in accordance with AWWA C517.
2. Plug face: Resilient material which operates satisfactorily at a temperature of
180 degrees Fahrenheit continuous and 215 degrees Fahrenheit intermittent.
3. Service: Sewage.
4. Compression washer: Provide flat compression washer made of Teflon, or of a
material having equal physical characteristics on valve stem between plug and
bonnet.
5. Stem seals: Provide stem seals serviceable without unbolting the valve bonnet
assembly.
6. Clearly mark valves to indicate their open and closed positions. ➢�
7. Provide valves with ends as required by piping details indicated on the
Drawings.
C. Materials:
1. Body and plug: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast-iron, with plug face of Buna N
material suitable for the intended service as specified under paragraph
"Design" above.
2. Body seats in valves 3 inch size and larger: Provide with overlay of not less
than 90 percent nickel and minimum thickness of 1/8 inch on surfaces
contacting the plug face.
3. Stem bearing and bottom bearing: Type 316 stainless steel.
4. Internal parts, except the body and plug: Type 316 stainless steel.
5. Exposed nuts, bolts, and washers: Zinc plated. Exception: Exposed nuts,
bolts, and washers for buried service: Stainless steel.
2.02 VALVE OPERATORS
A. Equip valves 4 inch nominal size and smaller with a lever operator.
2.03 COATING
A. Coat interior metal surfaces as specified in Sub-Section 10.15110. I
B. Coat exterior metal surfaces as specified in Sub-Section 10.09960A.
it
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15116-2 8235B10
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235810/Specifications/10.15116.doc
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install valves as specified in Sub-Section 10.15110 and the manufacturer's
f instructions.
B. Install valves so that axis or rotation is horizontal.
C. Install valves so that in the closed position the pressure in the pipeline applies a
seating head on the valves.
D. Install valves so that in the open position the plug is located in the to p half of the
valve body.
END OF SUB-SECTION
i
t
I
I
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15116-3 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.15116.doc
I
�l
�E
�I
oc
�r
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15116-4 8235610
pw:#Carollo/Doctiments/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.15116.doc
SUB-SECTION 10.15121
PIPE COUPLINGS
l -
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes:
1. Flexible couplings.
2. Restrained flange coupling adapters.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
�. 1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
a. Sub-Section 10.09960A- Coatings.
b. Sub-Section 10.15052 - Basic Piping Materials and Methods.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
B. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
1. C207 - Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 In.
Through 144 In. (100 mm through 3,600 mm).
C. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. A 536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
2. F 593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and
Studs.
D. NSF International (NSF).
1. 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings, detailing dimensions, and materials.
B. Piping layout drawings: Coordinate preparation of required piping layout drawings
such that coupling center sleeve sizes are clearly indicated on the Drawings.
C. Manufacturer's published installation instructions.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15121-1 82351310
pw:llcarollo/Documents/clientNVA/Renton/8235B1 o/Specifications/10.1512,.docx
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE COUPLINGS
A. Flexible couplings:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Dresser, Inc., Style 253.
b. Romac Industries, Inc., Style 501.
c. Smith-Blair, Inc., Series 441.
2. Materials:
a. Center rings: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A 536.
b. Follower rings: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A 536.
c. Bolts and hex nuts:
1) Type 316 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM F 593.
3. Coating and lining: Manufacturer's standard fusion bonded epoxy, NSF 61
certified.
4. Center sleeve dimensions: Provide center sleeves-with lengths in accordance
with following table:
Nominal Pipe Size Sleeve Length
3 inch and smaller Manufacturer's standard
4 inch through 8 inch 7 inches
B. Restrained flange coupling adapter: �I
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Romac Industries, Inc., Style RFCA.
2. Materials:
a. Flange and flanged body: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A 536.
b. Follower ring: Lug type restraint system.
1) Follower ring: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A 536.
2) Restraining lugs: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A 536.
a) Designed to contact the pipe and apply forces evenly.
3) Restraining bolts: ll�
a) Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A 536. l
b) Bolt heads shall be designed to twist off when the proper torque
has been applied.
c. Bolts and hex nuts:
1) Type 316 stainless steel bolts in accordance with ASTM F 593.
3. Flange design: Class D steel ring flange in accordance with-AWWA C207
compatible with ANSI Class 125 and 150 bolt circles.
4. Coating and lining: Manufacturer's standard fusion bonded epoxy, NSF 61
certified.
5. Angular deflection: Restrained flange coupling adapter must allow angular
deflection after assembly.
2.02 GASKETS FOR FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS AND FLANGED COUPLING ADAPTERS
A. Provide gasket materials for process piping applications as follows:
1. All Applications: Neoprene rubber.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15121-2 8235B10
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.15121.docx ��
2.03 EXTERIOR COATINGS FOR UNDERGROUND AND SUBMERGED APPLICATIONS
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Tapecoat Company, Inc., T.C. Mastic.
2. Kop-Coat Company, Inc., Bitumastic Number 50.
B. Thickness: Minimum 0.040 inch.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. In underground and underwater installations, coat the exterior of coupling with a
protective coating after installation.
B. Joints and flexible connections shall be installed centered with no angular deflection
unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
C. Flexible couplings and flange coupling adapters: Install with gap between pipe ends
in accordance with the following table unless a greater gap is indicated on the
Drawings. Maximum gap tolerance shall be within 1/8 inch.
1. Install flexible coupling with pipe gap located in middle of center sleeve.
2. Install flanged coupling adapter with end of plain end pipe in middle of flanged
coupling body.
Center Ring Length Gap Dimension and Tolerance
4 inch through 6 inch 3/8 inch
7 inch 5/8 inch
10 inch and greater 7/8 inch
D. Provide harnesses (tie-downs)for flexible couplings unless otherwise indicated on
the Drawings with a written note.
1. Design harnesses (tie-downs)for the test pressures as specified in the Piping
Schedule in Sub-Section 10.15052.
END OF SUB-SECTION
I
i
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15121-3 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Clien VWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.15121.docx
�1
a►.
o�
l�
I�
September 10' 2010 - FINAL 10.15121-4 8235610
pw:flCarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton1 8235B10/Specifications/10.15121.docx
SUB-SECTION 10.15251
DUCTILE IRON AWWA C151 PIPE
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Ductile iron pipe,joints, fittings, gaskets, and pipe linings and
coatings.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
a. Sub-Section 10.09960A- Coatings.
b. Sub-Section 10.15052 - Basic Piping Materials and Methods.
c. Sub-Section 10.15121 - Pipe Couplings.
!j 1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1. B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and
250.
B. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
1. C104 - Standard for Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings.
2. C105 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems.
3. C110 - Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings.
4. C111 - Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and
Fittings.
i,i 5. C115 - Flanged Ductile Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron Threaded
Flanges.
6. C150 - Standard for Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe.
7. C151 - Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast.
8. C153 - Standard for Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service.
9. C600 - Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances.
10. C606 - Standard for Grooved and Shouldered Joints.
C. American Welding Society (AWS):
1. D11.2 - Guide for Welding Iron Castings.
D. ASTM International(ASTM):
1. A 47 - Standard Specifications for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings.
September 10 2010 - FINAL 10.15251-1 8235610
pw:HCarollo/Documents/ClientANA/Renton/8235810/specifications/10.15251.docx
2. A 183 - Standard Specifications for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts.
3. A 536 - Standard Specifications for Ductile Iron Castings.
4. C 283 - Standard Test Methods for Resistance of Porcelain Enameled Utensils
to Boiling Acid.
5. D 792 - Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative
Density) of Plastics by Displacement.
E. Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association (DIPRA):
1. Thrust Restraint Design Manual.
F. NACE International (NACE):
1. SP0188 - Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of New Protective Coatings on
Conductive Substrates.
G. National Association of Pipe Fabricators, Inc. (NAPF):
1. 500-03 - Surface Preparation Standard for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings in �►
Exposed Locations Receiving Special External Coatings and/or Special
Internal Linings. �I
H. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):
1. PA-2 - Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness With Magnetic Gages.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION I
A. Thrust restraint system design:
1. Design restrained joint thrust restraint system.
2. Determine the length of pipe that must be restrained on each side of the focus
of a thrust load in accordance with the procedures and criteria established by
the DIPRA Thrust Restraint Design Manual as specified in Piping Schedule in
Sub-Section 10.15052 and the following additional criteria:
a. Design pressure: Test pressure.
b. Laying condition: Type 5 in accordance with AWWA C150.
c. Soil designation: Sand silt and coal fill per Preliminary Geotechnical
Evaluation (HWA Geosciences Inc. July 9, 2009). Revise as required per
geotechnical conditions at site.
d. Unit friction resistance: Based upon polyethylene encasement of pipe.
e. Safety factor: 1.5 (for thrust restraint calculations only).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data: Photographs, drawings, and descriptions of fittings, gaskets,
couplings, grooving of pipe and fittings, pipe linings, and coatings.
B. Shop drawings:
1. Detailed layout drawings showing alignment of pipes, location of valves,
fittings, and appurtenances, types of joints, connections to structures, and
thrust restraint system layouts.
2. Thrust restraint systems: Calculations and layout for restrained joint thrust
restraint systems.
C. Design calculations:
1. Calculations for thrust restraint system design.
2. Submit Coating Manufacturer's Technical Representative's reports.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15251-2 8235610
pw:#Carollo/Documents/ClientfWA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.15251.docx ��
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Block piping and associated fittings for shipment to prevent damage to coatings and
linings.
B. Carefully handle piping and associated fittings during loading, unloading, and
installation.
1. Do not drop piping material from cars or trucks.
2. Lower piping by mechanical means.
3. Do not drop or pound pipe to fit grade.
C. Protect gaskets and polyethylene encasement from long-term exposure to sunlight.
D. Store piping, fittings, and other accessories such that they do not accumulate and
hold rainwater, dirt, and debris.
4
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Ductile iron piping:
1. Typical type:
a. In accordance with AWWA C150 and AWWA C151.
b. Pressure class or special thickness class as indicated in the Piping
Schedule provided in Sub-Section 10.15052.
2. Type with screw-on flanges:
a. In accordance with AWWA C115 with minimum special thickness
Class 53 wall thickness as required for screw-on flanges.
b. Special thickness class as indicated in the Piping Schedule as specified in
Sub-Section 10.15052.
B. Joints:
1. Flanged joints:
a. Screw-on flanges: Comply with the diameter, thickness, drilling, and other
characteristics in accordance with ASME B16.1. In addition, comply with
the following requirements:
1) Ductile iron.
2) Long hub, threaded, and specially designed for ductile iron pipe.
3) After attaching to pipe, machine flange face to make pipe end and
flange even and perpendicular to the axis of the pipe.
b. Bolt holes on flanges: 2-holed and aligned at both ends of pipe.
c. Cap screw or stud bolt holes: Tapped.
d. Bolts and nuts: As specified in Sub-Section 10.15052.
e. Gaskets: Standard styrene butadiene copolymer (SBR) unless specified
otherwise in Sub-Section 10.15052.
2. Mechanical joints: In accordance with AWWA C111.
3. Push-on rubber gasket joints: In accordance with AWWA C111.
4. Integrally restrained push-on joints:
a. Application:
1) Where designation restrained push-on is specified in the Piping
Schedule provided in Sub-Section 10.15 052, supply a restrained
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15251-3 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specifiicauons/10.15251.docx
I
push-on joint piping system, which includes restrained push-on joints
where necessary based upon thrust calculations.
2) Standard push-on rubber gasket joints as specified above can be
used where thrust calculations demonstrate restraint is not required.
b. Design:
1) Restrained push-on joints of the configuration which utilizes a
gripping or friction force for restraint will not be acceptable.
2) Suitable for the following working pressures:
a) For 4 through 24-inch pipe: 350 pounds per square inch-gauge.
c. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) United States Pipe and Foundry Company, TR Flex.
2) Pacific States Cast Iron Pipe Company, Thrust Lock.
3) American Cast Iron Pipe Company, Flex Ring or Lok-Ring.
4) Griffin Pipe Products Co., Snap-Lok.
d. Limit buried joints to half the manufacturer's published allowable angular
joint deflection for purposes of pipeline alignment and elimination of
fittings.
C. Fittings:
1. Ductile iron in accordance with AWWA C110.
2. Joint type: Same as that of the associated piping as specified in Sub- �I
Section 10.15052.
3. Plain end-to-flanged joint connectors using setscrews are not acceptable.
D. Pipe linings and coatings:
1. Cement-mortar lining:
a. In accordance with AWWA C104, apply cement-mortar on clean bare
metal surfaces. Extend to faces of flanges, ends of spigots, and shoulders
of hubs.
b. Minimum lining thickness: Standard in accordance with.AWWA C104.
c. Type of cement: Type ll.
2. Asphaltic seal coat: I
a. Apply over cement mortar linings and to outside surface of pipes that will
not receive another coating. Apply in accordance with AWWA C151.
2.02 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT
A. 2 layers of linear low-density polyethylene (LLDPE) film, minimum thickness of
8 mils in accordance with AWWA C105, or
B. Single layer of high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene (HDCLPE)film, minimum
thickness of 4 mils in accordance with AWWA C105.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install ductile iron piping in accordance with AWWA C600, modified as
specified in Sub-Section 10.15052.
2. For underground piping, the trenching, backfill, and compaction: As indicated
on the Drawings.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15251-4 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton18235B10/Specifications/10.15251.docx
B. Polyethylene encasement:
' 1. Wrap all buried ductile iron pipe and fittings in 2 layers of loose polyethylene
wrap in accordance with AWWA C105.
2. Polyethylene encasement shall be continuous and terminated neatly at
connections to below grade equipment or structures.
3. At wall penetrations, extend encasement to the wall and neatly terminate.
4. At slab penetrations, extend encasement to 2 inches below the top of slab and
neatly terminate.
5. When rising vertically in unimproved areas, extend encasement 6 inches
above existing grade and neatly terminate.
6. Repair tears and make joints with 2 layers of plastic tape.
t7. All work shall be inspected prior to back-filling of pipe and associated items.
C. Joints:
1. Install types of joints as specified in the piping schedule provided in Sub-
Section 10.15052.
2. Mechanical joints are not acceptable in above ground applications.
3. Field closure for restrained push-on pipe:
a. Locate field closures in areas where thrust calculations demonstrate
restraint is not required.
D. Tapping ductile iron pipe:
1. Direct tapping of ductile iron pipe may be performed but is limited to the
following conditions:
a. Maximum allowable tap diameter by i e diameter and pressure class:
Pipe Size Pressure Class
(inches) 150 200 1 250 1 300 350
Maximum Allowable Direct Tap Size (inches)
3 - - - - 3/4
4 - - - - 3/4
6
8
12 1-1/4
14 - 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/2
16 1-1/2 2 2
18 - - 2 2 2
L20 - - 2 2 2
24 - 2 2 2 2
b. The maximum allowable tap diameter for pipelines greater than 24 inches
is 2 inches.
c. Two layers of 3-mil thread sealant are required to minimize the torque
required to effect a watertight connection.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15251-5 82351310
pw:l/Carollo/Documents/Cl ient/WA/Renton/8235 B 10/Specif cations110.15251.d ocx
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing ductile iron piping:
1. Test as specified in Sub-Section 10.15052.
2. Do not test sections longer than 1/2 mile in total pipe length.
B. Repair damaged cement mortar lining to match quality, thickness, and bonding of
original lining in accordance with AWWA C104.
1. When lining cannot be repaired or repairs are defective, replace defective
piping with undamaged piping.
END OF SUB-SECTION
i
i
�I
�I
�I
I�
6
der
I
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15251-6 8235B10
pw:HCarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235610/Specifications/10.15251.docx I'
' SUB-SECTION 10.15265
PLASTIC PIPING AND TUBING
PART GENERAL
' 1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Plastic pipe, tubing, and fittings.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
' binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
, Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
' a. Sub-Section 10.15052 - Basic Piping Materials and Methods.
b. Sub-Section 10.15956 - Piping Systems Testing.
' 1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. D 1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.
2. D 1785 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe,
' Schedules 40, 80 and 120.
3. D 2466 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe
Fittings, Schedule 40.
4. D 2467 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe
Fittings, Schedule 80.
5. D 2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(PVC) Plastic Piping Systems.
6. D 2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly
(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Pipe and Fittings.
7. D 3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
' Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
8. D 3212- Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes
Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals.
9. F 477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets)for Joining
Plastic Pipe.
10. F 645 - Standard Guide for Selection, Design and Installation of Thermoplastic
' Water-Pressure Piping Systems.
11. F 679 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter
Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15265-1 8235610
pw:/lcarollol Documen ts/cl ientmA/Remonl8235B10 1Specifications110.15265.doc
WI
1.03 ABBREVIATIONS
A. DR: Dimension ratio.
B. ID: Inside diameter of piping or tubing.
C. NPS: Nominal pipe size followed by the size designation.
D. NS: Nominal SIZE of piping or tubing.
E. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride. �)
F. SDR: Standard dimension ratio; the outside diameter divided by the pipe wall
thickness. UI
1.04 SUBMITTALS u
A. Product data: Describe materials, pipe, fittings, gaskets, and solvent cement. �I
B. Manufacturer's Published Installation Instructions.
C. Certificates: �)
1. Submit manufacturer's certificate attesting that plastic pipe, tubing, and fitting
types meet specified requirements:
a. PVC gravity sewer piping: In accordance with ASTM D 3034 or
ASTM F 679, as applicable.
2. Manufacturer's certification of date of manufacture of plastic pipe and tubing a�
for each lot delivered.
3. Copies of solvent cement manufacturer's report and certification in accordance
with ASTM D 2564 for PVC piping.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE oI
A. Plastic pipe in potable water applications: Provide pipe and tubing bearing NSF
seal.
B. Mark plastic pipe with nominal size, type, class, schedule, or pressure rating,
manufacturer and all markings required in accordance with ASTM and AWWA �I
standards.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect piping materials from sunlight, scoring, and distortion.
B. Do not allow surface temperatures on e i and fittings degrees
s to exceed 120 de
pP 9 9
Fahrenheit.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15265-2 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specfications/10.15265.doc
' PART PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Extruding and molding material: Virgin material containing no scrap, regrind, or
rework material except where permitted in the referenced standards.
B. Fittings: Same material as the pipe and of equal or greater pressure rating, except
that fittings used in drain, waste, and vent piping systems need not be pressure
rated.
C. Unions 2-1/2 inches and smaller: Socket end screwed unions.
' 2.02 PVC PIPING, SCHEDULE TYPE
A. Materials:
1. PVC Pipe: Designation PVC 1120 in accordance with ASTM D 1785 and
iappendices:
a. Pipe and fittings: Extruded from Type I, Grade 1, Class 12454-B material
in accordance with ASTM D 1784.
' b. PVC Pipe: Schedule 80 unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
2. Fittings:
a. Supplied by pipe manufacturer.
i b. Pressure fittings: In accordance with ASTM D 2466 or ASTM D 2467.
■ 3. Solvent cement: In accordance with ASTM D 2564.
2.03 PVC GRAVITY SEWER PIPING
A. Materials:
1. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) gravity sewer pipe and fittings: In accordance with
ASTM D 3034 for piping NPS 15 and smaller diameter:
a. Referenced standards apply as complemented and modified in this
Section.
b. Fittings: Supplied by the pipe manufacturer.
2. PVC compounds: Class Number 12454-C, in accordance with ASTM D 1784:
a. Stabilizers, antioxidants, lubricants, colorants, and other additives and
fillers: Not to exceed 10 parts by weight per 100 of PVC resin in the
compound.
3. Pipe NPS 15 and smaller diameter: Wall thickness SDR 26:
a. Joints: Push-on joints in accordance with ASTM D 3212.
4. Fittings, including wyes, tees, elbow caps, plug adapters, and manhole
waterstops: Same wall thickness as the pipe:
a. Fittings: Factory molded with joints and gaskets equal to those of the pipe.
5. Gasket: Neoprene in accordance with ASTM D 3212 or ASTM F 477:
a. Keep rubber gasket in place during pipe joining.
6. Gasket for connection to manhole: Stainless steel clamp with gasket or similar
device to seal the penetration.
2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
1 A. PVC piping, Schedule Type:
_1. Mark pipe and fittings in accordance with ASTM D 1785.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15265-3 8235B10
pw:llCarollo/Documents/ClienYVVA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.15265.doc
�1
B. PVC gravity sewer piping:
1. Mark pipe and fittings in accordance with ASTM D 3034. Also mark the
production control code on pipe and fittings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Where not otherwise specified, install piping in accordance with ASTM F 645,
or manufacturer's published instructions for installation of piping, as applicable
to the particular type of piping.
2. Provide molded transition fittings for transitions from plastic to metal or
IPS pipe. Do not thread plastic pipe. 1
3. Locate unions where indicated on the Drawings, and elsewhere where
required for adequate access and assembly of the piping system.
4. Provide serrated nipples for transition from plastic pipe to rubber hose.
B. Installation of PVC piping, Schedule Type:
1. Solvent weld joints in accordance with ASTM D 2855: a�
2. Install piping in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.
C. Installation of PVC gravity sewer piping:
I
1. Install piping in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions, as
modified and complemented in this Section.
2. Install pipe and fittings not later than 4 months after their manufacture. Q�
3. Provide for contraction and expansion at joints with a gasket ring.
4. Provide plugs or caps for stubs and branch pipes left unconnected to laterals.
5. Lubricate and assemble joints in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's
published instructions.
6. Make connections to manholes with a manhole gasket that prevents infiltration
and exfiltration through the penetrations:
a. Provide opening for connection large enough to allow subsequent
grouting around the manhole gasket.
b. Grout around the manhole gasket and seal the opening.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Mandrel tests for PVC gravity sewer:
1. Perform initial mandrel test:
a. After cleaning and completion of other tests.
b. After placement and compaction of backfill. ID
c. Before construction of pavement or surfacing.
d. Not sooner than 30 days after pipe installation.
e. Not later than 60 days after installation. �D
2. Utilize.a 9 rod mandrel with minimum length equal to NPS and diameter as
follows:
Nominal Pipe Size (NPS) Mandrel Diameter, inches
8 7.37
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15265-4 8235B10
pw:/lCarollo/Documents IClientANA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specificationsll0.15265.doc
3. Test procedure: Pull the mandrel through the line under test by 1 person, by
hand, with reasonable effort, without the aid of mechanical equipment.
4. Failing test: Where the mandrel test is not successful, remove and replace the
' section of piping with the obstruction; test the piping again, including visible
leaks test, pressure test with maximum leakage allowance, mandrel tests, and
other specified tests:
a. Correction of excessive deflection or obstructions by methods other than
removal of the affected piping and replacement of the removed piping with
new piping will not be accepted.
END OF SUB-
SECTION
1
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15265-5 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienWJA/Rentonl 8235B10/Specifications/10.15265.doc
Il
as
a�
ai
a�
1!
Il
1!
. 11
01
al
al
al
�i
II
II
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15265-6 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienttWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.15265.doc �I
i
SUB-SECTION 10.15281
SEAMLESS ASTM B 88 COPPER WATER TUBE
PART GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Seamless copper water tube.
B. Related sub-sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided.for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
a. Sub-Section 10.15061 - Pipe Supports.
b. Sub-Section 10.15062 - Preformed Channel Pipe Support System.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. B 32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal.
2. B 88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube.
' 3. B 813 - Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of
Copper and Copper Alloy Tube.
4. B 828 - Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper
and Copper Alloy Tube and Fitting.
B. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO):
1 1. IS 3 - Installation Standard for Copper Plumbing Tube, Pipe and Fittings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Seamless copper water pp a er tube:
1. Type: ASTM B 88:
a. Exposed copper piping or tubing: Type L hard-drawn, rigid.
b. Copper tubing buried in the ground or in plastic conduit: Type K
soft-annealed.
2. Fittings: Manufacturers: Solder type forged, or wrought copper. One of the
' following or equal:
a. Hoke, Gyrolok.
b. Crawford Fitting Company, Swagelok.
September 10 2010 - FINAL -
p 10.15281 1 . 8235610
pw://CarollolDocumentslCl ient/WA/Re nton18235 B10/Spedlcauonsl10.15281.dou
X91
c. Parker.
3. Solder: ASTM B 32, Alloy Grade Sb5.
4. Flux: ASTM B 813.
5. Dielectric insulating unions or fittings: Manufacturers: One of the following or
equal:
a. Patrol Valve Company.
b. Mueller Company.
6. Special thread to tube adapters: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Crawford Fitting Company, Swagelok.
b: Hoke, Gyrolok.
C. Parker.
�f
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION a�
A. General:
1. Support copper piping and tubing as specified in Sub-Sections 10.15061 and �f
10.15062.
2. Clean copper lines with high-pressure air after first disconnecting piping at
instruments, filters, pressure reducers, valve operators, and other special
devices.
3. Install copper pipe in accordance with IAPMO IS 3.
B. Installation of copper piping:
1. Connect copper pipe connected to ferrous pipe or valves, or other non-copper
items, by means of dielectric insulating unions or fittings.
2. Where connections are made to meters or other devices having iron pipe size
threaded fittings, provide special thread to tube adapters.
C. Installation of copper tubing:
1. Install copper tubing in accordance with ASTM B 828 and IAPMO IS 3.
2. Install copper tubing in straight runs, supported at intervals close enough to a{
avoid sagging.
3. Make cuts square with a tubing cutter or with a 32-tooth hacksaw.
a. Provide a sizing tool to correct distortions.
4. Ream the inside of the tubing and remove burrs from the outside, holding the
end of the tubing downward and preventing chips and fillings from entering the
tubing.
5. Perform flaring with a flare block and yoke type screw feed flaring tool:
a. After removing the tubing from the flare block, inspect both surfaces of the `
flare for splits, cracks, or other imperfections.
b. Where there are imperfections, cut off the imperfect flare, and prepare a
new flare.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL �!
A. Testing: Test copper lines in the same manner as the piping system to which they `
connect.
END OF SECTION
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15281-2 8235B10
pw:HCarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specfications/10.15281.docx
SUB-SECTION 10.15956
PIPING SYSTEMS TESTING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Test requirements for piping systems.
B. Related Sections/Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding s if called for b all.
g Y
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sections/Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this
Sections/Sub-Section. This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided
for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the
duty of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies
accurately with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 1-05 - Control of Work.
b. Sub-Section 10.01410 - Regulatory Requirements.
c. Sub-Section 10.01500 -Temporary Facilities and Controls.
' d. Sub-Section 10.15052 - Basic Piping Materials and Methods.
1.02 REFERENCES
' A. National Fuel Gas Code (NFGC).
1 B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1. B31.3 - Process Piping.
' C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL).
1.03 TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. General requirements:
1. Testing requirements are stipulated in Laws and Regulations; are included in
the Piping Schedule in Sub-Section 10.15052; are specified in the
specifications covering the various types of piping; and are specified in this
Sub-Section.
2. Requirements in Laws and Regulations supersede other requirements of
Contract Documents, except where requirements of Contract Documents are
more stringent, including higher test pressures, longer test times, and lower
leakage allowances.
' 3. Test plumbing piping in accordance with Laws and Regulations, the plumbing
code, as specified in Sub-Section 10.01410, and UL requirements.
September 10 2010 - FINAL 10.1 -
5956 1
P 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/Clientl WA/Renton/8235B10/Specificabons/10.15956.doc
I
4. When testing with water, the specified test pressure is considered to be the
pressure at the lowest point of the piping section under test.
a. Lower test pressure as necessary (based on elevation).if testing is
performed at higher point of the pipe section. ai
B. Furnish necessary personnel, materials, and equipment, including bulkheads,
restraints, anchors, temporary connections, pumps, water, pressure gauges, and
other means and facilities required to perform tests.
C. Water for testing, cleaning, and disinfecting:
1. Water for testing, cleaning, and disinfecting will be provided as specified in
Sub-Section 10.01500.
D. Pipes to be tested: Test only those portions of pipes that have been installed as part
of this Contract. Test new pipe sections prior to making final connections to existing
piping. Furnish and install test plugs, bulkheads, and restraints required to isolate
new pipe sections. Do not use existing valves as test plug or bulkhead. �I
E. Unsuccessful tests: `
1. Where tests are not successful, correct defects or remove defective piping and al
appurtenances and install piping and appurtenances that comply with the
specified requirements.
2. Repeat testing until tests are successful.
F. Test completion: Drain and leave piping clean after successful testing.
G. Test water disposal: Test water may be disposed of by discharging into an a�
operating lift station wet well or at a manhole upstream'of the lift station wet well in
which a vactor truck will be required to remove the disposed water.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit as specified in Section 1-05.
B. Schedule and notification of tests:
1. Submit a list of scheduled piping tests by noon of the working day preceding
the date of the scheduled tests. 0�
2. Notification of readiness to test: Immediately before testing, notify ENGINEER
in writing of readiness, not just intention, to test piping.
3. Have personnel, materials, and equipment specified in place before submitting
notification of readiness.
1.05 SEQUENCE �!
A. Clean piping before pressure or leak tests. `
B. Test gravity piping underground, including sanitary sewers, for visible leaks before
backfilling and compacting.
C. Underground pressure piping may be tested before or after backfilling when not
indicated or specified otherwise.
�I
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15956-2 8235810
pw:gCarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.15956.doc
I
D. Backfill and compact trench, or provide blocking that prevents pipe movement
before testing underground piping with a maximum leakage allowance.
E. Test underground piping before encasing piping in concrete or covering piping with
slab, structure, or permanent improvement.
fPART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 TESTING ALIGNMENT, GRADE, AND DEFLECTION
A. Alignment and grade:
1. Visually inspect the interior of gravity piping with artificial light, reflected light,
or laser beam.
2. Consider inspection complete when no broken or collapsed piping, no open or
poorly made joints, no grade changes that affect the piping capacity, or no
other defects are observed.
B. Deflection test:
1. Pull a mandrel through the clean piping section under test.
2. Perform the test not sooner than 30 days after installation and not later than
60 days after installation.
3. Use a 9-rod mandrel with a contact length of not less than the nominal
diameter of the pipe within 1 percent plus or minus.
4. Consider test complete when the mandrel can be pulled through the piping
with reasonable effort by 1 person, without the aid of mechanical equipment.
3.02 TESTING GRAVITY FLOW PIPING
A. Test gravity flow piping indicated with "GR" in the Piping Schedule, as follows:
1. Unless specified otherwise, subject gravity flow piping to the following tests:
a. Alignment and grade.
b. For plastic piping test for deflection.
c. Visible leaks and pressure with maximum leakage allowance, except for
storm drains and culverts.
2. Inspect piping for visible leaks before backfilling.
3. Provide temporary restraints when needed to prevent movement of piping.
4. Pressure test piping with maximum leakage allowance after backfilling.
5. With the lower end plugged, fill piping slowly with water while allowing air to
escape from high points. Keep piping full under a slight head for the water at
least 24 hours:
a. Examine piping for visible leaks. Consider examination complete when no
visible leaks are observed.
b. Maintain piping with water, or allow a new water absorption period of
24 hours for the performance of the pressure test with maximum leakage
allowance.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15956-3 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specificafons/10.15956.doc
!�1
c. After successful completion of the test for visible leaks and after the piping a`
has been restrained and backfilled, subject piping to the test pressure for
minimum of 4 hours while accurately measuring the volume of water
added to maintain the test pressure:
1) Consider the test complete when leakage is equal to or less than the
following maximum leakage allowances:
a) For concrete piping with rubber gasket joints: 80 gallons per day 0�
per inch of diameter per mile of piping under test:
(1) Advise manufacturer of concrete piping with rubber gasket
joints of more stringent than normal maximum leakage
allowance.
b) For vitrified clay and other piping: 500 gallons per day per inch
of diameter per mile of piping under test. O�
3.03 TESTING HIGH-HEAD PRESSURE PIPING
A. Test piping for which the specified test pressure in the Piping Schedule is
20 pounds per square inch gauge or greater, by the high head pressure test
method, indicated "HH" in the Piping Schedule.
B. General: a�
1. Test connections, hydrants, valves, blowoffs, and closure pieces with the
piping.
2. Do not use installed valves for shutoff when the specified test pressure
exceeds the valve's maximum allowable seat differential pressure. Provide
blinds or other means to isolate test sections.
3. Do not include valves, equipment, or piping specialties in test sections if test
pressure exceeds the valve, equipment, or piping specialty safe test pressure
allowed by the item's manufacturer.
4. During the performance of the tests, test pressure shall not vary more than
plus or minus 5 pounds per square inch gauge with respect to the specified
test pressure.
5. Select the limits of testing to sections of piping. Select sections that have the a�
same piping material and test pressure.
6. When test results indicate failure of selected sections, limit tests to piping:
a. Between valves.
b. Between a valve and the end of the piping.
c. Less than 500 feet long.
7. Test piping for minimum 2 hours for visible leaks test and minimum 2 hours for �!
the pressure test with maximum leakage allowance.
C. Testing procedures:
1. Fill piping section under test slowly with water while venting air: 8i
a. Use potable water for all potable waterlines and where noted on the
Piping Schedule.
2. Before pressurizing for the tests, retain water in piping under slight pressure
for a water absorption period of minimum 24 hours.
3. Raise pressure to the specified test pressure and inspect piping visually for
leaks: Qt
a. Consider visible leakage testing complete when no visible leaks are f
observed.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15956-4 82351310
pw:l/Carollo/Documents/ClienYWAIRen ton/8235610/Specifications/10.15956.doc Q�
D. Pressure test with maximum leakage allowance:
1. Leakage allowance is zero for piping systems using flanged, National Pipe
Thread threaded and welded joints.
2. Pressure test piping after completion of visible leaks test.
3. For piping systems using joint designs other than flanged, threaded, or welded
joints, accurately measure the makeup water necessary to maintain the
pressure in the piping section under test during the pressure test period:
a. Consider the pressure test to be complete when makeup water added is
less than the allowable leakage and no damage to piping and
appurtenances has occurred.
t b. Successful completion of the pressure test with maximum leakage
allowance shall have been achieved when the observed leakage during
the test period is equal or less than the allowable leakage and no damage
to piping and appurtenances has occurred.
c. When leakage is allowed, calculate the allowable leakage by the following
formula:
L = SxDxP'/2x133,200"'
' wherein the terms shall mean:
L =Allowable leakage in gallons per hour.
S = Length of the test section in feet.
D = Nominal diameter of the piping in inches.
1 P = Average observed test pressure in pounds per square inches gauge,
at the lowest point of the test section, corrected for elevation of the
pressure gauge.
x = The multiplication symbol.
1 END OF SUB-SECTION
1
1
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15956-5 8235610
pw:HCarollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235 B10/Specifications/10.15956.doc
a►
a�
of
If
a�
aI
OI
If
of
al
ai
1i
si
Di
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15956-6 8235610
pw:/lCarollolDocumentsiClienWVAl Renton1 8235B10/Specificabons/10.15956.doc '�
SUB-SECTION 10.15958
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT TESTING
PART1 GENERAL
t1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes: Testing of mechanical equipment and systems.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
a. Sub-Section 10.01756 -Testing, Training, and Facility Start-Up.
b. Sub-Section 10.15956 - Piping Systems Testing.
c. Sub-Section 10.16222 - Low Voltage Motors up to 500 Horsepower.
d. Sub-Section 10.16950 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests.
e. Sub-Section 10.17950 -Testing, Calibration, and Commissioning.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. SI A Specification for Sound Level Meters.
jB. Hydraulic Institute (HI).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule of facto tests and field tests as specified in Sub-Section factory p ct on 10.01756 and
this Sub-Section.
B. Test instrumentation calibration data.
C. Start-up plan as specified in Sub-Section 10.01756.
D. Test plan specified in this Sub-Section.
E. Test result reports.
September 10, 2010 -.FINAL 10.15958-1 8235610
pw:l/Carollo/Documents/ClientN JNRenton/8235B10/Specificabons/I0.15958.doc
X11
PART 2 PRODUCTS k
Not Used. a{
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING AND REPORTING
A. Scheduling and notification:
1. Witnessed source quality control tests: Schedule test date and notify
ENGINEER at least 30 days prior to start of test.
.2. Field quality control tests: Schedule test date and notify ENGINEER at least
7 days prior to start of test.
B. Testing levels: 'C
1. Test equipment based on test levels specified in the equipment Sub-Section of
this Project. ai
2. Requirements for Test Levels 1 to 4 are defined below.
3. Test levels apply for both Source (Factory) Quality Control Tests and Field
Quality Control Tests as specified in the equipment Sub-Sections of this
Project.
4. If testing is not specified in the equipment Sub-Section, provide Level 1
testing.
5. Requirements of Sub-Section 10.01756 apply to Test Levels. 1�
C. Witnessing: Source Quality Control Tests not witnessed unless specified otherwise
in the equipment Sub-Section or Sub-Section 10.01756; Field Quality Control Tests a`
shall be witnessed.
D. Instrumentation: Provide necessary test instrumentation which has been calibrated
within 1 year from date of test to recognized test standards traceable to the National
Institute of Standards and Technology, Washington, D.C. or approved source.
Properly calibrated field instrumentation permanently installed as a part of the Work
may be utilized for Field Quality Control Tests.
E. Temporary facilities and labor: Provide necessary fluids, utilities, temporary piping,
temporary supports, temporary access platforms or access means and other
temporary facilities and labor necessary to safely operate the equipment and
accomplish the specified testing. With OWNER's permission, some utilities may be
provided by fully tested permanently installed utilities that are part of the Work. O�
F. Test fluids:
1. Factory tests: Use water or air as appropriate at ambient conditions unless
specified otherwise in the equipment Sub-Section. `
2. Field tests: Use water at ambient conditions unless specified otherwise in the
equipment Sub-Section.
G. Pressure testing: Hydrostatically pressure test pressure containing parts in the
factory at the appropriate standard or code required level above the equipment
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15958-2 8235610
pw:gCarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.15958.doc ��
component specified design pressure or operating pressure, whichever is higher.
Submit pressure test reports before shipping.
H. Test measurement and result accuracy:
1. Use test instruments with accuracies as recommended in the appropriate
referenced standards. When no accuracy is recommended in the referenced
standard, use 1 percent or better accuracy test instruments. Improved (lower
error tolerance) accuracies specified elsewhere prevail over this general
requirement.
2. Do not adjust results of tests for instrumentation accuracy. Measured values
and values directly calculated from measured values shall be the basis for
comparing actual equipment performance to specified requirements.
I. Field testing:
1. Submit test plan as specified in Sub-Section 10.01756 and this Sub-Section.
Indicate test start time and duration, equipment to be tested, other equipment
involved or required; temporary facilities required, number and skill or trade of
' personnel involved; safety issues and planned safety contingencies;
anticipated effect on OWNER's existing equipment and other information
relevant to the test. Provide locations of all instruments to be used for testing..
Provide calibration records for all instrumentation.
2. Perform general start-up and testing procedures as specified in Sub-Section
10.01756.
3. Prior to testing, verify equipment protective devices and safety devices have
been installed, calibrated, and tested.
J. Report s: Submit reports for source and field-testing. Submit Source Quality Control
Test result reports before shipping equipment to the field. Report features:
1. Report results in a bound document in generally accepted engineering format
with title page, written summary of results compared to specified requirements,
and appropriate curves or plots of significant variables in English units.
2. Include appendix with a copy of raw, unmodified test data sheets indicating
test value, date and time of reading, and initials of person taking the data.
3. Include appendix with sample calculations for adjustments to raw test data and
for calculated results.
4. Include appendix with the make, model, and last calibration date of
instrumentation used for test measurements.
5. Include in body of report a drawing or sketch of the test system layout showing
location and orientation of the test instruments relative to the tested equipment
features.
3.02 EQUIPMENT TESTING, GENERAL
A. Tests for pumps, all levels of testing:
1. Test in accordance with applicable HI Standards in addition to the
requirements in this and other Sub-Sections.
2. Test tolerances: In accordance with appropriate HI Standards, except the
following modified tolerances apply:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15958-3 8235610
1 pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienttWAIRenton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.15958.doc
�1
j
lll4
a. From 0 to plus 5 percent of head at the specified flows rated design point
flow.
b. From 0 to plus 5 percent of flow at the rated design point head.
c. No negative tolerance for the efficiency at the specified flows rated design
point.
d. No positive tolerance for vibration limits. Vibration limits and test methods
in HI Standards do not apply; use limits and methods specified in this or
other Sub-Sections of the Specifications.
B. Tests for drivers: Test motors as specified in Sub-Section 10.16222. Test other
drivers as specified in the driver equipment Sub-Section.
3.03 REQUIREMENTS FOR VIBRATION TESTING
A. Definitions:
1. Peak-to-peak displacement: The root mean squared average of the peak-to-
peak displacement multiplied by the square root of 2.
2. Peak velocity: The root mean squared average of the peak velocity multiplied a�
by the square root of 2.
3. Peak acceleration: The root mean squared average of the peak acceleration
multiplied by the square root of 2. a�
4. High frequency enveloping: A process to extract very low amplitude time
domain signals associated with impact or impulse events such as bearing or
gear tooth defects and display them in a frequency spectrum of acceleration
versus frequency.
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Rockwell Automation, Entek Group, "Spike Energy" analysis.
2) CSI, "PeakVue."
5. Low speed equipment: Equipment or components of equipment rotating at less
than 600 revolutions per minute.
6. High speed equipment: Equipment and equipment components operating at or X11
above 600 revolutions per minute. IJ1
B. Vibration instrumentation requirements: Qi
1. Analyzers: Use digital type analyzers or data collectors with anti-aliasing filter, u
12 bit A/D converter, fast fourier transform circuitry, phase measurement
capability, time wave form data storage, high frequency enveloping
capabilities, 35 frequency ranges from 21 to 1,500,000 cycles per minute,
adjustable fast fourier transform resolution from 400 to 6,400 lines, storage for
up to one hundred 3,200 line frequency spectra, RS232C data output port,
circuitry for integration of acceleration data to velocity or double integration to
displacement.
a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1) Entek-IRD, Division of Rockwell Automation, Enpac 1200 with
applicable data analysis software or Entek Model 838 analyzer with
built in printer.
2) Computational Systems Inc., (CSI) Division of Emerson Electric,
Model 2120A, Data Collector/analyzer with applicable analysis
software.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15958-4 82351310
pw:#Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.15958.doc ��
2. Analyzer settings:
a. Units: English, inches/second, mils, and gravitational forces.
b. Fast fourier transform lines: Most equipment 1,600 minimum; for motors,
enough lines as required to distinguish motor current frequencies from
rotational frequencies, use 3,200 lines for motors with a nominal speed of
3,600 revolutions per minute; 3,200 lines minimum for High Frequency
Enveloping; 1,600 lines minimum for low speed equipment.
c. Sample averages: 4 minimum
d. Maximum frequency (Finax): 40 times rotational frequency for rolling
element bearings, 10 times rotational frequency for sleeve bearings.
e. Amplitude range: Auto select but full scale not more than twice the
acceptance criteria or the highest peak, whichever is lower.
f. Fast fourier transform windowing: Hanning Window.
g. High pass filter: Minus 3 dB at 120 cycles per minute for high speed
I equipment. Minus 3 dB at 21 cycles per minute for low speed equipment.
3. Accelerometers:
a. For low speed equipment: Low frequency, shear mode accelerometer,
500 millivolts per gravitational force sensitivity, 10 gravitational force
t range, plus/minus 5 percent frequency response from 0.5 hertz to 850
hertz, magnetic mount.
1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a) Wilcoxon Research, Model 797L.
b) PCB, Model 393C.
b. For high speed equipment: General purpose accelerometer, 100 millivolts
per gravitational force sensitivity, 50 gravitational force range, plus/minus
3dB frequency response range from 2 hertz to 12,000 hertz when stud
mounted, with magnetic mount holder.
1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a) Wilcoxon Research, Model 793.
b) Entek-IRD Model 943.
iC. Accelerometer mounting:
1. Use magnetic mounting or stud mounting.
2. Mount on bearing housing in location with best available direct path to bearing
and shaft vibration.
3. Remove paint and mount transducer on flat metal surface or epoxy mount for
High Frequency Enveloping measurements.
D. Vibration testing results presentation:
1. Provide equipment drawing with location and orientation of measurement
points indicated.
2. For each vibration measurement take and include appropriate data on
equipment operating conditions at the time vibration data is taken; for pumps,
compressors, and blowers record suction pressure, discharge pressure, and
flow.
3. When Vibration Spectra Data required:
1 a. Plot peak vibration velocity versus frequency in cycles per minute.
b. Label plots showing actual shaft or part rotation frequency, bearing inner
and outer race ball pass frequencies, gear mesh frequencies and relevant
September 1 - -
p 0, 2010 FINAL 10.15958 5 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specificabons/10.1,5958.doc
�I
I
�1
equipment excitation frequencies on the plot; label probable cause of
vibration peaks whether in excess of specification limits or not.
c. Label plots with equipment identification and operating conditions such as
tag number, capacity, pressure, driver horsepower, and point of vibration
measurement.
d. Plot motor spectra on a log amplitude scale versus frequency.
4. For low speed equipment, plot peak vibration displacement versus frequency
as well as velocity versus frequency.
5. Provide name of manufacturer and model number of the vibration
instrumentation used, including analyzer and accelerometer used together with
mounting type.
3.04 TESTING LEVELS El
A. Level 1 Quality Control Tests:
1. Level 1 General Equipment Performance Test:
a. For equipment, operate, rotate, or otherwise functionally test for
15 minutes minimum after components reach normal operating Qt
temperatures. `
b. Operate at rated design load conditions.
c. Confirm that equipment is properly assembled, equipment moves or �l
rotates in the proper direction, shafting, drive elements and bearings are
installed and lubricated in accordance with proper tolerances, and that no
unusual power consumption, lubrication temperatures, bearing
temperatures, or other conditions are observed.
2. Level 1 Pump Performance Test:
a. Measure flow and head while operating at or near the rated condition; for
factory testing, testing may be at reduced speeds with flow and head
corresponding to the rated condition when adjusted for speed using the
appropriate affinity laws.
b. Use of a test driver is permitted for factory tests when actual driver is
given a separate test at its point of manufacture as specified in Sub-
Section 10.16222 or the applicable equipment Sub-Section. Use actual
driver for field tests.
c. Record measured flow, suction pressure, discharge pressure, and make
observations on bearing temperatures and noise levels.
3. Level 1 Vibration Test:
a. Test requirement:
1) Measure filtered vibration spectra versus frequency in 3
perpendicular planes at each normally accessible bearing housing on
the driven equipment, any gears and on the driver; 1 plane of
measurement to be parallel to the axis of rotation of the component.
2) Vibration spectra versus frequency shall be in accordance with
Vibration Acceptance Criteria.
b. Equipment operating condition: Test at specified maximum speed. 11
4. Level 1 Noise Test:
a. Measure unfiltered overall A-weighted sound pressure level in dBA at
3 feet horizontally from the surface of the equipment and at a mid-point of
the equipment height.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15958-6 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.15958.doc
B. Level 2 Quality Control Tests:
1. Level 2 General Performance Test:
a. For equipment, operate, rotate, or otherwise functionally test for at least
2 hours after components reach normal operating temperatures.
b. Operate at rated design load conditions.
c. Confirm that equipment is properly assembled, equipment moves or
rotates in the proper direction, shafting, drive elements and bearings are
installed and lubricated in accordance with proper tolerances, and that no
unusual power consumption, lubrication temperatures, bearing
temperatures, or other conditions are observed.
2. Level 2 Pump Performance Test:
a. Test 2 hours minimum for flow and head at the rated condition; for factory
testing, testing may be at a reduced speeds with flow and head
corresponding to the rated condition when adjusted for speed using the
appropriate affinity laws.
b. Use of a test driver is permitted for factory tests when actual driver is
given a separate test at its point of manufacture as specified in'.Sub-
Section 10.16222. Use actual driver for field tests.
c. Test for flow and head at 2 additional conditions; 1 at 25 percent below
the rated flow and 1 at 10 percent above the rated flow.
d. Record measured flow, suction pressure, discharge pressure, and
observations on bearing temperatures and noise levels at each condition.
3. Level 2 Vibration Test:
a. Test requirement:
1) Measure filtered vibration spectra versus frequency and measure
vibration phase in 3 perpendicular planes at each normally
accessible bearing housing on the driven equipment, any gears and
on the driver; 1 plane of measurement to be parallel to the axis of
rotation of the component; measure actual rotational speeds for each
vibration spectra measured using photometric or other tachometer
input connected directly to the vibration data collector.
2) Vibration spectra versus frequency shall be in accordance with
Vibration Acceptance Criteria.
b. Equipment operating condition: Repeat test requirements at design
specified maximum speed and at minimum speed for variable speed
equipment.
c. Natural frequency test of field installed equipment:
1) Excite the installed equipment and support system in 3 perpendicular
planes, use same planes as operating vibration measurement
planes, and determine the as-installed natural resonant frequency of
the driven equipment, the driver, gears and supports.
2) Perform test at each bearing housing, at each support pedestal, and
for pumps on the suction and discharge piping.
3) Perform with equipment and attached piping full of intended service
or process fluid.
4. Level 2 Noise Test:
a. Measure filtered A-weighted overall sound pressure level in dBA for each
of 8 octave band mid-points beginning at 63 hertz measured at 3 feet
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15958-7 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClientlWA/Renton/8235B10/Specifiication5/10.15958.doc
1
I
�I
I
i
horizontally from the surface of the equipment at mid-point height of the
noise source.
3.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
1
A. Test equipment as specified for each type of test at the test levels specified in �►
equipment Sub-Sections. Prepare and submit test reports as specified.
B. Inspection and balancing: aV
1. Statically and dynamically balance each of the individual rotating parts as
required to achieve the required field vibration limits. Statically and dynamically
balance the completed equipment rotating assembly and drive shaft
components.
2. Furnish copies of material and component inspection reports including
balancing reports for equipment system components and for the completed n�
rotating assembly. !1
C. Critical speed of rotating equipment: Satisfy the following:
1. The first lateral and torsional critical speed of all constant, variable, and
2-speed driven equipment that is considered rigid'such as horizontal pumps,
all non-clog pumps, blowers, air compressors, and engines shall be at least I�t
25 percent above the equipment's maximum operating speed.
2. The first lateral and torsional critical speed of all constant, variable, and
2-speed driven equipment that is considered flexible or flexibly mounted such
as vertical pumps (vertical in-line and vertical non-clog pumps excluded) and
fans shall at least 25 percent below the equipment's lowest operating speed.
3. The second lateral and torsional critical speed of all constant, variable, and
2-speed equipment that is considered flexible or flexibly mounted shall be at
least 25 percent above the maximum operating speed.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 0�
A. Test equipment as specified for each type of test at the test levels specified in �J
equipment Sub-Sections. Prepare and submit test reports as specified. Comply with n�
latest version of applicable standards. u
3.07 VIBRATION ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
A. Testing of rotating mechanical equipment: Tests are to be performed b an
P Y
experienced, factory trained, and independent authorized vibration analysis expert.
B. Vibration velocity limits: Unless otherwise specified, equipment operating at speeds
greater than 600 revolutions per minute is not to exceed the following peak velocity
limits:
�1
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15958-8 8235610
pw:/lCarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/SpecificaVons]10.15958.doc ��
Any Filtered Peak
Unfiltered Overall Limit Limit
Item (inches per second) (inches per second)
Non-Clog Solids Handling 0.35 0.25
Centrifugal Pumps
Motors See Applicable Motor Specification
C. Equipment operation: Measurements are to be obtained with equipment installed
and operating within capacity ranges specified and without duplicate equipment
running.
D. Additional criteria:
1. No narrow band spectral vibration amplitude components, whether
sub-rotational, higher harmonic, or synchronous multiple of running speed, are
to exceed 40 percent of synchronous vibration amplitude component without
manufacturer's detailed verification of origin and ultimate effect of such
excitation.
2. The presence of discernable vibration amplitude peaks in Test Level 2 or
3 vibration spectra at bearing inner or outer race frequencies shall be cause
for rejection of the equipment..
3. For motors, the following shall be cause for rejection:
a. Stator eccentricity evidenced by a spectral peak at 2 times electrical line
frequency that are more than 40 percent of the peak at rotational
frequency.
b. Rotor eccentricity evidenced by a spectral peak at 2 times electrical line
frequency with spectra side bands at the pole pass frequency around the
2 times line frequency peak.
c. Other rotor problems evidenced by pole pass frequency side bands
around operating speed harmonic peaks or 2 times line frequency side
bands around rotor bar pass frequency or around 2 times the rotor bar
pass frequency.
d. Phasing problems evidenced by 1/3 line frequency side band spectral
peaks around the 2 times electrical line frequency peak.
4. The presence of peaks in a High Frequency Enveloping spectra plot
corresponding to bearing, gear or motor rotor bar frequencies or harmonics of
these frequencies shall be cause for rejection of the equipment; since
inadequate lubrication of some equipment maybe a cause of these peaks,
lubrication shall be checked, corrected as necessary and the high frequency
envelope analysis repeated.
3.08 NOISE REQUIREMENTS AND CONTROL
A. Make measurements in relation to reference pressure of 0.0002 microbar.
B. Make measurements of emitted noise levels on sound level meter meeting or
exceeding ANSI S1.4, Type Il.
C. Set sound level meter to slow response.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15958-9 82351310
pW:IlCar ollol Doc umentsl ClienUWkRento nllllll10/Specifica4ons110.15958.1oc
i
I
I I
D. Unless otherwise specified, maximum free field noise level not to exceed 85 dBA
measured as sound pressure level at 3 feet from the equipment.
3.09 FUNCTIONAL AND OPERATIONAL TESTING OF EQUIPMENT
A. Functional testing as specified in Sub-Section 10.01756 and this Sub-Section.
B. General checkout: Prior to operating equipment, inspect, test, and check supporting
systems, including but not limited to power systems, control systems, piping
systems, lubrication systems, and safety systems.
1. Test and calibrate instrumentation and electrical devices as specified in Sub-
Sections 10.16950 and 10.17950.
2. Test piping and prepare piping as specified in Sub-Section 10.15956 and
applicable WSDOT Standard Specifications.
3. As a minimum for control systems associated with the equipment, perform the
following:
a. Individual Loop Tests: Test from field device to intermediate terminations
to controller and back to controlled element. o�
b. End-to-end test: Simulate input at field device and observe control system
response at the final field control element.
4. Prior to testing, provide signed and dated certificates of calibration for test �t
instrumentation and equipment. `
C. Operation of related existing equipment: OWNER will operate related existing
equipment or facilities necessary to accomplish the testing.
D. Acceptable tests: Demonstrate the equipment performance meets the requirements
of this Sub-Section and the equipment Sub-Section; when the equipment fails to Jlf
meet the specified requirements, perform additional more detailed testing to JII
determine the cause, correct, repair, or replace the causative components and
repeat the testing that revealed the deficiency.
E. Operational testing: As specified in Sub-Section 10.01756.
END OF SUB-SECTION
�1
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.15958-10 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.15958.doc ��
SUB-SECTION 10.16050
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
PART GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes:
1. General requirements applicable to all electrical work.
2. General requirements for electrical submittals.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
a. Sub-Section 10.01410 - Regulatory Requirements.
b. Sub-Section 10.01782 - Operation and Maintenance Data.
c. Sub-Section 10.16052 - Hazardous Classified Area Construction.
d. Sub-Section 10.16075 - Electrical Identification.
e. Sub-Section 10.16222 - Low Voltage Motors up to 500 Horsepower.
f. Sub-Section 10.16950 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests.
C. Interfaces to.equipment, instruments, and other components:
1. The Drawings, Specifications, and overall design are based on preliminary
information furnished by various equipment manufacturers which identify a
minimum scope of supply from the manufacturers. This information pertains to,
but is not limited to, instruments, control devices, electrical equipment,
packaged mechanical systems, and control equipment provided with
mechanical systems.
2. Provide all material and labor needed to install the actual equipment furnished,
and include all costs to add any additional conduit, wiring, terminals, or other
electrical hardware to the work, which may be necessary to make a complete,
functional installation based on the actual equipment furnished:
a. Make all changes necessary to meet the manufacturer's wiring
requirements.
3. Submit all such changes and additions to the ENGINEER for acceptance in
accordance with the General Conditions.
4. Review the complete set of Drawings and Specifications in order to ensure
that all items related to the electrical power and control systems are
completely accounted for. Include any such items that appear on Drawings or
in Specifications from another discipline in the scope of Work:
September - -
p ber 10, 2010 FINAL 10.16050 1 8235810
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienUWA/Renton/8235610/Specifications/10.16050
a. If a conflict between Drawings and Specifications is discovered, refer
conflict to the ENGINEER as soon as possible for resolution. a
D. All electrical equipment and systems for the entire project must comply with the
requirements of Division 16, whether referenced in the individual equipment
specifications or not: - I
1. The requirements of Division 16 apply to all electrical'work specified in other
Divisions and Sub-Sections, including HVAC controls, packaged mechanical
systems, LCPs, VCPs, etc.
I
2. Inform all vendors supplying electrical equipment or systems of the
requirements of Division 16.
3. The OWNER is not responsible for any additional costs due to the failure of
the CONTRACTOR to notify all subcontractors and suppliers of the Division 16
requirements. I
i
E. Contract Documents:
1. General:
a. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary and are to be used a�
together in order to fully describe the Work.
2. Specifications:
a. The General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract Documents
govern the Work.
b. These requirements are in addition to all General Requirements.
3. Contract Drawings:
a. The electrical drawings show desired locations, arrangements, and
components of the electrical work in a diagrammatic manner.
b. Locations of equipment, control devices, instruments, boxes, panels, etc.
are approximate only; exercise professional judgment in executing the
Work to ensure the best possible installation:
1) The equipment locations and dimensions shown on plans and
elevations are approximate. Use the shop drawings to determine the n�
proper layout, foundation, and pad requirements, etc. for final Jl
installation. Coordinate with all subcontractors to ensure that all
electrical equipment is compatible with.other equipment and space
requirements. Make changes required to accommodate differences
in equipment dimensions.
2) The CONTRACTOR has the freedom to select any of the named
manufacturers as identified in the individual specification Sub-
Sections; however, the ENGINEER has designed the spatial
equipment.layout based upon.a single manufacturer and has not
confirmed that every named manufacturer's equipment fits in the
allotted space. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to ensure that
the equipment being furnished fits within the defined space.
c. Installation Details:
1) The Contract Drawings include typical installation details, which show
the means and methods the CONTRACTOR is to use to install
electrical equipment. For cases where a typical detail does not apply, n�
develop installation details that may be necessary for completing the LE
Work, and submit these details for review by the ENGINEER.
d. Schematic Diagrams:
1) All controls are shown de-energized. ll
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16050-2 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specificat ons/10.16050
2) Schematic diagrams show control function only. Incorporate other
necessary functions for proper operation and protection of the
system.
3) Add slave relays, where required, to provide all necessary contacts
for the control system or where needed to function as interposing
relays for control voltage coordination, equipment coordination, or
control system voltage drop considerations.
4) Mount all devices shown on motor controller schematic diagrams in
the controller compartment enclosure, unless otherwise noted or
indicated.
5) Control schematics are to be used as a guide in conjunction with the
descriptive operating sequences found in the Drawings or
Specifications. Combine all information and furnish a coordinated
and fully functional control system.
F. Alternates/Alternatives:
1. Refer to the General Conditions for substitute item provisions.
jG. Changes and Change Orders:
1. Refer to the General Conditions.
t1.02 REFERENCES
A. Code Compliance:
1. As specified in Sub-Section 10.01410.
2. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. The
latest edition accepted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction of referenced
publications in effect at the time of the bid governs.
3. The standards listed are hereby incorporated into these specifications:
a. National Electrical Code (NFPA No 70).
b. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).
c. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
d. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
e. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
f. Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA).
g. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
h. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM).
i. National Bureau of Standards.
j. Institute of Power Cable Engineers Association National Board of Fire
Underwriters (NBFU).
k. Illuminating Engineering Society (IES) of North America.
I. Safety Orders of Industrial Accident Commission.
m. Rules of the National Board of Fire Underwriters.
n. Requirements of the serving Utilities.
B. Compliance with laws and regulations:
1. Refer to the General Conditions.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions of terms and other electrical and instrumentation considerations as set
forth in the:
1. National Electrical Code.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 1.0.16050-3 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents]Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.16050
I
E
2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
3. International Society of Automation (ISA). a
4. National Fire Protection Association.
5. International Electrical Testing Association.
B. Specific Definitions: E
1. FAT: Factory Acceptance Test.
2. ICSC — Instrumentation and Controls Subcontractor.
3. PCIS — Process Control and Instrumentation System. I
4. Space: That portion of the switchgear, motor control center, panelboard,
switchboard or control panel that does not physically contain a device but is
capable of accepting a device with no modifications to the equipment, i.e. �!
provide all standoffs, bus, and hardware, as part of the space.
5. Spare: That portion of the switchgear, motor control center, panelboard,
switchboard or control panel that physically contains a device with no load
connections to be made.
6. Unequipped Space: That portion of the switchgear, motor control center,
panelboard, switchboard or control panel that does not physically contain a
device, standoff, bus, hardware, or other equipment.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION g
A. General Requirements:.
I
1. The Work includes everything necessary for and incidental to executing and
completing the electrical work described in the Drawings and Specifications H.
and reasonably inferable there from:
a. The electrical drawings are schematic in nature; use the structural
9 ,
architectural, mechanical, and civil drawings for all dimensions and fil
scaling purposes.
2. It is the intent of these Specifications that the entire electrical power,
instrumentation, and control system be complete and operable. Provide all
necessary material and labor for the complete system from source of power to
final utilization equipment, including all: connections, testing, calibration of
equipment furnished by others as well as equipment furnished by the �f
CONTRACTOR, whether or not specifically mentioned but which are `
necessary for successful operation.
3. Provide all electrical work, including conduit, field wiring, and connections by
the electrical subcontractor under the provisions of Division 16 for all aspects
of the Work, including heating, ventilation, and air conditioning.
4. Coordinate all aspects of the Work with the electrical subcontractor and other
subcontractors before bidding in order to ensure that all costs associated with
a complete installation are included. The OWNER is not responsible for any
change orders due to lack of coordination of the Work between the
CONTRACTOR, the electrical subcontractor, the other subcontractors or
suppliers.
5. Demolition:
a. Where demolition is specified or shown on any Drawing, disconnect all
associated electrical equipment and render the equipment safe.
b. Remove and dispose of all conduit, wire, electrical equipment, controls,
etc. associated with the items and/or areas to be demolished as indicated
on the Drawings unless otherwise indicated.
September 10, 2010- FINAL 10.16050-4 8235B10
pw:#Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton l8235Bl0/Spec cations/10.16050 ��
c. For each piece of equipment to be removed, remove all ancillary
components (e.g. instruments, solenoid valves, disconnect switches etc).
d. Conduit:
1) Where conduit removal, other than associated with equipment to be
IN removed, is indicated on the Drawings:
a) Remove exposed conduit to the point of encasement or burial.
b) Cut conduit flush and plug or cap encased or buried conduit.
2) Where conduits are to remain in place and removal is not indicated
on the Drawings:
a) Cap conduit open ends.
b) Re-label empty conduits as spare.
e. Remove all wire back to the source for all conduits to be removed or
abandoned in place.
f. Provide new nameplates for modified electrical distribution equipment,
motor control centers etc. to identify equipment and circuits that are no
longer used as spares.
g. Provide new typewritten schedules for all modified panelboards.
6. This project involves installation in existing facilities and interfaces to existing
circuits, power systems, controls, and equipment:
a. Perform and document comprehensive and detailed field investigations of
existing conditions (circuits, power systems, controls, equipment, etc)
before starting any work.Determine all information necessary to
document, interface with, modify, upgrade, or replace existing circuits,
power systems, controls, and equipment.
b. Provide and document: interface with, modifications to, upgrades, or
replacement of existing circuits, power systems, controls, and equipment.
7. Provide all trenching, forming, rebar, concrete, back filling, hard surface
removal and replacement, for all items associated with the electrical work and
installation:
a. Refer to Divisions 2 and 3.
8. Defective work:
a. Refer to the General Conditions.
B. Existing System:
1. The existing Lift Station includes two dry pit pumps controlled by a
submersible level transmitter and backup level switches in an adjacent wet
well. A control/RTU panel with a RUG6 PLC provides remote monitoring and
control.
2. The existing Lift Station is to be demolished.
3. The existing utility meter pedestal is old and in poor shape. It will be replaced
as part of this project.
_ C. New System:
1. The new system will include a duplex submersible lift station with submersible
level transmitter control and level switches.
2. A new valve vault with intrusion switch is being added. The check valves in the
valve vault are equipped with limit switches as well.
3. Reprogramming of the PLC to accommodate the new signals will be done by
others.
4. Contractor is responsible for panel modifications and terminations.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16050-5 8235610
pw:l/carollo!Documents/cliendWAlRenton/823561 o/1pecifications/10.18050
b) For submittals that cover multiple devices used in different areas
under the same specification section, the submittal for the
individual devices must list the area where the device is
intended to be used.
8. Specific submittal requirements:
a. Furnish the submittals required by each Section in Division 16 in
accordance with the following requirements.
b. Shop drawings:
1) Required for materials and equipment listed in this and other 1_!111
sections.
2) Furnish sufficient information to evaluate the suitability of the
proposed material or equipment for the intended use, and for
compliance with these Specifications.
3) Shop drawings requirements:
a) Front, side, and, rear elevations, and top and bottom views, `
showing all dimensions.
b) Locations of conduit entrances and access plates.
c) Component layout and identification.
d) Schematic and wiring diagrams with wire numbers and terminal
identification.
e) Connection diagrams, terminal diagrams, internal wiring
diagrams, conductor size, etc.
f) Anchoring method and leveling criteria, including manufacturer's
recommendations for the project site seismic criteria.
g) Weight. 0
h) Finish.
i) Nameplates:
(1) Refer to Sub-Section.10.16075. I
j) Temperature limitations, as applicable. _
c. Product Data:
1) Submitted for non-custom manufactured material listed in this and
other sections and shown on shop drawings.
2) Include:
a) Catalog cuts.
b) Bulletins. ---
c) Brochures.
d) Quality photocopies of applicable pages from these documents.
e) Identify on the data sheets the project name, applicable __1�
specification Sub-Section, and paragraph.
f) Identify model number and options for the actual equipment
being furnished.
g) Neatly cross out options that do not apply or equipment not
intended to be supplied.
d. Detailed sequence of operation for all equipment or systems.
e. Completely fill out a Motor Data Sheet, refer to Sub-Section 10.16222, for
every motor furnished: ,
1) Submit one copy of the Motor Data Sheet to the ENGINEER for
review as part of the associated equipment submittal.
f. Adhere to the wiring numbering scheme outlined in Sub-Section 10.16075
throughout the project:
1) Uniquely number each wire.
2) Wire numbers must appear on all equipment drawings.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16050-8 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienWJA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.16050 1
i
g. Only use equipment and instrument tags, as depicted on the drawings, for
all submittals.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. Furnish the ENGINEER with a complete set of written Operation and
Maintenance Manuals 2 weeks before energization start-up and/or
commissioning.
2. Furnish in accordance with Sub-Section 10.01782, and the following additional
requirements:
a. Completely index manuals with a tab for each section:
1) Each Sub-Section containing applicable data for each piece of
equipment, system, or topic covered.
2) Assemble manuals using the approved shop drawings,s, and include,
the following types of data:
a) Complete set of 11-inch by 17-inch drawings of equipment.
b) Complete set of 11-inch by 17-inch drawings of the control
system.
c) Complete set of control schematics.
d) Complete parts list for all equipment being provided.
e) Catalog data for all products or equipment furnished.
C. Material and Equipment Schedules:
1. Furnish a complete schedule and/or matrix of all materials, equipment,
apparatus, and luminaries that are proposed for use:
a. Include sizes, names of manufacturers, catalog numbers, and such other
information required to identify the items.
D. Installation Recommendations:
1. Submit the manufacturer's printed recommendations for installation of
electrical equipment.
E. Record Documents:
1. Provide record documents of all electrical drawings.
2. Record drawing requirements:
a. Update record drawings weekly.
b. Record drawings must be fully updated as a condition of the monthly
progress payments.
c. Submit record drawings upon completion of the Work for final review.
d. Clearly and neatly show all changes including the following:
1) All existing pipe, conduit, wire, instruments or other structures
encountered or uncovered during construction.
3. Shop drawings:
a. Upon completion of the Work, update all shop drawings to indicate the
final as-built configuration of the systems:
1) Provide as-built shop drawings for all electrical equipment on 11-inch
by 17-inch paper.
2) Provide electronic copies of these documents on CD-ROM disks in
AutoCad Version 2000 by Autodesk and pdf. Size all drawings to be
readable and legible on 11-inch by 17-inch media.
b. Furnish written information prepared specifically for this project using pdf
and printed on 8.5-inch by 11-inch plain bond paper:
1) Provide electronic copies of these documents on CD-ROM disks.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16050-9 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton]8235BI0/Specifications/10.16050
4. Review and corrections:
a. Correct any record documents or other documents found to be
incomplete, not accurate, of poor quality, or containing errors.
b. Promptly correct and re-submit record documents returned for correction.
F. Test Reports:
1. Include the following:
a. A description of the test.
b. List of equipment used.
c. Name of the person conducting the test.
d. Date and time the test was conducted.
e. All raw data collected.
f. Calculated results.
2. Each report signed by the person responsible for the test.
3. Additional requirements for acceptance test reports are listed in Sub-Section
10.16950.
I,
G. Calculations: �t
1. Where required by specific Division 16 Specifications: `
a. Because these calculations are being provided by a Registered
Professional Engineer, they will be reviewed for form, format, and content IMF
but will not be reviewed for accuracy and calculation means. f
H. Factory Acceptance Test:
1. Include complete test procedure and all forms to be used during test.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Furnish all equipment listed.by and bearing the label of Underwriters' Laboratories,
Incorporated (UL) or of an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the
ENGINEER and the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Shipping Precautions:
1. After completion of shop assembly and successful factory test, pack all
equipment in protective crates, and enclose in heavy duty polyethylene
envelopes or secured sheeting to provide complete protection from damage,
dust, and moisture.
2. Place dehumidifiers, when required, inside the polyethylene coverings.
3. Skid-mount the equipment for final transport.
4. Provide lifting rings for moving without removing protective covering.
5. Display boxed weight on shipping tags together with instructions for unloading,
transporting, storing, and handling at the job site.
B. Delivery and Inspection:
1. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original container
or packaging with identifying labels intact and legible. Include date of
manufacture on label.
C. Special Instructions: �!
1. Securely attach special instructions for proper field handling, storage, and
installation to each piece of equipment before packaging and shipment.
I�
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16050-10 8235610
pw:HCarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.16050
1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. Site Conditions:
1. Provide an electrical, instrumentation and control system, including all
' equipment, raceways and any other components required for a complete
installation that meets the environmental conditions for the site as specified in
the General Requirements and below.
2. Seismic classification:
a. Provide all electrical equipment and construction techniques suitable for
the seismic requirements for the site, as specified in Sub-Section
10.01612.
3. Altitude, temperature and humidity:
a. Provide additional temperature conditioning equipment to maintain all
equipment in non-conditioned spaces subject to these ambient
temperatures, with a band of 10 degrees Fahrenheit above the minimum
operating temperature and 10 degrees Fahrenheit below maximum
operating temperature, as determined by the equipment manufacturer's
guidelines:
1) Provide all power conduits wiring for these devices (e.g. heaters,
fans, etc.)whether shown on the drawings or not.
4. Outdoor installations:
a. Provide electrical, instrumentation and control equipment suitable for
operation in the ambient conditions where the equipment is located.
B. Provide enclosures for electrical, instrumentation and control equipment, regardless
of supplier or subcontractor furnishing the equipment, that meet the requirements
outlined in NEMA Standard 250 for the following types of enclosures:
1. NEMA 1 Enclosures: Intended for indoor use, primarily to provide a degree of
protection from accidental contact with energized parts or equipment.
2. NEMA 4 Enclosures: Intended for indoor or outdoor use, primarily to protect
equipment from exposure to windblown dust and rain, splashing or hose
directed water, ice formation and freezing.
3. NEMA 4X Enclosures: Made from corrosion resistant materials (Fiberglass
reinforced plastic, 316 Stainless Steel or equal) and are intended for indoor or
outdoor use, primarily to protect equipment from exposure to windblown dust
and rain, splashing or hose directed water, ice formation and freezing, and
corrosion.
4. NEMA 12 Enclosures: Intended for indoor use, primarily to provide a degree of
protection from dust, falling dirt and dripping non-corrosive liquids.
5. NEMA 6 Enclosures: Rated for submergence.
6. NEMA 6P Enclosures: Rated for prolonged submergence.
7. NEMA 7 Enclosures: Intended for installation in locations where explosive or
combustible gas or vapors may be present (Class I Division 1 or Class I
Division 2) meeting the requirements outlined in Sub-Section 10.16052.
1.09 (NOT USED)
1.10 SCHEDULING
>� A. General:
1. Testing requirements are specified in Sub-Section 16950 and other Sub-
Sections.
Se ptember 10, 2010 -
FINAL 10.16050-11 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.16050
2. General scheduling requirements are specified in the General Conditions.
3. Work restrictions and other scheduling requirements are specified in Sub-
Section 10.01140.
1.11 WARRANTY a
A. Warrant the electrical Work in accordance with the General Conditions:
1. Provide additional warranty as specified in the individual Division 16
Specifications.
1.12 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. Replace or modify equipment, software, and materials that do not achieve design �I
requirements after installation in order to attain compliance with the design
requirements:
1. Following replacement or modification, retest the system and perform i
additional testing to place the complete system in satisfactory operation and
obtain compliance acceptance from the ENGINEER.
1.13 (NOT USED)
1.14 COMMISSIONING (NOT USED) �!
1.15 MAINTENANCE
A. Before Substantial Completion, perform all maintenance activities required by any
sections of the Specifications including any calibrations, final adjustments,
component replacements or other routine service required before placing equipment
or systems in service.
B. Furnish all spare parts as required by other Sub-Sections of the Specifications.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide similar items of same manufacturer throughout the electrical and
instrumentation portion of the project. u%
B. Allowable manufacturers are specified in individual electrical and equipment
specifications in other Sub-Sections of Division 16.
2.02 EXISTING PRODUCTSOOT USED)
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Furnish all materials under this Contract that are new, free from defects, and
standard products produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production
of these products and that bear all approvals and labels as required by the
Specifications.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16050-12 82351310
pw:HCarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.16050 ��
B. Provide materials complying with the applicable industrial standard in accordance
with the General Conditions.
C. Stainless Steel:
1. Where stainless steel is indicated or used for any portion of the electrical work,
provide a non-magnetic, corrosion-resistant alloy, ANSI Type 316, satin finish.
2. Provide exposed screws of the same alloys.
3. Provide finished material free of any burrs or sharp edges.
4. Use only stainless steel hardware, when chemically compatible, in all areas
that are or could be in contact with corrosive chemicals.
5. Use stainless steel hardware, when chemically compatible, in all chemical
areas or areas requiring NEMA 4X construction.
6. Do not use stainless steel in any area containing chlorine, gas or solution,
chlorine products or ferric chloride.
2.04 MANUFACTURED I NITQ (NOT USED)
2.05 EQUIPMENT-(NOT USED)
2.06 COMPONE (NOT USED)
2.07 (NOT USED)
2.08 MIXES (NOT USED).
2.09 FABRICATKW4NOT USED)
2.10 F!NIS-(NOT USED)
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide all equipment that is new, free from defects, and standard products
produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of these products.
B. Arrange with all manufacturers of the electrical equipment, to allow the OWNER and
ENGINEER to inspect and witness the testing of the equipment at the site of
fabrication:
1. Testing includes the cabinets, special control systems, power equipment, and
other pertinent systems and devices.
C. Factory testing is specified in the individual Sub-Sections of Divisions 16.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Review the existing site conditions and examine all shop drawings for the various
items of equipment in order to determine exact routing and final terminations for all
wiring and cables.
B. Provide a complete electrical system:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16050-13 8235B10
pw://Carollo/DocumentsIClient/WA/Renton/8235 B10/SpecificaUons/I0.16050
1. Install all extra conduits, cables, and interfaces as may be necessary to
provide a complete and operating electrical system.
3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED)
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment locations shown on electrical drawings may change due to variations in
equipment size or minor changes made by others during construction:
1. Verify all dimensions as indicated on the Drawings:
a. Actual field conditions govern all final installed locations, distances, and
levels.
2. Review all Contract Documents and approved equipment shop drawings and
coordinate Work as necessary to adjust to all conditions that arise due to such
changes. a!
3. Make minor changes in location of equipment before rough in, as directed by
the OWNER or ENGINEER. [�
B. Install all material and equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's installation !!1
instructions, including anchoring methods and leveling criteria:
1. Where CONTRACTOR asks to deviate from the manufacturer's
recommendations, such changes must be reviewed and accepted by the
ENGINEER and manufacturer before installation.
C. Cutting and Patching:
1. Perform all cutting, patching, channeling, core drilling, and fitting required for
the electrical Work, except as otherwise directed:
a. Secure the permission of the ENGINEER before performing any operation O�
likely to affect the strength of a structural member such as drilling, cutting
or piercing:
1) Before cutting, channeling, or core drilling any surface, ensure that
no penetration of any other systems will be made:
a) Verify that area is clear and free of conduits, cables, piping,
ductwork, post-tensioning cables, etc.
b) Use tone-locate system or X-ray to ensure that area is clear of
obstructions.
b. Review the complete drawing set to ensure that there are no conflicts or
coordination problems before cutting, channeling, or core drilling any
surface.
2. Perform all patching to the same quality and appearance as the original Work.
Employ the proper tradesmen to secure the desired results. Seal around all
conduits, wires, and cables penetrating walls, ceilings, and floors in all
locations with a fire stop material, typically:
a. 3M CP25 Caulk.
b. 3M 303 Putty.
c. T&B S-100 Caulk.
d. T&B FS-500 Putty.
e. T&B FST-601 Putty.
3. Seal around conduit penetrations of below grade walls with a waterproof, non
shrink, non-metallic grout, unless otherwise indicated on the typical installation I�
details:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16050-14 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/Cfient/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.16050
a. Use the installation details provided in the drawings as a guide for
acceptable sealing methods.
D. Install all conduit and equipment in such a manner as to avoid all obstructions and
to preserve headroom and keep openings and passageways clear:
1. Install all conduits and equipment in accordance with working space
requirements as outlined in Article 110, Requirements for Electrical
Installations of the National Electrical Code.
2. Where the Drawings do not show dimensions for locating equipment, install
equipment in approximate locations as indicated on the Drawings. Adjust
locations shown on the Drawings as necessary to avoid any obstruction or
interferences.
3. Where an obstruction interferes with equipment operation or safe access,
relocate the equipment.
�j 4. Where the Drawings do not indicate the exact mounting and/or supporting
method to be used, use materials and methods similar to the mounting details
shown in the Drawings.
!' E. Earthwork and Concrete:
1. Install all trenching, shoring, concrete, backfilling, grading and resurfacing
associated with the electrical Work:
a. In accordance with Division 2 and 3 requirements.
F. Roof penetrations:
1. Make all roof penetrations, and seal around all conduits. Use pitch pockets
and flashings.
2. Roofing subcontractor to make actual seals around roof penetrations.
G. Terminations:
1. Provide and terminate all conductors required to interconnect power, controls,
instruments, panels, and all other equipment.
H. Miscellaneous installation requirements:
1. In case of interference between electrical equipment shown on the Drawings
and the other equipment, refer to the General Conditions for direction.
2. Location of manholes and pullboxes indicated on the Drawings are
approximate. Coordinate exact location of manholes and pullboxes with
t mechanical and civil work.
3. Provide additional manholes or pullboxes to those shown where they are
required to make a workable installation.
4. Circuits of different service voltage:
a. Voltage and service levels:
1) Medium voltage: greater than 1.OkV.
2) Low voltage: 120V to 480V.
3) Instrumentation: less than 50VDC.
b. Install in separate raceways, junction boxes, manholes, hand holes, and
pullboxes.
c. In manholes, install all cables operating at less than 50 VDC in PVC
coated flexible metallic conduit, with corrosion resistant fittings.
I. Labeling:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16050-15 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.16050
1. Provide all nameplates and labels as required in Sub-Sections 10.16075 and
10.16305.
J. Equipment Tie-Downs:
1. Anchor all instruments, control panels, and equipment by methods that comply
with seismic and wind bracing criteria, which apply to the site.
2. All control panels, VCPs, LCPs, RTUs, PCMs, etc., must be permanently
mounted and tied down to structures in accordance with the project seismic
criteria.
3.04 ERECTION, INSTAL 1 ATION, APPLICATION, CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) +
3.05 REPAIRMESTO ATIO (NOT USED)
3.06 RE-INSTALLATION ATRIAL (NOT USED)
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection:
1. Allow for inspection of electrical system installation in accordance with the
special provisions. 0�
2. Provide any assistance necessary to support inspection activities.
3. ENGINEER inspections may include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Inspect equipment and materials for physical damage.
b. Inspect installation for compliance with drawings and Specifications.
c. Inspect installation for obstructions and adequate clearances around
equipment.
d. Inspect equipment installation for proper leveling, alignment, anchorage,
and assembly.
e. Inspect equipment nameplate data to verify compliance with design
requirements.
f. Inspect raceway installation for quality workmanship and adequate
support.
g. Inspect cable terminations.
4. Inspection activities conducted during construction do not satisfy inspection or
testing requirements outlined in Sub-Section 10.16950.
B. Field Testing: „
1. Notify the ENGINEER when the electrical work is ready for field acceptance
testing.
2. Perform the acceptance tests in accordance with Sub-Section 10.16950.
3. Record results of the required tests along with the date of test:
a. Use conduit identification numbers to indicate portion of circuit tested.
C. Workmanship:
1. Leave wiring in panels, manholes, boxes, and other locations neat, clean, and
organized:
a. Neatly coil and label spare wiring lengths.
b. Shorten, re-terminate, and re-label excessive used as well as spare wire
and cable lengths, as determined by the ENGINEER.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16050-16 82351310
pw:HCarollo/Documents/ClienttWA/Renton/82351310/Specifications/10.16050 '
3.08 (NOT USED)
3.09 CLEANING
A. General Requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material and restore all damaged finishes to the
satisfaction of the ENGINEER and OWNER.
B. Clean and vacuum all enclosures to remove all metal filings, surplus insulation and
any visible dirt, dust or other matter before energization of the equipment or system
start up:
1. Use of compressors or air blowers for cleaning is not acceptable.
C. Clean and re-lamp all new and existing luminaries that were used in the areas
affected by the construction, and return all used lamps to the OWNER.
D. As specified in other Sub-Sections of the Contract Documents.
3.10 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Furnish all personnel and equipment necessary to conduct the demonstration and
' training requirements as specified in the individual specification Sub-Sections.
3.11 PROTECTION
A. Protect all work from damage or degradation until substantial completion.
I
' B. Maintain all surfaces to be painted in a clean and smooth condition.
3.12 (NOT USED)
END OF SUB-SECTION
i
i
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16050-17 8235610
pw:IlCarollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifiications/10.16050
�I
ai
of
ie
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16050-18 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClientfWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.16050
SUB-SECTION 10.16052
HAZARDOUS CLASSIFIED AREA CONSTRUCTION
PART GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes requirements for:
1. Executing and completing work in hazardous and/or classified areas as
defined by the NEC Articles 500 through 516, NFPA 820, and as indicated on
the Drawings and in the Specifications.
B. Related Sections/Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sections/Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this
Sub-Section. This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided for
' convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty
of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 1-05 - Control of Work.
b. Sub-Section 10.16050 - General Requirements for Electrical Work.
c. Sub-Section 10.16130 - Conduits.
d. Sub-Section 10.16134 - Boxes.
' e. Sub-Section 10.16140 -Wiring Devices.
f. Sub-Section 10.16150 -Wire Connections.
1 1.02 REFERENCES
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. Specific Definitions:
1. For the purposes of these Specifications, the terms"Hazardous" and
"Classified" will be considered synonymous.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIO N (NOT USED)
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 1-05 and Sub-Section 10.16050.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16052-1 82351310
pw:l/Car ollolDocumemlc,ienYWA/Renton/8135B1 o/Specifications/10.16052
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. All wiring in Hazardous and/or Classified Locations shall comply with all a
applicable Articles of the National Electrical Code, in particular Articles 500
through 516 of the National Electrical Code. �)
2. Except as modified in Articles 500 through 516, all other applicable rules
contained in the National Electrical Code shall apply to electric equipment and
wiring installed in Hazardous and/or Classified Locations. �)
3. All devices used in a Class I Division 1 or Division 2 Areas must have visible
manufacturer installed nameplates specifically stating the Class, Division, and
Group for which the device is approved. QI
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING u!
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. The following areas are classified Class I, Division 1: �)
1. Interior of wet well and trench is class I, div 1.
2. Interior of valve vault and trench is class I, div 1.
B. The following areas are classified Class 1, Division 2:
1. Envelope 18" above top of the wet well and trench extending 36" beyond
exterior wall of each is class I, div 2.
2. Envelope 18" above top of the wet well and extending 36" beyond exterior wall
is class I, div 2.
1.09 SEQUENGI (NOT USED)
1.10 SCHEDUL11 (NOT USED)
1.11 `"BAR ANPI (NOT USED)
1.12 CVQTCIIA STARTUP (NOT USED) I'
1.13 (NOT USED)
1.14 COMMISSIONING NOT USED)
1.15 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) ('
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS (NOT USED)
2.02 (NOT USED) I�
2.03 MATERIALS-(NOT USED)
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16052-2 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClientlWA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.16052
2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITC (NOT USED)
' 2.05 EQUIPMENT-(NOT USED)
' 2.06 COMPONENTS
A. Conduit and Sealing Fittings:
' 1. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16130.
B. Conduit Boxes and Bodies:
1 .1. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16134.
C. Wiring Devices:
1. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16140.
2.07 ACCESSORIES (NOT USED)
' 2.08 MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09 FABRICATI/lAl (NOT USED)
2.10 FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CYAIIAINATIAAI (NOT USED)
3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED)
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. Corrosion Protection:
' 1. Isolate dissimilar metals, except conduit and conduit fittings, which may come
into contact with one another:
a. Use neoprene washers, 9 mil polyethylene tape, or gaskets, for isolation.
2. Restore factory finishes that are damaged or rusted to their original new
condition in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Conduit Installation:
1. Wrench tighten all conduit joints to minimize sparking when fault currents flows
through the conduit system.
2. Make all conduit connections so that there is a minimum of 5 threads fully
tengaged in the connection.
3. Use explosion proof flexible conduit in Class 1 Division 1 hazardous areas:
a. Must be approved and marked suitable for Class I, Division 1.
' b. Listed for compatibility with the Group type atmosphere where used:
4. In Class I, Division 2 areas, use liquid-tight metal.conduit with approved
fittings:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16052-3 82351310
' pw:I/Carollo/Documents/ClientlWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.16052
a. Maximum allowable length of liquid-tight metal conduit is 36 inches,
without express permission from the ENGINEER. a
D. Sealing fittings:
1. Provide seal types that match the installed conduit system. a
2. Provide an approved seal, no more than 12 inches from the enclosure, for all
conduits entering an enclosure containing switches, circuit breakers, fuses,
relays, resistors, or any other apparatus which may produce arcs, sparks, or
high temperatures:
a. Only explosion proof unions, couplings, elbows, capped elbows, and
conduit bodies similar to "L", "T", and X may be installed between the 8`
sealing fitting and the enclosure. I
3. Provide entire assemblies approved for Class I locations for self sealing or
factory sealed assemblies where the equipment that may produce arcs,
sparks, or high temperatures is located in a compartment separate from the �I
compartment containing splices or taps, and an integral seal is provided where
conductors pass from one compartment to the other:
a. Seals are required in all conduit connections to the compartment 0�
containing splices and must be within 12 inches of the enclosure.
4. Install a conduit seal within 12 inches of the boundary in each conduit run
entering or leaving a classified location. No union, coupling, box, or fitting is oI
allowed in the conduit between the sealing fitting and the point at which the
conduit leaves the classified location.
5. For underground conduits entering or leaving a classified location or between
Class I Division 1 and Division 2 locations:
a. Provide a conduit seal at both points where the conduit emerges from the
ground:
1) Place the conduit seal within 18 inches of finished grade.
2) No union, coupling, box, or fitting is allowed in the conduit system
between the seal fitting and the point at which the conduit enters the
ground.
6. Separate all conductors within the conduit system and seal using an approved
packing dam installed to both hold the sealing compound and to maintain the
separation between the wires:
a. Remove the outer jacket of multi-conductor non-shielded cables in the
area of the sealing fitting and separate each conductor from the cable and
seal individually. I'
b. Provide the sealing compound approved for the conditions and use, and
that is not affected by the surrounding atmosphere or liquids.
c. Provide sealing compound with the melting point less than 93 degrees ('
Celsius (200 degrees Fahrenheit).
7. Install seals with drains in all electrical control stations, low points of conduit or
any place where moisture may condense and accumulate.
E. Install the sealing compound with a minimum thickness of 5/8 inch or the trade size
of the conduit whichever is greater.
F. Boxes and Fittings: I,
1. Class I Division 1 areas:
a. Utilize threaded connections for all metallic boxes, fittings, and joints to I the conduit system.
b. Wrench tighten, with at least 5 threads fully engaged.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16052-4 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.16052 '
2. Class I, Division 2 areas:
a. Conduits entering and exiting metallic boxes in Class I Division 2 shall
utilize approved grounding bushings to bond the conduits together.
' G. Outlet Boxes and Bodies:
1. Class I, Division 1 Areas:
a. Provide the following types of conduit bodies and boxes:
1) Malleable iron bodies and boxes with GRC or IMC conduit systems.
2) PVC coated conduit bodies and boxes with PCS or PCA conduit
systems.
3) Aluminum conduit bodies and boxes with ARC conduit systems.
2. Class I, Division 2 areas:
a. Boxes not containing arcing parts shall be:
1) Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
2) No pressed metal boxes are allowed.
b. Provide heavy duty cast construction type conduit fittings and joints:
1) Explosion proof rated fittings and joints are not necessary.
c. Any enclosure containing arcing parts, etc. shall have all construction
associated with the enclosure, conduit system, etc. conforming to Class I
Division 1 construction.
H. Motor Connections:
1. Conduit installation in Class I Division 1 and Class I Division 2 locations for
motors that contain arcing parts, shall proceed as follows from the conduit:
a. First- Conduit.
b. Second - Explosion proof flexible coupling.
c. Third - Sealing fitting.
d. Fourth - Explosion proof union.
e. Fifth - Connection to the motor terminal box.
2. Conduit installations in Class I Division 1 and Class I Division 2 locations for
motors that contain no arcing parts, shall proceed as follows from the conduit:
a. First- Conduit.
b. Second - Liquid tight flexible metal conduit (18 Inches maximum length.)
' c. Third - Connection to the motor terminal box.
3. Wiring connections to motor leads shall be via ring type terminal connection on
both the motor leads and power leads as specified in Sub-Section 10.16150.
I. The electrical continuity of non-current-carrying metal parts of equipment, raceways
and other enclosures shall be bonded as required by NEC 250.100.
' 3.04 ERECTION, L 1 INSTA ATION f I APD ICATION, CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED)
3.05 REPAIPURESTO ATIO (NOT USED)
3.06 RE-INSTALLATION ATION (NOT USED)
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
' 3.08 (NOT USED)
3.09 CLEANING (NOT USED)
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16052-5 8235610
pw:l/Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/I0.16052
a�
3.10 (NOT USED)
3.11 PROTECT! (NOT USED) aI
3.12 (NOT USED) a)
END OF SUB-SECTION
ul
�1
�i
11
it
11
II
I>
II
II
1
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16052-6 82351310
pw://Carollo/DocumentsiClienttWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.16052
SUB-SECTION 10.16070
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART GENERAL
t1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes requirements for:
1. Mounting and supporting electrical equipment and components.
B. Related Sections/Sub-Sections:
I 1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sections/Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this
Sub-Section. This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided for
convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty
of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
' with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 1-05 - Control of Work.
b. Sub-Section 10.01410 - Regulatory Requirements.
c. Sub-Section 10.01612 - Seismic Design Criteria.
d. Sub-Section 10.05120 - Structural Steel.
e. Sub-Section 10.16050 - General Requirements for Electrical Work.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements:
1. Conform to the requirements of the Building Code as specified in Sub-
Section 10.01410.
2. Demonstrate the following using generally accepted engineering methods:
a. That the anchors to the structure are adequate to resist the loads
generated in accordance with the Building Code and equipment
requirements.
b. That the required load capacity of the anchors can be fully developed in
the structural materials to which they are attached.
3. Seismic Withstand Requirements:
a. Freestanding or wall-hung equipment shall be anchored in place by
methods that will meet the requirements for the seismic design indicated
in Sub-Section 10.01612.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16070-1 82351310
pw://Carollo/DocumentslClienYWA/Renton/8235B101Specifications/10.16070
�I
b. Minimum safety factor against overturning: 1.5.
c. The foundation shall be capable of withstanding all anchor loads. a!
B. Performance requirements:
1. Hangers and supports individually and as a system shall resist all weights and
code required forces without excessive deflections and deformations.
1.05 SUBMITTALS n�
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 1-05and Sub-Section 10.16050. u
B. Product data: OI
1. Supports:
a. Materials.
b. Geometry. �I
c. Manufacturer.
2. Hardware:
a. Materials. I
b. Manufacturer. (�
3. Anchoring and leveling criteria and recommendations from equipment
manufacturers:
a. Include these requirements in the installation recommendation submittal
required by Sub-Section 10.16050.
C. Shop drawings:
1. Complete dimensioned and scalable shop drawings of all supporting
structures, trapezes, wall supports, etc.
2. Complete anchoring details for pole lights, transformers, control panels,
supporting structures, trapezes, wall supports all equipment in excess of 200-
pounds and all freestanding supports:
a. Stamped by a Professional Engineer registered in the State where the
project is being constructed.
b. Said submittals, by virtue of the fact that they bear the stamp of a
registered engineer, will be reviewed for general consistency with the
requirements shown in the Contract Documents, but not for context,
accuracy, or method of calculation.
3. Include data on attachment hardware and construction methods that will
satisfy the design loading criteria.
D. Installation Instructions:
1. Provide anchorage instructions and requirements for the equipment based on
the seismic conditions of the site as specified in Sub-Section 10.01612 and
wind conditions:
a. Stamped by a Professional Engineer registered in the State where the
project is being constructed.
E. Calculations:
1. All calculations shall be performed, signed and stamped by a Professional
Engineer, Registered in the State where the project is being constructed and
shall show that all specifications requirements are met. Said submittals, by
virtue of the fact that they bear the stamp of a registered engineer, will be �1
reviewed for general consistency with the requirements shown in the Contract
Documents, but not for context, accuracy, or method of calculation. ,
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16070-2 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.16070
r
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
rA. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
r1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
r1.09 (NOT USED)
1 1.10 SCHEDULI (NOT USED)
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.12 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.13 (NOT USED)
1.14 COMMISSIONING (NOT USED)
1.15 RRAINTR"'^"'CE (NOT USED)
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
rA. One of the following or equal:
1. Kindorf.
2. Superstrut.
3. Power-Strut.
4. Unistrut.
5. Cooper B-Line.
6. Robroy.
7. Aickinstrut.
2.02 (NOT USED)
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Use materials appropriate for the area as specified in Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. Hot dip galvanized steel:
1. Supports:
a. Conform to ASTM specification No. A123 or A153.
r
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16070-3 82351310
pw:l/Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235 B10/Specifications/10.16070
r
�I
b. Minimum zinc coating thickness of 2.6 mils.
2. Hardware: �I
a. Stainless Steel. I
b. Electro-galvanized.
C. Stainless Steel: p�
1. Supports:
a. Conform to ASTM specification No. A240. aF
b. ANSI Type 316 material.
2. Hardware:
a. Stainless Steel.
D. PVC Coated Galvanized Steel:
1. Supports:
a. Hot dip.galvanized steel. �I
b. PVC coating thickness of 10 to 20 mils.
2. Hardware:
a. Stainless Steel.
E. Fiberglass:
1. Supports:
a. Vinyl Ester.
2. Hardware:
a. Polypropylene.
b. Thermal plastic elastimer.
c. Fiberglass reinforced plastic.
2.04 (NOT USED)
2.05 EQUIPMENT-(NOT USED)
2.06 COMPONE (NOT USED)
2.07 ACCESSORIES
A. Anchors:
1. Refer to Sub-Section 10.05120.
2.08 M XES-(NOT USED)
2.09 FABRIGAT (NOT USED)
2.10 FINISHES
A. Paint and finish all supporting structures in conformance with the painting and
finishing sections of the Contract Documents.
I�
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16070-4 8235B10
pw:/lCarollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specificationsl10.16070
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL (NOT USED)
■
PART 3 EXECUTION
i3.01 EXAMINATI (NOT USED)
3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED)
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. General:
I 1. Equipment anchoring:
a. Install equipment in accordance with the printed recommendations of the
equipment manufacturer's literature, including anchoring methods and
leveling criteria.
b. Brace and anchor freestanding equipment supports using methods that
provide structural support based on the seismic loads as indicated in Sub-
Section 10.01612:
( 1) Lateral deflection at top of supports not to exceed support height
divided by 210 unless approved by the ENGINEER.
c. Provide fabricated steel support pedestals for wall mounted panels that
weigh more than 500 pounds:
1) Fabricate pedestals out of welded angle, tube sections, or preformed
channel.
' 2) If the supported equipment is a panel or cabinet, the pedestal shall
match supported equipment in physical appearance and dimensions.
d. Provide transformers hung from stud walls and weighing more than
300 pounds with auxiliary floor supports.
2. Furnish all conduit racks and trapeze structures needed to support the
conduits from the building walls or ceiling. Group conduits and position on
racks to minimize crossovers, etc:
a. Provide the necessary sway bracing to keep trapeze type structures from
swaying.
3. Mount all pull boxes, switches, panelboards, control panels, instruments, etc.
in any damp or wet location on minimum of 7/8 inch stainless steel or
fiberglass preformed mounting channel. Mount channel vertically along the
vertical length of the device so that any water or moisture may run freely
behind the device.
4. Concrete housekeeping pads are required for all floor-standing electrical
equipment and conduit penetrations through floor:
a. Pads shall be a minimum of 3.5 inches above the surrounding floor or
grade unless otherwise noted.
b. Pads shall extend a minimum of 2 inches beyond the extent of the
equipment in all directions.
c. Pads shall be sized for the actual equipment furnished and all future
equipment identified on the Contract Drawings.
d. All edges of the housekeeping pad shall be chamfered.
C. Raceway:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16070-5 8235610
pw:ll Carollo/Documents/ClienUWA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.16070
i
�I
1. Install all raceway cabinets, boxes, fixtures, and other appurtenances parallel
or perpendicular to building lines and level and plumb. a�
2. Mount all raceways, cabinets, boxes,.fixtures, instruments, devices, etc. on
CONTRACTOR-fabricated racks unless otherwise shown on the Contract
Drawings.
3. All raceways shall be supported directly from building structure. Do not
suspend raceways or equipment from piping or duct work.
D. Anchor Methods:
1. Solid Concrete: Metal or plastic wedge type expansion bolts (or preset
concrete inserts).
2. Metal Surfaces: Machine screws or bolts. �t
3. Hollow Masonry Units: Toggle bolts or expansion anchors.
E. Support luminaries from structural elements capable of carrying the total weight: Ali
1. Provide ceiling or pendent mounted high intensity discharge luminaires with a !JI
separate safety chain connecting the lens, reflector, ballast etc. to the building
structure.
F. Obtain permission from ENGINEER before drilling or piercing a structural concrete
member. �1
G. Plumbers perforated strap or tape is not acceptable.
H. When supporting devices on metal or wood stud construction bridge studs with
mounting channel and mount the devices to the mounting channel.
I. Re-coat all scratches, cuts, and drilled holes in galvanized surfaces with CRC "Zinc- Q�
It" or similar product. a
J. Re-coat all drilled holes and cut surfaces on PVC coated and FRP materials.
K. Seal all drilled holes and cut surfaces on FRP materials.
3.04 INSTAL 1 ATION APPLICATION, / l1AIQTOI V+TION (NOT USED) „
3.05 REPAIRIRESTORATI (NOT USED)
3.06 RE-INSTALLATION ATION (NOT USED) I�
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
3.08 (NOT USED) "
3.09 CLEANING-(NOT USED) I�
3.10 (NOT USED)
3.11 PROTECTION
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
• I�
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16070-6 82351310
pw:/lCarollo/DocumentstClient/WA/Renton/8235BI0/Specifications/10.16070 ��
t
3.12 SCHEDULWNOT USED)
END OF SUB-SECTION
t
t
!
t
t
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16070-7 8235610
pw:HCarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specificadons/10.16070
t
8f
ac
= nl
Ot
�i
�I
�I
li
. II
It
li
I!
1S
11
'1
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16070-8 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.16070 ,
SUB-SECTION 10.16075
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes requirements for:
1. Identifying electrical, instrumentation, and process equipment and
components.
2. Material, manufacturing and installation requirements for identification devices.
B. Related Sections/Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sections/Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this
Sub-Section. This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided for
convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty
of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 1-05 - Control of Work.
b. Sub-Section 10.16050 - General Requirements for Electrical Work.
c. Sub-Section 10.16130 - Conduits.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Nameplates:
1. Provide a nameplate for each piece of mechanical equipment, process
equipment, valve, pump, mixer, feeder, fan, air-handling unit, motor, switch,
receptacle, controller, instrument transducer, instrument power supply,
solenoid, motor control center, starter, panelboard, switchboard, individually
mounted or plug-in type circuit protector or motor controller, disconnect switch,
bus duct tap switch, time switch, relay and for any other control device or
major item of electrical equipment, either located in the field or within panels.
2. Provide all nameplates of identical style, color, and material throughout the
facility.
3. Device nameplates information:
a. Designations as indicated on the Drawings and identified on the Process
and Instrumentation Drawings.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16075-1 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.16075
�C
b. Device tag and loop number ID (e.g. EDV-60.0101.01).
c. Circuit ID (e.g. LPA-11).
d. Area served (e.g. Lighting Chemical Building).
B. Wire Numbers:
1. Coordinate the wire numbering system with all vendors of equipment so that
every field wire has a unique number associated with it for the entire system:
a. Wire numbers shall correspond to the wire numbers on the control o!
drawings or the panel and circuit numbers for receptacles and lighting.
b. Wire numbers shall correspond to the terminal block number to which they
are attached in the control panel.
c. Internal panel wires on a common terminal shall have the same wire
number.
d. Multiconductor cables shall be assigned a cable number that shall be
attached to the cable at intermediate pull boxes and stub-up locations
beneath freestanding equipment. All multi-conductor and instrumentation
cables shall be identified at pull points as described above:
1) Label armored multiconductor cable using the conduit number as
indicated on the Drawings, following the requirements for conduit �1
markers in Sub-Section 10.16130.
2. Provide the following wiring numbering schemes throughout the project for
field wires between Process Control Module, (PCM), Vendor Control Panels,
(VCP), Motor Control Centers, (MCC), field starters, field instruments, etc.
0C
(ORIGIN LOC.)-(ORIGIN TERM.)/(DEST. LOC.)-(DEST. TERM.)
OR
a�
(ORIGIN LOC.)-(ORIGIN TERM.) ai
(DEST. LOC.)-(DEST. TERM.) f
Where: u{
ORIGIN LOC. = Designation for originating panel or device u
ORIGIN TERM. = Terminal designation at originating panel or device
DEST. LOC. = Designation for destination panel or device n�
DEST. TERM. = Terminal designation at destination panel or device or PLC (I
1/0 address at destination panel
a. Identify equipment and field instruments as the origin.
b. PCM's are always identified as the destination.
c. Location is the panel designation for VCP, LCP, or PCM. For connections 0�
to MCCs, location is the specific starter tag and loop number. Location is
the tag and loop number for motor starters, field instruments and
equipment. Any hyphen in the panel designation or tag and loop number
shall be omitted.
d. Terminal designation is the actual number on the terminal block where the
conductor terminates at field devices and vendor control panels. For
multiconductor cables, all terminal numbers shall be shown, separated by AI
commas. �l
Uf
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16075-2 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Cliera/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifiications]10.16075 Q�
e. Terminal designations at motor leads shall be the motor manufacturer's
standard terminal designation (e.g.T1, T2, T3, etc.).
f. Terminal designations at PCM's where the field conductor connects to
field terminal blocks for a PLC input or output shall be the PLC address
(Note: the following PLC 1/0 numbering scheme is typical for Allen-
Bradley, the numbering scheme should be modified to match that of the
actual PLC manufacturer used for the project):
1) Discrete Point: W:X:Y/Z
Analog Point: W:X:Y.Z
Where:
W = I for input, O for output
X = PLC number (1, 2, 3...)
Y = Slot number(01, 02, 03...)
Z = Terminal number (00, 01, 02...)for a discrete point or a word
number for an analog point (1, 2, 3...)
g. Terminal designations at PCM's where the conductor does not connect to
a PLC 1/0 point shall be the terminal number with a "C" prefix (e.g.
C0010). For common power after a fuse or neutrals after a switch, the
subsequent points shall have and capital letter suffix starting with "A" (e.g.
C0010A).
3. Case 1: Vendor Control Panel (VCP) to Process Control Module (PCM):
Field Wire Number/Label: A-B/C-D
1 A = Vendor Control Panel number without hyphen (VCP60.0101.01)
B = Terminal number within VCP (manufacturer's or vendor's standard
terminal number)
C = Process Control Module number without hyphen (PCM60.0101)
D = Either the PLC address if the field terminal is connected directly to a PLC
input or output point or the terminal number with a "C" prefix if not
connected directly to a PLC 1/0 point (C0010)
Examples: VCP60.0101.01-10/PCM60.0101-1:1:01/01
VCP60.0101.01-10/PCM60.0101-0:1:10/07
VCP60.0101.01-10/PCM60.0101-00100
4. Case 2: Field Instrument to Process Control Module (PCM):
Field Wire Number/Label: E-F/C-D
C = Process Control Module number without hyphen (PCM60.0101)
D = Either the PLC address if the field terminal is connected directly to a PLC
input or output point or the terminal number with a "C" prefix if not
connected directly to a PLC 1/0 point (C0010)
E = Field mounted instrument tag and loop numbers without hyphen
(EDV60.0101.01)
F = Manufacturer's standard terminal number within instrument. Use both
terminal numbers for analog points separated by a comma
Examples: TIT60.0101.01-2,3/PCM60.0101-1:1:01.1
TS H60.0101-1/PCM60.0101-1:2:01/00
5. Case 3: Motor Control Center(MCC) to Process Control Module (PCM):
Field Wire Number/Label: G-B/C-D
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16075-3 82351310
pw:l/Ca,ollo/Documents/ClientfWA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.16075
B = Terminal number within Motor Control Center(manufacturer's or vendor's
standard terminal number) Q�
C = Process Control Module without hyphen (PCM60.0101) !1
D = Either the PLC address if the field terminal is connected directly to a PLC
input or output point or the terminal number with a "C" prefix if not u�
connected directly to a PLC 1/0 point (C0010) u
G = Actual starter designation in the Motor Control Center without hyphen
(MMS60.0101)
Examples: MMS60.0101-10/PCM60.0101-1:1:01/01
MMS60.0101-10/PCM60.0101-0:1:10/07 �!
MMS60.0101-10/PCM60.0101-CO 100
6. Case 4: Motor Control Center (MCC) to Vendor Control Panel (VCP):
Field Wire'Number/Label: G-B/A-B
A = Vendor Control Panel number without hyphen (VCP60.0101.01) r
B = Terminal number within motor control center or vendor control panel
(manufacturer's or vendors standard terminal number) Di
G = Actual starter designation in the Motor Control Center without hyphen UI
(MMS60.0101)
Example: MMS60.0101-X2/VCP60.0101.01-10
7. Case 5: Motor leads to a Motor Control Center(MCC):
Field Wire Number/Label: H-I/G-B ll
B = Terminal.number within motor control center(manufacturer's standard
terminal number) �o
G = Actual starter designation in the Motor Control Center without hyphen kr
(MMS60.0101)
H = Equipment tag and loop number without hyphen (PMP60.0101.01)
I = Motor manufacturer's standard motor lead identification (e.g.T1, T2, T3,
etc.) a�
Example: PMP-60.0101.01-T3/MMS60.0101.01-T3 �!
8. Case 6: Remote or separately mounted starter or Variable Frequency Drive
(VFD) to Process Control Module (PCM):
Field Wire Number/Label: J-B/C-D
B = Terminal number within starter or Variable Frequency Drive
(manufacturer's standard terminal number) n�
C = Process Control Module number without hyphen (VCP60.0101.01) u
D = Either the PLC address if the field terminal is connected directly to a PLC
input or output point or the terminal number with a "C" prefix if not O�
connected directly to a PLC 1/0 point (C0010)
J = Starter or Variable Frequency Drive tag and loop number without hyphen
(MMS60.0101) I
Examples: MMS60.0101-10/PCM60.0101.01-1:1:01/01
MMS60.0101-10/PCM60.0101.01-0:2:10/07
MMS60.0101-10/PCM60.0101.01-00010 01
9. Case 7: Field Bus Trunk Segment:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16075-4 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specificabons/10.16075 Q�
Field Cable Number/Label: C/K-UM; C/K-UH; C/K-L/J
C = Process Control Module without hyphen (PCM60.0101).
K = Field Bus Cable Type.
L = Field Bus Segment Number
M = Field Bus Field Network Component without hyphen (PTB1) or
H = Equipment tag and loop number without hyphen (EMV61.1100.01) or
J = Starter or Variable Frequency Drive tag and loop number without hyphen
(VFD60.0112)
Examples: PCM60.0101/PA-1A/PTB1
PTB 1/PA-1 B/PTB2
PCM60.0101/DN-1 A/VFD60.0112
PCM60.01 01/DP-2A/ EMV61.1100.01
10. Case 8: Field Bus Spur (Drop):
Field Cable Number/Label: E/K-UM
E = Field mounted instrument tag and loop numbers without hyphen
(FIT62.0110.02)
K = Field Bus Cable Type.
L = Field Bus Segment Number
M = Field Bus Field Network Component without.hyphen (P T B1), identify ports
on the device.
Examples: FIT62.0110.02/PA-1 C/PTB1-1
FIT63.0110.01/PA-1 D/PTB1-2
11. Identify all spare conductors as required for other field wires With an "S" prefix:
Example: S MMS60.0101-1 0/P
CM60.0101.01-0011
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 1-05 and Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. Product Data:
1. Nameplates:
a. Color.
b. Size:
1) Outside dimensions.
2) Lettering.
c. Material.
d. Mounting means.
2. Nameplate Schedule:
a. Show exact wording for each nameplate.
b. Include nameplate and letter sizes.
3. Wire Numbers:
a. Manufacturer's catalog data for wire labels and label printer.
C. Record Documents:
1. Update the conduit schedule to reflect the exact quantity of wire numbers
including spares and destination points for all wires.
1
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16075-5 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.16075
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Schedule a P re-installation conference in accordance with Sub-Section 10.16050 in
order to clearly define the requirements specified for equipment identification:
1. Representatives of the CONTRACTOR, OWNER, and ENGINEER shall
convene before any major purchases of cable or conductors and before the
installation or termination of any cables or conductors.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.08 NOT USED)
1.09 SEQUENGI (NOT USED)
1.10 SCHM, (NOT USED)
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.12 SYSTEM START UP
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.13 (NOT USED)
1.14 COMMISSIONING (NOT USED) �t
1.15 11AAINTRNANCE (NOT USED) I
1�
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS Ir
A. Nameplates and Signs:
1. One of the following or equal:
a. Brady.
b. Seton.
B. Conductor and Cable Markers:
1. Heat-shrinkable tubing:
a. One of the following or equal:
1) Raychem.
2) Brady.
3) Thomas & Betts.
4) Kroy.
C. Conduit and Raceway Markers:
1. One of the following or equal:
a. Almetek: Almetek type mini-tag.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16075-6 8235610
pw:HCarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specificalions/10.16075 ��
b. Lapp Group: Maxi System.
2.02 (NOT USED)
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Nameplates:
1. Fabricated from white-center and red face or black-center, white face
laminated plastic engraving stock:
a. 3/32-inch thick material.
b. Two-ply.
c. With chamfered edges.
d. Block style engraved characters of adequate size to be read easily from a
distance of 6 feet:
1) No characters smaller than 1/8-inch in height.
B. Signs:
1. Automatic equipment and high voltage signs:
a. Suitable for exterior use.
b. In accordance with OSHA regulations.
C. Conductor and Cable Markers:.
1. Machine printed black characters on white tubing.
2. Ten point type or larger.
D. Conduit and Raceway Markers:
1. UV resistant holder and letters.
2. Black letters on yellow background.
3. Minimum 1/2-inch high letters.
E. Medium Voltage Circuit Raceway Labels:
1. Vinyl plastic.
2. Minimum 1-inch high letters.
2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITC (NOT USED)
2.05 EQUIPMENT-(NOT USED)
2.06 COMPONENTS (NOT USED)
2.07 (NOT USED)
2.08 MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09 FABRIGATI (NOT USED)
2.10 FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Nameplates:
1. Provide all nameplates for control panel operator.devices (e.g. pushbuttons,
selector switches, pilot lights, etc.):
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16075-7 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235B10/Specificationstl0.16075
a. Same material and same color and appearance as the device
nameplates, in order to achieve an aesthetically consistent and
coordinated system.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATI (NOT USED)
3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED)
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. Nameplates: ,t
1. Attach nameplates to equipment with rivets, bolts or sheet metal screws,
approved waterproof epoxy-based cement or install in metal holders welded to
the equipment.
2. On NEMA 4, NEMA 4X, or NEMA 7 enclosures, use epoxy-based cement to
attach nameplates.
3. Nameplates shall be aligned and level or plumb to within 1/64 inch over the
entire length:
a. Misaligned or crooked nameplates shall be remounted, or provide new
enclosures at the discretion of the ENGINEER.
C. Conductor and Cable Markers:
1. Apply all conductor and cable markers before termination.
2. Heat-shrinkable tubing:
a. Tubing shall be shrunk using a heat gun that produces low temperature
heated air.
b. Tubing shall be tight on the wire after it has been heated.
c. Characters shall face the open panel and shall read from left to right or
top to bottom.
d. Marker shall start within 1/32 inch of the end of the stripped insulation
point.
D. Conduit Markers:
1. Furnish and install conduit markers for eve conduit in the electricals stem. I�
every Y
2. Mark conduits at the following locations:
a. Each end of conduits that are greater that 10 feet in length.
b. Where the conduit penetrates a wall or structure.
c. Where the conduit emerges from the ground, slab, etc.
d. The middle of conduits that are 10 feet or less in length.
3. Mark conduits after the conduits have been fully painted.
4. Position conduit markers so that they are easily read from the floor.
5. Secure all conduit markers with nylon cable ties:
a. Provide with ultraviolet resistant cable ties for conduit markers exposed to
direct sunlight.
b. Adhesive labels are not acceptable.
6. Conduit shall be identified with 0.036 minimum thickness solid brass tags with
stamped 3/16-inch minimum height characters. Tags shall be attached to the
raceway with Type 316 stainless steel wires. I�
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16075-8 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/I0.16075
t
7. Mark conduits before construction review by ENGINEER for punch list
purposes.
8. Label intrinsically safe conduits in accordance with the requirements of the
National Electrical Code (NEC).
3.04 ERECTION, INST_ AI 1 ATION f I ADD ICATION s �1 CNSTR CTION (NOT USED)
3.05 REPAIRIRESTO AT-11O (NOT USED)
.3.06 R&INSTAI 1 ATION (NOT USED)
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Replace any nameplates, signs, conductor markers, cable markers or raceway
labels that in the sole opinion of the ENGINEER do not meet the ENGINEER's
aesthetic requirements.
3.08 (NOT USED)
3.09 CLEANING (NOT USED)
i3.10 (NOT USED)
3.11 (NOT USED)
3.12 (NOT USED)
END OF SUB-SECTION
j
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16075-9 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClientlWA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.16075
�r
1E
1�
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16075-10 82351310
pw:HCarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.16075
SUB-SECTION 10.16123
600 VOLT OR LESS WIRES AND CABLES
PART1 GENERAL
j1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes requirements for:
1. 600 Volt Class wire and cable.
2. Instrumentation Class wire and cable.
B. Related Sections/Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for b one is as
y
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sections /Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this
Sub-Section. This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided for
convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty
of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 1-05— Control of Work.
b. Sub-Section 10.16050 - General Requirements for Electrical Work.
c. Sub-Section 10.16075 - Electrical Identification.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. B 3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire.
2. B 8 - Specification for Concentric-Lay—Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard,
Medium-Hard, or Soft.
C. Federal Specification J-C 30A.
D. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA):
1. IPCEA S-61-402 for thermoplastic insulated wire and cable for the
transmission and distribution of electrical energy.
2. IPCEA S-61-402 for rubber insulated wire and cable for the transmission and
distribution of electrical energy.
E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. Article 72 - National Fire Alarm Code.
2. Article 101 - Life Safety Code.
3. Article 262 - Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires
and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces.
t
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16123-1 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235810/Specifications/10.16123(B)
F. Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronics Industry Association
(TIA/EIA):
1. TSB95 -Additional Transmission Performance Guidelines for 4-pair 100 W
Category 5 Cabling.
2. 568-A-Additional Transmission Performance Specifications for 4-pair 100 W
Enhanced Category 5 Cabling.
3. 568-6.2-1 —Specifications for Category 6 cabling.
G. Underwriter's Laboratories Inc., (UL): J`
1. 1063 - Standard for Machine-Tool Wires and Cables.
2. 1277 - Standard for Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional
Optical-fiber Members.
3. 1424 - Standard for Cables for Power-Limited Fire-Alarm Circuits.
4. 1581 - Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords.
5. 1569 - Standard for Metal-Clad Cables. 1�
6. 2196 - Standard for Tests for Fire Resistive Cables. ��II
7. 2225 - Metal-Clad Cables and Cable-Sealing Fittings For Use in Hazardous
(Classified) Locations.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the:
1. Insulated Cable Engineering Association (ICEA).
2. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM).
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION I�
A. Furnish and install the complete wire and cable system.
1.05 SUBMITTALS i
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 1-05 and Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer of wire and cable.
2. Insulation: 1�
a. Type.
b. Voltage class.
3. American Wire Gauge size. ]�
4. Conductor material. J
5. Pulling compounds.
C. Shop Drawings: �t
1. Show splice locations.
D. Test Reports:
1. Submit test reports for meg-ohm tests.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16123-2 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents]Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.16123(B)
B. All wires and cables shall be UL listed and labeled.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.08 PROjECT411TE GONDITIONS (NOT USED)
j1.09 SEQUENGI (NOT USED)
1.10 (NOT USED)
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.12 SYSTEM START-UP
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.13 (NOT USED)
1.14 COMMISSIONING (NOT USED)
1.15 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED)
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
�1 A. One of the following or equal:
1. 600 Volt class wire and cable:
a. General Cable.
b. Okonite Company.
c. Southwire Company.
2. Instrumentation class wire and cable:
a. Alpha Wire Company.
b. Belden CDT.
c. General Cable BICC Brand.
d. Okonite Company.
e. Rockbestos Surprenant Cable Corporation.
2.02 (NOT USED)
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Conductors:
1. Copper per ASTM B 3.
2. Minimum 97 percent conductivity.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16123-3 8235810
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.16123(B)
2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. General:
1. Provide new wires and cables manufactured within 1 year of the date of
delivery to the site.
2. Permanently mark each wire and cable with the following at 24 inch intervals:
a. American Wire Gauge (AWG) size.
b. Voltage rating.
c. Insulation type.
d. UL symbol.
e. Month and year of manufacture.
f. Manufacturer's name.
3. Identify and mark wire and cable as specified in Section 16075:
a. Use integral color insulation for Number 2 AWG and smaller wire.
b. Wrap colored tape around cable larger than Number 2 AWG.
B. 600 Volt class wire and cable:
1. Provide American Wire Gauge (AWG) or kcmil sizes as indicated on the �t
Drawings:
a. When not indicated on the Drawings, size wire as follows:
1) In accordance with the National Electrical Code:
a) Use 75 degree Celsius ampacity ratings.
b) Ampacity rating after all derating factors, equal to or greater than
rating of the overcurrent device.
2) Provide Number 12 AWG minimum for power conductors.
3) Provide Number 14 AWG minimum for control conductors.
2. Provide Class B Stranding Per ASTM B 8:
a. Provide Class C stranding where extra flexibility is required.
3. Insulation:
a. XHHW-2.
b. 90 degrees Celsius rating in wet or dry locations.
4. Multiconductor cables:
a. Number and size of conductors as indicated on the Drawings.
b. Individual conductors with XHHW-2 insulation.
c. Overall PVC jacket.
d. Tray Cable rated.
e. Color-coding for control wire per ICEA Method 1, E-2.
f. Ground Conductor: Insulated, green:
1) Sized per NEC.
C. Instrumentation class cable:
1. Type TC.
2. Suitable for use in wet locations.
3. Voltage rating: 600 volts.
4. Temperature rating: 90 degrees Celsius wet or dry location.
5. Conductors:
a. Insulation:
1) Flame-retardant PVC, 15 mils nominal thickness, with nylon jacket
4 mils nominal thickness.
b. Number 16 AWG stranded and tinned.
c. Color code:
1) Pair: Black and white.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16123-4 8235B10
pw:/lCarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.16123(B)
I
2) Triad: Black, white and red.
3) Multiple Pairs or Triads:
a) Color-coded and numbered.
6. Drain wire:
a. 18 AWG.
b. Stranded, tinned.
7. Jacket:
a. Flame retardant, moisture and sunlight resistant PVC.
b. Ripcord laid longitudinally under jacket to facilitate removal.
8. Shielding:
a. Individual pair/triad:
1) Minimum 1.35-mil double-faced aluminum foil/polyester tape
overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage.
b. Multiple pair or triad shielding:
1) Group Shield: Minimum 1.35-mil double-faced aluminum
foil/polyester tape overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage.
2) Completely isolate group shields from each other.
3) Cable Shield: 2.35 mils double-faced aluminum and synthetic
polymer backed tape overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage.
c. All shielding to be in contact with the drain wire.
2.05 EQUIPMENT-(NOT USED)
2.06 COMPONENTS (NOT USED)
2.07 ACCESSORIES
A. Wire Ties:
1. One of the following or equal:
a. T&B "Ty-Rap" cable ties.
b. Panduit cable ties.
B. Wire Markers:
1. Reference Sub-Section 10.16075.
2.08 MIXES-(NOT USED)
2.09 NOT USED)
2.10 FINISHES S.E(NOT USED)
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Assembly and testing of cable shall comply with the applicable requirement of ICEA
Publication No. S-68-516.
B. Test type XHHW-2 in accordance with the requirements of UL 44.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16123-5 8235610
pw:/IC8rollo/Documents/Clientl WA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.16123(B)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 E MIN ATI/lAl (NOT USED)
3.02 DRCDACATION (NOT USED)
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. Color-Coding:
1. Color-coding shall be consistent throughout the facility.
2. The following color code shall be followed for all 240/120 Volt and
208/120 Volt systems:
a. Phase A- Black.
b. Phase B - Red.
c. Phase C - Blue.
d. Single Phase System - Black for one hot leg, red for the other.
e. Neutral -White.
f. High Phase or Wild Leg - Orange.
g. Equipment Ground - Green.
3. The following color code shall be followed for all 480/277 volt systems:
a. Phase A- Brown.
b. Phase B - Orange.
c. Phase C -Yellow.
d. Neutral - Gray.
e. Equipment Ground - Green.
4. The following color code shall be followed for all 120 VAC control wiring:
a. Power- Red.
b. Neutral -White.
5. The following color code shall be followed for all general purpose DC control
circuits: ll
a. Grounded conductors— Blue with White stripe.
b. Ungrounded conductors - Blue.
6. Switch legs shall be violet. Three-way switch runners shall be pink.
7. Wires in intrinsically safe circuits shall be light blue.
8. Wire colors shall be implemented in the following methods:
a. Wires manufactured of the desired color.
b. Continuously spiral wrap the first 6 inches of the wire from the termination
point with colored tape:
1) Colored tape shall be wrapped to overlap 1/2 of the width of the tape. �t
C. Install conductors only after the conduit installation is complete, and all enclosures
have been vacuumed clean, and the affected conduits have been swabbed clean
and dry:
1. Install wires only in approved raceways.
2. Do not install wire:
a. In incomplete conduit runs.
b. Until after the concrete work and plastering is completed.
D. Properly coat wires and cables with pulling compound before pulling into conduits:
1. For all Number 4 AWG and larger, use an approved wire-pulling lubricant while
cable is being installed in conduit:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16123-6 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235BI0/Specfcations/10.16123(B) ��
a. Ideal Products.
b. Polywater Products.
c. 3M Products.
d. Greenlee Products.
e. Or equal as recommended by cable manufacturer.
f. Do not use oil, grease or similar substances.
E. Cable Pulling:
1. Prevent mechanical damage to conductors during installation.
2. For cables Number,l AWG and smaller, install cables by hand.
3. For cables larger than Number 1 AWG, power pulling winches may be used if
they have cable tension monitoring equipment.
4. Provide documentation that maximum cable pulling tension was no more than
75 percent of the maximum recommended level as published by the cable
manufacturer. If exceeded, the ENGINEER may, at his discretion, require
replacement of the cable.
5. Ensure cable pulling crews have all calculations and cable pulling limitations
while pulling cable.
6. Make splices or add a junction box or pullbox where required to prevent cable
pulling tension or sidewall pressure from exceeding 75 percent of
manufacturer's recommendation for the specified cable size:
a. Makes splices in manhole r
p s o pull boxes only.
b. Leave sufficient slack to make proper connections.
F. Use smooth-rolling sheaves and rollers when pulling cable into cable tray to keep
pulling tension and bending radius within manufacturer's recommendations.
G. Install and terminate all wire in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
H. Neatly arrange and lace conductors in all switchboards, panelboards, pull boxes,
and terminal cabinets by means of wire ties:
1. Do not lace wires in gutter or panel channel.
2. Install all wire ties with a flush cutting wire tie installation tool:
a. Use a tool with an adjustable tension setting.
3. Do not leave sharp edges on wire ties.
I. Terminate solid conductors at equipment terminal screws with the conductor tightly
wound around the screw so that it does not protrude beyond the screw head:
1. Wrap the conductor clockwise so that the wire loop is closed as the loop is
tightened.
2. Do not use crimp lugs on solid wire.
J. Terminate stranded conductors on equipment box lugs such that all conductor
strands are confined within the lug:
1. Use ring type lugs if box lugs are not available on the equipment.
K. Splices:
1. Provide continuous circuits from origin to termination whenever possible:
a. Obtain ENGINEER's approval prior to making any splices.
2. Lighting and receptacle circuit conductors may be spliced without prior
approval from the ENGINEER.
3. Where splices are necessary because of extremely long wire or cable lengths
that exceed standard manufactured lengths:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16123-7 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.16123(B)
a. Refer to Section 16050 for box NEMA rating requirements.
b. Make splices in labeled junction boxes for power conductors.
c. Make splices for control and instrument conductors in terminal boxes:
1) Provide terminal boards with setscrew pressure connectors, with
spade or ring lug connectors.
4. Power and control conductors routed in common raceways may be spliced in
common junction boxes.
5. Clearly label junction and terminal boxes containing splices with the word
"SPLICE."
6. Leave sufficient slack at junction boxes and termination boxes to make proper
splices and connections. Do not pull splices into conduits
7. Install splices with compression type butt splices and insulate using a
heat-shrink sleeve:
a. In NEMA 4 or NEMA 4X areas, provide heat-shrink sleeves that are listed
for submersible applications.
8. Splices in below grade pull boxes, in any box subject to flooding, and in wet
areas shall be made waterproof using:
a) A heat shrink insulating system listed for submersible applications.
b) Or an epoxy resin splicing kit.
L. Apply wire markers to all wires at each end after being installed in the conduit and
before meg-ohm testing and termination.
M. Instrumentation class cable:
1. Install instrumentation class cables in separate raceway systems from power
cables:
a. Install instrument cable in metallic conduit within non-dedicated manholes
or pull boxes.
b. Install cable without splices between instruments or between field devices
and instrument enclosures or panels.
2. Do not make intermediate terminations, except in designated terminal boxes
as indicated on the Drawings.
N. Multi-conductor cable:
1. Where cable is not routed, in conduit with a separate ground conductor, use
one conductor in the cable as a ground conductor:
a) Use an internal ground conductor, if it is no smaller than as indicated on
the Drawings, and meets NEC requirements for equipment ground
conductor size.
b) Where 2 parallel cables are used, and the internal ground conductor in
each cable does not meet NEC requirements for the combined circuit, use
4-conductor cable, with one of the full-sized conductors serving as
round.
9
O. Armored cable:
1. Where 2 parallel cables are used, and the internal ground conductor in each
cable does not meet NEC requirements for the combined circuit, use
4-conductor cable, with 1 of the full-sized conductors serving as ground.
2. The cable armor is not acceptable as a ground conductor.
3. Where armored cable terminates at a device, switchboard, panel, etc., use
armored cable connector. I
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16123-8 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.16123(B)
i
1
4. Where armored cable run continues in conduit, strip jacket and armor for
portions in conduit, and terminate cable and jacket with an armored cable
connector threaded into a coupling or conduit box.
P. Signal cable:
1. Separate and isolate electrical signal cables from sources of electrical noise
and power cables by minimum 12 inches.
Q. Submersible cable in wet wells:
1. Provide Kellem's grip or stainless steel wire mesh to support cable weight and
avoid stress on insulation.
R. Wiring allowances:
1. Equipment locations may vary slightly from the drawings. Include an allowance
for necessary conductors and terminations for motorized equipment, electrical
outlets, fixtures, communication outlets, instruments, and devices within
10 linear feet of locations indicated on the Drawings.
ERECTION, APPLICATION, CONSTRUCTION
3.04 (NOT USED)
f 3.05 REPAIRIcceTOR- TIO (NOT USED)
r3.06 RE INSTAL 1 ATION (NOT USED)
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
3.08 (NOT USED)
3.09 CLEANING (NOT USED)
3.10 (NOT USED)
�- 3.11 PROTECTION
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
3.12 SCHEOULES4NOT USED)
END OF SUB-SECTION
L'
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16123-9 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235BI0/Specifications/10.16123(B)
2. 6 - Standard for Safety for Rigid Metal Conduit.
3. 6A- Standard for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Aluminum, Bronze and
Stainless Steel.
4. 360 - Standard for Safety for Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit.
5. 651 - Standard for Safety for Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit.
6. 797 - Standard for Safety for Electrical Metallic Tubing.
7. 1242 - Standard for Safety for Intermediate Metal Conduit.
8. 1660 - Standard for Safety for Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit. 01
9. 1653 - Standard for Safety for Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing. �J
10. 1684 - Standard for Safety for Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit
(RTRC) and Fittings.
11. 94VO - Standard for Vertical Flame Test.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. Specific definitions and abbreviations: (�
1. Conduit Bodies: A separate portion of a conduit system that provides access
through a removable cover to the interior of the system at a junction of 2 or
more conduit sections. Includes, but not limited to: shapes C, E, LB, T, X, etc.
2. Conduit Fitting: An accessory that serves primarily a mechanical purpose.
Includes, but not limited to: bushings, locknuts, hubs, couplings, reducers, etc.
3. GRC: Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit.
4. PCS: PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit. t
5. PCA: PVC Coated Rigid Aluminum Conduit.
6. IMC: Intermediate Metallic Conduit. }
7. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing.
8. PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit.
9. SLT: Sealtight- Liquid-Tight Flexible Conduit.
10. FLX: Flexible Metallic Conduit. fl�
11. NFC: Nonmetallic Flexible Conduit. -
12. ENT: Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing.
13. RAC: Rigid Aluminum Conduit.
14. FRD: Fiberglass Reinforced Duct.
15. NPT: National Pipe Thread.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide conduits, conduit bodies, fittings, junction boxes and all necessary
components, whether or not indicated on the Drawings, as required, to install a
complete electrical raceway system.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 1-05 and Sub-Section 10.16050.
i
B. Product Data:
1. Furnish complete manufacturer's catalog sheets for every type and size of
conduit, fitting, conduit body, and accessories to be used on the project.
2. Furnish complete manufacturer's recommended special tools to be used for
installation if required.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16130-2 82351310
pw:gCarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.16130
C. Certifications:
1. Furnish PVC coated conduit manufacturer's certification for each installer.
' D. Record Documents:
1. Incorporate all changes in conduit routing on electrical plan Drawings.
2. Dimension underground and concealed conduits from building lines.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. All conduits, conduit bodies, and fittings shall be UL listed and labeled.
C. Every installer of PVC coated Aluminum (PCA) or Rigid Steel (PCS) conduits shall
be certified by the manufacturer for installation of the conduit.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. Do not store conduit in direct contact with the ground.
1.08 PROJECT OR SITE
CONDITIONS
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.09 SEQUENCING
A. Before installing any conduit or locating any device box:
1. Examine the complete set of Drawings and Specifications, and all applicable
shop drawings.
2. Verify all dimensions and space requirements and make any minor
adjustments to the conduit system as required to avoid conflicts with the
building structure, other equipment, or the work of other trades.
1.10 NOT USED
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.12 SYSTEM START-UP
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.13 NOT USED)
1.14 GOMMISSIGNI G NOT USED)
1.15 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED)
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16130-3 82351310
pw:l/Carollo/Documents/Clientt WA/Renton/8235Bl OlSpecifications/10.16130
i
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Polyvinyl chloride-coated rigid steel conduit (PCS):
1. One of the following or equal:
a. Robroy Industries.
b. OCAL, Inc.
c. Perma Kote.
B. Conduit bodies:
1. One of the following or equal:
a. Crouse-Hinds. p
b. Appleton.
c. O-Z/Gedney.
d. Ocal. 1�
e. Robroy.
f. Carlon. �I
C. Conduit seals:
1. One of the following or equal:
a. Appleton.
b. Crouse-Hinds.
c. O-Z/Gedney.
D. Conduit mounting strut:
1. As specified in Section 16070.
E. Conduit through wall and floor seals:
1. The following or equal:
a. O-Z/Gedney, Type ."WSK."
2.02 NOT USED) ll
2.03 MATERIAL a (NOT USED)
2.04 NOT USED)
2.05 EQUIPMENT-(NOT USED)
2.06 COMPONENTS
A. PVC coated steel conduit and conduit bodies (PCS):
1. The steel conduit, before PVC coating, shall be new, unused, hot-dip
galvanized material, conforming to the requirements for type GRC.
2. Coated conduit conforms to NEMA Standard RN-1:
a. The galvanized coating may not be disturbed or reduced in thickness
during the cleaning and preparatory process.
3. Factory Bonded PVC Jacket:
a. The exterior galvanized surfaces shall be coated with primer before PVC
coating to ensure a bond between the zinc substrate and the PVC u�
coating.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16130-4 82351310
pw:/ICarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specificabons/I0.16130 ��
b. Nominal thickness of the exterior PVC coating shall be 0.040 inch except
where part configuration or application of the piece dictate otherwise.
c. PVC coating on conduit and associated fittings shall have no sags,
blisters, lumps, or other surface defects and free of holes and holidays.
d. The PVC adhesive bond on conduit and fittings shall be greater than the
tensile strength of the PVC plastic coating:
1) Confirm bond with certified test results.
4. A urethane coating shall be uniformly and consistently applied to the interior of
all conduit and fittings:
a. Nominal thickness of 0.002 inch.
b. Conduit having areas with thin or no coating are not acceptable.
c. All threads shall be coated with urethane.
5. The PVC exterior and urethane interior coatings applied to the conduit shall
afford sufficient flexibility to permit field bending without cracking or flaking at
temperature above 30 degrees Fahrenheit (-1 degree Celsius).
6. _PCS conduit bodies and fittings:
a. Malleable iron.
b. The conduit body, before PVC coating, shall be new, unused material and
shall conform to appropriate UL standards. .
c. The PVC Coating on the outside of conduit bodies shall be 0.040 inches
thick and have a series of longitudinal ribs to protect the coating from tool
damage during installation.
d. 0.002 inch interior urethane coating.
e. Utilize the PVC coating as an integral part of the gasket design.
f. Stainless steel cover screws heads shall be encapsulated with plastic to
assure corrosion protection.
g. A PVC sleeve extending 1 conduit diameter or 2 inches, whichever is less,
shall be formed at each female conduit opening.
1) The inside diameter of the sleeve shall be the same as the outside
diameter of the conduit to be used.
2) The sleeve shall provide a vapor and moisture tight seal at every
connection.
B. Conduit bodies:
1. Material consistent with conduit type:
a. Malleable iron bodies and covers when used with type GRC conduit.
b. Cast aluminum bodies and covers when used with type RAC.
c. PVC bodies and covers when used with type PVC.
d. PVC coated malleable iron bodies and covers when used with type PCS.
e. PVC coated copper-free cast aluminum bodies and covers when used
with type PCA.
f. Malleable iron or aluminum bodies with pressed steel or aluminum covers
when used with EMT conduit.
2. Conduit bodies to conform to Form 8, Mark 9, or Mogul Design:
a. Mogul design conforming to NEC requirements for bending space for
large conductors for conduit trade sizes of 1 inch and larger with
conductors#4 AWG and larger, or where required for wire bending space.
3. Gasketed covers attached to bodies with stainless steel screws secured to
threaded holes in conduit body.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16130-5 82351310
pw:l/Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235 Bl0/Specifications/10.16130
2.07 ACCESSORIES
A. Connectors and fittings:
1. Manufactured with compatible materials to the corresponding conduit.
B. Insulated throat metallic bushings: `
1. Construction:
a. Malleable iron or zinc plated steel when used with steel conduit.
b. Aluminum when used with aluminum conduit. L
c. Positive metallic conduit end stop.
d. Integrally molded non-combustible phenolic insulated surfaces rated
150 degrees Celsius.
e. Use fully insulated bushings on nonmetallic conduit system made of high
impact 150 degrees Celsius rated non-combustible thermosetting
phenolic.
C. Insulated grounding bushings: 1W
1. Construction:
a. Malleable iron or steel, zinc plated, with a positive metallic end stop.
b. Integrally molded non-combustible phenolic insulated surfaces rated
150 degrees Celsius.
c. Tin plated copper grounding saddle for use with copper or aluminum
conductors.
D. Electrical unions (Erickson Couplings):
1. Construction:
a. Malleable iron for use with steel conduit.
b. Concrete tight, 3-piece construction.
c. Rated for Class I Division 1 Group D in hazardous areas.
' I
E. Sealtight- liquid-tight flexible conduit (SLT)fittings:
1. Construction:
a. Malleable iron.
b. Furnished with locknut and sealing ring.
c. Liquid-tight, rain-tight, oil-tight.
d. Insulated throat.
e. Furnish as straight, 45 degree elbows and 90 degree elbows.
f. Designed to prevent sleeving:
1) Verify complete bonding of the raceway jacket to the plastic gasket
seal.
g. Equipped with grounding device to provide ground continuity irrespective
of raceway core construction. Grounding evice if inserted into raceway
Y.
and directly in contact with conductors shall have rolled over edges for
sizes under 5 inches.
h. Where terminated into a threadless opening using a threaded hub fitting, a
suitable moisture resistant/oil resistant synthetic rubber gasket shall be
provided between the outside of the box or enclosure and the fitting
shoulder. Gasket shall be adequately protected by and.permanently �J
bonded to a metallic retainer.
2. Corrosion resistant and outdoor sealtight- liquid-tight flexible conduit (SLT)
fittings:
a. Construction:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16130-6 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B70/Specifications/10.16130
1) PVC coated liquid-tight fittings with a bonded 0.040 inch thick PVC
coating on the metal connector to form a seal around the SLT
conduit.
2) Connectors shall have an insulated throat and an integral sealing
ring.
F. Hubs for threaded attachment of steel conduit to sheet metal enclosures:
1. Construction:
a. Shall have an insulated throat.
b. When used in corrosive areas shall be PVC coated.
c. Bonding locknut.
d. Recessed neoprene O-ring to assure watertight and dust tight connector.
e. One half-inch through 1-1/4-inch steel zinc electroplated.
f. One and one half-inch through 6-inch malleable iron zinc plated.
g. Aluminum with aluminum conduit.
2. Usage:
a. All conduits in damp, wet, outdoor, and corrosive areas shall use threaded
hubs for connections to sheet metal enclosures.
G. Sealing Fittings:
1. Construction:
a. 40 percent wire fill capacity.
b. PVC coated when used in corrosive areas.
c. Malleable ductile iron with steel conduit.
d. Aluminum with aluminum conduit.
e. Crouse-Hinds Type EYD where drains are required.
f. Crouse-Hinds Type EYS where drains are not required.
g. UL listed for use in Class 1, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D; Class 1,
Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Class 2, Divisions 1 and 2; Groups E, F,
and G.
H. Through Wall and Floor Seals:
1. Materials:
a. Body- casting of malleable or ductile iron with a hot dip galvanized finish.
b. Grommet- neoprene.
c. Pressure rings - PVC coated steel.
d. Disc material - PVC coated steel.
I. Expansion/deflection couplings:
1. Use to compensate for movement in any directions between 2 conduit ends
that they connect.
2. Shall allow movement of 3/4-inch from the normal in all directions.
3. Shall allow angular movement for a deflection of 30 degrees from normal in
any direction.
4. Constructed to maintain electrical continuity of the conduit system.
5. Materials:
a. End couplings — Bronze or galvanized ductile iron.
b. Sleeve - Neoprene.
c. Bands - Stainless Steel.
d. Bonding Jumper-Tinned copper braid.
6. These fittings shall be constructed in such a manner that will provide the
continuity of the ground path in each conduit or raceway.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16130-7 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.16130
I
�I
J. Expansion couplings:
1. Shall allow for expansion and contraction of conduit: X11
a. Permitting 8-inch movement, 4 inches in either direction. �J
2. Constructed to maintain electrical continuity of the conduit system.
3. Materials:
a. Head - Malleable or ductile iron. u
b. Sleeve - Steel.
c. Insulating Bushing - Phenolic.
d. Finish - Hot dip galvanized. L
e. Aluminum when used with conduit type RAC.
4. These fittings shall be constructed in such a manner that will provide the
continuity of the ground path in each conduit or raceway.
K. Conduit markers:
1. In accordance with Sub-Section 10.16075.
2.08 MIXES NOT USED)
2.09 NOT USED)
2.10 FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 NOT USED)
3.02 NOT USED)
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. General:
1. Conduit routing:
a. The Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic in nature:
1) Install conduit runs in accordance with schematic representation
indicated on the Drawings and as specified.
2) Modify conduit runs to suit field conditions, as accepted by the
ENGINEER:
a) Make changes in conduit locations that are consistent with the
design intent but are dimensionally different, or routing to
bypass obstructions.
b) Make changes in conduit routing due to the relocation of
equipment.
3) The Electrical Drawings do not indicate all required junction boxes
and pull boxes:
a) Provide junction boxes and pull boxes to facilitate wire pulling as
required:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16130-8 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl O/Specifications/10.16130 �;
(1) To meet cable manufacturer's pulling tension requirements.
(2) To limit total conduit bends between pull locations.
b) Install junction boxes and pull boxes at locations acceptable to
the ENGINEER.
b. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for any deviations in general location,
conduit size, routing, or changes to the conduit schedule without the
express written approval or direction by the ENGINEER:
1) The ENGINEER is the sole source in determining whether the
change is constituted as a deviation:
2) Perform any changes resulting in additional conduits, or extra work
from such deviations.
3) Incorporate any deviations on the Record Documents.
2. Use only tools recommended by the conduit manufacturer for assembling
conduit system.
3. Provide adequate clearances from high-temperature surfaces for all conduit
runs. Provide minimum clearances as follows:
a. Clearances of 6 inches from surfaces 113 degrees Fahrenheit to
149 degrees Fahrenheit.
b. Clearances of 12 inches from surfaces greater than
149 degrees Fahrenheit.
c. Peep conduit at least 6 inches from the coverings on hot water and steam
pipes, 18 inches from the coverings on flues and breechings and
12 inches from fuel lines and gas lines.
d. Where it is necessary to route conduit close to high-temperature surfaces,
provide a high-reflectance thermal barrier between the conduit and the
surface.
4. Support conduit runs directly from the structure or other system supports:
a. Do not suspend conduits from piping or ducts.
5. Support conduit runs on water-bearing walls a minimum of 7/8-inch away from
wall on an accepted preformed channel:
a. Do not run conduit within water-bearing walls unless otherwise indicated
on the Drawings.
6. Do not install 1 inch or larger conduits in or through structural members unless
approved by the ENGINEER.
7. Run conduit exposed to view parallel with or at right angles to structural
members, walls, or lines of the building:
a. Install straight and true conduit runs with uniform and symmetrical elbows,
offsets, and bends.
b. Make changes in direction with long radius bends or with conduit bodies.
8. Install conduit with total conduit bends between pull locations less than or
equal to 270 degrees.
9. Route all exposed conduit to preserve headroom, access space and work
space and to prevent tripping hazards and clearance problems:
a. Install conduit runs so that runs do not interfere with proper and safe
operation of equipment and do not block or interfere with ingress or
egress, including equipment removal hatches.
b. Route conduit to avoid drains or other gravity lines. Where conflicts occur,
relocate conduit as required.
10. When installing conduit through existing slabs or walls make provisions for
locating any possible conflicting items where conduit is to penetrate. Use tone
signal or X-ray methods to make certain that no penetrations will be made into
existing conduit, piping, cables, post-tensioning cables etc.
i
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16130-9 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.16130
�1
11. Plug conduits brought into pull boxes, manholes, handholes, and other
openings until used to prevent entrance of moisture. �!
12. Install conduit through wall and floor seals where indicated on the Drawings. I
13. For existing and new 2 inch and larger conduit runs, snake conduits with
conduit cleaner equipped with a cylindrical mandrel of a diameter not less than
85 percent of nominal diameter of conduit: I
a. Remove and replace conduits through which mandrel will not pass.
14. Provide all sleeves and openings required for the passage of electrical
raceways or cables even when these openings or sleeves are not specifically
shown on the Drawings.
15. Install complete conduit systems before conductors are installed. al
16. Provide metallic conduits terminating in transformer, switchgear, motor control
center or other equipment conduit windows with grounding bushings and
ground with, a minimum No. 6 AWG ground wire.
17. Underground and embedded conduits:
a. Install underground conduits, including conduit runs below slabs-on-grade
in concrete reinforced duct bank construction:
1) Refer to Sub-Section 10.16133.
b. Make underground conduit size transitions at pullboxes and manholes.
c. Install spare conduits in underground duct banks towards top center of
runs to allow for ease of installation of future cables as conduits enter
underground manholes and pullboxes. f
C. Lighting and Receptacle Conduits:
1. Install conduit runs for lighting and receptacle circuits, whether or not indicated
on the Drawings:
a. Minimum conduit size:
1) 3/4 inch for exposed conduits. l`
2) 1 inch for underground or in slab conduits.
2. Provide conduit materials for the installed location as specified in Sub-
Section 10.16050.
D. Hazardous Areas:
1. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050 for Hazardous Areas and specific Class and
Division.
2. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16052 for Hazardous Area Conduit installation
requirements.
E. Conduit usage:
1. Exposed conduits:
a. Rigid conduit:
1) Install the rigid conduit type for each location as specified in Sub-
Section 10.16050.
2) Minimum Size: 3/4-inch.
b. Flexible conduit:
1) Use flexible conduit for final connections between rigid conduit and
motors, vibrating equipment, instruments, control equipment or
where required for equipment servicing:
a) Use type SLT with rigid metallic conduit.
b) Use type NFC with PVC conduit.
2) Minimum size: 3/4-inch:
a) 1/2 when required for connection to instruments.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16130-10 82351310
pw:HCarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications110.16130
3) Maximum length:
Conduit Trade size Flexible Conduit Length in
1/2 18
3/4 18
1 18
1-1/4 18
1-1/2 18
2 36
2-1/2 36
3 36
3-1/2 38
4 40
2. Direct buried.conduits:
a. Type PCS.
b. Minimum size: 1-inch.
3. PVC coated rigid metallic conduit (PCS):
a. Use specifically manufactured or machined threading dies to
manufacturer's specifications to accommodate the PVC jacket.
F. Conduit joints and bends:
1. General:
a. Where conduit is underground, under slabs on grade, exposed to the
weather or in NEMA 4 or NEMA 4X locations, make joints liquid-tight.
b. Keep bends and offsets in conduit runs to an absolute minimum.
c. All bends shall be symmetrical.
d. The following conduit systems shall use large radius sweep elbows:
1) Underground conduits.
2) Conduits containing medium voltage cables.
3) Conduits containing shielded cables.
4) Conduits containing fiber optic cables.
e. Provide large radius factory-made bends for 1-1/4-inch trade size or
larger.
f. Make field bends with a radius of not less than the requirements found in
the NEC:
1) The minimum bending radius of the cable must be less than the
radius of the conduit bend.
2) Make all field bends with power bending equipment or manual
benders specifically intended for the purpose:
a) Make bends so that the conduit is not damaged and the internal
diameter is not effectively reduced.
b) For the serving utilities, make bends to meet their requirements.
g. Replace all deformed, flattened, or kinked conduit.
2. Threaded conduit:
a. Cut threads on rigid metallic conduit with a standard conduit cutting die
that provides a 3/4-inch per foot taper and to a length such that all bare
metal exposed by the threading operation is completely covered by the
couplings or fittings used. In addition, cut the lengths of the thread such
that all joints become secure and wrench tight just preceding the point
where the conduit ends would butt together in couplings or where conduit
ends would butt into the ends or shoulders of other fittings.
b. Thoroughly ream conduit after threads have been cut to remove burrs.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16130-11 8235610
pw:ICarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton18235610/1pec cations 11016130
�i
c. Use bushings or conduit fittings at conduit terminations.
d. On exposed conduits, repair scratches and other defects with galvanizing
repair stick, Enterprise Galvanizing "Galvabar" or CRC "Zinc It."
e. Coat conduit threads with an approved electrically conductive sealant and
corrosion inhibitor.that is not harmful to the conductor insulation: nn
1) Apply to the male threads and tighten joints securely. t.J�
2) Clean excess sealant from exposed threads after assembly.
f. Securely tighten all threaded connections.
g. Any exposed threaded surface must be cleaned and coated with a
galvanizing solution so that all exposed surfaces have a galvanized
protective coating.
3. Nonmetallic (PVC):
a. Use approved solvent-weld cement specifically manufactured for the
purpose. Spray type cement is not allowed.
b. Apply heat for bends so that conduit does not distort or discolor. Use a 0
spring mandrel as required to assure full inside diameter at all bends: r
1) Utilize a heater specifically for PVC conduit as recommended by the
conduit manufacturer. 0
G. Conduit sealing and drainage:
1. Conduit drainage and sealing other than required for hazardous and classified
areas:
a. Provide sealing and drainage in vertical drops of long (in excess of
20 feet), exterior, above grade conduit runs at the points at which the ri
conduit enter buildings, switchgear, control panels, lighting panelboards,
and other similar enclosures.
b. Provide seal fittings with drains in vertical drops directly above grade for
exterior, above grade conduit runs that are extended below grade.
c. Provide conduit seals with drains in areas of high humidity and rapidly
changing temperatures:
1) Where portions of an interior raceway pass through walls, ceilings or
floors that separate adjacent areas having widely different
temperatures.
d. Provide conduit seals similar to O/Z Gedney (Type CSB series) on all �6
conduits between corrosive and non-corrosive areas. c
e. Seal one end only of all underground conduits at highest point with O/Z
Gedney sealing (non-hazardous)filling, or equal.
I
2. Install seals with drains at all control panels,junction boxes, pullboxes, low `
points of conduit, or any place where moisture may condense and accumulate:
a. .Provide Crouse-Hinds Type EYD or approved equal, where drains are
required.
b. Provide Crouse-Hinds Type EYS or approved equal, where drains are not
required.
H. Conduit supports:
1. General:
a. Provide appropriate hangers, supports, fasteners, and seismic restraints
to suit applications:
1) Provide support materials consistent with the type of conduit being
installed as specified in Sub-Section 10.16050.
b. Support conduit at the intervals required by the National Electrical Code.
�6
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16130-12 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClientlWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.16130
�D
c. Perforated strap and plumbers tape are not acceptable for conduit
supports.
2. Above suspended ceilings:
a. Support conduit on or from the structure, do not support conduit from
hanging wires or suspended ceiling grid.
3. Concealed conduit on wood:
a. Use 2-hole galvanized steel straps screwed or nailed to the wood or
hammer-driven stamped galvanized type supports having serrated or
sawtooth edges on the driven portion and designed specifically for the
size and type of conduit being supported. Drive these latter supports so
that the conduit is tightly and rigidly supported. Replace any dented or
damaged conduit.
4. In steel stud construction:
a. Tie conduit at maximum 4-foot intervals with No. 16 gauge double
annealed galvanized wire or conduit clips so that conduit cannot move
from vibration or other causes.
5. Conduit on concrete or masonry:
a. Use 1-hole malleable iron straps with metallic or plastic expansion
anchors and screws or support from preset inserts.
b. Use preset inserts in concrete when possible.
c. Use pipe spacers (clamp backs) in wet locations.
d. On plaster or stucco, use 1-hole malleable iron straps with toggle bolts.
6. Conduit on metal decking:
a. Use 1-hole malleable iron straps with 1-inch long cadmium-plated Type A
panhead sheet metal screws. Fully or partially hammer-driven screws are
not acceptable.
7. Suspended conduit:
a. Use malleable iron factory-made split-hinged pipe rings with threaded
suspension rods sized for the weight to be carried (minimum 3/8-inch
diameter), Kindorf, or equal.
b. For grouped conduits, construct racks with threaded rods and tiered angle
iron or preformed channel cross members. Clamp each conduit
individually to a cross member. Where rods are more than 2 feet long,
provide rigid sway bracing.
8. Supports at structural steel members:
a. Use beam clamps.
b. Drilling or welding may be used only as indicated or with approval of the
ENGINEER.
9. PVC coated rigid conduit (PCS) systems:
a. Provide right angle beam clamps and U bolts specially formed and sized
to snugly fit the outside diameter of the coated conduit. Provide "U" bolts
with PVC encapsulated nuts that cover the exposed portions of the
threads.
b. Securely fasten exposed conduits with Type 316 stainless steel clamps or
straps.
I. Expansion or expansion/deflection fittings:
1. General:
a. Align expansion coupling with the conduit run to prevent binding.
b. Follow manufacturer's instructions to set the piston opening.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16130-13 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documerits/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.16130
i
c. Install expansion fittings across concrete expansion joints and at other
locations where necessary to compensate for thermal or mechanical
expansion and contraction.
d. Furnish fittings of the same material as the conduit system._
2. For metallic conduit (PCS, PCA, GRC-and RAC) provide expansion or I
expansion/deflection couplings, as appropriate, where:
a. Install expansion fittings a minimum of every 200 feet in straight conduit
runs.
3. For PVC provide expansion or expansion/deflection couplings, as appropriate,
where length change due to temperature variation exceeds 2 inches:
a. Rigidly fix the outer barrel of the expansion coupling so it cannot move.
b. Mount the conduit connected to the piston loosely enough to allow the
conduit to move as the temperature changes.
J. Empty conduits:
1. Provide a polyethylene rope rated 250 pounds tensile strength in each empty
conduit more than 10 feet in length.
2. Seal ends of all conduit with approved, manufactured conduit seals, caps or
plugs immediately after installation: tJ
a. Keep ends sealed until immediately before pulling conductors.
K. Miscellaneous:
1. Provide flashings and counter flashings or pitch pockets for waterproofing of
raceways, outlets, fittings, and other items that penetrate the roof.
2. Provide electrical unions at all points of union between ends of rigid conduit
systems that cannot otherwise be coupled:
a. Running threads and threadless couplings are not allowed.
3. Replace any conduit installed that the ENGINEER determines does not meet
the requirements of this Specification.
3.04 INSTAL 1 ATION APPLICATIONS, CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED)
3.05 REPAIRIRESTO ATION (NOT USED)
3.06 RE-INSTALLATION ATION (NOT USED)
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
3.08 (NOT USED)
3.09 CLEAN (NOT USED)
3.10 DEMONSTILATIfIN AND TRAINING (NOT USED)
3.11 PROTECTION
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
3.12 (NOT USED)
END OF SUB-SECTION
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16130-14 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235610/Specifications/10.16130 ��
SUB-SECTION 10.16133
DUCT BANKS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes requirements for:
1. Electrical underground duct banks.
2. Duct spacing and terminations.
3. Excavation and Patching.
4. Coordination with other underground utilities.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
a. Sub-Section 10.16050 - General Requirements for Electrical Work.
b. Sub-Section 10.16130 - Conduits.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide trenching, forming, rebar, spacers, conduit, concrete, backfill, compaction
necessary for the complete installation of the duct banks.
B. Provide duct banks for all conduits installed below grade, on the site, below
structures, or in contact with the earth, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
` A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sub-Sections 10.01330 and 10.16050.
B. Product Data:
1. PVC conduit spacers.
2. Detectable underground marking tape.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16133-1 8235B10
pw://Carollo/Documents/Cli ent/WA/Renton/8235 Bl 0/Specifications/I 0.16133
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit site plan drawings of duct banks including underground profiles
indicating all underground utilities. '
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE �!
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050. I
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050. `
1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS �r
A. Refer to Sub-Section.10.16050.
B. Field Conditions and Related Requirements:
1. Underground water table may be near or above the location of new ductbanks. �
2. CONTRACTOR shall include cost for necessary dewatering, and cleaning
equipment to perform work in underground ductbanks, pull boxes and
manholes, before installation.
1.09 (NOT USED)
1.10 NOT USED) Itl�
r
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.12 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
�I
1.13 (NOT USED)
1.14 COMMISSIONING NOT USED) n
1.15 MAIAITRNANCE (NOT USED) BEM
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Conduit Spacers:
1. One of the following or equal:
a. Carlon Snap-Loc.
b. Cantex.
c. Osburn Associates, Inc. ff
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16133-2 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.16133
B. Detectable Underground Marking Tape:
1. One of the following or equal:
a. Blackburn Manufacturing Company.
b. Pro-Line Safety Products.
c. Panduit.
C. Pull Line:
1. One of the following or equal:
a. Arnco.
b. Greenlee.
c. Osburn Associates, Inc.
2.02 (NOT USED)
2.03 MATERIALS
A. For conduit requirements, refer to Sub-Section 10.16130:
1. Use duct suitable for use with 90 degree Celsius rated conductors.
2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Conduit Spacers:
1. Provide conduit spacers recommended by the conduit manufacturer or listed
above.
2. Saddle type.
3. Non-metallic, non-corrosive, non-conductive.
4. Interlocking Type:
a. Vertical interlocking.
b. Horizontal interlocking.
5. Suitable for concrete encasement.
6. Molded-in rebar holder.
7. Accommodates 2 inch through 6 inch conduit sizes.
8. Relieves the conduit from both horizontal and vertical stresses.
�. B. Pull Line:
1. Minimum 1/4 inch wide, flat design.
2. Polyester.
3. Minimum pulling strength 1,200 pounds.
4. Sequential footage markings.
C. Detectable Marking Tape:
1. Provide a detectable tape, locatable by a cable or metal detector from above
the undisturbed grade.
2. Aluminum core laminated between polyethylene film.
. 3. Six inch wide Red tape imprinted with black lettering "CAUTION - BURIED
ELECTRIC UTILITIES."
2.05 EQUIPMENT-(NOT USED)
2.06 COMPONE (NOT USED)
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16133-3 8235B10
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClientfWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.16133
2.07 (NOT USED)
2.08 MMX€S(NOT USED) -
�I
2.09 ON-(NOT USED)
2.10 FINISHES., (NOT USED)
� I
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY ITV CONTROL--(NOT USED) �I
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAIIAINATInA1 (NOT USED)
3.02 PRCDARATION (NOT USED)
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
�I
B. Duct banks:
1. Install duct banks at least 24 inches below finish grade, unless otherwise
indicated on the Drawings.
2. Damage minimization:
a. Conduit should not be left exposed in an open trench longer than is
necessary.
b. Protect all underground duct banks against damage during pouring of
concrete or backfilling.
3. Install pull line in spare conduits:
a. Provide adequate pull line at both ends of conduits to facilitate conductor
pulling.
b. Cap above ground spare conduit risers at each end with screw-on conduit
caps.
C. Duct spacing:
1. Separate conduits with manufactured plastic spacers using a minimum space
between the outside surfaces of adjacent conduits of 1.5 inches:
2. Install spacers on 8 foot maximum intervals:
a. Due to some distortion of conduit from heat, and other means, it may be
necessary to install extra spacers within the duct bank:
1) Install the intermediate set of spacers within normal required spacing
to maintain the proper horizontal clearance:
a) Clearance is required to allow the proper amount of concrete to
infiltrate vertically among the duct to ensure proper protection.
3. Spacers should not be located at the center of a bend:
a. Locate spacer in the tangent, free of the coupling on fabricated bends.
b. Locate spacers midway between the tangent and the center bend on
trench formed sweeps.
D. Terminating: �t
1. Use bell ends in duct at entrances into cable vaults.
2. Make conduit entrances into cable vaults tangential to walls of cable vault.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16133-4 8235610
pw:#Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.16133 �'
3. Form trapezoidal transitions between duct bank and cable vaults as needed in
order to ensure adequate cable bending radius for the duct bank-to-vault
transition.
4. New manhole or handhole applications, provide a single opening or "window"
per duct bank, sized to accommodate the duct bank envelope.
E. Marking tape:
1. Install a detectable marking tape 12 inches above the duct bank the entire
length of the duct bank.
F. Restore all surfaces to their original condition, unless otherwise specified.
' 3.04 NOT USED
3.05 REPA WREST-GRATIO (NOT USED)
I
3.06 RE-INSTALLATION ATION (NOT USED)
' 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
3.08 (NOT USED
3.09 CLEANING
A. Clean conduits of dirt and debris by use of an appropriately sized steel mandrel no
less than 1/2 inch smaller than the inside diameter of the conduit.
3.10 (NOT USED)
3.11 PROTECTION
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. Provide shoring and pumping to protect the excavation and safety of workers.
C. Protect excavations with barricades as required by applicable safety regulations.
3.12 (NOT USED)
END OF SUB-SECTION
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16133-5 82351310
pw:I/Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235BI OlSpecifications/10.16133
OI
O�
OI
a�
�i
�1
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16133-6 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.16133 '
' SUB-SECTION 10.16134
BOXES
PART GENERAL
' 1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes requirements for:
' 1. Device boxes.
2. Raceway system boxes.
B. Related Sections/Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
' 2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sections/Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this
Sub-Section. This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided for
convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty
of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
' with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 1-05 - Control of Work.
b. Sub-Section 10.16050 - General Requirements for Electrical Work.
1.02 REFERENCES
' A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1. FB1 — Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable
Assemblies.
2. OS1 —Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
3. OS2 — Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
4. 250— Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).
C. Underwriters Laboratory:
1. UL Standard 498 and 514.
D. Federal Specification No. W-C-586B.
' 1.03 DEFINITIONS
' A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. Specific Definitions:
1. Arcing Parts: Circuit breakers, motor controllers, switches, fuses, or any device
intended to interrupt current during its operation.
2. Raceway System Boxes: Boxes that are used for wire and cable pullboxes,
conduit junction boxes, or terminal boxes.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16134-1 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents//Client[WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.16134
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide outlet boxes for devices such as switches, receptacles, telephone and al
computer jacks, security systems,junction and pullboxes for use in the raceway
systems, etc. Q)
B. Provide boxes and conduit bodies as indicated on the Drawings or as needed to
complete the raceway installation. �)
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 1-05 and Sub-Section 10.16050. OI
B. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer. (�[
2. Materials. ut
3. Dimensions:
a. Height.
b. Width.
c. Depth.
d. Weight.
e. NEMA Rating.
4. Conduit entry locations.
5. Catalog cut sheets.
6. Installation instructions.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Include identification and sizes of pull boxes. I�
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Outlet boxes shall comply with all applicable standards of:
a. National Electrical Code.
b. National Electrical Manufacturers Association. r'
c. Underwriters Laboratories. I
d. Joint Industry Conference.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS (!
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050. I'
1.09 SEQUENCING
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16134-2 82351310
pw:l/Carollo/Documentsl/ClienYWA/Renton/8235Bl OtSpecifications/10.16134
1.10 (NOT USED)
1.11 WARRANTY
' A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.12 SYSTEM START UP
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.13 (NOT USED)
1.14 (NOT USED)
1.15 ' MAINTENANCE (NOT USED)
1 PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
' A. One of the following or equal:
1. Pressed steel boxes:
a. Steel City.
b. Appleton.
c. Crouse - Hinds.
d. Thomas & Betts.
2. Plastic and/or fiberglass boxes:
a. Hoffman.
b. Carlon.
c. Stahlin.
3. Plastic coated steel boxes:
a. Rob Roy.
b. OCAL.
4. Cast device boxes:
a. Appleton.
b. Crouse - Hinds.
c. OZ/Gedney.
5. Floor outlet boxes with 1 inch conduit knockouts:
a. Steel City, 640 Series.
' b. Hubbell Type B25 with S2530 coverplate.
6. Floor outlet boxes in open areas:
a. Hubbell SC-3098 with plate SS-309-D for power.
' b. Hubbell SC-3098 with plate SS-309-T for telephone.
7. In-use weatherproof non-metallic GFI outlet box and cover:
a. Carlon.
' b. Tay-Mac.
8. Formed steel enclosures:
a. Hoffman.
b. Thomas and Betts.
' c. Stahlin.
d. Rittal.
9. Stainless steel enclosures:
S eptember 10, 2010 -
FINAL 10.16134-3 8235610
pw:l/Carollo/Documents//Client/WA/Renton 18235810/Specifications/10 16134
01
a. Hoffman.
b. Stahlin. O�
c. Rittal..
10. Pressed steel boxes and concrete boxes:
a. Appleton. a)
b. Steel City.
c. Cooper/Crouse Hinds.
d. OZ Gedney. a�
2.02 (NOT USED)
2.03 M TCOIAI c (NOT USED)
2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Pressed Steel Boxes: a�
1. One-piece galvanized pressed steel.
2. Knockout type boxes. al
3. Minimum size 4-inch square by 2-1/8-inch deep. i
B. Concrete Boxes: al
1. For outlets and pull boxes in concrete construction.
2. Pressed steel or cast construction, concrete tight.
3. Knockout size range 1/2-inch to 1-inch.
4. Depth as needed.
5. Types:
a. Four-inch octagon.
b. Four-inch octagon ceiling boxes with hanging bars. pl
c. Gangable Masonry Boxes:
1) 3-1/2 inch deep, 3-3/4 inch high, length as required:
a) 2-1/2 inch deep boxes may be used where wall thickness �!
precludes the use of the deeper boxes.
2) With partitions as needed.
C. Threaded-Hub Boxes: 0�
1. Construction:
a. With internal green ground screw.
b. Furnished with a suitable gasketed cover. OI
c. With integral cast mounting lugs when surface mounted.
d. Conduit size range from 3/4 inch to 1 inch.
e. Tapered threaded hubs with integral bushing. Qf
2. Aluminum (copper free) boxes:
a. High strength copper free 4/10 of 1 percent maximum alloy for use with
aluminum rigid conduit. pi
3. Malleable iron boxes: f
a. Conforming to ASTM A47-77 Grade 32510.
D. Plastic Coated Threaded-Hub Boxes:
1. Construction:
a. With internal green ground screw. OI
b. Furnished with a suitable gasketed cover.
c. With integral cast mounting lugs when surface mounted.
d. Conduit size range from 3/4-inch to 1-inch. �I
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16134-4 8235810
pw://Carollo/DocumentsllClientlWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specificabons/10.16134
e. Double coated with a nominal 0.002-inch (2 mil) urethane on both the
interior and exterior before application of PVC coating.
f. With a minimum 0.040-inch (40 mil) PVC coating bonded to exterior.
g. With pressure sealing sleeve to protect the connection with conduit.
E. Class I Division 1 Areas:
1. Provide boxes designed and listed for Class I Division 1 locations and Group
type atmosphere in which they will be used:
a. The approval ratings must be permanently marked on each item.
F. Class I, Division 2 Areas:
1. For boxes not containing arcing parts:
a. Refer to Sub-Section 16050.
b. Pressed metal boxes are not allowed.
2. For boxes containing arching parts provide:
a. Provide boxes designed and listed for Class I Division 1 locations and
Group type atmosphere in which they will be used:
1) The approval ratings must be permanently marked on each item.
3. Cast iron box and cover.
4. Precision machined flame path between box and cover with neoprene o-ring.
5. Bolt-on stainless steel slotted mounting feet for horizontal or vertical mounting.
6. For applications requiring hinged cover, provide flexible hinge mounting either
left or right side.
7. External flange.
8. Provisions for mounting pan.
9. Ground lug.
G. Fiberglass Boxes:
1. NEMA 4X.
2. Constructed of molded fiberglass reinforced polyester.
3. Integral neoprene gasket on cover attached with an oil-resistant adhesive.
4. Enclosures to have internal pads for mounting optional panels and terminal
kits.
' 5. Covers:
a. Screw cover enclosures:
1) Covers held in place with captive, stainless steel, or monel screws.
' 2) . Covers attached to body with internal zinc-plated steel hinges.
b. Quick release latches covers:
1) Corrosion resistant fiberglass hinges.
2) Spring loaded fiberglass latches with a monel or stainless steel bail
attached with monel or stainless steel screws.
3) With a 316 stainless steel padlock hasp.
6. With external mounting feet.
7. Meeting the following minimum standards and tests:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16134-5 82351310
pw:llca,of to lDocumentsllclient/WA/Rentonlll ll610/Specirications110.16134
i
0!
Physical Property_ Value ASTM Method
Flexural Strength 12,000 PSI D-790
O�
Heat Distortion 400° Fahrenheit D-648 a�
Water Absorption (24hrs) 0.5 percent D-570
Tensile Strength 5000 PSI D-651
Specific Gravity 1.8 D-792
Flammability 94V-0 UL-94
Dielectric Strength 4000 V.P.M D-149
Arc Resistance 180 Second D-495 nn
u�
H. Formed Steel Enclosures:
1. Steel: 01
a. NEMA 12.
b. Fabricated from 14 gauge steel, minimum.
c. All seams continuously welded ground smooth.
d. Door:
1) Rolled lip around 3 sides.
2) Attached to enclosure by means of a continuous stainless steel hinge
and pin. Q�
e. Neoprene door gasket to provide a watertight, dusttight, oiltight seal:
1) Attached with an adhesive.
2) Retained by a retaining strip. O!
f. Fabricate all external removable hardware for clamping the door to the
enclosure body from zinc plated heavy gauge steel:
1) With a hasp and staple for padlocking. , O�
g. Provide large enclosures with door and body stiffeners for extra rigidity.
h. No holes or knockouts.
i. Finish:
1) ANSI-61 gray electrostatically applied polyester powder inside and
out over cleaned and primed surfaces.
2) White electrostatically applied polyester powder mounting plate.
j. Heavy gauge steel external mounting brackets when surface mounted.
2. Stainless Steel:
a. NEMA 4X:
1) Boxes in locations subject to flooding or temporary submersion:
a) NEMA 6.
b. Fabricated from 14-gauge type 316 stainless steel.
c. All seams continuously welded.
d. Door:
1) Rolled lip around three sides.
2) Attached to enclosure by means of a continuous stainless steel hinge
and pin.
e. Neoprene door gasket to provide a watertight seal:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16134-6 8235610
pw:l/Carollo/Documents//Client/WA/Renton1 8235B10/5pecifications110.16134 ��
1) Attached with an adhesive.
' 2) Retained by a retaining strip.
f. Fabricate all external removable hardware for clamping the door to the
enclosure body from heavy gauge stainless steel:
1) With a hasp and staple for padlocking.
g. Provide large enclosures with door and body stiffeners for extra rigidity.
h. No holes or knockouts.
is Finish:
1) Brushed.
j. Stainless steel external mounting brackets when surface mounted.
I. Cast Iron Junction Boxes:
1. NEMA 4.
2. Recessed cover boxes.
3. Suitable for use outdoors where subject to rain, dripping, or splashing water.
4. Designed for flush mounting in walls or floors:
a. Can be surface mounted using mounting lugs.
5. Construction:
a. Cast iron box.
b. Covers:
1) Checkered plate covers suitable for foot traffic.
2) When used in areas subject to vehicular traffic H-20 loading.
c. Hot dip galvanized.
d. Neoprene gasket.
e. Stainless steel screw covers.
J. Floor Type Outlet Boxes:
1. Watertight cast iron, semi adjustable.
2. Telephone outlets shall be fitted with 6 inch bushed nipples.
3. Provide a pedestal housing for floor outlets in open areas.
4. Suitable for receptacles, communications, and data outlets as specified and
indicated on the Drawings, complete with gaskets and cover plates:
2.05 EQUIPMENT-(NOT USED)
2.06 COMPONENTS (NOT USED)
2.07 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners:
1. Electroplated or stainless steel in boxes with wiring devices.
2. Screws, nuts, bolts, and other threaded fasteners:
a. Stainless steel.
B. Provide breather and drain fittings where appropriate.
C. Internal Panels:
1. Provide internal panels where required for mounting of terminal strips or other
equipment.
2. With plated steel shoulder studs.
3. Steel with white polyester powder finish.
2.08 MIXES (NOT USED)
September 10 2010 - FINAL
10.16134-7 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documen tsl/Client[WA/Rentord8235B10/Specifications/10.16134
of
2.09 FABRIGATI (NOT USED)
2.10 F'""Eo-(NOT USED)
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL (NOT USED) rn
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION (NOT USED) o�
3.02 PREPARAT'ON (NOT USED) (�{
3.03 INSTALLATION u�
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050. ai
B. General:
1. Provide materials and construction suitable for environmental conditions at the
location of the box as indicated in Sub-Section 10.16050.
2. Provide outlet box materials to match the conduit system:
a. EMT - Pressed Metal Boxes. p�
b. GRC - Cast Ferrous Boxes.
c. RAC - Rigid Aluminum Conduit.
d. PCS - PVC Coated Cast Ferrous Boxes. o�
e. PVC - PVC Boxes.
f. PCA- PVC Coated Aluminum Boxes.
3. Solid Type Gang Boxes: 0�
a. For more than 2 devices.
b. For barriered outlets.
4. Support all wall mounted NEMA 4 or NEMA 4X boxes to maintain a minimum
of 7/8-inch free air space between the back of the enclosure and the wall:
a. Use machined spacers to maintain air space; built-up washers are not
acceptable. aF
b. Use stainless steel or nylon materials for spacers.
5. Use cast malleable iron boxes when box must support other devices.
6. Boxes serving luminaires or devices:
a. Use as pull boxes wherever possible.
7. Fit all cast boxes and pressed steel boxes for flush mounting in concrete with
cast, malleable box covers and gaskets.
8. In terminal boxes, furnish terminals as indicated on the Drawings, with a Q�
minimum of 50 percent spare terminals:
a. Furnish wireways for discrete and analog/DC wiring.
b. Separate analog wiring from 120V discrete or power wiring. O�
9. Size boxes to meet NEC requirements and to provide sufficient room for the
future components and cables indicated on the Drawings.
10. For fire-rated construction, provide materials and installation for use in (�
accordance with the listing requirements of the classified construction. u`
C. Outlet Boxes:
1. Locate outlet boxes as indicated on the Drawings:
a. Adjust locations so as not to conflict with structural requirements or other
trades.
September -
pte ber 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16134 8 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documentsll ClienttWAIRenton/8235BI0/Specifications/10.16134
2. Use deep threaded-hub malleable iron or aluminum boxes:
a. In hazardous areas.
b. Where exposed to the weather.
c. In unheated areas.
d. Where subject to mechanical damage:
1) Defined as exposed boxes less than 10 feet above the floor.
e. To act as a pull box for conductors in a conduit system.
f. Accommodate wiring devices.
3. Use deep threaded-hub plastic coated malleable iron boxes in corrosive and
NEMA 4X area and when the conduit system is PVC coated steel.
I4. Outlet boxes may be used as junction boxes wherever possible.
D. Pull boxes and junction boxes:
1. Size pull boxes to meet NEC requirements and to provide sufficient room for
I any future conduits and cables as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Install pull boxes such that access to them is not restricted.
E. For boxes not indicated:
1. Provide types and mountings as required to suit the equipment and that will be
consistent with the conduit system and environmental conditions as indicated
in Sub-Section 10.16050.
2. Outlet, switch, and junction boxes for flush-mounting in general purpose
locations:
a. One-piece, galvanized, pressed steel..
t 3. Ceiling boxes for flush mounting in concrete:
a. Deep, galvanized, pressed steel.
4. Outlet, switch, and junction boxes where surface mounted in exposed
locations:
a. Cast ferrous boxes with mounting lugs, zinc or cadmium plating finish.
5. Outlet, control station, and junction boxes for installation in corrosive locations:
a. Fiberglass reinforced polyester, stainless steel, or plastic coated steel to
match the conduit system.
b. Furnished with mounting lugs.
6. Boxes for concealed conduit system:
a. Non-fire rated construction:
1) Depth: To suit job conditions and comply with the NEC.
2) For Luminaries: Use outlet boxes designed for the purpose:
a) 50 pounds or less: Box marked "FOR FIXTURE SUPPORT."
b) More than 50 pounds: Box listed and marked with the weight of
the fixture to be supported (or support luminaire independent of
the box).
3) For ceiling suspended fans:
a) 35 pounds or less: Marked "Acceptable for Fan Support."
b) More than 35 pounds, up to 70 pounds: Marked "Acceptable for
Fan Support up to 70 pounds (or support fan independent of the
box)."
4) For junction and pull boxes: Use galvanized steel boxes with flush
covers.
5) For switches, receptacles, etc:
a) Plaster or cast-in-place concrete walls: Use 4 inch or
4-11/16 inch galvanized steel boxes with device covers.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16134-9 8235B10
pw://Carollo/Documents//Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specificatons/10.16134
b) Walls other than plaster or cast-in-place concrete: Use type of
galvanized steel box which will allow wall plate to cover the
opening made for the installation of the box.
7. Recessed boxes in fire rated (2 hour maximum) bearing and nonbearing wood
or steel stud walls (gypsum wallboard facings):
a. Use listed single and double gang metallic outlet and switch boxes. The
surface area of individual outlet or switch boxes shall not exceed
16 square inches.
b. The aggregate surface area of the boxes shall not exceed 100 square
inched per 100 square feet of wall surface.
c. Securely fasten boxes to the studs. Verify that the opening in the 0B
wallboard facing is cut so that the clearance between the box and the
wallboard does not exceed 1/8 inch.
d. Separate boxes located on opposite sides of walls or partitions by a
minimum horizontal distance of 24 inches. This minimum separation
distance may be reduced when wall opening protective materials are
installed according to the requirements of their classification.
e. Use wall opening protective material in conjunction with boxes installed on
opposite sides of walls or partitions of staggered stud construction in
accordance with the classification requirements for the protective material.
8. Other fire rated construction: Use materials and methods to comply with the �P
listing requirements for the classified construction. 6
F. Recessed Boxes: e
1. Support recessed boxes in suspended ceilings or stud partitions with
galvanized steel box hangers of types made specifically for the purpose or
attach directly to wood members or blocking.
2. Secure hangers or boxes to wood with 1 inch long cadmium-plated Type A
pan head screws:
a. Fully or partially hammer-driven screws are not acceptable.
G. Hazardous Locations:
1. All metallic boxes, fittings, and joints shall utilize threaded connections to the
conduit system.
2. All threaded connections shall be wrench tightened so that at least 5 threads
are fully engaged. ' -
3. Conduits entering and exiting metallic boxes in Class I Division 2 areas shall
utilize approved.grounding bushings to bond the conduits together.
4. Provide the following types of conduit bodies and boxes:
a. Malleable iron bodies and boxes with GRC or IMC conduit systems.
b. PVC coated conduit bodies and boxes with PCS conduit systems.
3.04 ERECTION INSTAL I ATION APPLICATION, CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED)
3.05 RCPAIClCCCT/1CAT1/lAl•v•-' ^• `• '
(NOT USED)
3.06 REINSTALLATION ATION (NOT USED) �b
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 6
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16134-10 82351310
pwi/ICarollo/Documents//Client/WAIRenton18235B101Specifications110.16134
I
3.08 (NOT USED)
! 3.09 CLEANING
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
3.10 (NOT USED)
3.11 PROTECTION
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
! 3.12 SCHEDULESOOT USED)
END OF SUB-SECTION
i
!
!
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16134-11 8235B10
pw:/ICarollo/Docume,,,,,c,ient/WA/RentonIII31BI011pecficalons/10.16134
I
O!
I
�E
DI
DE
a!
OI
OE
EE!
OE
OE
DE
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16134-12 8235810
pw:HCarollo/Documents//ClientfWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.16134 �!
SUB-SECTION 10.16140
WIRING DEVICES
PART GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes requirements for:
1. Switches.
2. Receptacles.
3. Plates.
B. Related Sections/Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's-responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sections/Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this
Sub-Section. This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided for
convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty
of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 1-05 - Control of Work.
b. Sub-Section 10.16050 - General Requirements for Electrical Work.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):
1. 20 - General use Snap Switches.
2. 498 - Standard for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles.
3. 514D - Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices.
4. 943 - Standard for Safety for Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters.
5. 1474 - Solid State Dimming Control.
C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1. WD1 - General color requirement for wiring devices.
2. ICS 5 - Control circuits and pilot devices.
3. OS1 - Device box, covers, and box supports.
4. WD6 -Wiring devices dimensional requirements.
D. Federal Specification:
I 1. W-C 596.
2. W-S 896.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
Se ptember 10, 2010 -
FINAL 10.16140-1 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton18235B10/Specifications/10.16140
B. Specific Definitions:
1. GFCI: Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter.
2. P-S: Pass and Seymour.
3. CWD: Cooper Wiring Devices.
4. T&B: Thomas and Betts.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Switches, receptacles, and plates as indicated on the Drawings wired and operable
to form a complete system.
1.05 SUBMITTALS Q!
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 1-05 and Sub-Section 10.16050. i
B. Product Data:
1. Catalog cut sheets.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Engraving Schedule:
a. Furnish complete engraving schedule for engraved nameplates.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050. n�
B. Wiring devices shall be UL listed and labeled. JJ
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050. LI�
1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS u
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.09 SEQUENGI (NOT USED)
1.10 (NOT USED)
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.12 SYSTEM START-UP
A. . Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.13 (NOT USED)
1.14 CORAMISSIGNING (NOT USED) �r
1.15 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) `
ul
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16140-2 82351310
pw:gCarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.16140
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Switches:
1. General purpose toggle switches, one of the following or equal:
a. Part numbers are for brown switches:
1-pole 2-pole 3-way 4-way
Hubbell HBL 1221 HBL 1222 HBL 1223 HBL 1224
Leviton 1221-2 1222-2 1223-2 1224-2
CWD 4901 4902 4903 4904
2. Switches for NEMA 4 and NEMA 4X locations, one of the following or equal.
1-pole 2-pole 3-way 4-way
Hubbell HBL 1281 HBL 1282 HBL 1283 HBL 1284
Cooper Wiring Devices 2291 2292 2293 2294
3. Switches for office areas, one of the following or equal:
1-pole 2-29le 3-way 4-way
Hubbell HBL 21211 HBL 21221 HBL 21231 HBL 21241
CWD 5621-2 5622-2 5623-2 5624-2
4. Switches for photocells, one of the following or equal:
Single-pole, double-throw
Hubbell HBL 1385
CWD 2226
5. Switches for hazardous areas, one of the following or equal:
1-pole 2-pole 3-way 4-way
Appleton EDS2129 EDS218 EDS2130 EDS2140
Crouse-Hinds EDS2129 EDS218 EDS2130 EDS2140
6. Dimmer switches:
a. Rectangular design with LED light level indicators:
1) Lutron MAESTROTm MA-1000 controller for incandescent light.
2) Lutron MAESTROTm MALV-1000 controller for magnetic low-voltage
lights.
3) Lutron MAESTROTm MA-R remote for additional control stations.
B. Receptacles:
1. General purpose receptacles, one of the following or equal:
a. Part numbers are for brown receptacles.
Single Duplex GFCI Weather Resistant
GFCI
Hubbell HBL5361 HBL5362 GF5362A GFR5362SG
Leviton 5361 5362 6899 W7899-W
CWD 5361 B 5362B HGF20B WRVGF20W
2. Receptacles for hazardous areas, the following or equal:
a. Crouse-Hinds: CPS152.
3. 250 VAC receptacles, one of the following or equal:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16140-3 8235B10
pw:ll carollo/Documentslcl ienMA/Renton/8235 B 10/speci,cation,/10.11110
�i
a. Hubble-Killark Versamate VR.
4. 480-Volt, 3-Phase receptacles:
a. 30 Ampere:
1) Crouse-Hinds ARE3423.
2) Hubbell Hubbellock®21420.
3) RussellstolTm DF3404FRAB.
b. 60 Ampere:
1) Crouse-Hinds AREA6425. (R
2) Hubbell Hubbellock®26410 or 26420 with 26401 box and 26404 ll�
adapter.
3) RussellstolTm DF6404FRAB. fl,
C. Plates:
1. General location, one of the following or equal:
a. Provide plates with number of gangs as required: �I
Standard
Office Duplex GFCI
Switches Switches Receptacles Receptacles Ui
P-S SS 1-N SS26 SS8 W PH26 Ui
2. Wet or corrosive areas, one of the following or equal: Q!
Indoor `
Outdoor Duplex Corrosive
Switches Receptacles Receptacles Locations fl�
Hubbell 1750 ll
T&B CCT CKMD
P-S CAI-GL CA8-GH. 3780-SC
2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS a�
A. Switches:
1. General:
a. 120-277 VAC.
b. 20 Ampere. (n
c. Specification grade. �[
d. Back and side wired unless otherwise indicated.
e. Integral grounding terminal. Q�
f. Totally enclosed:
1) Color-coded body with color corresponding to ampere rating.
g. Provide switches with the operator style and contact arrangement as
indicated on the Drawings and as required for proper operation.
h. Color:
1) Ivory in finished areas.
2) Brown in all other areas. Q`
2. General purpose switches:
a. Toggle type.
3. Corrosive and wet areas requiring NEMA 4 or NEMA 4X enclosures:
a. Toggle switch.
b. Back and side wired.
4. Switches for office areas:
a. Rocker type.
b. Rectangular.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16140-4 82351310
pw:/lCarollo/Documents/ClienWVA/Renton/8235 Bl0/Spec cations/10.16140
5. Switches for use with photocell:
a. Maintained contact.
b. Two circuit.
c. Three position:
1) Center off.
6. Switches for hazardous areas:
a. Suitable for use in Class I Division 1 and Class I Division 2 locations.
b. Factory sealed.
c. Through-feed or dead-end as required.
7. Dimmer switches shall be rectangular design with LED light level indicators:
a. Lutron MAESTROTM MA-1000 controller for incandescent light.
b. Lutron MAESTROTM MALV-1000 controller for magnetic low-voltage
lights.
c. Lutron MAESTROTm MA-R remote for additional control stations.
B. Receptacles:
1. General purpose receptacles:
1 a. Single or duplex as indicated on the Drawings.
b. 125 VAC.
c. 20 Ampere or as indicated on the Drawings.
d. NEMA 5-20R configuration for 20 Ampere receptacles.
e. Other NEMA configurations as indicated on the Drawings.
f. Specification grade.
g. Back wired.
h. One-piece mounting strap.
i. Color:
1) Ivory in finished areas.
2) Brown in all other areas.
3) Orange when powered by a UPS.
2. Ground Fault Interrupter Receptacles (GFCI):
a. 125 VAC.
b. 20 Ampere.
c. Trip level 4-6 milliampere.
d. Individual and feed through protection.
e. UL 943 and UL 498 listed.
f. NEMA 5-20R configuration.
g. For damp or wet locations:
1) Weather Resistant, in accordance with UL 498.
3. Receptacles for hazardous areas:
a. 125 VAC.
b. 20 Ampere.
c. Factory sealed.
d. Single receptacle.
e. 2-wire, 3-pole.
f. Grounded through extra pole and shell.
g. Dead-front construction.
h. Interlocked to prevent plug from being withdrawn until circuit has been
broken.
i. Coordinate with equipment suppliers to match receptacle with plug.
4. 250 VAC receptacles:
a. 2-pole, 3-wire grounding for 240VAC circuits.
b. 3-pole, 4-wire grounding for 208 VAC 3-phase circuits.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16140-5 8235610
pw:llcarollo/Document s/cliern/WAIRentonl8235BI mpecilcations111,18140
c. Ampere rating as indicated on the Drawings.
d. Provide NEMA configuration as required by the equipment connected to
the outlet.
e. Coordinate with equipment suppliers to match receptacle with plug.
C. Plates:
1. General location:
a. Type 302 or 304 stainless steel.
b. Brushed satin finish.
c. Minimum thickness: 0.032 inches.
d. Rectangular or square shape.
e. Engraving: fl
1) Engrave each plate with the following information:
a) Area served.
b) Circuit number. Ot
2) Treat engraving to improve visibility and, except for stainless steel t
plates, to prevent corrosion.
3) Characters shall be block letter pantograph engraved with.a nt
minimum character height of 1/8-inch. u{
f. Coordinate the number of gangs, number and type of openings with the
specific location. �!
2. Outdoor and wet areas requiring NEMA 4 or NEMA 4X enclosures: `
a. General:
1) UL listed for wet locations. ��
2) Gasketed.
3) Die cast metal:
a) Match material to box material.
b. Switches: Q�
1) Lever-operated.
3. Corrosive Areas:
a. Neoprene.
b. Gasketed.
c. Weatherproof.
D. Data and communications jacks:
1. Process network jacks - panel/enclosure mounted:
a. Network jacks located in process areas shall have a NEMA 4 rating (with UI
closure cap). u
b. Mounting of network jacks in control panels shall be accomplished using
bulkhead connectors and environmental enclosure caps, which are
permanently attached to the bulkhead fitting.
c. Network jacks shall have RJ-45 connections on both sides of connector
(bulkhead pass through) allowing for direct connection to the network
switch and computer with standard patch cords. No punch down PC board OI
connections shall be allowed.
d. Manufactured by Woodhead Connectivity RJLNXX:
2. Process network jacks - conduit body mounted: A�
a. Network jacks located in process areas shall have a NEMA 4 rating (with tl
closure cap).
b. Mounting of network jacks in conduit bodies adapter (with Minifast Q�
connector) shall be accomplished using conduit body insert and
environmental enclosure caps.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16140-6 8235810
pw:HCarollo/DocumentsiClient/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.16140
c. PC board connections are not to be allowed.
d. Furnish 10 RJ-45 to minifast connector patch cable 3 feet in length.
e. Manufactured by InterlinkBT RSS series.
3. Network/phone jacks:
a. Network jacks located in computer rooms shall be installed per the
installation details in the drawings.
b. Standard Decora wall plates shall be used with QuickPort modules and
inserts.
c. Plugs shall be color coded as indicated in the installation details in the
Drawings.
d. Manufactured by Leviton Quickport series.
2.03 MATERIAL c (NOT USED)
2.04 MANUFACTURED I NITC (NOT USED)
2.05 EQUIPMENT-(NOT USED)
2.06 COMPONE (NOT USED)
2.07 NOT USED)
1 2.08 MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09 (NOT USED)
2.10 FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATI (NOT USED)
3.02 PREPARATION RATION (NOT USED)
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. Mounting heights:
1. Process and production areas:
a. Switches and receptacles 48 inches from finished floor to top of plate.
2. Offices and finished areas:
a. Switches: 48 inches from finished floor to top of plate.
ib. Receptacles: 18 inches from finished floor to center of plate.
+� C. Switches:
1. Over 300 Volts:
a. Where switches used in systems of more than 300 volts between
conductors, are to be ganged in outlet boxes, provide switches having no
exposed live parts or use barriers between the individual switches.
I
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16140-7 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClientMA/Renton/8235B10/specilcation5110.16140
D. Receptacles:
1. Provide GFCI receptacles as indicated on the Drawings:
a. Provide weather resistant GFCI receptacles 'in all wet or damp areas. `
1) Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
2. Mount non-weatherproof receptacles vertically:
a. Ground slot down.
3. Mount weatherproof receptacles horizontally:
a. Neutral slot up. Q�
4. 3-phase receptacles shall be consistent with respect to phase connection at
the receptacle terminals. Correct errors in phasing at the source and not the
receptacle.
E. Ensure all plates make a firm seal with wall for recessed mounted devices:
1. Outside edges of plates parallel with building lines.
3.04 ERECTION, 'N.RTAI 1 AT-11QN, APPLICATION,ONE CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED)
3.05 REPAIWREST-GRATION (NOT USED)
3.06 RE-INSTALLATION ATION SNOT USED)
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL OI
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
3.08 (NOT USED)
3.09 GLEANING--(NOT USED) n�
3.10 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING u
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. Demonstrate the following to the ENGINEER and OWNER:
1. Switching is per the Drawings.
2. All circuits conform to the panel schedules.
3. All ground fault receptacles operate at levels below or equal to OSHA
maximum allowable fault levels. Qt
3.11 PROTECTION i
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
3.12 (NOT USED)
END OF SUB-SECTION
�C
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16140-8 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documen is/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.16140
of
SUB-SECTION 10.16210
UTILITY COORDINATION
PART GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes requirements for:
1. Coordination with the Utility companies to provide service.
2. CONTRACTOR's responsibilities for connecting to utilities and providing utility
service to the facilities.
3. Descriptions of utility services required.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Section.
This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience-only and is not
intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR to
see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
a. Sub-Section 10.01330 - Submittal Procedures.
b. Sub-Section 10.16050 - General Requirements for Electrical Work.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. Utility Contacts:
1. Electric Utility:
a. Name: Howard Pepin
b. Utility: Puget Sound Energy
c. Phone number: 253-395-6887
d. E-mail: howard.pepin @pse.com
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Electrical Service:
1. Provide all work and materials and bear all costs for providing temporary
construction power and the permanent electrical service, including but not
limited to:
a. All work and materials not provided by the Electric Utility.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16210-1 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/16210
� f
b. All permits and fees required by the Electric Utility.
2. Provide electrical ducts, raceways, conductors and connections indicated on
the Drawings, and all other work and materials required for a complete
electrical service, including but not limited to the following:
a. Electrical service conduits and conductors from the point of Electric Utility
connection to the service entrance equipment.
b. Metering conduits from the instrument transformers to the meter.
B. General:
1. Coordinate and obtain inspections and final installation approval from serving
utilities and other authorities having jurisdiction.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sub-Sections 10.01330 and 10.16050.
B. Certification:
1. Submit certification that the intended installation has been coordinated with
and approved by the Utility companies.
2. Certification shall include a narrative description of the Utility's requirements
and points of connection and names and telephone numbers for contacts at
the Utilities.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. Materials and equipment used in performance of electrical work shall be listed or
labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories or other equivalent recognized, and jJ
independent testing laboratory, for the class of serves intended.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (NOT USED) ➢�
1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050. E
1.09 SEQUENGI (NOT USED) �I
1.10 SCHEDULING
A. General:
1. Before start of site work, make arrangements for temporary telephone and
electrical service as required.
B. Electrical systems:
1. Before bidding, the Electrical Contractor shall contact the Utilities to determine �l
the work and materials that will be required from the CONTRACTOR, and all l
fees and permits that will be required, so that all utility systems furnished by
the CONTRACTOR will be included in the bid.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16210-2 8235610
pw:/lCarollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Rentonl8235B10 1Specifications/16210
t
2. Coordinate work with ENGINEER to minimize downtime of existing operating
equipment and electrical distribution systems and to preclude unsafe
operation:
a. Notify OWNER 7 days before power interruptions.
rr b. Coordinate downtime with OWNER and local Electric Utility.
3. Before commencing work, coordinate electric service entrance requirements
with local Electric Utility to assure that the installation will be complete in
accordance with these Specifications:
a. Ensure power transformer size, electrical characteristics, and location are
consistent with the design and service voltage provided by the Electric
Utility coordinated with other trades.
b. Arrange for Utility Revenue meter.
c. Coordinate installation of metering C.T.'s and P.T.'s furnished by the
Electric Utility.
d. Pay any charges required by the Electric Utility for connection, turn-off
and turn-on.
4. During the construction of the project, the existing electrical service must
remain fully functional in order to supply uninterrupted electrical power to the
pump station. Should shutdowns be required, a maximum of 4 hours will be
allowed per shutdown with advanced notice to the OWNER as specified
above.
C. Before commencing site work, coordinate underground conduit installations with
other work to eliminate conflicts and avoid interferences with other underground
systems.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.12 SYSTEM START-UP
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.13 (NOT USED)
1.14 GOMMISSIGNING (NOT USED)
1.15 RAIANTRWANGE (NOT USED)
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS (NOT USED)
2.02 (NOT USED)
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Furnish materials in accordance with the applicable requirements of the utilities and
these Specifications.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16210-3 82351310
pw:ll Carollo/Documents/Clfent/WA/Renton/8235 B10/Specificationsl16210
2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS (NOT USED) rr
2.05 EQUIPMENT �1
A. Furnish equipment in accordance with the applicable requirements of the Utilities
and these Specifications.
2.06 C 0 K A P 0 N E (NOT USED)
2.07 NOT USED)
I
2.08 MIXES (NOT USED)
2.09 FABRIGATI (NOT USED)
2.10 FINISHES NOT USED)
2.11 (NOT USED) `
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATI (NOT USED)
3.02 DCCDARATION (NOT USED) n�
3.03 INSTALLATION ]J
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
3.04 ERECTION, INSTAL I ATION, ADPI ICATION, CONSTRUCTION CTION (NOT USED)
3.05 REPAIR/RC 1 (NOT USED)
3.06 RE—INSTALLATION ATION (NOT USED) ill
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
3.08 (NOT USED)
3.09 CLEANING
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
3.10 DERACUNCTCATION AND TCAIA LNG (NOT USED)
3.11 PROTECTION
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050. fl'
�F
September 10, 2010- FINAL 10.16210-4 8235610
pw:l/Carollol Documents/Client/WNRenton 18235B10/Specificauons116210 QI
3.12 (NOT USED)
END OF SUB-SECTION
1
i
l
1
1
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16210-5 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Speciflcatlons/16210
l
�I
a�
�i
�C
�c
o�
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16210-6 8235610
pw:/ICarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton 16235B10/Specifications116210 t
�i
SUB-SECTION 10.16422
MOTOR STARTERS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes requirements for:
1. Motor starters and contactors, installed in:
a. Motor control centers.
b. Control Panels.
c. Enclosed combination starters.
2. Starter Types:
a. Magnetic Starters.
b. Solid State Starters.
c. Contactors.
d. Integral Self-Protected Starters.
e. Manual Motor Starters.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
a. Sub-Section 10.16050 - General Requirements for Electrical Work.
b. Sub-Section 10.16075 - Electrical Identification.
c. Sub-Section 10.16123 - 600 Volt or Less Wires and Cables.
d. Sub-Section 10.17710 - Control System - Panels, Enclosures, and Panel
Components.
1.02 0 REFERENCES
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems Controllers, Contactors, and
Overload Relays Rated 600V.
C. UL508 - Industrial Control Equipment.
D. UL508A- Industrial Control Panels.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16422-1 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienMA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/16422
oil
B. Specific Definitions and Abbreviations:
1. FVNR - Full Voltage Non-reversing.
2. FVR - Full Voltage Reversing.
3. TS1W - 2 Speed 1 Winding (Consequent Pole).
4. TS2W - 2 Speed 2 Windings.
5. PWS - Part Winding Start.
6. RVAT- Reduced Voltage Auto Transformer.
7. RVSS - Reduced Voltage Solid State.
8. Overload Relay Class -A classification on an overload relay time current
characteristic by means of a number which designates the maximum time in
seconds at which it will operate when carrying a current equal to 600 percent
of its current rating.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General Requirements:
1. Starters for motor control centers, individual enclosed starters, or control
panels as indicated on the Drawings or noted in the Specifications.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sub-Sections 10.01330 and 10.16050:
1. Submit motor starter data with equipment submittal.
B. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer.
2. Catalog cutsheets.
3. Technical information.
4. Complete nameplate schedule.
5. Complete Bill of Material.
6. List of recommended spare parts.
7. Full size, 11 inch by 17 inch, manufacturer original time current curves for:
a. Overload relays.
b. Motor circuit protectors.
c. Thermal magnetic circuit breakers.
d. Fuses.
8. Confirmation that the overload relay class for each starter meets the
requirements of the equipment and motor supplier. 1t
9. Electrical Ratings:
a. Phase.
b. Wire. l�
c. Voltage.
d. Ampacity.
1) Horsepower.
C. Shop Drawings: '
1. Elementary and schematic diagrams:
a. Provide 1 diagram for every starter and contactor.
b. Indicate wire numbers for all control wires on the diagrams:
1) Wire numbering in accordance with Sub-Section 10.16075.
c. Indicate interfaces with other equipment on the drawings.
D. Installation Instructions:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16422-2 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Cllent/WA/Renton/8235B1 o/Specifications/16422 ��
1. The written instructions must detail the complete installation of the free
standing starters including moving and setting into place.
2. Provide anchorage instructions and requirements for the free standing starter
based on the seismic requirements at the project site as indicated in Sub-
Section 10.16050:
a. Stamped by a Professional Engineer registered in the state where the
project is being constructed.
E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. Submit complete operating and maintenance instructions presenting full details
for care and maintenance of equipment furnished or installed under this Sub-
Section. Including but not limited to:
a. Electrical ratings:
1) Phase.
2) Wire.
3) Voltage.
4) Ampacity.
b. Complete Bill of Material.
c. Manufacturer's operating and maintenance instructions starter and/or
contactor component parts, including:
1) Protective devices (fuses, breakers, overload relays, heater
elements, etc.).
2) Pilot devices.
d. Complete renewal parts list.
e. Record Drawings:
1) Elementary and schematic diagrams.
2) Provide 1 diagram for every starter and/or contactor.
3) Indicate wire numbers for all control wires on the drawings:
a) Wire numbering in accordance with Sub-Section 10.16075.
4) Indicate interfaces with other equipment on the drawings.
f. 11 inch by 17 inch prints of final record drawings.
F. Certifications:
1. Provide manufacturers certification that all electronic circuits and printed circuit
boards are conformally coated.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. All starters and components shall be UL listed and labeled:
a. UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment.
2. UL 508A- Industrial Control Panels.
3. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and System Controllers; Contactors and
Overload Relays Rated: 600 Volts.
4. Combination starters shall be UL listed and labeled.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16422-3 8235610
pw:l/Carollo/DocumentslClienYWA/Renton/8235B10/5pecificationsl16422
i
1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.09 (NOT USED)
1.10 SCHEDULING
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.12 SYSTEM START UP
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.13 (NOT USED)
1.14 COMMISSIONING (NOT USED)
1.15 MAINTENANCE
A. Spare Parts:
1. Provide the following spare parts, suitably packaged and labeled with the
corresponding equipment number:
a. One spare fuse of each size and type per starter.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:
1. NEMA Starters and Contactors:
a. Allen-Bradley.
b. Schneider Electric/Square D.
c. General Electric.
d. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer.
2. Reduced Voltage Solid State Starters:
a. Allen-Bradley.
b. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer.
c. General Electric.
d. Benshaw.
e. Schneider Electric/Square D.
2.02 EXISTING PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
I
2.03 MATERIALS-(NOT USED)
2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. General:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16422-4 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienW✓A/Renton/8235B1 o/Specifications/16422
1. Provide combination type starters with motor circuit protector or thermal-
magnetic circuit breaker and control power transformer with ratings as
indicated on the Drawings.
2. NEMA size, design, and rated:
a. NEMA Size 1 minimum:
1) With the exception of Integral Self-Protected Starters.
3. Coordinate motor circuit protector, thermal magnetic circuit breaker, or fusible
disconnect, and overload trip ratings with nameplate horsepower and current
ratings of the installed motor:
a. If motors provided are different in horsepower rating than those specified
or indicated on the Drawings, provide starters coordinated to the actual
motors furnished.
4. Provide starters NEMA Size 2 and larger with arc quenchers on load breaking
contacts.
5. Mount extended overload reset buttons to be accessible for operation without
opening starter enclosure door.
B. Full Voltage Starters (FVNR):
1. Across-the-line full voltage magnetic starters.
2. Rated for 600 volts.
3. Electrical characteristics as indicated on the Drawings.
4. Provide positive, quick-make, quick-break mechanisms, pad lockable
enclosure doors.
5. Furnish starter with bi-metallic overload relays.
6. Double-break silver alloy contacts.
_ 2.05 EQ UIPMENT (NOT USED)
2.06 COMPONENTS
A. Molded Case Circuit Breakers:
1. Circuit breaker type and ratings as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Provide in accordance with Sub-Section 10.16412.
B. Contactors:
1. NEMA size as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Electrically held:
a. For lighting loads designed to withstand the initial inrush currents of
ballast and lamp loads.
3. Factory adjusted and chatter free.
4. Auxiliary contacts:
a. Contact ratings as per NEMA A600 rating:
_ 1) Auxiliary contacts rated 10 Amps at 600 volts.
b. Provide all contacts indicated on the Drawings, and any additional
contacts required for proper operation.
c. Provide at least 1 normally open and 1 normally closed spare auxiliary
contact.
C. Overloads:
1. Bi-metallic overload relay:
a. Class 20 protection.
b. Ambient compensated.
September 10 2 1 - -
p 0 0 FINAL 10.16422 5 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton18235B10/Specfications/16422
i
1. Provide the services of the.manufacturer's technical representative for training
purposes: I
3.11 PROTECTION I
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
3.12 S (NOT USED) ff
�i
END OF SUB-SECTION
�I
U�
�L
I
M
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16422-8 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documen is/Client[WA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/16422
l
1
SUB-SECTION 10.16950
FIELD ACCEPTANCE TESTS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes requirements for:
1. Responsibilities for testing the electrical installation.
2. Routine tests during installation.
3. Adjusting and calibration.
4. Acceptance tests.
5. Demonstration of electrical equipment.
6. Commissioning and startup.
1 B. Related Sections/Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by ail
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sections/Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this
Sub-Section. This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided for
_ convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty
�* of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 1-05 - Control of Work.
b. Sub-Section 10.16050 - General Requirements for Electrical Work.
C. Copyright information:
1. Some portions of this Sub-Section are copyrighted by the International
Electrical Testing Association, Inc (NETA). See NETA publication ATS for
details.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
B. International Electrical Testing Association Incorporated:
{
1. NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications, latest published edition.
�. C. Manufacturer's testing recommendations and instruction manuals.
D. Specification Sub-Sections for the electrical equipment being tested.
E. Shop drawings.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16950-1 8235810
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/1016950
1
4. Demonstration.
5. Commissioning and plant startup.
1.10 (NOT USED) l
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
1.12 CVCTERA STARTUP (NOT USED) I
1.13 NOT USED) 'F
1.14 COMMISSIONING F
A. Commissioning and plant startup, as described in the Specifications, shall not begin
until acceptance testing is complete, and operation has been demonstrated to the
satisfaction of the ENGINEER.
i
B. Commissioning shall only be attempted as a function of normal plant operation in
which plant process flows and levels are routine and equipment operates
automatically in response to flow and level parameters or computer command, as
applicable:
1. Simulation of process parameters will be considered only upon receipt of a
written request by the CONTRACTOR.
C. Record all motor currents during normal operation. nQ
D. Record the indications of all power meters every half-hour during commissioning. �1
1.15 MAINTENANGii (NOT USED)
�!1
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16950-4 8235610
pw://Caroflo/Documen is/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.16950
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 IIAAA111CACTURERS (NOT USED)
2.02 (NOT USED)
i
2.03 MATERIALS-(NOT USED)
2.04 114011IFACTI IKEA I NITC (NOT USED)
2.05 EQUIPMENT-(NOT USED)
2.06 COMPONENTS (NOT USED)
2.07 (NOT USED)
2.08 MIX€S-(NOT USED)
2.09 (NOT USED)
2.10 FINISHES (NOT USED)
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. General:
1. Test instrument calibration:
a. Utilize a testing laboratory with a calibration program which maintains all
applicable test instrumentation within rated accuracy.
b. The accuracy shall be traceable to the National Bureau of Standards in an
unbroken chain.
c. Calibrate instruments in accordance with the following frequency
schedule:
1) Field instruments - 6 months maximum.
2) Laboratory instruments - 12 months maximum.
t3) Leased specialty equipment where the accuracy is guaranteed by the
lessor (such as Doble) - 12 months maximum.
d. Dated calibration labels shall be visible on all test equipment.
e. Maintain an up-to-date instrument calibration record for each test
instrument:
1) The records shall show the date and results of each calibration or
test.
f. Maintain an up-to-date instrument calibration instruction and procedure for
each test instrument.
PART 3 EXECUTION
R 3.01 EXAMINATIlIAI (NOT USED)
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Do not begin testing until the following conditions have been met:
1. All instruments required are available and in proper operating condition.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16950-5 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235 Bl0/Specifications/10.16950
2. All required dispensable materials such as solvents, rags, and brushes are
available.
3. All equipment handling devices such as cranes, vehicles, chain falls and other
lifting equipment are available or scheduled.
4. All instruction books, calibration curves, or other printed material to cover the
electrical devices are available.
5. Data sheets to record all test results are available.
3.03 IAICTAI 1 ATION (NOT USED) �I
3.04 ERECTION IAICTAI 1 ATION APPLICATION, CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED)
3.05 REPAIC REST- RATIO (NOT USED)
3.06 RE INSTAL I ATION NOT USED)
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Cables, 600 volts and less:
1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
a. Compare cable data with the Drawings and Specifications.
b. Inspect exposed sections of cables for physical damage and correct
connection in accordance with the Drawings.
c. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the
following methods:
1) Use of low resistance ohmmeter.
2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by the
calibrated torque wrench method:
a) Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper foot-pound levels t!
or NETA ATS tables.
3) Thermographic survey.
d. Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and
indentation.
e. Inspect for correct identification and arrangements.
f. Inspect jacket insulation and condition.
2. Electrical Tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with low-
resistance ohmmeter.
b. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each conductor with respect to
ground and adjacent conductors:
1) Applied voltage shall be: �t
a) 500 volts do for 300 volt rated cable. `
b) 1000 volts do for 600 volt rated cable.
2) Test duration shall be one minute.
c. Perform continuity tests to ensure correct cable connection.
d. Verify uniform resistance of parallel conductors.
3. Test Values:
a. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar
connections:
1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted �Q
connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16950-6 - 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235610/Specifications/10.16950
I
b. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published
data:
1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer's
published data.
c. Results of the thermographic survey shall be in accordance with NETA
ATS requirements.
d. Insulation resistance values shall be in accordance with manufacturer's
published data:
1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer's
published data.
2) Investigate values of insulation resistance less than the allowable
minimum.
e. Cables shall exhibit continuity.
f. Investigate deviations in resistance between parallel conductors.
B. Grounding.Systems:
1. Visual and mechanical inspection:
a. Inspect ground system for compliance with the Drawings, Specifications,
and the National Electrical Code.
b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the
following methods:
1) Use of low resistance ohmmeter.
2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by
calibrated torque wrench method:
a Refer to manufacturer's
instructions for proper foot-pound levels
or NETA ATS tables.
d. Inspect anchorage.
2. Electrical tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-
resistance ohmmeter.
b. Perform fall of potential test or alternative test in accordance with
ANSI/IEEE Standard 81 on the main grounding electrode or system.
c. Perform point-to-point tests to determine the resistance between the main
grounding system and all major electrical equipment frames, the system
neutral and any derived neutral points.
3. Test values:
a. Grounding system electrical and mechanical connections shall be free of
corrosion.
b. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar
connections:
1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted
connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
c. Bolt torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published
data:
1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer's
published data.
d. The resistance between the main grounding electrode and ground shall
be no greater than 5 ohms for commercial or industrial systems and 1
ohm or less for generating or transmission station grounds unless
otherwise specified by the ENGINEER.
e. Investigate point-to-point resistance values that exceed 0.5 ohm.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16950-7 8235610
pw:ll Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Rentonl8235B10/Specifications/10.16950
C. Rotating Machinery:
1. Visual and mechanical inspection:
a. Compare equipment nameplate information with the Drawings and I
Specifications.
b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.
d. Inspect air baffles, filter media, cooling fans, slip rings, brushes, and brush
rigging �I
e. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the
following methods:
1) Use of low resistance ohmmeter.
2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by
calibrated torque wrench method:
a) Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper foot-pound levels
or NETA ATS tables. ilk,
b) Thermographic survey.
f. Perform special tests such as gap spacing and machine alignment if
applicable.
g. Verify correct application of appropriate lubrication and lubrication
systems.
h. Verify that resistance temperature detector(RTD) circuits conform to the
Drawings.
2. Electrical tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low
resistance ohmmeter.
b. Perform insulation resistance test in accordance with ANSWEEE 43:
1) On motors 200 HP and smaller, test duration shall be 1 minute.
Calculate dielectric absorption ratio.
2) On motors larger than 200 HP, test duration shall be 10 minutes.
Calculate polarization index.
c. Perform do dielectric withstand voltage tests on machines rated at 2300
volts and greater in accordance with ANSI/IEEE Standard 95.
d. Perform phase-to-phase stator resistance test on machines rated at 2300
volts and greater.
e. Perform insulation resistance test on insulated bearings in accordance
with manufacturer's published data.
f. Test surge protection devices as specified herein.
g. Test motor starter as specified herein.
h. Perform resistance tests on resistance temperature detector (RTD)
circuits.
i. Verify operation of motor space heater.
j. Perform a rotation test to ensure correct shaft rotation.
k. Measure running current and evaluate relative to load conditions and ,
nameplate full-load amperes.
3. Test Values:
a. Inspection:
1) Air baffles shall be clean and installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's published data.
2) Filter media shall be clean and installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's published data.
3) Cooling fans shall operate.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16950-8 8235610
pw:l/Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.16950 ��
4) Slip ring alignment shall be within manufacturer's published
tolerances.
5) Brush alignment shall be within manufacturer's published tolerances.
6) Brush rigging shall be within manufacturer's published tolerances.
b. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar
connections:
1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted
connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
c. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published
data:
1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer's
published data.
d. Results of the thermographic survey shall be in accordance with NETA
ATS requirements.
e. Air-gap spacing and machine alignment shall be in accordance with
manufacturer's published data.
f. The dielectric absorption ratio or polarization index shall not be less that
1.0. The recommended minimum insulation (IR,min)test results in
megohms shall be corrected to 40 degrees Celsius and read as follows:
1) IR,min = 100 megohms for do armature and ac windings with form-
e wound coils above 1 KV
2) IR, min = 5 megohms for machines and random-wound stator coils
and form-wound coils rated below 1 kV.
Note: Dielectric withstand voltage and surge comparison tests shall not be
performed on machines having lower values than those indicated above.
g. If no evidence of distress or insulation failure is observed by the end of the
total time of voltage application during the dielectric withstand test, the
test specimen is considered to have passed the test.
h. Investigate phase-to-phase stator resistance values that deviate by more
than 10 percent.
i. Power factor or dissipation factor values shall be compared to
manufacturer's published data:
1) In the absence of manufacturer's published data compare values of
similar machines.
j. Tip-up values shall indicate no significant increase in power factor.
k. If no evidence of distress, insulation failure or waveform nesting is
observed by the end of the total time of voltage application during the
surge comparison test, the test specimen is considered to have passed
the test.
I. Bearing insulation resistance measurements shall be within
manufacturer's published tolerances:
1) In the absence of manufacturer's published data compare values of
similar machines.
m. Test results of surge protection devices shall be as specified herein.
n. Test results of motor starter equipment shall be as specified herein.
o. RTD circuits shall conform to the design intent and machine protection
device manufacturer's published data.
p. Heaters shall be operational.
q. Vibration amplitudes shall not exceed values in NETA ATS tables:
1) If values exceed those in the NETA ATS tables, perform a complete
vibration analysis.
r. Machine rotation should match required rotation of connected load.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16950-9 8235610
pw:/I Carollo/Documentsl ClienYWAl Renton/8235B101Specifications/10.16950
s. Running phase-to-phase voltages should be within 1.0 percent. Running
currents shall be balanced and proportional to load condition and
nameplate data. I
3.08 CLEANING
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050. 1{�J
B. After the acceptance tests have been completed, dispose of all testing �
expendables, vacuum all cabinets, and sweep clean all surrounding areas.
3.09 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050.
3.10 PROTECTION �f
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.16050. �)
3.11 SCHEDULES
A. At least 30 days before commencement of the acceptance tests, submit the a`
manufacturer's complete field testing procedures to the ENGINEER and to the
testing laboratory, complete with expected test results and tolerances for all
equipment to be tested.
END OF SUB-SECTION
rll�
Di
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.16950-10 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specificationstl0.16950
SUB-SECTION 10.17050
PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION
SYSTEMS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes:
1. General requirements applicable to all Process Control and Instrumentation
Work.
2. General requirements for process control and instrumentation submittals.
3. As specified in this Sub-Section, PLC programming and SCADA HMI software
configuration will be provided by the OWNER.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
a. Items involving electrical, control, and instrumentation construction may
be indicated on the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that do not
apply specifically to electrical, control and instrumentation systems.
C. Interfaces to equipment, instruments, and other components:
1. The Drawings, Specifications, and overall design are based on preliminary
information furnished by various equipment manufacturers, which identify a
minimum scope of supply from the manufacturers. This information pertains to,
but is not limited to, instruments, control devices, electrical equipment,
packaged mechanical systems, and control equipment provided with
mechanical systems.
2. Provide all material and labor needed to install the actual equipment furnished,
include all costs to add any additional instruments, wiring, control system
inputs/outputs, controls, interlocks, electrical hardware etc., which may be
necessary to make a complete, functional installation based on the actual
equipment furnished:
a. Make all changes necessary to meet the manufacturer's wiring
requirements.
3. Submit all such changes and additions to the ENGINEER for acceptance.
4. Review the complete set of Drawings and Specifications in order to ensure
that all items related to the instrumentation and control systems are completely
accounted for. Include any items that appear on Drawings or in Specifications
from another discipline in the scope of Work:
a. If a conflict between Drawings and Specifications is discovered, refer
conflict to the ENGINEER as soon as possible for resolution.
5. Loop drawings:
a. Provide complete loop drawings for all systems, including packaged
equipment furnished as part of a vendor furnished package, and for all
pre-purchased equipment.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.17050-1 82351310
pw://Carollo/Document s/ClieMMA/Renton/8235B1015pecifications/10.17050
4
I
D. All instrumentation, and control equipment and systems for the entire project to
comply with the requirements specified in the Instrumentation and Control
Specifications, whether referenced in the individual Equipment Specifications or not:
1. The requirements of the Instrumentation and Control Specifications apply to all
Instrumentation and Control Work specified in other Specifications, including
HVAC controls, packaged mechanical systems, LCPs, VCPs, etc. �I
2. Inform all vendors supplying instrumentation, control systems, panels, and/or
equipment of the requirements of the Instrumentation and Control
Specifications.
3. The OWNER is not responsible for any additional costs due to the failure of
the CONTRACTOR to notify all subcontractors and suppliers of the
Instrumentation and Control Specifications' requirements.
E. Contract Documents:
1. General: „
a. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary and are to be used �lli
together in order to fully describe the Work.
2. Contract Drawings:
a. The Instrumentation and Control Drawings show in a diagrammatic
manner, the desired locations, and arrangements of the components of
the Instrumentation Work. Follow the Drawings as closely as possible, use
professional judgment and coordinate with the other trades to secure the I
best possible installation, use the entire Drawing set for construction
purposes.
b. Locations of equipment, control devices, instruments, boxes, panels, etc.
are approximate only, exercise professional judgment in executing the
Work to ensure the best possible installation:
1) The equipment locations and dimensions indicated on the Drawings ,
and elevations are approximate. Use the shop drawings to determine
the proper layout, foundation, and pad requirements, etc. for final
installation. Coordinate with all subcontractors to ensure that all �t
instrumentation and control equipment is compatible with other ill
equipment and space requirements. Make changes required to
accommodate differences in equipment dimensions.
2) The CONTRACTOR has the freedom to select any of the named
manufacturers as identified in the individual Specifications; however,
the ENGINEER has designed the spatial equipment layout based
upon a single manufacturer and has not confirmed that every named
manufacturer's equipment fits in the allotted space. It is the
CONTRACTOR's responsibility to ensure that the equipment being
furnished fits within the defined space.
c. Installation details:
1) The Contract Drawings include installation details showing means
and methods for installing instrumentation and control equipment.
For cases where typical details are not provided or compatible with
an installed location, develop installation details that are necessary
for completing the Work, and submit these details for review by the
ENGINEER.
d. Schematic diagrams:.
1) All controls are shown de-energized.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.17050-2 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235 Bl0/Specifications/10.17050
2) Schematic diagrams show control function only. Incorporate other
necessary functions for proper operation and protection of the
system.
3) Add slave relays, where required, to provide all necessary contacts
for the control system or where needed to function as interposing
relays for control voltage coordination, equipment coordination, or
control system voltage drop considerations.
4) Mount all devices shown on motor controller schematic diagrams in
the controller compartment enclosure, unless otherwise noted or
indicated.
5) Control schematics are to be used as a guide in conjunction with the
' descriptive operating sequences indicated on the Drawings or in the
Specifications. Combine all information and furnish a coordinated
and fully functional control system.
F. Alternates/Alternatives:
1. Substitute item provisions as specified in Special Provisions.
G. Changes and change orders:
1. As specified in Special Provisions.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Code compliance:
`. 1. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only. The
latest edition accepted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction of referenced
publications in effect at the time of Bid governs.
' 2. The following codes and standards are hereby incorporated into this Sub-
Section:
a. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1) B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
b. American Petroleum Institute (API):
1) RP551 - Process Measurement Instrumentation.
2) RP552 - Transmission Systems.
3) RP553 - Refinery Control Valves.
4) RP554.- Process Instrumentation and Control.
5) RP555 - Process Analyzers.
6) RP556 - Fired Heaters & Steam Generators.
7) RP557 - Guide to Advanced Control Systems.
c. ASTM International (ASTM):
1) A269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for
General Service.
d. FM Global (FM).
e. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).
f. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
g. InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA).
h. International Organization for Standardization (ISO):
1) 9001 - Quality Systems - Model for Quality Assurance iri
Design/Development, Production, Installation and Servicing.
i. International e national Society of Automation (ISA):
1) 5.1 - Instrumentation Symbols and Identification.
2) 5.2 - Binary Logic Diagrams for Process Operations.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.17050-3 8235B10
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235810/Specifications/10.17050
3) 5.3 - Graphic Symbols for Distributed Control/Shared Display
Instrumentation, Logic, and Computer Systems.
4) 5.4 - Instrument Loop Diagrams.
5) 5.5 - Graphic Symbols for Process Displays.
6) 7.00.01 - Quality Standard for Instrument Air. [�
7) RP - 12.4 - Pressurized Enclosures.
8) 18.1 - Annunciator Sequences and Specifications.
9) 20 - Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control �I
Instruments, Primary Elements, and Control Valves.
10) TR20.00.01 - Specification Forms for Process Measurement and
Control Instruments Part 1: General Considerations Updated with 27
New Specification Forms in 2004-2005.
11) 50.00.01 - Compatibility of Analog Signals for Electric Industrial
Process Instruments.
12) 51.1 - Process Instrumentation Terminology.
13) RP60.3 - Human Engineering for Control Centers.
14) 71.01 - Environmental Conditions for Process Measurement and I
Control Systems: Temperature and Humidity.
15) 71.02 - Environmental Conditions for Process Measurement and
Control Systems: Power.
16) 71.03 - Environmental Conditions for Process Measurement and
Control Systems: Mechanical Influences.
17) 71.04 - Environmental Conditions for Process Measurement and
Control Systems: Airborne Contaminants. illl
j. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1) 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V Maximum).
k. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1) 70 - National Electric Code (NEC).
2) 496 - Purged and Pressurized Enclosures for Electrical Equipment,
where applicable.
3) 820 - Standard for Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and
Collection Facilities.
I. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
1) 508 - Industrial Control Equipment. Q`
B. Compliance with Laws and Regulations:
1. As specified in Special Provisions. I
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions of terms and other electrical and instrumentation considerations as set
forth by:
1. FM.
2. IEC.
3. IEEE.
4. ISA.
5. ISO.
6. NEC.
7. NETA.
8. NFPA. �I
9. NIST.
10. UL.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.17050-4 8235B10
pw://Caroll o/Documents/Client/WA/Re rr[on/8235 B l0/Specifications/10.17050
B. Specific definitions:
' 1. Control circuit, Any circuit operating at 120 volts alternating current (VAC) or
direct current (VDC) or less, whose principal purpose is the conveyance of
information (including performing logic) and not the conveyance of energy for
' the operation of an electrically powered device.
2. Panel: An instrument.support system that may be either a flat surface, a partial
enclosure, or a complete enclosure for instruments and other devices used in
1
process control systems. Unless otherwise specified or clearly indicated by the
context, the term "panel" in these Contract Documents is interpreted as a
general term, which includes flat surfaces, enclosures, cabinets and consoles.
3. Power circuit: Any circuit operating at 90 volts (AC or DC) or more, whose
principal purpose is the conveyance of energy for the operation of an
electrically powered device.
4. Signal circuit: Any circuit operating at less than 50 VAC or VDC, which
' conveys analog information or digital communications information.
5. Digital bus: A communication network, such as Profibus, Foundation Fieldbus,
or DeviceNet, allowing instruments and devices to transmit data, control
' functions and diagnostic information.
6. 2-Wire transmitter (loop powered): A transmitter that derives its operating
power supply from the signal transmission circuit and requires no separate
' power supply connections. As used in this Sub-Section, two-wire transmitter
refers to a transmitter that provides 4 to 20 milliamperes current regulation of a
signal in a series circuit with an external 24 VDC driving potential:
' a. Fieldbus communications signal or,both.
7. Powered transmitters: A transmitter that requires a separate power source
(120 VAC, 240 VAC, etc.) in order for the transmitter to develop its signal. As
used in this Sub-Section; the produced signal may be either a 4 to
20 milliampere current signal, a digital bus communications signal or both.
8. Modifications: Changing, extending, interfacing to, removing or altering an
existing circuit.
C. Acronym definitions:
1. CCS: The SCADA central computer system (CCS) consisting of personal
computers and software. The personal computer-based hardware
and software system that includes the operator interface, data
storage, data retrieval, archiving, alarming, historian, reports,
' trending, and other higher level control system software and
functions.
2. DPDT: Double-pole, double-throw.
' 3. ES: Enterprise system: Computer based communications or data
sharing system utilized for non-process control functions such as
E-mail, sharing files, creating documents, etc.
' 4. FAT: Factory acceptance test.
5. HART: Highway addressable remote transducer.
6. HOA: Hand-Off-Auto control function that is totally PLC based. In the
Hand mode, equipment is started or stopped, valves are opened or
' closed through operator direction under the control of the PLC
software. In the Auto mode, equipment is started or stopped and
valves are opened or closed through a control algorithm within the
PLC software. In the Off mode, the equipment is prohibited from
responding from the PLC control.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.17050-5 8235610
pw:l/Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.17050
7. HMI: Human machine interface: PLC based operator interface device
consisting.of an alphanumeric or graphic display with operator of
input functionality. The HMI is typically a flat panel type of display
mounted on the front of a PLC enclosure with either a touch screen
or tactile button interface.
8. ICSC: Instrumentation and control system contractor: Subcontractor who
specializes in the design, construction, fabrication, software
development, installation, testing, and commissioning of industrial �I
instrumentation and control systems.
9. IJB: Instrument junction boxes: A panel designed with cord sets to
easily remove, replace or relocate instrument signals. �I
10. 1/0: Input/Output.
11. IP: Internet protocol or ingress protection.
12. LCP: Local control panel: Operator interface panel that may contain an �I
HMI, pilot type control devices, operator interface devices, control
relays, etc. and does not contain a PLC or RIO.
13. LAN: Local area network: A control or communications network that is
limited to the physical boundaries of the facility.
14. LOR: Local-Off-Remote control function. In the Remote mode, equipment
is started or stopped, and valves are opened or.closed through the
PLC based upon the selection of the HOA. In the Local mode, ��
equipment is started or stopped, valves are opened or closed
based upon hardwired control circuits completely independent of
the PLC with minimum interlocks and permissive conditions. In the �I
Off mode, the equipment is prohibited from responding to any
control commands.
15. NJB: Network junction box. An enclosure that contains multiple access
points to various networks within the facility. Networks could be �I
Ethernet, Ethernet/IP, Fieldbus, RIO etc.
16. OIT: Operator interface terminal: PC-based interface device used for
operator interface with the SCADA system. OI
17. P&ID: Process and instrumentation diagram.
18. PC: Personal computer.
19. PCIS: Process control and instrumentation system: Includes the entire
instrumentation system, the entire control system, and all of the
Work specified in the Instrumentation and Control Specifications
and depicted on the Instrumentation Drawings. OI
20. PCM: Process control module: An enclosure containing any of the
following devices: PLC, RTU, or RIO.
21. PJB: Power junction box: An enclosure with terminal blocks that
distribute power to multiple instruments.
22. PLC: Programmable logic controller.
23. RIO: Remote 1/0 device for the PLC consisting of remote 1/0 racks, or
remote 1/0 blocks.
24. RTU: Remote telemetry unit: A controller typically consisting of a PLC,
and a means for remote communications. The remote
communications devices typically are radios, modems, etc.
25. SCADA: Supervisory control and data acquisition system: A general name
for the computerized system that gathers and processes data from
sensors and applies operational controls to the process equipment.
It includes the PLCs and/or RTUs, HMI PLC-based operator
�Q
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.17050-6 82351310
pw:l/Carollo/Documents/Clientl WNRenton 18235B10/Specificabons/10 17050 ��
interface units, related interconnecting communications systems,
and the CCS operator interface and data management system.
26. SPDT: Single-pole, double-throw.
27. SPST: Single-pole, single-throw.
' 28. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.
29. VCP: Vendor control panel: Control panels that are furnished with
particular equipment by a vendor other than the ICSC. These
panels may contain PLCs, RIO, OIT, HMI, etc.
30. WAN: Wide area network: A control or communications network that
extends beyond the physical boundaries of the facility.
' 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General requirements:
1. The Work includes everything necessary for and incidental to executing and
completing the Instrumentation and Control System Work indicated on the
Drawings and specified in the Specifications and reasonably inferable there
' from including but not limited to:
a. Preparing hardware submittals for field instrumentation.
b. Design, develop, and draft loop drawings, control panel designs, and all
' other drawing submittals specified in the Instrumentation and Control
Specifications.
c. Prepare the test plan, the training plan, and the spare parts submittals.
' d. Procure all hardware.
e. Provide all PCIS system hardware.
1) Except OWNER provided RTU/PLC.
f. Fabricate panels.
g. Perform factory tests on panels.
h. Perform bench calibration and verify calibration after installation.
i. Oversee and certify installation of the PCIS system.
j. Oversee, document, and certify loop testing.
k. Oversee, document, and certify system pre-commissioning.
1. Conduct the performance tests.
m. Prepare operation and maintenance manuals.
n. Conduct training classes.
o. Prepare Record Drawings.
p. Integrate the PCIS with instrumentation and control devices provided
under other sections.
q. Develop all requisite loop drawings and Record Drawings associated with
equipment provided under the Contract Documents and OWNER
furnished and existing equipment.
r. Resolve signal, power, or functional incompatibilities between the PCIS
and interfacing devices.
s. Perform all required corrective and preventative maintenance.
2. It is the intent of these Specifications that the entire electrical power,
instrumentation, and control system be complete and operable. Provide all
' necessary material and labor for the complete system from source of power to
final utilization equipment, including all connections, testing, calibration of all
equipment furnished by others, as well as equipment furnished by the
' CONTRACTOR, whether or not specifically mentioned but which are
necessary for successful operation.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.17050-7 8235610
pw://ca rollolDocumens/ClienUWAlRenton/8235 B10/Specilcatlonsll0.11011
3. The OWNER shall provide the configuration and programming for the PLC and
PC based SCADA control system.
4. Coordinate all aspects of the Work between CONTRACTOR and all
subcontractors before bidding to ensure that all costs associated with a
complete installation are included. The OWNER is not responsible for any
change orders due to lack of coordination of the Work between the
CONTRACTOR, the ICSC, the other subcontractors or suppliers.
5. Furnish detailed, complete, and thorough operations and maintenance
documentation, including but not limited to operations manuals, maintenance
manuals, as-built wiring drawings, training manuals, as-built software
documentation, and all other documentation required to operate, modify, and
maintain all parts of the PCIS.
6. Revise in a manner as directed by the ENGINEER all 1/0 and addressing that
the ENGINEER determines to be unacceptable as a result of a lack of
CONTRACTOR coordination between Contract Documents and all suppliers.
7. Defective Work:
a. As specified in Special Provisions.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals as specified in and this Sub-Section. p�
B. General: u
1. Instruct all equipment suppliers of submittals and operation and maintenance
manuals of the requirements in this Sub-Section.
2. Furnish the submittals required by each section in the Electrical Specifications.
3. Adhere to the wiring numbering scheme specified in Sub-Section 10.16075
throughout,the Project:
a. Uniquely number each wire.
b. Wire numbers must appear on all Equipment Drawings.
4. Use equipment and instrument tags, as indicated on the Drawings, for all
submittals.
C. Submittal organization:
1. First page:
a. Specification Sub-Section reference.
b. Name and telephone number of individual who reviewed submittal before �f
delivery to ENGINEER.
c. Name and telephone number of individual who is primarily responsible for
the development of the submittal.
d. Place for CONTRACTOR's review stamp and comments.
2. Next pages:
a. Provide confirmation of specification compliance in a tabular form that
individually lists each specification section, paragraph, and sub-
paragraphs and unequivocally states compliance with said requirement or
takes exception to the requirement and lists the reason for said exception
and offers alternative means for compliance.
b. Include a response in writing to each of the ENGINEER's comments or
questions for submittal packages which are re-submitted:
1) In the order that the comments or questions were presented m
throughout the submittal. �I
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.17050-8 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.17050 ��
2) Referenced by index section and page number on which the
comment appeared.
3) Acceptable responses to ENGINEER's comments are either:
a) ENGINEER's comment or change is accepted and appropriate
' changes are made.
b) Explain why comment is not accepted or requested change is
not made.
' c) Explain how requirement will be satisfied in lieu of comment or
change requested by ENGINEER.
4) Any re-submittal, which does not contain responses to the
ENGINEER's previous comments shall be returned for Revision and
Re-submittal.
5) No further review by the ENGINEER will be performed until a
response for previous comments has been received.
3. Remaining pages:
a. Actual submittal data:
1) Organize submittals in exactly the same order as the items are
referenced, listed, and/or organized in the specification section.
For submittals that cover multiple devices used in different areas
under the same specification section, the submittal for the individual
devices must list the area where the device is intended to be used.
D. Operation and maintenance manuals:
1. Furnish the ENGINEER with a complete set of written operation and
maintenance manuals weeks before energization start-up and/or
commissioning.
2. Additional operation and maintenance manual requirements:
a. Completely index manuals with a tab for each section:
1) Each section containing applicable data for each piece of equipment,
system, or topic covered.
2) Assemble manuals using the approved shop drawings, and include,
the following types of data:
a) Complete set of 11-inch by 17-inch drawings of equipment.
b) Complete set of 11-inch by 17-inch drawings of the control
system.
c) Complete set of control schematics.
' d) Complete parts list for all equipment being provided.
e) Catalog data for all products or equipment furnished.
E. Material and equipment schedules:
1. Furnish a complete schedule and/or matrix of all materials, equipment,
apparatus, and luminaries that are proposed for use:
' a. Include sizes, names of manufacturers, catalog numbers, and such other
information required to identify the items.
F. Schedule of values:
1. -In addition to completing all items referred to in the schedule of values, Sub-
Section 10.01292, submit per unit material and labor costs used in developing
the final bid for the electrical system, for the express purpose of pricing and
' cost justification for any proposed change orders. In addition to the items
shown on the schedule of values, provide per unit material and labor costs for
conduit and wire installation for specific types, sizes, and locations as
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 1.0.17050-9 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Rerrton/8235B10/Specifications/10.17050
indicated on the Drawings and Conduit Schedule. It is the responsibility of the
electrical subcontractor to prove to the ENGINEER's satisfaction that said per
unit costs were used in the development of the final Bid amount.
G. Roof penetrations:
1. Submit details of all portions of the electrical installation that penetrate the
roof. Include details showing support of the penetrating component, and the
sealing means to be utilized. �I
I
H. Installation recommendations:
1. Submit the manufacturer's printed recommendations for installation of
electrical equipment. �I
I. Record documents:
1. Provide record documents of all Electrical Drawings. �I
2. Record Drawing requirements: I
a. Update Record Drawings weekly.
b. Record Drawings must be fully updated as a condition of the monthly
progress payments.
c. Submit Record Drawings upon completion of the Work for final review.
d. Clearly and neatly show all changes including the following:
1) All existing pipe, conduit, wire, instruments or other structures
encountered or uncovered during construction.
3. Shop drawings:
a. Upon completion of the Work, update all shop drawings to indicate the o
final as-built configuration of the systems:
1) Provide as-built shop drawings for all electrical equipment on 11-inch
by 17-inch using Bond paper.
2) Provide electronic copies of these documents on CD-ROM disks in
AutoCad Version 2000 by Autodesk and pdf. Size all drawings to be
readable and legible on 11-inch by 17-inch media.
b. Furnish written information prepared specifically for this Project using .pdf
and printed on 8.5-inch by 11-inch plain bond paper:
1) Provide electronic copies of these documents on CD-ROM disks. �{
4. Review and corrections: `
a. Correct any record documents or other documents found to be
incomplete, not accurate, of poor quality, or containing errors.
b. Promptly correct and re-submit record documents returned for correction.
5. Additional requirements for acceptance test reports are specified in Sub-
Section 10.16950.
J. Calculations:
1. Where required by specific Electrical Specifications:
a. Because these calculations are being provided by a registered
professional engineer, they will be reviewed for form, format, and content
but will not be reviewed for accuracy and calculation means.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacture instruments at facilities certified to the quality standards of ISO 9001.
1. Determination of the proposed ICSC qualifications is at the sole discretion of
the ENGINEER.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.17050-10 82351310
pw:/lCarollo/Documents/CI ient/WAIRenton/8235 Bl 0/Specificalions110.17050
11
B. Furnish all equipment listed by and bearing the label of UL or of an independent
testing laboratory acceptable to the ENGINEER and the Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
' 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store all equipment and materials delivered to the job site in a location that will not
interfere with the construction or the OWNER's operations.
B. Shipping precautions.
1. After completion of shop assembly and successful FAT, pack all equipment,
cabinets, panels, and consoles in protective crates and enclose in heavy-duty
polyethylene envelopes or secured sheeting to provide complete protection
from damage, dust, and moisture.
2. Place dehumidifiers when required, inside the polyethylene coverings.
3. Skid-mount the equipment for final transport.
4. Provide lifting rings for moving without removing protective covering.
5. Display boxed weight on shipping tags together with instructions for unloading,
transporting, storing, and handling at the job site.
C. Special instructions:
1. Securely attach special instructions for proper field handling, storage, and
installation to each piece of equipment before packaging and shipment.
1 D. Tagging:
1. Tag each component and/or instrument to identify its location, instrument tag
number, and function in the system.
2. Firmly attach a permanent tag indelibly machine marked with the instrument
tag number, as given in the tabulation, on each piece of equipment constituting
the PCIS.
1 3. Tag instruments immediately upon receipt in the field.
4. Prominently display identification on the outside of the package.
5. Utilize the Tag and Loop Number identifications shown on the P&IDs.
E. Delivery and inspection:
1. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original container
or packaging with identifying labels intact and legible. Include date of
manufacture on label.
1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
' A. Site conditions:
1: Provide a PCIS, including all equipment, raceways and any other components
required for a complete installation that meets the environmental conditions for
the Site as specified in the General Requirements and below.
2. Seismic classification:
a. Provide all equipment and construction techniques suitable for the seismic
requirements for the site.
3. Wind:
a. Provide all equipment and construction techniques suitable for the site
wind loading criteria.
4. Altitude, temperature and humidity:
I
S eptember 10, 2010 -
FINAL 10.17050-11 82351310
pw://Ca,ollolDocument slCllent/WA/Renton/8235B1015pecilcations/10.17050
a. Provide all equipment and instrumentation fully rated for continuous
operation at this altitude, temperature and humidity conditions with no
additional derating factors applied.
b. Provide additional temperature conditioning equipment to maintain all
equipment and instrumentation in non-conditioned spaces or outdoors
subject to these ambient temperatures 10 degrees Fahrenheit above the
minimum operating temperature and 10 degrees Fahrenheit below
maximum operating temperature as determined by the equipment
manufacturer's guidelines: i
1) Provide all power wiring for these devices (e.g., heaters, fans, etc.),
whether or not indicated on the Drawings. ,
5. Area classifications: a�
a. Furnish enclosures that match the area classifications as specified in Sub- i
Section 10.16050.
1.09 SEQUENCING
A. Training: �I
1. Complete all training before the pre-commissioning phase of the project may i
start.
2. Schedule the training sessions a minimum of 15 days before the start date of
the courses.
3. Submit training manuals to the ENGINEER a minimum of 10 days before
starting the training session.
4. Within 10 days after the completion of each session, submit the following: d`
a. A list of all OWNER personnel that attended the session.
b. A copy of the training materials utilized during the lesson with all notes,
diagrams, and comments.
B. Pre-commissioning test:
1. Commence after acceptance of all training, wire test, calibration tests, and
loop validation tests, and all inspections have demonstrated that the PCIS
complies with all Contract requirements.
2. Acceptance of the PCIS pre-commissioning testing must be provided in writing a�
by the ENGINEER before the performance testing may begin.
3. The OWNER shall assist with pre-commissioning testing for PLCs
programmed by the OWNER.
4. The OWNER shall not be required to be on site until the loop validation tests
are complete for a PLC/RTU and all prerequisites for the pre-commissioning
test are completed.
C. Provide all special tools and spare parts, as specified in the Maintenance paragraph
of this Section, before performance testing commences, suitably wrapped and
identified.
D. Performance testing:
1. Complete pre-commissioning test a minimum of 5 days before the
performance test.
E. Substantial completion: The following conditions be fulfilled before the PCIS is
considered complete:
1. All submittals have been completed and approved.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.17050-12 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235 B10/Specifications/10.17050
2. The PCIS has been calibrated, loop tested and pre-commissioned.
3. The OWNER training has been performed.
4. All required spare parts, expendable supplies, and test equipment have been
delivered to the OWNER.
' 5. The performance test has been successfully completed.
6. All debris associated with installation of instrumentation has been removed.
7. All probes, elements, sample lines, transmitters, tubing, and enclosures have
' been cleaned and are in like-new condition.
1.10 NOT USED)
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Provide additional warranty as specified in the individual Instrumentation and
Control Specifications.
1.12 SYSTEM START-UP
A. Replace or modify equipment, software, and materials that do not achieve design
requirements after installation in order to attain compliance with the design
requirements:
1. Following replacement or modification, retest the system and perform
additional testing to place the complete system in satisfactory operation and
obtain compliance acceptance from the ENGINEER.
1.13 (NOT USED)
1.14 GOMMISSIGNING (NOT USED)
1.15 MAINTENANCE
A. Before Substantial Completion, perform all maintenance activities required by the
Contract Documents including any calibrations, final adjustments, component
replacements or other routine service required before placing equipment or systems
in service.
1. Furnish all spare parts as required by the Contract Documents.
B. Provide additional spare parts specified in other sections of the Instrumentation and
Control Specifications.
C. Submit all special tools and spare parts, suitably wrapped and identified, before
performance testing commences.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide similar items from a single manufacturer throughout the PCIS portion of the
Project.
B. Allowable manufacturers are specified in individual instrument and equipment
specifications in other sections of the Instrumentation and Control Specifications.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.17050-13 8235B10
pw:ll carollo/Documents/ClieMMA/Renton1 8235B10/Specilcations110.11110
2.02 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Furnish all materials under this Contract that are new, free from defects, and
standard products produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production
of these devices and that bear all approvals and labels as required by the
Specifications.
B. Provide materials complying with the applicable industrial standard as specified in
the Contract Documents.
2.04 NOT USED)
2.05 EQUIPMENT-(NOT USED) �I
I
2.06 COMPONENTS
A. Furnish all meters, instruments, and other components that are the most recent field
proven models marketed by their manufacturers at the time of submittal of the shop
drawings unless otherwise specified to match existing equipment.
B. Unless otherwise specified, furnish individual instruments that have a minimum
accuracy of±0.5 percent of full scale and a minimum repeatability of±0.25 percent
of full scale.
I
C. Signal transmission:
1. Analog signals: a(
a. Furnish analog measurements and control signals that vary in direct linear `
proportion to the measured variable, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Furnish electrical analog signals outside control panels that are 4 to
20 milliamperes 24 VDC, except as indicated.
c. Analog signals within enclosures may be 1 to 5 VDC.
d. Electrically or optically isolate all analog signals from other signals. m
e. All pneumatic signals: 3 to 15 pounds per square inch gauge. Uf
f. Discrete input signal as indicated in the controller hardware specification.
g. Discrete output signals:
1) Dry contacts or TRIAC outputs (with express written approval by the
ENGINEER) as needed to coordinate with the field device.
2) Provide external terminal block mounted fuse with blown fuse
indication for all discrete outputs.
3) Interposing relays: f
a) Provide interposing relays for all discrete outputs.
h. Furnish regulated analog signals that are not affected by changes in
supply voltage or load resistance within the unit's rating.
i. Maintain the total 4 to 20 milliamperes loop impedance to 10 percent
below the published value at the loop operating voltage.
j. Where necessary, reduce loop impedance by providing current-to-current
(1/1) isolation amplifiers for signal re-transmission.
D. Discrete circuit configuration:
1. Configure discrete control circuits to fail safe, on loss of continuity or loss of
power.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.17050-14 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specfications/10.17050 '�
2. Alarm contacts: Fail to the alarm condition.
3. Control contacts fail to the inoperative condition unless otherwise indicated on
the Drawings.
E. Grounding:
1. Provide control panels with a signal ground bus, isolated from the power
ground bus:
a. Provide multiple panels in one location with a common point for signal
I ground bus connection to ground.
2. Ground single point ground shields and measurement loops at the source
panel external terminals, unless otherwise noted, by bonding to the control
panel signal ground bus.
3. Provide isolating amplifiers within control panels for field equipment
possessing a grounded input or output, except when the panel circuit is
galvanically isolated.
2.07 (NOT USED)
2.08 MIX€ (NOT USED)
2.09 FABRICTI (NOT USED)
2.10 F "I,-R.,ES (NOT USED
I2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide all equipment that is new, free from defects, and standard products
produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of these products
that bear all approvals and labels as required by the Specifications.
B. Arrange with all manufacturers of the equipment and fabricators of panels and
j cabinets, to allow the OWNER and ENGINEER to inspect and witness the testing of
the equipment at the site of fabrication:
1. Equipment includes the cabinets, special control systems, flow measuring
devices, and other pertinent systems and devices.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Review the existing Site conditions and examine all shop drawings for the various
items of equipment in order to determine exact routing and final terminations for all
wiring and cables.
B. Provide a complete instrumentation and control system:
1. Install all extra conduits, cables, and interfaces as may be necessary to
provide a complete and operating electrical, and process control and
instrumentation system.
1
September - _
p 10, 2010 FINAL 10.17050 15 8235810
pw:ll Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235610/Specificabons/10.17050
it
on
3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED)
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment locations indicated on the Drawings may change due to variations in In
equipment size or minor changes made by others during construction:
1. Verify all dimensions as indicated on the Drawings:
a. Actual field conditions govern all final installed locations, distances, and
levels.
2. Review all information indicated on the Drawings, including architectural,
structural, mechanical, instrumentation, and the accepted electrical,
instrumentation, and mechanical shop drawings, and coordinate Work as
necessary to adjust to all conditions that arise due to such changes. I
3. Make minor changes in location of equipment before rough in, as directed by
the OWNER or ENGINEER. `
B. Perform all related Electrical Work in accordance with the applicable sections of the
Electrical Specifications.
C. The PCIS configurations are diagrammatic:
1. The locations of equipment area approximate unless dimensioned.
P PP `
2. Where Project conditions require, make reasonable changes in locations and
arrangements.
D. Field instruments installation: a�
1. Install field instruments as specified in the Contract Documents, ANSI/API 550
and 551, and the manufacturer's instructions.
2. Mount field instruments so that they can be easily read, readily approached,
and easily serviced, and so they do not restrict access to mechanical
equipment:
a. Mount field instruments on a pipe stand or local panel, if they are not
directly mounted, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
b. Provide sun shields for all field electronic instruments exposed to direct
sunlight. O'
3. Make connections from rigid conduit systems to field instruments with PVC
coated flexible conduit:
a. Type of flexible conduit required for the area classification:
1) Area classification as specified in Sub-Section 10.16050.
b. Maximum length of 18 inches.
4. Connect field instruments with cable as specified in the Electrical
Specifications, except when the manufacturer requires the use of special
cable, or otherwise specified herein.
a. Special cable applications shall be in accordance with the NEC.
5. Verify the correctness of each installation:
a. Polarity of electric power and signal connections. IJ
b. Ensure all process connections are free of leaks.
E. Process sensing lines and air tubing:
1. Install individual tubes parallel and/or perpendicular to and near the surfaces
from which they are supported.
2. Provide supports for rigid tubing at intervals of not more than 3 feet.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.17050-16 82351310
pw:#Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.17050
3. Slope horizontal runs of instrument tubing at a minimum of 1/1 6th inch per foot
to allow for draining of any condensate.
4. Bends:
a. Use proper tool.
' b. Make bends for parallel lines symmetrical.
c. Make bends without deforming or thinning the walls of the tubing.
5. Square-cut and clean all ends of tubing before being inserted in the fittings.
6. Provide bulkhead fittings at all panels requiring pipe and/or tubing entries.
7. Use stainless steel tubing for all piping hard piped from the air header, unless
otherwise indicated on the Drawings or not compatible with the fluids or
1 atmosphere in the area:
a. Use flexible connections only on moving equipment and under the
constraint that the length shall be less than 1.5 times maximum travel of
the equipment.
F. Conduit, cables, and field wiring:
1. Provide all PCIS equipment cables, and process LAN communication
networks under the Instrumentation and Control Specifications.
2. Provide terminations and wire identification as specified in the Electrical
Specifications.
3. Protect all wiring from sharp edges and corners.
4. Provide all conduits, fittings, boxes, etc. in accordance with all the
requirements of the Electrical Specifications.
tG. Equipment tie-downs:
1. Anchor all instruments, control panels, and equipment by methods that comply
with seismic and wind bracing requirements, which apply to the Site.
I 2. All control panels, VCPs, LCPs, RTUs, PCMs, etc., shall be permanently
mounted and tied down to structures.
H. Instrument tagging:
1. As specified in Sub-Section 10.16075.
2. Provide all field-mounted instruments with nameplates:
a. Nameplates engraved with the instrument's full tag number as indicated
on the Drawings:
1) Affix tags with stainless steel wire fasteners.
3. Provide all back of panel instruments with nameplates:
a. Engraved with the instrument's full tag number as indicated on the
Drawings:
4. Provide all front of panel instruments with a nameplate:
a. Engraving to include the instrument's full tag number and service
description.
b. Secure nameplates to the panel with stainless steel screws.
c. Use an approved adhesive if screws would violate the NEMA or other
ratings of the enclosure.
I. Cable and conductor termination:
1. Terminate all cables and conductors on terminal blocks.
2. Terminal block enclosures:
a. Suitable for the area classification as specified in Sub-Section 10.16050.
J. Surge protection:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.17050-17 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documerits/Cli ent/WA/Re nton/8235 Bl0/Specifications/10.17050
1. Provide outdoor field instrument loops with voltage surge protection units
installed on the instruments.
2. Individually fuse each 4-20 milliamperes direct current loop with a 1/16 ampere
fuse between power supplies and receiver surge protectors.
3. Provide voltage surge protection for 4 wire transmitters and analyzers: Q
a. Protect both power source and signal loop.
3.04
ERECTION, INSTALLATION, rnDP ICATION, CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED)
3.05 REPAIFURESTORAT-11O (NOT USED)
3.06 RE INSTALLATION ATION (NOT USED)
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
I
A. Inspection:
1. Provide any assistance necessary to support inspection activities.
2. ENGINEER inspections may include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Inspect equipment and materials for physical damage.
b. Inspect installation for compliance with Drawings and Specifications.
c. Inspect installation for obstructions and adequate clearances around �
equipment.
d. Inspect equipment installation for proper leveling, alignment, anchorage,
and assembly.
e. Inspect equipment nameplate data to verify compliance with design
requirements.
f. Inspect cable terminations.
g._ Inspect/witness instrument calibrations/verifications.
B. Installation supervision:
1. Ensure that the entire PCIS is installed in a proper and satisfactory manner. At
a minimum, the ICSC shall provide the following services:
a. Installation resources:
1) Coordinate with the CONTRACTOR regarding installation
requirements of the Contract Documents.
b. Provide technical assistance to installation personnel by telephone:
1) Furnish installation personnel with at least one copy of the approved
submittals, including all installation details.
c. Periodic inspections during the construction period.
d. A complete check of the completed installation to ensure that it is in
conformance with the requirements of the equipment manufacturer and
the Contract Documents.
e. Field verify accuracy and calibration of all instruments.
3.08 CLEANING
A. Vacuum clean all control panels and enclosures before start-up and again after final
completion of the project.
B. Clean all panel surfaces.
C. Return to new condition any scratches and/or defects.
flll
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.17050-18 8235B10
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.17050 ��
t
D. Wipe all instrument faces and enclosures clean.
tE. Leave wiring in panels, manholes, boxes, and other locations in a neat, clean, and
organized manner:
1. Neatly coil and label all spare wiring lengths.
2. Shorten, re-terminate, and re-label excessive spare wire and cable lengths, as
determined by the ENGINEER.
O
F. As specified in other sections of the Contract Documents.
3.09 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Training:
1. General:
a. Conduct all training at the Project Site unless another location is approved
by the ENGINEER and OWNER:
1) Include instruction on the use of all maintenance equipment and
special tools provided under the Contract.
b. Tailor training classes to the specific needs of the class participants:
1) Furnish additional sessions if required to accommodate the total
number of personnel identified for each course.
2. Training manuals and materials:
a. Furnish training manuals and other materials for training courses.
b. Manuals are to be professionally written to present the course material in
a format that is easy to comprehend.
c. The manuals are to serve as teaching aids during presentation of the
training classes.
d. Manuals are to serve as reference material after the training has been
completed.
3. Training course requirements:
a. System overview training:
b. Instrumentation training:
1) Furnish training covering all instruments and control panels.
2) Furnish the specified quantity of training, allocated to cover new
instruments and hardwired controls as described herein and
specifically determined in the approved training plan.
3) Train maintenance staff in the use, cleaning, calibration,
maintenance, and troubleshooting of all the instruments furnished
within this Project.
4) Furnish training on the operation of new hardwired controls.
3.10 PROTECTION
A. Protect all Work from damage or degradation until date of Substantial Completion.
3.11 (NOT USED)
END OF SUB-SECTION
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.17050-19 82351310
pw:l/Carollo/Documents/ClienWVNRenton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.17050
0
0
t
0
o .
r
ul
e 'I
� I
0
e
0
a
e
0
A
1
1
j
SUB-SECTION 10.17201
LEVEL MEASUREMENT - SWITCHES
i
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes requirements for:
1. Displacement Float Level Switch.
B. Related Sections/Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding
as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of
subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing
any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sections/Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only
and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR to
see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 1-05 - Control of Work.
b. Sub-Section 10.17050 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems General
Requirements.
C. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents.
1.02 REFERENCES
tA. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section1-05 and Sub-Section 10.17050.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
B. Examine the complete set of Contract Documents and verify that the instruments are
compatible with the installed conditions including:
1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc.
2. Physical conditions:
a. Installation and mounting requirements.
b. Location within the process.
c. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are compatible
with the process conditions and physical installation.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 1 10.17201-1 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/Cl ient[WA/Re nton/8235 B 10/S pecifications/10.17201.doc
C. Notify the ENGINEER if any installation condition does not meet the instrument
manufacturer's recommendations or specifications.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
r
1.09 MAINTENANCE ,
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
PART 2 PRODUCTS n`
2.01 MANUFACTURERS 11I
A. Displacement Float Level Switch or equal:
1. Gems Sensors and Controls Series LS-3.
2. Siemens Water Technologies Model 9GEF.
2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Displacement Float Level Switch:
1. General: Float with a permanent magnet encircles a stationary stem. A hermetically �f
sealed magnetically operated latching reed switch(es) mounted in the stem:
a. Mercury switches are not acceptable.
2. Lead Wires: Mounted in flexible waterproof PVC cable from switch to junction box
terminals without splices.
3. Switch:
a. Single pole single throw (SPST). �[
4. The number of floats per level system shall be as shown on the Drawings.
5. Switches shall be suitable for operation in Class I Division 1 locations.
2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL �!
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050. 01
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINAT (NOT USED)
3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED)
3.03 INSTALLATION
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.17201-2 8235610
pw:YCarollo/Documents/Client/WAt Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.17201.doc
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
B. Mount 24 inch above finished floor or as indicated on the drawings.
C. Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure that the mechanical system has all
necessary appurtenances including weld-o-lets, valves, etc. for proper installation of
instruments.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Verify factory calibration of all instruments in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions:
1. Return factory calibrated devices to the factory if they do not meet the field verification
requirements for calibration.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
3.07 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
B. Demonstrate performance of all instruments to the ENGINEER before commissioning.
C. Furnish 4 hours of OWNER training.
3.08 PROTECTION
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
3.09 SCHEDULES
A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments. Provide all
instruments identified in the Contract Documents:
1. Instruments may be shown on the Drawings, in the Specifications or both.
END OF SUB-SECTION
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.17201-3 8235610
pw:ll CarollolDocuments/Clientl WA/Rentonl8235110/1 pecifications110,17201.d oc
�I
�1
1�
A�
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.17201-4 8235B10
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClientfWA/Renton/8235 Bl0/Specifications/10.17201.doc
l
SUB-SECTION 10.17404
PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT- GAUGES
PART GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes requirements for:
1. Pressure/Vacuum gauges.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
a. Sub-Section 10.01330 - Submittal Procedures.
b. Sub-Section 10.17050 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems
General Requirements.
iC. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. As specified in Sub-Section 10.17050.
B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1. 1340.100 — Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. As specified in Sub-Section 10.17050.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sub-Sections 10.01330 and 10.17050.
B. Additional requirements:
1. Product data:
a. Accessories such as diaphragm seals, valve manifold, snubbers, and
pulsation dampeners.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As specified in Sub-Section 10.17050.
September 10 2 1 - -
p 0 0 FINAL 17404 1 8235610
pw:ICarollo/DocumentslClieVWA/Rerl on/811,11015pecilcationOI'17404(F)
B. Examine the complete set of Contact Documents and verify that the instruments are
compatible with the installed conditions including:
1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc.
2. Physical conditions:
a. Installation and mounting requirements.
b. Location within the process.
c. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are
compatible with the process conditions and physical installation.
C. Notify the ENGINEER if any installation condition does not meet the instrument
manufacturer's recommendations or specifications.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. As specified in Sub-Section 10.17050.
t
.1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Sub-Section 10.17050. �f
1.08 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Sub-Section 10.17050.
1.09 MAINTENANCE
A. As specified in Sub-Section 10.17050. (�
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Ashcroft:
a. Maximum pressureless than 10 psi: Model 1188.
b. Maximum pressure greater than or equal to 10 psi: Model 1279.
2. Wika.
3. Ametek U.S. Gauge.
2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. General:
1. Pressure gauge assembly-shall include pressure sensing element, gauge
case, and dial mechanism.
B. Performance requirements:
1. Pressure range:
a. As specified in the Contract Documents.
2. Accuracy:
a. Grade 2A, as defined by ASME B40.100.
b. ±1.0 percent of span after friction errors are eliminated by tapping or
vibration. l
I�
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 1.7404-2 8235810
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.17404(F)
c. Maximum allowable friction inaccuracy: ±1.0 percent of span.
3. Element:
a. Where the maximum pressure is less than 10 psi, provide socket and
bellows; for all other pressure ranges, employ a Bourdon tube.
b. Socket tips for bellows and Bourdon tube-
1) Materials: Type 316 stainless steel.
c. Overpressure: Minimum 130 percent of maximum range pressure without
damage to gauge or sensing element.
d. Wetted Materials: 316 stainless steel.
4. Dial gauge:
a. Dial size: 4-1/2 inches.
b. Dial case material: Phenolic.
c. Provide safety gauge with rupture disk and blow out back.
d. Dial face: Gasketed shatterproof glass or polycarbonate.
e. Provide gauge locks where possible.
f. Hermetically sealed.
g. Connection and mounting:
1) Direct mounted and suitable for outdoor installation.
2) 1/2 inch NPT.
3) Connection material: Stainless steel.
h. Pointer: Externally adjustable.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
tA. Provide a diaphragm seal for each pressure gauge
1. Diaphragm seal and pressure gauge shall be assembled by manufacturer and
shipped as an assembly.
2. All stainless steel construction.
3. 1 inch process connection.
B. Provide means for gauge isolation:
1. Mount valve manifold integrally to the gauge or diaphragm seal.
1 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. As specified in Sub-Section 10.17050.
iB. Factory calibrate each pressure gauge at a facility that is traceable to the National
Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).
C. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of all calibration
instruments.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 €XAMINAT191 (NOT USED)
3.02 PREPARAT (NOT USED)
3.03 . INSTALLATION
A. As specified in Sub-Section 10.17050.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 17404-3 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8 2 3 5 131 0/Specifications/10.17404(F)
B. Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure that the mechanical system has
all necessary appurtenances including weld-o-lets, valves, etc. for proper
installation of instruments.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL �I
A. As specified in Sub-Section 10.17050.
B. Provide manufacturer's services to perform start-up and calibration or verification.
�I
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Verify factory calibration of all instruments in accordance with the manufacturer's �
instructions:
1. Return factory calibrated devices to the factory if they do not meet the field
verification requirements for calibration. 1 '
3.06 CLEANING
A. As specified in Sub-Section 10.17050.
3.07 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. As specified in Sub-Section 10.17050.
B. Demonstrate performance of all instruments to the ENGINEER before
commissioning:
1. Furnish 0.5 hours of OWNER training. pr
3.08 PROTECTION �Jt
A. As specified in Sub-Section 10.17050.
3.09 SCHEDULES
A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments.
Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents:
1. Instruments may be indicated on the Drawings, specified in the Specifications
or both.
i
�r
rt �
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 17404-4 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specificatlons/10.17404(F)
�r
A/E: Carollo Engineers PRESSURE
GAUGES
Spec.No. Rev.
Contractor: No By Date Revision
Project: Contract Date
Customer:
Plant: Req. P.O.
Location:
BOM No.: By Chk App
File:
1 Type Direct Rd g.: Receiver: Other:
2 Mounting Surface: Local: Flush:
3 Dial Diameter. 4.5" 1 Color:
4 Case Cast Iron: Aluminum: Phenolic: Polished SS Other:
5 Ring Screwed: Hinged: -Slip: Std: 'Other:
6 Blowout Protection None: Disc: Front: Other: Mfr. Std.
7 Lens Glass: Plastic:
8 Options Syphon:N/A Material:
9 Other Snubber:
10 Other Pressure Limit Valve:N/A
11 Other Movcment Darn ing: N/A
12 Nominal Accuracy Required
13 Pressure Element Bourdon: Bellows: Other:
14 Element Material Bronze: Steel: Type SS: 316 Other:
15 Socket Material Bronze: Steel: SS: 316 Other:
16 Connection '/4 in.: '/z in.: Bottom: Other:
17 Movement Dampened: Standard: Other:
18 Diaphragm Seal Mfr.: Wetted.Part Mat'1: Type:
19 Other Other Mat'l: Fill Fluid: Model:
20 Manufacturer
21 1 Model No.
i Rev Tag Number Range P&ID Service Notes
i
I
Notes:
END OF SUB-SECTION
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 17404-5 8235B10
pw:,CarollolDocumenulClienVWA/Renton/8235B10/Sp,cifiratlons/10.17404(F)
D'
DC
�I
o�
�i
It
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 17404-6 82351310
pw:l/Carollo/Document sl ClientfWNRent on/8235B10/Specifications110.17404(F)
�r
SUB-SECTION 10.17407
PRESSURE MEASUREMENT - SUBMERSIBLE
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes requirements for:
1. Submersible pressure transmitters.
B. Related Sections/Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all.
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sections/Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this
Sub-Section. This list of Related Sections/Sub-Sections is provided for
convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty
of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work complies accurately
with the Contract Documents.
a. Section 1-05 - Control of Work.
b. Sub-Section 10.17050 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems
General Requirements.
C. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 1-05 and Sub-Section 10.17050.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
B. Examine the complete set of Contact Documents and verify that the instruments are
compatible with the installed conditions including:
1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc.
2. Physical conditions:
a. Installation and mounting requirements.
b. Location within the process.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.17407-1 8235610
pw:l/Carollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.17407.doc
c. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are
compatible with the process conditions and physical installation.
C. Notify the ENGINEER if any installation condition does not meet the instrument
manufacturer's recommendations or specifications. I
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
1.07 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
�I
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050. i
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
1.09 MAINTENANCE
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050. r
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Submersible level measurement with 2-wire integral transmitter: '
1. One of the following or equal: f
a. KPS1720.
2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS �f
A. Submersible level measurement with 2-wire integral transmitter:
1. General: lJl�
a. Pressure is measured through a ceramic measuring cell and converted to l�
linear pressure measurement.
b. Each submersible pressure transmitter system shall include:
1) Signal cable.
2) Transducer with integral transmitter.
3) Transmitter cable termination box.
c. Designed for use in a Class 1 Division I location.
d. U.L. listed
2. Performance requirements:
a. Accuracy:
1) 0.3 percent of range.
b. Repeatability:
1) 0.25 percent of full scale.
c. Rangeability.
1) 3:1.
d. Range: �1
1) 0-16 feet. 1
3. Element:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.17407-2 82351310
pwXarollo/Documents/ClienYWA/Rentonl8235B10/Specifications/10.17407.doc
II
a. Sensor housing shall be 316L stainless steel with ceramic diaphragm.
1 b. Protective cap shall be polyethylene material.
c. Slip resistant extension cable with pressure compensation tube with
Teflon filter.
1 d. Enclosure for transmitter assembly shall be NEMA 4X.
4. Transmitter:
a. Power supply:
1) 24 VDC - 2 wire loop powered.
2) Power consumption: 18 VA maximum.
b. Outputs:
1) Isolated 4-20mA DC.
c. Without display.
d. Ambient operating temperature limits of-10 to 70 degrees Celsius
(-14 to 158 degrees Fahrenheit).
e. Designed for use in a Class 1 Division I location.
f. U.L. listed
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide 316L SS mounting clamps with 304 SS mounting screws.
B. Provide cable clamp and strain relief.
C. Provide computer cable adapter with Windows® software.
D. Stilling well and mounting bracket.
E. Long life vent filter.
2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
B. Factory calibrate each instrument at a facility that is traceable to the National
Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).
C. Provide a real-time computer generated printout of the actual calibration data
indicating apparent and actual levels at 20 percent, 40 percent, 60 percent, 80
percent and 100 percent of the calibrated ranges. Submit to the ENGINEER and
included in the O&M.
D. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of all calibration
instruments.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINAT1/lAl (NOT USED)
3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED)
3.03 INSTALLATION
t
September 10, 2010 -
FINAL 10.17407-3 8235610
pw:/ICarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Rentonl8235B10/Specifications/10,17407.doc
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
B. Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure that the mechanical system has
all necessary appurtenances including weld-o-lets, valves, etc. for proper
installation of instruments. 1
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
B. Provide manufacturer's services to perform start-up and calibration or verification.
3.05 ADJUSTING �I
A. Verify factory calibration of all instruments in accordance with the manufacturer's `
instructions:
1. Return factory calibrated devices to the factory if they do not meet the field
verification requirements for calibration. �I
3.06 CLEANING
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
3.07 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
I
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050. i
3.08 PROTECTION `
II
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
3.09 SCHEDULES
I
A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments.
Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents:
1. Instruments may be shown on the Drawings, in the Specifications or both.
l�l
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.17407-4 8235B10
pw:HCarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specifications/10.17407.doc ��
i
A/E: Carollo Engineers SUBMERSIBLE PRESSURE
INSTRUMENTS
Spec.No. Rev.
Contractor: No By Date Revision
/ Project: Contract Date
Customer:
Plant: Req. P.O.
Location:
BOM No.: By Chk APP
File:
1 Instrument Tag Number LIT-xxic
'. G 2 Service
E 3 P&ID
N 4 Fluid Type Water
5 Fluid Specific Gravity 1.0
6 Type Submersible
P 7 Measuring Cell Material Ceramic Diaphragm
R 8 Probe Body Material 316 L SS
O 9 O .Temp.Range 40-80 deg F
B 10 O .Pressure Range 0- ft
E 11 Other
12 Other
C 13 Style Mfg. Std
A 14 Signal Cable Length As Required
B 15 Other
L 16 Other
E 17 Other
18 Type
T 19 Operating Mode Continuous
R 20 Enclosure
A 21 _Mounting
N 22 Temperature Range
S 23 Measurement Range
M 24 Power Supply 24 VDC
I 25 Accuracy 0.3 %of range
T 26 Display
T 27 Output 4-20 mA
E 28 Calibration
R 29 Status Relay
30 Manufacturer
31 Model No.
32 Elect.Entry
33 Other
O 33
P 34
T 35
S 36
Notes:
END OF SUB-SECTION
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.17407-5 8235610
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton18235Bl0/Specifications/10.17407.doc
I
�i
1�
�1
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 10.17407-6 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton1 8235B10/Specifications/10.17407.doc ��
jl
SUB-SECTION 10.17710
CONTROL SYSTEMS - PANELS, ENCLOSURES, AND PANEL COMPONENTS
PART GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Sub-Section includes requirements for:
1. Design, fabrication and assembly of all instrumentation enclosures, control
panels and components provided under this contract, including but not limited
to:
a. Custom built instrumentation and control panels, including PCMs, RTUs,
LCPs, Instrument Junction Boxes (IJBs), and Power Junction Boxes
(PJBs).
b. Control panels furnished as part of equipment systems specified in other
Divisions, such as vendor control panels (VCP) and chemical feed panels.
c. Control components.
d. Control panel installation.
B. Related Sub-Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as
binding as if called for by all
2. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the
Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing
or furnishing any of CONTRACTOR's Work.
3. The following Sub-Sections are related to the Work described in this Sub-
Section. This list of related Sub-Sections is provided for convenience only and
is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR
to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract
Documents.
a. Sub-Section 10.01330 - Submittal Procedures.
b. Sub-Section 10.01612 - Seismic Design Criteria.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
B. Specific References:
1. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA):
a. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).
b. NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Control and Systems.
2. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):
a. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
b. UL 508 - Industrial Control Equipment.
c. UL 508A- Standard for Industrial Control Panels.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 17710-1 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/ClientfWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.17710.docx
B. Specific Definitions:
1. The term "panel" in this Sub-Section is interchangeable with the term
"enclosure."
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Panel.Dimensions:
1. Minimum dimensions are scalable from or as indicated on the Drawings and
are based upon manufacturer's non-certified information. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor or Manufacturer to design and size all panels:
a. Size panels to provide space for all equipment, wiring, terminations, and
other items in the panel, including space for future build out.
b. Panel sizes that substantially deviate (±3 inches in any dimension)from
the sizes shown on the Drawings must be approved by the ENGINEER.
c. Maximum panel depth: 30 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Structural Design:
1. Completed and installed panel work shall safely withstand seismic
requirements at the project site indicated in Sub-Section 10.16050. Enclosures
and internal equipment shall be braced to prevent damage from specified
forces.
1.05 SUBMITTALS f
A. Provide submittals in accordance with Sub-Sections 10.01330 and 10.17050.
B. Provide a control panel hardware submittal, for each control panel and enclosure
being provided on this project, including but not limited to:
1. Product Data: {l'
a. Enclosure construction details and NEMA type.
b. Manufacturer's literature and specification data sheets for each type of
equipment to be installed within or on the panel or enclosure.
2. Shop Drawings:
a. Scaled, detailed exterior panel (front and side views) and interior panel
layout showing equipment arrangement and dimensional information:
1) Provide draft for review and approval by ENGINEER. The
ENGINEER has the authority to substantially alter initial panel
layouts.
b. Complete nameplate engraving schedule.
c. Structural details of fabricated panels.
3. Calculations:
a. Provide installation details based on calculated shear and tension forces:
1) Calculations shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer
licensed in the state where the cabinets and panels will be installed.
b. For assembled enclosures and other equipment with a weight of
200 pounds or more, provide calculations for:
1) Weight including panel internal components.
2) Seismic forces and overturning moments.
3) Shear and tension forces in connections.
c. Cooling Calculations, to include but not limited to:
1) Highest expected ambient temperature for the enclosure's location
2) Internal heat load.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 17710-2 82351310
pw:HCarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235610/Specifications/10.17710.docx
I�
3) Exposure to direct sunlight..
4) Dimensions of the enclosure in inches.
. 5) Maximum allowable temperature inside the enclosure, based on the
lowest operating temperature limit of the installed components.
C. Seismic Design:
1. Seismic Panel Construction:
a. Seismic Anchorage: Provide seismic design calculations and installation
details for anchorage of all panels, enclosures, consoles, etc. to meet
seismic requirements in Sub-Section 10.01612:
1) Stamped by a Professional Engineer registered in the state where
the project is being constructed.
b. For floor mounted free standing panels weighing 200 pounds or more
(assembled, including contents), submit calculations, data sheets, and
other information to substantiate that panel, base, and framing meet
minimum design strength requirements and seismic requirements per
Sub-Section 10.01612. Calculations shall be signed and sealed by a
Professional Engineer licensed in the state where the cabinets and panels
will be installed.
1.nrz QUALITV neci1onNCE
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
B. Assemble panels, enclosures, and rack systems along with all internal and external
devices, wiring, equipment, and materials in a facility that is recognized by
Underwriters Laboratories to assemble and certify UL-labeled control panels:
1. Provide all components and equipment with UL508 listing.
i 2. All control panels shall be UL 508A labeled, unless the equipment in the panel
and the design in the contract documents cannot be reasonably modified to
meet the requirements for UL508A labeling:
3. Provide fuses for all equipment that is not UL or UR listed.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
�V A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
B. Crate all panels for shipment using a heavy framework and skids:
1. Provide factory-wrapped waterproof flexible barrier material for covering
materials, where applicable, to protect against physical damage in transit.
2. Provide suitable shipping stops and cushioning material for all instruments
shipped with the panel to prevent damage due to mechanical shock during
shipment.
3. Provide each separate panel unit with removable lifting lugs to facilitate
handling.
I� I
C. Ship all panels by dedicated air ride van, unless otherwise specified or approved.
�k
1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
i
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 17710-3 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Cl ient/WA/Renton/8235810/S pecifications/10.17710.d ocx
I
2.05 EQUIPMENT (NOT USED)
2.06 COMPONENTS
A. Thermal Management:
1. Provide heating, cooling, and dehumidifying devices in order to maintain all
instrumentation and control devices to within a range as specified in Sub-
Section 10.17050.
2. Heating:
a. Provide all panels located in areas that are not climate controlled with
thermostatically controlled strip heaters; except, where all of the following
conditions apply: ,
1) The panel is not supplied with 120 VAC power.
2) There are no electronics or moisture-sensitive devices in the
enclosure.
3) The panel is smaller'than 38 inches high. -y
3. Heat Exchanger:
a. Closed-loop design ensuring separation of ambient air and clean air inside
the cabinet.
b. Filterless design to facilitate easy cleaning of the core.
c. Mounting: indicated on the Drawings.
4. Fan Ventilation:
a. Muffin style:
1) Provide two door/cabinet mounted vent fans for every 72 inches of
cabinet width.
2) Provide Finger Guard kit.
3) Filter kit with 2 spare filters for each intake fan.
4) Provide bezel and gasket kit.
5) Provide fan shroud.
b. Temperature control switch and alarm:
1) Power: 120 VAC.
2) Bimetallic temperature senor.
3) Adjustable setpoint range 30 degrees Fahrenheit to 140 degree
Fahrenheit.
4) Hoffman ATEM series or equal.
B. Pilot Devices:
1. General: E
a. Provide operator pushbuttons, switches, and pilot lights, from a single
manufacturer.
b. Size:
1) 30.5 mm.
c. Heavy duty.
d. Pushbuttons: I �
1) Contacts rated:
a) N E MA Type A600.
2) Furnish one spare normally open and normally closed contact with
each switch.
e. Selector switches:
1 Contacts rated:
a) NEMA Type A600.
b) Knob type:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 17710-10 8235610
pw:l/Carollo/Documents/Client/WNRenton1 8235B10/Specificationsl10.17710.docx
■
i
2) Furnish one spare normally open contact and normally closed
contact with each switch.
3) Provisions for locking in the OFF position where lockout provisions
are indicated on the Drawings.
f. Pilot lights:
1) Type:
a) LED for interior installations.
b) Incandescent for exterior installations.
2) Push to Test.
3) Lamp Color:
a) On/Running/Start: Red.
b) Off/Stop: Green.
c) Power: White.
d) Alarm: Amber.
e) Status or Normal Condition: White.
f) Opened: Amber.
g) Closed: Blue.
h) Failure: Red.
2. Indoor and Outdoor Areas:
a. NEMA Type 4/13.
b. Manufacturer: One of the following:
1) Allen Bradley Type 800T.
2) Square D Class 9001 Type K.
3) General Electric Type.CR104P.
4) IDEC TWTD.
3. Corrosive Areas:
a. NEMA Type 4X.
b. Corrosion resistant.
c. Exterior parts of high impact strength fiberglass reinforced polyester or
multiple-layer epoxy coated zinc.
d. Manufacturer: One of the following:
1) Cutler Hammer Type E34.
2) Square D Class 9001 Type SK.
3) Allen Bradley Type 800H.
4) IDEC TWTD.
4. Hazardous (Classified)Areas/Class I Division 2:
a. NEMA Type 4X.
b. Corrosion resistant.
c. Exterior parts of high impact strength fiberglass reinforced polyester or
multiple-layer epoxy coated zinc:
1) All contacts contained within a hermetically sealed chamber:
a) Pushbuttons.
b) Selector switches.
c) Push-to-test contacts on pilot lights.
2) UL listed and labeled for Class I Division 2 areas.
d. Manufacturer: One of the following:
1) Cutler Hammer Type E34.
2) Allen Bradley Type 800H.
C. Signal isolators and converters:
1. Furnish signal isolators that provide complete isolation of input, output, and
power input:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 17710-11 82351310
pw://Carollo/DocumeritsiClienYWA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.17710.docx
a. Minimum isolation level: 1.5 kV AC/50 Hz for at least 1 minute.
b. Adjustable span and zero.
c. Accuracy: ±1.0 percent of span.
d. Ambient temperature range: -20 degrees Celsius to +65 degrees Celsius.
2. Manufacturer: One of the following:
a. Phoenix Contact MCR Series.
b. Acromag 1500, 600T, 800T, Flat Pack or ACR Series.
c. Action Instruments Q500 Series or Ultra SlimPakll.
d. AGM electronics Model TA-4000.
D. Relays:
1. General: �1
a. For all types of 120 VAC relays, provide surge protection across the coil of
each relay.
b. For all types of 24 VDC relays, provide a free-wheeling diode across the
coil of each relay.
2. General Purpose:
a. Magnetic control relays.
b. NEMA Type A300 rated: �I
1) 300 Volts.
2) 10 Amps continuous.
3) 7,200 VA make.
4) 720 VA break.
c. Plug-in type.
d. LED indication for relay energized.
e. Coil voltages: As required for the application.
f. Minimum poles: 2PDT.
g. Touch safe design: All connection terminals to be protected against
accidental touch.
h. Enclose each relay in a clear plastic heat and shock-resistant dust cover.
i. Quantity and type of contact shall be as shown on the Drawings or as
needed for system compatibility.
j. Relays with screw-type socket terminals.
k. Provide additional (slave/interposing) relays when the following occurs:
1) The number or type of contacts shown exceeds the contact capacity 1�t
of the specified relays.
2) Higher contact rating is required in order to interface with starter
circuits or other equipment.
I. DIN rail mounting on 35 mm rail.
m. Ice Cube type relays with retainer clips to secure relay in socket.
n. Integrated label holder for device labeling.
o. Manufacturer: One of the following:
1) Phoenix Contact PLC series.
2) Potter and Brumfield Type KRP or KUP.
3) [DEC R* series. (* = H, J, R, S, U).
4) Allen Bradley Type 700 H Series.
5) Square D Type K.
3. Latching:
a. Magnetic latching control relays.
b. NEMA Type B300 rated:
1) 300 Volts.
2) 10 Amps continuous.
September 10, 2010 FINAL 17710-12 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.17710.docx
3) 3,600 VA make.
4) 320 VA break.
c. Plug-in type.
d. DIN rail mounting on 35 mm rail.
e. Coil voltage: as required for the application.
f. Minimum poles: 2PDT; as required for the application. Plus 1 spare pole.
g. Touch safe design: All connection terminals to be protected against
� accidental touch.
h. Clear cover for visual inspection.
i. Provide retainer clip to secure relay in socket.
j. Manufacturer: One of the following, or equal:
1) Square D type 8501 Type K.
2) IDEC TWTD.
4. Time Delay:
a. Provide time delay relays to control contact transition time.
b. Contact rating:
1) 240 Volts.
2) 10 Amps continuous.
3) 3,600 VA make.
4) 360 VA break.
c. Coil voltage: as required for the application.
d. Provide Pneumatic or Electronic type with on-delay, off-delay, and on/off
delay:
1) For off delay use true power off time delay relays. Where the
required timing range exceeds capability of the off delay relay use
signal off delay where power loss will not cause undesirable
operation or pneumatic time delay relays.
e. Minimum poles: 2PDT.
f. Units include adjustable dial with graduated scale covering the time range
in each case.
g. Minimum timing range: 0.1 seconds to 10 minutes, or as required for the
application.
h. Manufacturer: One of the following:
1) Idec GT3 series.
2) Agastat type Series 7000 series (pneumatic).
3) Allen Bradley type 700HR Series.
E. Terminal blocks:
1. Din rail mounting on 35 mm rail.
2. Suitable for specified AWG wire.
3. Rated for 30 amperes at 600 Volts.
4. Screw terminal type.
5. Provide mechanism to prevent wire connection from loosening in
environments where vibration is present. This mechanism shall not cause
permanent deformation to the metal body.
6. Finger safe protection for all terminals for conductors.
7. Construction: Polyamide insulation material capable of withstanding
temperature extremes from -40 degree Celsius to 105 degrees Celsius.
8. Terminals: Plainly identified to correspond with markings on the diagrams:
a. Permanent machine printed terminal identification.
9. Disconnect type field signal conductor terminals with socket/screw for testing.
10. Identify terminals suitable for use with more than 1 conductor.
September 10 2 1 - -
p 0 0 FINAL 17710 13 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Cl ienYWA/Renton/8235 B 10/Specifications/10.17710.4 ocx
11. Position:
a. So that the internal and external wiring does not cross.
b. To provide unobstructed access to the terminals and their conductors.
12. Provide minimum 25 percent spare terminals.
13. Manufacturer: One of the following:
a. Phoenix Contact UK5 Series.
b: Allen Bradley Series 1492.
14. Wire duct:
a. Provide flame retardant plastic wiring duct, slotted with dust cover. u
b. Type:
1) Wide slot.
2) Narrow slot.
3) Round hole.
c. Manufacturer: One of the following:
1) Panduit.
F. Surge Protection Devices:
1. Provide Surge Protection Device (SPD)for Power Entrances:
a. Nominal 120 VAC with a nominal clamping voltage of 200 Volts.
b. Non-faulting and non-interrupting design.
c. A response time of not more than 5 nanoseconds.
2. Control Panel Power System Level Protection, non-UPS powered:
a. Design to withstand a maximum 10 kA test current of a 8/20 ps waveform
according to ANSI/IEEE C62.41.1-2002 Category C Area.
b. Provide both normal mode noise protection (between current carrying
conductors) and common mode (between current carrying conductor and
neutral) surge protection.
c. DIN rail mounting.
d. Attach wiring to the SPD by means of a screw type cable-clamping
terminal block:
1) Gas-tight connections.
2) The terminal block: Fabricated of non-ferrous, non-corrosive
materials.
e. Visual status indication of MOV status on the input and output circuits.
f. Dry contact rated for at least 250 VAC, 1 Amp for remote status indication.
g. Meeting the following requirements:
1) Response time: :5100 ns.
2) Attenuation: ? -40 dB at 100 kHz as determined by a standard
50 ohms insertion test.
3) Safety approvals:
a) UL 1283 (EMI/RFI Filter).
b) UL 1449 2nd Edition.
h. Manufacturer: One of the following:
1) Phoenix Contact type SFP TVSS%Filter.
2) Liebe.rt Accuvar series.
3) Islatrol.
3. Data and Signal Line Protectors— Panel Mounted:
a. Surge protection minimum requirements: Withstand a 10 kA test current of l9�
a 8/20 ps waveform in accordance with ANSI/IEEE C62.41.1-2002
Category C Area.
b. DIN rail mounting on 35 mm rail (except field mounted SPDs).
c. SPDs consisting of 2 parts:
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 17710-14 8235B10
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specficaaons/10.17710.docx �
1) A base terminal block.
2) A plug protection module:
a) Replacing a plug does not require the removal of any wires nor
interrupt the signal.
b) Base and plug coded to accept only the correct voltage plug.
d. SPD Manufacturer: One of the following:
1) Phoenix Contact Plugtrab Series.
2) Bournes Series 1800.
4. Data and Signal Line Protectors— Field Mounted:
a. Surge protection minimum requirements: Withstand a minimum 10 kA test
current of a 8/20 ps waveform in accordance with ANSI/IEEE C62.41.1-
2002 Category C Area.
b. Manufacturer: One of the following:
1) Phoenix Contact Pipetrab.
2) Joslyn JMD Series.
G. Power supplies:
1. Design power supply systems so that either the primary or backup supply can
be removed, repaired, and returned to service without disrupting the system
operation.
2. Convert 120 VAC to 24 volt DC or other DC voltages required or as required
for the application.
3. Provide backup 24 VDC power supply units to automatically supply the load
upon failure of the primary supply.
4. Provide power supply arrangement that is configures with several modules to
supply adequate power in the event of a single module failure:
a. Provide Automatic switchover upon module failure.
b. Alarm contacts monitored by the PLC.
5. Sized to provide 40 percent excess rated capacity.
6. UL508C listed to allow full rated output without de-rating.
7. Provide fuse or short-circuit protection.
8. Provide a minimum of 1 set of dry contacts configured to change state on
failure for monitoring and signaling purposes.
9. Output regulation: ±0.05 percent for a 10 percent line change or a 50 percent
load change:
a. With remote voltage sensing.
10. Operating temperature range: 0 degrees Celsius to 50 degrees Celsius.
11. Touch safe design: All connection terminals to be protected against accidental
touch.
12. DIN rail mounting on 35 mm rail.
13. Provide self-protecting power supplies with a means of limiting DC current in
case of short circuit.
14. Manufacturer: One of the following:
a. Phoenix Contact Quint series.
b. IDEC PSSR series.
c. Sola.
d. Acopian.
H. Intrinsic Safety Barriers:
1. Transformer isolated barrier:
a. Containing a transformer to provide complete:
September 1 - -
p 0, 2010 FINAL 17710 15 82351310
pw://Carollo/Doc umerits/Client/WA/Renton/8235 B 10/Specifications/10.17710.docx
1) Isolation between the safe and hazardous areas for loop powered
devices.
2) 3-way isolation between the safe area, hazardous area and power
supply powered devices.
b. Resistor for current limitation.
c. Fuses for short circuit protection.
d. Provide barriers with pluggable connectors that are coded for easy
replacement. I
e. Transmission error shall be less than or equal to 0.1 percent of full scale.
f. DIN rail mounted on 35 mm DIN rail.
g. Approvals:
1) FM.
2) UL 913 & 1604.
2. Types:
a. Switch Isolators:
1) Designed and approved for use with discrete inputs.
2) Supply Power: 20-30 VDC.
3) Output to track input.
4) LED in the cover to indicate the status of the input. �(
5) Selector switch to change the logic of the input.
6) Input- dry contact.
7) Output- SPDT relay.
b. Transmitter and Converters for use with 4-20 mA signals without Hart(D
communications capability: `
1) Designed and approved for use with 4-20 mA analog signals.
2) Designed for powering 2 and/or 3 wire transmitters in hazardous
locations and repeating and/or generating the current to the safe
area.
3) Supply voltage: 20-30 VDC.
c. Transmitter and converters for use with 4-20 mA signals with Hart®
communications capability:
1) Designed and approved for use with 4-20 mA analog signals.
2) Designed for powering 2 and/or 3 wire transmitters in hazardous
locations and repeating and/or generating the current to the safe
area.
3) Transfer digital signals from the hazardous area to the safe area.
4 Complete bi-directional communication between a smart transmitter
p
located in the field and the suitable equipment located in the saf
area.
5) Supply voltage: 20-30 VDC.
3. Manufacturer: One of the following:
a. Phoenix Contact ME Series.
b. Pepper) + Fuchs.
I. Starters:
1. Magnetic Motor Starters:
a. In conformance with the requirements of Sub-Section 10.16422.
J. Limit Switches:
1. N E MA-4X.
2. AC contact rating 120 V, 10 A.
3. DC contact rating 125 V, 0.4 A.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 17710-16 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235 B10/Specifications/10.17710.docx
4. Provide robust actuation mechanism not prone to degradation.
5. Provide complete actuator mechanism with all required hardware.
6. Allows for contact opening even during contact weld condition.
7. UL approved.
8. Operating Temperature Range: -18 degrees to +110 degrees Celsius
(0 degrees to 230 degrees Fahrenheit).
9. Manufacturer:
a. Allen Bradley 802.
b. Honeywell HDLS.
c. Omron D4.
d. Eaton E47, E49, E50.
e. ABB equal.
2.07 ACCESSORIES
�r A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
B. Provide panels with an inside protective pocket to hold the panel Drawings. Ship
panels with,1 copy of accepted Shop Drawings including, but not limited to,
schematic diagram, connection diagram, and layout drawing of control wiring and
components in a sealed plastic bag stored in the panel drawing pocket.
C. Provide 15 inch floor stands or legs where needed or as indicated on the Drawings.
D. Provide a folding shelf for enclosures that contain programmable controllers. The
shelf shall be mounted on the inside surface of the door, capable of supporting a
laptop computer.
E. Provide nameplate to each panel as indicated on the Drawings:
1. Provide in accordance with Sub-Section 10.16075 on all internal and external
instruments and devices.
2. Provide a nameplate with the following markings that is plainly visible after
installation:
a. Manufacturer's name, trademark, or other descriptive marking by which
the organization responsible for the panel can be identified.
b. Supply voltage, phase, frequency, and full-load current.
c. Short-circuit current rating of the panel based on one of the following:
1) Short-circuit current rating of a listed and labeled assembly.
2) Short-circuit current rating established utilizing an approved method.
3. Provide enclosures with a flange mounted disconnect that is interlocked with
the doors.
F. Provide a window kit where indicated on the Drawings. The window shall meet the
following requirements:
1. Safety plate glass.
2. Secured by rubber locking seal.
3. Allow full viewing of devices issuing visual process data or diagnostics.
G. Lighting:
1. Provide 1 luminaire for each section, on the interior of the panel, spaced
evenly along the top-front of the enclosure door opening(s):
a. Covered or guarded.
b. Provide On-Off door-activated switches where indicated on the Drawings.
September 10 2
p 010 - FINAL 17710-17 8235610
pw:gCarollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.1771 O.docx
c. Provide 18-watt fluorescent lamp for indoor enclosures less than
30 inches wide.
d. Provide 40-watt fluorescent lamp for enclosures larger than 30 inches
wide:
1) Provide additional fixtures for every 36 inches of width.
e. Provide 40 watt incandescent lamp for exterior enclosures:
1) Provide additional fixtures for every 36 inches of width.
H. Receptacles:
1. Provide one duplex receptacle located every 4 feet of enclosure width, spaced
evenly along the back mounting panels.
2. GFCI, 125-volt, single-phase, 15-ampere.
I. Grounding:
1. Provide the following:
a. Grounding strap between enclosure doors and the enclosure. I
b. Equipment grounding conductor terminals.
c. Provide equipment ground bus with lugs for connection of all equipment Q�
grounding wires. ®�
d. Bond multi-section panels together with an equipment grounding
conductor or an equivalent grounding bus.
2. Identify equipment grounding conductor terminals with the word "GROUND,"
the letters "GND" or the letter"G," or the color green.
3. Signal (24 VDC) Grounding: Terminate each drain wire of a signal (shielded)
cable to a unique grounding terminal block, or common ground bus at the end
of the cable as shown on the Loop Drawings.
4. Ensure the continuity of the equipment grounding system by effective
connections through conductors or structural members.
5. Design so that removing a device does not interrupt the continuity of the . r
equipment grounding circuit.
6. Provide an equipment-grounding terminal for each incoming power circuit, r
near the phase conductor terminal. �G
7. Size ground wires in accordance with NEC and UL Standards, unless noted
otherwise.
8. Connect all exposed, noncurrent-carrying conductive parts, devices, and
equipment to the equipment grounding circuit.
9. Connect the door stud on the enclosures to an equipment-grounding terminal �p
within the enclosure using an equipment-bonding jumper.
10. Bond together all PLC or RTU racks (remote or local) processor racks, and
conductive enclosures of power supplies and connect to the equipment
grounding circuit.
2.08 MA XES (NOT USED)
2.09 (NOT USED)
2.10 FINISHES `
�I
A. Finishes:
1. Metallic (Non-Stainless):
�1
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 17710-18 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.17710.docx
a. Metal surfaces of panels shall be prepared by chemical cleaning and
mechanical abrasion in accordance with the finish manufacturer's
recommendations to achieve a smooth, well-finished surface.
b. Scratches or blemishes shall be filled before finishing. One coat of zinc
phosphate shall be applied per the manufacturer's recommended dry film
thickness, and allowed to dry before applying the finish coat.
c. Finish coat shall be a baked polyester urethane powder, aliphatic air-dry
polyurethane, or epoxy enamel to meet NEMA rating specified application.
d. Exterior of enclosures located outdoors shall be UV resistant polyester
powder coating. Total dry film thickness shall be 3 mils, minimum.
2. Stainless Steel:
a. Stainless enclosures shall be provided with a Number 4 brushed finish -
not painted.
B. Colors:
1. Exterior color.of panels mounted indoors shall be manufacturer's standard light
gray.
2. Exterior of panels mounted outdoors shall be manufacturer's standard white.
3. Panel interiors shall be manufacturer's standard white.
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
PART 3 EXECUTION
t
3.01 EXAMINATI (NOT USED)
3.02 PREPARAT (NOT USED)
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install enclosures so that their surfaces are plumb and level within ±1/8 inch over
t the entire surface of the panel; anchor securely to wall and structural supports at
each corner, minimum. Direct attachment to dry wall is not permitted.
B. Install the enclosure per guidelines and submitted installation instructions to meet
the seismic requirements at the project site.
C. Provide floor stand kits for wall-mount enclosures larger than 48 inches high.
D. Provide 3-1/2 inch high concrete housekeeping pads for free-standing enclosures.
E. Install gasket and sealing material under panels with floor slab cutouts for conduit:
1. Undercoat floor mounted panels.
F. Provide a full size equipment-grounding conductor in accordance with NEC included
with the power feeder. Terminate to the incoming power circuit-grounding terminal.
G. All holes for field conduits, etc. shall be cut in the field, there shall be no additional
holes, factory cut holes, or hole closers allowed. Incorrect holes, additional holes, or
miss-cut holes shall require that the entire enclosure be replaced.
September 10, 2010 - FINAL 17710-19 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235Bl0/Specifications/10.17710.docx
�d
H. Control panels that are adjacent to motor control centers shall be fully wired to the
motor control centers using wireways integral to the motor control center or
additional conduits as needed. These interconnections are not shown or reflected
on the conduit schedule, but shall be shown on the Loop Drawings prepared by the
CONTRACTOR.
3.04 ERECTION INS—TAI 1 ATION APPLICATION, CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED)
3.05 REPAIRWRESTORATI0A1 (NOT USED) �I
3.06 RE-INSTALLATION ATION (NOT USED)
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050. �I
3.08 ADjUSTING(NOT USED) `
3.09 CLEANING
A. Refer to Sub-Section 10.17050.
3.10 (NOT USED) �1
END OF SUB-SECTION �t
Of
-September 10, 2010 - FINAL 17710-20 82351310
pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/WA/Renton/8235B10/Specifiicationstl0.17710.docx
i �
I �
� STANDARD PLANS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
II
1
1
1
1
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
1
1
1
1
i
1
1
1 .
1
' CITY OF RENTON
LAKE WASHINGTON BEACH LIFT STATION REPLACEMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
' STANDARD PLANS
The Standard Plans for this project comprise City of Renton and Carollo Standard Plans.The Standard
Plans included are listed below:
City of Renton Standard Plans
8106—%"AND 1"WATER SERVICE
216.20—FILTER FABRIC PROTECTION
216.30—CATCH BASIN FILTER
405—PIPE BEDDING FOR SANITARY SEWERS
Carollo Standard Plans
A251—FRP LADDER FASTENED TO WALL
A257—RETRACTABLE FRP LADDER DETAIL TO WALL
A401—FRP GRATING REBATE AND SEAT
C100—YARD CURBING
M280—HOSE RACK
' M310—REDUCED PRESSURE DOUBLE BACKFLOW PREVENTER
P022—VALVE BOX INSTALLATION
' P302—SLEEVE INSTALLATION THROUGH EXISTING WALLS AND FLOOR SLABS
P304—SLEEVE INSTALLATION THROUGH NEW WALLS AND FLOOR SLABS
P626—PIPE SUPPORT
P656—PIPE SUPPORT
P660—FLUSH MOUNT PIPE SUPPORT
1
pw:\\Documents\Client\WA\Renton\8235B10\Specifications\Standard Plans TOC.docx
P662-PIPE SUPPORT FOR ONE VERTICAL RISER
P668-VERTICAL PIPE SWAY BRACE
5300-EQUIPMENT SLAB
EGO02-GROUND ROD COMPRESSION CONNECTION
EG201-EQUIPMENT SKID GROUNDING COMPRESSION CONNECTION
EM015-DIRECT BURIED CONDUIT OR CABLE
EM108-CONDUIT SEAL DAMMING AND POURING DETAIL
EM203-ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT STRUCTURE
EM801-INTRUSION SWITCH MOUNTING DETAIL
NL103-LEVEL DETECTOR MOUNTING DETAIL
NM108-EXTERIOR CONTROL PANEL BIRD/SUN SHIELD
NP806-PRESSURE GAUGE DETAIL
�i
1!
li
�i
. oi
pw:IlDocumentslClientlWAlRenton1 6235B101SpecificationslStandard Plans TOC.docx
8i �
13"x24" PLASTIC METER BOX EQUAL TO MID-STATES PLASTIC,
INC. BCF SERIES MSBCF 1324-18 WITH 1.75" THICK DUCTILE aTY PRIVATE
IRON DIAMOND PLATE COVER EQUAL TO MID-STATES PLASTICS,
INC. MSCBC-1324-R WITH READER LID AND 1-518" DRILLED PIPING PIPING
1 HOLE FOR TOUCHREAD PIT LID (SEE DETAIL A-A)
J I IN UNIMPROVED RIGHT OF J
WAY INSTALL METER BOX AT
PROPERTY LINE WITH 12"
1 w' LONG COPPER TAILPIECE. w
9" MIN o I SIDEWALK
FINISH GRADE 12" MAX .,., lz
- Z a TOUCHREAD WATER
> METER TO BE
36" MIN COVER N°ov SUPPLIED BY THE 12 x¢w
CITY 0
TYPE "K" SOFT o 0
22-1/2' COPPER TUBING N
NEW DUCTILE
IRON
WATERMAIN
IF SERVICE LINE TO HOUSE IS 3/4" OR 1"
TO BE INSTALLED IN THE FUTURE GALVANIZED
INSTALL FORD C14-33' OR 44 FIDT PLUG
x COMPRESSION COUPLING
LOOP DOWN TO CENTERLINE
OF WATER MAIN TO PROVIDE
SLACK IN COPPER SERVICE COPPERSETTER FOR 5/8"x3/4" METER• FORD
LINE TO METER. VBH72-15W-44-33G, OR McDONALD BRASS: 21-215WCQQ33, OR
MUELLER: 3/4-B-2470-2 WITH ANGLE BALL VALVE ON INLET AND
SINGLE CHECK VALVE ON OUTLET
CORPORATION STOP. FORD TAPERED THREAD COPPER SETTER FOR 1" METER: FORD VBH72-15W-44-44G, OR
(CC). QUICK JOINT McDONALD BRASS: 21-415WCQQ44, OR MUELLER: 1-B-2470-2
' (3/4" F1000-3-G) OR AY MCDONALD 4701Q BOTH INLET AND OUTLET WITH PACK JOINT WITH GRIPPER.
(1" F1000-4-G) OR AY MCDONALD 4701Q PADLOCK WINGS ON INLET ANGLE BALL VALVE AND SINGLE CHECK
VALVE ON OUTLET. ALL PACK-JOINT FITTINGS SHALL BE WITH
QUICK JOINT.
NOTE:
ALL METER BOXES INSTALLED WITHIN CONCRETE OR PAVED DRIVEWAYS SHALL BE
CAST-IRON EQUAL TO OLYMPIC FOUNDARY. EXPANSION JOINTS MUSH BE INSTALLED ON
BOTH SIDES OF METER BOX.
A - A DRILL 1-5/8" DIA. HOLE FOR AMR
(AUTOMATIC METER READ) TOUCHREAD DEVICE
L 2-1/2" MIN. FROM NEAREST
F — AND FRONT EDGE OF PIT LID
I
� I
TYPICAL RIB -�
J
NOTE:
THE CENTER OF THE HOLE MUST BE AT LEAST 1" FROM
UNDERNEATH RIBS UNLESS THE RIB SPACING ALLOWS THE
NUT TO TIGHTEN AGAINST THE OPEN SIDE OF MORE THAN
ONE RIB. 3/4" & 1" WATER SERVICE
�tiC1 p� ADOPTED
CITY OF RENTON
STANDARD PLANS
LST DATE:04/04
DATE REVISION BY APPR'D DWG. NAME: 8106 SP PAGE: 8106
i
STANDARD STRENGTH GRATE
FILTER FABRIC
TI I (
CATCH BASIN
NOTES
1. CONDITION OF USE
1.1. SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR ALL STORM DRAIN INLETS DOWNSLOPE AND WITHIN 500 FEET OF A DISTURBED OR CONSTRUCTION AREA,UNLESS
THE RUNOFF THAT ENTERS THE CATCHBASIN WILL BE CONVEYED TO A SEDIMENT POND OR TRAP. �!
1.2. MAY BE USED ANYWHERE AT THE APPLICANTS DISCRETION TO PROTECT DRAINAGE SYSTEM.
1.3. THE CONTRIBUTING DRAINAGE AREA MOST NOT BE LARGER THAN 1 ACRE.
2. DESIGN AND INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS
2.1, FILTER FABRIC IS ONLY ALLOWED WERE PONDING WILL NOT BE A TRAFFIC CONCERN AND WHERE SLOPE EROSION WILL NOT RESULT IF THE '!
CURB IS OVERTOPPED BY PONDED WATER_
2,2. THE PLACEMENT OF A FILTER FABRIC UNDER GRATES IS GENERALLY PROHIBITED AND THE USE OF FILTER FABRIC OVER GRATES IS STRICTLY
LIMITED AND DISCOURAGED.
3. MAINTENANCE STANDARDS �!
3.1. ANY ACCUMULATED SEDIMENT ON OR AROUND INLET PROTECTION SHALL BE REMOVED IMMEDIATELY.SEDIMENT SHALL NOT BE REMOVED
WITH WATER AND ALL SEDIMENT MUST BE DISPOSED OF AS FILL ON SITE OR HAULED OFF SITE.
i!
i!
0 �
(}
=`
,� PUBLIC WORKS FILTER FABRIC PROTECTION
STD. PLAN - 218.2
K * DEPARTMENT
N MARCH 2008
rA DRAINAGE GRATE M
m GRATE FRAME
v 0 4
i SEDIMENT AND DEBRIS
4 OVERFLOW BYPASS
v
i o
BELOW INLET GRATE DEVICE
FILTERED)
i WATER
°
° D
SECTION VIEW
DRAINAGE GRATE
-RECTANGULAR GRATE SHOWN RETRIEVAL SYSTEM(TYP.)
i
iBELOW INLET GRATE DEVICE OVERFLOW BYPASS(TYP.)
ISOMETRIC VIEW
NOTES
1. Size the Below Inlet Grate Device(BIGD)for the storm water structure It will service.
2. The BIGD shall have a built-in high-flow relief system(overflow bypass).
3. The retrieval system must allow removal of the BIGD without spllling the collected material.
4. Perform maintenance in accordance with Standard Specification 8-01.3(15).
Y
STD. PLAN - 216.30
PUBLIC WORKS CATCH BASIN FILTER
DEPARTMENT
�N f� MARCH 2008
I
W (SEE NOTE 4) LIMITS OF .PIPE ZONE.
V-0"
BEDDING MATERIAL FOR
SANITARY SEWER PIPE O.D. OF PIPE
(SEE NOTE 6)
FOUNDATION LEVEL
6"
BEDDING FOR SANITARY SEWER PIPE �!
NOTES:
1. PROVIDE UNIFORM SUPPORT UNDER BARREL.
2. HAND TAMP UNDER HAUNCHES.
3. COMPACT BEDDING MATERIAL TO 95% MAX. DENSITY EXCEPT DIRECTLY
OVER PIPE. HAND TAMP ONLY.
4. SEE "EXCAVATION AND PREPARATION OF TRENCH" IN THE SANITARY
SEWER SECTION OF THE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRENCH f
WIDTH "W" AND TRENCHING OPTIONS. THE PIPE ZONE WILL BE THE
ACTUAL TRENCH WIDTH.
5. TRENCH BACKFILL SHALL CONFORM TO "BACKFILLING" IN THE SANITARY
SEWER SECTION OF THE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS, EXCEPT THAT
ROCKS OR LUMPS LARGER THAN 1" PER FOOT OF PIPE DIAMETER
SHALL NOT BE USED IN THE BACKFILL MATERIAL.
6. PIPE ZONE MATERIAL SHALL BE "GRAVEL BACKFILL FOR DRAINS" AS
SPECIFIED IN THE AGGREGATES SECTION OF THE STANDARD
SPECIFICATIONS.
7. PIPE MUST BE ANCHORED IN SUCH A MANNER AS TO ENSURE FLOW
LINE IS MAINTAINED.
U!
* Y STD. PLAN - 405 (�
m® � PUBLIC WORKS PIPE BEDDING
DEPARTMENT FOR SANITARY SEWERS
INTO MARCH 2008
GUARDRAIL AND GATE
PER DRAWINGS
2'-0" I TOP RUNG AT I I
LANDING LEVEL
4" 5" TOP AND INTERMEDIATE
BRACKETS BOLTED TO
LADDER AND FASTENED TO
x — WALL WITH 5/8"0 SST BOLTS Lai
i IN SST FLUSH SHELLS.
v w ANCHOR INTO GROUTED a °
O X CELL AT MASONRY
N cn CONSTRUCTION.
18" (TYP) 2" x 0.25"
® as 'MIN SQ
1 U 10 1/2" BOTTOM BRACKET TUBE
° BOLTED TO LADDER AND
FASTENED TO WALL W/ 5/8"0
`� SST BOLTS IN SST FLUSH
jJ zz SHELLS. ANCHOR INTO
a
o o GROUTED CELL AT MASONRY
o C CONSTRUCTION. (TYP)
uj
(n 1"0 SOLID ROD
z
RUNG (TYP)
3" L BOLTED TO n
TUBE (TYP)
°
°
A FASTEN TO FLOOR W/
—
ELEVATIO 5/8"0 SST CONC ANCHOR
A SECTION
N -
NOTES:
1. MINIMUM CLEARANCE TO ANY OBSTRUCTION ADJACENT TO LADDER:
2'=6" AT CLIMBING SIDE (2'-3" AT SMOOTH WALL) AND
1 '-3" EACH SIDE OF CENTER LINE, AT SIDES OF LADDER.
A251 FRP LADDER FASTENED TO WALL
TYP
LADDER A f A2511 SIM
: I HOOK PER — TYP NO
DETAIL GUARDRAIL,
' I I GATE, AND
FLOOR
h II ANCHORAGE
Ii
II
� I
o I
o I
RETRACTABLE
FRP LADDER 3'-6"
oo
li
oo EL 18.0
6'-0" rn
00
FRP GRATING `
oo B
00
C—CHANNEL
o GUIDE RETRACTABLE
FRP LADDER 2"
o X Y4„ SQ. .FRP of
1'-0"(TYP.) TUBING SIDE
o RAILS WITH 1 "
0 FRP SOLID
ROD RUNG
0
4
~ o li
SECTION ELEVATION p�
NOTES: p`
1 . ALL MATERIALS SHALL BE STAINLESS STEEL, Qi
UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED.
A257 I RETRACTABLE FRP LADDER DETAIL
TYP TO WALL SHEET 1 OF 2 09-09-10 Q�
fli
WET WELL WALL
3/8" EYE BOLT,
EMBED MIN. 4" W/
EPDXY RETRACTABLE FRP
SHACKLE LADDER RUNG
1_.5, — 3/s" SST
CHAIN
STAINLESS WELD LAST CHAIN
STEEL PLATE LINK TO BRACKET
� 4
A LADDER HOOK
1
WET WELL WALL
r
'V
FIXED FR _..;
LADDER 8'
❑ ❑
❑
!�� El/2"
RETRACTABLE
FRP LADDER
C—CHANNEL GUIDE
ATTACH FIXED FRP LADDER
SO THAT THE RETRACTABLE
LADDER HAS Y4" BETWEEN
LADDER RAIL AND C—CHANNEL
B SECTION
A257 RETRACTABLE FRP LADDER DETAIL
i TYP TO WALL SHEET 2 of 2 09-09-10
1 1/2"
MIN EMBEDDED FRP REBATE
WOOD BLOCKING
AS REQUIRED
MZ
II
* II a
aa
o �
i�
a i
a Q °
i a
4 4
4 `
a �1
a
d °
d d
4
4 d
t
FRP ANCHORS
GRATING REBATE
NOTES:
1 . FOR FRP GRATING, SEE SPECIFICATIONS. �!
2. REBATE ANGLE SHALL BE CONTINUOUS AROUND ENTIRE OPENING.
3. REBATE ANGLE SHALL BE 1/4" MINIMUM THICKNESS.
4. REBATE MAY BE EXTRUDED.
5. * DIMENSION AS REQUIRED BY GRATING MANUFACTURER.
A401 FRP GRATING REBATE AND SEAT
TYP SHEET 1 OF 2 07-31-08
s
�r
1/8" MAX
FRP GRATING
d
� d
v
v .
pr _ v
a
v 1 _
1 3/4" ,
SST L 3 x 2 x 1/4
OR AS INDICATED 5/8"0 SST CA ® 2'-0"
ON THE DRAWINGS
GRATING SEAT
!
A401 FRP GRATING REBATE AND SEAT
TYP SHEET 2 OF 2 07-31-08
s
Ww
1/2" DEEP WEAKENED
PLANE JOINT W/1/2"
3/4" RADIUS (TYP RADIUS EDGES ON BOTH
BOTH SIDES) SIDES OF JOINT
6.,
MATCH EXISTING
PAVING
p
v
° Z
SEE DRAWINGS
FOR ROAD
SECTION
a .
3"
8 1/2"
A SECTION
NOTES:
1. CURB SHALL BE FINISHED ON TOP, 8" DOWN FRONT FACE, AND 2" DOWN
BACK.
2. EXPANSION JOINTS SHALL BE PLACED AT END OF CONCRETE PLACEMENT,
AT POINTS OF CURVATURE, BOTH SIDES OF DRIVEWAYS AND WALKWAYS,
CURB RETURNS, STRUCTURES,AND AT MAXIMUM DISTANCE OF 30 FEET.
EXPANSION JOINTS SHALL BE 3/4"THICK W/ 1/4" RADIUS EDGES AT
BOTH SIDES OF JOINT. USE BITUMINOUS EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL.
3. REINFORCING STEEL SHALL NOT PASS THROUGH EXPANSION JOINTS.
4. WEAKENED PLANE JOINTS SHALL BE INSTALLED AT 15 FEET OC.
a�
C100 YARD CURBING
TYP 08-01-05
I��
3 - 1/2"0 SST
AL OR SST U-BOLTS
GUARDRAIL A
3 1/4" (TYP) 811
-Q------------ -o-
I I
I I
RACK 1/8 3-8
1/8 . 3-8
F3 -6"
I
TOP OF CONIC
I I
I Ir1I,I
vIIIIJ I II
j GUARDRAIL MOUNTED A SECTION
NOTES:
1. HOSE RACK SHALL BE FABRICATED FROM 3/16" ALUMINUM PLATE.
ROUND ALL EDGES SMOOTH.
2. HOSE RACKS INSTALLED IN YARD LOCATIONS SHALL BE FREESTANDING
A 4'-6" LONG x 2'-0" WIDE x 8" DEEP CONCRETE PAD W/#5012"
EW CENTERED.
3. WALL MOUNTED HOSE RACKS ON MASONRY WALL SHALL BE FASTEN TO
GROUTED CELLS.
M2801 HOSE RACK
1
�yp s SHEET 1 OF 2 09-30-07
1/2 0 SST CONCRETE OR
CA (TYP) MASONRY ALL CA (T T
1„ (TYP)
°
° AL CS6x
0
4.03
io
10„
RACK B SECTION
WALL MOUNTED
1/2"0 SST BOLT, 2" (TYP)
CN NUT, AND WASHER
(TYP) `
B
lipii
o
RACK
3'-6"
AL CS6x
4.03 (TYP)
TYP 1" NON—SHRINK i i 1/2"0 SST
1/4 GROUNT (TYP) i i CA (TYP)
d , SLAB
THICKNESS
FREESTANDING
T T�? HOSE RACK
SHEET 2 OF 2 09-30-07
S
i
REDUCED PRESSURE
BACKFLOW PREVENTER
6" HOT BOX
(TYP ALL SIDES) ENCLOSURE
2'-6"MAX. 2"
, 12" MIN.
Ng
12"
#5 @12"
EW T&B
6" CSBC COMPACTED TO
95% MDD PER ASTM D1577
P304 (TYP)
TYP
M310 REDUCED PRESSURE DOUBLE
i TYP BACKFLOW PREVENTER 08-01-05
li
6r" MIN` "X" +X +4" MIN
(I I
P) nXa
U
it
PLAN
FINISH GRADE IN SERVICE STAMPED ASPHALTIC CONCRETE
UNPAVED AREAS ON LID PAVEMENT
5 1/4" DIA. SLIP TYPE Cl ' CLASS "A" CONCRETE.6"THICK x 3'-4"DIA.
VALVE BOX. SUPPORT BOX
ON BRICKS. BOX SHALL NOT 1/4"THK STL TRASH RING. RING
REST ON VALVE BODY. %, DIA=VALVE BOX ID MINUS 1/8".
BRICKS ALL AROUND VALVE STEM EXTENSION
\;�\�\�
VALVE ENDS FOR TYPE
OF PIPE INSTALLED
Z '\\: CSBC
CLASS C CONC
VALVE SUPPORT
SECTION UNDISTURBED SOIL
NOTES:
1. ALL BURIED VALVES SHALL BE PROVIDED W/EXTENSION STEM
OPERATOR W/2" SQ AWWA NUT WITHIN 36"OF VALVE BOX COVER.
NUT IS TO INDICATE DIRECTION OF ROTATION TO OPEN VALVE.
2. COAT BURIED PIPE AND VALVE BOX PER SPECIFICATIONS.
3. CLEAN VALVE BOX OF ALL DEBRIS AND SOIL.
4. VALVE TYPE AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS.
P022 VALVE BOX INSTALLATION
TYP 08-01-05
'I
CONCRETE WALL
OR SLAB
1 2"
CAULK ALL AROUND /
W/ SYNTHETIC RUBBER °
SEALING COMPOUND
a
a
PACK WITH MORTAR
LINK SEAL
NOTES:
1. IMMEDIATELY COAT ENDS OF ANY CUT REINFORCEMENT WITH SIKA
ARMATEC 110 EPOCHEM.
P302 SLEEVE INSTALLATION THROUGH EXISTING
TYP NS WALLS AND FLOOR SLABS 08-01 -05
S180 ADDITIONAL
° TYP REINFORCING
a. FOR NEW
° CONSTRUCTION
°
LINK SEAL
a . a
II ��
Q PIPE SLEEVE
a a
3/16
1/4" x 2" ANNULAR
3/16 a RING
NOTES:
1. 6"0 SLEEVES AND SMALLER SHALL BE SCH 40 STL PIPE.
2. SLEEVES LARGER THAN 6"0 SHALL BE 1/4" THICK STL PIPE. [�
3. IN WALLS THICKER THAN 12", LINK SEAL SHALL BE INSTALLED
AT BOTH ENDS OF WALL SLEEVE. SLEEVE DIAMETER SHALL BE
PER LINK SEAL MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATION.
4. SLEEVE SHALL BE HOT—DIP GALVANIZED AFTER FABRICATION.
O�
�1
P304 SLEEVE INSTALLATION THROUGH NEW
TYP NS WALLS AND FLOOR SLABS 08-01 -05
�C
1" MIN (TYP)
� L 6 x 6 x 1/2. TRIM AS READ.
BOLT HOLES TO MATCH
RESPECTIVE FLANGE
ROUND ALL SHARP 120' MIN FOR 3" PIPE AND SMALLER.
EDGES (TYP) 90' MIN FOR 4" PIPE AND LARGER.
SUPPORT PIPE
A SECTION
PIPE SIZE
A
"D" "A"
"D" PIPE
PIPE FLANGE 4 2
6 2 1/2
8 4
L6x6x 1/2
77
� r
"A" SCH 40 PIPE
4 - 3/4"0 SST CONC ANCHORS
1/4 PL 3/4" x 10" x 10"
1 1/2"
(TYP) 1 1 1" NON-SHRINK GROUT
I
d v
ELEVATION
NOTE:
1. ALL MATERIAL SHALL BE STAINLESS STEEL.
P626 PIPE SUPPORT
TYP 07-31-08
NS
L 3 x 3 x 1/4 BRACE.
COPE LEG AS REQD.
1 PIPE
3'
° 1 MIN BOLT THRU SUPPORT
- - COPE ANGLE TO CLEAR
PIPE AS REQUIRED
1/4 2 p O 1 3/4"
1/4 2 (TYP)
O O
- BOLTS
A PLAN
VARIES.
3'-0" MAX.
TYP q
BOTH °
LEGS .�
73/4"'0 3/16 2 3/16 2 3/16 2 �3/16 2 ° I L 3 x 3 x 1/4 (TYP)
SST CONC ANCHORS
v _
2 ELEVATION
NOTE:
1. ALL MATERIAL SHALL BE STAINLESS STEEL.
P656 PIPE SUPPORT
TYP N 07-31 -08
USE 3/4"0 SST CONCRETE .ANCHORS IF MOUNTED
° ON WALLS. USE 3/4"0 SST CONCRETE INSERTS OR
° ANCHOR BOLTS ONLY, IF MOUNTED ON CEILINGS.
I
° I I 3/4"0 BOLT
v I
X v
I � � PIPE STRAP (TYP)
W
a
D - °1 1
Of _I
cn d I I
< I I
° J I PREFORMED CHANNEL PIPE SUPPORT
d
d "Z" FITTING
v -
CONCRETE OR GROUTED MASONRY WALL OR CEILING
NOTES:
1. SPACE FLUSH MOUNT PIPE SUPPORTS AT 5'-0" MAXIMUM.
2. ALL MATERIAL SHALL BE STAINLESS STEEL.
P660 I FLUSH MOUNT PIPE SUPPORT
TYP 07-31-08
N
I
a
1 -
T-----------------T �
1------ ------�- I.
1/2"0 SST CONCRETE _ BOLTS
ANCHOR
I
A SECTION PLAN
I
�t
I
I PIPE STRAP
I
I
I
_ I I
I
�1
PREFORMED CHANNEL PIPE SIZE AND MATERIAL
PIPE SUPPORT AS INDICATED ON THE
ELEVATION DRAWINGS
NOTE:
1 . ALL MATERIAL SHALL BE STAINLESS STEEL..
P662 PIPE SUPPORT FOR ONE
TYP VERTICAL RISER 07-31-08 ��
SST PL 1/4" x "D"+ 2" SQ FOR 8" AND
SMALLER PIPE AND 1/2" x "D" + 2" SQ
a FOR 10" AND LARGER PIPE
°
a
PIPE
° „D„/3 FB 1/4 x "D"/2
a _ ° MIN MIN PIPE CLAMP
4
d
°
5/8"0 BOLTS
1/4
ATTACH TO WALL WITH 4-1/2"0 SST CONC ANCHORS
rA"'N PLAN FOR 'Y' GREATER THAN 12"
a
NUT AND WASHER
FB 1/4 x "D"/2
°
a MIN PIPE CLAMP
SST SLEEVE a
ANCHORS
a
ALL—THREAD ROD TO MATCH CLAMP
B PLAN - FOR "X" LESS THAN 12”
NOTE:
1. ALL MATERIAL SHALL BE STAINLESS STEEL.
P6681 VERTICAL PIPE SWAY BRACE
TYP 07-31-08.
N
FINISH -THICKNESS AS INDICATED ON
GRADE #5 @12" EWT&B 12" THE DWGS WITH 8"MIN
LAP SPLICE (NP)
co
11/2
IT
MIN 6"CSBC #5 @12"(TYP) (TYP) (TYP)
#5(TYP)
NOTE: �[
1. DIM AS REQD TO SUIT EQUIPMENT OR AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS.
S300 EQUIPMENT SLAB
TyP 07-31-08
FINISHED
GRADE
3'-0" BELOW FINISHED GRADE (MIN)
GROUND ROD (LENGTH AND
DIAMETER AS SPECIFIED)
GROUND GRID CONDUCTOR
(SIZE AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS
OR SPECIFICATIONS)
KEY NOTES:
OGROUND ROD TO GROUND GRID CROSS CONNECTOR. SIZE FOR ROD AND
CABLE PER MANUFACTURERS GUIDELINES.
EGO021 GROUND ROD
TYP COMPRESSION CONNECTION
Z�s
NOTE: LEA
C N ALL PAINTED
SURFACES TO BARE METAL BEFORE
BOLTING ON THE GROUND LUG
® METALLIC EQUIPMENT
SKID, POST, STEEL BLDG.
FILL WITH COLUMN, ETC.
DUXSEAL
1-1/2" MINERALLAC
CLAMP TO SKID
NOTE: BOLT GROUND LUG
1-1/2" PVC ONLY TO EQUIPMENT SKIDS OR
SCHEDULE 80 STRUCTURE, NOT TO
j SLEEVE EQUIPMENT OR TANK SHELLS
I �
FLOOR SLAB OR
GRADE JI
18"
GROUND GRID CONDUCTOR
(SIZE AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS OR
SPECIFICATIONS)
KEY NOTES:
1 HEAVY DUTY COMPRESSION TERMINAL
O
T EG201 EQUIPMENT SKID GROUNDING
P COMPRESSION CONNECTION �C
s
Al ''
FINISHED GRADE
r
12" BACKFILL
DETECTABLE MARKING TAPE
2'-6"
SAND BACKFILL
DIRECT BURIED
CONDUIT
4••
3"
�, 4,�.2�.-`° r ::'`'^`. tip.•• ',,•-'." ; ,,::'`�,���,.��
3" (TYP)
I
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE MINIMUM UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED ON THE
DRAWINGS.
2. BACKFILL IN ACCORDANCE WITH WSDOT SPECIFICATIONS.
E DIRECT BURIED CONDUIT OR CABLE
s
HORIZONTAL CONDUIT
SEALING COMPOUND
` f '
FIBER FILLER
VERTICAL CONDUIT
SEALING COMPOUND
FIBER FILLER
�f
i
E CONDUIT SEAL
TYP DAMMING AND POURING DETAIL
s
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I
I I
I- - - - - - - - - - -
2
EG201
TYP
3 4
5'-0"
KEY NOTES:
6"
O FABRICATE SUPPORT STRUCTURE OF SUFFICIENT SIZE TO SAFELY AND
ADEQUATELY ACCOMODATE ALL INDICATED ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. UTILIZE 3"
DIA. GALVANIZED TUBING WELDED FRAME. WELD END CAPS ON TUBING AS
NEEDED, BEVEL EDGES AND REMOVE ALL SHARP EDGES. PRIME AND PAINT WITH
A MINIMUM OF 2 COATS EPDXY PAINT.
2O WELD 1/4"STEEL PLATE TO TUBING SUPPORT STRUCTURE, FRONT AND BACK.
BEVEL EDGES AND REMOVE ALL SHARP EDGES. PAINT AS PER NOTE 1.
OCROSS MEMBER FOR CONDUIT BRACING.
4O 12" DIAMETER DRILLED SHAFT WITH 845 VERTICAL AND#4 TIES @ 6"(TYP.).
EM2301 ELECTRICAL C RICAL EQUIPMENT
�,TYF�� SUPPORT STRUCTURE
ALO 7-23-10
°
III—ice
A.
z
= UWa >
OwH ~ = O
OHO ~ pw. H
� tLU � 0 =
0 Z
O
O p
LL
Q
0
° o w
2
U- 0
w
UL z
o OUO
a H w U
co M:
a _z0
Oz
O ~
z
m m ¢ 2 2
m
YO = wQ LL
� mU OUH
zz u' Qm
m
° = g U —j
C
omo F_ Q
_W W = Z W
°° zs ¢ U)
woo
- � �
W o Z C�
o 1: O Z
.Q
U)Wzw � Z
;
DISCRETE CONDUITS
FS 1-GANG CAST BOX
CABLE STRAIN
RELIEF GRIP -i
FLOOD ALARM SENSOR
LEVEL DETECTOR
FINISHED FLOOR
Q C
NOTES:
1. FIELD VERIFY MOUNTING HEIGHT OF LEVEL
DETECTORS WITH FIELD ENGINEER.
T s LEVEL DETECTOR MOUNTING DETAIL
10 GAUGE STAINLESS STEEL SHIELD
ANCHOR TO CABINET AND SEAL ALL
PENETRATIONS WITH FLEXIBLE SEALANT
10:1 MINIMUM
4"
2"
FRONT OF CONTROL REAR OF CONTROL
PANEL PANEL
SIDE VIEW OF CONTROL CABINET �I
10 GAUGE STAINLESS STEEL SHIELD
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --- - -
4„ CONTROL PANEL 4„
FRONT VIEW OF CONTROL CABINET
INM1081EXTERIOR CONTROL PANEL
�,TYP BIRD/SUN SHIELD
s
9L
1
r
i
GLYCERIN FILLED
1/2" STAINLESS STEEL BALL VALVE PRESSURE GAUGE
(NORMALLY CLOSED) (0 - 15 psig RANGE)
FORCE MAIN
STAINLESS STEEL
DIAPHRAGM SEAL
1/2" TEE
DRIP LEG
SEE NOTE 1 1/2" STAINLESS STEEL BALL
VALVE (NORMALLY OPEN).
3" LONG X 1/2" STAINLESS STEEL
PIPE NIPPLE, TYPICAL.
NOTES_
1. INSTALL GAUGE AS SHOWN ON 1/2" DUCTILE IRON PIPE
SADDLE WITH STAINLESS STEEL STRAP.
2. ALL PIPE AND FITTINGS SHALL BE SCHEDULE 80 STAINLESS
STEEL WITH THREADED ENDS.
3. INSTALL PRESSURE GAUGE AND DIAPHRAGM SEAL PER
MANUFACTURERS' REQUIREMENTS.
i
N P806
PRESSURE GAUGE DETAIL
N�
s
� i
tl,
� I
t
t
t '
a
t